Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 01: “Welcome to the Insanity.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, less than week after Lee's originally escape from Lee's home reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, on the eastern coast of the Gulf of Mexico. Time, one twenty PM.

Inside Chang's office, in the penthouse of the Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang sat in his chair, behind his desk, in his usual suit, and black coat. His hair black hair was cut short, to his neckline. With his hair running down his back. He was looking in front of his, at the open door to the hallway, as he waited for his next appointment.

With his enhanced hearing he could hear two people approaching his room.

A few seconds later, Chang quietly watched as Zoe lead a brown haired, moderately fit, fair skin man, into his office. The man was in his late-twenties, and in good physical shape. He had a slick hair cut style. He wore a cheap, brown suit, with red tie, and brown dress shoes.

As the two of them came to a stop several feet from his desk, Zoe stepped to her right, so Chang could see both of them.

Chang smiled warmly at the two adults, as he said, in english, “I trust everything went well, and our new guest here has been situated?

Zoe responded, in english, “Yes, sir. He had his luggage with him, when he was found. We have already assigned him a room, and his is luggage there.”

Chang replied, “Excellent. I love a person who knows when it is time to leave.”

Zoe agreed, “Yes. It does makes things easier. And Arcee stated that he had no weapons on him, nor in his luggage.”

Chang requested, in a happy tone of voice, “Please, thank her and Annie for checking on that matter.”

Zoe replied, “I will, sir.”

Chang said, in a polite manner, politely said, “Now, please head back to your duties, and let me handle this.”

Zoe stated, “Yes sir.” She then turned around, and walked out of the room. She then headed for the front express elevator, that would take her back down to the first floor, and to security section of the casino.

The brown haired man whom was standing in the room, turned he head and upper body, as he watched Zoe leave. After she was out of sight, the man turned back to look at Chang.

For a few seconds, there was an uneasy silence between the two, as each man look at the other.

Chang was the first to break the silence, as he stated, “Please. Don't just stand there. Come in, and sit down. We have must to talk about.”

The man walked over to between the two chairs in front of Chang's desk. He then sat down in the chair to Chang's left.

After Chang saw the man get comfortable, he plainly asked, “So, what do you think?”

The man joked, in english, “Well, even though your subordinates kidnapped me, at least you have an open door policy.”

Chang let out a laughed. Chang smiled, as he complimented, “At least you have a good, tactful, sense of humor. That will get you far with me.”

The brown haired man stated, “Thank you. I guess this is the place for introductions.
I am Matthew McCormick. Lawyer for Edgars Industries, Mar Dome One.”

Chang said, “Well, I am Bai Ji-Shin Chang. My friends call me, Chang. Everyone else calls me, Mister Chang. Though, you may call me, Chang.”

Matthew responded, “Thank you, Chang. You can call me, Matthew. Now, what is this building that we are in?”

Chang baited, “You are in my office, on the penthouse level of the Daiyu Place Casino. Among my many ventures, I own and run this casino. ”

Chang raised an eyebrow, as he continued, “I am surprised you are not more specific with your questions.”

Matthew calmly replied, “I know better than to ask such questions over such matters.”

Chang commented, with intrigue in his tone of voice, “Good. First, you need to know that you are no longer in your own reality. And the humanity of this Earth has not colonized space, yet. So, saying you are from Mars will lead to most people, outside of this casino, questioning your sanity.”

Matthew said, “Given the night I just had. I am not surprised by any of that. And I will keep quiet about my origins.”

Chang replied, “I am glad you are willing to take my advice.”

Matthew deadpanned, “Let's be honest. It is not like I have much choice in the matter... So, where are we?”

Chang stated, “We are on an island city, on the northern-western part of the Gulf of Mexico, in the nation of Mexico, on Earth. And the local calendar date of when we are is the early twenty-first century.”

Matthew casually said, “Interesting. So, what exactly do you want with me?”

Chang coyly answered, “Because you are someone that I believe can be useful, I want you to work for me.”

Matthew politely requested, “Could you please elaborate for me, on what job position you wish for me to fill?”

Chang responded, “I saw your chase the night before. For you at least. You will find time and space is flexible for us. You were able to handle yourself well in one of the most intense situations, one can find themselves in. And I feel that your talents would be wasted, where and when you were. So, you are going to be my new lawyer.”

Matthew hesitantly asked, “You did see me freak out in the chase?”

Chang pointed out, “Yes. But, only at the tail end of that chase. Most people would have freaked out much sooner, considering whom was chasing them. You did not.”

Matthew said, “I hope to never see that monster woman, and her green haired friend, again.”

Chang commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Yes... Roberta, can be a handful. And Fabiola has her moments, as well.”

Matthew flatly asked, “You know them?”

Chang answered, “Yes. I know them very well. They is not that bad. As long as you are not in their way, and they is not after you. By the way, the purple haired woman is Roberta. And the green haired woman is Fabiola.”

There was a few seconds of silence, as both men were not sure what to say next.

Matthew calmly inquired, “Be that as it may. I hope that this new job comes with a salary?”

Chang's lips curled into a smirk, as he responded, “Oh, it does indeed. I pay my employees with gold. I think I will start you out with four pounds a month. Using the Troy ounce standard.”

It took Matthew few seconds to run the figures in his head, by converting pound to metric, on how much that was. Matthew then figured out how much that was, he replied, with a bit more eagerness in his tone of voice, “Okay... I am listening... But, where would I put all that gold?”

Chang stated, “We have vaults in this casinos... And it is not like you are planning on going anywhere. And included will be a good health and benefits package. Including vacation time. And your suite here being free of charge.”

Matthew responded, “Fine... Though, please be aware that I did not become a lawyer just to represent the wealthy.”

Chang said, “I can appreciate that.”

Matthew pointed out, “Good. Still, I don't know the details of the job you have in mind for me. But, I am guessing my law license is not valid here. So, even if you paid me, I don't see much that I can do for you.”

Chang grinned, as he stated, “There is plenty you can do for me. Draft contracts. And review contracts. Handle certain financial matters. Lawyers, no matter the reality, all are taught to pay attention to the little details and the fine print. And while I can hire a lawyer here to do that, the problem is that most people cannot handle the strangeness that would go with the job. While you showed much grace under pressure.”

Matthew commented, “Thank you. So, what hours will I be keeping?”

Chang answered, “In all honesty. This will likely not be a full time job. But, I will keep you on a monthly retainer. Maybe twenty hours, at most a week.”

Matthew replied, “I am fine with that. Still, there is the issue of identification and records.”

Chang stated, “We, here, are well versed in creating fake IDs, and records. We will likely give you records that state you are from somewhere nice, from a nearby nation, that has a fair percentage of caucasians. Say, Costa Rica. We will even fake you a law license. Though, with the anti-foreigner laws in this nation, that might not help you. Still, I will have someone else notarize the contracts you handle.”

Matthew responded, “While all that is nice. Given I do not know the laws, and court rulings of this nation, I would not be comfortable in representing you, or your employees, in a court of law.”

Chang replied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “That is perfectly understandable.”

Matthew commented, “Also, I hope in this job that a simple mistake will not endanger my health, nor life?”

Chang responded, “Relax. I am doing this more as a hobby, than anything else. And I will not harm you for making a mistake, unless it is from gross incompetence. Which I doubt you will display.”

Matthew inquired, “Okay. Is there anything else I need to know about?”

Chang calmed answered, “One thing.” He then stood up, and looked over his desk, at Matthew, whom was still sitting down.

Matthew looked at Chang, as Chang made himself sneeze, instantly changing from male to female.

To Chang's mild surprise, the only reaction Matthew displayed at Chang's sudden gender change was his eyes slightly widening, for a few seconds, before his eyes went back to normal.

The only sound coming from Matthew's lips were, “Hmm...”

Chang grinned at the resolve her new employee was displaying. She then sneezed again, and changed back into a man. Next, Chang sat back down in his chair.

Chang stated, “A few others in the casino have this ability, as well. And I request that you keep this quiet. The only reason I showed you is that you would have likely find out on your, eventually. So, I prefer just to be upfront about it.”

Matthew calmly said, “Well, being straight forward makes you better than most of the clients I have represented. And I do not discuss the private lives of my clients, nor the private concerns that my clients choose to share with me.”

Chang responded, “Good. Also, keep in mind that some of my employees are... Rough around the edges. Though, as long as you are polite, and respect our privacy, I believe you will do fine here.” He then extended his right hand over his desk, towards Matthew.

Matthew saw the polite gesture, and he reciprocated it, by extending his right hand over the desk, as he kindly replied, “I hope so.”

As they shook hands, each man noted the firm, but not tight, grip the other had.

Their handshake lasted a few seconds.

A second after they broke their handshake, Matthew asked, “So, when do I start?”

Chang answered, “Tomorrow morning. I will give you a day to rest, and get your hours straight. Then, tomorrow morning, at ten AM, you will start your new job, in an office I will assign you, on the first floor...”

Chang then gave Matthew the details over what Matthew's job would be, and what was expected of him. Along with where exactly his office would be.

And that was the first day of Matthew's new and very strange life.

(_)

Over two years later...

Reality, Lee's Reality. Date, two months after Zoe and Wash were married. Location, the Rats Nest bar, in De La Plata Podrido. Time, ten PM at night, local time. On a clear, cool night.

The last two years had not been kind for neither Matthew McCormick, nor Pedro Del Soto. While they were mostly unharmed from their experiences over the last two years, in dealing with Chang, Revy, and the various multiversal groups in the come to live, either part time, or full time, in De La Plata Podrido, they were still both stressed out from their situations.

Matthew currently wore a white business suit, with polish black dress shoes, which he had replaced his wore out brown dress shoes with.

Matthew's friend, Pedro Del Soto, was a physically fit man, in his mid-forties. He had tanned skin, that showed his Mexican linage. And he had black hair that was cut short, in a comb over style. He was the local police chief for the island city of De La Plata Podrido. And while his position was appointed. Since there was no mayor, nor city council for the city of Plata Podrido. As police chief, Pedro held the most politically powerful seat in the city.

And like most days, that evening, Pedro wore his usual clothing and equipment. This was a pair of brown pants, with a white short sleeved button up short. Around his waist was a brown leather belt. Also, he wore black boots. Over his button up shirt, he wore one of his ties. Which, for today, was a deep blue colored tie.

Over his clothing was a brown long coat. Under his button up shirt was a bullet proof vest. And under the vest was a white t-shirt, underwear, and white socks.

Under Pedro's coat, but over his white button up shirt, was a shoulder holster. In the pistol holster, under left armpit, was a custom, model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema semi-automatic pistol. Which used a seven round ammo magazine. There was were two spare ammo magazines in pooches, in his shoulder holster, under his right armpit.

Pedro also had a small, holdout revolver, located in an ankle holster strapped around his black right boot, with the holstered pistol on the outer side of his boot. The pistol and holster were hidden in the bottom of the right legging of his brown pants.

The holdout revolver was a five round loaded Smith and Wesson model thirty-six chief's special. The pistol used thirty-eight special caliber rounds.

Pedro also had a knife, his wallet, a few speedloaders for his chief's special, and a few other items on his person.

Though, Pedro was armed, he knew better than to try to use his weapons to deal with the problems that he dealt with, on a daily basis, concerning Chang, and the others.

Matthew and Pedro had gotten off of work a few hours ago. And the reason they were both together was because of the same people they have been forced to associate with, for the last few years.

Over a year ago, Revy, and her friends found that they preferred to have designated drivers, when they went out drinking. Doing so allowed them not to have to decide whom was going to not drink that night.

But, the women needs some drivers they could trust.

Since the women knew that both Pedro and Matthew were reliable, and they knew what was really going on in the city, and that they had kept their mouths shut about what they knew, the women asked those two men to be this designated drivers, when they went drinking at the Rats Nest, which happened every few nights.

And these were the type of dangerous women that both men knew better than to answer, no, too.

Police Chief, or not, Pedro realized that if he declined, doing so would likely cause problems for both himself, and those under his command.

While if Matthew declined, he knew that doing might annoy his employer, Chang, at the Daiyu Palace Casino. Given Revy, and the others, were friends of Chang, and the many of the others in the casino.

Also, they already knew each other, because they view one another as the only two sane people, mixed up in this mess.

Due to the both of them being forced as designated drivers to the same parties, they saw each other often, and got to now each other. With them both coming to trust each other. As such, they became good friends, very quickly.

Presently, Pedro, and Matthew sat beside each other, at the bar counter, inside the Rats Nest, while they both sipped a bottle of water. With those they were chaperoning, having a drunken party around them. The two men also had their backs against the bar counter, facing the left side of the room, so they could see what was going on in front of them, in case they needed to get to cover real quick.

With Pedro being to Matthew's right side.

And while there was no music in the room, there was plenty of excitement.

As usual, at this time of night, the party was in full swing. Besides, Pedro and Matthew, there were only women in the room.

Bao, the bartender, and owner of the Rats Next. Along with Melanie assisting Bao. And scattered around the tables in the room, were Revy, Rock, Dutch, Benny, Janet, Yolanda, Eda, Aeryn, Violin, Sarah, Yukio, Molly, Rebecca, Kristina, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, Mikoto Yurika, Nodoka, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Roberta, and Fabiola.

Mercifully, no members of Hotel Moscow, nor of Daiyu Palace casino were present, or it would have been a truly wild and dangerous night for everyone involved.

Everyone outside Revy and Rock's group knew better than to show up at the Rats Nest on nights like this.

And while the Lovelace maids were present, Garcia Lovelace was still back in their home reality, due to his personal responsibilities, in running his family businesses.

Though, the two men did not show it outwardly, their were surprised, months ago, when they overheard that some of the members of Hotel Moscow were babysitting some of the younger children. Such as the babies and the toddlers, that some of members of the group had.

And from what the two men understood, this was not the first time the russian women were doing so, and those russian women did a good job of babysitting.

No force on Earth could make those two men crack a joke on that subject.

Though, there was one exception tonight. Melanie, the bartender for the bar in the Devil's Hotel, was off for the night, and she was helping her girlfriend, Bao, the owner of the Rats Nest, with the party.

And while Bao did put her foot down occasionally, to the wildness. Given the regular amounts of gold she was being paid, she did not say much, as long as the group did not harm her, Melanie, nor anyone else, and did not damage any property.

Most of the time, when Revy got drunk, her friends and family were able to stop her, before she went for her semi-automatic pistols. Which no one had so far been able to convince her to not bring to the Rats Nests, when they went there to get some drinks.

Though, when Revy did pull out her weapons, Matthew and Pedro had long since gotten into the habit of diving over the bar counter, and it's armored walls, for cover.

Currently, Melanie was assisted from behind the bar counter, as Bao was serving the women as the various tables.

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he quietly asked, in english, “So, are we on for tomorrow night?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he replied, in english, “Sure.”

Just then, Revy walked up to them.

Both men turned to look at Revy, and from their long experience, they could tell from the redhead's body language, and facial expression, that she was long passed drunk.

Though fortunately, while she was armed, they saw that the buttoned clasps to her holstered pistols, under her armpits, were still closed.

Revy slurred her speech, as she asked, in english, “So, what are you two pussies talking about?”

Pedro ignored the insult, as he thought, 'It is best that I be honest, though careful in what I say. But luckily, over the last couple of years, I have learned how to talk to Revy, while she was drunk, without getting shot at.' He said, in a calm tone of voice, “I was just inviting Matthew over to my house, tomorrow night.”

Revy teased, “I didn't know you two swung that way. But, it would explain why neither of you have made a pass at either of us.”

Pedro thought, 'No. It is jut that we are not crazy enough to try anything with any of you, lunatics.' He casually replied, “Nah. More of a platonic male bonding situation. Drink a few beers, a watch a couple of movies together.”

Matthew a few times nodded in agreement, as he thought, 'As long as I am silent, there is less chance of violence. And since Pedro has much more experience in talking to drunks. Especially, violent drunks. I will let him do the talking.'

Revy responded, “Oh... Okay. So, be honest, how are you really feeling? Don't worry, I promise I won't get angry.”

Pedro said, “There are so many shades of crazy in this room that I feel color blind with my sanity.”

Revy burst out laughing for several seconds, while Matthew remained silent. Though, given the excitement from the rest of the room, no one, but the three of them, and Melanie, were paying attention.

As Revy calmed down, she complimented, “Good one... And you know, Pedro... Your name is Pedro.”

Pedro calmly said, “Yes. We have known each other long enough, that I would hope you would remember my name.”

Revy casually commented, in seesaw manner to her tone of voice, “Of course, Pedro... Pedro, how I like that name for some reason. Well, you shouldn't be so upset. And I can tell you are at least annoyed. Will, you shouldn't be. We haven't kill you, like my daughters did to Chief Watsup.”

Pedro thought, with a bit of bitterness, 'I remember reading about that, in Lee's stories. And the bastard deserved to die. Still, I loath it when people compare me to such corrupt cops. Bribery is the bane of any leadership. Still, now is not the time and place for such discussions. And I need to let Revy down easily... In a way she understands...'

Pedro responded, “Let us be honest. Watsup was an asshole. While I have tried to be a fairly reasonable authority figure, whom does abuse his authority.” He mentally added, with even more hidden bitterness, 'Not that I have been able to stop any of you from eroding my authority, bit by bit.'

Revy inquired, “Like from that website, tv tropes?”

Pedro thought, 'Oh hell! I forgot that Lee introduced them to those damn online guides. Making them almost as genre savvy as I am.' He replied, “Such guides are the reason I am still breathing.”

Revy agreed, “I can see that. Still, I don't like cops. And you are a cop.”

Revy's comment caused Pedro's self-control to slip a bit. Pedro thought, 'Ah, hell. I will just tell her how I feel on the matter. But, I can still be polite about it.' Pedro said, in a calm tone of voice, “I know why. And if it was within my power, I would kill that bastard cop that raped you.”

Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, “I believe you. That is another reason we have left you unharmed. You have a sense of duty that does not border on stupidity. You keep the drugs and vices running, but you don't let it become destructive to the local population. And you never treated us girls wrong. You always respected us. And I admire that about you. And that is why we haven't kill you, or worse.”

Pedro mentally wondered, 'That is am amazing sober response, from someone that is drunk. I wonder how much of this from her is an act?' He responded, “I appreciate that, Revy.”

Revy smirked, as she replied, “You're welcome.”

Pedro thought, 'If she is this lucid, I might as well say...' He commented, “Listen, Revy. Maybe not today. Maybe not tomorrow. But someday, you are going to have decide between focusing on the darker parts of your past, or looking at the good things in the present, and move on towards your future.”

Revy was silent for a couple of seconds. She then replied, “I will keep that in mind.”

Revy then turned around, and left to join her friends, at the tables on the left side of the room.

A few seconds later, from behind the bar counter, behind where Pedro and Matthew were sitting at, Melanie replaced Pedro's empty bottle of water, with a fresh bottle of water.

Melanie complimented, “Nice speech. Very true.”

Pedro and Matthew turned to face Melanie, as Pedro replied, “Thank you.”

Melanie inquired, “So, how are you so sure she didn't already kill that rapist cop?”

Pedro commented, “Because she is still somewhat crazy. I have dealt with a lot of people that have been wronged before. When they have dealt with their fixation, there is a measure of closure. Which she clearly has not yet experienced.”

Melanie responded, “I see your point.”

Pedro causally inquired, “Are you ever going to give me the full story on how you ended up a woman, Melvin.”

Melanie shrugged, as she said, “Maybe later. Though, I don't regret telling you that it is me.”

Pedro stated, “I am glad you did. Also, it didn't take a genius to figure out it was you. Like the rest them, you look like your own younger sister. And you did immediately go back to your old bartending job at the Devil's Hotel.”

Melanie shrugged, as she replied, “True.”

Pedro said, “And as such, I was just waiting for you to tell me.”

Melanie commented, “I appreciate you patience in letting me tell you, instead of you confronting me.”

Pedro stated, “You're welcome. Though, through all this, I hope I am still your friend.”

Melanie smiled at Pedro, as she responded, “You still are... But, I have customers to deal with. So, we can talk later.”

Pedro replied, “Sure.”

Melanie then reached down and pulled out a tray, and then some glasses. After which, she started fixing some drinks for the women in the room.

Pedro looked directly in front of him, at the wall right wall of the room, to Melanie's right side, as he thought, with weariness, 'How did I end up in such an insane situation? I admit that I tempted fate when my brother and I compared this town with Roanapur. But, I never realized that fate would bite me in the ass by bringing that city's violently psychotic population to my home town.'

'Also, what is with Melvin, or should I say Melanie, dating Bao?... Well, they have a lot in calm. Sane, and nice, though both of them have violent backgrounds.'

'And after thinking about, it wasn't hard to figure out the Rats Nest bartender here is Bao.'

'Still, I am not surprised that these women figured out the bartender here is Bao. They are all very clever.'

'Bao runs the Rats Nest like the Yellowflag, only with less problems, because Chang and the other leave her be. Unless they come as customers, for a drink. Bao was captured in Lee's stories. This answers what happened to her. Though, Bao has been careful not to mention her name. Though, these women behind me were not that secretive about Bao identity, when having drinks. And Bao confirmed her identity, a while back, when I ask her point blank on the matter.'

'And after Bao confirmed her identity, I informed her, in a calm manner, than while we slept together, when I did not know who she was. I did not mean finding out the truth, that Bao use to be a man, considering Bao has been nice to me.'

'Also, I asked Bao why she did not have any type of music be played in the Rats Next. She answered that she got tired of having every jukebox, radio, and audio speakers, she put out in the various bars she had been in, being shot up, or destroyed in some other way, on a regular basis. With Revy as a repeat customer, at the Yellowflag, and others like her, I can see how that could happen.'

'So, Bao has a policy of bring you own music system. Though, people rarely do that, because other customers sometimes disagree with what music is being played. So, the situation defaults to almost no music at all.'

'Though, to be fair, Bao has been a good person. She had done well for herself in this city. I even think it is nice that Melanie and Bao are dating. They are both decent people. It is nice the two of them found each other to be with.'

'Along with all this, except for the problems in this bar, which usually solve themselves, Bao has kept her nose fairly clean in this city. I have no problems with her being in this town for as long as she wants. Unlike, these psychos that have roped me and Matthew, into being their designated drivers, around three times a week, when they go out partying.'

'And I know better than to try anything to stop their wildness. It would be suicide for my men and I. And I cannot run from them, because last time I did, they found me quicker than it took me to run to my hideout, in another country, on other continent.'

'So currently, I am screwed. And so is Matthew. With us both realizing that fact.'

'Though, I am sure an idea, and opportunity, for escape with eventually come to one of us. But, I am not going to rock this boat, until I have too.'

Just then, Bao walked up, from behind the bar, to Melanie's right. She looked over at Pedro, as she happily said, “I heard what you said to Melanie, just now. I am just glad that you are here, Pedro. This city would be a lot worse without you being here.”

Pedro turned to Bao, as he thought, 'Yea. She has sharp hearing, like everyone who had undergone the super-soldier serum process. Still, what she said was nice.'

Pedro responded, “Thanks, Bao. I realize that. And I want you to know that I have never had any problems with you, or Melanie here.” He mentally added, 'And as I told you, Bao. As a woman, Bao, you were good in bed. Also, I don't care that you were a guy, beforehand. Not that I am going say that in front of this school of sharks. That would be like blood in the water for both of us.'

Bao replied, “Thanks.”

Melanie looked up from the tray she was preparing, as she said, “I appreciate that.”

Pedro turned his head to focus on both Bao and Melanie, as he replied, “You're welcome...” He then looked back over at Bao, as he continued. “Still, it's your... Customers here that worry me.”

Bao agreed, “You and me, both.”

Melanie chirped, “Me too.”

Matthew said, “Me, as well.”

Pedro stated, “And I wouldn't be complaining about this, except that I have being forced to be in the middle of this insanity... Though, I do prefer these women to blow off steam with a few drinks, in this fashion, than through violence.”

Bao responded, “I can see you point of view. And I agree... Also, considering they pay me well. I don't complain much. As long as they don't hurt us, nor destroy any property.”

Pedro nodded once in agreement.

Melanie turned to Bao, as she asked, “Are we still on for our vacation?”

Bao looked over at Melanie, as she answered, “Yes. I am looking forward to it.”

Matthew inquired, “How are you two going to find the time? I mean, they like you both too much, as bartenders, to let you leave. Even if it is only for a vacation.”

Bao and Melanie looked back towards Pedro and Matthew.

Bao stated, “I have a reality device. And we will use time dilation mechanics to our advantage. As far as everyone here is concerned, we will be gone only a few minutes.”

Matthew complimented, “Not bad.”

Pedro commented, “I can see the potential in doing that.” He thought, 'They could spend a few weeks to a few months, in other part of the multiverse, with no one being the wiser.'

Bao responded, “Thanks... Well, I better get back to my customers, before they miss me.”

Bao then reached down, under the bar counter, to the refrigerator, to pull out a couple of bottles of cold beer, with a sealed bottle in each of her hands.

Next, Bao look back over at Pedro, and Matthew, as she commented, “And when this party ends tonight, we help you two, like usual, and we will shepherd these women back to their hotel, or their homes.”

Pedro smiled at Bao, as he said, “Thanks again, Bao.”

Matthew smiled, as well. He said, “Yea. Your help, and Melanie's help, is much appreciated.”

While having a cold beer bottle in each of her hands. Bao returned their smiles, as she replied, “I know.” She then turned, and walked away, towards the back of the bar room, where the exit to the bar counter lead to the rest of the room.

Meanwhile, Matthew and Pedro turned back around to face the tables of the room, as Melanie picked up her tray. She carefully balanced it in her hands, while she followed Bao, to exit from behind the bar counter, as she headed for one of the tables in the bar.

(_)

Fortunately, the rest of the party was uneventful. And Pedro, Matthew, Bao, and Melanie, each took their car, to drive them either their homes, or back to the front lobby entrance to the Devil's Hotel, where they had suites, which stayed at.

Though, to take everyone home, Pedro, Matthew, and Melanie had to make two trips, while Bao stayed with the others, as she started to close her bar up.

While Pedro, Bao, and Melanie drove their own cars, Matthew was using one of the Daiyu Palace Casino's four door, black Sedan cars, with permission from Chang, beforehand.

When Pedro, Matthew, Melanie all returned to the Rats Nest, the rest of those there were divided up among the three of them, and Bao. With Bao closing and locking the doors behind her. As she was the last one out of her bar.

Bao then got into her car, with a couple of the drunk women, while Matthew, Pedro, and Melanie, and those in their three vehicles, while waiting for Bao to start her car. Once the four sober adults saw that all four of their vehicles would start, they then headed over to take the last of the drink women home.

After which, Bao and Melanie headed to the home they shared, Pedro headed to his home, and Matthew headed for one of the Daiyu Palace Casino's back garage entrances, to park his car, and head into his casino suite. And after all four of them reached their homes, they soon all got ready for bed, and received some much deserved sleep.

(_)

The next morning, it was ten thirty-three AM, on a slightly warm, partly cloudy day, at Daiyu Palace Casino.

At that moment, the back express elevator of the casino took the sole occupant, Matthew McCormick, from the penthouse, down to the back elevator bay on the first floor.

That day, Matthew wore his dark brown business suit, with a light brown tie, and black dress shoes.

He held his briefcase, by its handle, with his left hand. The briefcase was full of documents and office supplies.

For the most part, it had been a normal morning for Matthew's daily routine. He had just finished his weekly financial meeting with his employer, Chang, in Chang's penthouse office. And while the news was not all good, the sense Matthew got from Chang was that Chang was okay with the situation.

Presently, Matthew needed to talk to River and Lee, on matters connected to the meeting he had just had with Chang. And Matthew knew exactly where to find them at this time of day.

As he used his right hand to adjust the tie knot, at the top of his shirt, he thought, 'At least this morning was not been that bad. And last night was not horrible. Pedro, Melanie, and Bao's support does seem to help. And though I did have a little bad news for Chang this morning. It wasn't too bad. And he handled it well. Also, that meeting was just a reminder on how happy I am that it was easy for me to get a grip on the various laws, regulations, and taxes, that I need to review for my job as Chang's lawyer. And at least I am doing fine in my professional life.'

A few seconds later, the doors opened, and Matthew stepped out of the express elevator, onto the back elevator bay, onto the first floor.

Matthew continued walking, as he thought, 'Now, to take care of business.'

He then saw the bushy and grassy tiger enclosure in front of him, with the healthy female tiger inside the enclosure looking at him, from behind the translucent plastic.

Matthew calmly thought, 'And how are you this morning?'

The tiger then turned, and walked further back into her room, to play with her toys.

As the tiger did so, Matthew made his out of the elevator bay, and into the hallway, between the elevator bay, and the tiger enclosure. He then turned to his right, as he started walking towards the back of the casino building.

(_)

A few minutes later, Matthew pushed open the right side door of the double-doors to the employee gym, and he walked inside the gym.

While Matthew was inside, he gently guided the door, by its inward knob handle, as the door springs automatically closed the door.

As soon as the door was closed, he turned his attention back to the gym, in front of him, and he began making his way through the large room.

The first part of the gym Matthew passed through was the equipment section.

As he made his way through the equipment section of the gym, he saw various people, most of whom were wearing gym clothing, as they used the exercise equipment.

Among these people there were Kaylee, Inara, and Jayne.

Matthew noticed Jayne look over at him. When the eyes met, Jayne gave Matthew a glare for a few seconds, before he turned back to working on the piece of exercise equipment he was using.

Matthew did not react, as he walked passed Jayne.

With Matthew's back to Jayne, he continued walking, as he thought, 'I have always been a little too white collar for this crowd... Still, there is nothing I can do about it, right now... Besides, I prefer to workout here in either the early morning, or mid-afternoon. And fortunately, some of the regulars, at that time, spot for me on the weightlifting.'

Matthew made his way through the gym, to the back section of the room, near the doors, to his right side, that lead to the two shower sections. One for male, and one for female. With the rules stating what the physical gender of that person was, at the time, determined which section they could enter.

There were also restrooms and showers located in the locker rooms.

In addition, were another set of entrances to the male and female locker rooms, on the other side of the locker sections, which were connected to left wall of the employee pool. Which was large, heated, and used saltwater.

As Matthew first passed by the female locker entrance, then the male locker entrance. After which, Matthew came to the open parts of the gym, where the floors had square cushions covering every part of that section of the room.

The cushioned squares were blue, three feet wide, with no spacing in between. And the cushions had two inches of life foam rubber in them.

Matthew came to a stop, and what he saw in front of him, he found very interesting to watch.

The first thing Matthew noticed was that River stood to the side of the matters, across from him. He could tell that River saw him, as she looked over at him. She then turned her attention back to what she was watching between herself, and Matthew.

The second thing Matthew noticed, in front of him, between him and River, were two people in the middle of a fencing match.

The two combatants were in full patted fencing gear, with helmets and masks. Each of them held their foils in their right hand.

The gear of both combatants were white, with chrome masks, that matched in colors. Even their foils were the same.

From the contours of their suits, the two people fencing each other were both women. And from the looks, such as fighting technique, and body language, it appeared the match had been going on for at least a few minutes.

Both fencers were holding their foils with their right hand.

Matthew remained silent, as he watched the sparring match. He mentally wondered, 'Now, which one of them is which?'

Matthew noted that the strikes, parries, and dodges were being swift executed by each combatant, against the other. With neither seeming to get the upper hand.

This continued on for about another thirty seconds, until the one to Matthew’s left knocked the weapon out of the right hand of the person to his right, and towards River. Though, the foil did not hit River, as the sword landed nearby, to River's left side, by the wall.

The winner did not press her attack, and instead held the tip of her foil towards the loser chest for a few seconds, before she tossed her foil by the other foil on the floor. With the second foil landing right beside the first foil, without hitting River.

Both women combatants then took off their helmets, with each of them tucking their helmet under an arm. For the winner, it was her right arm, while the loser tucked her helmet under her left arm.

Matthew saw that the winner was Annie, and that the loser was Lee.

Annie and Lee looked at each other, as Annie complimented, “Not bad. You are getting better with both your sword skills, and you precognitive skills in combat.”

Lee replied, “Thank you.”

Annie said, “Even though you are not that experienced, when compared to me. It is nice to spar regularly with someone else with precognitive abilities.”

Lee complimented, “Well, you are a good teacher.”

Annie smiled towards Lee, as she responded, “I know. And in a few months you will likely be ready for me to start training you with use of a lightsaber. You may not use the force, but your psychic abilities make some of the lightsaber training workable for you.”

Lee returned Annie's smile, as she replied, “I look forward to it.”

Matthew saw River looked over to him, as she spoke up, “So, what do you want, Matthew?”

At the mention of Matthew's name, Annie and Lee looked over at Matthew, as well.

Even though Lee's hands were gloved, Matthew saw Lee unconsciously use her left hand to rub her right hand, where her golden ring was, on her right fourth finger.

Annie said, “Good morning, Matthew.”

Lee noticed what she was doing, and she dropped her gloved hands to her sides. She commented, “Morning, Matthew.”

Matthew looked at the three women, as he calmly answered, “Good morning, ladies. Lee. River. I just got finished with my meeting with Chang, and I need to discuss some business with you that is connected to that meeting.”

River questioned, “Does this conversation need to be done in private?”

Annie looked over at River, as she pointed out, “Everyone here knows better than to talk about our business.”

Lee looked over at River, as she commented, “I agree.” She then looked back at Matthew.

River looked over at Annie and Lee. She then turned back to Matthew, as she requested, “Go ahead.”

Lee and Annie also looked back at Matthew.

Matthew stated, “Early this morning, local time, your shell accounts in Italy were closed. From I understand, the bank in question was facing indictments over several matters, and they threw some questionable accounts, including the ones you three hold there, as fresh meat for the prosecutors.”

Lee muttered, under her breath, “Damn.”

Matthew said, “On the poetic side, this did nothing to stop the prosecutors from indicting the members of that bank.”

River commented, “Cowardice is rarely rewarded... So, how much did we lose?”

Matthew replied, “Altogether, about the equivalent of ten million Swiss Francs. That includes the two million you had set up for your anonymous charities there.”

Annie said, “Ouch. How did Chang take it?”

Matthew turned to Annie, as he answered, “Surprisingly well.”

River said, “That is good. I would hate to lose you over something as trivial as this. And I am sure Chang feels the same way. Also, though this still hurts, it is but a drop in the bucket, when compared to our assets just here, in the casino.”

Lee looked over at River, as she stated, “Yes. But, we also need to know...” She looked at Matthew, as she continued, “Are there any chances of them tracing us back to here?”

Matthew answered, “No. With your reality devices, disguises, and fake identification records, that lead to Eastern European countries. I doubt they could trace you. Especially, since you did all you business on those accounts, in Europe. And I used VPNs, voice modulators over the phone, third parties, and other anti-tracing methods to check on those accounts. So, I do not see how they could trace us back here.”

Lee replied, “Good.”

River inquired, “Now, what else do you need discuss, with us, over this matter?”

Matthew thought, with mild emotional weariness, 'Like you don't already know, River. From reading my mind.'

Matthew saw River smile, in response to his thoughts.

Matthew sighed. He then said, “Well, what I just said, leads me to the next reason I came to talk to you, and Lee. I need to know where you want me to start the ball rolling, on setting up your new accounts. I need to know at least which country you would like, from the selections I believe might be best, for the moment. You will still have to go there, to personally sign the documents. But, I can already start the process of drawing up the paperwork, right now.”

River replied, “Of course. So, what are our options?”

Matthew answered, “Singapore, Brazil, and South Africa.”

River looked over at Lee, as she said, “You're call, Lee. Since you know this world better than, I.”

Lee looked at River, as she responded, “Given the financial events happening in Asia, right now. I do not want to use Singapore, just yet. I would like things to settle down in that region, first. And politics in Africa can turn on a dime. So, I guess that leaves Brazil. Which is not a bad place to have a little extra spending capital, stashed away in.”

River teased, “Thinking of the Carnival in Rio?”

Lee playfully replied, “You know me so well.”

River said, “Sounds like a good enough reason for me.”

Matthew saw Lee and River then looked back over towards him.

Matthew commented, “I will start working on the paperwork later today. I should have the documents ready for you, to review, in a few days.”

Lee inquired, “Speaking of other interests we have you keep tabs on, for us, what is the latest on my family, in the U.S.?”

Matthew calmly answered, “Your family, in the U.S., is doing fine. Especially, since you gave them those two gold bars, you informed me of, to help them with their expenses. Also, due to them only slowly using that gold, they have not yet triggered any red flags with the local government.”

Lee stated, “Good. That is why I sent them those two gold bars to them, for Christmas, two years ago. And I had a note attached to the bars, telling them it was from me, and to use that gold slowly. And from what I have seen so far, that is what they have been doing so far. So, they should pay off all their debts within a few years.”

Matthew said, “With patience and a little luck, they will continue to do so, with few problems. Since our business is concluded, for the moment. And that I have matters to attend to. I will be leaving now.”

Matthew then turned around, and started walking out of the gym, the same way he had come in.

Annie looked over at Lee, and River, as she said, “I will be right back.”

Lee replied, “Take your time.”

River looked over at Lee, then back to Annie, as she said, “Yes. We will be here when you get back.”

Annie then turned back to look as Matthew, as she walked over to him, in large strides.

When Annie reached Matthew, she stepped up beside him, to his right, as they both continued walking, at a more casual pace.

As they walked through the equipment section of the gym, both adults noticed that no one was paying them any real attention to them.

Annie turned to Matthew, as she softly said, “I can sense you are not happy, for some reason.”

While walking, Matthew looked over at Annie, as he responded, “Yea. And it is the usual. First, I had a busy night last night, at the Rats Nest.”

Annie commented, “Yea. Revy and her friends can get pretty wild. Still, I realize it is not fair that you and Pedro get dragged into those parties. That is why I don't go to those parties. Even though I have been invited, more than once, to do so.”

Matthew went onto say, “Yea. At least, Bao and Melanie also help. Which they did last night. And thank you for not adding to that repeating mess.”

Annie replied, “You're welcome.”

Matthew stated, “And even though you, Lee, River, and even Chang, to a degree, are friendly enough, towards me. At a personal level, since I have gotten here, I just haven't clicked with anyone at the casino. You included.” He mentally added, 'Likely, just the standard white collar and blue collar, working class friction. Boiled down, everyone here pretty much have blue collar personalities. Chang and you included. While, I have always had more of a white collar personality... Though, I don't hold that against anyone here. But, a few here seem to hold that against me.'

Annie pointed out, “At least, you seem to be friends with Pedro.”

Matthew responded, “We are more like just two guys thrown throw together, into a mess not of our own making, while making the most of the insane situation we find ourselves in.”

Annie teased, “What do you think friends are? Half the friendship I have had started with situations like yours.”

Matthew rhetorically deadpanned, “Why am I not surprised?... And that is one way to look at it.”

Annie suggested, “Look, since you are not making many friends. Perhaps you should take some more risks. I know the people here, and even Revy and her crew, will respect you more, if you do so.”

Matthew pointed out, “Annie, you, and Arcee, are the people employed to be the adventurous ones. I am employed to be the calm professional. Lawyers are not adventurers.”

Annie commented, “I can name a few exceptions.”

Matthew retorted, “Outside of comicbooks?”

Annie conceded, “Point taken.”

Matthew stated, “Listen. All things considered, I am doing okay. As long as I am polite, and I do my job well, I have nothing to fear from any of you... But, I just feel that I could be doing more.”

Annie commented, “Don't we all. But, at least Chang pays well. And he is reasonable with those that work for him.”

Matthew responded, “True. Though, sometimes I get the sense that I have just been spinning my wheels for the last two years, doing nothing.”

They then came to a stop in front of the double doors to the hallways exit of the employee gym.

Annie walked over and pulled opened the right door, as she looked over at Matthew. She said, “We all have days like that. And I hope you are able to get out of your rut, soon.”

Matthew turned to look at the Annie, as he responded, “Thanks. And have a good day, Annie.”

Annie replied, with concern in her tone of voice, “You too, Matthew.”

Matthew then turned back to look in front of him, as he calmly walked out of the gym, into the hallway, and towards his own office, on the first floor.

Meanwhile, Annie gently shut the door, turned around, and she headed back to the open area, in the back of the gym, to talk with River and Lee, over more casual matters.

(_)

A few hours later, it was one three PM, as Pedro sat in his office, in the police station.

Pedro had just returned from lunch, and he had his office door left open, with the metal blinds to his window turned open.

Pedro sat in his chair, behind her desk, he was review the electronic reports that some of his police offices been filed that morning, on his computer monitor. With the computer monitor being on the top, left part of Pedro's desk. Between the monitor and Pedro were the computer keyboard, computer mouse, and to Pedro's left, by the left each of the desk, was a wireless phone, on its recharge mount.

The computer tower was located inside the left part of the desk. With the computer connected to a wireless, encrypted network that was set up in the police station, which connected to the internet, by a high-speed connection.

Just then, one of his officers walked into his off, and came to a stop in front of his desk.

Pedro looked up at the officer, as he thought, 'I am glad that my boys understand that I don't mind them walking into my office, when I leave my door open.' He asked, in a casual tone of voice, in spanish, “What do you need?”

The officer answered, “Sir, you wanted us to keep you updated on the developments of the old church that you are fond of?”

Pedro replied, “Yes.”

Pedro thought, 'Hotel Moscow has been trying to buy the land where the church I helped get the funding to built, when I first became police chief of this city. I consider the building of that church one of the highlights of my career as police chief of this city. A symbol of a turning point in this city, from a cesspool to becoming a much cleaner, nicer, safer city.'

'And while the building itself is starting to show its age. The congregation is not, and it is a nice mix of some of the more honest people in of this city. With the person preaching there being a decent man. And while I am not religious, in that way. I did respect others that are.'

'Still, Hotel Moscow, under their alias, Bougainvillea Trade Company...'

Pedro groaned a little, as he continued his thoughts, 'They are not even trying to hide...'

'Anyway, Hotel Moscow has been using their money through their front company to try to bribe my superiors on the mainland, to get control of the title to the land the church sits on. So, they can tear down the church, and build their new headquarters. I guess they are tired of living on that cargo ship.'

'And this has caused a quiet, political tug of war between me and them, on the matter.'

'I had the property the church is on be put under the city's name, in the first place, as a way to protect it from this very situation.'

'I don't even know why they even want that land in the first place. There is clear, undeveloped land on this island. It is even in the middle of the city. That would cause problems for them, right there.'

'Maybe they learned my connection to the church, and they are doing this to piss me off.'

'I know Balalaika has been that spiteful, or at least, pretend to be.'

'Also, I am not surprised they are using the same cover, as in the Black Lagoon series, the Bougainvillea Trade Company. They are not trying to hide. Though, unless they knew otherwise, no one in their right mind would think they are the same people, from another reality. And if they did, they would like just get out of the way, and keep silent, for their own sakes.'

'But, as the chief of police of the city, I cannot afford to do that. And even though I was able to finally shore up my staff numbers, since the maids originally came to town, and half of us immediately left. With me, and others slowly returning back to town. A number of them took a lot of convincing from me to return to duty. Still, even with most of my boys back, along with a few new faces that I vetted, I know that we are still outgunned.'

'Though, at least we have a handle on the day to day dealing with the crime in this city... So, there is that... At least...'

The officer said, “Our contacts stated that the mainland superiors okayed the deal. The paperwork will likely be fully pushed through by the end of the week.”

Pedro thought, 'Damn. They must have bribed some of the mainland officials. But, I need to not alert this man in front of me, on how this makes me feel.' Pedro stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, “There not much we can do about it. But, thank you for letting me know.”

The police office replied, “You're welcome, sir.”

Pedro said, “Carry on with your duties.”

The officer replied, “Yes sir.” He then turned around, and left Pedro office.

When the officer was out of sight, Pedro sighed, as he turned his attention back to the electronic police reports he had pulled up on the monitor of his computer.

(_)

At two ten PM, that afternoon, across town, from the police station, inside the double bay garage, one of the Plata Podrido's better auto-mechanics, Hernan Pena, had just finished working on a car, for a customer, that was in one of his two garage bays. Specifically, the bay closest to Hernan's office. With the other garage bay being empty.

Both garage doors were open to the outside air, on the partly cloudy day.

At that moment, Hernan had his back facing to the outside of the garage door, leading to the front parking lot.

Hernan Pena was Venezuelan. He had short black hair and fair skin. He had a full, black, well groomed beard, which was cut short. He was of average height, and he was a very physically fit man, in his mid-forties. He was currently wearing blue coveralls, black boots, and mirrored sunglasses.

Hernan had just used a grease rag to wipe off his hands. He then pulled the car's front hood down, as he heard a car pulled up into his driveway, and come to a stop about twenty feet from him.

Hernan turned around, and when he saw the car in front of him, he recognized the vehicle, as he whistled a little, in astonishment.

In front of his was a black painted car, with chrome rims, in pristine condition. The car was based on the nineteen forty-two Packard Super Eight. But, one glance at the front hood, and he could tell that it was another, much rarer luxury car, of days gone by.

And even though the top hood was up, Hernan could tell that the car was the convertible version of the vehicle.

Hernan mentally wondered, 'Now, who could be driving that old girl?...'

After Hernan heard the engine turn off, he then watched as slim, woman, with short brown hair, and fair skin, get out of the driver's seat. She looked to be in her mid-twenties. And she wore a masculine shirt, pants, belt, boots, and open coat, that were clearly cut to fit her feminine frame.

The brown haired woman then walked shut her driver’s side door, which was located on the right side of the car. And she walked to the door directly behind the driver's door. She opened it, and Hernan watched as a fair skinned woman, with a scar on the right side of her face, step out of the back of the vehicle.

In spite of the scar on the right side of her face, she was a very beautiful, slender woman, whom appeared to be in her mid-twenties.. She had long blond hair, that went down to the back of her waistline, and with her leaving her hair loose. She wore a red and white business suit, with a long red skirt. She had red low heel slippers, and pink nail polish on her finger nails. Over while blouse, she wore a red coat which was open.

Balalaika had buttoned up her white blouse to the top of collar. As such, Hernan only saw the scars on Balalaika face, leading down the front right side of her neck, with a little bit of scarring showing above the collar, on the bottom front left side of Balalaika neck. Though, the blouse hid the scars that raked across the front of Balalaika chest and stomach, which went on the way done to the middle front of Balalaika’s thighs.

Still, Hernan willing prevented himself from staring at Balalaika facial and neck scars.

Though, Hernan did notice that Balalaika had put on red lipstick on her lips, and there was a small, black mole right beside the lower left side of her left eye. Along with all this, the way she stood gave herself a commanding presence.

As blond haired woman fully stepped out of the way, the brown hair shut the back door to the car.

The brown haired woman then turned to the blond haired woman, as she said, in russian, “Melanie, Rock, and Revy recommended this man. Though, Melanie cautioned not to threaten this man, nor his family.”

The blond haired woman turned the brown haired woman, as she casually replied, in russian, “As long as he is polite, and he gets the job done, I could care less about what motivates him.”

Both women then turned their attention to Hernan, as they calmly walked towards him, side by side, with the blond to his right, and the brown haired woman to his left.

While Hernan watched the two women approach him, he thought, 'It is so nice to know russian... And I am willing to bet money that the blond woman is, Balalaika. The queen alpha bitch of both the Soviet military, and Russian mob, of her reality. And one of the last people anyone would ever want to get on the bad side of, in all existence.'

'Also, if my memory is correct from those omakes Pedro showed me, and those crazy stories, Pedro informed me about... I am glad I read them... That is, B. And from the way she is carrying herself, she likely has a gun, in a shoulder holster, under her open coat, below her left armpit. Which makes sense. And I am sure that Balalaika has a hold out pistol somewhere on her person...'

'I wonder who Melanie is?... I will find out, later. And I guess Rock and Revy were happy with my work on their red GTO... I should take that as a compliment.'

'I am so happy I have been able distance myself, and my family, from the insanity that has come to this town, in the last few years... And that my family has so far been fine.'

'Still, that just means I am going to have to be on my toes, here. Customers are customers. And their money is just as good as anyone else's.'

'Well, I better greet them. And I guess english would be best.'

As the women came within ten feet of Hernan, he complimented, in english, “Nice vehicle there. A real classic. A Zil, ZIS one one zero B.”

A second later, the two women came to a stop, roughly eight feet from Hernan.

Balalaika cracked a grin, as she said, in english, with tone of intrigue in her voice, “Very good. I take it you have seen one of those before?”

Hernan answered, “Yes. Many years ago in Cuba.”

Balalaika replied, “Really?”

Hernan plainly responded, “Yes. And this is very rare vehicle.”

Balalaika commented, “My family use to have one, when I was younger. And this vehicle has a bit of nostalgic value to me.”

Hernan gave the two women a warm smile, as he casually said, “Of course. And I am more than willing to cater to such customers. Still, as a professional, I have to inform you, if you need replacement parts, I could recommend a few other places, in town, that could have those parts shipped here more quickly, than I.”

Balalaika responded, “I appreciate that. But, not to worry. I just a need a tune up. Along with an oil change. My usual mechanics are busy. And the mechanic my friends use is also busy, with her usual costumers. So, I asked around, and Mister Pena, your name came up at the top of the list.”

Hernan said, with sincerity in his tone of voice, “I am honored. Let us head into my office, to work out the details of our deal.”

Balalaika replied, “Most certainly.”

Hernan then turned around, and started walking, into his garage, through the open garage bay, near them. Then into the open door, from the garage bay, to a hallway, though the open doorway to his office, on the other side of the hallway, from the garage door.

Hernan was the first to enter his office, with Balalaika and B right behind him.

When Hernan walked around his desk, he then sat down, in his chair, behind his desk.

There were also two chairs stationed in front of his desk.

As he turned his attention to the two women, he noticed that Balalaika and B were looking at his family pictures on a mantle, in his office.

Though, they seemed to pay no mind to them, as they look back at Hernan, without making any comments.

Hernan offered, “Have a seat.”

Balalaika calmly said, “We prefer to stand.”

Hernan replied, “Okay.” He then picked up a note pad, and pen from his desk. Next, he wrote a price down, set the pen down, and tore off the top piece of paper on the top of the note. Afterward, he used his right hand to hand the piece of paper over to Balalaika.

As Hernan saw Balalaika take the piece of paper, and look at it, he stated, “This is my standard rate. In U.S. currency. For working on classic automobiles, that are thirty years old, or more. Excluding any damaged parts I might find.”

Balalaika looked at the price. She then stuck the paper into a pocket, in the interior of her red coat. She looked back up at Hernan, as she replied, “The price looks fair.”

Hernan mentioned, “If I do find a damaged part, I will contact you. From there, you can either decide to take you vehicle off my hands, at half the repair fee, I just quoted you. Or, I can order the parts, and repair the vehicle. With the price and repair time depending on if you want authentic parts. Which can become very expensive, and time consuming to find. Or, I can find a part that will just work.”

Balalaika calmly responded, “I do not think that will be a problem. Though, I can understand where you are coming from. If this matter becomes an issue. We will discuss it.”

Hernan said, “Good. Now, if you are willing to leave me some contact information, I will contact you when your vehicle is ready. With luck, I should be done within a week, or so. Maybe sooner.” He thought, 'I need to check some repair guides on Zil automobiles, before I work on this one. To make refresh my memory. I am not going to mess up Balalaika nice, classic car, if I can help it.'

Balalaika replied, “That will be fine.”

Balalaika then used her right hand to reached into a pocket, on the left front interior part of her red coat, and she pulled out a card. Next, she leaned down, and handed the card, over the desk, to Hernan, with her right hand, as she said, “You can contact us at this phone number.”

Hernan leaned over, and he used his right hand take the card from Balalaika hand.

Balalaika leaned back up straight, while Hernan leaned back into his chair.

Hernan looked that card, and he noticed that it was printed in english. He then silently read the name. Next, he set the card onto the desk, as he looked back up at the two women standing in front of him.

Hernan gave the women a warm smile, as he commented, “Bougainvillea Trade Company... Bougainvillea... That is a pretty flower.”

B spoke up, in a straight forward tone of voice, in english, “You know? Don't you?”

It was obvious to all three adults, what B was alluding too.

Hernan kept his warm smile on his lips, as he took off his sunglasses, which he held in his right hand.

The two women then saw that his smile did not reach his eyes, as Hernan's blue eyes were like ice.

Hernan calmly said, “If you have been in this city long enough. You would know better than to ask questions you don't want answers too.”

Hernan then put his glasses back over his eyes, which changed the entire mood of the room, since all the two women could now see was Hernan's warm smile.

Balalaika said, in a calm tone of voice, “Whatever you know, is unimportant. Considering you know better than to ask about it.”

Hernan commented, “The people on this island have learned that it is best to let the past lay undisturbed.”

Balalaika complimented, “A good policy.” She looked over at B, as she requested, “Please, give him the keys.” She then looked back at Hernan.

B pulled out the keys to the car, from a pants pocket. She then gently set the keys onto Hernan's desk.

Balalaika stated, “Contacted us, when our car is ready.”

Hernan replied, “Most certainly. And have a nice day.”

Balalaika said, “You as well.”

Balalaika turned around, and started walking out of the office, from the door they had come in front. With B following right behind her.

As the two women walked out of his office, Hernan overheard, B say, in russian, “His eyes reminded me of someone. But, I cannot place whom.”

Balalaika responded, in russian, “Not to worry. It will come to you, later.”

As soon as they were out of sight of his office, Hernan quietly got up from his chair, and walked over to his office window, to his right. He then looked out his window, by peeking between the closed, metal blinds to his window.

As Balalaika and B walked down the parking lot of his business, he saw a black SUV driving to a stop, beside the entrance to his driveway.

Hernan watched Balalaika and B get into the vehicle, with the vehicle soon driving away.

Hernan thought, 'I guess they had a second vehicle, hidden nearby. With their Hotel Moscow subordinates inside it, waiting to either pick them up. Or, if there was trouble, come in, and kill me... Not bad...'

'Anyway, I will do my best to treat Balalaika Zil with the up most care, as I tune it up, and change its oil. Which should not be that hard. Engine models of that time were real simple to work on. And the russians were not ones to make things more complicated, when they copied something. So, this should not be too much of a problem with me. Still, I will review some guides I know of, before I do so. Best not to make a mistake, than have to fix a mistake.'

He then looked back at his desk, with Balalaika’s keys, and business card on it, as he continued his thought, 'Though, while I told her that fixing her car may take a week, or so. I think it is best that I start work on this in the next half hour. I only have a few cars in the back of the shop. And all them are regular customers. They can wait a couple of days. But, Balalaika... I don't want to keep that woman waiting any more than I have too...'

'Still, I wonder what B meant by my eyes reminding her of someone?... Given those they associate with, that is not good. But, since there is no way to tell, it is best I just let the matter be...'

A few days later, Hernan finished the tune up, and oil change on Balalaika car. When he finished, and had parked the car in the front of the parking lot, he immediately called the phone number of the business card that Balalaika had left with them.

An hour later, Balalaika and B, personally picked up their vehicle. They were happy with Hernan's work on their vehicle. They paid Hernan well for his work. And they then left his shop, in Balalaika Zil automobile.

(_)

It was eight thirty-two PM, on the night that Balalaika left her Zil automobile with Hernan. Night had fully fallen several minutes ago.

Inside the living room of Pedro's home, Pedro and Matthew were each having a bottle of beer.

And hour ago, Matthew had taken a taxi to Pedro home, where Pedro was waiting for Matthew, to let Matthew inside his home.

Both of them had on their work clothes. Though, Pedro had his coat hung up, on a coat rack, near the front door. And he sunglasses set on a nearby table. But, he still had his firearms on his person. Still, he kept his weapons on his person. Including, his loaded nineteen twenty-seven semi-automatic pistol, in his shoulder holster, under his left armpit.

Matthew was sitting to the couch, in the living room. There was a coffee table in front of the couch.

On the table were Pedro and Matthew's open bottles of beer, a few magazines, wireless keyboard and wireless mouse.

The keyboard and mouse were wirelessly connected to the computer, across the room, from the couch, which was part of the entertainment system. The entertainment system was connected to a large, flat, widescreen TV, that was mounted to the wall, across from the couch. Also, the entertainment system was also attached to speakers set up around the ceiling corners of the room.

To Mathew's right, Pedro sat in a cushioned recliner, The chair was set to be up right at the moment.

There was another recliner chair, opposite to the chair Pedro was sitting in, in relation to the coffee table, and couch, in the room.

Both chairs faced at a diagonal angle, to the couch, to allow the person to both see the TV, but still be able to turn to look at those on the couch, if need be.

The only lights in the room, were single, soft yellow, light bulbs, in electric lamps, setting on the two small tables, between the two chairs and the couch.

And the floor of the living room had brown carpeting.

Also, the room was quite neat, for a bachelor pad.

Presently, Pedro had his entertainment system, and TV, playing a comedy movie. The volume on the speakers were set low, to act as background noise, as the two friends talked, while watching the movie that was playing.

Their conversation had been casual, and covered a number of topics, until Matthew muttered, in english, “I don't like this place.”

Pedro overheard Matthew comment. He turned to look at Matthew, as he casually responded, in english, “This town isn't that bad. I have seen the Babylon Five series. And to be honest, Mars Dome One isn't that great a place to live. It is debatable whether there, or here, is a better place to live.”

Matthew picked up his bottle of beer from the table, and he took a drink. He then set his beer back down on the table. He looked over at Pedro. He shrugged, as he conceded, “True. But, it is not this city I am talking about. It is the casino. Chang's casino.”

Pedro asked, “When it comes to that. You have a point there. So, what is it this time that is bothering you?”

Matthew answered, “A few things. Like I am just spinning my wheels. But mostly, I just don't get the respect I think I deserve.”

Pedro let out a laugh. He then said, “You are preaching to the choir.” He then leaned over, toward the coffee table. He picked up his beer bottle, took a drink of it.

Matthew was silent as Pedro took a swallow of his beer. Pedro noticed his friend's silence.

Next, Pedro set his bottle of beer down. After which, he leaned back in his chair, as he looked over at Matthew.

Pedro commented, in a concerned tone of voice, “I know this is bothering you. So, just let it all out.”

Matthew stated, “Well, if you want. First, I could live with chaperoning the girls, to their parties. But, at the casino, it is different. I get the sense there is just no real emotional connection there between my coworkers and I. And I am trying... I get the feeling they are just too blue collar, while I am too white collar.”

Pedro responded, “That could be the case. Though, there is not much you can do about it.”

Matthew commented, “To be fair, Chang has been a good, well paying employer.”

Pedro pointed out, “That is what makes Chang so dangerous. He knows talent when he sees it. And he does his best to get the most out of people, without them realizing it.”

Matthew replied, “Thank you... I think.”

Pedro let out a small chuckle. He then said, “You're welcome. And as always, you have my sympathies.”

Matthew stated, “And you have mine. Also, the worst part is that I know that River is a telepath, and Annie is an empath. They know I am not happy, but there isn't much they can do about it. Though, Annie does try to give me advice, and she is nice to me.”

Pedro replied, “Yea, at least Annie is trying. And considering who Annie use to be, that is saying something. So, what about Lee?”

Matthew stated, “Actually, it seems like Lee is wrapped up in her own little world. Even River and Chang show this type of response to both me, and the others, from time to time. And given how those three are romantically together, it doesn't take a genius to know their reactions are connected, somehow. And I while don't know the details, I getting the feeling that Lee, River, and Chang, go to somewhere else, in the multiverse.”

“Sometimes I hear Lee occasionally talking to Chang and River about heading back to somewhere else that they don't mention to others...”

“Where? I don't know? But, it is not here, in this reality. And given time dilation between realities, they could be spending some time wherever they go. Without us realizing it. Then, there is the whole Wash and Book issues...”

Pedro commented, “I know. And with their slowed aging, they could be spending a lot of time there, without anyone else noticing.”

Matthew stated, “Yea. Lee was a lucky bastard, or bitch. That pregnancy gave her a gender bending virus that also slows down her aging. While her age had already been turned back a number of years, due to some sort of water curse, Lee mention to me, a while ago.”

Pedro pointed out, “I agree. But, even it if appears otherwise. Sometimes the grass is not always greener on the other side.”

Matthew agreed, “Very true. But, we are not getting any younger, while some of them are. Or, at least we are getting older much faster than they are.”

Pedro sadly said, “I have to agree.”

Just then Pedro and Matthew heard the near by front door open.

Pedro pulled out his Sistema semi-automatic pistol. He pulled back the slide, which chambered a round in his pistol, and cocked the hammer, as he said, “I locked the door. And I am the only one that has a key to the lock.”

Matthew muttered, “Damn it.”

Both men looked over at the short hallway that lead to the front door. The entrance to which was directly in front of Pedro, to his right, along the same wall the TV was mounted too, on the far side of the wall, from Pedro.

Pedro held his pistol, in his right hand, as he took aim in front of him.

Just then, he saw to young, fair skinned two women, in plain clothing walked his living room, as they point their AK seventy-four rifles as Matthew, and himself.

Pedro quickly thought, 'AK seventy-fours?... Oh hell, you have got to be kidding me.' He quickly use his right thumb to switch on the hammer safety to his pistol, he then let his pistol drop to the carpeted floor.

One of the women said, in russian, “Clear.”

A second later, Pedro and Matthew saw B walk into the room. She stood beside the two women, to Pedro's left.

Pedro saw that B was holding her Tokarev T T thirty-three semi-automatic pistol, in her right hand, towards him.

Pedro then saw B look down at his dropped pistol, and then back up at him. B said, in english, “That was very wise of you.”

Pedro firmly responded, “I don't know how you got in. And I know that if you wanted us dead, we would already be dead. So, what do you want?”

B grinned, as she answered, “I will let Balalaika explain.”

Pedro and Matthew, then watched as Balalaika walked into the room, from behind the two rank and file Hotel Moscow members, and B. She came to stop to stand beside B, to B's right.

Balalaika looked around Pedro's living room, as she smirked. She then look over at Pedro, as she commented, in an arrogant tone of voice, in english, “I must say. For a man that abhors bribery. You have made quite a place here, on your police salary.”

Pedro calmly replied, “I am very frugal with my money.”

Balalaika responded, “That you clearly are. Get up. We need to talk.” She then turned to Matthew, as she continued, “And you shall stay. My... women will keep you company.”

Matthew choose to remain silent, as he looked at the intruding women.

Pedro got up.

Balalaika looked at Pedro, as she calmly ordered, “You, follow me.”

Balalaika then walked around her woman, and into another hallway, on the wall, on the right side of the TV, that was across from the chair that Pedro has been sitting in.

Pedro followed, with B right behind him, while she kept her pistol in her right hand.

As soon as Balalaika, Pedro, and B, has left the room, Matthew looked at the two women, as he said, “You know? I regularly chaperon Revy, and her friends. So, don't even though about trying to intimidate me. Nothing you could pull could compare to the insanity I have seen, first hand, that she and her friends have done.”

Both of the women stopped pointing their weapons at Matthew, as one of the women commented, in english, “We know. Just sit tight, and behave. You are not the target. And Chang would be annoyed if something were happen to you.”

Matthew said, “Thanks. And I am more than willing to behave.”

The other woman replied, in english, “Good.”

(_)

In another part of Pedro's home, Pedro follow Balalaika, as a causal pace, with B right behind him.

Pedro looked at Balalaika back, as he stated, in slightly annoyed tone of voice, “We both know I am not stupid enough to try anything. So, please tell B to lower her weapon.”

Balalaika kept her back turned to him, as she said, in a playful tone of voice, “Only because you asked nicely... B, do so.”

B was silent, as she holstered her weapon, in her shoulder holster, under her left armpit.

Pedro deadpanned, “Dare I ask how you know the interior design of my home, so well?”

Balalaika retorted, “I would answer you. But, I don't want you to do something stupid.”

Pedro replied, “Fine. Let's just get this over with.”

Pedro soon realized where they were heading.

A few seconds later, they came to the end of the hallway. In front of them, was the main bathroom of the home. The door to the bathroom was open.

The closed door to his right, lead to his bedroom.

And the closed door to his left, lead to a secondary bedroom, which Pedro has converted for his hobbies.

Pedro watched as Balalaika, turned to her left, and opened the door.

As Balalaika walked inside the room, Pedro saw that she had flip on the light switch, on the interior side of the wall, by the door.

The light switch turned on the soft yellow light bulb that was attached to the ceiling light, in the center of the room, The ceiling light had a fan attachment to it. Though, the fan was turned off, by the chains on the ceiling like itself.

Pedro follow her inside, as he thought, 'She even knows where switch to the ceiling light is at.'

As Pedro walked inside, Balalaika stepped to the right side of the room, as she looked around the room.

B stayed right behind Pedro, at the threshold of the door.

The medium sized room was line with shelves that had DVDs, Blu-rays, comicbooks, manga volumes and single issue, regular books, video games, music CDs, VHS tapes, various data backup discs in plastic jewel cases, and even few Betamax tapes, and laser discs.

Balalaika then turned back to look at Pedro. She smirked, as she casually insulted, “This is such a childish hobby for a grown man.”

Pedro looked over at Balalaika. He showed no emotion on his face, as he mentally realized, 'What I have learned from those series is the only reason I am still breathing. Not that I am going to tell that to your face.'

'Still, you is clearly trying to push my buttons. But, why?... Oh... This is about the church. You much have my police station bugged, as well as likely, my home, here. And you are here to rub your victory in my face. I was right. This is all about pissing me off. But, I am not going to give you the satisfaction of showing you my anger.'

Balalaika continued to smirk, as she said, “Not bad. Even Chang could show a bit of temper at this point. If I did this to him.”

Pedro guessed, “This is about that church you just finally bought today?”

Balalaika smile widened slightly, as she answered, “Yes. You showed quite a bit of political skill. From pulling strings in the shadows. In trying to prevent us from acquiring that piece of property. But, it was all for not.” Her voice became more stern, as she continued, “And this is your only warning. Stay out of our business.”

Pedro thought, 'I cannot fight them like this. And we both know it.' He said, “Fine. But, please inform me ahead of time, on such matters, to prevent further problems.”

Balalaika grinned wickedly, as she responded, “Fair enough. And I am glad to see that both Chang, and Yurick, were correct about you. You are competent and intelligent to know when leave matters alone.”

Pedro calmly asked, “Who is Yurick?”

Balalaika responded, “Ah. You know her as Melanie, or Melvin.”

Pedro calmly said, without the hint of emotion, “Yes. We are friends.”

Balalaika replied, “Good. Then, our business has concluded.”

Balalaika then walked passed Pedro, and B, as she went back down the hallway, they way they had come.

B followed close behind Balalaika.

Pedro waited a few seconds, before he followed. To give the two women some space.

Though, as Pedro soon followed the two women, he decided to leave the light on, and the door open to his hobby room open.

Balalaika, B, and Pedro soon made it to the living room of Pedro's home.

Balalaika and B entered the living room, and continued walking further into the room. Until they came to a stop, and turned around, at a position, that allowed them to see Matthew, their two subordinates, and Pedro.

Meanwhile, Pedro stopped at the threshold of the hallway, that met the living room.

The reason Pedro stayed at the threshold of the hallway, was so he could keep his distance from Balalaika and B, so as to not startle their two armed subordinates.

And Pedro position allowed him to see the two women, armed with AK seventy-fours, look over at him. Though, Pedro noticed that they were not point their weapons at anyone. Along with this, Pedro saw Matthew, silently sitting where Pedro had left him, with the lawyer silently looking around at everyone, with just his eyes.

Balalaika noticed her subordinates reactions, as well. She turned to the two women, as she said, in russian, “Not to worry, ladies. This man firmly understands the message we came here to give him.”

Pedro saw the two women relax a little bit, as he thought, 'My russian is not that great. But, whatever she said seems to have eased the tensions in the room.'

Balalaika looked over at Pedro, as she stated, in english, “I have your number, and we will be talking, over such matters, as we just discussed, in the near future.”

Pedro remained silent, as he thought, 'I just have to keep my cool for a little be longer, and it will be over.'

Balalaika giggled a little. She then commented, “Restrained. As expected.”

Pedro remained silent, as he looked at the blond russian woman.

Balalaika turned towards her two women subordinates, and she then looked over at B, as she said in russian, “Come. We have family that is expecting us back home.”

Balalaika then walked through the living room, and towards the hallway that lead to the front door.

B, and the two other women, then followed behind Balalaika.

A few seconds after the four women left the sight of Pedro and Matthew, they heard the front door of Pedro's home slam shut.

Pedro and Matthew turned to look at each other.

Pedro was first to speak, as he inquired, “Are you alright?”

Matthew questioned, “Yea. How about you?”

Pedro said, “They only bruised my ego.”

Matthew asked, “What was that all about?”

A thought suddenly occurred to Pedro. He walked over to Matthew, around the coffee table, to Matthew's right.

Pedro then leaned down, towards the right side of his friend's head. Pedro whispered, “My home here is likely bugged. And so is likely my home phone, and the police station. This is standard operating procedure for Hotel Moscow.”

“But, I believe this is over a piece of property I was using back channels to try to prevent Hotel Moscow from procuring. And I lost. And they came here tonight to rub their victory in my face, and also warn me to stay out of their business.”

Matthew quietly replied, “Oh.”

Pedro softly said, “I think it is best if you head home tonight. Tomorrow morning, I will debug everything, and rekey my locks. We will meet back here, tomorrow, at seven PM.”

Matthew quietly responded, “That should be fine with me. I have nothing to do tomorrow evening, at seven PM, given Revy and the others don't usually party in the middle of the week.

Pedro whispered, “Exactly. We will talk then. And don't try to call me, I have an errand I need to run, that will keep me away from the office.” He mentally added, 'I need to talk to someone I know, that I completely trust, before I make any big decisions on this matter.'

'I believe I need to pull the trigger on something I have been thinking about for a long time. Though, this one trigger I want to think about very thoroughly, before I decide on what I want to do about it.'

Pedro then leaned up from Matthew.

Matthew softly replied, “Okay.”

Matthew then pulled out a cell phone, that Chang had given him, from an interior coat pocket. He dialed the number he knew, to a local taxi service liked to use.

As Matthew's phone rang, at a comfortable volume, next to his ear, he thought, 'It is unfortunate, I do not have my own vehicle, and I can only use one of the casino vehicles for official business, or when I am chaperoning Revy and the others.'

'Though, it is good that this repuable taxi service, that Pedro recommended to me, has workers that know english. Though, Pedro has been teaching me how to speak and read spanish. Still, I am nowhere near fluent enough to speak spanish in a casual conversation.'

After the phone line picked up on the other line, Matthew greeted the person he was talking to, in english.

While Matthew arranged for a taxi to come get him, Pedro walked over to the chair he had been sitting down in, before Balalaika and members of Hotel Moscow has come into his home, uninvited.

Pedro leaned down, and reached for his bottle of beer.

But, as Pedro picked bottle up, from where it was sitting on his coffee table, he felt that it was almost completely empty. With not even a swallow left.

Without drinking from the bottle, Pedro set the bottle back down on the coffee table. He then sat down in his chair.

As Pedro leaned back into his reclining chair, he thought, 'That figures... Still, at least all that spy equipment I bought will not go to waste. I may have not been able to break into their radio transmissions, but I can check for bugs and wiretapping. Though, I cannot do much about the wiretapping right now... And anyway, these are issues I will deal with in the morning. After I get some much needed sleep.'

(_)

Ten minutes later, the taxi arrive, and the two friends said their goodbyes for the night, with Pedro escorting Matthew to the front door.

After Pedro watched the Matthew get into the taxi, with the taxi driving away, soon after, he shut and locked the front door behind him.

Pedro then walked back into the living room, where he carefully picked up his gun. He immediately removed the loaded ammo magazine, with six rounds in it. Next, he set the magazine onto the coffee table.

While holding his pistol away from him, but close to his chest, with his right hand, with his right fingers all gripping under the trigger guard, away from the trigger, he used his right thumb to turn off the hammer safety, to the load weapon, with the hammer cocked back. He then placed he left hand over the slide, as he gripped it. He carefully pulled back the slide, and forty-five ACP hollowpoint round, that he ejected the round from the chamber, and into the palm of his left hand.

Pedro then let the slide go, as it the internal spring made it slide back in place. Next, with his right hand, he move the his left hand aside from the pistol, while he pointed his pistol away from himself, and towards the floor, as he dry fired the pistol.

He then set his pistol down, on the coffee table, and he picked up his ammo magazine with his right hand. He used his left hand to put the single bullet in that hand, into the ammo magazine, leaving the ammo magazine with its maximum total of rounds it can hold, at seven bullets. All of the bullets were hollowpoint rounds.

Pedro next swap hands with his ammo magazine, to where the ammo magazine was in his left hand. After which, he used his right hand to pick up his pistol, by its grip. He then slide the ammo magazine into the bottom of the grip of the gun, until it clicked in place, while the chamber of the weapon was empty, and the hammer was not cocked back.

With that all done, Pedro holstered he weapon back into his shoulder holster, under his left armpit.

With his main weapon attended to, he walked over to the coffee table, where he picked up the two nearly empty beer bottles.

He then headed into the nearby kitchen. When he reached the kitchen, he turned on a light in the room. After which, he pour what little, warm beer, was left in the bottles, down the kitchen sink. Next, he dropped the bottles into the kitchen trash can, which had a plastic trash bag in it.

Pedro walked over to his refrigerator, and opened it. He pulled out another cold bottle of beer.

With a cold bottle of beer in his hands, he turned off the light in the kitchen, and walked back into the living room. Where he turned off the lamp light that was on the table, between the couch and recliner he had been sitting in. This left only one electric lamp

Next, Pedro walked around he coffee table, and he sat down in the middle of his well cushioned couch.

As he started at the comedy movie that was still playing on the TV screen, in front of him, and across the room, he saw that the movie had just ended, with movie switching to credits.

Pedro twisted the cap off the top of the beer bottle. He tossed the cap into a nearby small trash can. And he then took a swallow of the beer inside the bottle.

After he swallowed the beer, he set the bottle down, in front of him, on the coffee table. He then picked up his universal remote. First, he turned off the blu-ray player. Next, he changed the output on the TV, from one of the HDMI outputs, to the RGB output that was connect to his computer.

Along with this, his living room sound system directly hooked up his computer.

Though, the computer was set to a log in screen.

Pedro set down his remote, and he used his wireless keyboard to type in a password to log into his computer. As he did typed, he though, 'I am going to have to check for keyloggers. Both in hardware and software form, on my computer, tomorrow... I wouldn't put it passed Hotel Moscow to try something like that... Also, I will have to change the password on my computer, just to be safe.'

As Pedro's computer account logged in, the wallpaper that came on the TV screen was a beach, looking towards the sea, at night, with a full moon rising in the sea, in the distance.

He then used his wireless mouse, on his coffee table to pull up a shortcut that lead to a file folder. He then opened another sub-folder, and selected a specific audio track to listen to.

Pedro did so, by right clicking the file, selecting, play with VLC media player. A second later, the ten minute version of the music track, Blade Runner Blues, from the sci-fi film, Blade Runner. The volume on program had already been defaulted, to be set to a comfortable level. And the music track was set to be on a continuous loop of that one musical track.

Pedro leaned back in his couch, as he listened to the music, through the speakers in his room.

As the gently rhythm of the music track started to relax Pedro, he silently contemplated, in thought, with emotional tiredness, 'How did my life go so wrong?... So, insane?... I mean, when I became a cop, I knew there would be days when the mob would lean on me... But, no one told me that the mob would be gender bending badasses from other realities... And fictional realities at that... This is extreme... Bordering on the unbelievable...'

'Also, given I have been dealing with this insanity for over the two years, I am surprised I am still breathing, along with the rest of the city, and even Matthew. And while this was just a warning. I need to do something, before one of these groups of lunatics decides a warning is not enough.'

Pedro then continued to think about what he could do. And the pros and cons, of his options. As he continued to listen to the relaxing music in the background of his living room.

A little over half an hour later, after Pedro had finished his beer, he turned off everything in the living room. He then headed to towards down the back hallway, that lead to his bedroom, bathroom, and hobby room.

First, he turned off the light in his hobby room, and shut the door to that room. Next, he went into his bathroom, to brush his teeth, among other things. And finally, he went into his bedroom, to undress, and climb into his bed, under his sheets, to get some much needed sleep.

(_)

The next morning, it was a sunny day, and was very busy day for Pedro Del Soto. After he had gotten ready, dress, and he had eaten breakfast, he called his police station to let them know that he was going to be a few hours late. And when he did arrive at the police station, he was going to need several of his officers help in a project he would be doing that day.

Given it was rarity for Pedro to come in late to work, his second in command realized it was important, and did not question him on doing so.

After hanging up his phone, Pedro walked into his garage, and he retrieved the spy equipment, he has stashed in the room, near where he kept his car park. With the garage door closed.

As he entered the garage, he turned on a light, from a switch, by the door to the interior of his home.

While the ceiling lights came on, Pedro continued walking into his garage, as he thought, 'I will have to also change the radio lock on my garage. But, it will take time to order the equipment to do so. I will just have to use the manual lock on the garage door, when I come home at night. And I will just hope no one will break in that way, while I am gone.'

Pedro then started using his spy equipment to check his home, and valuables, for bugs.

Pedro checked all his electronics, his clothing, his furniture, his car, and a few other areas of his home, for bugs, wiretapping, and explosives.

And during that time, Pedro has found several electronic bugs. But fortunately, he did not find any bombs.

Included, there were electronic bugs in each of his house phones, and one on the phone line, in the box junction located on the outside of his home.

Though, he did not find any bugs on his cellphone. But, given how easy it was to wiretap a cellphone, Pedro realize how little that meant.

Pedro found a hardware keylogger on the back of his computer tower, which he removed.

Pedro also ran an anti-keylogger program on his computer, and he found two key-loggers programs, which he removed. He also replaced the anti-virus, and firewall programs. Then, he changed the password on his computer. With him writing down the password, and putting the piece of paper with the password, somewhere safe, so he wouldn't lose it.

Among the items in his spy equipment, was a kit to rekey locks with. He used the key he had from, previous home he lived in, as the master key template for his locks. And he planned to make more keys of that key, later that day.

When Pedro finished rekeying his locked, checking for bugs, and explosives, he went to his garage, locked the garage door, leading into his home, behind him. Next, opened his garage door, to allow the sunlight in.

Once the garage door began to hope, Pedro turned off the garage door lights, and got into his car.

Pedro started his car, and he back into his paved driveway.

When he cleared his garage door, he used his remote garage door opener, he had in his car to shut the garage door. He then backed out on to the empty street, set his car to drive, and headed for the police station.

Fifteen minutes later, Pedro reached the police station. Once Pedro was inside the police station, he held a meeting with the police officers in the station at the time.

While Pedro did not state whom was behind it, he did tell his officers that he found electronic bugs in his home this morning.

His subordinates were surprised to hear the news. Though, they fulling understood, and supported his next statement, in ordering them to help him spend the rest of the morning, using the spy equipment that he had placed in the police station, for electronic bugs, wiretapping, explosives, hardware and software keyloggers. And after they were sure there were no more keyloggers, they would change the passwords to their computers.

Pedro figured that with his officers helping, he could get the job down in a few hours.

They did not find any explosives. Though, much like in Pedro's home, they found electronic bugs inside, and around the building. Including, in the phones and phones lines. On a few walls, a couple of desks. And of course in Pedro's office.

All the computer has both hardware and software keyloggers in them, which were all removed. Once that was done, Pedro had everyone, including himself, change their account passwords on the computers, in the station. Along with the passwords to the network routers.

The reason Pedro did not have the computers in the police stations replace their firewall and anti-virus programs was because he did not want to risk messing with the files on this computers, before they could do a more thorough backup, instead of just the weekly backup, he had station personal do, by burning data discs, which were storied in a fireproof room in the station.

But, Pedro did order that all the wireless network cards in the computer towers, be physically removed from the electronics, and for them all to switch to only using wired networking.

Fortunately, Pedro had prevented the removal of LAN cables they had previously used to hook their computers up to each other, and the internet, using network hubs, and a router.

Fortunately, the computer motherboards accepted LAN cable network, via plug and play protocols.

Also, Pedro had them pulled out the old, wired only network hubs out of storage.

All with the passwords to the hardware were changed, and Pedro writing down those passwords, so he would not lose them.

Along with this, Pedro had only one computer connected to the internet, and the rest were only connected to station network, due to the use of records transferring from computer to computer, for processing of reports.

This was intended as a stop gap measure, until Pedro could replace the station computers with new firewalls and anti-virus programs.

By the time Pedro, and his officers, had finished, it was eleven AM. Which gave him enough time to review the police reports from the previous night, and current morning, before he headed out to lunch, around noon.

When Pedro got ready to leave, he told his officers he would be busy that afternoon. He then exited the station, got into his car, turned on his car, exited the parking lot he had parked his vehicle in, and he entered the nearby street.

As Pedro drove towards his intended destination, for lunch, he grimly thought, 'The problem with information warfare, is one is at disadvantage, no matter precautions one takes. Balalaika and Hotel Moscow did a thorough job of bugging my home, and the station, right under our noses. I just hope I can undo, or mitigate the damage this breach of information has cost me, and my boys... Still, that is my plan B. Right now, I need to focus on plan A, which I plan to talk to someone, I trust, about, this afternoon.'

'After I get some lunch from the Last Resort Diner...'

(_)

An hour later, Pedro had just finished lunch at the Last Resort Diner, and after paying for his meal, along with leaving a nice tip, he head out of the dinner, and back into his car. After which, he drove his car out of town, to talk to one of the people he most trusted, in all the world.

While Pedro drove out of town, and to the mainland, he listened to a soft rock radio station, as he thought, 'Lewis sure can fix a good meal. And the Lowe family coming in town is likely one of the few bright spots in my life, right now.'

'Soon after Lee first escaped into the multiverse, Ed stopped hiding in the back of the Last Resort Diner, and I realized her. After which, it was not hard to figure out that the Lowe family is running the Last Resort Diner.'

'Ed is a very unique, thought beautiful women. And with Ed, Lewis, and Stan, using their real names, it did not take a genius to figure out who Lori was, nor Rico. When Rico later showed up. And Rico seems to be doing fine at her job, as one of the waitresses there.'

'Still, the Lowe clearly kept our secrets, because if they hadn't, we would have been caught long before we did. And on the day, a while back, when I politely confronted them on knowing their identities, at the end of our pleasant conversation, I thank them for that keeping my secrets.'

'Also, because they were nice, I told them that they were welcome in this town. And I stated that they were a calming influence on the their friends.'

'They agreed. And we have had a wonderful friendship since then.'

'We have also invited each other to our homes, in town, for cookouts, and movie nights. Including, inviting a few of our friends. Though, when we have a cookout at my home, we invite my friends. When we went to their home for the cookout, they invited their friends. Which was surprisingly Chang's group, including Balalaika, B, and their very young children. Much to my displeasure. Though, I noticed that no other Hotel Moscow members came to those parties. Except Melanie.'

'Still, through all this, I never got the full story on what happened to Lee and River's two kids... At least the kids I know she has had... For all I know, from bits and pieces, from what Lee and others told me, is that somehow, Lee and River's two kids became the reincarnations of Book and Wash. And a few months ago, Wash showed up a full adult, and he married Zoe soon after. But, I know better than to directly ask them questions on those matters. Though, Zoe and Wash's wedding was nice.'

'And Simon's birthday was pretty good, as well. Considering Chang directly asked me, if my boys and I would provide security. So, Chang's own security team, could take the day off, to enjoy the party, with their friends.'

'In that case, I did as Chang asked. And he paid well for my boys and I to do so.'

'I did not mind doing so, that one time. Because, by doing so, I kept their insanity from possibly causing trouble elsewhere.'

'And through all this, Matthew was there to keep me company.'

'Also, Matthew and I agreed that mixing our friends was a very bad idea. Except for Matthew, Melanie, Boa, and a few others.'

'And having Annie, the former Lord Vader herself, over to my home, with Matthew, Bao, Melanie, and a few others, for drinks.'

'I must say. Once Annie had a few drinks, and loosened up, she is surprisingly funny to talk too. Given whom she once was.'

'Though, none us dared to make a pass at her, while she was in that state of mind.'

'If I had tried that. And if I had survived the aftermath. I would have to check myself into the nut house, for being incurably insane.'

'But, to give Annie credit. She is nice enough to Matthew, my boys, and I. So, I don't mind her being here that much. And I informed Annie of this. And she was nice about my comment. Though, we both knew that I couldn't stop her from living in Plata Podrido, even if I wanted too.'

'And if I told my superiors that I did not mind having Darth Vader living in my home town. They would lock me up in the nut house, for not believing me. Or, they would lock me up in the nut house for believing me.'

Pedro chuckled a little at his joke, as he continued his thoughts, with a bit of humor, in his emotional state of mind, ''Still, back to the Lowe family. The Lowe family's home, in town, is very nice, and fairly large. And they share their home with Rico. In addition, the Lowe family, seem nice enough. If a bit odd. But, compared with everyone one else, Matthew and I, have ended up being around, the Lowe family is practically normal. Even with their gender bending issues.'

'Now, to focus on the matter at hand...'

'I am not worried about Chang, Revy, or Balalaika’s groups becoming suspicious of me suddenly leaving town. They know that I know, that they know, there is no place on this planet I can hide from them. So, I am not worried about them doing something to me if I tried to leave down. As long as I return back to town, later today, I should be fine.'

(_)

Over an hour later, Pedro reached his destination, in the Mexican mainland.

Pedro had driven his car to a rural area of the countryside.

After his car came to a stop in front of the place he was heading for, he put his car in park, and turned off the ignition of his car, pulled out his key, and undid his seatbelt.

Next, out of respect for where he was going, he left his two guns, and his knife, in the center console of his car.

After which, he got out of his car and locked the doors behind himself.

As Pedro stood by the driver's side door, he looked over his car, and up at the open front gates of the Monastery he had come to.

The monastery was fairly large for its type. But, it was not ornate. Instead, the money it was given was most often used to build onto it, than used to decorate it.

The religious complex was of a simple design, that was just spread out of linking buildings. With a concrete fence surrounding the buildings of the monastery, that was occasionally tore down and expanded, as needed.

The monastery also had a small seminary inside.

Pedro continued to look towards the open front gates of the complex, he as thought, 'From what I understand, this is the place. And I am so happy I kept in touch with him, over the last few years... Now, to find someone inside to help me find him.'

Pedro then started walking towards the open front gates.

(_)

A few minutes later, one of the members of the monastery had lead Pedro to a garden in one of the courtyards of the monastery.

When Pedro and the other man reach the garden, neither announced their presence, as they stood several feet from another person kneeling down, as he worked on a garden, with his hand.

Pedro saw a black haired mexican man, in good health and physical shape. The man appeared to be in his early forties.

The man was clothed in simply attire for the job of gardening. He was kneeing on the brick sidewalk, over the front rows of plants, about twenty feet from Pedro.

The man that had lead Pedro to the courtyard then left the area, to carry on his usual duties.

Pedro then looked around, and he thought, 'There appears to be no one here, besides me and him. Still, I have to be careful about what I say. The walls may have ears... But, I might as well get the conversation started.'

Pedro looked down, towards the man, as he calmly said, in spanish, “Hello little brother.”

Paciano Del Soto did not looked up at Pedro. He hands continued to be in the plants and soil of the garden, as he responded, in spanish, “Hello older brother. I will be with you in a few seconds.”

Paciano then got up, and he knocked some dirt off his hands. As he turned to face Pedro, he wiped the dirt that was left on his hands on the upper front leggings of his pants.

Then, as Paciano started to casually walk over to in front of Pedro, he said, “I would offer to shake your hands, but I have a little dirt on them. Still, I find this to be a spiritually clean hobby. And also, it is the only task that one can do in the priesthood, that lets them get dirty, without breaking the rules.”

Pedro chuckled a little at the last part of his brother's comment. As he quickly calmed down, he casually responded, “Don't worry about that. I have been busy cleaning the mud from the gutters.”

As Paciano came a stop, a few feet from his brother, both men laughed Pedro's joke.

A few seconds later, as they calmed down, Pedro held out his right hand and Paciano shook his hand, with his own right hand. With both men giving a firm, but not tight grip in their handshake.

As they shook hands, Paciano said, “Good to see you, brother.”

Pedro replied, “Same here, brother.”

A few seconds later, they broke their handshake.

Paciano then watched as Pedro pulled out a device, from Pedro's coat, that he recognized was used to check for electronic bugs.

Paciano said, “Do not worry. This place is not bugged. We do not allow strange people to come here, without good reason.”

Paciano could tell that Pedro trusted his comment, for Pedro put the device back into his coat.

Pedro responded, “That is good to know. I also apologize for missing your ceremony, in being ordained a deacon. I was busy keeping my city one one piece. It is a full time job. Still, congratulations.”

Paciano said, “Thank you. And I long since realized why you could not attend.”

Pedro commented, “Anyway, I am surprised you have not been transferred somewhere else.”

Paciano commented, “Well, given my past, they want to keep me here a little longer. I am not the first former criminal to take this route. But, since I have given up all my worldly possessions, and I have been a model student for the last two years. They finally made me a deacon. So, I feel I will become a priest, eventually.”

Pedro commented, “I am sure you will do fine, as long as they don't transfer you back to the island.”

Paciano said, “I doubt they will send me back to the den of iniquity and vice I that came from.”

Pedro asked, “Speaking of your past, you still in the clear with your former rivals?”

Paciano answered, “Yea. For them, I am considered an example. A laughing stock of what happens when one of us loses their nerve. But, at the same time, they leave me alone, as a way to keep that door open, in case one of them wants to someday use it.”

Pedro inquired. “What about law enforcement? I did what I could there to help you, in that area.”

Paciano responded, “Well, you did help me get in here. And the government has left me alone. It is not every day that a mafia dissolves overnight, without bloodshed, and with the leader joining the church. Those in the government seem to not care why. And I honestly believe they leave me alone because they hope others like me would take the same route, and make everyone's lives easier.”

Pedro conceded, “I can see the logic in that.”

Paciano offered, “I know it is a bit of a drive, but you should visit here more often. We have wonderful late morning services.”

Pedro admitted, “I am not much of a religious man. And after what we have both seen on the island, I don't see how you can be?”

Paciano replied, “I don't see how you could not be?”

Pedro calmly responded, “Okay. We have both seen the same things. So, how can you reconcile what we know, with your faith in God?”

Paciano answered, “I admit that is a good question. And I have done some thinking along those lines. Also, it is not something I have been able to discuss with the others here, for obvious reasons. I don't want to be thrown out of the order, after spending so much effort to get where I am at.”

“But, I did come to an answer. The way I view is that we are either worshiping the creator, or we are worshiping the creator whom was created by a greater creator. Either way, our prayers working up the prayer chain.”

Pedro conceded, “I guess that could make sense.”

Paciano questioned, “I am glad you agree. So, why are you here?”

Pedro looked Paciano in his eyes. Pedro chose his words carefully, as he said, in a sober tone of voice, “I needed to talk to someone... And it had be in person. And you are the only person... I trust, that I can talk to about this... That would understand where I am coming from... I am thinking about leaving... But, unlike you, whom got out before he was in too deep. I cannot simply run and hide...”

Paciano immediately understood what his brother was saying. As he calmly asked, “They found the safehouse that you asked me to use my contacts to help you get, years ago?”

Pedro solemnly answered, “Yes. And they found it in less than a day after I first tried to run and hide.”

Paciano responded, “I understand what you are saying. You are planning to go further?... Into the beyond?...”

Pedro softly answered, “Yes.”

Paciano cautioned, “Are you sure you can accomplish this? The people you would need to get such technology from are no fools.”

Pedro admitted, “I realized that. But, I know someone that I trust, who can get his hands on one of those devices. I have a man on the inside. And he is sick of the way they treat him, as well.” Pedro continued, in a more sober tone of voice, “It is just that I am not sure if I am ready to pull the trigger on this.”

They were silent for a few seconds. Paciano then looked into his older brothers eyes, as he responded, in a supportive tone of voice, “I think you should do it. I think you need to take this leap faith.”

Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he replied, with a bit of hope showing in his voice, “You do?”

Paciano grinned, as he answered, “Yes. The longer you wait, the worse it will get. As such, you have my blessing. And I wish you luck in your travels.”

Pedro said, in a joyous tone of voice, “Thanks.”

Paciano mentioned, “By the way, I talked to mom and dad, recently, on the phone. Considering their age, they are in good health, and doing fine.”

Pedro inquired, in a somewhat hesitant tone of voice, “That is good to hear... Still, from the way we are talking, I have to ask. When did I become the crook, and you the upstanding citizen?... When did I become the shadow to your light?”

Paciano calmly answered, “When I decided to step out of the darkness that has surrounded our lives.”

Pedro said, “And I think you are better for it...” He continued, in a sad tone of voice, “Yet, I fear that I am trapped in a dark abyss that I cannot get out of... No matter how hard I try.”

Paciano walked a few steps closer to Pedro, as he said, “Come here brother.” He then gently hugged Pedro.

A few seconds later, Pedro returned his younger brother's hug.

They held each other for a few seconds, before they broke the hug. Though, while Pedro let go of Pacino. Pacino did not completely letting go of Pedro. Instead, Paciano gently held Pedro by the sides of Pedro's shoulders, as he looked at his older brother, in his face. Paciano said, in a kind tone of voice, “Don't worry. I am sure that things will turn out well for you. Just have a little faith.”

Paciano then let go of Pedro, and he allowed his arms to drop back down to the sides of his body.

Pedro smiled, as he looked into his younger brother's eyes. He sincerely replied, “Thanks, brother.” He mentally added, 'And I think you are safe, because they know, that I know, that I could cause them trouble, if they, hurt, or killed, either of us.'

'At the end of the day, they just want me out of their business. I am not worth tracking down. So, if I lose them, I should be fine. The same goes for Matthew. As such, either way, my family will be fine.'

The Del Soto brothers then continued their wonderful conversation. With Pedro spending the next two hours visiting and talking with his younger brother. But eventually, Pedro had to leave, and returned back to the island of De La Plata Podrido. So, Pedro could finish his day at work, and later, be on time to meet with his accomplice.'

A few hours after Pedro left the monastery, he had returned to the police station. He stayed at the police station just long enough to review the police reports for that afternoon, and make sure that everything was already with his subordinates.

When Pedro was finally finished with his job, for the day, he then went to get something quick for dinner, before his meeting, at seven PM, at his home, with his friend, Matthew McCormick.

(_)

The evening, at seven two PM, Pedro stood over the outside awning of his front door, as he waited for Matthew to show up.

Behind him, the front door to his home being shut, but unlocked.

It was still daylight outside, with only the first hints of sunset showing in the sky.

Pedro thought, 'Matthew should be hear, any minute. One of Matthew's good qualities, is that he is almost always on time. So, it is likely traffic that is holding him up.'

'And I did a check around the block here, before I came home. I don't see any car, nor other suspicious vehicle, especially black SUVs, around the area, that being Hotel Moscow staked out, watching me.'

'Also, I know everyone that lives around me. There are no nearby homes that are deserted, at the moment, that can be used as stake out places again me, by Hotel Moscow. And if one of these families had trouble. They know to immediately come to me for help. Which none of them have.'

'In addition, those at Hotel Moscow, along with Chang's group, know, if they start harming, or killing the locals. Or, if the locals start to disappear, without reason. I will actively go after them. Consequences be damned. And I know that while they will eventually take my boys and I down, we will be taking some of them with us.'

Just then, Pedro saw a taxi pulled up to a stop, by the curb, on the side of the street, by his green, well kept, front lawn.

A few seconds later, after Matthew paid his fare, Pedro watched Matthew get out of the back of the taxi, on the side of the lawn. Pedro saw that Matthew was wearing one of his suits, along with his black dress shoes.

After Matthew shut the door, Matthew then turned and started walking towards Pedro.

As Pedro watched Matthew approach him, he thought, 'There he is, now.'

As Matthew's feet touched the walkway leading up to Pedro's front door, the taxi behind Matthew sped away at a casual pace.

When Matthew was about ten feet away from Pedro, Pedro asked, in english, “Any problems today?”

Matthew continued walking toward Pedro, as he looked at Pedro. He answered, in english, “No. It was just another usual day. Same insanity, during the same time of the week. How about you?”

Pedro responded, “It has been a busy day for me. But, the day is over. Now, let's go inside, get a beer, and talk.”

Matthew agreed, “Good idea.”

As Matthew came within a few feet of Pedro, the police chief opened the door to his home, and he held it open for his friend.

Matthew then walked inside Pedro's home, with Pedro following behind him. Pedro gently shut and locked his front door, behind himself.

(_)

A minute later, Matthew and Pedro each had a beer. Pedro was sitting on the couch, as Matthew sat in the cushioned reclining chair, to Pedro's left side, which was closest to the front door, and not the chair that Pedro has sat in the previous night. The chair was set to where Matthew was sitting up.

They each had an open, cold, beer bottle sitting near them, on the coffee table.

The TV in the room was turned off, and the only light coming from the room was the daylight streaming in through the front, windows of Pedro's living room. With the windows having white privacy curtains covering them. This allowed light in, but no one could see into the room.

As the two men got conformable in this seat, Matthew turned to Pedro, as he asked, in a direct manner, “So, are the bugs taken care of?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he answered, “Yes. I even did another sweep, when I got home, a little while ago.”

Matthew replied, “Good. So, we don't have to worry about eavesdroppers?”

Pedro stated, “Not for right now. I even used my equipment to check for laser based eavesdropping for my windows.”

Matthew responded, “Okay. Now, let us get down to business. Was it me, or was last night a very close call for both of us?”

Pedro flatly replied, “Yes. It was. For both of us. The question now is, what are we going to do about it?”

Matthew commented, “Well, the obvious reaction would be to run. But, both of us are intelligent, and savvy enough, not to immediately jump, without first weighing all our options.”

Pedro agreed, “Exactly.” He mentally added, 'This is precisely why I talked to my younger brother, earlier today.'

Matthew thought, 'Okay. I will play sounding board to you, Pedro. You always have something interesting to say, on just about everything.' He inquired, “So, what are our options? And what are the possible consequences of those options?”

Pedro thought, 'Since I am spearheading this meeting. I might as well answer the hard questions.' He stated, “It all comes down to the two most simplest options. We stay? Or, we run? Either way, we are taking risks.”

Matthew said, “Yes. So, let's talk about the easiest option. We just stay.”

Pedro commented, “If we stay, we are going to have to deal with intimidation problems. Such as my eroding authority.”

Matthew stated, “And my sputtering legal career. As long as I am Chang's personal lawyer, I can't do some of the things I wanted too, when I first worked to become a lawyer.”

Pedro said, “And from what we saw last night, my hands are tied as well, when it comes to the actions of Hotel Moscow, and Chang's group.”

Matthew mentioned, “Then, there are these drunken parties, we get dragged into, that Revy and her group keeps putting on at the Rats Nest.”

Pedro complained, “And the worst part is all of them are spoken for, or too crazy, or untrustworthy, to make a pass at.”

Matthew agreed, “I know. It is like from the poem, The Rime of the Ancient Mariner. Water, water, everywhere. Nor any drop to drink.”

Pedro responded, “I agree. Because we are dragged there to be their designated drivers, we are not even allowed to drink alcohol. And we cannot risk letting our minds wonder, nor our allow our guards to go down around them, because one of them might become violent, due to being drunk. And I don't dare arrest them, because it would be suicide for me, and they know it.”

Matthew said, “So, it comes down to, if we stay, we are going to have to put our figurative feet down, and establish some boundaries with the others.”

Pedro pointed out, “Yes. But, these are the type of people that don't react well to people saying, no, to them.”

Matthew stated, “That is an understatement.”

Pedro commented, “If we assert ourselves too much, we will only get ourselves killed, or worse.”

Matthew said, “And if we stay, and do nothing, we are likely living on borrowed time.”

Pedro responded, “Yes. It is only a matter of time before Chang, Balalaika, Revy, or one of the others, comes to the conclusion we have outlived our usefulness. Then, they will either kill us. Which, given how nice we have been, our deaths will likely be swift, mostly painless. Or, they will decided they want to try to make us even more useful, while ironing out those parts of our personalities they don't like. Which means a fate worse than death.”

Matthew guessed, “That gender bending, brainwashing vat process?”

Pedro replied, “Yes.”

Matthew stated, “Okay. Then, we need to run. If you are half as clever as I know you are, I am sure you already have at least a few safehouses pre-prepared, elsewhere on this planet, long before Chang and the others showed up. We can just bug out to one of them, until we figure out a better plan.”

Pedro said, “Running to one of my safehouses will do us no good. We cannot outrun them that way. As I found out the hard way, when I ran to one of my best one safehouse, in South America. And they found me in under a day.”

Matthew replied, “Damn. I wish you had mentioned that sooner.”

Pedro commented, “Sorry. It is one of the more intense stressful, and embarrassing moments of my life. It was Revy, Fabiola, and Roberta that came to visit me. Right after I woke up. And Roberta had on his slasher smile, inches from my face.”

Matthew questioned, “Say no more. I understand. I have had a similar experience with that woman... And going to your authorities is a bad idea?”

Pedro answered, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “In so many ways. Either we end up in the nuthouse, or they believe us, and they disappear us in a bad way. Or, Chang and the others, from out I spilled the beans on them, and they will likely have Roberta track us down, and we find out what they can really do, when they are upset.”

“I was in that situation once. When they found me at my safehouse. I barely going out of that incident in one piece. I don't want to roll the dice on something like that happening again. It is too damn risky. As such, any of those paths will likely lead to a horrible, slow, painful death for both of us.”

Matthew stated, in a sober tone of voice, “This situation just keeps getting worse for us.”

Pedro commented, “True. But, we do have another option. If you could get your hands on a reality device, we could run by reality jumping.”

Matthew pointed out, “From what I understand, doing that hasn't really worked out for anyone that has tried.”

Pedro commented, “True. But, then I am far more savvy than most people. At the worst, we have a lot of fun, before they find us, and bring us back here.”

Matthew thought about Pedro's comments for a few seconds. He then mused, “I have to admit that your idea has some merit.”

Pedro asked, with a mix of interest and seriousness in his tone of voice, “So, are you in? Will you do it?”

Matthew thought, 'Well, Annie did want me to take more risks. And the situation is starting to get a little too close from my comfort.' He said, “Okay. I will do it.”

Pedro commented, “Good. Still, there is the matter of getting passed River and Annie psychic abilities?”

Matthew replied, “I have a few tricks of my own. Annie is only tipped off with emotions. And I can control my emotions. And a clear mind can get past, River. Besides, I know their daily schedules. And neither of their schedules rarely change. So with luck, I can simply avoid them.”

Pedro responded, “Excellent. So, how do you plan to get the job done, without alerting the others?”

Matthew explained, “Several months ago, I realized I might need emergency access to some of the more restricted places of Chang's casino. In case I decided to try to make a run for it.”

Pedro commented, “So, you have thought stealing a reality device and running?”

Matthew flatly said, “Of course, I have thought about doing it. But, at the time, I did not know anyone that would help me. Getting the reality device is the easy part. The hard part is figuring out where, and when, to go.”

Pedro happily thought, 'Good. You were already planning and preparing to do this months ago. And you where just waiting for help. Like from me. And I don't mind you not telling me. Because, in dealing with telepaths and empaths. The less people that know a plan, the better.'

'Also, this means you can hide you thoughts from them for a very long time. I wonder how you can do that? Though, I will ask you later. Right now, you have a plan, and we have a window of opportunity to move on it.'

'Now, to inform you of what I can bring to the table, that you might not be aware of.'

Pedro responded, “Good point. But, not to worry. I know of several realities, places, and times, we could go to, and have a lot of fun at.”

Matthew replied, “Exactly. You are like, Lee, and Bob. Or should, I say, Lori?” He thought, 'It was an interesting experience, learning about the Lowe family, in person, when I went to the Last Resort Diner for some supper one night. Though, back to the matter at hand. And I know what you can offer me. That I lack. Because, to quote Lee, so long ago. You're my navigator.'

Matthew continued, “Your knowledge has allowed you to create a map of the multiverse in your head. A map that I am currently lack.”

Pedro said, “Well, all it takes is time, and learning about some of the nicer places in the multiverse, through collections like I, and other people, have.”

Matthew commented, “Yes. But, we just don't have the time to go through all of your collection.”

Pedro thought, 'Now, to find out how you plan to pull off your theft.' He questioned, “Unfortunately, not at the moment. So, how do you plan to get passed security?”

Matthew answered, “I have a lot of experience of getting passed security. And I know several tricks to quickly, and successfully clone security cards, just by passing by them. I cloned Mal's security key card, by using a face card reader, when he wasn't looking. The hard part was finding a place in town that would sell me that item, without alerting those at the casino. From there, it was not difficult to finding someone to make me a copy of Mal's key card.”

“Also, I know Mal's password. I have even successfully tested it. And I found it worked, because I wasn't caught. The password is the local date of when the Battle of Serenity ended, in his home reality.”

“After seeing the Firefly series and Serenity movie, it wasn't hard figuring out that was his password. And it wasn't hard looking up that date, offering Jayne a few drinks for free, got me all the information I needed to know, on dates, of his and Mal's home reality, without Jayne realizing why I wanted those dates. By the way, thank you for showing me that series and movie.”

Pedro commented, “You're welcome. And that man just cannot fully let go of his past.”

Matthew replied, “I know. And it is a lesson we should learn, so we can avoid such mistakes.”

Pedro responded, “You're right. So, do you know where the reality devices are stored?”

Matthew answered, “Yes. I know where some of them stored, along with other spare equipment. Such as their reality tracking devices, and odder pieces of equipment. I am sure that Mal's key card will work on the door leading to that room. And I have some understanding of how security in the casino works, so I can avoid being caught.”

Pedro complimented, “That are some nice, devious skills you have there.”

Matthew grinned, as he asked, “Thank you. So, what should we pack?”

Pedro stated, “We travel light. No luggage. And I will handle money and expenses, considering it will raise red flags if you take you gold from Chang's vaults.”

Matthew replied, “Good point. While it is tempting to try to get some of my gold. The treasury vaults are kept in the basements of the casino, pass where the casino cages are, below the ground floor. And it would raise questions if I tried to head down there.”

Pedro said, “I am glad you are not greedy.”

Matthew responded, “So am I. But, we will still need some form of currency. How do you plan to handle our expenses?”

Pedro replied, “Not to worry, I have some gold coins I have collected over the years. We can use them for barter and trade, for supplies, food, and lodgings. Also, I have some old U.S. cash. Before the U.S. went crazy on how they made their bills of currency. Which I am sure the newer dollar bills the U.S. made will not be accepted as cash in some of the more recent, past eras I wish to go too. But, I don't have a lot of that cash. So, we will have to rely mostly on the gold I have. Still, we have options.”

Matthew said, “That should be fine. U.S. cash has its limits. And in most cases, gold is still a respected medium for trade. Even if my home reality.”

Pedro asked, “Precisely... By the way, since we are going to reality travel, do you think we could get in touch with your old boss, Michael Garibaldi. He would make for one powerful ally. From what I understand, given what you told me, even Chang and the others thought twice about attacking him. And I think we would hit it off well.”

Matthew stated, “I think you guys would make great friends. The problem is I am not sure if he ever returned to his home.”

“Lee mentioned, in passing, that he did return home. But, I am not sure. And even if he did, I don't think he could protect us. Keep in mind, while I left beforehand, they did finally attack Edgars Industries headquarters. So, they were not as timid when facing Garibaldi, as we would have hoped.”

Pedro replied, “True. And I admit that it was a long shot, anyway.”

Matthew asked, “So, how many reality devices do you want me to bring?”

Pedro answered, “Just one.”

Matthew questioned, “Just one? Why? I mean if the one we have breaks, we will likely be stranded in the time, place, and reality, we traveled too.”

Pedro replied, “I have a very good reason. While I love preparedness and redundancy, if we take more than one, Chang and the others, when they do the inventory, might think we are going to try to get rich by selling our spare. In which case, they will never stop looking for to us, to prevent their reality technology from falling into the wrong hands... Well wronger hands than them?”

Matthew conceded, “Good point. Now, when and where do we meet after I steal one of the reality devices?”

Pedro suggested, “How about back here, at three PM tomorrow? That should give you plenty of time. And that time also allow us to be fully awake, without being tired. While also already having our lunches, beforehand.”

Matthew shrugged, as he replied, “That works for me.”

Pedro said, “Good. We will start our grand adventure through the multiverse, then.”

Matthew commented, “You sound like you are looking for to it.”

Pedro chuckled a little. He then said, “Oh but I am. More than you could imagine.”

The two men then continue to refine their plan for another hour, until they called it a night. With Matthew calling a taxi to take him back to Daiyu Palace Casino, for him to get some rest. While Pedro went to sleep early that night, as well.

(_)

The next morning was one of trepidation, and personal conflict, for Pedro.

Pedro knew he had to leave the city, but his personal sense of duty conflicted with what he knew he had to do.

Though, even duty had its limits for Pedro. And the risks were far worse for him than staying,

Also, Pedro had no doubts that Matthew would be able to pull his part of the plan. All Pedro had to do was subtly set things up, so when he left, the city would not collapse without him.

Then, all Pedro would have to do is return to his home, and wait to meet up with Matthew, that afternoon.

As such, Pedro's morning at the police station was one of tying up loose ends on a few cases. He made some changes on the daily assignments, and promoted a few people to positions that he knew they would do well at.

Also, he please a weekly duty schedule with his second in command.

Pedro also lied to his subordinates, as he stated he was going on a vacation for a few days.

Pedro hated lying, but if he told them that he wasn't planning on coming back, such news would quickly reached Balalaika, Chang, and Revy. Any of whom Pedro did not want to find out about his and Matthew's plans.

It was eleven thirty-two AM when Pedro had finally finished he business at his police station. He left though the front entrance of the building. As he exited the police station. He turned around, to take a long, hard look at the building that he had worked in for so many years.

Then, sighed. After which, Pedro turned around, and he headed for his car, to drive back to him home.

(_)

Twenty minutes later, most of which was due to traffic, from lunch rush, Pedro made it back home. He used the remote in his car to open the garage door, he then drove his car into his garage, and parked it.

Pedro then got out of his car, and he locked the car doors, right before he closed the driver's side door.

Pedro then walked over to the door that lead into his home. The door was locked, and he used a key to unlock the door. After which, he used his a switch by the door to shut the garage door behind him.

Once he saw the garage door fully close, he entered into his own, he locked that door behind him.

Next, Pedro headed for his bedroom.

When he reached his bedroom, he found the curtained windows of his bedroom allowed in enough outside sunlight to see with.

Pedro headed over to his chest of drawers.

Pedro opened one of the top drawers and reached into the top of the drawer, with his right hand. There, he found a small bag he had taped to the ceiling of the drawer.

He pulled the bag off the top of the drawer, and pulled it out.

Pedro held the black cloth bag for a second in his right hand. While taped to the top of the drawer, the back has been very flat. But, now the bag was in his right hand, and it fill Pedro's cupped right hand.

Also, along with having tape on it, the bag was closed with a drawstring that was tied in a shoe tied knot.

Pedro used his left hand to undo the knot. Next, he cupped his left hand, as he used his right hand to pour the contents of the bag into his left hand.

As the contents fell into Pedro's left hand, they were revealed to be several different types of gold coins.

After Pedro made sure he had gotten the gold coins out of the bag, he looked down at the coins, as he thought, 'This should keep us going for about a month. Maybe longer. So, we should have some breathing room. And I tested all of the coins. They are genuine.'

Pedro then dropped the coins into various pockets of both his long coat, and pants. He then also pulled out, and pocketed, the other items in the bag, which were a few of rolls he had of old U.S. twenty dollar bills. All of the twenty dollar bills, in the rolls, dated back to around the middle of the twentieth century.

When that was done, Pedro set the bag on top of the counter of the chest of drawers, next to several items that Pedro kept as souvenirs of his many adventures.

Among the many mementos on top of the chest of drawers, that he had collected over a lifetime, he eyes were drawn to two particular items.

One of the items, was the green empty bottle of Ardbeg Providence. The other item was a brown wooden, rectangular box, that Ardbeg Providence had original came in.

This was the same bottle of Ardbeg Providence, and box, that River gave Lee, years ago, the day after their big, million dollar, poker game, which Lee one.

And Pedro was present, at the Rats Nest, for the toast using the bottle of Ardbeg Providence. After the toast was over, and the bottle was empty, Lee had given both the bottle, and the box it came in, to Pedro, as a gift, for his help.

Later that day, Pedro returned home, and placed the items on top of his chest of drawers, with a few other items.

As Pedro looked at the box and bottle, he thought, with a bit of melancholy, 'Its been a wild ride. But, this cowboy cop knows when it time to ride into the sunset... Now, to get some lunch. Once that is done, I will get a few ammo boxes. Of the proper calibers. With both armor piecing, and hollowpoint rounds. For my pistols, magazines, and speedloaders. It is nice to have options... I will put the items in my coat, and then I will be all set.'

Pedro then turned around, and exited his bedroom, as he headed for his kitchen, to fix himself some lunch.

(_)

Just over two and a half hours later, at two thirty PM on the dot, inside the back, restricted part, of the second floor of Daiyu Palace Casino, Matthew was beginning his heist operation.

Matthew was wearing his dark brown business suit that day. Which was dark brown pants, coat, and belt. With a white button up shirt under the coat. And there was a t-shirt under his button up shirt. Along with white underwear and white socks, he wore black polished dress suits, and dark brown tie around his neck.

All in all, with Matthew's clean shaved face, and parted, short hair, he looked very professional.

The reasons that Matthew was on the second floor was that this was the floor that Chang had some of his reality devices stored in.

Chang figured that technology that he did not want others, outside his organization, to see, but he still wanted access to, would be placed on the second floor. So, while the basement, with the cages, vault, and research sections, in the basement levels, could be sealed off, in case of flooding, technology, such as the reality devices were stored on the second floor.

Though, Matthew also learned, that when the basement levels were sealed, there were air systems, with plenty of fresh water, food, and supplies, on those levels, in several locations, that could keep people from suffocating for a few months.

At the moment, Matthew had already used his cloned key card, of Mal's key card, to open the door to the restricted part of the second floor, and he was heading for the locked, storage room that had the reality devices, along with other technology, inside it.

Matthew knew where he was going because, out of kindness, Annie had given him a tour of the place a while ago.

Annie had even shown Matthew what the various pieces of technology did. So, he knew what a reality device looked like. And Annie even showed him how he could tell if the device was functioning, without using it.

Matthew turned a corner, and he saw the door, to his left, on the far end of the hallway.

As Matthew approached, looked around, and he saw there were no one else around.

While continued to walk, Matthew thought, 'Good. No one else is here. As expected. If I am caught here, it is going to take some serious explaining. The good news is that I know that both resident physics like me. And Annie, while only a friend, has even tried to be helpful. So, even if Annie, or River, did learn what we were planning, there is still some wiggle room to save our skins, before they would alert Chang. And I think Lee would help also.'

'And speaking of Annie and River. I made sure to know where they were going to be, at this time of day, before I tried this. River is with Lee, in their penthouse apartment. I don't know what they are doing up there. Nor, do I want to know. As far as I am concerned, they could be having fun in their hot tub, or private heated pool up there, as long as they don't get in my way.'

'And as Chang's lawyer, I have access to daily schedule of a number of his employes. Including Annie. And while I don't know what she is doing. I know when and where she is going, from day to do. Right now, Annie is running an errand away from the casino, with Arcee.'

'So, my two biggest concerns are not here. And as for the rest of the security here. It is just understand human nature...'

'And doing this reminds me of some of the more foolish things I did in my youth. And my old friend and I have broken in and out of far more tighter security than this, while both of us were stoned out of our minds... Damn. I miss him. And I hope to someday find out what happened to him... But, not until I get clear of this mess, and get my life straightened out.'

'And speaking of security, I know that the security cameras on this part of the building are not pulled up on the monitors, unless someone tries to break into this area, with brute force. The cameras are mostly concerned with making sure the customers are not cheating on the gaming floor, and private game rooms, and the customers are kept out of the employees only sections of the first floor.'

'So, I don't have to worry about anyone in the security section seeing me seeking around here. Though, there will be a recording of me doing this. And I am sure they will eventually notice me gone, and trace back my steps to here. But, by then, I will be long gone, with Pedro by my side...'

'Now, to do the task at hand. The first rule of any break in is to have you escape planned and ready, in advance. I already called a taxi to pick me up, out front. The taxi should be here in ten minutes. Just enough time to get the device, check to make sure it works, and then head back downstairs. If my calculations are correct, I will arrive at Pedro's home just after three PM... And I do admire being punctual.'

Matthew then came to the locked door leading the storage area for some of the technology Chang had in his possession.

Matthew turned to face the door, as he pulled out his security key card.

He used the key card on card reader by the door. He then typed in Mal's password, on the numerical pad below the card reader.

A second later, the green light blinked on top of the card reader. Matthew reached out, and opened the latch on the door, and he then pushed open the door.

Matthew walked inside, as he pocketed his key card, and flipped on the wall switch to the ceiling lights of the room.

As the soft white florescent lights, on the ceiling came on, Matthew saw various technological devices lining the rows of the shelves in the room.

But, there were no weapons. Due to the a few weapon armories being kept in various parts of the casino. Such as near the vaults, in the security section, and in the penthouse. Among other locations.

Matthew gently shut the door behind him. Fortunately, he did not need to use his key card, nor password to exit the room.

Matthew knew exactly where the reality devices in the room were stored. He briskly walked passed a few shelves, until he found what he wanted.

As he faced the shelves lined with reality devices, he did not pick up the first reality device on the shelve in front of him, that was at his chest level.

Matthew thought, 'It is more than likely that if any of these devices were used before, it would be the ones on the end of the shelves. So, I will get another one, further down the shelve, and use the readout on it to test to make sure it is working. I am glad Annie showed me how to do this.'

'Given she was once Darth Vader, Annie really does like to show off her toys.'

Matthew picked up the third reality device, lining the row, on the shelf, he was looking at.

Matthew then carefully checked to see if it was working, by pressing a couple of buttons at the bottom of the device, away from the large red button in the middle of the device.
A second later, the readout at the top lead up for moment, showing that the device was in working order.

Matthew pocketed the reality device into his left, side pants pocket, as thought, 'Now, to get out of here.'

Matthew then exit the room, with him turning off the ceiling lights to the storage room, before he left.

After he gently closed the door to the store room, behind him, he turned, and casually walked back the way he had come.

The reason Matthew was calmly walking, and not walking in a hurried manner, was that experience had taught him that remaining calm drew less suspicious looks from others. Especially, security personnel.

Matthew then soon made it out of the restricted area on the second floor, and to the front elevator bay.

A few minutes later, he exited one of the elevator, in the first floor, elevator bay. From there, he calmly walked passed the two guards, by the express elevator, as he turned, and made his way through the gaming floor, the front area of the lobby. Matthew then made it out the front entrance, to be under the large awing, which was also a large carport covering, that was in front of the main entrance to the casino.

Once Matthew exited the casino, he came outside, just in time to see the taxi he had called drive up to the front, to stop by the curb in front of him, with the right side of the car facing Matthew.

The female valets, outside, under the awning, knew who Matthew was, and they paid him no mind, as he walked up to the right, back seat door to the taxi. Matthew then open the back right door, got inside, and gently shut the door behind himself.

Matthew gave the taxi driver instructions on heading to Pedro's home. And the taxi then drove away from the casino, as the vehicle had soon exited the parking lot, and on the streets of De La Plata Podrido.

(_)

Over twenty minutes later, inside the living room of Pedro Del Soto's home, Pedro was standing by the right front corner of the room, across from the entrance to the hallway that lead to the front door to his home.

He was dressed in his usual clothing, including his long coat, along with other items he planned to take with him into the multiverse.

The lights, appliances, and most of the electronics, in the home were turned off.

Pedro was peeking out the edge of his white curtains, with his left finger, allowing him to see out into his front yard, as he patiently waiting for Matthew to show up.

The reason why Pedro was not standing outside his doorstep, as he waited for Matthew to show up, like he sometimes did, was that given the situation, he stayed inside, and out of sight, just in case Matthew was caught, and he would not be a sitting duck.

Pedro looked across the room, and over at the DVR clock, under his wall mounted TV.

The clock's digital read out stated, three o'clock PM, sharp.

Pedro looked back through the curtains of the window, as he thought, 'Matthew should be here any minute...'

'Still, if he doesn't show. I have a plan for that, too...'

'The one part I didn't tell Matthew about my plan was my plan B. Given his punctuality, if he is over an hour late, I will know he got caught, or something went wrong. Either way, I am taking my car and running. Anyone who checks with the police station will likely hear about the vacation cover, which will likely buy me a few days before they start coming after me. Unless, then go back in time, and come after me just after I leave... Lord, I hope not...'

'And while I know they will likely catch me, I am not going to make it easy on them.'

'Still, if Matthew does show up, I will go outside to greet him. That way if they track us to here, they won't like break down the door to my home, to find out where we reality jumped at.'

A few seconds later, Pedro saw a taxi pulled up beside his front lawn, and come to a stop.

Soon after, Pedro saw Matthew stepping out of the taxi.

Pedro happily thought, 'Ah... There he is... We better get out of here a quickly as possible.'

Pedro then head for the front door of his home.

A few seconds later, as Pedro open the front door, and exited his home. With him gently shutting the door, he saw that taxi was gone, and Matthew was calming walking towards him.

Pedro quickly turned back the door, pulled out his keys, and he locked both the door knob, and the deadbolt of his front door, with his new key for his locks.

He then pulled back his key, and pocketed.

After which, Pedro turned back around, to see Matthew standing about six feet from them.

Pedro asked, “Any problems?”

Matthew replied, “No.”

Pedro questioned, “Did you get it?”

Matthew said, “Yes. I got it. And here it is.” He then pulled out the reality device, from a pocket, and he handed it to Pedro.

Pedro looked down at the TV remote shaped reality device, as he took it from Matthew's hands. He replied, “Thank you.” He continued to look at the reality device for a few more seconds, as he muttered, “This is such a small thing. It is surprising what it can do.”

Matthew stated, “Experience has taught me that small things can cause big problems.”

Pedro looked back up at Matthew, as he agreed, “You are right about that. So, would you like to head back to Mars, first? Even if it is just to visit.”

Matthew answered, in a sober tone of voice, “No. I left the morning after the night of both a police massacre, that insane chase, and that attack on Edgars Industries headquarters. And I am the only person still breathing that the authorities can tie to all three events. They may try to blame me for the mess.”

Pedro commented, “So, you are going to have to wait, until you are sure Garibaldi has returned? So, he can straighten out this mess for you?”

Matthew sadly replied, “Yes.”

Pedro commented, “Okay. That is not a bad plan.”

Matthew responded, with a bit more joy in his tone of voice, “Thank you. So, where do you want to go?”

Pedro answered, “I have a place, time, and reality, in mind, for a couple of reasons. But, first, I have to ask. And I don't like asking this question, but it has to be asked. Do you need to go to the bathroom, before we leave?

Matthew snorted, as he stated, “No. I am good. But, I agree that question had to be asked.”

Pedro looked at Matthew more closely, as he commented, “I see you still don't have a weapon on you.”

Matthew said, “I prefer to leave the fighting to others.”

Pedro shrugged, as he responded, “Fine. Your choice. I will handle the ass kicking. You will handle the paper work.”

Matthew agreed, “Works for me.”

Pedro inquired, “Now, onto another question that has to be asked. Have you got everything you wanted to bring with you?”

Matthew answered, “Yes. I am ready to go. And I take it you are, as well?”

Pedro replied, “Yes.”

Matthew requested, “Then, let's go.”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “I thought you would never ask. Now, take a step closer, we will get out of here.”

Matthew walked up to stand beside Pedro.

Pedro had the reality device in his right hand, as he looked down at it. He placed his right thumb over the red button in the middle of the remote, as he asked, “Are you ready?”

Matthew answered, “Yes. And don't worry. I have done this before. You won't feel anything when it happens.”

Pedro replied, “Okay.” He then thought of the exact reality, place, and time, he wanted to go to, and he then held that thought, as he press the reality device.

The next thing Pedro and Matthew knew, they were standing in an alleyway, between two, three story buildings.

From above them they saw that it was a sunny day. And they noticed that the temperature was warm, but not hot.

As Pedro continued to look around, he commented, with slight surprise in his tone of voice, “That was quick.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he calmly said, “I know. So, where and when are we?”

Pedro looked back at Matthew, as he pocket his reality device, in his right side pants pocket. He answered, “Well, I figure they will start tracking us. So, I brought us to a time and place that will make them think twice before coming after us.”

“We are in an alleyway, in Roanapur, Thailand. The date is March nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one. I believe it is a Tuesday. I needed a date, and I choose that one. It is early afternoon. So, everywhere we might want to visit is open. And we have plenty of time before dark. When we probably need to leave the city.”

“Also, given the date, this is before Hotel Moscow, and Lagoon Company, came to Roanapur.”

Matthew smiled towards Pedro, as he understood what Pedro was stating. Matthew commented, “So, besides some minor criminals. While whom are vicious, but not very bright. We only have to worry about Chang, and his group.”

Pedro returned Matthew's grin, as he stated, “Exactly. And since Chang has always been a bit of a hands on type of person. He, or more aptly, she will come back to this time to track us done. With likely River and Lee. And Chang will have to do so as a woman, so her past self, and others here, don't recognize her, and risk creating a paradox.”

Matthew complimented, “Nice plan.”

Pedro replied, “Thanks.”

Matthew inquired, “So, is this the same reality as in the anime, and those crazy stories?”

Pedro responded, “Yes. I figured there was no point in involving alternate timelines.”

Matthew replied, “I agree. Still, it is a bit hot out here. Even for what I am wearing. And it has got to be hot for you.”

Pedro stated, “The city is by the eastern coast of Thailand. Once we get on the open streets, there should be a sea breeze that will help. And I have gotten use to wearing this clothing during hot days, back at my island. And you will get use to it, as well. You don't want to leave any clothing behind, that you might need in the next reality we good too.”

Matthew responded, “I see your point. Now, let's head out of this alleyway.”

Pedro complimented, “Good idea.”

Both men then turned, as the casually walked out of the alleyway, side by side.

A few seconds later, they walked out of the alley, and onto the sidewalk of a street. They both looked around, and they saw only a few people in the distance, on both sides of the street.

Both men looked then at each other. Matthew asked, “So, which way do you think we should go?”

Pedro answered, “Though, I have seen a map.” He thought, 'From the Black Lagoon anime, episode twenty-six, An Office Man's Tactics.' He continued, “It was mostly unmarked. So, I am not sure, myself.”

Matthew inquired, “Well, do you have a destination in mind?”

Pedro answered, “I always wanted to get a cold, decent beer at the Yellowflag.”

Matthew said, “Well, that is a good start. We will go right, and keep walking until we find someplace we recognize. Or, we can ask directions.”

Pedro replied, “Works for me. While Thai is the main language in this city, many people people here also speak english. And a few even speak spanish.”

Matthew commented, “Well, at least the language barrier here won't cause many problem.”

Pedro agreed, “You got that right.”

The two men turned to the right, and started walking down the sidewalk, as Pedro casually questioned, “So, anything else you want to ask me?”

Matthew responded, “Well, yes. But, let us not drop any names. Too many ears nearby.”

Pedro replied, “Agreed.”

Matthew said, “I understand why most of the people use the types of weapons they do. But, I do not understand why ms redhead uses her two weapons at once.”

Pedro realized Matthew was speaking about Revy, as he inquired, “The Inox Beretta ninety-two FS pistols?”

Matthew replied, “Yes.”

Pedro answered, “While I can understand the Inox, which is stainless steal, and protects the pistols from saltwater rust. I don't know why she uses those particular types of pistols either. Nor, do I know why she fired them both at the same time.” He thought, 'I have to pistols. But, on is my main weapon, and one is my holdout, includes I have problems with my main weapon, or I lose it in battle.'

Matthew said, “Well, I guess it is just one of those mysteries we won't solve any time soon.”

Pedro shrugged, as he agreed, “I guess so.”

The two men then continued walking down the sidewalk, in search of the Yellowflag bar.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 02: “Greener Grass On The Other Side.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Lee and Pedro's Home Reality. Location, Daiyu Palace Casino. Plata Podrido, Mexico. Date, the morning after Pedro and Matthew left Pedro and Lee's home reality.

It was sunny during the late morning, with River being inside the living room of her penthouse apartment.

The only light coming into the room was the sunlight from the draped windows.

A little while ago, River and Lee had just finished their morning exercising, in the employee gym in, in the back of the casino, on the first floor. And they had come up to the apartment to shower, and change their clothing.

After doing so, Lee had just left the apartment, heading for the basement of the casino, to meet with Chang, about a shipment of something that Chang had delivered to his casino.

River was currently female.

Besides River's bra, panties, and white soaks, River was wearing casual clothing, the consisted of red pants, a white t-shirt, and some black tennis shoes.

As River walked over to the phone, she had something on her mind.

River thought, 'Where is Matthew?... I have not seen him since he had lunch in the casino restaurant yesterday afternoon. And as much as I think he is due for some time off, I think he owes it to us to tell us to our faces that he needs a vacation. Which we would be more than happy to give him.'

'And while Chang and Lee said not to worry about him. That Matthew will turn up. I am not so sure. Even, Annie told Lee and I, in the gym, that she had not seen Matthew all morning, nor last night. And that concerns me.'

By then, River reached the phone, on a small table. As she came to a stop, she picked up the wireless phone off its base, with her right hand.

As River dialed a phone number she had in mind, she thought, 'Now, the next step in finding Matthew, is to ask his friends. Since, Annie likely doesn't know where Matthew is, I will call Pedro and talk to him. I am sure he will have the time to speak to me.'

River then place the phone by her right ear, as it rung a few times.

When the other line picked up, River calmly said, in spanish, “Hello. Could I please speak to Police Chief Del Soto.”

The woman on the line answered, in spanish, “I am sorry ma'am, but the chief has gone on vacation for a few days.”

River replied, “Thank you.”

She then hung up her phone, and placed it back on its recharging base. As she turned to look towards the curtained windows of the room, she thought, 'My instincts tell me that Pedro is involved with Matthew's disappearance. And saying one is going on vacation for a few days, would likely give Pedro and Matthew a good head start, before people would start asking questions.'

'Though, it looks like I started asking questions sooner than they expected.'

'Though, the question is, if those two decided to run off together, what could have caused them to jump ship so suddenly?...'

'For them, they have had to work with us for over two years... It is not like any of us have threatened them. We haven't needed too, nor care too... Oh...'

River then recalled something, as she continued her thoughts, 'Chang mentioned, to Lee and I, that the night before last, Balalaika, B, and a few members of Hotel Moscow visited Pedro at his home. And I heard that Matthew for the event. And while neither of them were harm, that brush with danger would cause anyone to run.'

'But, Pedro already knows he cannot simply just run. We will find them both in no time... Unless... I think I better trace Matthew's steps from when I saw him having lunch at the casino restaurant, because I don't like where this line of thought is leading...'

River then walked into towards the hallway, that lead to the master bedroom she shared with Chang and Lee.

Seconds later, when she reached her bedroom, which she shared with Chang and Lee.

The sunlight coming from the sliding glass door in the room, provided plenty of illumination for River to see with.

She walked over to a chest of drawers, picked up her laptop computer, with its battery already fully charges, and she heading over to her large bed, whose sheets were already maid.

She sat down in the middle of her bed, as she set her laptop in front of her, and lifted up the screen from the keyboard of the computer.

As soon as she booted up, and logged onto her account, on the computer, she then used his computer to log onto the security computers of the casino.

After typing in and entering her user name and password, she was allowed full access of the security sections of the computer system. This included the video recordings of the security cameras.

As River worked to find the security camera recordings for the casino restaurant, for lunch time, yesterday, she thought, 'It is good that given our technological resources, we have plenty of hard drive storage space, and we don't have to delete any videos, nor other data, on our many RAID array computer systems, to make room for more data.'

River then found the recording of Matthew eating a sandwich, with chips and a soda, inside the casino restaurant, from lunch, yesterday.

River looked at the time stamp upper left side of the video, to confirm that it was the proper time and place.

River thought, 'Good. Now, where did you go from there?'

After ten minutes of fast forwarding, and switching from camera to camera, as Matthew moved throughout the casino, she reached the two thirty PM mark, when things finally got interesting. She watched as Matthew, while inside one of the front elevators, pulled out his cell phone, and called someone. Matthew’s back was turned from the camera, so she could not read his lips.

River mentally wondered, 'Who are you calling, Matthew?... Well, whomever it is, you were intelligent enough to know that people can read lips by look at the camera recordings.'

River next watched as Matthew exited the elevator, and enter the second floor, and soon gain access to the restricted section, in the back of the casino, on the second floor.

She paused the video, and she pulled up the log in security records of that key pad, and card reader. She found that it was Mal's key card and password that was used.

River thought, with mild amusement, 'Now, how did you do that?... How did you get Mal's key card, or copy of, along with his password.'

'Well, you did work for Michael Garibaldi. So, I am not really that surprised. Though, I am impressed... We have definitely underestimated your skill set...'

'Though, since that is the case, cloning a key card would child's play to you, since you were able to get your hands on Mal's key card, and returning it to him, without him realizing. And guessing Mal's password is not that difficult. Also, I know you knew the daily schedules of Annie and I. And you probably used those to intentionally avoid us, so we would not learn that you were planning something.'

'While Matthew, you is not as intelligent as I. You are clearly no slacker in the devious department. That is why you're our lawyer, in the first place.'

'All in all, this was a well throughout plan by you, Matthew.'

'Though, on another matter, I probably need to track down Garibaldi sometime. But, I will deal with that later. Now, to find out where you went, Matthew?...'

'Still, I best not mention to the others that it was Mal's key card and password that was used. I don't want to make him angry. But, I will send out an order for everyone to replace their key card and passwords on a more regular basis. It is clear that Mal never replaced the password he original picked out for himself to use. And that way, no one would be the wiser.'

River set the video back to playing, as she continued watch She soon saw Matthew gain entry into the technology storage room, in the same manner he did with the door to the restricted area.

River then saw, as Matthew grabbed one of the reality devices, and hidden it on his person.

River quietly said, in english, “Oh no...' She mentally lamented, 'I knew Annie giving Matthew that tour was going to cause problems in the future. But, not like this. And I believe Annie even showed him how to work, and do the diagnostics on those devices. Still, I am not going to tell Annie about this, because I don't want to upset her. She doesn't have many friends, herself. And Matthew is one of Annie's genuine friends.'

'And while their relationship is purely platonic... Annie previously being Darth Vader was a complete turned off for Matthew... I would hate to create a rift between those two...'

'Now Matthew, what did you do after you stole one of our reality devices?...'

River watched as Matthew casually left the storage room, then the restricted areas. With him gently shutting the door behind him.

River then watched as Matthew calmly made his way to one of the front elevators, and then down to first floor, and the gaming area. All the while, Matthew was just taking his time, in passing through the areas of the casino.

River mentally complimented, 'Intelligent thinking, Matthew. Rushing might have alerted someone. But, by calmly walking to the outside would likely not alert anyone.'

She then watched as Matthew walked out the front entrance, where he was met by a taxi. He got into the taxi, which soon drove away, with him in the vehicle.

River thought, 'So, you called a taxi, to come get you, just in time. That figures. And this shows that you are a skilled planner, Matthew.'

'You likely met Pedro somewhere and the two of them reality jumped. And given Pedro is a fan of fiction as Lee, among other series, you two could cause some trouble. As such, this needs to be handled, before the situation becomes a problem. I need to talk to Chang and Lee about this. I am probably going to need their help in bringing Matthew and Pedro back here, without harming them.'

River logged out of the security computers, and she closed her laptop. Which put her computer into power down, stand by mode, which required it to boot up and a password to use. Next, River got off her bed, returned the laptop onto the top of the chest of drawers, where it has been. And she walked out of the out of the room, as she headed for she knew Chang and Lee were presently located, in the casino.

(_)

A few minute ago, in the first level of the basement section of the casino, right below the first floor of the casino, near the vaults of Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang and Lee were walking down a hallway.

As they passed by the doors to some unused casino cages, Chang was in front, with Lee following right behind Chang.

Chang was male, and in his usual business clothing. While Lee was female, in similar casual clothing as River was wearing at the moment. Which was a bra, panties, and white soaks, black pants, blue t-shirt, and red tennis shoes.

Give their history together, Lee did not bother to ask Chang where they were going. Nor, why. Both of them, and River, had come to trust each other completely.

As such, Lee knew it was important to Chang, and that was all that mattered.

As they walked, Chang was in a good mood, as he mentally reflected, 'This is a good life, in so many ways... River, Lee, our children, our kingdom in that other reality, and my businesses here. Everything seems to be going very well. And I don't want to jinx what we have. Still, it is fun to think about what we could do in the future...'

'By itself, my casino here is making me money, hand over fist. And while I have only dabbled a little in the drug trade here, compared to my other ventures, that has only been pocket change.'

'I think I will leave Balalaika and Hotel Moscow to handle that angle of our arrangement. Which is a pretty good partnership. We both get something out of it. And to be honest, our organizations are the only ones we can trust on this planet, for the moment. So, in this case, working together is not so much boring, as a necessity... Besides, we now have friends on either side that if one of us betrayed the other, we would catch hell from the our friends and subordinates. And we both long since admitted that fact to each other.'

'As such, I do not mind Balalaika having her men... I mean women, keeping the cartels out of this town. Pedro probably does not realize how much trouble we have kept from even coming to this town. Not that I want him to think he owes us... Owes me. He strikes me as not the type of person to react well to feeling he owes debts to criminals.'

'And though Pedro keeps this town's civic sections running, we have to work in the background part of this town. Also, while I have Annie and Arcee, I use them sparingly, because they were clearly not in it for the money, but because they are bored. And I won't abuse that arrangement I have with them.'

'Still, I find it interesting, but not really surprising, that that my only other venture in this reality, that rivals my casino, is Rowan's little gender bending whorehouse. Which has been expanded five times, in size, since it opened, over two years ago... Well, for those that live here all the time.'

'I knew when I made the offer to Rowan, for that little venture. Where we could use those instant packets of Jusenkyo gender bending powder, both male and female types of powder, in her whorehouse, that it would be quite popular, no matter what price we put on per visit, and per use of packets.'

'And we have made more money in that venture, in one month, than the annual GDP of some nations I could name. With Rowan a very wealthy woman, and I am even wealthy.'

'Also, we pay the workers and staff there, very well. With a very good benefits packets. A few of the employees there, have already quit, and retired in luxury. As what we paid them over the course of every week, has been very generous. And if they do quit, we allow them to do so, on the understanding they keep their mouths shut. Which they do.'

Chang smiled, as he happily continued his thoughts, 'And we can get the packets real cheap, to boot.'

Chang then dropped his smile, as he mentally reflected, 'Though, I was tempted to also bring animal instant packs, but that raises too many possible problems. And the real stuff is just two dangerous to handle.'

'Even Pedro was nice enough to look the other way, when it comes to that whorehouse, because it brings money to the island. A year ago, I personally offered him a free open invitation visit to there, with him being able to use as many of those packets as he wanted to, for that visit. But, while he was polite about the offer, the prude has never taken me up on my generosity.'

'Not that I really mind, either way.'

'And when it comes to our employees there, and even a few customers probably would even believe where we got the packets from. Still, all the employees care about is getting paid, and the packets are temporary. And all the customers care about is the employees are willing, the packets work, and the sex rooms we have are very relaxing, with plenty of options for activities in said room.'

'And we have the rich and powerful coming from all over the world, as our clients. To the point we have a waiting list.'

'We are practically the Studio Fifty-Four of whorehouses, on steroids.'

'With our more influential clients keep the various governments, and other powers, of the world off our backs. As long as we have this unique vice, we have little to worry about.'

'And when they come to my casino. With them being those that are both rich, and whom are of a curtain temperament, are encouraged to come to my whorehouse, located near the middle of the island, away from both the casinos, and the Devil's Hotel.'

'And those are my whorehouse are encouraged to visit my casino. So, I get money for their vices, no matter if it is at the gambling tables, or in my bedrooms.'

'Still, we keep Rowan's whorehouse low key in those that know about it.'

'And when they come, all of them pay up front in gold, or silver.'

'After they are paid, our clients are allowed to choose their gender. How many whores that client wants, within reason. And the gender of their whores, for the next twelve hours. Still, while we do some sadomasochistic, it is very light. And we won't allow any drug use while at the whorehouse... No matter how much some of them have tried to bribe my employees.'

'I have a standing order that I will match any bribe, if it can be proven from a customer to do something stupid. Usually, an audio recording will do for prove. And we did have a security team dedicated to Rowan's whorehouse. With all the bedrooms, and other rooms of that whorehouse, being constantly monitored and recorded, with cameras and microphones.'

'Though, I have no intention to use these records for blackmail. And I have tight control on the records. I do this monitoring, as a way to protect the staff and customers, from unexpected problems.'

'But, this security team has nothing to do with Mal's security team a the casino. And the security team for the whorehouse is located in a basement level of the whorehouse.'

'I know how Mal feels about prostitution. And I will not put his personal feelings in conflict with the job he and his friends do for me.'

'Still, this anti-bribery tactic has made some of my whores wealthy. Well, wealthier than they already were, from what I paid them. And I can afford it. It is a drop in the bucket to what Rowan and I make from that place, within a week. While at the same time, this tactic helps to in sure that my employees stay loyal to me, along with the clients being prevented from doing something stupid that will ruin this enterprise for all of us.'

'Along those lines, having a rich client die on us is a bad idea for everyone involved. That is why all our clients have a medical check up, right before they are allowed to enjoy such vices.'

'This includes on the spot blood tests, to check for diseases. Among other things. With the technology we have access to, we can check on such tests, and have the computer results in a matter of seconds. We even do blood tests on our whores one a month. The my other employee, including the whores, for all my ventures, have to have a check up and blood tests, to check for possible problems, every seconds moment. I want to keep ahead of any possible problems that can pop up on us.'

'Also, both the clients, and my whores, have to all use condoms. This is to prevent possible pregnancies, and sexual transmitted diseases, in case our other measures fail.'

If there is a problem, such as a client being to unhealthy, or if it is a woman, and she is pregnant. We turn them away, and refund their money. Still, as a way to show there are no hard feelings. We offer then a few days in one of my better suits at the casino. And that usually does the trick in easy their disappoint. And with this tactic, I occasionally make some money from them, from my gambling tables.'

'And though, I admit it was tempting. While I did install security cameras in the whorehouse, I don't plan to do any blackmail. Lee said such clients more than likely try to get one of their governments to come after us, than pay us for our silence. And I agree with her.'

'Finally, on the matter, I have to admire Rowan's sense of humor. I let her pick out the name for our whorehouse. We call the whorehouse, the Bending House of Pleasure. Hahahahaha...'

Chang did not show it on the outside, as he mentally laughed, for a few seconds.

As he calmed down, he went onto think, 'And on a more personal note, my family in this reality, and the feudal reality, are doing great. We will have to visit our children, in the other reality, in a few days, to a week, our time. Though, when it concerns time, it will only be a few minutes that we are gone... Along with this, having extreme longevity is so useful...'

While Chang did not openly laugh at the last part of his thoughts. Though, he did crack a small smile on his lips, as he and Lee continued walking.

A few seconds later, they made it to an open door, which lead to the room that Chang was leading Lee too.

Chang walked inside, with Lee following right behind them.

As Chang and Lee came to a stop, side by side, with Lee being to Chang's right side, Lee first noticed the soft white florescent ceiling lights were on.

Lee then noticed a table in the center, with a rectangular, brown cardboard box on the table. The box was one foot long, six inched wide, and four inches high. Also, the box had packing table holding the cardboard closed.

The other thing Lee noticed about the table was that there were no chairs around the table.

Lee then saw that on the other side of the three were three of Chang's female chinese employees, standing side by said, facing Chang and Lee, across the table from them. All three of the of the women were wearing black businesses clothing, with black dress shoes. One was wearing a long skirt with her clothing, while the other two women each wore black pants, with a black leather belt.

Chang turned to Lee, as he said, in chinese, “I appreciate you not asking any questions.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she replied, in chinese, “I trust you enough not to ask questions.”

Chang teased, “Thank you... So, would you like to know what is inside the box?”

Lee happily responded, “Knowing you, it could literally be anything.”

Chang let out a small chuckle. He then said, “I will take that as a complimented. Now, let me show you what I have just acquired from your world here.”

Chang then walked around, to the side of the table, that was to Lee's left. He then pulled out a pocket knife, and unfolded the blade to it. Next, he used it to cut through the packing tape at the top of the cardboard box.

When Chang was through, he folded his knife blade back into its hilt, and he pocketed the item.

After which, he used both his hands to open the top of the box, and slowly pull something out.

While the large item came out of the box, Lee saw styrofoam popcorn, that was used as packing filler, drop out onto the table.

As the item in Chang's hands was clear of the box, and styrofoam popcorn, he gently set object down, on the table, in front of Lee.

Chang then leaned back up straight, while he looked over at Lee. He smiled, as he rhetorically asked, “Now, isn't that one of the most beautiful things you have ever seen?”

Lee saw that the object on the table was a large, rectangular brick of gold.

Lee looked at the gold bar for a few seconds. She then looked back up at Chang, as she asked, “What did you get this from?

Chang said, “From a local source.”

Lee looked back at the gold bar, as she requested, “Can I hold it?”

Chang replied, “Sure.”

Lee walked over to the table, in front of her. She then picked it up with both hands. She found that it was heavy, as she looked at it for a few seconds before gently setting it back down.

Lee turned to Chang. She choose her words carefully, as she calmly questioned, “I know you have been getting gold from this reality for a few years. But, not in this large of a brick. So, I have to ask. Is this large gold bar the only gold bar you have received from this new source?”

Chang answered, “Yes.”

Lee inquired, “How did you test this bar authenticity?”

Chang stated, “By weight.”

Lee frowned, as she said, “That could be problematic.”

Chang questioned, “What do you mean?”

Lee requested, “I need a power-drill, with a narrow drill bit.”

Chang looked at his employees, as he ordered, in chinese, “Make it happen.”

One of the women walked out of the room.

A minute later, the employee that had left had returned with a small, battery powered drill, with a small drill bit.

Lee held the drill, with her right hand, by its grip. She made sure that drill was set to drill into something, and not set to unscrew something.

Lee looked over at Chang, as she requested, “I need to test this gold bar. May I have permission to do so?”

Chang responded, “You may do so. But first, please explain what you are doing.”

Lee replied, “Okay. In this reality, testing gold by weight is no longer reliably. Now, if this is soft gold, this bit will go straight through, in a clean manner. In which case, we collect the shavings and recast the bar. But, I don't think that is going to happen.”

Lee then over at the gold bar, as she leaned down towards it. She held the drill, with the drill bit, in the center, on top of the gold bar.

Lee held the drill both both hands, as she used her right trigger finger to turn on the drill. As the drill came on, she pressed down, and the drill bit began to corkscrew into the gold, creating gold metal shavings as the bit made its way into the gold bar.

A second later, the bit stopped in the middle of the bar. Lee then used the drill to widen the hole a bit.

When Lee was satisfied by the size of the hole, she pulled the bit out of the gold bar, and she set the power-drill on the table.

Lee leaned up, and looked over at Chang. She requested, “Have a look for yourself.”

Chang looked down into the hole in his new gold bar, and he saw the center of the bar had a silvery color metal.

Chang realized he had bought a fake gold plated bar. He leaned back up to look at Lee. He inquired, “What is that metal?”

Lee answered, “That metal is called, tungsten. It has an atomic weight close to gold. That is why weight tests are no longer reliable. Tungsten is also very dense, and it has one of the highest melting points on record.”

Chang asked, “Where does it come from?”

Lee stated, “Well, in this reality, most tungsten ore is mined from the central part of eastern China. A hundred miles from the coast. I am sure you appreciate the irony.”

Chang frowned, as he questioned, “Oh... I do. Still, since weight not longer works. How is the purity tested on gold bars?”

Lee responded, “Electrical resistance. A pure gold bar has a different electrical resistance than a gold bar with a tungsten core. These tests can pick up fake gold bars like this. Kits for these tests are sold off the internet. And are not that expensive. Also, quick test for gold coins is a magnet. Gold is not magnetic. If a magnet works, it is fake.”

“And don't feel bad about this, Chang. Many of the people reality, with any influence, or wealth, will suck you dry any way they can. This world's economic values is just a series of shell games twisted and mixed together. I knew about this fake gold bar scam before you came here. I just didn't realize it would become an issue with you.”

Chang forced himself to remain calm, as he stated “Everyone has lapses of judgment, on the information they share. Don't worry about it. This is not your fault.”

Lee responded, “Thank you. And keep in mind that entire nations have been suckered and bankrupted by this single scam. Fortunately, you just got duped on one gold bar. And I would suggest letting the issue go. We are all small fish, to the larger, more established sharks in this world. It is just the cost of one gold bar, which I am sure you can absorb with only minor issues.”

Change commented, in a casual tone of voice, “You're right. Reprisal over this matter would only have a negative effect on us. We will just not do business with that source, again. Still, this also means I am going to have to recheck all the gold our clients have paid for both the casino, and Rowan's little business.”

Lee stated, “I won't worry to much. The among of gold, per transactions, for the casino, and that little unique, and imaginative business, would likely not be faked. Besides, given you are the only people on this planet offering such... Delights. They won't risk getting banned, or worst, over some trivial amounts of gold.”

Chang cracked a grin, as he said, “That is good to hear. And this is why I keep you around.”

Lee replied, “And I thought it was because I was good in bed, and open to just about anything you and River want to try.”

Chang shrugged, as he joyfully conceded, “That too.”

Nearby, the three employees each suppressed the urge to lightly laugh at Chang and Lee's comments.

Lee commented, “Look on the bright side, at least the outer layer is gold. And from the looks of it, they were not pros. They used heat to soften the gold, then, stuck a slug of tungsten around it. Instead, of just being a gold coat foil around the tungsten. So, there is still a thick layer of gold. We can strip, and melt that off. Given how deep that drill bit when it, I figure you are out about half of what you paid for. So, it is not that bad.”

Chang replied, “That is good to hear.” He turned to his employees, as he calmly requested, “Salvage as much gold as you can from the bar. Reform the gold into smaller bars. And let me know how much gold we really got out of this deal.”

The three employee said, almost in unison, in chinese, “Yes sir.”

Just then, River suddenly walked inside the room. Everyone in the room turned to face her.

Chang and Lee recognized the concerned look River had on her face.

Chang was the first to ask, “What is it, River?”

River glanced at the three employees, then back to Chang, as she responded, in english, “Chang. Lee. We need to talk in private about something, I just found out. Right now.”

Chang and Lee realized there something was wrong, because of the way she was acting, and that she knew that Chang prefer that people in the cage area speak chinese. Given most of them were native to Hong Kong, China, and Taiwan.

Chang stated, in english, “Okay. You won't ask this, unless it is important. Let's head upstairs, and talk.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she said, in english, “I agree. And I believe our business is concluded here.”

Chang turned to Lee, as he responded, “Yes. It is.”

River, then Lee, and finally Chang, walked out of the room, and into the hallway, as they headed to the apartment they shared.

Meanwhile, Chang's three female subordinates, in the room carried out Chang's orders on stripping and recasting the gold on the metal brick on the table.

(_)

Ten minute later, the three adult lovers made it to the living room of their penthouse apartment, in Chang's casino.

The only light in the room was from the sunlight, coming through the draped windows.

River was the first one inside the room, with Chang right behind her. While, Lee being the last one to enter the room.

Lee gently closed, and locked the door behind them. She then turned and walked further into the room.

The three adults then came to a stop. As they continue to stand, they turned around, to where they could face each other.

River stated, “We have a big problem.”

Chang asked, “What is it?”

River said, “You as both know, Matthew has not been seen since yesterday morning, at lunch?”

Lee commented, “Yes. And he will turn up, eventually.”

River stated, “I don't think so. And I found out that Pedro has disappeared, as well.”

Lee said, “This is not good.”

River replied, “I know. And that is not the half of it.”

Chang calmly requested, “Please, tell us what is going on, so we can solve this problem, as quickly as possible.”

River said, “Well, I did some checking around. And I found that Pedro told his staff, at the police station, that he is taking a vacation, for a few days. I think this was just a cover story, to give them lead time to escape.”

Chang commented, “Well, they are good friends. So, it would make sense that would run off together…” He then realized what he said, as he continued, “And that did not come out right... Because I am fairly sure they both prefer women...”

Lee and River giggled a little, over Chang's comment. With Chang taking their giggling in stride.

As they calmed down, Chang said, “Still, I do not see this as an issue. It won't be a problem tracking them. I would say give them a week, and relax some, then we will have Roberta go find them, and bring them back, in a manner that does not bring harm to them, nor give them heartattacks.”

River commented, “Easier said, than done.” She saw Chang raise an eyebrow, as Lee looked at her more intently. She continued, “You see, I checked the security camera footage. And I traced Matthew's steps, from the last time I saw him. Which was at lunch, in the casino restaurant.”

“Before Matthew left, he quietly broke into the restricted section of the second floor. And he then got into one of the technology storage areas, where he took one of our reality devices...”

Lee winced her face for a second.

Meanwhile, Chang rolled his eyes for a second, before he looked back at River.

River went onto say, “After which, he immediately made his way down to the first floor, where he left out the front entrance of the casino, and into a taxi that was waiting for him.”

Chang slowly said, “Okay... This could be a problem.”

Lee commented, “And given how knowledgeable, and savvy, Pedro is. They could literally be anywhere in the multiverse.”

Chang turned to Lee, as he stated, “True. Also, Pedro, and likely Matthew, have also read your stories. That means they know the tricks already tried in escaping into the multiverse. As such, they will not make the same mistakes that others have made.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she replied, “Exactly.” She then turned to River, as she inquired, “Did Matthew take any luggage with him? That could slow him down.”

River commented, “No. I do not think either of them took any luggage, when they left. They likely knew, from what you wrote, that it would be best if they traveled light.”

Lee replied, “I guess so.”

Chang stated, “Okay. The first thing we need to do is find them, and bring them back, before they get themselves into so much trouble, in the multiverse, that we cannot get them out of the mess they are walking into.”

Lee turned to Chang, as she happily said, “I am glad you are concerned for their welfare.”

Chang looked over at Lee, as he calmly said, “Of course. They are nice guys, that are very useful to us. And they play the game well. As much as I don't like to admit it, this city would fall apart without Pedro.”

Lee commented, “And Matthew is too good a lawyer to let go so easily.”

Chang agreed, “That is true. And another reason I want to bring them back unharmed.”

River looked at both her lover, as she said, “For them to pull something like this, it is clear they did not like the situation they were in. And Balalaika visiting them, at Pedro's home, the night before last probably did not help matters.”

Lee commented, “Yes. I think Balalaika went too far doing that.”

Chang stated, “Agreed. Pedro has always had a good amount of common sense. And I knew if we leaned on him too much, he would bolt. I guess he convinced Matthew to help him leave this reality. With Matthew going with him. And I am sure that both of them would be resourceful enough to pull off such a theft under out noses. Though, it was Matthew that did the theft, in this case.”

River replied, “Yes. They are both very resourceful.”

Lee inquired, “Still, how do we bring them back? They are our friends. And we don't want to do it by force.”

Chang responded, “You're right. We will talk them into coming back. And we will make some reasonable changes. Prevent Balalaika and Hotel Moscow from threatening them again, like that. And we will get Revy, Rock, and their friends, to stop making them chaperon to their parties.”

River agreed, “That would be a good start.”

Lee said, “Yea. Just those two changes would greatly decrease the day to day stress those two are under.”

River stated, “To say the least. Still, after we find them, we need to convince them to come back on with us, willingly. Or, they will just run again.”

Chang said, “Yes. And they are too savvy to brainwash. And no, that is not an option. I learned my lesson on that.”

Lee commented, “And so have I.”

River grinned, as she replied, “Good.”

Chang asked, “Now, where is the closest reality tracking device?”

River answered, “I have one in our bedroom.”

Chang replied, “All the better. We will wait for you here.”

River said, “Thanks.” She then swiftly walked into the hallway, leading to the bedroom.

Less than a minute later, River walked back into the living room, while holding a small computer tablet sized device in her hands.

As she came to a stop, in the living room, she looked over at Chang and Lee.

Before Chang, nor Lee, could speak, River stated, “Already looking for them.” She then looked back down at the readout on the reality tracking device.

Chang said, “Good.”

Lee thought, 'If this is anything like reality tracking in my stories. Getting a lock at this distance, with this much time elapsing, could take a while.'

Though, just as Lee was about to head to the couch, to sit down, she heard River state, “Found them. From what I am seeing, on the readout, they teleport from Pedro's home. Probably, from outside his home. Since he would not want us breaking in, as we tracked them to another reality.”

Lee commented, “I agree. Pedro would likely teleport on his front lawn. So, any such trackers would get their job done question, and leave.”

Chang said, “Yes. Also, that would be a good meeting spot for them. And it does confirm that they are in this, together.”

Lee asked, “Still River, how did you find them so quickly? As such a distance? And time since they used the devices?”

River looked over Lee, as she answered, “We do not share all our most advanced tech with Revy and the others.”

Lee questioned, “I guess that makes sense. So, when, where, and what reality are they in?”

River answered, “Believe it, or not. They jumped to Chang's home reality. The Black Lagoon anime reality. Roanapur, Thailand. With the date being, March nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one. They arrived sometime in the early afternoon.”

Lee looked over at Chang, as she inquired, “Anything special about that date?”

Chang turned to Lee, as he answered, “No. But, I have to give Pedro props. He has to be the one using the reality device. Because this is likely the first place that Pedro would pick to go to. And he likely know that I, or others from that reality, will be some of those that will be coming after him. And by going there, he is slowing us down from tracking them. As such, he picked a good time, and place, that I might think twice about going too.”

River questioned, “How so?”

Chang turned to River, as he stated, “That date is before Hotel Moscow, and the Lagoon family. Well, Lagoon company. Showed up. At that time, I was pretty ruling Roanapur, with the other families there doing what I was told them to do.”

River pointed out, “Which means if we go there, you would to have to go as a woman, so your past self does not recognize you.”

Chang responded, “Yes. It cannot be helped. And I will have to go without my sunglasses, because, male or female, I still have the same basic face. And those during that time saw me more often with my sunglasses on, than without them.”

Lee asked, “True. But, you rarely wear them anymore, anyway... So, where did they land? And when? I figure we could make this quick.”

River answered, “Well, they landed somewhere in the middle of Roanapur. And I can get us to within an hour after they arrived, and a kilometer of where they teleport too. I cannot be more specific than that.”

Chang turned to Lee, as he commented, “Even our tech has its limits.”

Lee looked over at her two lovers, as she deadpanned, “That figures.”

River stated, “Well, anyway. This will make a goo distraction to break the monotony. And when this is over. Let's go visit the kids in our kingdom.”

Lee complimented, “Good idea.”

Chang looked over at River, as he commented, “Yes. A little while ago, I was thinking about us doing that.”

River responded, “I am glad you both agree. Now, let us go get ready, and get this matter taken care of.”

Chang said, “Lead the way.”

River was the first one to walked out of the living room. She carried the reality tracking device in her right hand, as she headed towards their bedroom, and their closets, with Lee and Chang following close behind her.

(_)

Over the next twenty minutes, River, Chang, and Lee got ready, while they also retrieved their tools, and weapons.

Among the items the three adults placed on in their clothing, Lee put on a bandolier over her shirt, across her chest. She placed her collapsible staff, in its sheath, on the bandolier, across her back.

Lee then put on another bandolier, which Lee put around her waist. This bandolier held her throwing knives. She then untucked her shirt, and pulled her shirt over her knives, to help hide them from prying eyes.

Next, Lee put on a black, light, cloth, jacket, to hide her collapsed staff, and most of her knives on her bandolier. Though, she left the front part of her jacket open, which did expose some of her knives that were on her bandolier.

River preferred not to have weapons, unless the situation was serious and enough. And given how skilled a fighter River was without weapons, neither Chang, nor Lee, argued with River on this matter.

And while all three of them had retrieved a reality device, to put in a pocket, for redundancy purposes, it was decided by the three that River would be the one using a reality device to travel from reality to reality.

The reason for this were that both Chang and Lee completely trust River. And the fact that River was both a telepath, and a genius.

Also, River kept the reality tracking device. And it was decided by the three of them, that she would be the one with their tracking device. When she was not using the device, she tucked in the back of her pants, under her untucked shirt.

River then put on a light, red, cloth jacket. And she left the front of the jacket open.

Chang sneezed and became female. She then changed her clothing. She wore a red regular bra, and red boyshorts. Over this, the clothing Chang wore was a long sleeved, long tailed shirt Ao Dai, that was orange color on the outside, with the interior lining being white.

River and Lee had gotten the Ao Dai for Chang, as a gift, for Christmas, a year ago, for those at the casino.

While the Ao Dai was a dress, it used pants, instead of skirts, as a bottom part. And Bao looked good in an Ao Dai. River and Lee agreed that they thought that Chang would like it for her female form. And when Chang opened his gift, they were proven right.

Though, the Ao Dai they bought for Chang was a different colors, when compared to the black and white Ao Dai that Bao occasionally wore to formal parties.

Under Chang's shirt, but over her underwear, she wore simple, red cloth pants, that had a draw string around the waist, with side and back pockets.

Chang also wore an orange sash was under her shirt, over her pants, that allowed her to place her holsters, behind her waist, like she usual did with male business clothing. The back of her Ao Dai hide her two pistols.

Given the formal clothing she had on, she wore flat soled slippers, instead of more casual shoes. The slippers were red and they matched the color of her pants.

The reason that River and Lee has picked out those colors for Chang's Ao Dai was the colors matched the male swim clothing that Chang liked to wear at the beach, or the pool, when he was not swimming. The clothing was a light jacket, that was left open. And swim trunks.

The top shoulders and neck line parts of the jacket were orange. The orange blended, in fire shapes, to the white bottom parts of the chest back, and upper arms of the jacket. The forearms of the jacket were solid white.

The swimming clothing in question, was one of Chang's favorite swim trunks, he wore, which was orange and red. The red was a back ground color, with orange flame shapes climbed up from the bottom parts of the leggings to end an inch below the waistline of the swim trunks.

During one such beach outing, River commented that this was the same type of swim clothing that Chang liked to wore, match his counterpart's clothing in the Black Lagoon swimsuit magazine. Chang and Lee just lightly laughed at that revelation. But, nothing else was made of River's comment.

With Chang fully clothed, Chang then holstered both her two Beretta seventy-six semi-automatic pistols, into her holsters, that were located behind her waist.

Chang's pair of pistols were a replacement for her original pair of Beretta seventy-six pistols, which, Fabiola took with her, at Chang's tower, during the fall of Roapanur. And while Chang had long since learned that Fabiola had her pistols, she did not ask for them back, due to not wanting to annoy her, and Roberta.

The copies were almost same at the originals. Right down to the inlaid silver dragon pistol grips, and chrome colored, stainless steel coatings that both pistols had. The only difference was that the barrels were extended.

The pistols used twenty-two caliber long rifle rounds.

The standard magazine for the Beretta seventy-six pistol used held up to ten bullets. Chang has her pistols loaded with subsonic hollowpoint rounds.

The pistols had adjustable sights.

While the Beretta seventy-six pistols used twenty-two caliber rounds. One of the smallest pistol and rifle calibers on the market. The Beretta seventy-six semi-automatic pistol did have have a few advantage over most semi-automatic pistols.

The slide of the Beretta seventy-six pistol was located in the inside of the back of the pistol, above the grip and trigger, instead of being the entire to part of the pistol. As such, the top of the pistol did no move, only the section above the grip and trigger, where hammer was located, moved backward, when a bullet was fired from the pistol.

This meant less mass and weight shifted, when the pistol was fired. And with the pistol using such a low caliber, this allowed for better accuracy when firing.

And this allowed for the option of have a scope placed at the top for the barrel. Though, one would have to be careful of the slide.

Along with this, with Beretta seventy-six pistols extended barrels, Chang could attach suppressors to Chang's pistols, making them very quiet to use.

Along, with her pocketknife, Chang put a few spare, load ammo magazines, and a few twenty-two caliber boxes of ammo, for her pistols, in her pockets.

Also, it was decided that, as they traveled, Chang would be the one with the money. So, she carried with her a couple of rolls of older, mid-twentieth century, U.S., hundred dollar bills, and a few small bars of gold.

(_)

As all three adult finished getting ready, they gather near each other, in their bedroom, so they could jump realities together.

It was then that Chang immediately remembered, as she stated, “Hold it a second. I think I do remember something from the date Matthew and Pedro went too.”

Lee asked, “Okay. What do you remember?”

Chang said, “I will be right back.” She then walked into her closet.

Less than a minute later, Chang came out with a small book in her hands.

As Chang came to stand beside River and Lee, she paged through the book.

Lee and River look at the book, and they saw that it was a scrap book, with various pictures and article clippings.

Chang continued looking through scrap book, as she said, “When I was in Roanapur, I made this scrape book of the various things that went on there. I hide this in a cache, in another reality, before my defeat, at my tower. And I just remembered the date that Matthew and Pedro went too. I do not remember a lot from back then. Except for the big events.”

Lee commented, “Don't feel bad. Everyone develops gaps in their memories. The important thing is to remember the good times.” She mentally added, 'And Chang's cache in another reality confirms a theory I had about him... Well, right now, her.'

Lee then saw River crack a grin.

Lee casually thought, 'Given you are reading our thoughts, River. I guess this confirms my theory.'

Lee saw River gave her a small, single nod, in confirmation to her thoughts.

Chang responded, “Yes... Anyway, I remember meeting two men in the casino I ran there. And I think, around that time, there was a quick gunfight, started by a woman, near me, in the casino. Though, I am not sure why. But strangely, no one was hurt, nor was anyone caught, after that quick battle.”

River said, “It was good that no one was harmed. And we will be sure to try to avoid such violence.”

Chang continued paging through her scrap book, as she stated, “In Roanapur, that can be easier said, than done.”

Chang then found the page she was looking for. She held out the page for Lee and River to see. She pointed out, “Here is a picture of the security footage of those two men. Though, given video technology, and quality at the time. With the image was taken from an analogue feed. It is not that good.”

The picture was grainy, and not very detailed. But, the three adults saw Chang, as a male, in his business clothing, with two men, that had a passing resemblance to Matthew and Pedro, in what appeared to be part of a casino gaming floor.”

River commented, “That could be Matthew and Pedro.”

Lee stated, “Yes. And if it is them. This just confirms that they did go Roanapur at that date. With them meeting your past self, in a minor temporal loop between the three of you.”

Chang replied, “That is what I figured, as well.”

Lee said, “And we will be sure to try to avoid your past self, and the places you frequented. Such as your casino.”

Chang commented, “Actually, while we might want to avoid my younger self, we could go to my casino, and wait for them there. Given Pedro is such a big fan, he would likely go there. Also, he might think we would not try to go there. So, he and Matthew will not expect us to be there.”

“And should we do go to my casino, if we keep to ourselves, my organization, should leave us alone. They were always okay with pretty women, as long as those women did not cause trouble.”

River stated, “Okay. That would not be a bad idea. But, we can take our time when we get there.”

Chang said, “Yes. We can. There is no point in rushing.”

River commented, “Alright, let us get this over with. We find our friends, and we bring them back home. Then, we can visit our kids.” She then used her right hand to pull out her reality device from her right, side pants pocket.

Lee said, “I am okay with that.”

Chang stated, “That works for me.”

River asked, “Is everyone ready?”

Lee replied, “Yes.”

Chang closed her scrap book, walked over to the nearby chest of drawers. She set the book on the top of the chest of drawers. She then walked back over to join River and Lee.

As Chang came to a stop, by her two lovers, she stated, “Okay. Let's do this.”

River then thought of the time, place, and reality, she wanted to go to, as she press the red button on her reality device.

A second later, they found themselves in an alleyway. From the sky, they found it was daytime, and only slightly cloudy.

Chang stated, “Let us exit this alleyway. So, I can figure where we are at.” She then started walking out of the alleyway.

Lee and River followed her, as River pocketed her reality device.

As they soon exited the alleyway, they came to a stop, by the sidewalk entrances to the alleyway.

River and Lee was silent, as Chang looked around. Though, all three women noticed that there were not very many people on the street, at the moment.

A few seconds later, Chang turned around to face River and Lee, with her back to the street. She smiled towards them, as she stated, “The good news I know exactly where we are. And we are only a few kilometers from my casino.”

River shrugged, as she casually suggested, “If we are that close. Let us just walk there.”

Lee commented, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “I could enjoy the walk in the sun, with you two.”

Chang cracked a grin, as she responded, “Same here. And this is one of the safer times, in history, for visiting this city.”

Lee replied, “I don't doubt that.”

Chang offered, “You know, Lee. Considering how interested you are in us, and this town, I could give you a tour, right now?”

Lee responded, “Nah. We will do that later, when we have the time.”

Chang replied, “Okay.”

River suggested, “As nice as that sounds, Lee is right. We don't have the time. And onto another important matter. Given how this city, and other places, have eavesdroppers, behind every corner, we shouldn't reveal each others' names, nor aliases.”

Chang replied, “I can agree to that. And I will be mindful of what I say here.” She mentally added, 'I need to remember that I am not who I once was, in so many ways... Nor, am I now lord of this city... But, my changes have been in good ways. Not, bad ways.'

River warmly grinned at hearing Chang's thoughts.

Lee stated, “I can see the logic behind your request. And I will do as you requested, on this matter.”

River said, in a jovial tone of voice, “Good. Now, lead way, oh fearless leader.”

Chang giggled a little, at River's comment. She then turned to her left, and started walking down the sidewalk, with Lee and River following right behind her.

(_)

Elsewhere, in Roanapur, at that moment, Pedro and Matthew reach the front entrance to the destination, the Yellowflag.

They had been in town for just over an hour, and fortunately, they found, by politely asking directions, that the Yellowflag was not far from where they had arrived in the city.

The two men soon from the three story building, with the large neon sign, above the entrance, that stated, 'Yellowflag'.

As the two men walked into the bar, they came to a stop just inside, as they looked around.

Pedro stood to Matthew's right side

Pedro thought, 'There are not many customers in here. And none at the bar counter. Which, given the time of day, right now, makes sense. And that is fine by me. And I am sure Matthew is okay with this, as well. Now, where to sit down... Ah, we might as well sit there.'

Pedro turned to Matthew, was he quietly suggested, “Let's go sit at the bar counter.”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he softly said, “Okay.”

Both men turned back to look in front of them, as they walked straight in front of them, to the bar counter.

As they reached the bar counter, they each sat down in a bar stool, beside one another. The bar stools were wooden, with brown legs, and red tops. With Matthew being to Pedro's left side.

The two men look around, at the shelves, with rows and rows of alcoholic bottles.

Pedro openly commented, “You know. For a bar with such a wild reputation, I was expecting something a little more... Exciting about this place.”

To Pedro and Matthew's left, they heard a male voice ask, in english, “And where did you here that from?”

Pedro and Matthew turned to see that it was a very male, much older, and slender, though slightly taller, Bao, whom was wearing pants and a shirt.

As Bao walked up to them, from behind the bar, he commented, “Even though we get a few fights in here. Now, and then. This place is usually quiet.”

Pedro thought, with amusement, 'Well. Once Revy hits town, it won't be for long.'

Bao then came to a stop in front of the two men, as he went onto say, “Still, if you want some excitement, I can recommend some decent whorehouses, nearby.'

Pedro thought, 'So Bao, you don't even have a whorehouse upstairs yet. You were probably pressured into having to share you building after Hotel Moscow came to town, and they stirred up things, with businesses like yours being caught in the middle.'

'Still, I wonder how you kept that from happening to you again, in my town? I may ask you sometime about that. Though, I believe that was because you became friends with my brother and I. That would make sense. And you were nice enough. So, I had no problems with you setting up shop in Plata Podrido. Even though I didn't know who you were at the time.'

Matthew stated, “We came here for a drink, and to get away from some women, not go to them.”

Pedro smiled, as he happily thought, 'Nice one, Matthew.'

Bao let out a laugh. He then complimented, “I like your sense of humor.”

Matthew said, “I appreciate that.”

Bao asked, “So, what will you two be having? Just be aware it is a little early for heavy drinking.”

Pedro casually answered, for the both of them, “Just two cold bottles of decent beer. But first, we have a question. Do you accept gold coins as payment?” He thought, 'I would prefer to use gold, than my U.S. cash, because gold is more flexible. And usual welcome, most of the time. Also, my cash is in a more limited supply.'

Bao stated, “Sure. It is better than cash in some places.”

Pedro pulled out a small gold coin, from of his pockets, and he set the count on the counter, between Bao and himself. He questioned, “Will this cover both beers?”

Bao looked down at the coin, then back at Pedro and Matthew. He answered, “Yes. That and more, if you want. I will even consider that to include the tip.”

Pedro responded, “Good. Now, do the local taxis also accept gold as payment?”

Bao joked, “The taxi drivers here will accept anything as payment. Including a blowjob, if you are a pretty woman. Which none of us are.”

Pedro thought, with amusement, 'Not yet. For you. Still, let's keep the humor coming.' He playfully replied, “I am not that desperate.”

Bao let out a laugh. Then, without looking, Bao palmed the coin, and put it in his pocket. He stated, “I will get your beers in a second. And they will be the good, cold kind.”

Pedro requested, “Thank you. Do you mind if I could have the number, and use your phone to call a taxi, when we are finished here? Or, you could call them?”

Bao said, “I'll call them. And it won't be a problem. Just let me know when you both are are ready to leave.”

Pedro thought, 'It seems, when Revy, or the others, are not stressing you out, you are just as much a nice, polite person when you are a man, as you are as a woman, back home.'

Pedro replied, “Thank you.”

Bao then turned and went to get a couple of bottles of beer for Matthew and Pedro.

When Bao was out of earshot, Matthew quietly commented, “Well, Bao is nice, and humorous, as ever.”

Pedro softly said, “I agree.”

A few seconds later, Bao came back and set two bottles of beer, of the same brand, in front of Matthew and Pedro, on the bar counter.

Bao then left, to check on his other customers, other parts of the room.

The two men picked up their bottles, and opened the metal caps to their beer bottles. With them dropping the caps onto the counter in front of them.

Matthew took drink from his beer. He then look at the bottle, which was in Thai. Next, he set down the bottle down, on the bar counter, as he turned to Pedro. He said, “This is not that bad a beer. Even though I cannot read a word of Thai.”

Pedro heard Matthew, as he took a drink from his beer. He then set down his bottle on the bar counter, as he looked over at Matthew. He stated, “Well, I am not that good with Thai, either. Still, this is a good beer. Bao kept his word on this.”

Matthew inquired, “Yes... He did. So, what do we do next?”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he stated, “Cover our tracks, and have the time of lives.”

Matthew chuckled a little. He then complimented, “Good plan.”

Pedro replied, “Thank you.”

Matthew asked, “Though, for the immediate future. Where to next?”

Pedro answered, “I was thinking the Heavenly Dragon Casino. It is, you know whose casino, in this town.” He mentally added, 'That is one of the part that Lee did a good job expanding on, in her stories. Given's Chang's personality, he would likely just use a casino as a front, no matter what reality he is in. And I am sure, by this date, the Chang, of the here and now, already has his casino up and running.'

Matthew replied, “Okay. But, no gambling.” He mentally added, 'I guess this is another part in covering our tracks.'

Pedro said, “Of course not. We just walk inside, look around, and come out again.”

Matthew replied, “I can go along with that.”

Pedro responded, “Good. Also, I have one other place I would like to visit, before we leave for somewhere else. Any thoughts on where you want to go.”

Matthew requested, “Does South America sound fine?”

Pedro stated, “Yes. There are a few nice places I have been to, in South America. I have one in mind, already.”

Matthew said, “Good.” He then gripped his bottle of beer in a toast. He smiled at Pedro, as he said, “To a safe, and wondrous journey.”

Nearby, Bao was bringing a few drinks to some other customers, at a table. He overheard what Matthew said. He sadly thought, 'Those words rarely go together.'

At the bar counter, Pedro smiled at Matthew, as he picked up his bottle. He said, “I can agree to that.”

They lightly tapped their bottles against each other. Then, they each took a swallow of beer from their bottles.

After they set their bottles back down on the counter, Pedro commented, “Still, it is better to hope for the best, while preparing for the worst.”

Nearby, as Bao headed back to the back of the bar counter, empty handed, he overheard Pedro's comment. He let out a quiet chuckle, 'That is more like it. Those two seem to have some good common sense about them. Though, I have no clue as to why they came to this small fishing town, turned smuggling route. But, that is their business.'

As Bao can around the back of the bar counter, he walked up to the two men, he asked, “Is there anything I can get for you gentlemen?”

Pedro and Matthew turned to look at Bao, as Pedro stated, “I believe we are fine. And given your soft chuckling, a few moments ago, I am guessing that you overheard us?”

Bao hesitantly replied, “Well, I didn't mean too.”

Pedro casually responded, “It is okay. It is just a lesson we need to be more mindful of our surroundings, when we talk to each other.”

Matthew agreed, “Yes. It is something we should do more of.”

Bao thought, 'I am glad they are understanding. I would hate to have to get rough with them.' He complimented, “Good observation.” He turned to Pedro, as thought, 'I wonder.' He asked, “Are you a cop?”

Pedro replied, in a jovial manner, “Not in this town.”

Bao let out a laugh. He then said, “Good answer. So, what type of people are you two?”

Matthew said, “Well, I am a more of a glass is half full type of guy.”

Pedro commented, “Same here”

Bao joked, “Good. With such outlooks on life, you two may make it out of the city in one piece.”

All three men chuckle a little at Bao's comment.

Bao looked over, at a nearby table, and he saw some customers leave the Yellowflag. He looked back to Pedro and Matthew, as he said, “Well, I cannot talk long. I got to go clean up after a few customers that just left.”

Pedro said, “We will be right here, we you get back. And thanks for the beers.”

Bao shrugged, as he casually replied, “Hey. You already paid for them. So, enjoy the beers. Let me know if you want another couple of bottles.”

Matthew said, “We will.”

Bao then turned from Pedro and Matthew, as he headed out the side exit of the bar counter, to clean up a table that some of his other customer had just left.

Half an hour later, and another round of beers for Matthew and Pedro, the two men were finished at the Yellowflag.

Since, Bao considered the gold coin Pedro has given him to be full payment for the four bottles of beers, and the tip, all that was left was for Bao to call a taxi for them.

Ten minutes after Bao called them a taxi, the taxi showed up.

As Pedro and Matthew were looking at the front windows of the Yellowflag, while they sat in their stools, with their backed to the bar counter.

Pedro commented, “There is the taxi.”

Matthew said, “Yep. Off to our next destination.”

Both men got up from their bar stools, and then turned to look at Bao, whom was standing behind the counter.

They saw Bao looking back at him, as Pedro said, “Goodbye, and good luck with this place.” He mentally added, 'You are going to need it.'

Matthew stated, “Yea. It was fun.”

Bao happily responded, “You two have safe and wondrous journey.”

The three men chuckled a little bit from Boa's comment.

Pedro then said, “Thanks.”

Matthew replied, “I hope you do the same.”

Both men then turned back around, to face the front exit of the bar, and they walked out of the bar, and to the taxi.

From behind the bar counter Bao watched out the front windows of his bar, as Pedro and Matthew got into the back seats of the car, from opposite back doors.

A few seconds later, as Bao watched the taxi drive away, Bao suddenly realize something. He thought, 'Damn it. I forget to get their names, without giving them mind.' He lower is right hand, to brush against his right side pocket, and the gold coin in that pocket, as he continued his mentally reflections, 'Still, I got a nice pay day out of it. So, I am not complaining.'

Bao then went back to his job, at his bar, the Yellowflag.

(_)

Twenty minutes later, the taxi that Pedro and Matthew rode in, reached their requested destination, with the vehicle pulled up to the front entrance of the Heavenly Dragon Casino.

Fortunately, the taxi driver did accept a gold coin as currency.

A few seconds later, Pedro and Matthew exited the taxi, and walked onto sidewalk between a street and the front of the highrise casino building.

Pedro and Matthew stood in front of entrance to the casino, as the taxi soon drove off.

The entrance was actually two sets of double-doors, which all let into the front lobby of the building.

Matthew stood to Pedro's right, as they looked around them. They saw that the building went at least fifteen stories high. Also, they noticed that guards posted at the sides of two sets of double doors that were the entrance casino. Along with this, they saw there were valets, in uniforms, standing at the ready, around the sidewalk, for those driving themselves to the casino.

Both men continued to look in front of them, as Matthew asked, “So, is this the place?”

Pedro said, “Yes.”

Matthew inquired, “You know about this place more than me. Is this original? Or, did Lee have a hand in it?”

Pedro answered, “The building was original, but not the casino is not. Still, it is a place of interest to visit.”

Matthew leaned to Pedro's right ear, as he quietly questioned, “And let me guess, the penthouse has a pool on it?”

With Matthew’s head near the right side of Pedro's face, Pedro softly responded, “You didn't pay attention that series, as you watched it? Did you? Because, towards the end of episode twenty-eight, for a few seconds, it actually showed the part of the pool, under an awning. And it was a nice pool, at that.”

Matthew whispered, in a slightly sheepish tone of voice, “I admit, when you lent me the series, I watched it, set to the english dub, in my office, on my laptop, while doing some paperwork.”

Pedro slightly groaned, as he thought, 'Given a number of people, we know personally, that are from the Black Lagoon anime series, I would have thought he would have paid more attention when he watched the series. But, at least he listened to the english track. Still, I know we watched some of it together, at my home. So, I am sure he knows the basics of this city, and how this city works. Also, I am knowledgeable enough about the situation to pull up the slack for both of us.'

Matthew softly continued, “But, at least I returned you copies back to you in the same condition you gave them to me.”

Pedro quietly replied, “Yes. And I appreciate that.”

Matthew softly asked, “Are those guards going to let us in?”

Pedro noticed that the guards were not even looking at them. He whispered, “They are not even paying attention to us. So, I don't see a problem there.”

Matthew leaned back up straight, as he said, “Then, let's go inside”

Pedro agreed, “Yes. Let's do that.”

The two men then started casually walked towards the left set of double-doors, that lead to the front, check in lobby of the casino.

When they reached the doors, two valets walked to the sides of Pedro and Matthew. With one valet opening one door, and the other valet opening the other door, as Pedro and Matthew walked inside.

Pedro and Matthew soon made their way to the gaming floor of the small casino.

Pedro and Matthew stood beside each other, as they looked around at the packed gaming floor. There were several rows of slot machines. Along with dealer tables for poker, black jack, and roulette tables.

As they two men made their way through the crowds, Matthew commented, “This isn't much different than the other place we have been to.”

Pedro thought, 'Yea. This is like Daiyu Palace Casino. I can see the layout and design inspiration that Chang took from here, from the Heavenly Dragon Casino, when he made Daiyu Palace Casino. Still...' Pedro said, “Like everything else. The difference is under the hood.”

Matthew agreed, “That is true.” He mentally reflected, 'I highly doubt this place has the levels of technology and security measures that the Daiyu Palace Casino has.'

Just then, from behind them, Pedro and Matthew heard a familiar, male voice, calmly said, in english, “I hope you are enjoying my fine establishment.”

Matthew and Pedro came to a stop. They turned around to see Chang, in his usual business suit, with his sunglasses on. Though, he appeared a few years older than the Chang they knew at Plata Podrido. Also, this Past Chang was flanked by four chinese men in black business suits, and sunglasses. With the crowds parting around the seven men.

Neither Pedro, nor Matthew, showed any outward expression at the situation, as Pedro thought, 'I have to remember, this is Chang of the past. So, I have to watch what I say.'

'And I have no doubt that Chang and his bodyguards here are armed. Also, while I might stand a fair chance against this Chang, alone, in a fight. Before he had the super-soldier serum. I doubt I can take him and his bodyguards in a fight, all at once. And Matthew is useless in a fight. His uses are found in more civilized ventures.”

'Still, I can make this work for me. I have just to bullshit our way out of this.'

At the same time, Matthew thought, 'This is the Chang of the past. He does not know us. As long as we play it cool, we are fine. Though, I will let Pedro do the talking. He seems to have a better understanding of how Chang thinks, than myself.'

Pedro causally said, “Ah... So, you are person in charge here? I must say that I am impressed.”

Past Chang thought, with mild amusement, 'This man can clearly recognizes authority, when he sees it.' He replied, “Thank you.”

Pedro questioned, “So, what caught your eye about us?”

Past Chang answered, “You both have the look of people just looking around.” He mentally reflected, 'And people looking around, and not gambling in a casino, concern me. Because it usual means they are gambling in a different way.'

Pedro admitted, “That would be correct.” He thought, 'There is no point in denying the obvious.'

Past Chang requested, “Now, who are you?”

Pedro thought, 'So, how do I sidestep this?... Ah, that might work. And it is a good plan.' He casually said, “We prefer not to give our names just yet.”

Past Chang looked around. He then turned back to Pedro and Mathew, as he inquired, “Understandable... So, what do your profession?”

Pedro thought, 'Now, to implement my plan.' He lied, “We are in the G.T. trade.”

Past Chang thought, 'They are part of the drug trade of Golden Triangle. I wonder if our contacts overlap. Or, if they are with our rivals. Still, they are not acting like rivals. So, I will give them the benefit of the doubt... For the moment... Though, this is a conversation that needs to be done in private.'

Past Chang calmly requested, “Perhaps this is best to discussed in my office.”

Pedro thought, 'That was no a request. That was a subtle order. But, I have a way to side step it.' He cryptically said, “I have found it useful to learn to speak, with one's peaceful intent lying outside of one's words.”

Pedro mentally reflected, 'I am enjoying channeling a cross between Kung Fu's Master Po and Star Wars Yoda. And if I am right. This grasshopper will think I am testing him.'

Past Chang thought, 'He is testing me. But, for what? Still...' He stated, “Let us walk as we talk.”

Pedro thought, 'I cannot get out of this one. But, I can keep Matthew and I in the crowd here.' He said, “Fine. Lead the way.”

Past Chang walked pass Pedro and Matthew, with the two men walk right behind Chang. Pedro and Matthew noticed that Chang's four bodyguards were not walking, meaning they wanted the two men to walk behind Chang, and the bodyguards to walk behind the two men.

Pedro and Matthew immediately got the hint, as they starting walking up to where they follow Chang right behind him, with the four bodyguards walking right behind Pedro and Matthew.

Past Chang kept a casual, slow pace, as he lead them through the gaming floor, with those around them, that were not gambling at a table, stepping aside, to allow them to continue on their way, unhindered.

Past Chang thought, 'Now, to get to the point.' He asked, “Why are you here?”

Pedro stated, “The business we are in is looking for others to work with.”

Past Chang mentally realized, 'They are looking for more smuggling routes. And I believe this is a test of cleverness to see if I can cut a deal in public, without anyone but us being the wiser... Not bad at all, on their parts... Now, to get their opinions.' He inquired, “And what do you think of what you see here?”

Pedro thought, 'Now, to butter him up.' He answered, “From the looks of it, you have quite the profitable business here.”

Chang replied, “Yes. I do.”

Pedro thought, 'Now, for a little honesty. A good con always needs a respectable dose of honesty.' He sincerely complimented, “It speaks highly of your skills. Both here, and I would guess, in other areas.”

Past Chang thought, 'Like drug smuggling.' He stated, “Thank you. Still, how do I know you are who you say you are?”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “You don't.”

Past Chang thought, 'He is either bullshitting me. Or, he is on the level. I am not sure which. But, either way, this man clearly has talent. And they clearly know who I am, and what I am capable of. Also, I have a feeling that his silent friend has potential, as well. From what I have seen, he has shown no emotion, and allowed him friend to speak. As such, they both might be useful.'

Past Chang came to a stop, and turned around to face Pedro and Matthew, as he asked, “So, what are you plans here?”

Pedro, Matthew, and the Chang's four bodyguards came to a stop as well.

While, Pedro and Matthew did not take their eyes off Past Chang. From the corner of their eyes, they noticed they had stopped between the long sides of two crowded, and very active roulette tables. Pedro and Matthew were also aware of the four, likely armed, bodyguards

Pedro thought, 'Now, to find a believable excuse that will allow Chang to leave us be... That will likely work.' He said, “Well, this is more of working vacation for us. And on second thought, I believe I might do a little gambling.”

Chang responded, “Well, have a good time. And if you wish to contact me, let one of my men know.”

Pedro thought, 'Now, to let my last comment respectful towards him.' He responded, “We would not take any action in this town, nor through this town, without your prior approval, beforehand.”

Chang smiled at Pedro and Matthew, as he said, “That is what I wanted to hear. Have a good evening, gentlemen. I am sure we will be in touch, later.”

Though, just as Past Chang and his men were about to walk away, from Pedro and Matthew, Pedro and Matthew suddenly heard an all too familiar female voice say, in english, “Found you.”

Pedro and Matthew turned to their right, to see though the break in the crowd, that across the roulette table was Daiyu, River, and Lee. With Daiyu standing in the middle, Lee was to her right, and River to her left. All three women had looks of amusement on their faces.

Pedro thought, 'Oh, hell. It is them. And from their viewpoint, they likely only see us.
I are going to have to be careful in how I handle this situation.'

Matthew thought, 'I expected them to find us. But, not this soon. Though, Pedro is doing such a wonderful job, I will let him handle this. Still, I could have a little fun with this... And that is such a lovely dress that Chang, or in Chang likes to be called in her female form, Daiyu. While River and Lee look, okay.'

Matthew casually said, “Hi... Daiyu... Nice dress.”

Daiyu replied, “Thanks.” She mentally added, 'At least they were being polite about the situation.'

Lee said, “Now boys, you are coming back with us. We hope you do so in a peaceful manner.”

Pedro commented, “Easier said, than done.” He mentally reflected, 'Also, with River here, I have to be mindful of what I think.' He focused on River, as he went on to think, with mild amusement, 'Yes River. I know you are reading my mind. Though, from the look on your face, you clearly don't know that Chang's past counterpart, along with four of his bodyguards, are right beside us. You just don't see them from your angle, due to the crowd of people between us.'

Pedro saw River's eyes widen, as he continued his thoughts, 'I am surprised you didn't sense them.'

River forced her expression to return to normal, as she quietly said, “Too much background noise.”

Pedro heard what River said, as he thought, 'Oh. This many people, in one place, makes it hard to single out people from the crowd?'

River nodded once in confirmation.

Pedro thought, 'Okay.'

Daiyu calmly inquired, “So, what is it going to be? Are you going to come with us, nicely?” She continued, in a more firmer tone of voice, 'Or, not?

Pedro cracked a grin, as he stated, “I believe you will have to speak to the master of this house.”

Suddenly, the crowd around the roulette table thinned, and the three women saw who was with Pedro and Matthew.

To Pedro and Matthew's right, were four bodyguards in black suits, and sunglasses. And to their left, was Past Chang, in his business suit, while wearing his sunglasses over his eyes.

Lee thought, with worry, 'Oh hell. This is not good. But, I better let River and Chang handle this. And follow their lead.'

Daiyu looked over at River, as she thought, 'Why didn't you tell me my past self was so close?'

River turned to Daiyu. She shrugged, as she softly said, “Even I miss a few, now and then.”

Daiyu thought, 'Fine.'

Daiyu and River then looked back to Past Chang.

Past Chang looked at the three women, they back to Pedro and Matthew.

At the same time, the three women saw the Chang's four bodyguards start to tense up, as they got ready for a possible fight.

Past Chang continued to look at Pedro and Matthew, as he asked, “Do you know these women?”

Pedro continued to look at Daiyu, Lee, and River, as he answered, “Yes.”

Matthew cracked a grin towards the three women, as he commented, “They are nothing but trouble.”

Past Chang turned to the three women, as he said, “I found that to be the case, for women in general.”

The three women slightly growled at Past Chang's comment.

As Daiyu stopped growling, River and Lee continued growling for another few seconds, as they both look at Daiyu.

Daiyu noticed this, as she thought, 'River, I know I am going to pay for that comment in the bedroom. Also, I am starting to realize why I have had to face so many strong women in my life. Karma made me eat those words.'

A few seconds later, River stopped growling, with Lee soon stopping as well. With the three of them looking at at the men across the table.

Meanwhile, Past Chang began staring at Daiyu, as he thought, 'There is something familiar about that woman. But, I cannot place her.' He stated, “Ladies, I am going to have to request that you come with me. I have some questions for you.”

River and Lee tensed up their bodies, as they prepared to either fight, or run.

On the other hand, Daiyu was resigned herself to what she knew she had to do next, as she thought, 'Damn it. I always wondered why the crazy chick in the dress started a gunfight, in my old casino, for no reason. Now, I know why, and who. I have to start a gunfight to keep my past self figuring out it is me. I have to do it with one pistol, or I might still tip them off, as to who I am. Still, in this case, it is good that I tend to leave a bullet in each chamber of my pistols.'

Daiyu then swiftly used her right hand, to reach behind and under her dress, to pull her right pistol. She then pointed it in front of her, as she began firing across the roulette table, towards the men. Though, she was careful not to hit anyone.

As the shots began to ring out, the crowd ducked for cover.

Even Past Chang and his bodyguards were caught off guard, as they behind the tables.

But, Pedro, Matthew, Lee, and River remained standing, as Daiyu continued to unload he pistol.

Meanwhile, Pedro quickly realized, 'She is not firing at anyone. She only doing this to keep from having to face her past self. I can understand that. Still, this is our chance to escape, as well.'

Pedro used his right hand to firmly grip Matthew's left upper arm.

Matthew turned to look at Pedro.

Pedro said, “Let's get out of here. So, follow me.”

Matthew replied, “Okay.”

Pedro let go of Matthew's arm, and he started walking briskly towards the front entrance to the casino, with Matthew walking right behind him.

(_)

At that moment, across the roulette table, Daiyu stopped firing, at she looked at River, then Lee, and back to River, as she stated, “This way.” She mentally added, 'Fortunately, I know a back way out of here, that only my past self, and I know.”

Daiyu then holstered the pistol in her hand, as she started running towards the nearby stairwell. River and Lee ran right behind her.

When the reached the stairwell, Daiyu noticed there was no one nearby her, except for River and Lee.

River and Lee then watched as Daiyu walked to a wall, that was under the staircase.

Daiyu the pushed against the wall, with the wall giving way, to reveal that it was a secret door.

Daiyu turned to River and Lee, as she ordered, “Get in, now. This will lead us to the outside.”

River and Lee quickly walked into the secret hallway. Daiyu then joined them, as she closed the door behind her.

Just as the door closed, men in black business suits, whom were also wearing sunglasses, stormed into the stairwell after them, only to find that they had lost the three women.

(_)

Around that time, Pedro and Matthew reached the lobby of the casino, they saw other chinese men in black business suits and sunglasses, rushed passed them, and towards the gaming floor.

Both men knew that it was best to just act calm, and continue forward at more normal pace, towards the exit. Because, doing so would likely not draw people's attention towards them.

They soon made it outside, and into one of the taxis that was almost always near the casino, waiting for fares.

After Pedro and Matthew got into the backseat of the taxi, and shut the doors, the taxi driver looked forward, as he asked, in english, “Where too?”

Pedro requested, “Take us to the best golf course in the area.”

The taxi driver replied, “Alright.” He then started put his car in drive, and started driving down the street.

Matthew asked, “Why are we going to a golf course?”

Pedro coyly answered, “It just deals with something I have wanted to do for a while now... Don't worry, my reasons will make sense, soon enough.”

Mathew replied, “Okay.”

They then rode in the taxi, as the taxi driver took them to their destination.

(_)

At the moment, back inside the casino gaming floor, Past Chang was standing up. As he found his footing, he looked around, and saw on of his chinese men looking back at him, only a few feet from him.

Past Chang walked towards the man as he asked, in chinese, “Is anyone hurt?” He then came to a stop in front of the other man.

The man in the black business suit and sunglasses, answered, in chinese, “No. We are still checking everyone. But, we think we got lucky on this. Still, we lost the three women, and the two men have disappeared in the confusion. Would you like us to send teams to go after both groups?

Past Chang stated, “As tempting as it would be, I have to decline. No one as been harmed, and dragging this out would only work against us... Still, make sure no one, especially the staff and customers, have been harmed. If they have, get them medical attention, and tell them we will pay for all medical bills while in the city, in exchange for their silence.”

The man replied, “Yes sir.” He then went turned around, and walked away from Chang, to rely his employer's orders.

Past Chang look around the gaming floor, as everyone began to get up, he heard in various languages, a few of which he did not know very well. Also, he heard some of his men telling the staff and customers, that everything was now fine, and for them to go back to business as usual.

And for the most part, it appeared that allaying the staff and customers' fears were working. One a couple of staff that were dealers, were not back at their jobs, as most of the customers in the room when back to gambling.

Past Chang thought, 'I will cut the staff some slack on this. I do not want dealers to have shaky fingers. I will bring fresh dealers in, while I give those on the staff, that were here, a break for an hour. And they should be fine in an hour, or so.'

'Still, that woman had us dead to rights. And the way she fired her pistol. She was trying to avoid hitting anyone, while appearing to being aiming at someone. She clearly did not want to talk to me. And I know enough about such women to know better than to push my luck.'

'And I swear, that pistol looked like my pistols... Though, that could just mean she has good taste in pistols.'

'And it is a good thing Shenhua is on vacation. Or, this might had turned into a needless bloodbath. A few shots fired is not going to cause the police to come by, unless someone is harmed. And if someone is harmed, I will just pay the medical bills, and sweep it all under the rug. The main thing is this event does not harm myself, nor my business... And I have a feeling I will someday get the answers to these questions... One way, or another...'

Past Chang then went to help his staff make sure everyone was unharmed. After he had confirmed there were no injuries, he had the dealers and staff that were present, take a break for an hour. With other dealers on staff, to come in to sub for them, for an hour.

All the while, Past Chang also had any damage repaired. And within three hours of the event, everything was back to business as usual for Chang, and his business, the Heavenly Dragon Casino.

(_)

A few minutes after the shooting stopped, outside of the Heavenly Dragon casino, in an alleyway, on the back side of the casino, along the wall, from the known exits, a secret door was opened from the inside.

After the door was pulled into the building.

A second later, Daiyu walked into the alleyway. After a couple of steps, she came to a stop, and looked around.

After she saw that no one else was there, she turned back to the entrance, as she stated, “All clear. You can come on out.”

River and Lee then walked out, in the alleyway. Daiyu then walked back to the door, and she used a hidden latch on the door, to pulled the secret door closed, and flush to the wall.

Daiyu turned around to look at River, and Lee, as they looked back at her.

Daiyu stated, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Sorry about that. But, I could not think of any other way to keep my past self from capturing us.”

River said, in a supportive tone of voice, “I understand.”

Lee replied, “I am okay with it. And I noticed that you were able to avoid hitting anyone.”

Chang responded, “Yes. I made sure not to hit anyone on my account. And the bullets I use in my pistol will not go through the walls of that room.”

Lee questioned, “That is nice. Also, I have just begun to realize why you fight with such low caliber weapons. You use those pistols, just in case you have to fight in a crowded areas? Such as the gaming floor of a casino.”

Chang answered, “Yes. This is the same principle that air marshals use lower caliber weapons and ammunition, on airlines. So, their weapons don't go through things, except their intended targets.”

River complimented, “That is good foresight on your part.”

Daiyu warmly smiled towards River, as she replied, “Thank you.”

River returning Daiyu's smile, as she said, “You're welcome.

Daiyu asked, “So, what do we do, now? Because, I am fresh out of ideas.”

River stated, “Well, they are not going to willingly come back with us. And this place is too dangerous to try to confront them, again. We came close to causing a paradox here. I don't want to risk doing that a second time.”

Daiyu replied, “I agree”

Lee suggested, “How about we just lay low, and wait for them to jump again? Then, we follow them. And if the reality, and situation allow for it, we confront them again, there.”

River said, “That is not a bad idea.”

Daiyu commented, “No. It isn't. And this way, I can show you both a few of the places in this town, while we wait for them to leave.”

Lee inquired, “I look forward to it. So, where do you want to go to first?”

Daiyu answered, “There is a good chinese restaurant, elsewhere in town, that serves a nice house soup.”

Lee asked, “That one that Revy raved about?”

Daiyu grinned, as she said, “The very same.”

Lee replied, “Cool.”

River commented, “I could go for a bowl of soup.”

Lee inquired, “Then, let's do that. Besides, I like house soup, as well. So, what about their drinks?”

Chang said, “They serve canned lemonade and sodas, that are chilled.”

Lee replied, “Okay. That sounds fine.”

River playfully requested, “Now, lead the way.”

Daiyu responded, “Okay. Just follow me. I know where a few taxis frequent, that is a couple of blocks from here. We will then ride over to the restaurant.”

Lee said, “Sounds like a nice plan, to me.”

Daiyu casually replied, “That is what I thought.”

Daiyu then turned to her right, as she started walking towards one of the ends of the alleyway, with Lee and River following right behind her.

With Daiyu soon give River and Lee to tour of Roanapur.

(_)

Around twenty minutes after Pedro and Matthew left the Heavenly Dragon casino, by taxi, they reached their next destination.

After the taxi came to a stop, just outside the north end of Roanapur, Pedro pay the taxi driver a gold coin, which the driver gladly accepted, as one of the largest fares he had all year.

Pedro and Matthew then got out of the taxi, with them walking around the taxi to stand next to each other, on the side of the road, with Pedro being to Matthew's right side.

As they stood off the side of the road, beside each other, the taxi they had just exited, drove away.

The two men look out in front of them.

There were standing in front of a set of large, well kept golf courses. There were no fencing around the golf courses, and in the distance, they saw the golf course met up against the jungle that surrounded bordered that side of the city.

To their right, about a hundred meters from them, they saw the road that lead into the golf club house.

The club house itself was about two hundred meters from them, to the northeast of them.

They also saw a few people on the fair-way of the links. But, none of them, nor their caddies, were looking in their direction, due to them being interested in what we are doing.

Matthew continued to look out in front of himself, as he asked, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Dare I ask why we are here?”

Pedro faced the golf courses, as he flatly answered, “To pay someone a visit. Just let me do the talking...” His voice turned to a low growl, as he continued, “Among other things.”

Matthew asked, “Why you in such a bad mood? Even with what happened at the casino, we have been having fun, so far.”

Pedro was quiet for a few seconds. He then asked, in a more relaxed, “Actually, I am not mad. I have been looking forward to do this for a while now. But, thinking of who we are going to confront slightly annoys me.”

Matthew questioned, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “And who are we looking for?”

Pedro answered, in a casual tone of voice, “We are looking for a fat son of a bitch that likes to play golf.”

Matthew sarcastically stated, “Why do I have a feeling this is person has wronged you in some way.”

Pedro conceded, “Not directly. Let us just say his example has caused me problems. As I said, it will make sense when we find him.”

Matthew inquired, “How can you be so sure that you target is here?”

Pedro pointed out, “It is a nice warm day, with a slight breeze out here. Perfect golfing weather.”

Matthew said, “I will give you that. So, does you plan risk the space time continuum of the multiverse?”

Pedro shrugged, as he replied, “Not really.”

Matthew asked, “So, where do we look first? The clubhouse? Or, the nineteenth hole bar? which I am sure is inside in the clubhouse building.”

Pedro stated, “No. We are uninvited guests. We need to avoid that building, so we don't attract too much attention. Besides, as I said, with this weather, he is likely outside, for now. We just have to find him. If we do not find him, within the hour, then we will head to the clubhouse.”

Matthew said, “Okay. Lead the way.”

Pedro started walking across onto the golf course nearest to them, with Matthew following behind.

As they walked, Matthew commented, “By the way, I did not get a chance to tell you. But, you are clearly one of the best bullshit artists I have ever seen.”

Pedro replied, in a happy tone of voice, “Thank you. While I prefer to be honest. Knowing how to bullshit comes in handy, from time, to time.”

Matthew agreed, “That is does.”

The two men spent the next fifteen minutes walking around the fare-ways of the golf courses. Pedro was careful to keep his distance, as he and Matthew walked around, looking for the man he was targeting.

After another minute of looking, Pedro spotted the man in question.

Pedro said, “There he is, over by the putting green, to our left.”

Matthew looked in that direction that Pedro was looking, as both he and Pedro turned and started walking in the direction of the man.

Matthew saw an overweight man in a brown colored police uniform and sunglasses, standing on the putting green, with a teenage boy that acted as the caddy for the man.

The boy had the golf bag set beside him, as the man held up gold club, and was lining up his shot, with the golf ball, ten feet from the hole of the course, on the putting green, with the tree line only about fifteen feet in the opposite direction from which Matthew and Pedro were walking from.

Matthew immediately recognized the man, as he stated, “That is Roanapur Police Chief Watsup.”

Pedro said, “Yes.”

Matthew asked, “And he is who we are after?”

Pedro replied, “Yes.”

Matthew said, “It is starting to make sense.”

Pedro stated, “Yes. I loath cops that support bribery. And barring a few exceptions, those from here, that are now in my town, are so disrespectful of my authority, because Watsup here. Because he allowed them to walk all over him. And he was a greedy bastard that was willing to take a bribe at a drop of a hat. Along with this, he likely supported this among his subordinates. Because, he was real open with his men, on what he was doing. And he preferred to be on the golf course, than keeping his city in one piece.”

Matthew replied, “Okay...” He then noticed Watsup's holstered revolver, which was strapped to the right side of his belt. He pointed out, “But, he is armed.”

Pedro commented, “I got a bulletproof vest, and I will introduce myself as a cop. Relax I got it covered.”

Matthew said, “It is your ribs.”

The two men continued to walk closer, to Watsup and the caddy.

As they got closer, Pedro quickly used his right hand to reach into right, side pants pocket, and he pull out his badge. He held his badge open, for those around him to see.

Several seconds later, as they came closer, they watched a Watsup sink his ball into the hole.

When Matthew and Pedro were within twenty feet of, Watsup, Watsup leaned back up. He and the caddy then turned to look two men approaching them.

Pedro said, “Police Chief Watsup. I need to speak with you.” He mentally added, 'And I am not going to give you my name.'

Pedro continued walking towards Watsup, as Matthew came to a stop.

Watsup asked, in english, “What is this about?”

By the, Pedro was four feet from Watsup.

Pedro pocketed his badge. And as he took another step, he quickly made his right hand into a fist, and gave Watsup and upper cut, to the jaw, while he said, “This.”

Watsup was caught completely off guard, as he was knocked to the ground, on his back. When he hit the ground, he let go of his golf club.

Pedro quickly walked over to the dazed Watsup. He leaned down and pulled out Watsup's pistol. He then swiftly unload it, with him tossing the bullets, and pistol way from them. Pedro then turned, leaned down, and picked up the golf club that Watsup had been using. After which, Pedro leaned back up straight, while he held the golf club by the handle, with the golf head part of the end facing towards him.

During all this, Pedro never took his eyes off of Watsup.

Nearby, Matthew turned to the teenage boy, with the boy looking back at him. Matthew said, “You might to get out of here.”

The caddy understood him, as he left the gym bag behind, while he ran off, towards the clubhouse.

Matthew turned his attention to Pedro, and Watsup.

Watsup looked up at Pedro, as he asked, “Why?”

Pedro retorted, “Oh. Where to start?... Well, you can consider this to be on behalf of all honest, vice loving cops everywhere, whom loath bribery.”

Pedro then started using the gold club in his hands, to beat on Watsup's arms, legs, and stomach. He was careful not to permanently harm him, by hitting any vital areas. He also did not hit Wastsup with the side of the end of the club with the gold head on it.

As Pedro continued hitting Watsup with the golf club in his hands, he thought, 'Too bad I cannot serious harm, nor kill him, because I do not want to creating a paradox. But, this is going to leave some nice bruises. And he will be sore for a few days. Also, the way Lee killed him was poetic. So, I am okay with letting him live, for now.'

Pedro then continued beating Watsup for another minute, before he decided it was enough, and he tossed the golf club away from them.

Pedro then turned to look at Matthew. He saw that Matthew had a calm expression on his face.

Matthew calmly asked, “Feeling better?“

Pedro replied, “Yes.” He thought, 'Though, I am still a bit annoyed.'

Matthew said, “Good. Let us get out of here.”

Pedro suggested, “To the tree line, for cover.”

Matthew agreed, “My thoughts exactly.”

As they turned and started walking way from Watsup, Watsup groaned, “You will pay for this.”

Pedro kept his back turned from Watsup, as he casually replied, “I already am.”

A few seconds later, they made it to the tree line, and by then, they were walking beside each other.

A few seconds later, they came to a stop, just inside the brush, and out of sight of the golf course.

While standing close to each other, Pedro turned to Matthew, as he asked, “Do still want to go to South America?”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he said, “Sure. And you said you had a place in mind.”

Pedro replied, “That I do.”

Matthew grinned, as he requested, “Then, give me a pleasant surprise.”

Pedro returned Matthew's grin, as he said, “All you had to do was ask.”

Pedro then pulled out his reality device from a pocket.

Unfortunately, Pedro was still a little upset. And while he thought of the specific city he wanted to go to, in South America, he only vaguely thought of a modern time, and he was not thinking of what reality they were going to at all. So, as Pedro pressed the red button on the reality device, the reality device teleported Matthew and himself, they headed for a time and place they were not expecting to go to.

(_)

Reality Pedro and Lee's Home Reality. Date, two days after Pedro and Matthew went missing. A day after Chang, River, and Lee disappeared with notice. Locations, Plata Podrido, Daiyu Palace Casino, Annie office. Time, During the afternoon, on a sunny day.

Annie Skywalker was dressed in her usual pants, belt, shirt, shoes, and robes, among other clothing items, underneath. And she had her deactivated light saber hooked to the right side of her belt.

She was sitting in her cushioned chair behind her desk in her office. The door to her office was closed, but unlocked.

There as a single office chair in front of her desk.

While Chang had assigned an office to each of his top staff, Annie had rarely used her office, because office settings reminded her too much of some of the more unpleasant times in her life. When she was Darth Vader, trapped in that damned black suit, while she, or at the time, he, was forced to deal with the bureaucratic hell that was the Galactic Empire of her home Star Wars reality.

And in the past, dealing with bureaucracy put Vader a bad mood. The worst part was Vader had found that bureaucracy was the one thing that the force could not solve, nor destroy.

This is one of the reasons Vader had not killed Grand Moff Tarkin. Because Tarkin was one of the few people that could share the load on the bureaucracy that he could tolerate for more than five minutes. And Tarkin knew this fact, though, Tarkin never pushed his luck on the matter.

Annie took a deep breath. While she slowly exhaled, she forced herself to relax, as she thought, 'That is all over now. And I have much happiness to look forward to in my current life. And from what I am sensing in the hallway, outside, the person I called here, is about to reach my door.'

As Annie sensed the person reach her office door, and whom was about to knock on that do, she said, in english, “Come in.”

The person did not knock, and instead the person opened the door, entered, and closed the door.

Annie looked at the person she had called on the phone, to the person's personal, encrypted cellphone, to come visit her that afternoon.

The person was one of Annie's good, and long time friends, Fabiola Iglesias. She had her long green hair in a ponytail. She wore black socks, black boots, black leather pants, black leather belt, a green blouse, and a black leather jacket. Under that clothing, she wore brown boyshorts, and a green sports bra.

Annie said, “Hello Fabiola.”

Fabiola inquired, in english, “Hi Annie. So, why did you call me here? You didn't give me any details on the phone.”

Annie offered, “All in a moment. First, would you care to sit down?”

Fabiola said, “I would love too. Thank you.” She then walked up to the chair in front of the desk, and she sat down, in it.

As Fabiola got conformable in her seat, she looked over at Annie. Fabiola thought, 'Let's do some small talk, first.' She asked, “So, how is the part time pit boss job coming along?”

Annie stated, “It is okay. It doesn't pay as much as the other job I have here. But, the job helps to keep my force senses sharp. And I do enjoy using the force and my own skills of observation, on the gaming floor, to catch cheats, and solve issues, before they become problems.”

Fabiola replied, “Glad to hear it.” She thought, 'Now, to get down to the heart of the matter.'

Fabiola requested, “Now, let's get down to business. Why did you call me to come here? Even I know you don't like being in an office setting.”

Annie responded, “I need someone I trust, to do something for me. And you are the only one I know that I trust to do this job. Whom has the abilities to do so. And that you can do this job discreetly. I will even pay you for this job.”

Fabiola stated, “You don't need to pay me. I have enough wealth, as is. But, I would like to know what I am getting into, before I agree to it.

Annie said, “The reason I called you is that I need to find some people.”

Fabiola asked, “Who?”

Annie answered, “This has not been widely known yet. But, two days ago, Matthew and Pedro disappeared. And yesterday, Chang, River, and Lee, left the casino, without telling anyone where they were going. And they have not come back sense then. Which is odd for them. Considering, I can sense when they leave, and when the return. With them only usually being gone for five minutes, our time.”

“Along with this, I cannot sense any of them on the planet, through the force. Meaning they are somewhere in the multiverse. And we need to quickly find them.”

Fabiola commented, “So, Matthew and Pedro finally got tired of everyone pushing them around, and they figured out a way to leave this reality, without anyone else realizing it. Good for them. It shows they have some backbone, and originality. Also, I am guessing, that the day after, Chang, River, and Lee, figured out they went missing, and they went looking for them, without telling anyone. And with them being gone of so long, you are worried that something might have gone wrong, and they might all be in trouble.”

Annie replied, “That is what I figured.”

Fabiola thought, 'I might as well tell her. I trust her to keep this to herself.' She stated, “Well that does explain some of how I met all them, as they are now, in the multiverse.”

Annie questioned, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Huh?”

Fabiola answered, “While Roberta and I were searching for Lee, we ran into Matthew, Pedro, Lee, River, and Chang. They said they were from our future. At the time, we were wondering how they ended up in another reality, together. With Lee being a woman, then. But, due to paradox issues, we could ask them any serious questions.”

Annie flatly asked, “And why did you not share this information with the rest of us?”

Fabiola shrugged, as she responded, “Not to sound like one of your old Jedi teachers. But, it is sometimes best for one to allow the future to play itself out.”

Annie questioned, “Fair enough... Still, that is why you didn't say much about your hunt?”

Fabiola coyly said, “For the most part.”

Annie inquired, “Do you know where they are? Or, should I say, when?”

Fabiola responded, “I know where, and when, they will be. But, because that is where my past self is, I will have to look for them elsewhere. Though, I do not understand why can't you go find them? You and Arcee would likely be able to find all five of them, and drag them back here, in no time.”

Annie answered, “Because, Arcee, Mal, and I are holding down the fort here, and keeping this town running, while they are all gone.”

Fabiola inquired, “What about Balalaika and Hotel Moscow? Do they know that those five are missing?”

Annie stated, in a concerned tone of voice, “Not yet. And I would like to keep it that way. Because I am not sure what Balalaika would do if she knew that Chang and Pedro were not here, to reign her in.”

Fabiola questioned, “What about you?”

Annie asked, “What about me?”

Fabiola inquired, with mild annoyance in her tone of voice, “You are, or were, Darth Vader. And you are afraid of Balalaika?”

Annie admitted, “More like I am afraid of that side of me. And I am afraid Balalaika might do something foolish that would bring that side of me back to the forefront. Don't get me wrong. I am in full control of myself. And there is no split personality with me. It is just I don't want to put myself in a situation where I am tempted to go back down that path.”

Fabiola said, “Okay. I can fully understand why you would be wary of getting back in touch with your dark side. No pun intended.”

Annie asked, “I will let that one slide. Do you have a tracking tablet, and reality device?”

Fabiola answered, “Yes. I have both in my hotel suite. Roberta and I even have a few spares reality devices in our suite. I think I will take an extra one, just in case.”

Annie complimented, “Good idea.”

Fabiola commented, “I also need to tell Roberta that I am leaving on an errand for you. But, I will keep the details of this errand vague.”

Annie replied, “Fair enough. I would prefer to stay on her good side.”

Fabiola deadpanned, “So, does everyone else.”

Annie stated, “With good reason. Which is one of the reasons why I am asking you, and not her, or your friends, to do this job. I want this done, low key. I want you to find them, and either bring them back, or come get me, so I can bring them back. Without harming, nor killing, any of them, nor those around them.”

Fabiola said, “Okay. I can do that. And relax. Unlike the others, I can do low key. I will even forgo my usual weaponry, and use those two custom Beretta seventy-sixes I took from Chang, years ago. Fortunately, I bought some shoulder holsters that will fit them. Along with a few extra ammo magazines, and ammo boxes, as well. And they are all in the suite I share with Roberta.”

Annie raised an eyebrow in interest, as she questioned, “The twenty-twos? Like the pistols that Chang currently uses?”

Fabiola replied, “Yes.”

Annie commented, in a casual tone of voice, “Okay... That is about as low key as one can get with firearms.”

Fabiola responded, “Yea. It is. Anyway, I should be fine. If I am unable to find them within a few weeks. Or, if I run into some trouble I cannot deal with on my own. I will return here, and we will do something else.”

Annie replied, “I can work with that. And if you are not back here in two weeks, my time. Arcee and I will come looking for you.”

Fabiola responded, “Good. I guess I better get going.”

Annie warmly smiled at Fabiola, as she said, “Have a safe journey.”

Fabiola turned Annie's smile, as she commented, “And good luck with keeping things calm here.”

Annie maintained her smile, a she replied, “Thank you.”

Fabiola said, “You're welcome.”

Fabiola then got up from her chair, walked over to the door, opened it, walked through the threshold of the door, into the hallway, with her gently closing the door behind her.

Annie looked at the door, as she sensed her good friend walking through the hallway, towards the front entrance, and to the parking lot right outside, where she had parked her car.

Annie thought, 'I hope Fabiola can pull this off. She is the only person I know of that could do this, without it all blowing up in our faces... Ah hell... Who am I kidding?... The multiverse spanning adventures always end up going wrong in someway... But, at least I continue to try to do things the right way... And maybe we will all luck out this time, without anyone getting hurt.'

Annie then continued her thoughts for a few minutes longer.

As Annie finished her contemplations, got up from her office chair, and left her office, to resume her duties.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 03: “The Mechanic.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Hernan, Pedro, and Lee's Home Reality. Date, a Few Years ago. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, in the front yard of the home of Police Chief Pedro Del Soto. Time, in the evening, before sunset.

Hernan Pena had just gotten out and locked his car. He had parked along the curb of the street, next to a couple of police cars. With his right passenger door facing the front yard.

Now, Hernan walked around the front of his car, and made his way up to the front door to the home of his friend, Police Chief Pedro Del Soto.

Hernan was wearing some casual clothing, including blue jeans, a black t-shirt, black leather belt, and some decent black boots.

As he made his way to the small awning that covered the front door, he scratched his full, well groomed beard for a seconds.

When he reached the door, he came to a stop, and casually knocked on the door.

A second later, Pedro opened the door with his left hand, while having an open bottle of beer in his right hand. He greeted Hernan in spanish, “Hi Hernan. I am glad you came.”

Hernan replied, in spanish, “I always try to accept an invitation from a good friend.”

Pedro responded, “I appreciate it. Come in, and have a beer. We were just about to start.”

Hernan walked into the home, and Pedro shut the door behind them.

A few seconds later, the two men walked through a hallway that quickly lead into Pedro's living room.

When they reached the living room, Hernan saw, to his left side, an open ice chest, full of ice and bottles of beer, near the wall mounted, wide screen TV, with a selection of entertainment systems that were played under the TV, and were connected to the TV.

Hernan also noticed, from the LED readout on the blu-ray player, under the TV, that the blu-ray player was turned on. And on top of the blu-ray player, Hernan saw a universal remote to Pedro's entertainment system, along with blu-ray disc box with a familiar title on top of the blu-ray player.

Though, Hernan noted that subtitle, below the title on the box was not season one, nor two, of what he knew of the series.

Across the room, from the TV and entertainment system, to Hernan's right side, Hernan saw Melvin, and a couple of the police officers he knew, in their civilian clothing. Melvin was sitting at in a reclining chair, set upright, nearest to Hernan, while the two officers were sitting on the couch.

Melvin was a lean, physically fit man in his early sixties. He head was shaved bald, and he had dyed blond goatee, mustache, and eyebrows.

Melvin wore a blue t-shirt, brown pants, brown leather pants, black dress shoes, and a red newsboy cap on his head.

All of three of them had turned to look at Hernan, with each of them either had a bottle of beer in hand, or on the rectangular coffee table by them.

Hernan walked over and reached ice and pulled out a cold bottle of beer. He then open the bottle of beer, tossed the cap into a nearby small trash can, and took a swallow. Next, he lower his bottle, as he turned to the men that were sitting in the room. He said, “Hi guys... Hey, Melvin. I am glad you could make it.”

Melvin stated, in spanish, “I would not miss this for the world.”

Hernan sat by on the end of the couch near Melvin, to Melvin's right side, with the other two office taking up the two other spaces on the couch, to Hernan's left side.

Hernan then set his bottle of beer on the coffee table in front of him, as turned to Pedro. He inquired, “So, from your phone call, you said you got a video you ordered, in the mail, today?”

Pedro, walked over to the TV, as he answered, “Yes. I just got it in the mail, a few hours ago. Paciano got his copy in the mail, yesterday. He told me this mini-series rocked. It was the best so far of the series. Given the manga version was good, I am willing to believe him. Still, I wanted to wait until they finally dubbed it in the North American english cast, before I watched it. I think the North American cast did a better job than the Japanese dub cast.”

Melvin asked, “The same North American cast? It has been a few years since season one and two were released in North America.”

Pedro answered, “Yes. The same cast.”

Melvin responded, “That's nice. They did an okay job.” He mentally added, 'Next to the real voices, from the real people, themselves.'

Pedro set his bottle of beer down onto top of the blu-ray player, beside the blu-ray disc box, and remote. He then picked up and opened a slim blu-ray case. Next, while holding the back with his left hand, he used his right hand to eject button on his blu-ray player.

After the blu-ray play disc tray opened his blu-ray player, he pulled out the blu-ray version of the mini-series, while making sure he pulled out the blu-ray disc copy in the box, which was chrome colored on top. Compared to the black colored DVD copy, that was on the other interior side of the disc box.

Pedro set the disc into the open disc tray, and he made sure the disc was properly in the tray. He pushed the eject button to the player to close tray.

Pedro picked set down the open disc box onto the top of the blu-ray player.

Pedro picked up his bottle of beer with his left hand, and his universal remote with his left hand.

Pedro turned and walked over to the recliner chair, set upright, opposite to the coffee table, from the chair Melvin sat in. He set his bottle of beer on the coffee table, in front of him. And Pedro sat down in the chair.

Hernan inquired, “Anyone else find it odd that as latin american men, except for Melvin, we are about to watch a japanese anime, dubbed in North American english?”

As Pedro got comfortable in his chair, he turned to Hernan. He agreed, “Yea. It is interesting. Still, I prefer to talk after we finish watching this mini-series. Though, this is nearly three hours long We will have a bathroom break in an hour and half, for a few minutes, then we will go back to watching this rest of the series.”

The player then automatically started up, showed the previews. After the previews, the player bought up the disc menu. Pedro used his remote to start playing the Black Lagoon, Roberta's Blood Trail anime mini-series, from the beginning, with him selecting the english dialogue.

(_)

Almost three hours later, the mini-series ended, with the scene between Rock and Revy, after the credits just finishing, with single title picture then showing right after the scene.

Pedro used his remote to stop the disc from playing. He leaned forward. He set his remote down on the coffee table. And Pedro leaned back in his chair.

Among the men, Hernan was the first to speak, as he said, “That was... Interesting...”

Pedro chuckled a little.

Melvin commented, “That was an experience I won't forget.” He thought, 'In several ways.'

One of the police officers said, in spanish, “Those women, especially Roberta, are terrifying when they really get going in their bloodlust.”

Everyone nodded in agreement, as the second office stated, in spanish, “You got that right.”

The first police officer commented, “The green haired girl fights as dirty as her teacher.”

The second officer responded, “I do not know which was the worse. The groin attack. Fabiola's boot knife attack. Or, Roberta’s buckle gun attack, and then what she did afterward to that guys head. Ouch, on both counts.”

The first officer replied, “That is debatable. And those maids like to use really big guns.”

Hernan stated, “I could see the attraction to using such big guns.”

The second officer turned to Hernan, as he stated, “I can see why you would, considering your past. So, after seeing that, what does our resident former FARC member have to say about Roberta actions, and skills?”

The others in the room turned to look at Hernan, as well. The first officer said, “He's right. It is not like you haven't pulled serious shit in this town that could rival some of her actions. Because of that, I would like your input on her. Do you know anyone as badass as she is, in real life.”

Hernan groaned, as he looked around the room. He answered, in an annoyed tone of voice, “You cut loose one time in this town, and you never live it down.”

Everyone else in the room started laughing for a few seconds, due to Hernan's reaction, and comment.

As they quieted down, Hernan decided to continue speaking, “To answer your question. No. No one I know of could be as crazy as her. I admit, a few of the FARC members I knew could come close. But, not that close to her. And not just her level of violence and combat skills. The other actions she takes are incredible. For example, in the first episode of the mini-series, Roberta does that incredible rifle exhibition drill with that musket. I must give the animation crew props. That was a very well made scene, and very well choreographed. I only know a few people in real life that could that.”

Pedro asked, with curiosity in his tone of voice, “Yourself included?”

Hernan turned to Pedro. He shrugged, as he said, “On a good day. It has been a long time since I have practiced drills with a rifle.”

Pedro replied, “That is nice to know.” Pedro then turned to Melvin, as he commented, “Why are you so quiet, Melvin?”

Melvin turned to Pedro, as he answered, “Until now, I have never seen this series all the way through. Nor, have I read the manga in its entirety... I found the Vampire Twins and Tokyo arcs to painful to read. And I barely made it through watching them in the anime format. And I did not know that Revy got wrongfully arrested, and then raped by a cop, when she a teenager. Along with her being heavily abused by her drunken father. Though, it does explain a lot about her personality.”

The first officer commented, “Sucks to be her. But, such actions do reflect badly on the rest of us fine police officers.”

The second officer agreed, “That is true. Though, she is still a bitch.”

Melvin commented, “I agree. But, she is an equal opportunity bitch. I mean, she is generally a bitch towards everyone. And though she is insulting, she is never violent with someone, unless she was paid to be, or that person crossed her. I admired her for that. And that is one of the few redeeming things about her.”

The first officer stated, “No arguments there. Though, it sounds like you know her.”

Melvin let out a laugh. He then stated, “Trust me. After seeing this mini-series, I can safely say that likely no one knows what is going on inside Revy's head. Maybe not even Revy, herself.”

The first officer responded, “Interesting. But, lets get back to Roberta. She is the top, alpha bitch, badass of that series. Roberta, in Bloodhound mode is something else. She faced three small, badass armies. One she just ignored. One she she into. And the third she just plainly destroyed with that big rifle, with the grenade launcher attached under the barrel.”

Melvin spoke up, “Four armies. Don't forget the Golden Triangle army she took out, off screen. With only her muskets, flints, and her pistols. I am so happy, for so many reasons, that the Bloodhound chose to ignore Balalaika and Hotel Moscow.”

Pedro inquired, “So, you are a Hotel Moscow fan?”

Melvin shrugged, as he coyly replied, “You could say that.”

The first officer said, “Anyway. Along with those four armies, she faced Revy, the knife nut, and the cleaner. And she kicked their asses, and scared the hell out of the last two.”

Melvin stated, “Yes. Though, the ending is quite sad. Roberta is left crippled, in so many ways.” He mentally added, 'Though, I didn't know that Roberta was left that crippled.'

Hernan commented, “Actually, I found the ending to be uplifting, and hopeful. First, was the contrast. It began by showing the world of night, in Roanapur, then it screen literally pans to the other side of the world, showing the world of day in Venezuela. And while Roberta was shown physically crippled, maimed, and in a wheelchair. At the end, she is shown being able to get up from the wheelchair, with help from Garcia.”

“And by that happening, it shows that she is not alone. And the scene shows that she was able to stand and start walking towards the family of the man she killed. The one that haunted her in the mini-series.”

“With it being show that Shane was there with the family. Meaning he was the one that brought them there, to help make up for his actions towards the Lovelace family.”

“This means that both Roberta and Shane were able to confront their past actions, and bring closure to their past sins.”

“So, while Roberta's body was crippled, her soul was shown to be walking towards redemption.”

“That entire ending was about one thing. Hope. For Rock, it was the hope of living to see an other day, and marching towards the future. For Shane, it is about hope and redemption. And for Roberta, it was the hope of being able to live with her past actions, while walking towards the future.”

Hernan's voice took a hard edge to it, as he continued, “Still, the worst part of the tragedy, was this whole mess was started because the U.S. government got sloppy, and made assumptions. They thought the Lovelace senior was just a communist sympathizer. If they had done a background check on him, they would have realized they could have turned him into an agent for them.”

“This is because the two most important people in the world to him were his son Garcia, and Roberta. Garcia was already kidnapped once by a local drug cartel. And Roberta was wanted by the same said drug cartel. If the U.S. government had offered to help protect Garcia and Roberta, chances are that Diego Lovelace would have gladly become a spy for the U.S. government.”

“Due to this, he could have influenced that political party from the inside for the U.S. government. Like good old fashioned cold war style spying and espionage. Old school cold war tactics. The type that puts an agent into an inner circle of one enemies, with that person not just being a spy, but offering effect policy of that enemy.”

“Without firing a shot.”

“But, that seems to have become a lost art.”

“And that is not even taking into account Roberta. On paper, they would have just seen a FARC terrorist, whom went AWOL. Until they dug deeper and found that she deserted from the FARC over their connections to the drug cartels. She would have been a gold mine of information for the U.S. on both the FARC organization and the drug cartels. And she would have probably given the information freely, in exchange for the U.S. government helping to protect the Lovelace family.”

“If the U.S. had played their cards right. On one front, they could have arranged Diego Lovelace to replace Hugo as dictator of Venezuela, after Hugo died of cancer. In which case the U.S. would have controlled the entire nation, without anyone else knowing.”

“And one the other front, with Roberta's knowledgeable, they could have further gutted FARC and the drug cartels.”

“But, the U.S. was just too wasteful, and shortsighted, to take the long term approaches.”

“In the end, I guess the lesson from the mini-series is that shooting first and asking questions later is an unwise strategy.”

Silence reigned for a few seconds, as the other four men in the room were mildly shocked at how profound and retrospective Hernan had been in the way he presented is statements.

Melvin then commented, “That is deep.” He mentally reflected, 'His comments on this are something that Balalaika, or Chang, might have come up with.'

Pedro agreed, “Yes. It is. Hernan seems to be full of surprises. And good ones, at that.”

Hernan said, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thank you.”

Melvin stated “I never would have thought of it that way, Hernan.”

Pedro pointed out, “Few people think the way Hernan does.” He turned to Hernan, as he continued, “Still Hernan, you were in a similar situation as Roberta, for a while there. Would you have taken up such an offer? If it was presented to you, and your loved ones?”

Hernan turned to Pedro, as he though about Pedro's question for a few seconds. Hernan then plainly answered, “I honestly don't know.”

Pedro responded, “That is a fair enough answer. Still, let us be happy that these characters do not exist in real life. Because, I have no idea how I would handle them if they came to my city.”

Melvin uncomfortably laughed. He then looked away from them, and towards the TV, which had nothing on it, as he replied, in a slightly shaken tone of voice, “Yea. Let us be happy about that.” He then turned back to look at his friends.

Hernan looked around the room, at his friends. He smiled, as he happily stated, “Fortunately, there are some things we do not have to worry about. And those women are one of those things.” He then picked up his latest bottle of beer, and he took a swallow from the bottle.

Hernan then set his bottle of beer back on the coffee table, as the five men continue their pleasant conversation for another hour, before they called it a night.

(_)

Reality, Hernan, Pedro, and Lee's Home Reality. Date, a few years later. Four days after Pedro and Matthew left Pedro's home reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, inside the Rats Nest bar. Time, eight PM, at twilight, right before dark.

Revy, Rock, and their friends were inside, Rats Nest bar, and their party there was in full swing. Everyone in the bar was wearing casual clothing.

On the right side of the room, behind the part of the bar counter which faced the left side of the room, where the tables were, Bao looked at those around the room and for brief moment she felt a touch of nostalgia. She then cursed her fate, as she thought, 'Why do I always have to be the one on the outside?'

Due to the vat process, years ago, Bao was a woman whom looked in her mid-twenties. She had tanned skin, with slender athletic build. And her black hair was cut short, to her neckline. Among other things, she wore a white t-shirt, blue jeans, a brown leather belt, and dark blue tennis shoes.

Bao looked over to her left, at Melanie, whom was standing right beside her.

Melanie had use to be Melvin, before the vat process. And she was now a healthy, fair skin woman in her mid-twenties. She had a slender, athletic physical build, with brown hair, which was cut in short, boyish hair style. Right now, she was wearing casual clothing of a shirt, pants, and shoes, among other clothing items.

Melanie had taken the night off at her job bartending job at the Devil's Hotel, to help Bao with chaos the parties usual cause.

Bao smiled, as she thought, 'At least I am not alone. And I did try damn hard to get away from these bitches. And they just keep following me wherever I go. I thought if I just didn't state my name, nor an alias, that would work, but that damn Rock for being so smart.'

'Though, at least now, I have a nice girlfriend to help me out. Her boss at the hotel lets her help me out here on the busy nights. In exchange, I help her out on the busy nights that the hotel bar. It works out well. Considering we serve different groups of people, for the most part. With different off nights for us. Or, in some cases, what Revy's group is going to do, decides which of us is helping which. At least Dutch let's us know a day in advance as to when her crew here throws these parties. So, Melanie and I can plan ahead.'

'And with both of us superhuman, after closing, we have enough stamina to enjoy several more hours after work, before we have to get some rest for the night.'

'And unlike the past, no one has tried to extort money from us, nor pressure us into doing anything we do not want to do. And these are positive signs that our lives are looking up.'

Bao turned to look at the dark skinned woman sitting on a stool, near her, across the bar counter. The woman was Dutch, whom was enjoying a bottle of rum with a small glass. She was wearing clothing in the same style and colors as what she use to wear as a man.

Though, Dutch's clothing was tailored to fit her body. Along with other clothing items, underneath, the clothing consisted of a light green sleeveless shirt, dark green pants, black leather belt, open green flack jacket, and black boots. Though, she did not have on her green tinted sunglasses, with allowed Bao to see her eyes. And Dutch had her brown hair in dreadlocks, with her hair going down, just below her neckline.

Bao thought, 'And tonight, Dutch has been a good conservationist with Melanie and I. Her small talk is pretty good. And we can quietly listen to her, when we are not serving the others, and working behind the counter.'

'Also, it is good that this party is not as wild a usual. Considering some our regulars are not here. Such as those eight young adult girls, that are Lagoon and Akira's sets of kids. Dutch even mentioned those girls were getting something to eat at a restaurant across town.'

Bao looked over at Yolanda, Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin, whom were sitting at a table near the bar counter. Yolanda was drinking a bottle of water. Roberta was drinking a bottle of tequila with a small glass. Aeryn and Violin were each having a cold bottle of beer to drink.

Bao thought, 'At least some of the people here can like mature adults most of the time. Such as Yolanda, and Aeryn. Even Violin is mature most of the time. And surprising, when she is not on a rampage, Roberta can be a very good customer.'

'And thinking of the maids, I have no seen Fabiola in the last few days. I wonder what happened to her? But, I am not going to ask about her, because I know she can take care of herself.'

'Though, I am never going to try to collect on Roberta, and Fabiola, destroying my bars three times over. Including, them wrecking this bar once. Pissing off those women would be bad for both one's health, and one's insurance rates.'

'Besides, given the gold that Dutch, Benny, and Janet, regularly pay me. I have long since made up for what money I lost due to the damage to my bar.'

Bao turned to look at a two seat table by the back wall of the bar. At that table sat Janet and Benny. They two of them were sharing a bottle of rum with each having a small glass, while they were enjoying each others company, as they had quiet conversation with each other.

Bao thought, 'Still, others are in their own little world.'

Bao looked at another nearby table, between Benny and Janet's table, and the table that Yolanda, Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin's table, sat Balalaika and B. Both russian women were sharing a bottle of vodka, with each of them using a small glass. The two women we talking, as they watched the rest of their group's activities.

Bao thought, 'And I am not sure what they are doing. Maybe they are not even sure, right now.'

'And on another matter, even though they very nice women, I am glad that Akira, and her two girlfriends, Natsuru, and Ranma, are not here. Because, while they rarely start any problems. They can easily add to the situation.'

'Dutch mentioned that those three wanted to take a break tonight, from the party, and they agreed to babysit Violin and Aeryn's daughter, along with Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's three kids, and Balalaika and B's two kids. On those last two, I pity those rugrats when they are potty trained.'

Bao looked over at large round table, in the upper left corner of the bar, where River, as Sam, and Lee use to sit at. At that table, sat Eda, Revy, Rock, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton, with Eda and Revy sitting across from each other.

Currently, Eda and Revy were in a drinking contest. They were downing shots of hundred and eight proof whiskey like it was water. The other four at women at their table were drinking cold bottles of a quality asian brand of beer, while they cheered on Eda and Revy.

And Revy her on her semi-automatic pistols, in their shoulder holsters.

Bao mentally reflected, 'It seems that Revy and Eda are never going to change. I mean Revy is a mother, for crying out loud. And when the situation does not involve her kids, she still act like a teenager most of the time.'

'Though, even with them drinking so much. the one good think about being superhuman, while we can get drunk, it takes more alcohol, we can also sober up fast. All that is required is for our metabolism to kick in. Such as getting a burst of adrenalin going. This is good for when we want to have some sex, even while being a little too drunk to enjoy it. Five minutes worth of exercise and we are stone cold sober.'

'The one down side is that if we consume that much alcohol, that fast, our bodies will filter through our kidneys to quickly, that we will need to take a large piss within a few minutes of starting such a drinking binge. Though, that is better than liver poisoning. Which we none of us, whom undergone the vat process, have to worry about now.'

'And due to this, they are less likely to cause trouble. Unless they piss their pants and get pissed off. I will talk to Dutch about this. And I know just the way to do it.'

Bao turned to Dutch, as she lightly complained, in english, “Dutch, if those two keep this up, I won't have any drinks left by the end of the night.”

Dutch responded, in english, “Don't worry. I took care of it. I got them to agree that if the contest ends when one collapses from being drunk, which is not likely, one of them has to go pee, or one of them vomits.”

Bao pointed out, “I would think, given how long you have been female that you would know that a woman can be like a camel in such situations. Until they wait too long. Or, they vomit. Either way, they will embarrass themselves, and they will get angry.”

Dutch smirked, “It doesn't matter, as long as I am regularly paying you with these.”

Dutch pulled out a small bar of gold, from her flack jacket. She set it onto the bar counter, and she tapped the gold bar on the top of the bar.

Bao picked up the gold bar, and put it under the bar counter, as she replied, “That we agree on. Still, there are concerns I have about all of us.”

Dutch responded, “I am all ears.”

Bao stated, “Revy, still comes in with her guns.”

Dutch conceded, “Okay. You may have a point there. And between you and me, I think she prefers to have them on as a mental crutch, due events that happened to her in her youth.”

Bao commented, “Yea. I know what happened. Though, given how many times she had shot up my preview bars. And the few times she has done so here. Her being armed, and drinking, is a concern.”

Dutch said, “Okay. Point taken. I will speak to her, again, about it.”

Bao replied, “Thank you.”

The women at the bar heard a familiar female voice come close, from behind Dutch, to Dutch's right, as she calmly addressed them, in english, “I would not worry too much. Women such as Revy sometimes have to learn their lessons that hard ways.”

Both Dutch and Bao turned towards the voice, to see Yolanda, whom had gotten up from the table she was sitting at, and she was casually walking towards them.

Yolanda was dress in a yellow blouse, with a yellow long skirt, with yellow slippers. Her clothing matched her short blond hair, and looked good on her.

At the moment, Yolanda was about six feet from the bar counter, as she casually approached them.

Bao commented, “I am more concerned with someone getting hurt.”

Yolanda came to a stop, in front of the bar counter, beside Dutch, to Dutch's right side, as she said, “Then, we will just have to make sure that does not happen.”

Dutch turned to Bao, as she stated, “Speaking of which. I am surprised you are showing so much of a backbone, Bao.”

Bao responded, “Well, I am in better health now. And I have a girlfriend to worry about.”

Melanie, whom had been quietly listening to the conversation, chirped, in english, “Thanks.”

Bao looked over at Melanie, and she gave her a smile.

Melanie saw Bao's smile, and returned Bao's smile with her own smile.

Boa and Melanie then turned to look at Yolanda and Dutch, from across the counter. Which Dutch sitting in a stole, and Yolanda standing there, and facing them at an angle that allow her to look at Dutch, as well.

Dutch commented, “Those are all valid points.”

Bao said, “I am glad you see my reasoning.” She turned to Yolanda, as she asked, “What can I do for you, Yolanda?”

Yolanda calmly inquired, “I was wondering if any of you have seen Pedro, or Matthew, around?”

Bao answered, “No. I have not seen them.”

Dutch commented, “I was wondering that myself. They make such good designated drivers.”

Yolanda turned to Dutch, as she agreed, “That they do.” She looked over at Melanie, as she questioned, “Have you seen them?”

Melanie answered, “No. I haven't see them in that last few days.”

Dutch commented, “I thought you were good friends with Pedro?”

Melanie turned to Dutch, as she responded, “I am. But, with the whole gender bending thing, we drifted apart, a bit. Though, we are still good friends, but we don't do guys night out anymore, for obvious reasons.”

Dutch replied, “That's understandable.”

Bao stated, “I hope Revy and the others are not too upset at losing their usual designated drivers.”

Yolanda kindly said, “Fortunately, I am willing to fill in for Pedro and Matthew. Having a large food truck can come in handy. I can fit half of them into the truck at one time. So, I only need to make two trips. And as long as I drive slow, we should be fine.”

Dutch commented, “Yea. We are fine, since Yolanda is willing to stepping up to the plate for us.”

Bao asked, “So, that is why you are ordering bottles of water for yourself?”

Yolanda replied, “Yes.”

Bao complimented, “That is very kind of you.”

Yolanda responded, “Well, someone has to be the adult in this situation.”

Bao let out a small laugh. She then said, “Honesty, I think we might be the four most mature people in the room.”

Yolanda calmly stated, “I would have to agree with that assessment.”

Dutch said, “Hey. You're preaching to the choir. The stories I could tell you about, not only Revy, but Benny and Janet. Even Rock had his, and later her, moments.”

Dutch then looked back her at Revy and the others. And she saw what they busy, as she mentally reflected, 'I am just so happy they are so wrapped up in what they are doing, they are not noticing us talking about them.' She turned back to look back over at Bao, Melanie, and Yolanda, as she continued her thoughts, 'But, it is nice to talk to people about this, whom understand where I am coming from.'

Bao replied, “I bet.”

Yolanda stated, in a pleasant tone of voice, “I highly doubt those stories could hold a candle to some of the things that Eda, and even Rico, have pulled. And that is not even counting some of the other people I have worked with.”

Dutch suggested, “You and me really need to have a long talk, in private, over a few beers, about the subject of maturity, or lack there of, about our friends.”

Yolanda gave Dutch a humorous smile, as she said, “I fully agree.”

Bao offered, “Well, you both are more than welcome to come in on the off hours. Late mornings, and earlier afternoons are not that busy.”

Yolanda complimented, “Good idea.”

Dutch said, “Yes. We will work out the exact date, later.”

Bao stated, “Just let me know when.”

Dutch replied, “We will.” She then turned to Melanie, as she casually asked, “And what is your opinion on the what Bao said about the maturity of those in the bar?”

Melanie looked at Dutch. She then turned to Bao, as she smiled at her girlfriend. She said, “I am more than willing to agree with anything my girlfriend has to say.”

Bao looked at Melanie, as she returned Melanie's smile. She then turned back to look at Yolanda and Dutch, as she commented, “And people wonder why I am in a relationship with her.”

In response, Yolanda and Dutch lightly laughed, for a few seconds.

A few seconds after the two women calmed down, Melanie turned to look at Dutch and Yolanda, as she commented, “I wonder if Pedro and Matthew didn't run off, together.”

Yolanda said, “That is possible. Though, if they did, I hope they are far away. Because nothing less that would be a challenge to placate the appetites of those that would go after them.”

Dutch commented, “Yes. Those that would go after them do not like easy prey. They would consider it insulting, if they immediately found them, without any effort. Especially, Revy and Roberta.”

Yolanda shrugged towards Dutch, as she said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “True.”

Melanie replied, “I agree with both of you.”

Yolanda stated, “Still, I have faith that everything will turn out fine. With Pedro and Matthew returning here, safe and sound.” Yolanda turned to Bao, as she requested, “By the way, could I trouble you for another bottle of water?”

Bao replied, “Sure.” She then reached down below the bar counter, and opened the near by small refrigerator. She pulled out a cold bottle of water. Next, she leaned back up and set the bottle of water, on the bar counter between her, and Yolanda. After which, she commented, “And I hope you're right.”

Yolanda used her right hand to pick up the bottle of water, as she looked at Bao. She warmly smile at Bao, as she said, “Thank you.”

Bao returned Yolanda's smile, as she replied, “You're welcome.”

Yolanda looked around at Melanie, Bao, and Dutch, as she kindly said, “I will talk to you ladies, later.”

Dutch said, “We always enjoy your company.”

Yolanda replied, “I feel the same way.”

Yolanda then turned around, and she casually walked away from Bao, Melanie, and Dutch, as she headed for the table she shared with Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin.

Dutch, Bao, and Melanie watched Yolanda as she casually walked away from them.

Melanie asked, “Bao, have you ever figured out, Yolanda?”

Bao replied, “No. You?”

Melanie said, “No. How about you, Dutch?”

Dutch commented, “I learned a long time ago that Yolanda is just one of those people that I am never going to figure out. So, I stopped trying. And though, she is nice. Anyone who has known her for a while starts to realize that she is clearly thinking several steps ahead of everyone around her.”

Bao stated, “Yes. Let us just be happy that she prefers to be nice.”

Melanie replied, “Agreed.”

Dutch said, “No arguments here.”

Dutch turned around to face Bao and Melanie, as Bao and Melanie looked over at Dutch.

Dutch stated, “I also learned a long time ago to stay on that woman's good side.”

Melanie commented, “We all realized that, long ago.”

Bao said, “You are preaching to the choir.”

Dutch, Bao, and Melanie, continued their conversation, as Bao and Melanie did their jobs, as the bartenders for the room.

(_)

Nearby, with Yolanda's back turned to them, as she made her way to the table she sat at, Yolanda crack a grin as she overheard what Dutch, Bao, and Melanie said about her. She thought, 'I am glad that at least some people know their manners. And that, while it is impolite to talk about someone behind there back. I guess it is acceptable when such discussions are meant to be complimentary.”

Seconds later, Yolanda reached the table she shared with Roberta, Aeryn, and Violin.

Before Yolanda sat down, she set her bottle of water on the table, in front of her chair.

Her chair had her facing the windows on the left side of the bar, with her back to the bar counter.

The other three women looked up at her, before they turned their attention back to talking amongst each other.

As Yolanda sat down in her chair, looked around the table. Across from her, Roberta had already polished off half of the large bottle of quality tequila she was drinking. To her right Aeryn was almost finished with her bottle of beer. While to her left, Violin was not even half way finished with her beer.

While Yolanda got conformable, she thought, 'It seems Violin has not had much to drink tonight. And with her being half super-soldier alien, she is still likely more than sober enough to drive, if I need back up. And having secondary plans is always a good idea.'

Yolanda opened her bottle of water, dropped the cap on the table, and took a swallow. She then set the bottle onto the table. She turned to look at the back corner table, which was to her right, where Eda and Revy sitting down, and conducting a drinking contest, where they were matching shot for shot of alcohol.

Yolanda thought, 'Sometimes I wonder if those two will ever grow up. Still, there is another matter I need to ask about, with someone at this table.'

Yolanda looked across the table at Roberta, as she asked, “So Roberta, have you seen Fabiola? I haven't see her around in the last few days. Has she gone back home to visit Garcia, and her family?”

Roberta looked over at Yolanda, as she took a sip of tequila, from her small glass. She set her glass down on the table, as she swallowed the alcohol. She then answered, “Sadly, no. She has gone off on an errand for Annie.”

Roberta thought, 'Fabiola told me that she was going after Pedro, Matthew, Chang, River, and Lee. It seems this is when Pedro and Matthew finally bolted from here, and into the multiverse. Not that I blame them. Now, that I think about it, it was quite hilarious in how we met their future selves. And I wish Fabiola luck. Also, I told her if she was gone to long, from my point of view, I would be coming after her, which she said she was fine with.'

Violin commented, “If Annie is asking her to do something, it must be important.”

Yolanda looked over at Violin, as she said, “I agree.” She then looked back at Roberta, as she questioned, “Still, onto another matter. Roberta. I have been wondering. And not to sound like a gossip. But, what is the group dynamic between you three?” She mentally reflected, 'I have never been sure about the relationships between you, Fabiola, and Garcia. And I haven't gotten around to asking any of them, until now.'

Roberta was silent, for a few seconds. She then answered, in a sober tone of voice, “It is a little complicated. We are not really a threesome. Fabiola and I love Garcia. But, Fabiola understands that the love Garcia and I share is much deeper than the connection she has with Garcia. While, her relationship with Garcia is more of a friendship.”

Aeryn and Violin could not help but overhear Roberta's comments.

Violin asked, “Like friends with benefits?”

Roberta replied, “Yes.”

Aeryn questioned, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “And you don't mind?”

Roberta looked down at the table, as she said, in a sad, low tone of voice, “While, I loath to admit it, Fabiola can show Garcia a softer, more feminine side, that I long ago lost the ability to show. And because of that, I don't mind her sharing a bed with Garcia.”

Violin commented, “Well, you make up for it in other ways.”

Roberta looked over at Violin, as she shrugged. She said, “True.”

Yolanda pointed out, “Still, I thought you and Fabiola have made love before?”

Roberta stated, “We did. And we tried to make it work, as a threesome. But, it just didn't come about.”

Yolanda replied, “I am sorry to hear that.”

Roberta responded, “Don't be. We may not be lovers. But, we are good friends.”

Yolanda commented, “Well, at least there is that.”

Aeryn teased, “So, what about Garcia's feminine side?”

Roberta answered, “For Garcia, his female form is more like a shadow, than a side. I know, the only times most of you see Garcia in his female form, at those bikini parties.”

“Though, in his mind, Garcia is still almost all male. And Garcia has grown to be a fine, handsome man that I know his parents would be proud of. To that end, he rarely shows his female form, except for in the bedroom, during those parties, or when it is biologically necessary.”

Yolanda shrugged, as she commented, “Ah, the price of femininity.”

Roberta replied, “Yes.”

Yolanda asked, “So, what is Garcia up to these days?”

Roberta said, “Same as always. Garcia has grown up to be a very responsible adult. As such, it is his responsibility to oversee his family businesses, and holdings. That is why he is not with us here, right now.”

Violin commented, “I was wondering about that.”

Aeryn stated, “Still, responsibility is a good reason to stay. And I must admit that it sounds like you have found a good catch with Garcia.”

Roberta said, “More like he found me.” Roberta continued, in a more solemn tone of voice, As you all know, Garcia has seen me at my absolute worst, and even then, he showed me that loves me. That is a man I never want to give up on.”

Roberta thought, 'I am so happy that he fully recover from the wounds, where I had shot him, while I was deranged, in the jungle. It took him a couple of months. But, he fully healed, while taking care of me. When I was crippled and maimed. And I will never forget that generosity by him. Where he took care of me, while he was still healing, and in pain, himself.'

Violin held up her bottle of beer, as she replied, “Amen to that sister.” She took a swallow of her beer. She then set her bottle back down on the table.

Roberta just warmly smiled towards Violin, in agreement.

The four women then continued their conversation, on more casual, and relaxing, topics.

(_)

Across the room, in the left back corner of the bar, Revy, Eda, Rock, Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer sat at the rounded table.

Revy had her back to the windows, on the left side of the bar. The seating order, clockwise, was Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, Eda, and Rock.

There were several bottles of whiskey, with dozens of small shot glasses on the table. Most of the bottles of whiskey and shot glasses were empty.

Along with this, there were a bottles of a quality asian brand of beer, that that Rock, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton were each having a bottle of, to drink.

Revy and Eda continued their drink game, in that each would pick up a full shot glass of whiskey, and they would down their swallow of alcohol at the same time.

As this went on, Rock refilled the shot glasses by Revy, while Lotton refilled the shot glassed by Eda.

Rock, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua cheered Revy and Eda on, as they continued their contest. All the while, Eda and Revy traded friendly insults between gulps.

Rock said, “Come on, Revy. You can do it.”

Lotton stated, “Eda, don't give up. Don't give in.”

Shenhua said, “Revy, don't make our race look bad.”

Swayer looked over at Shenhua, as she commented, “Speak for yourself, Shenhua. With that red hair, she is only half chinese.” She turned to Eda, as she stated, “Go Eda.”

After Eda and Revy both took another gulp of whiskey. As they sat down their shot glasses, Eda said, “Given it up, Revy. I don't want you to piss your pants, or throw up.”

Just as Eda and Revy set their shot glasses down, on the table, they immediately picked up two full small shot glasses, which had been refilled by Lotton and Rock, with their right hands.

They then both took another swallow of whiskey.

As they set those two shot glasses down onto the table, Revy used her free, left forearm to wipe off the alcohol from her lips. She then responded, “Dream on, Eda. I can do this all day long.”

And their drinking contest continued.

(_)

Meanwhile, outside, a few buildings away, the Pena family entered a nice Italian, family oriented restaurant.

An hour ago, Hernan Pena had gotten off of work as an auto-mechanic, at the business he ran and owned. And that day, he wanted to treat his family to a nice dinner, out of the kindness of his own heart.

Hernan was a black haired, hispanic man in his forties. Even given his age, he was very physically fit. He wore a dark blue button up, long sleeved shirt, with some dark jeans, black leather belt, and black boots. Even though it was nearly dark, he was wearing his sunglasses.

Hernan's much younger wife, by at least fifteen years, was named Maria. She had fair skinned woman with long blond hair. She was quite beautiful, with a slender frame. She wore a green filly blouse, and a long green skirt, with green slippers. She had a green purse, that fit the color of her dress.

Hernan and Maria were both happily married to each other.

With them, were their three children. The ages of their three children span between ages six to ten. Two boys and a girl.

All three children were casually dressed.

The oldest was a boy, ten, he looked more more like his mother. The middle child was a girl, eight, and she looked somewhat like her father. The youngest child, a boy, six had his father's hair, but his mother's looks.

After Hernan parked the their car near in the nearby restaurant parking lot, the Pena family got out of the car, and they headed for the front entrance to the restaurant.

When the reached the front entrance, Hernan opened the front door to the restaurant for his wife, and three young children.

After his family went inside, Hernan entered the building himself, with him letting the door slowly close behind him.

With all five family members inside, they then walked to a six chair table, near one of the walls of the restaurant. Maria sat down first. Then, children found their own seats around a table. With Hernan being the last to seat himself into a chair.

A few seconds later, a waitress came by, carrying menus. She was middle-aged, of average height, and physically fit. Though, her body was on the slender side. Her skin tone and facial features showed she was from India.

She looked down at this, as she spoke in spanish, with a Hindi accent, “Hello Maria, and Hernan.”

Hernan said, in spanish, “Hi Grace.”

Maria inquired, in spanish, “Hello Grace. How are you and Isandro doing?”

Grace answered, “We are doing fine. I hope you five can say the same.”

Maria happily replied, “We can.”

Grace said, “Good. Here are your menus. I will be back in a few minutes to get your orders.”

Maria replied, “Thank you.”

Grace then handed Maria and Hernan, each a menu, for their family to order from. Grace then walked away, so she could attend to her other customers.

The husband and wife looked at their menus, to decide what they wanted to get for themselves, and their children.

(_)

At that moment inside the Rats Nest bar, Bao and Melanie, stood behind the bar counter, with Dutch sitting in a stool across from them.

Bao stated, “Dutch, I am still concerned with these drinking games by Revy and Eda. Just because we have superhuman levels of tolerance to alcohol, among other things, does not mean we should be abusing our bodies.”

Dutch commented, “You are the bartender of this place. Why don't you just cut them off.”

Bao deadpanned, “Because I don't want to die.”

Dutch conceded, “Fair enough.”

Bao said, “Listen Dutch, even we need down time. For that matter, this neighborhood needs down time from these women.”

“This neighborhood use to be very nice. To be honest, I like some of the nearby restaurants. The owners and I had an understanding. I keep the craziness off the street and they let Melanie and I eat at their places, without them asking questions about us, on so many topics. But, that was then. Now, they won't even talk to us. Nor, let me eat at their establishments. And I liked their food.”

Melanie commented, “Yea. We had some great dates at those places.”

Bao looked over at Melanie, as she agreed, “Yes. They did.” She turned back to Dutch, as she continued, “I am genuinely worried. If this wildness by the girls continues, they might do something stupid one of these days. Like torch the bar while it is closed.”

Dutch smirked, “I won't worry. Nobody would crazy enough to mess with us. A bar full of superhuman badasses from other realities. Along with a few of us being armed.”

Bao replied, “I hope you are right.” She mentally added, 'And that you didn't just jinx us.'

(_)

Meanwhile, at the left back, corner table, Revy suddenly dropped the shot glass she was about to drink, onto the table, as she bolted for the women's restroom.

While Eda held her full, small shot glass, she watched Revy entered the women's restroom. She stated, “Finally...” She then turned to the others at her table, as she calmly set her shot glass back onto the table. She asked, “Would you say I am now the winner?”

Lotton answered, “Yes.”

Eda replied, “Good.” She then bolted for the women's restroom, as well.

At the table all for women still sitting at the table watched this. As Sawyer and Shenhua giggled, Rock said, “Given how much the two of them drunk, I am surprised they could run that fast, let alone hold it in for this long.”

Lotton commented, “Let us hope they did.”

Rock turned to Lotton, as she agreed, “Yes. Let's hope so.”

(_)

A few minutes later, both Revy and Eda came out of the women's restroom, while the argued.

Revy was first out of the restroom, with Eda right behind her, with the women's restroom door closing behind Eda.

Revy warned, “Eda, I am buzzed, and pissed that I lost to you. Don't rub it in.”

Eda teased, “Oh, but what is the fun in that.”

Revy growled, “Fine! You asked for it.”

Revy pulled out both her pistols. Pulled back the slides on them, loading a bullet into the chamber of each pistol, and she then fired a couple of shots towards Eda.

Eda ducked and the shots, but the bullets went through the side wall, and continued traveling through the next few buildings. Eda thought, 'Damn it. I hate it when she gets like that.”

Nearby, Rock yelled at Revy, “Revy, cut it out, before you hurt someone!”

Revy continued holding her semi-automatic pistols, but they were not pointed at anyone. She turned to Rock, as she said, “Fine, Rock. Be a pussy. I am going to the counter, and talk to Dutch, Bao, and Melanie.” She then turned and headed for the bar counter, where Dutch was sitting.

Meanwhile, Eda got up, and walked over to the left counter table, to where she was sitting.

As Eda sat down in her chair, Shenhua turned to Eda, she commented, “Ex-nun should know better than to treat Revy like that. Especially, after so many drinks. Unless she wants to meet god, personally.”

Eda turned Shenhua, as she flatly replied, “No shit, Shenhua.”

Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and Rock, burst out laughing at Eda's response to Shenhua's comment.

(_)

Less than half a minute ago, in Italian family restaurant, a few buildings away, the Pena family were sitting at their table, and they had just decided what they would eat and were waiting for someone to take their order, when a couple of bullets came thought the wall, on the right side of the building, from the front. With the bullets nearly the members of the Pena.

Hernan immediate realized what was happening, as he yelled, in spanish, “Down!”

Hernan's family quickly did as he had trained them to do, as they ducked under the table they were at.

A few seconds later, Hernan noted that no more bullets were coming in.

Hernan looked up, above the table and saw that everyone else appeared to be fine, thought they seemed to have not reacted the bullets had come through the building.

Hernan thought, 'Amateurs.' He turned to his family, as he asked in spanish, with concern in his tone of voice, “Everyone get up from the under the table.”

As they all stood up, he asked his family, “Is everyone fine?”

Maria said, in spanish, “I think I was hit.”

Hernan's heart skipped a beat in fear, as he asked, “Where?”

Maria answered, “My right shoulder.”

Hernan rushed over to Maria, as he requested, “Let me see.”

When Hernan reached Maria, she showed him her right upper arm, by her shoulder.

Hernan looked at Maria's right shoulder. He saw that the clothing was torn, with the skin underneath being exposed.

Hernan breathed a sigh of relief, as he thought, 'It looks like the wound is very superficial. It is not even bleeding.... Good.'

Maria said, in spanish, “It is just a minor scratch. It does not even hurt much. It is not even bleeding.”

Hernan stood up straight, as he looked over at Maria. He requested, “Good. But, get a little antiseptic on it when you have the chance.”

Maria looked over at Hernan, as she said, “I will.”

Hernan then looked at the bullet holes in the wall, as he coldly thought, 'From the angles, I know where the shots came from. This will not happen again.'

Maria noticed that her husband's body language completely changed from relax to ridged.

Hernan looked at Maria, as he calmly said, “Stay here with the children. I will be back in a little while.”

Just then, Grace rushed out of the kitchen, as she stated, in spanish, “Someone said there were gun shots. It anyone hurt.”

Hernan turned to Grace, as her stated, “Maria was the only one hit. And it is just a scratch. But, get her some alcohol and clean napkins.”

Grace looked over at Hernan, as she replied, “I'm on it.”

Grace then ducked back into the kitchen, as Hernan turned, and head for the front door to the restaurant.

As Hernan walked up to the front door, opened it, and exited the building, he let the door close, be itself, behind him.

As Hernan and Maria's children watched their father leave the restaurant they were in, daughter asked, in spanish, “Is daddy going to go kick someone's ass?”

The eldest son replied, in spanish, “Yep.”

The younger son and daughter replied, in unison, in spanish, “Cool!”

(_)

A few minutes later, inside Rats Nest bar, Revy had her cutlasses on the bar counter, in front of her, as she stood beside Dutch, to Dutch's left side.

Across from them was Bao and Melanie.

For the last few minutes, Revy had whined to Dutch, Bao, and Melanie about losing her drinking contest to Eda. The other three women knew better than to say anything about Revy's loss, to her.

Revy continued to complain, “I cannot believe I lost that way. But, I was about to piss my pants. Though, so was she.”

Bao commented, “Consider it the lesser of two embarrassments.”

Revy turned Bao, as she nodded once to the bartender. She replied, “Good point.”

Bao thought, 'At least, I got her to agree with me on that point. And it looks like she is not going to do anything else tonight, that is stupid.'

Suddenly, everyone heard the door of the front entrance to the bar, the entrance open. Everyone went quiet, as they turned to the door, to see bearded man walk into the bar.

All eyes turned on the man, whom had black haired, with a groomed full beard, dark blue long sleeved button up shirt, and dark jeans, black leather belt, and black boots. He was also wearing sunglasses.

Melanie's eyes went wide at who she saw. She thought, with concern, 'That is Hernan. What is he doing here? He should know better than to come here.'

Lotton stated, to Hernan, “This is a private party. Please leave.”

Hernan ignored Lotton, as he looked around. His attention was then drawn to Revy, and the two pistols that were on the bar counter, by Revy.

Revy noticed the man looking at her, but she did nothing to respond to the man's attention towards her.

Hernan left the door open, as he calmly walked towards Revy.

Looked at Hernan, walking towards her, Melanie, Revy, and Dutch. She thought, 'Damn it. I have seen this dance enough times to know where it is going to end... Looks like Dutch jinxed us.'

Bao immediately, but calmly, reached, under the bar counter, for her loaded semi-automatic pistol, which was holstered under the bar counter, near where she and Melanie were standing.

But, just as Bao was able to pull her pistol, out of its holster, from under the bar counter, with her right hand, Melanie calmly placed her right hand on Bao's right forearm.

Bao looked at Melanie, and she saw her girlfriend was giving her a serious expression on her face.

Melanie shook her head once for Bao not to pull out her pistol.

Bao thought, 'I trust Melanie. So, I won't do anything for the moment. Still, I want to know why Melanie stopped me?' She let go of her pistol, as she stood up straight.

As Melanie let go of Bao's right forearm, she thought, 'Good. I didn't want Bao to get us both killed. Especially, since I don't know what is going.'

Bao then leaned over and whispered something into Melanie's ear.

The room continued to remain quiet, except for Bao and Melanie whispering to each other, which Hernan ignored.

Hernan soon reached Revy, with Dutch sitting in her stool, right beside Hernan, to his right side.

Hernan looked down at the woman. It was then that his attention turned to Revy's two semi-automatic pistols on the bar counter next to Revy. He then turned his attention back to Revy.

Revy realized, in thought, 'This man is looking for a fight. Well, I will give him a funeral.' She then quickly grabbed her pistols.

But, before Revy could take aim, Hernan used his right fist to do an uppercut to her stomach that knocked the wind out of her, while raising her three feet in the air backward, and forcing her to let go of her pistols.

As Revy fell backward onto the floor, the man use each of his hands to skillfully catch one of Revy's pistols by their grips.

Afterward, Hernan quickly turned the pistols on the crowd.

As Hernan fired the bullets of over their heads, the women all swiftly ducked under their tables.

Though, Hernan was careful to angle the bullets so they would hit the empty parking spaces outside, and not go through the buildings, or vehicles, outside.

As the pistols ran out of ammo, he dropped them to the floor. Hernan looked over at the women cowering under their tables, as he coldly warned them, in english, “Stay out of this.”

Suddenly, with Hernan's back to her, Dutch threw a punch, with her right hand, towards the back of Hernan's head.

Hernan sidestepped the blow, to his left, as he also crouched down. This allowed Dutch's strike to go over Hernan's right shoulder. Hernan then grabbed Dutch right forearm arm, with his hands. Next, Hernan used Dutch's right forearm arm as leverage to pull Dutch from her stool, and flip her body onto her back, on the table in front of them.

Dutch came too with just enough time to see the incoming left elbow heading towards her face, She swiftly rolled out of the way, to her left, and onto the floor beside her, with her feet and hands hitting the floor. This put Dutch in a crotch position.

Hernan's blow, with his shattered the wood of the table, where her head has just been.

As Dutch looked up at the man, Hernan looked down at her, as he stood straight up.

Hernan coldly said, in english, “Stay out of this, if you want to live.”

By then, Revy was able to stand up, and she had recovered enough to rushed at Hernan.

Two seconds later, Revy was thrown through a bar window, over the walkway, in front of the bar, and onto the street, itself.

Inside the bar, Hernan calmly walked towards the entrance of the bar, to meet back with his prey.

(_)

Twenty seconds ago, inside the Rats Nest.

Hernan had just shot at the women at the tables, with the women immediately ducking under those same tables.

As the gun shots ending, and Hernan dropped the Revy's pistols onto the floor, Lotton commented, “Revy's going to be pissed. Not only did that man punch Revy out, but he used her pistols.”

Sawyer asked, “Who is this lunatic?”

Shenhua stated, “The better question would be, how long is that man going to live? And which one of us kills him?”

Under nearby table, B stated, “Since Revy does not have her guns, I would guess that man will be dead within ten minutes.

While crouching beside B, Balalaika said, “You are being generous, love. I would say five minutes. But, we will do need to know who this man is. If, for any other reason, than to notify his next of kin, and present the repair bills to them.”

As Sawyer heard what Balalaika said, she looked over at Balalaika. Sawyer commented, “Do not take this the wrong way, but you have mellowed a bit, Balalaika.”

Balalaika turned to Sawyer, as she stated, “My priorities have changed a bit. And my blood thirst has taken a backseat to other matters.”

Rock thought, 'Like one's children. Still, I know who this is. And I need to let the others know.' She said, “I recognize that black, well groomed, full beard anywhere. That is Hernan Pena, a local mechanic.”

A few feet from them, under their own table, Benny and Janet were sharing, Benny overheard Rock, as she asked, “Who does this guy think he is, Charles Bronson?”

Janet commented, “Whoever he is, he is going to be dead, soon as Revy gets up off that floor.”

Rock inquired, “What I want to know is what is he doing here?”

Lotton deadpanned, “Clearly, he is no mood to talk, right now.”

Under another table, Yolanda commented, “I remember him. He worked on our burger van a few of times. Nice guy. But, there was something about him...”

Rock finished for Yolanda, “Like there is similar about him? Like you should know him, but you cannot place where?”

Yolanda responded, “Exactly. And that he was pretended to be nicer than he really was.”

Suddenly, they saw Hernan duck Dutch's blow, from behind. With Hernan then catching Dutch's arm, and using her arm to flip her onto the table in front of them. Though, Dutch was able to roll out of the way of the incoming elbow that destroyed part of the table.

Roberta said, “Those are not bad moves. And to be honest, he had us dead to rights with Revy's cutlasses. He just choose to shoot over our heads, and not at us.”

Balalaika commented, “True. And given moves like that, if I didn't know better, I would say he was from Roanapur. I want to know who he really is, and why he is doing this, before we decide what to do with him.” She mentally reflected, 'I should have known something was up about him, with those eyes of his. When I took my car over to him, to be worked on. Still, it looks like we will have answers to our questions, soon enough.'

B looked over at Balalaika, as she commented, “At least he did a good job on your car.”

Balalaika turned to B, as she shrugged. She replied, “True.”

They then saw Revy back on her feet, and rush toward Hernan, only to have Hernan use the momentum of Revy's rush towards him, to throw her so far, and so hard, that she went through one of the front windows, with her landing in the street, outside.

Eda commented, “Even Revy is going to feel that one.”

Rock winched her face for a second, as she agreed, “You got that right.”

(_)

A minute ago, in the Rats Nest, beside the bar counter, Melanie just stopped Bao from pulled out her semi-automatic pistol, from its holster, under the back of the bar counter.

As Bao stood up straight, she leaned over to Melanie, as she whisper into her girlfriends ear, “Why did you stop me?”

Melanie quietly answered, “Because it will only make things worse. That is Hernan Pena. You might have never met him.”

Bao quietly commented, “No. I don't recall meeting him.”

Melanie whispered, “Well, Pedro and I know who he is. He a friend. And he also is a family man, and a local auto-mechanic. He rarely drinks, which is why you have never run into him. He only drinks a few beers per week.”

Bao softly replied, “Okay. That puts him in a better bracket of people than most of my customers. So, what else can you tell me about him?”

Melanie quietly responded, “He has a wife, Maria, and three young kids. And normally, Hernan is one of the sweetest, nicest person you will ever meet. If he wasn't married. And now that I am a woman. I might take a shot at dating him.”

Bao softly replied, “Really?”

Melanie quietly stated, “Yes. Really. So, as I am sure you already guessed, if he is like this, we are in trouble. The only reason he would be like this is if one of Revy's shots hurt his family. I wish the Pedro was here. Only he, or Maria, have ever been able to talk Hernan down.”

Bao softly pointed out, “Of course, Pedro and Matthew are missing. As we just talked with Yolanda and Dutch here. And they left due to the girls treating them like crap. Also, the Pedro is smart enough to see the writing on the wall. He has lost the city and soon Chang, or Balalaika, would have had him taken care of. Actually, Chang or Balalaika might have eventually tried to brainwash and change him. Like what was done to us. From what I understand, Pedro knows all about us, he could guess what was coming, for him.”

Melanie whispered, “Yes. He is the sharpest person I know. Including, Lee, River, and Chang.”

Bao softly replied, “I agree.”

Bao thought, 'I even slept with him, and his brother, before everyone else, but you, showed up. And Pedro seemed to taken finding out who I am, in stride. So, he is a much better person than most. Still...' Bao whispered, “I don't know how, but I got a feeling they stole a reality traveling device and ran. Though, we did the same thing, and didn't do us any damn good. I ran. You ran. And I doubt it will do them any good in the long run, either. But, at least we all tried.”

“So, what is the story behind Hernan? Why are you so scared of him?”

Melanie quietly responded, “I admit that Hernan can sometimes scare me. You were not here a several years ago, when it happened. But, don't feel bad, I didn't get here when it happened, either.”

“Though, Pedro told me this tale over some beers at the hotel bar, one night, a few years ago. And this was because we were both friends with Hernan. Pedro invited us both to his house, for his movie nights, and we met each other, their.”

“Still, I didn't get the full story, but I do know Hernan is a former FARC member, and he had some serious combat training, from his to days in FARC...”

Bao softly asked, “Like Roberta here?”

Melanie quietly answered, “Yes. And someone wanted Hernan dead, real badly. They sent a small army after him. Here to Plata Podrido. They attacked a police cookout, which Pedro oversaw, that Hernan and his family were at.”

“The good news was that the attackers didn't kill anyone, while those that returned fire did kill the attackers. Of those injured was Hernan's wife, Maria. In the aftermath, Pedro could tell that Hernan recognized them.”

“Hernan had his kids stay with some family friends, while he was in the waiting room at the hospital, as the doctors did surgery on Maria. Fortunately, the bullets missed her organs and did not do any serious damage to her body. As such, she fully recovered.”

“Pedro was also there, checking on his own men that had been injured. He saw that after Hernan got the news that Maria would be fine, that he eyes got even harder. Pedro could tell that Hernan was about to tear apart the city to get to the rest of those that had threatened his family.”

“But, Pedro wanted answers, first. And he knew that Hernan had many of those answers. And Pedro didn't want Hernan to go on his revenge spree, until he had those answers. So, Pedro used a tranquilizer dart to knock him out. When Hernan awoke, he was literally chained to a hospital bed. And Pedro was there to talk to him.”

“Pedro cut deal with Hernan. He would help Hernan with his revenge, while having his brother, Paciano, the mob boss controlling the city at that time, help make sure it did not happen again. In exchange for answers about who Hernan really was.”

“Hernan answered Pedro's questions. I don't know what was said, but it impressed Pedro, a lot. And Pedro released Hernan from that bed. They then went to the police station weapon's locker to get some weapons.”

“Soon after, he and Pedro got a tip where the local headquarters for behind the attack were. They were all out of towners that were staying at building on the outskirts of town.”

“Pedro armed himself, and he armed Hernan. And this is where it gets really interesting. Pedro said is they cleaned house. And it was mostly Hernan who did it. Pedro just protected Hernan's back.”

“Hernan used two semi-automatic pistols, and he killed around fifty armed men. Most of whom had combat training, as well.”

“Afterward, Pedro called Hernan the Piacasso of Pain. And after the massacre, Paciano was able to cut a deal with those after Hernan, and they left the Pena family alone after that.”

“Hernan now owes Pedro a favor. And Pedro considers Hernan his ace in the hole. His one man army. And from the sound of it, Hernan really is that dangerous.”

“In the aftermath of that whole incident, there is an unspoken rule in the city. Nobody threatens the mechanic, or his family.”

Bao softly said, “You make it sound like he is another Bloodhound.”

A few seconds later, as Bao's comment sunk in, Melanie paled, as several pieces fell into place about the Pena family.

Melanie whisper something to Bao, and Bao's eyes widen for a seconds, before Bao forced herself to calm down, and return her eyes to normal

By then, Hernan had thrown Revy through the window, and he had followed her outside.

Melanie softly said, “I am going to find Maria and their kids. I know which nearby restaurant they likely went too. It is a starting point. If something did happen to them, I will get them help, if they need it. If not, I will bring Maria here, to calm Hernan down.”

Bao quietly asked, “And if one of them has been killed?”

Melanie softly answered, “Then, we both leave this reality, as soon as possible. Just try to keep the others from interfering in his fight with Revy. That will only make things worse.”

Bao quietly replied, “I will.”

Melanie then rushed toward the back exit of the building.

Bao looked over the other women in the room. As the women were coming out from under their tables, and standing up, Bao stated, “Everyone. Melanie just told me who this guy is. Take my word on this, please, don't interfere in this fight unless Revy is about to be crippled, or killed.”

The other women in the room turned to Bao, as Sawyer asked, “How do you know that it is Revy that will be on the losing side?”

Bao said, “If what I heard from my girlfriend is true, then Revy is about to get her ass kicked. Hard.”

By then, Dutch stood up straight. She stated, “Well, whatever we do, I suggest we don't attack him from behind. That little move he did to me, hurt.”

Benny asked, “Are you okay, Dutch?”

Dutch turned to Benny, as she answered, “Yea. I am okay, Benny.”

Balalaika suggested, “Then, it might be best to watch, for right now. Until we figure out a better plan to deal with him.”

B agreed, “Good idea.”

The women, including Bao, then made their way outside, so they could watch the fight.

As Boa walked around the counter, from the bar, and then down the outside of the counter, towards the door, with the rest of the women, she thought, 'At least, except for my customers, it is rare for cars to drive by this street, and people to walk on the sidewalks, here, at this time in the evening. So, this fight likely won't have strangers coming by to interrupt what is happening.'

(_)

Meanwhile, outside, there was still enough daylight from the sun, as it was still setting, for people to see.

As Revy stood up, she noticed that, while she only had a few scrapes, and bruises from going through the window, and her landing, that she was also sobering up, as well.

As she saw Hernan calmly approach her, she angrily stated, “Okay bastard. I had a nice buzz going. But, you caused me to sober up. Now, I am going to kick your ass.”

Revy rushed at Hernan, as she threw a punch him.

Hernan easily avoided the blow. He then used his longer reach to his advantage, as he punched Revy in the face.

From there, the battle went down hill for Revy.

Even with her enhanced strength and reflexes, Revy was clearly no match this Hernan's better training and experience in hand to hand combat.

While both of them dodged or blocked a number of blows, for every blow Revy landed on Hernan, Hernan landed three on Revy. Due to this pounding, Revy's tougher body was the only reason she was still standing.

And to her concern, Revy found that none of her blows seem to effect Hernan at all.

Revy began backing up across the street from the Rats Nest, with Hernan following her, step for step.

As Revy took another step backwards, she thought, with worry, 'This guy is like a machine. He takes a pounding like it is nothing, and he dishes it with equal force... There are only a few people I know that fight like this, and all of them are dangerous... I think I am trouble.”

Revy then stood her ground for a moment, as they began trading blows once more.

Revy then got a lucky shot in that broke the man's glasses.

As Hernan's broken glasses fell from his face and to the ground, Revy saw the cold killing intent in Hernan's blue eyes.

Seeing the coldness in Hernan's eyes, slightly startled Revy, and caused her to take a step back. But, as Revy backed up another step, only to find that she had back up to the right side of the front hood of a red painted, four door, parked car, on the opposite side of the street from the Rats Nest. The car was parked on the road, beside the curb to the sidewalk on the side of the street. The car the left side of the Rats Nest bar.

Revy did not expect the vehicle to be there, and the car provided enough of distraction for the man to land a powerful upper cut to her jaw that lifted her up, onto the car front windshield.

Revy's landed on her back, and she cracked the windshield, but did not break it. Her body then slowly slid down to the hood of the car. As she came to a stop on the hood of the red car, her legs were hanging off the side of the hood.

(_)

By then, the rest of the group of women had made it outside of the Rats Nest.

The women stood in front of the entrance to the Rats Nest, as they watched in surprise, as the fight took a grim turn for Revy.

As Revy laid on her back on the cracked car windshield, Shenhua mentally realized, 'That man is about to kill her. I take offense to that. If anyone is going to kill Revy in battle. It should be me. And not some nobody. Fortunately, his back was turned to us. So, this should be all too easy.'

Shenhua pulled out her right kukris long knife. The weapon was under the right interior side of her white jacket, but over her red qipao. She then quickly pulled out the end of the cord hidden under the right sleeve of her white jacket, which was attached on the other end of the cord to a cloth band on her right forearm. Next, she hooked the cord to the loop on the bottom of the hilt of her kukris.

Shenhua then threw her long knife, aiming dead center, between Hernan's shoulder blades.

But, at the last second, Hernan stepped out of the way, to his left, and he caught the knife, but its hilt, with his right hand, without looking.

The women in the crowd look at in astonishment, at what Hernan had just done.

Violin asked, in disbelief, “We didn't just see that? Did we?”

Aeryn replied, “Yes. We just did.” She thought, 'And I am not really surprised that Shenhua brought her weapons, when she went drinking. She and Revy are probably not the only one's here with their weapons. And I am not going to complain, because, unlike Revy, Shenhua has always drunk responsibly. I have never seen her go off on someone, just because she was drink. Other reasons, yes. But, not just over drinking alcohol.'

Shenhua thought, with surprised, 'Okay. I admit it. He's good.'

Hernan turned around, clockwise, to face the women. He then quickly used his left hand to pull up the slack on the cord that was attached between the knife in his hand, to the cloth band on Shenhua's right forearm.

Then, with a flick of his left wrist, he made Shenhua's cord loop and snap back on itself, as the cord immediately rapped around the throat of a very surprised Shenhua. Hernan then pulled pulled back tightly on the cord.

Shenhua thought, with worry, 'Uh oh. I think I am in trouble.' She then swiftly tried to used her fingers to free her throat from the cord, as she began to choke.

While pulling back on the cord with his left hand, Hernan let up enough slack to allow himself to plant the bottom of his left boot on the cord, against the ground, for added leverage.

This caused the cord to tighten further, as it lower to the ground, forcing Shenhua to kneel on her left knee, before Hernan.

The other women were so caught up in the moment, of what was happening, that none of them immediately leaned down to aid Shenhua.

Hernan coldly warned, “Do not interfere, again.”

Hernan then allowed his left hand to let go of the cord, creating some slack that allow him to use the knife to cut the cord between him and Shenhua. used the knife in his hand to cut the cord,

The cord instantly went loose around Shenhua's throat, allowing her to gasp for air.

Sawyer looked down at Shenhua, as she asked, “Are you all right, Shenhua?”

Shenhua sat on the ground, as she continued to breath. She looked up at Sawyer. She answered, “Yes. And I think I know who he reminds me of. But, I don't want to say who for the sake of my own sanity.”

Sawyer commented, “Okay. It can wait a few minutes, until you feel like talking.”

Shenhua replied, “Thank you.”

Janet turned to Rock, as she inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Who the hell is this guy? He is clearly not just a mechanic.”

Rock turned to Janet, as she stated, “I agree. But, the only other things I know about him are that he has a wife named, Maria, and three young children...”

Rock suddenly realized something, as she thought, 'Melanie did strongly warn us not to threaten him, nor his family. Wait a minute. Melanie knew who we were are at the time. She knew how dangerous we are. Yet, Melanie also knew how dangerous Hernan was, even then. She warned us not to make threats towards him Not the other way around. Oh hell, one of Revy's stray bullets must have harmed his family... And he said he used to be a member of FARC...”

B asked, “Anything else, Rock? I can clearly see by the look on your face that something occurred to you. Such as to why he is clearly a badass not to be reckoned with.”

Rock looked over at B, as she mentioned, “Hernan did say that he was a former grunt with the FARC.”

Roberta was continuing to look at Hernan, as she spoke up, “He is not a grunt. I recognize some of those moves. Those are from the advanced training courses.”

Benny stated, “I do not like where this conversation is heading.”

Balalaika suggested, “It is clear that taking any other action at the moment, against Hernan, would be unwise. So, let us see this play out a little bit.” She then noticed Revy coming to, behind Hernan, as she continued, “This fight still might turn around for Revy.”

Rock turned to look at Hernan and Revy, she sat what Balalaika was alluding too. She responded, “Agreed. Though, we need make sure Revy does not kill Hernan, until we have some answers.”

Balalaika replied, “Of course.”

The rest of the women had also turned their attention back towards the fight.

(_)

Meanwhile, Revy was able to get her second wind, as she leaned up she saw Hernan's back was turned to her.

Revy quickly pulled her leg back over the hid, as she sat up in a crouching position. She then jumped onto Hernan's back.

Revy quickly rapped her legs around his stomach, as she put him in a choker lock, with her arms.

Revy smiled wickedly, as she said, “Let's see you get out of this one, fucker.”

Hernan did not move, nor panic. He remained calm, as turned his body ninety degrees to his right, so Revy could not use the car as a back stop for her attack. Hernan then dropped his knife to the ground.

He then made two thumbs up with his hands.

Next, while having his thumbs up, Hernan rocketed back till his thumbs dug into the sides of Revy's collar bones.

While Hernan's thumbs did not break Revy's skin, the pain from the blows forced Revy to let go of Hernan's neck.

Hernan swiftly brought his arms back to his fronts, and he used his hands to quickly free himself of Revy's legs.

This caused Revy to fall to the ground on her back, behind Hernan, with the red car parked beside her, to her right side. Revy quickly started getting to her feet.

Without looking down, Hernan used the front edge of his right boot to kick up the knife on the ground, by the middle of the blade. He then caught the hilt of the blade with his right hand, with the weapon in an upright position in his hand.

Hernan then quickly turned around, counterclockwise, just as Revy was able to fully stand up.

Revy had just enough time to dodge out of the way of Hernan's first swing, which was towards her abdomen.

Revy then quickly backed away, and around the front of the car, to avoid Hernan's forceful swings.

Though, she was so focused on Hernan's attack, that she kept backing away, passed the front of the car, over the sidewalk, with tripping, until her back literally hit a concrete wall on the other side of the sidewalk, from the red car.

As Herman came to a stop, within a few feet in front of Revy, he brought down his next blow, which was towards Revy's, from above, in a downward motion.

Revy swiftly duck down and the blade hit the concrete wall with such force that the blow shattered the metal blade.

Hernan quickly discarded the useless hilt.

At the same time, Revy was crouched down, right in front of Hernan, and she saw an opening. She used the angle she was at to her advantage, as she used her right fist to quickly hit Hernan, hard, in his groin.

While, Hernan instinctively bent down a little, Revy then backed away, to her left side. This allow her to stand up.

Revy over at Hernan, as she smirked. She gloated, “That will teach you.”

(_)

Across the street, the crowd of women had just watched what happened, with a few of the women having satisfied looks on their faces.

Shenhua thought, 'I am so happy I already have spare replacements for my long knives.'

Meanwhile, Dutch was looking at Hernan, as she commented, “Bad move, Revy.”

Janet was watching Hernan, as she asked, “Shouldn't that take him down?”

Dutch shook her head, as she answered, “Not for a guy like that. Most of the time a kick the balls will take a man down, But, there are the few men that can work through the pain. Like I am sure this guy is doing, as we speak. And when that happens, when he gets his second wind, in a second, he will feel the benefits of that blow. Which dumps a load of testosterone into his system, while the pain amps up his adrenal glands. In other words, Revy just set this terminator into beserker mode.”

Janet replied, “Oh on.”

Dutch said, “Exactly.

(_)

A second later, Hernan bolted back upright, as he turned to his right, to face Revy, whom was still only about a few feet from him.

Revy saw that the coldness of Hernan's eyes had been replaced with the intense rage he had been hiding during the entire fight.

Hernan growled at Revy, as he immediately used his right hand to grab her by the throat, and lifted her up. He began repeatedly slamming Revy against the concrete wall, over and over again, like a rag doll.

This continued for ten painful seconds, until Hernan stopped, and he just held Revy up by the throat, with just his right hand.

Fortunately, Hernan's grip was loose enough to allow Revy to breath. And she was just conscious enough to hear Hernan growl at her, again.

(_)

Meanwhile, across the street, Melanie had rushed towards the group of women.

As she reached Bao, whom was on the far right side of the crown, she said, to everyone present, “Good news, his family is all fine. Maria is coming, in a few minutes.”

Dutch turn to Melanie, as she asked, “What do you mean, in a few minutes?”

Melanie turned to Dutch, as she responded, “It takes time for her to get her kids into their family car, and come here. And it is going to take a few minutes for them to get here.”

Benny stated, “Revy doesn't have a few minutes. Somebody needs to stop this, now.”

To everyone's surprised, Roberta was the one to step out, in front of the crowd.

Roberta then calmly walk towards Hernan and Revy. When she reached the middle of the street, the Bloodhound came to a stop, as she firmly ordered, in english, “Stop!”

(_)

Across the street, from the women, while continued to hold Revy, Hernan turned to face Roberta, without him showing the slightest bit of fear towards her.

Hernan coldly said, “Stay out of this, Ms Cisneros.”

This let everyone know that he knew who they were, and he still had no fear towards them.

Roberta thought, 'He is knows who I am, and he is not the slightest bit afraid of me. And given what he has done to Revy, this is a bad sign for everyone. Still, I need to defuse this situation... This is what Garcia and Fabiola would want me to do.'

Roberta smiled at Hernan, as she coyly inquired, “Do not misunderstand. I have no wish for anyone to die tonight. But, I would like to know why you feel such strong hatred towards, Revy.”

Hernan turned to look at Revy. He then looked back at Roberta, as he stated, “She hurt my wife with her stray shots.”

Roberta asked, “Was she seriously harmed?”

Hernan answered, “No, but she, or our kids, could have been...” He looked at Revy, as he held her up, while he continued, “Due to this woman's carelessness.” He then turned back to look at Roberta.

Revy heard what Hernan said.

Revy thought, 'I guess I fucked up. Though, I am glad I can still breathing. Still, with this beating, I am in no shape to fight back. Though...' Revy chocked out, “Sorry, about that.”

Hernan turned his attention back to Revy.

Roberta continued to smile, as she said, “See, even Revy is willing to admit to her mistake. Also, to hear her apologize is a very rare event.” She dropped her smile. Her voice turned more grim, as she continued, “And if you kill her, you and your loved ones will die.”

Hernan dropped Revy onto the ground.

Revy landed on her butt, with a thud. But, except for her butt slightly stringing, she was otherwise unharmed from the fall.

Hernan then turned to face the group of women.

They saw that he now had a crazy look in his blue eyes, while having a slasher smile curl on his lips. The combination of the two made the group of superhuman badasses to instinctively take a step back.

Though, Roberta remained stoic, as she stood her ground.

While maintaining that crazed look on his face, Hernan stated, with rabid glee, “Then, I will just have to kill you all.”

Hernan then began walking toward Roberta.

Behind Hernan, Revy crawled behind Hernan. She soon made it to the right side of the hood of the car, where she sat down, in an upright position, as she allowed herself to lean her back on the car. The position allowed Revy to see across the street, towards the front of the Rats Nests bar. So, she could watch both Hernan, Roberta, and her friends.

By this point Hernan had reached Roberta, in the middle of the road.

Hernan came to a stop four feet in front of Roberta, as both badasses faced each other.

Hernan had dropped his crazy look on his face. And instead, he looked down at Roberta's face with a firm look to his eyes, and his lips had gave his face a neutral expression.

At the same time, Roberta looked up at Hernan's face, with an equally firm look to her eyes, and face.

(_)

Nearby, as the Roberta and Hernan continued to quietly stare at each other, Melanie whispered to Bao, “If those two get into a fight, there likely won't be a city left.”

Bao nodded in agreement. She softly replied back, “Be ready to run for my car in the bar parking lot, at a moments notice.”

Melanie quietly said, “Ready when you are.”

Nearby, Lotton whisper, “Do you got room for a few more?”

Bao turned to Lotton, as she quietly answered, “Sure.”

Bao, Melanie, and Lotton then turned their attention, along with the rest of the crowd they were with, back to Hernan and Roberta.

(_)

Suddenly, everyone saw a nice, blue mid level car, with its front headlights on, come towards them from the left side of the street, when facing the Rats Nest bar.

A couple of seconds later, the car came to stop in about twenty feet from Hernan left side, and Roberta right side.

After the car was turned off, with the front headlights also shutting down, everyone watched as Maria got out of left drivers side of the car. She had her green purse hanging off her right shoulder.

Both Hernan and Roberta turned to look at Maria. With Hernan not being unsure how to react with Maria's sudden presence.

(_)

Among the crowd of women, Janet asked, “Who is that?”

Melanie answered, “That is Maria. Hernan's wife.”

Benny said, “That is Maria. That is something familiar about her. But, I just cannot place her.”

Dutch commented, “Yea. And that troubles me.”

Melanie requested, “Maria is a wonderfully nice woman. Please, don't take any of your problems with Hernan, out on her, nor their kids.” She mentally added, 'Whom I am sure are inside the car.'

Rock stated, “Do not worry. Roberta as bluffing. I won't allow anyone here to do that. And with luck, none else will get hurt tonight.”

Melanie replied, “I hope so, too.”

The women then turned their attention back to the scene folding out in front of them, in the middle of the street.

(_)

At that moment, Maria shut her car door, as she looked around.

Maria first saw, to her right, Revy sitting up against a car, with the redhead looking back at her with a confused expression on her face. She then notice her husband, a purple haired woman. Next, she saw a group of women across the street, to her left.

Maria turned back to face her husband, and the purple haired woman.

As she walked towards Hernan and Roberta, she said, in english, so the others could understand her, “Hernan, a nice woman explained everything to me. I believe you have made your point.”

Roberta watched the awkward moment unfold, while being amused at seeing Hernan trying to decide whether to stay in killer mode, or switch back to family man mode.

Roberta cracked a grin, as her eyes softened. She commented, “Relax. I have been in situations like this. It is best just to make your wife happy.”

Hernan looked at Roberta, then back at Maria.

Roberta saw Hernan's face expression, and his eyes, relax. She thought, 'Good. This situation might just turn out better than I had hoped.' She then looked over at Maria.

By then, Maria has come to a stop five feet in front of Hernan and Roberta.

Meanwhile, among the group of women, Rock then recalled whom Maria reminded her of, and everything fell into place for her. She immediately realized what it was about the Pena family that bothered her.

Rock turned to the crowd, as she said, “Everyone, do not attack Hernan. It would be best if we leave him alone. I will explain later.”

Eda then noticed three faces of children in the back seat window looking at them.

Eda stated, “He really does have kids.”

Everyone in the crowd, including Rock, turned to look at the children in the car.

Janet commented, “I hope they are the kinda of kids that know better than to stick their noses into trouble.”

Shenhua stood up, as she replied, “If they are anything like their father, I doubt it.”

Sawyer asked, “Why do those kids look familiar?”

Lotton looked closely that children. Then, she looked over at Hernan and Maria, whom were standing next to Roberta. A few second later, she understood what Rock wasn't saying.

Lotton turned to Rock, as she asked, “Oh god, Rock. Could it be?”

Rock looked over at Lotton, as she nodded once in confirmation. She said, “I would suggest keeping quiet on this, until later.”

Lotton stated, “I fully agree.”

Nearby, B and Balalaika were standing beside each other, as overheard Rock and Lotton's comments, and they both put the pieces together.

The two women continued to look at the spectacle in front of them, as B commented, “I just remembered when and where I have seen the look that Hernan's eyes held, before. They are the eyes of a soldier.”

Balalaika pointed out, “A certain soldier.”

B flatly replied, “Sadly, yes.”

Janet stated, “Let's see what happens next.”

The women then turned back to look at what was happening between Roberta, Hernan and Maria.

(_)

As Hernan stood by both Maria, and Roberta, he faces his wife. He calmly said, “Maria, I believe it is best if you take the kids home. Please. Trust me on this.”

Maria looked at Hernan, as she replied, “In a minute, dear.” She then took a closer look at Roberta.

Hernan could tell something had caught his wife's eye, about Roberta.

Hernan silently prayed, 'Please lord, let my family and I get out of this mess alive, and unharmed.'

Maria continued to look at Roberta, as she asked her husband, “Hernan, is this your sister?”

In response to Maria's comment, Roberta did a double-take towards Maria, as Hernan's jaw dropped.

The rest of those present went silent in surprise at Maria's question.

Maria then turned to Roberta as she compliment, “By the way, nice dye job.”

While still floored by Maria's question, Roberta could only reply, “Thank you.” To the false assumption that her natural hair color was a dyed color.

As Hernan composed himself, he asked, “What do you mean, Maria?”

Maria looked around, and she noticed the confused looked among everyone around her. She inquired, “None of you see it? Do you?.. Ah... The beard. That is what is throwing everyone.”

She reached into her purse, and she pulled out a small photo from her purse. While holding the photo, she said, “This was taken right after our wedding.”

Maria walked over to Revy, first. She then showed the picture to Revy.

Revy looked at the photo and her eyes went wide from surprise.

With Revy's eyes still slightly wide, she turned to Hernan, as she flatly stated, “You win. I am going to quit while I am still breathing. I'll leave my cutlasses at home from now on when I go drinking.”

Hernan turned to Revy, as he hesitantly said, in slightly confused tone of voice, “Okay...”

Maria then walked over to Hernan and Roberta. She showed the picture to Hernan and Roberta.

Both of Hernan and Roberta looked closely at the photo. They then looked at each other.

Roberta started laughing, while Hernan just placed his right palm on his face, as he shook his head in disbelief.

By then, Revy was stood. She requested, of Maria, “Could I have that picture?”

Maria turned to Revy, as she answered, “Sure. I have several copies at home.” She then walked over and handed her the photo to Revy. Maria then turned around and walked back to join Hernan and Roberta.

Meanwhile, Revy took the picture, and she quickly limped passed the three adults standing in the middle of the road, and towards the group women. As Revy did so, she smiled, while she stated, with excitement in her tone of voice, “Guys. You have got to see this.”

A few seconds later, when Revy reached the group, she handed Rock the picture.

Rock looked at the picture for a few seconds. Her eyes widened in confirmation at what she already thought. She then passed the photo around the group, as she stated, “Girls, we're in trouble.”

As the women of the group all got good a look at the photo, eyes widened, and jaws dropped among the group.

In the photo was Maria in her wedding dress, along with Hernan in a black tuxedo, without his beard. Except the differences in clothing, and hair style, Hernan looked almost exactly like Roberta's male counterpart, in the Boys and Girls omake.

Balalaika simply stated, “Interesting.”

B looked over at Hernan, as she pointed out, “And from the look on Hernan's face, he clearly didn't know.”

Violin commented, “Been there, done that. I hope this ends in a more uneventful way.”

Dutch stated, “Holy shit. I don't believe I threw at punch at him.”

Benny nearly screamed, “Oh god! There are two of them now! And from what he did to Revy, he is clearly just as badass as Roberta is!”

Janet asked, “What makes you say that?”

Benny commented, “He knows who, and likely what, we are. He walked into the bar, without any fear, while unarmed. Took a shot at Revy while she was armed. Stole her guns and shot at us. Then, he threw Revy out of the bar. Next, he preceded to kick her ass. He is still standing. Revy, here, has a limp. Then, to top himself, he was about to take a shot at Roberta. And it it looks like he is going to get away with what he did.”

Lotton said, “I wouldn't say he is getting away with anything. This guy is going to need some serious therapy after tonight... And that is not all. When do we tell them about her?”

Rock answered, “We will tell Hernan, after he gets over this initial shock.”

(_)

While the discussion among the women went on, in the middle of the street, Hernan used his concern for his family to anchor his sanity. He looked at Maria, as he begged his wife, “Maria, please take the car, and go home, with the kids. I will join you all later tonight...” He turned to look at Roberta, and behind her, the rest of the women, as he continued, “I am going to need to talk to these women for a little while.”

Roberta could tell that what Hernan was trying to do, as both she and Hernan then looked back at Maria.

From the look on Hernan's face, Maria could see how serious her husband was. She said, “Okay. I will see you later.”

Maria walked then turned around, and walked back to her car. When she reached the car, she opened the driver's side door, got into the car, shut the door behind her.

Though the front windshield, Hernan and Roberta could see Maria turned to look between the seats, to the backseat of the car, where her and Hernan's three children were seated.

Hernan thought, with relief and happiness, 'Good. She told them to buckle up, before starting the car. That is my girl.'

Maria then turned back to sit in her chair. Next, she buckled up, and used her car keys to start the car.

A few seconds later, the car back up, and turned around in the road. Hernan, and the others present, then watched Maria drive away, down the road, with hers and Hernan's children.

As soon as Hernan's family had turned a corner, onto another street, and they were out of sight, Hernan turned to look at the women. He had a confused, embarrassed look on his face.

Meanwhile, the women were looking back at him.

Rock noticed the expression on Hernan's face. She suggested, “In my experience. As long as you are not being rude. I have found if you state what is on your mind, out loud, it will make you feel better.”

Hernan looked over at Rock, as he said, with disbelief lacing his voice, “This is impossible. This is the real world. How can I be Roberta's counterpart, here? That defies all logic in existence. Hell, I have seen series. And the omakes. And to be honest, Roberta scares me.” He turned to Roberta, as he added, “No offense.”

Roberta giggled. She was having a ball with this knowledge. She thought, 'This is so damn funny. Still, I need to respond to his comment... In a peaceful way.'

Roberta forced herself to calm down, as she replied, “No offense taken. Though, I saw no fear in your eyes when you looked at me just now.”

Hernan explained, “That is because I was focused...” He looked over at the group, as he asked, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh god. I wasn't as bad as she can be? Was I?”

The group just nodded, almost in unison, as Rock calmly answered, “Yes. You were.”

Benny commented, “Look on the bright side. You just likely hit the top ten list of badasses from this reality.”

Hernan state, in a worrisome tone of voice, “That is not something to gloat about. I have three children. I do not want them to make the same mistakes as I did.”

Aeryn complimented, “That is admirable.”

Hernan responded, “I just know, after tonight, I am going to get dragged into your insanity. I just don't want my family dragged in, as well.”

Roberta kindly said, “We will do our best to keep you and your family out of the crossfire. Besides, I like the idea of having a brother that I can relate to.”

Hernan turn to Roberta, as he said, “I guess you are my sister. And to be honest, when you are not pissed off, you are pretty nice. And the good news is that you are now also an aunt to my two sons and my daughter.”

Roberta smiled, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Janet spoke up, “So, who wants to tell him?”

Hernan overheard Janet, as he inquired, “Tell me what?”

Roberta pulled out a photo from one of her pockets. She handed the photo to Hernan, as she stated, “This is a picture of Garcia. Long after he was cursed to turn into a girl. In her adult female form.”

Hernan looked at the picture, and his jaw dropped. Barring the slight age differences, along with Garcia having shorter blond hair, Garcia's female form looked exactly like Maria.

Everyone remained silent, as they left the revelation sink in for Hernan.

A few seconds later, Hernan collected himself, as he handed the photo back to Roberta. Roberta put the photo back into one of her pockets.

Hernan then looked up at the women, as he pleaded, “Please. Let us keep this between us. Until I figure out how to tell my wife all of this, without sounding like a complete lunatic.”

Revy smirked, as she snorted, “Good luck with that.”

Roberta suggested, “Though, Garcia is in our home reality, due to having many responsibilities. I am sure he would would not mind if I bought you and your family along, to visit him. I assure you the Lovelace estate is now very safe. Also, Garcia would love to meet her new sister, brother in law, and nephews and niece. And Fabiola likes children. She will likely find this new heartening, when she gets back from an errand she is on. Which should be in a few days.”

Hernan responded, “Nice idea. We will have to plan it in a way that none of us will wind up with a heartattack...” He sighed. He then continued, “Nor, a mental breakdown. But first, we will have to figure out how to break the news to my family.”

Roberta smiled, while she commented, “I like a challenge.”

Hernan let out a deep breath. He then stated, “Okay. I got to talk to a few of you. I know that. But, I cannot talk to all of you.” He turned to Roberta, as he went onto say, Roberta, I know I must talk to you. And I want too.” Hernan looked at the crowd of women, as he continued, “Rock, if it okay, I would like to talk to you. You have always been the sane one. And Revy, since I kicked your ass. I guess you should come as well... Now, that I am thinking straight, I am surprised, I actually did that... We will go to the restaurant I was planning to take my family to, so we can talk in private.”

Roberta said, “Of course.”

Revy replied, “Lead the way.”

Rock thought, 'He is still coming to terms to what has happened. And he could clearly use our help.' She stated, “Sure. Though, I have a few questions for you, that I need answered.”

Hernan replied, “We'll see.”

Rock said, “That will be fine.”

A thought then occurred to Hernan, as he asked, “Though, before I leave, I need to know. Who do I see about paying for the damages to the bar?”

Bao walked out, to the front of the crowd, as she chuckled. As she came to a stop, she faced Hernan. She happily stated, “After decades of being a bartender, you are only the third person to take responsibility for what you broke in my bar. Fortunately, you didn't wreck anything worse than what these girls do on a regular night. I have the money to take care of it. And I am going to let one time slide because you only did it because Revy endangered your family. That is a good reason for your actions.”

Hernan gratefully replied, “Thank you.”

As Rock and Revy started walking towards Hernan, and Roberta, Hernan noticed that Revy was still slightly limping.

Hernan looked over at Revy, as he inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you going to be alright, Revy? Or, do you need me to take you to the hospital?”

By then, Rock and Revy had reached Hernan and Roberta, as they came to a stop near them.

Revy stated, in a rude tone of voice, “Damn. You kick my ass, and now you are asking if I am going to be alright. Stop being such a pussy. I will be fine in about an hour. Though, I will likely be sore for the rest of the night.”

Hernan thought, 'I find it slightly ironic that she would call me that, considering I am the only person here who is not a woman.' He turned to Roberta, as he asked, “How do you deal with such fowl language?”

Roberta let out a laugh. She then stated, “When she gets too annoying, I tell her to shut the fuck up.”

Hernan, Roberta, and Rock each let out a small laugh at Roberta's comment.

Revy felt annoyance, as she thought, 'It is so tempting to restart our fight. But, it is not worth it.'

As Roberta, Hernan, and Rock calmed down, Hernan stated, “The place I wish to go to is this way. The italian restaurant is about a block and a half from here.”

Hernan then started walking down the street, on the left side of the Rats Nest, with Roberta, Rock, and Revy walking right behind.

As they continued walking, Hernan started walking towards to the sidewalk, on the side of the street that the Rats Nest was located.

(_)

As the crowd, in front of the Rats Nest, watched the four adults leave, Benny commented, “The girls, along with Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, are going to hate it when they hear what they missed tonight.”

Benny giggled a little. She then said, “It is going to be so much fun telling all of them. The look on their faces will be priceless.”

Dutch stated, “Yea. You got that right. But, I think they will find it interesting to learn that of all the counterparts we could meet in this reality, we met the gender flipped counterparts for Roberta and Garcia.”

Eda mentioned, “And they are married, with three children.”

B said, “Somehow, I feel that is just the natural course of their relationship.”

Yolanda stated, “I agree. I am sure Roberta and Garcia, and maybe Fabiola as well, would have had some kids by now, if Garcia was not so busy with his family interests.”

Balalaika commented, “It can be very difficult to balance work and family.”

Violin looked over at Balalaika, as she said, “You would know.”

Balalaika cracked a wicked grin, as she looked at Violin She stated, “Yes. I would.”

Violin gulped in response.

Balalaika just giggled a little at Violin's response.

Janet said, “While I find this news surprising. I find it more surprising that Hernan has seen our series, and the omakes. Yet, he did make the connections.”

Benny commented, “Janet, if you saw a walking death machine, of the opposite gender, in a work of fiction, would you make the connection that you were her gender flipped reality counterpart?”

Janet shrugged, as she replied, “No... And point taken.”

Dutch suggested, “Come on. Let's go inside, and talk about this more, over another round a drinks.”

Benny smiled over at Dutch, as a few of the women in the crowd nodded a few times in agreement.

The women then started filing back into the Rats Nest bar.

They also collected Revy's pistols, off the bar room floor, for her.

A few minutes later, the women customers were back inside the Rats Nest, at their usual tables, with each of them having drink. While, Bao and Melanie were back behind the bar counter.

(_)

Meanwhile, as Hernan, Roberta, Rock, and Revy, walked down the street. With Revy slowly recovering. Though, Revy was able to keep up at the casual pace that Hernan set, as she slightly limped.

Revy then realized that Hernan was still able to walk normally. She asked, “How can you still walk after I hit you in the nuts, like that?”

With his back turned to her, while he continued walking, Hernan answered, “I have had some very intense training regiments when I was younger.”

Revy saw Roberta turned to her, with Roberta just simply nodding a few times in confirmation. Roberta then turned her head back to face the direction they were going.

Revy replied, “Okay. Let's just get to that restaurant, so we can talk.”

Hernan said, “Trust me. I want to begin this discussion more than you do.”

The four adults then continued their way down the sidewalk.

(_)

Ten minutes later, they reached the italian restaurant.

Hernan opened the front door, and he held it open for the three women with him.

As Roberta walked inside, she said, “Thank you.”

As Rock walked inside, she said, “Thanks.”

As Revy walked inside, she said, “Don't think this means anything between us.”

Hernan not respond, as he walked inside, while he let the door gently behind them.

As Hernan joined the women, just inside the entrance, he saw that the number of people in there had thinned sense he left.

As the three women looked around, Revy said, “Not bad.”

Hernan commented, “Yes. This is a nice place to eat. And my family and I were going to have a pleasant meal here, tonight. Until, you accidentally shot my wife.”

Revy looked Hernan, as she questioned, in an annoyed tone of voice, “You're going to rag on me for that for a while? Aren't you?”

Hernan turned to Revy, as he retorted, “Well, I do concede that it was an accident on your part. Though, a foolish, unnecessary accident on your part.”

Roberta turned to Revy, as she spoke up, “You have to admit. That is an improvement.”

Revy grumbled, as she begrudgingly agreed, “Yes. It is.”

Rock asked, “So, where are we sitting?”

Hernan looked around, and he soon saw the table, by a wall, that he wanted to sit in. The customers in the room were mostly sitting in locations away from that table.

Hernan thought, 'Good. No one has taken that table, since we left. And there are not many people around it. So, we will have some '

Hernan calmly stated, “This way to the table we are sitting at.”

Hernan then lead them to a nearby table, with six chairs. He then watched for the other to seat themselves in their chairs. Hernan then sat down in a chair, as well.

Rock and Revy sat in chairs beside each other, with their backs was facing the wall.

Roberta sat beside Hernan, with her and Hernan sitting across from Rock and Revy, with the two counterparts being empty chair away from the couple.

In a clockwise fashion, sat Hernan, Roberta, Rock, and Revy.

After everyone got comfortable in their chairs, Roberta looked around the room. She saw that there were other people nearby. Though, not mention.

Roberta looked at Hernan, as she asked, “Are you sure this is private enough?”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he stated, “Everyone here knows me. Including the employes. And they all like me. And they respect my privacy.”

Roberta replied, “Okay.” She mentally added, 'I guess he would know. So, I will go along with this.'

Rock asked, “Before we get into the conversation. We might as well ask. Where are the bullet holes?

Hernan said, “Right behind you. To your left side.”

Rock and Revy then looked behind themselves. After they, and Roberta, looked at the wall for a few seconds, they noticed the bullet holes.

Revy commented, “Honestly, I am surprised that they only made holes that small.” She thought, 'But then, I guess it is because I started to use copper target ammo, instead of hollowpoint bullets. I have found that more often, I have been firing at a firing range, than actually going into combat.'

Rock whispered, in a stern tone of voice, “Now, is not the time to make such statements.”

Revy softly replied, “Okay.”

Rock and Revy then turned back to face Roberta and Hernan, while Roberta and Hernan focused on Rock and Revy.

Hernan looked Revy, as he stated, in a serious tone of voice, “I wanted you to see the damage you caused, while keeping in mind that not only my wife, and I were sitting at this table. But, also our three young children.”

Revy realized the seriousness of Hernan's statement. She said, “Okay. Okay. I learned my lesson. I won't do it again.”

Hernan firmly responded, “I will hold you to your word.”

Revy grunted, in response. She thought, 'And I doubt you will forget this anytime soon. So, I guess I better keep my word.'

Just then, Grace walked up to their table, behind one of the empty chairs, allowing her to see all four adults sitting at the table.

The four adults turned to look at Grace.

Meanwhile, Grace looked around, and she saw Hernan was sitting there, with three women she did not know.

Grace turned to Hernan, as she asked, in spanish, “Hernan. I didn't expect to see you back here. But, where is your family? Who are these women? And is Maria fine?”

Hernan answered, in english, so Revy would understand him, “Maria is fine. She took the kids back home. And... Well, these women are the ones I had a discussion, concerning them shooting off their weapons.”

Grace flatly asked, in spanish, “Which one of them did it?”

Hernan answered, “The redhead is the one that shot your wall. And she doesn't know spanish.”

Grace looked down at the redhead, as she frowned at Revy.

Rock quickly said, “We will be more than happy to pay for damages.”

Grace reached into her pocket and pulled out a business card. She handed it to Rock.

Rock gently took the card, and looked at it. She saw the card listed the name of the restaurant, the address, a phone number, and an e-mail address. She then pocket the card.

Grace looked at Rock. She switched to english, as she stated, “Since no one was serious hurt. And as long as you pay for damages, in a timely manner. We will not be pressing charges.”

Rock stated, “We will make arrangements tomorrow, for compensation.”

Grace responded, “That will be fine.” She looked at Hernan, as she continued, “Well, Hernan. After that last time, with those mafia guys, I am surprised you were clearly able to handle this problem in such a peaceful way.”

Hernan coyly replied, “Things seemed to have worked out that way.”

Grace said, “Yes... That appears to be the case.” She then pulled out a notepad and pen. She inquired, “So, what can I get for everyone?

Revy questioned, with slight disbelief, “You are still going to serve us? After all this?”

Grace looked at Revy, as she stated, “Yes. You are in here as customers. And I respect Hernan. Also, don't worry. We are not going to do anything to your drinks, nor any meals you order. We have too much self-respect than to pull such juvenile bullshit.”

Rock said, “I believe we will just be having something drink.”

Grace replied, “That will be fine. So, what will you all be having?

Hernan said, “A glass of lemonade, with ice.”

Roberta commented, “Same here.”

Rock stated, “I will take a cold cola. I don't care about the brand.”

Revy requested, “I would like a beer. If you got it?”

Grace gave Revy a stern look, as she stated, “We only serve wine. Though, you will not be getting any alcohol to those whom are armed. Nor, those whom we believe have poor judgment.”

Revy looked down at her empty holsters. She looked back at Grace, as she thought, 'I can understand why she is upset. And she clearly is not intimidated by me. Though, I am not really in the mood to find out why.” She said, “I will just have whatever cola you bring out for my friend here.”

Grace wrote down their orders on her notepad. She then looked over at them, as she said, “I will bring out your drinks, in a little while.”

Grace turned around, walked away from them, and back into the kitchen.

Revy looked over at Hernan, as she asked, “So, what was she talking about, Hernan? What did she mean by, that last time?”

Hernan looked down at the table, as he quietly said, “It is a long, painful story. I don't want to get into it.”

Revy realized she hit a nerve. She replied, in a sincere tone of voice, “I fully understand.”

Hernan looked at Revy, then Roberta, and back to Revy and Rock, as he calmly said, “Yea. Of all people. I guess you three would.”

Roberta commented, “You are correct about that.”

Rock asked, “So, where would you like us to start?”

Revy suggested, “How about we talk about your kids? I saw them through the back windows of your car. One of them looks like a child version of Roberta here. Another looks like Garcia, a few years before we met him, as a kid. And the third child looks like a cross between Roberta and Garcia.”

Hernan turned to Revy, as he lightly growled, “My kids are not a topic of discussion. And need I remind you they are mine and Maria's children. Not Roberta and Garcia’s children.”

The three women realized that Hernan had taking offense to Revy's comment.

Rock quickly said, “I am sure that Revy meant no offense with her comment.”

Revy thought, 'Rock is right. We need answers from him. As such, we don't need him pissed off, right now.' She commented, “Rock is right. I didn't mean any offense about what I said.”

Hernan forced himself to calm down, as he conceded, “I realize that. But, my family. Especially, after what just happened. Is a sensitive subject for me.”

Revy stated, “I completely agree with you. I should not have asked about your family. And I won't ask about your family, again.”

Hernan replied, “That will be fine.”

Rock mentally realized, 'Wait a minute. He may have seen our series? But, has he read the manga? Or, Lee's stories. For the matter, has he seen the entire anime series? I need to ask?'

Rock asked, “Where did you see the Black Lagoon anime series from?”

Hernan answered, “Pedro hosted movie nights. Where he invite me, and a few of his other friends, over some beers, to watch various movies and series. And he showed us that series. Among others series. And over the course of a few months, I saw the Black Lagoon anime series, save for the third season. And I watched that one, at Pedro's home, soon after it was released in North America.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he complimented, “I must say that even thought that time in your life was clearly painful for you. That exhibition drill you did with the musket, in season three, was very impressive.”

Roberta smiled at Hernan, as she replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'It is nice for someone to acknowledge the skills I have outside of killing.'

Hernan said, “You're welcome. Though, once Pedro realizes that I am your counterpart, he may never invite me to those get-togethers, again.”

Rock stated, “I doubt that. It is clear that Pedro suspected something about you. And should he find this out about you. He will just probably shrug, and say that it explains a lot.”

Hernan turned back to looked at Rock and Revy, as he said, “I hope you are right. Though, they already know I was a member of the FARC. And I got a little ribbing from the others as we watched you series, when it dealt with Roberta here.”

Revy smiled mischievously, as replied, with amusement in her tone of voice, “Oh. That is rich.”

The three women giggled, as Hernan took their reaction in stride.

While the giggled, Roberta thought, 'That is funny and ironic. His friends teasing him, over my actions, without any of them realizing I am his counterpart.'

As they calmed down, Revy asked, “So, what other series have you seen?”

Hernan stated, “Well, first you and your friends are very beautiful and hard to miss. I am married man, but I am not blind.”

Revy replied, “Thank you.”

Hernan thought, 'I don't want to reveal exactly how much I know, just yet. So, I will keep this vague.'

Hernan commented, “And I recognize you, Rock. From the Boys and Girls omake.”

Rock stated, “Actually, we are from the anime timeline. Post series. But, I can see how you could make that mistake.”

Hernan stated, “Okay. Anyway, over the last few years, I have seen one of your groups. A trio of women. One has red hair. One has blue hair. One has blond hair. Sometimes there with your group. Or, they have younger women with them. Or, it is just the three of them.”

“Even with the slight age differences. With that red chinese clothing, it is easy to guess the redhead is Ranma Saotome, from Ranma Half. With the blue haired woman being Natsuru, from the Kampfer series. I don't know who the blond is?... Pedro has some very strange tastes in fiction.”

Revy commented, “I guess he would.”

Hernan asked, “So, who is the blond woman with Ranma and Natsuru?”

Rock answered, “Her name is, Akira. She is from the Gacha Gacha Secret manga.

Harnan commented, “I may have to look up that manga, later, on the internet.”

Rock responded, “Go ahead. I know Akira wouldn't mind. It is a lighthearted comedy. And if you don't know japanese, I checked on the matter. It has been translated in english, online here. But, it has some nudity in it. So, don't let your wife catch you reading it. And don't look at it on your family computer.”

Hernan replied, “I will keep that in mind.” He mentally added, 'I already knew who Akira was, as I read the first book to the Badasses of the Multiverse, I had to read the Gacha Gacha Secret series, online. So, I could understand the plot better. And I read the english translation, over the internet, on my computer, at my shop. And it is a very funny series. And reading those strange stories, and other series, is how I know who all of you are.'

Rock inquired, “Speaking of which. Have you read the Black Lagoon manga?

Hernan stated, “Yes. I have read all of it, in english. Pedro suggested the manga. And I admit I am a fan of your series. Also, I found the manga to be as good as the anime. Though, I am not crazy about current story arc, the Wired Red Wild Card.”

Revy deadpanned, “Neither are we.”

Hernan questioned, “You have been reading it online?”

Rock answered for Revy, “Yes. It is embarrassing to see our counterparts be so foolish, in helping someone that would have screwed them over, if the circumstances were reversed.”

Revy stated, “Though, I will give Li Xinlin credit. She did drag my counterpart's drunk ass back home, to get her Rock to help her. And I got a laugh, after my counterpart had that hacker get a makeover by those strippers.”

Hernan said, “Yes. That was a funny scene. Though, with this current revelation with my families connect to your reality. I am not so sure I am a fan anymore... No offense...”

Rock replied, “None taken.”

Roberta commented, “I am okay with people liking that series. At long as they are respectful towards what happened to us.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he stated, “I assure you. Those that have watched that series take what happened to you and the Lovelace family, very seriously.”

Roberta replied, “I realize that.”

Revy cracked a grin, as she stated, “Honestly, I am flattered that I have so many fans.”

Hernan turned to face Revy and Rock.

Rock teased, “Yea. Her ego can get really big on the subject.”

Hernan and Roberta lightly chuckled at Rock's comment.

Revy said, “What can I say? I get a kick out of people respecting my abilities to kick ass.”

Roberta made herself stop laughing, as she teased, “While showing some at that.”

Hernan forced himself to stop laughing, as he suggested, “Just don't take her to any sci-fi, nor anime conventions. It would be a like rock concert. The fans would never let her leave.”

Rock said, “I wasn't planning to do so.”

Revy commented, “Hey. I'm crazy. But, not that crazy.” She thought, 'While it is tempt to go to those events. You have a point, Hernan. If my fans realize who I am. Things could turn ugly for everyone involved.'

Hernan replied, “Good.” He thought, 'It is best I try not to upset any of these three women.'

Rock asked, “So, have you read Lee's stories?”

Hernan asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Who Lee is?”

Rock mentally realized, 'Pedro may have not told him anything about Lee, nor her stories. But, at the same time, Hernan is not asking why I am now a woman. He mentioned the omakes, but if he thought that. Why he is not asking why I am a woman, while Revy and Roberta are women? Something doesn't add up. But, I am not going to let him know that, just yet.'

Though, Before Rock to could answer Hernan, Revy stated, “Lee is the one who wrote the stories, Badasses Of the Multiverse. And while I will admit that is a good name for a title. In writing those stories, Lee messed with our lives, and in many cases, the genders of many people.”

Rock asked, “Yes. And so, I have to ask. After we showed up, did Pedro suggest you check out any long fictional stories online?”

Hernan thought, 'They asked me point blank. And I am not going to lie to them. For many reasons. So, I might as well come clean.' He answered, “Oh. That story. Pedro did mention that story. And I did read it.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he continued, “That is how I know you have replaced you missing limbs with cybernetics. And I guess you upgraded to human looking ones. And you look very nice, right now.”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she commented, “Thank you.”

Hernan replied, “You're welcome. And those were... Interesting stories.”

Roberta replied, “True.”

Hernan and Roberta then turned back to look at Rock and Revy.

Rock thought, 'That confirms what I suspected.' She guessed, “So, you were playing dumb with the question about Akira?”

Hernan admitted, “Yes. I was testing the waters on how much I wanted to let you know, that I know about you.”

Roberta complimented, “That was very insightful of you. I would have likely done the same thing in your place.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he replied, “Thank you.” He turned back to Rock and Revy.

Rock stated, “That is perfectly understandable on your part. And the person that wrote those stories is Lee, whom we mentioned.”

Hernan questioned, in a curious tone of voice, “I thought author's name was, Paul?”

Revy said, “Lee and Paul are both aliases of the same person. And he is now a she.”

Hernan flatly stated, “I don't want to know the details.”

Revy said, “I don't blame you for not wanting to know.” She mentally added, 'Because what we did to her, in our payback against her, wasn't pretty.'

Hernan inquired, “Okay. Is this why you all came to this town in the first place? You wanted revenge against Lee? With him... I mean her, coming to this town, and you following her here?”

Rock replied, “Yes.”

Hernan asked, “Did you get your revenge?”

Rock answered, “Yes.”

Hernan commented, “Given what all of you are capable of. I am surprised that this Lee is still alive.”

Revy coyly said, “That were other forms of revenge that don't involve killing.”

Hernan thought, 'My instincts tell me this is a topic of discussion that I don't want to get into.' He stated, “Okay. As I said. I don't want to know. And I am not going to ask any more on the subject.”

Rock politely said, “Thank you for your discretion.”

Roberta looked over at Hernan, as she asked, “So, how are you handling the news of us being counterparts?

Hernan looked at Roberta, as he answered, “I admit that the revelation has not fully hit me, yet.”

Roberta responded, “I have not fully come to terms with that information, either. But, I feel I am okay with the matter.”

Hernan replied, “If it was just me, I would be fine. But, I have to worry about my family, as well.”

Roberta inquired, “Speaking which. Are most people in this city blind to the situation of us being here? Because it seems that none of them have approached us. Nor, have they run away from us. They just treat us as, being here.”

Hernan thought, 'They have been here for the last few years, and none of them have figured it out, yet. I guess I better tell them.'

Hernan answered, “Not really. Many of us. Including a number of those on the police force. Realize something is going on. And while most of us don't have anywhere near the complete story. We do realize something is happening. And we all knew better than to talk about it in public.”

Rock complimented, “That is wise of all of you. And that confirms what we believed about the police. The day Roberta and Fabiola came to town, not only did Pedro leave town for a while, but half the police force in town left with them.”

Hernan looked over at Rock and Revy, as he commented, “So, that is why they left? That does explain a lot.”

Hernan then turned back to see that Roberta had a wicked grin on her lips. Next, Hernan turned back to face Rock and Revy.

Revy complimented, “I will say they are likely the most intelligent cops I know of. Most of the cops I have met would have been foolish enough to stick around.”

Hernan stated, “Yes. Pedro does not hire idiots. The police here know better than to get in over their heads. If they have a problem at that level, that defer to Pedro's leadership.”

Roberta commented, “I am starting see why everyone in this city respects Pedro, so much.”

Hernan turned to look at Roberta, as he complimented, “Pedro is very good at his job.”

Revy asked, “So, when did Pedro tell you about us being in town?”

Hernan looked over at Rock and Revy, as he answered, “Actually, years ago. When you and Rock here, came to my auto-shop, to check on your red GTO. I recognized you both, before I read the stories. You even gave me your names.”

“I mean. How many black haired japanese people answer to the name of, Rock? How many red headed chinese american woman use the name of, Revy? Between that, the way you look, and your red GTO. Even with the gender change. It was not hard to figure out who you were.”

Hernan thought, 'Along with me watching you leave, through the blinds of my office window. And me recognizing, Shenhua and Sawyer, as to of the people that picked you up. With me finding out that the third woman was Lotton. Though, I am not going to mention that to any of you.'

Revy commented, “Yea... We were kind of foolish to do that.”

Rock said, “I will give you that we kind of arrogant to use our names like that.”

Hernan stated, “Yes. It was. And I was the one that actually called Pedro. After you left, I immediately called Pedro and he confirmed what I thought. It was then he mention the title of those stories, and he told me to look up those stories online, to read them. Along with him wisely told me to keep quiet, and to avoid all of you. I hope you don't take offense at that.”

Rock stated, “No. That is perfectly understandable. And that was intelligent advice on Pedro's part.”

Hernan said, “I agree. That is why Pedro, as the chief of police, has been able to keep this city together for so long.” He mentally added, 'Though, I haven't heard from Pedro in the last few days. And this is around the time of the week he calls me to set us his nearly weekly movie nights at his home. But, I am not going to mention to these women that we are still doing that.'

Roberta thought, 'I wonder. He might have an idea of where they have gone off too.'

Roberta inquired, “Since we are talking about Pedro. This evening, at the bar, I overheard from Yolanda, that Pedro and Matthew are missing. Do you know where they are?”

Hernan thought, 'Pedro and Matthew are missing. That does explain why he has not contacted me.'

Hernan commented, “I do not have a clue. The good news is that if you don't know. Then, he and Matthew are still likely fine. If you are asking, then that means that you didn't do anything to them. Nor, did your friends.”

Roberta thought, 'I can see the logic behind your thinking. And that shows you are as sharp as I am.'

Roberta nodded once, as she stated, “True. If it was one of us did it, we would have heard about it, by now.”

Roberta then remembered, as she mentally realized, 'This supported my belief that I am right about this. That this is when those two left this reality. And with Annie being friends with Matthew, and Fabiola. It is likely that she sent Fabiola to go find them. I don't blame her. Fabiola is a good choice to do that. And she has the abilities to retrieve them quietly. I know. Because I trained her. But, I think I will keep that to myself, for now.'

Hernan stated, “I do know Matthew through Pedro. Though, you should know that both of them have been tight lipped about what was happening with all of you. And the rest of us knew better than to ask. But, it was no secret about the abuse and disrespect you have shown them. I guess they just got tired of it. But, without Pedro here, if something is not done, this city is going to fall apart without him.”

Rock stated, “I am sure someone will find them, or they will return on their own, before that happens. And I promise, when they return, we will try to be nicer to them, this time.”

Hernan turned to Rock, and Revy, as he questioned, “Good. What I don't get why you did that two them in the first place?”

Roberta answered, “It was more of a case of horseplay that got out of hand. We just wanted some designated drivers. And Pedro and Matthew were both responsible, and they knew who were. And we knew they would keep secrets to themselves.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he pointed out, “The problem is, given who you all are, that forcing people to be sober around you, when you are drunk, on a regular basis, will cause them to either runaway, or go crazy.”

Roberta agreed, “Very true. And I do not know how Bao does it.” She then looked directly at Revy, in her eyes, as she continued, “And I am sure most of us are starting to realize that now.”

Revy notice Roberta was talking about her, as she replied, “Not to worry. I don't have anything against either of them. So, I will let up on them.”

Roberta kindly smiled at Revy, as she said, “Thank you.”

Revy nodded once towards Roberta in confirmation of Roberta's comment and smile.

Hernan thought, 'What a minute, Bao?...' He asked, “You make is sound like Bao is here?”

Roberta turned back to look at Hernan. Her grin turned a little wicked, as she answered, in a mischievous tone of voice, “She is here.”

Hernan questioned, “She... Oh... Bao is the bartender at the Rats Nest?”

Roberta answered, “Yes.”

Hernan replied, “That figures.”

The three women giggled a little bit, at Hernan's comment.

As they calmed down, Revy stated, “What until you find out who her girlfriend is. But, we will let Bao's girlfriend tell you, herself.”

Hernan turned Revy and Rock, as he calmly said, “I look forward to it.” Hernan did not show it only the outside, but his soberly thought, 'And I believe I already know the answer to that question. But, let's change the topic to something more interesting.'

Hernan looked over at Roberta, as he stated, “You know. Now that I think about it. Barring the gender, physical augmentation, and hair color, it appears that there is not much difference between us. We have both done horrible things we know that we are some day are going to pay for. But, the important thing is to not drag others down with us.”

Roberta replied, “I completely agree.”

Hernan commented, “The one things I don't understand, Roberta, is we ran around the same time, in our parallel realities. When you left Columbia, you headed for Venezuela. That place is heavily populated with FARC members. While I kept running north, until I made it here. And afterward, I only had problems once with those after me. And they learned their lesson.”

Roberta admitted, “In retrospect, you are right. I should have run further. But then, I would not have met the Lovelace family, Garcia, and eventually Fabiola.”

Hernan said, “There are trade offs to everything.”

Roberta replied, “That is very true.”

Hernan commented, “Though, I met Maria in a completely different manner than you did with Garcia. Because of that, I have come to believe that we were fated to meet them. Garcia for you. Maria for me. So, even if you left, you would have still eventually met Garcia.”

Roberta kept her head turned to Hernan, but her eyes look over at Rock and Revy, as she coyly commented, “Well, I guess, I may have to agree. I did once get an offer to leave with some people. Though, they may have forgotten the offer, by now.” She thought, 'And if things has still played out with Garcia's kidnapping. I may have still been reunited with Garcia, and I would have saved him, then. In a similar manner, as before.”

Rock notice Roberta was looking at her and Revy. She mentally reflected, 'Is she talking about us? Hmm. I may have to ask her, later. But, I am more interested in Maria, right now.'

Revy had an amused look on her face, as she looked at Roberta. She stated, “Now, that you mentioned it. I remember that night in Caracas.”

Roberta and Hernan turned to look at Revy, and Rock, as Roberta teased Revy, “With your memory, I am surprised that you would remember that.”

Revy stated, “I rarely forget bar fights. And that was a big one. Arguably bigger than the one we had, at the Yellowflag, the first time you came to Roanapur.”

Roberta replied, “I have to agree with that.”

Rock turned to Revy, as she asked, “What happen Caracas? I didn't know you have even been there.”

Revy looked at Rock, as she answered, “I have been to a lot of places. But, the event we are talking about, happened before I met you. It is a long story. But, you remember on Mars, when we are having beers and talking about the Mexican and the Lawyer?”

Rock realized, as she answered, “Oh yes. Now, I remember you and the others talking about meeting those two men.”

Revy responded, “Yes. That event is what we are talking about, here. And I will tell you all about it, later tonight.”

Rock replied, “I look forward to it.” She mentally added, 'Okay. I will get my answers about that, from Revy, later.' She turned to look at Hernan, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, I want to find out some more about, Maria.'

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he said, “You can tell me, later.”

Roberta looked Hernan, as she replied, “Yes. It is an interesting tale. On best told over some drinks. In private.”

Revy look over at Roberta and Hernan, as Revy joked, “Get a room.”

Roberta and Hernan looked over at Revy, as both of them gave Revy a stern look.

Revy saw them, and the looks on their faces caused her to involuntary gulped.

Revy's reaction caused Roberta and Hernan to lose the serious looks on their faces, as they started laughing.

Meanwhile, Rock saw all this, and she did her best not to laugh with Roberta and Hernan.

As Roberta and Hernan calmed down, Rock asked, “So, what is the story behind Maria?” She thought, 'Revy may have promised not to talk about Hernan's family, but I didn't. And I know how to be more subtle about getting what I want.'

Hernan answered, “I am not sure. Though, we love each other, neither of us has asked about the others past. And that seems to have worked well for us.”

Revy asked, “Do you think there are other gender swapped counterparts here?”

Hernan answered, “I have no idea. As you all know, I didn't know the truth until tonight. But, given your past, I doubt you would want to find out. Also, I doubt your counterpart left New York City. And, she, or he, might even be long since dead.”

Revy conceded, “Good point.”

Hernan asked, “By the way, how are you feeling? And please. No back talk.”

Revy answered, “Fine... I feel better. Those of us that underwent the vat process recover quickly. And I was wondering. Do you have any special nicknames, like Roberta has the Bloodhound title, and I have the Two-hands title.?”

Hernan stated, “No. The first thing they taught us in guerrilla warfare was not to stand out.”

Roberta let out a laugh. She then stated, “I will give you that one.”

Hernan thought, 'It is easy to figure out why Revy wants to stand out. But, Roberta?...' He turned to Roberta, as he asked, “So, why did you want to stand out?”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she smiled wickedly. She stated, “To strike terror in the hearts of my enemies.”

Hernan commented, “You sound like Batman.”

Roberta rhetorically joked, “Where do you think I got the inspiration for all my wonderful toys?”

Hernan, Rock, and Revy, all got the reference to Roberta's joke, as all four adults started laughing, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Hernan questioned, “In all seriousness. You haven't met, Batman? Have you?”

Roberta answered, “No. There are some realities we try to avoid. And when we are under the command of Chang. Batman was one of the few people he did not want to confront. Even I would think twice about confronting him.”

Hernan replied, “Of course. Nobody wants to cross, Batman.”

Revy said, “You can say that, again.”

Hernan choose not to.

Roberta commented, “That is one other matter, I think you need to know.”

Hernan inquired, “That being?”

Roberta mentioned, “Hernan, is my father's name. And Maria was Garcia's mother's name.”

Hernan commented, “Well that make sense in the symmetry of this insanity.”

Roberta agreed, “I guess it would.”

Hernan said, “And it gets better. Garcia was Maria's father's name. While, Roberta was the name of my mother.”

Roberta responded, “Well, that is interesting. It seems there are more connections between the four of us than we realized.”

Hernan replied, “Agreed.”

Revy commented, “You know. It is completely suck if this was a time loop, with you two turned out to be the deceased parent of the other.”

Hernan, Roberta, and Rock, turned to Revy, as they were mild surprised by the bluntness of Revy's comment.

Hernan quickly stated, “Oh no. My mother looked completely different from Roberta.”

Roberta mentioned, “And my father looked completely different than Hernan, or myself.”

Revy responded,, “That is good to know. By the way, I find interesting that for all the similarities. You two have different hair colors.”

Hernan commented, “Well, Revy. Those people in this reality don't have such a wide variety of hair colors. Like in your reality.”

Revy replied, “Okay. Point taken.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he asked, “Roberta. That is your natural hair color? Isn't it?”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she answered, “Yes. And if you are wondering, Fabiola...” She turned Revy, as she continued, “And Revy's hair colors, are natural colors, as well.” She looked over at Hernan, as she went onto say, “I guess that black hair is the default color for such situation.”

Hernan agreed, “I guess it is.” He thought, 'Given they have the same shade of eyebrows. That was not hard to guess. Unless they went the same route as my friend, Melvin. Though, I doubt that. And speaking of Melvin. I guess I am going to have to deal with that issue, in a little bit. I have been putting it off for way too long.'

'Well, either way, I miss being around Melvin. Melvin was a fun guy to be around. And it was not hard to figure out what happened to Melvin. I just did want confirm my suspicions.'

'But, I believe it is best that I not ask about Melvin, in front of Revy. Rock is okay. Though, Revy is now. So, I will ask Roberta my questions, later on. When we have some privacy.'

Rock thought, 'This would be a good moment to ask my next question.' She calmly asked, “So, how do you plan to explain all this to Maria?”

Roberta and Hernan turned to look at Rock, as Hernan said, “Well, I am not telling her tonight. I need time to first think first how I am going to approach her, concerning all this.”

Rock complimented, “That would be a wise course to take.”

Hernan stated, “Thank you. Still, if I end up divorced, or my family is harmed by this, I will be holding you women responsible.”

Rock said, “We will try our best to help you avoid those situations.”

Hernan replied, “Good. I will hold you to that.” Hernan turned Roberta, as he said, “Now, I have a question for you, about the revolution, Roberta?”

Roberta turned to Hernan, as she replied, “Sure. What do you want to know?”

Hernan asked, “Is the reason you stated, in your series, for joining the revolution, true? That you did it for justice?”

Roberta said, “Being my counterpart, I thought you would know that?”

Hernan responded, “No. I joined for different reasons.”

Roberta raised an eyebrow, as she questioned, with interest in her tone of voice, “You did? Well, yes. I did join the revolution for justice against the peoples' enemies. Why did you join?”

Hernan answered, “A better life for myself, my family, and my friends.”

Roberta commented, “I guess there are more differences between us, than just gender.”

Hernan agreed, “Yes. And maybe that is one of the reasons why, when you left the revolution, you stayed in South American, while I headed north.”

Roberta replied, “Perhaps.”

Revy asked, “If you were heading north, why didn't you go all the way into the U.S.?”

Roberta and Hernan turned to Revy, as Hernan answered, “Because I was considered an enemy of their country. Which was partly true. And on this island, the paper work, and regulations for running a business is very minor. And the local authorities don't ask questions, unless someone stirs up trouble.”

Revy commented, “Yes. After being here for a few years. I can see the appeal this place has. I am just liking this place more and more.”

Hernan said, “Yes. This is a nice city to live in.”

Just then, Grace walked up to them, while holding a tray in her left hand. On the tray were their drinks.

Revy looked over at Grace, as she commented, “What perfect timing.”

Grace then silently used her right hand to set their drinks down around them. She set down a glass of iced lemonade in front of Hernan, then set another glass of iced lemonade in front of Roberta. Next, she set a glass of iced cola in front of Rock, then she set another glass of iced cola in front of Revy.

As Grace then walked away with her empty tray, the four adults at the rounded table turned back to look each other. They drank their drinks, as they continued their conversation for a while longer.

(_)

An hour later, it was dark outside, as Roberta, Hernan, Rock, and Revy, returned to the Rats Nest. As they left the italian restaurant, Hernan has paid for their drinks.

The rest of the women were still in the bar, setting at their tables, or bar stool, as they were having their drinks. Except for Bao and Melanie, whom had just finished serving their customers, the other women that were there, and they were standing behind the bar counter.

Hernan opened, and held, the front door for the three women with him.

After Revy, Rock, and Roberta walked inside, Hernan did so, as well. As he walked inside, he gently shut the door behind him.

And Hernan saw that Revy, Rock, and Roberta has come to a stop just inside the bar.

Hernan calmly stood behind the three shorter women.

Everyone in the bar stopped what they were doing, and the room became quiet, as they turned to look at four adults standing at the entrance to the bar.

Dutch asked, “So, is everything settled?”

Rock turned to Dutch, as she answered, “Very much, so.”

Dutch replied, “Good.”

Everyone relaxed, as they went back to what they were doing, and talking, with each other, about.

Dutch turned Revy, as she commented, “By the way, Revy. You pistols are on the table, where you were sitting at.”

Revy looked over at the table, on the left back corner of the room, where she had been sitting at. She saw her semi-automatic pistols being set on the table, by her empty chair.

Revy turned to look at Dutch, as she happily replied, “Thanks.”

Dutch said, “No problem.”

Rock and Revy then turned, and walked over the large, round table, they had been sitting at, in the left back corner of the bar, where Lotton, Eda, Shenhua, and Sawyer were sitting.

After Revy sat down in the chair, in front of her cutlasses. She checked her pistols out. She found they were okay. And she then holstering them.

Rock at the table, beside Revy. And she was happy that Revy was happy.

(_)

Meanwhile, back at the front Roberta turned to Hernan, as she said, “We will talk, later.”

Hernan turned to Roberta, as he commented, “Okay. Also, everyone knows that most of you are staying at the Devil's Hotel. I can get off at lunch, around noon. I can meet you at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, for lunch, then.”

Roberta replied, “That will do fine. And they have a nice club sandwich.”

Hernan agreed, “Yes. They do.”

Roberta then turned to look in front of her, as she walked over to the table, by the empty chair, in the middle of the room, where Yolanda, Aryrn, and Violin, were sitting.

Hernan calmly watched her walk away, as he thought, 'Now, I am going have to do something, I don't really want to do.”

Hernan looked around the room, as he asked, “As embarrassing as this is. I need a lift back home. As you know, my wife took the car home back with the kids.”

Everyone stopped talking, as they turn to look at Hernan

Dutch look at Hernan, as she complimented, “That good question.” She thought, 'There is no way I am pissing this guy off, after what he did to Revy, tonight. And if aiding him in getting home, keeps him nice, like Roberta is most of the time. Then, I am more than willing to help him.'

Aeryn calmly suggested, “Why don't you call your wife to come get you?”

Hernan looked at Aeryn, as he answered, “She has been through enough tonight.”

Aeryn rhetorically replied, “Haven't we all?”

As Rock and Revy sat down in their chairs, they turned to look at Hernan. Rock offered, “We could call you a taxi?”

Hernan looked over at Rock, as he stated, “Actually. That could be difficult. The taxi services here don't like coming around this bar. Especially, at night.”

After Roberta sat down, she turned to Hernan, as she inquired, “What happened?”

Hernan turned to Bao, as he asked, “Do you want me to tell them? Or, do you want too?”

Bao looked at Hernan, as she replied, “Go ahead.” She looked over at her customers, as she stated, “This story is why I don't call taxis to come here, for people. Most of the time.” She thought, 'Unless I like them. Like Melanie here. Lee and River.'

Hernan turned back to face the women, as he said, “Well, about three years ago, a taxi was call to this place. And some drunkards decided to steal taxi, while the driver went to take a leak. Now, they just pulled the driver out of the car, and ran off. But, what they did to that taxi, later on the night, was a crime against nature. I should know. I was the one that taxi company hired to repair and clean that vehicle.”

Sawyer asked, “How bad was it?”

Hernan looked over at Sawyer, as he answered, “Well, from what we can piece together. Those idiots decided to get a live pig. They drove to a secluded part of the beach. And they decided they would try to have their own pig roast on the beach.”

“We don't know where they got the pig from. Though, they butchered the pig in the car, and dumped it in the back seat. Next, they siphoned on the fuel from the gas tanks. And they dumb the fuel on the pig. Then, they let gas. And I guess when they realized that it was not going to work, they left the taxi on fire.”

“Fortunately, the taxi was in the middle of a sandy beach, and the fire eventually died on its own. Unfortunately, it was over two weeks before the vehicle was found. And by then, with the burnt pig carcase had completely rotted out, and melted into the back seat of the car. And that is not including the rest of the damage to the car. Which was quite extensive.”

Sawyer stated, “That would be pretty bad. I am not sure I could clean that out. And I have some pretty bad cleaning jobs in my life. And I am not talking about killing.”

Hernan looked over at Sawyer, as he thought, 'If the first part of the Wired Red Wild Card is any indication, then yes you have. And that bread and butter joke, about the corpse on the bed, by your counterpart, was disgusting. Still, this is about my story, and not your story.'

Hernan said, “I know. I eventually gave up, and told them the car was totaled.”

Eda commented, “Okay. A taxi is out of the question. And I know you are not walking home.” She looked around the room, as she asked, “Who here is sober enough to take him home?”

Melanie turned to Eda, as she spoke up, “I will take home, in my car.”

Hernan looked over at Melanie, as he soberly thought, 'It figures that it would be you, that offers to give me a lift.' He calmly said, “Thanks.”

Melanie turned to Hernan, as she replied, “You're welcome.”

Hernan asked, “Still. No to be rude. But, who are you?”

Hernan thought, 'It is clear you are likely Bao's girlfriend. Because she usually works here alone. But, I don't know anything else about you. Unless, you are who I suspect you to be. But, asking you that, and being wrong, would be very embarrassing for the both of us. Though, I believe I am not wrong. Still, I am will wait to talk to you, about this, in private.'

Hernan noticed few of the women giggled a little, while he also saw Bao and Melanie frown towards their customers.

Hernan thought, 'Well, that confirms that. And I have a ride home. And I am not going to jinx.'

As the rest of the women calmed down, Melanie thought, 'I knew I should have come clean with you, a few years ago, Hernan. Still, I can do it as I take him home, in my car.'

Melanie said, “You can call me, Melanie. And my car is out front.”

Hernan asked, in a worried tone of voice, “Out front?...” He thought, with concern, 'Oh no.'

Melanie noticed Hernan's reaction. She signed. And then she stated, “Just follow me.” She turned to Bao, as said, “I will be back in a little while.”

Bao turned to her, as she responded, “No problem. And be careful.”

Melanie smiled at Bao, as she replied, “Thanks.”

Melanie then walked passed Bao, towards the back of the room, where the exit to the bar counter was. As soon as she cleared the bar counter, and turned to her left side, back around, she began walking towards Hernan. A few seconds later, she walked passed Hernan, opened the front door, and exited the building.

Hernan follow right behind Melanie.

As they walked outside, Hernan calmly followed Melanie across the empty street. And he soon realized that they were heading for the red four door car that he and Revy had damaged in their fight.

While still walking across the middle of the street, before Hernan could comment, Melanie continued looking forward, with her back to Hernan, as she commented, in spanish, “Yes. It is my car. I didn't say anything before, to the others, because I am just happy to have it in one piece.” She thought, 'Though, some of them, especially Bao, know it is my car. But, they did not want to say anything, and risk making things worse for everyone.'

By that time they reached the car. Melanie came to a stop beside the right passenger side door. And she turned around to face Hernan, with Hernan stopping a few feet in front of her.

Hernan looked at Melanie, in her eyes, he thought, 'She is speaking spanish, for my benefit. And I might as well apologize and try to make amends.'

Hernan offered, in a sheepish tone of voice, in spanish, “If you want, bring your car by my shop, later this week, and I will not only repair, or more likely replace, the windshield, free of charge. But, I will also repair any dents, and dings that I might have caused.”

Hernan thought, 'I will put in a rush order for the windshield, tomorrow morning.'

Melanie said, “That will be fine. Now, get in.”

Melanie turned walked around the front of the car, to the left driver's side door, by the sidewalk. As she faced the left driver's side door, as she pulled out her keyring full of keys. She then used the clicker to unlock all the doors to her car.

The interior light of the car automatically came on, when she used her clicker.

Next, she opened the driver's side door, got in, and shut the door behind her.

At the same time, as Hernan heard the sound of all the door locks of the car unlocking, he walked to the right front passenger door, in front of him. When he reached the front passenger door, he opened the door, got into the car, and he shut the door behind him.

Both adults then buckled themselves into theirs seats.

After which, Melanie then inserted her car key into the ignition of her car, which both turned off the interior lights of the car, while the outside light sensors detected darkness, and automatically turned on the front headlights of the car. She then started the car, and put it into drive. Next, she looked both ways, down the street. After seeing the both ways were clear, she looking forward, as she gently pressed the gas pedal of her car.

Melanie drove across the lanes, to the right side of the street, as she continued driving forward, down the road.

While Melanie drove her car, Hernan looked towards the front of the car, as he stated, “You need to go straight for a few blocks, before you turn to the right.”

Melanie kept her eyes looking at the road in front of them, as she coyly said, “I know the way to your home, Hernan.”

Hernan turned to Melanie, as he thought, 'Now to confirm the matter.' He asked, “How do you know where I live?”

Melanie kept looking forward, as she calmly stated, “Everything will become clear in a few moments. But first, I have to ask. Who do I remind you of?”

Except for the low light on the dashboard instruments, there was no light in the car. And the light from the street lights they passed by did not provide enough light for Hernan to take a close look at Melanie.

Hernan thought, 'Let's not play this game.' He politely stated, “I am sorry. But, there is not enough light in here for me to get a good look at you.”

Melanie kept looking forward, as she drove. She cracked a grin, while she giggled a little. She then said, “I can see fine. But, that is an understandable answer. Now, I want to apologize for not telling you sooner. But, I didn't want you to get dragged into the insanity. Though, I guess that is all for not. And now that you are in the loop, I might as well tell you that it is me, Melvin.”

From the corner of her right eye, Melanie saw that the only physical response Hernan made to this revelation was that he shrugged towards her.

Hernan calmly stated, “That figures. I already suspected. And I was wondering where you went.”

Melanie commented, “Well, I did take my old job back. And I didn't really hide who I really was. I just didn't talk about about the matter, in public.”

Hernan responded, “True. And it is good to see you Melvin. Or, Melanie.” He thought, 'So, this is Melvin. And this is why Revy has such fun in mentioning Bao's girlfriend. She probably realized, due to our connects to Pedro, that Melanie, as Melvin, use to be friends with me.'

Melanie thought, 'Well, he took that news very well. Which is good.' She said, “I am glad you are taking this news, and everything else tonight, so well, Hernan. And I am fine with however you want to address me.”

Hernan thought, 'I need to find out what happen to her?' He inquired, “Melvin, I am just happy to see you alive and okay. Still... What happened? How did you end up a woman? And yes, I read Lee's stories. The women tonight gave me a brief explanation of who Lee was.”

Melanie kept her eyes on the road, as she stated, “Yes. That saves a lot of time in explanations. And when we have a chance, I will tell you all about Lee. She is a good person.”

Hernan said, “That is nice.”

Melanie thought, 'I wonder if Roberta, Revy, and Rock, mentioned anything else?' She asked, “Did those three say anything else.”

Hernan answered, “A few things. And among other thing, while they didn't tell me who you were, they mentioned that Bao was the bartender at the Rats Nest. And that you two were in a relationship.”

Melanie stated, “And it is a good, stable relationship. I even living with Bao, at her home.”

Hernan replied, “That is good. At least you are no longer just living in a suite at that hotel.”

Melanie cheerfully responded, “And I am happy about it. Anyway, to answer your question. Long story, short, how I ended up a woman was that I was originally a member of Hotel Moscow. Yes. I am from the same reality as Revy, Roberta, and the others.”

Hernan thought, with mild surprise, 'Now, that is an interesting answer. It is not often, when learning that a friend has changed gender is not the more surprising thing to learn about them, in one night. Now, to get some answers.'

Hernan asked, “How long were you with Hotel Moscow?”

As Melanie came to street light, and it was green, and she turned on her right turning lights. With the other lane empty, she turned right down another street. When she turned her wheel back straight, the turning lights automatically turned off.

Melanie continued to look forward, as she answered, “I was with them from the Afghan-Russian war. Through our time as Hotel Moscow in Roanapur and elsewhere. To our freelance, traveling adventures, that were hinted at in Lee's stories.”

Hernan thought, 'If that is the case. You are probably a bigger badass than I was in my youth. Not that I am going to tell you that to your face.'

Melanie continued, “Eventually, after a minor... Disagreement, I ran. And I ended up here for a few years. Unfortunately, Balalaika and Hotel Moscow eventually found me, ambushed me in my own bar, and captured me. Though fortunately, no one was there are the time. So no one else was involved. And I was able to cut a deal with her, that allowed me to retain my freedom. Even thought I had my gender changed, and youth restored.”

“And the way Balalaika changed me was through the use of that vat process. With the super-soldier serum, which comes with some nice benefits. Along, with some minor brainwashing, so I could be conformable with being a woman.”

Hernan thought, 'So, that is how you can see so well at night. The super-soldier serum enhanced your senses, like the rest of the people that went through the vat process.'

'And I am not surprised that Balalaika would capture you at your place of work. That would be typical of what I know about Balalaika. Though, I am happy that no one else was harmed, and that you were able to cut a deal with her.'

'Also, this explains why you had problems watching the Black Lagoon anime episodes that dealt with the deaths of Hotel Moscow members. You personally knew them. They were your friends. And I am not going to ask if you showed up on the episodes. Which you were likely shown as an extra in a few of them. Because, that would be to personal a question. Though, on you being turned into a woman...'

Hernan commented, “While, I will admit it is not all bad for you. I mean your youth has been restored. Though, turning you into a women is a harsh punishment.” He thought, 'Though, I can think of a few worse punishments.'

Melanie stated, “Well, I did run in the first place, because that is what she did to the rest of the members of Hotel Moscow. They wanted to be young again. With the price being their gender being changed. So, they underwent the vat process. Gender change. Super-solider serum. Youth restore. Injuries repaired. Minor brainwashing like I had, to handle the change. Basically, like me, they had the whole package.”

“Anyway, at the time Balalaika made this offer. We were all old, except for her and B. And the others knowingly took her up on her offer, to have their youth restored, in exchange for being turned into a woman. Balalaika was very straightforward about what the vat process would do to them.”

“Though, it was then that I realized that her offer was more of an order. And I wanted to stay a man. So, I ran, and I used a reality device, that was damaged, just as I used it to escape the rest of Hotel Moscow. With the jump sending me here, over seven ago. And since I was stranded here, I made the best of my situation.”

Hernan commented, “I am glad you ended up here. You are a good friend, and bartender.”

Melanie kept her eyes on the road in front of them, as she happily stated, “Thank you. And I have happy to have met, and befriended Bao, you, Maria, your kids, Pedro, and the others.”

Hernan inquired, “That is good. And I have to ask. Even with the minor brainwashing, are you really okay with being a woman?”

Melanie calmly answered, “To be honest, being a woman is not that bad. And if your next words are, I will take your word on that. I am going to laugh.”

Hernan admitted, “Well, my next words were going to be that.”

Melanie giggled a little. She then said, “Anyway, I find it wild that you are the gender flipped version of Roberta. And Maria is the gender flipped version of Garcia. And you two still ended up together. I guess somethings are fated.”

Hernan looked towards the front of the car, as he sadly said, “Yea. I know.”

Melanie noticed the sadness in Hernan's voice, as she though, 'He clearly is not happy about this. And he is not as, okay, as he said it was.' She asked, “So, how are handling the news about you being Roberta's counterpart?”

Hernan thought, 'Melvin is a friend. So, I might as well be honest with her.'

Hernan stated, “It is still soaking in for me. And I have no idea how I am going to break the news to Maria. Let alone, our children. Though, you don't need to worry about me going on the warpath.” He added, in a tired tone of voice, “Once is enough for me... Well, technically twice, if you count my fight with Revy, tonight.”

Melanie agreed, “Yea. And I have never seen anyone kick Revy's ass like that. And I was one of the Hotel Moscow members that watched that four hour fist fight between Revy and Roberta. Though, after Roberta returned, that second time, it was clear Roberta was vastly holding back in that fight. And Revy realizes it, because, as we both know, she called for back-up when she tried to face Roberta, again.”

Hernan said, “That does not make me feel better.”

Melanie responded, “Well... I will admit that from what I heard on the grapevine, that when Maria was shot, during that cop cookout, that I believe you would have been just as bad as Roberta, if not for Pedro reigning you in.”

Hernan admitted, in a tired tone of voice, “You are probably right. And if Maria had died, I don't know if I would had been able to come back from that.”

Melanie replied, “I firmly believe you would have come back when you realized you still had to take care of your children.”

Hernan responded, in a sober tone of voice, “I hope you are right. And that is what scares me the most about this situation. And I am more frightened for my family, and not myself, about what these revelations mean for my family.”

Melanie complimented, “That is because you are a good man, Hernan. You just have a dark side that is closer to the surface than most people.”

Hernan replied, “Thank you.”

Melanie went onto say, “Also, unlike the Roberta. By yourself, you were able to create a successful business, that allowed you to not only take care Maria, and yourself, but your three children, as well. That is something even Roberta was not able to do on her own.”

Hernan deadpanned, “Thanks. But now, you are just kissing my ass.”

Melanie kept looking forward as she drove. She happily responded, “Hey. As I said. You kicked Revy's ass. I can put on one hand how many people have done that. And she had the super-soldier serum to boot, and you still did it. I'm impressed. And I want to stay on your good side”

Hernan calmly said, “Well, I am starting to regret getting into that fight. I should have taken Maria and the kids home, and then called Pedro, to let him handle Revy and the others. But, I heard from Roberta that Pedro and Matthew have gone missing. And they likely they left, together.”

Melanie stated, “Yes. So, you know who Matthew is?”

Hernan deadpanned, “Who do you think took your place during Pedro's movie nights, at his house.”

Melanie let out a laugh. She replied, “Oh.”

Hernan stated, “Though, they kept their secrets about you all.”

Melanie said, “Of course.”

Hernan commented, “Still, it will be fun to have you come back to those movie nights.”

Melanie responded, “I thought my gender change would cause problems with such gatherings.”

Hernan shrugged, as he stated, “Nah. I am sure Pedro wouldn't mind. And he would likely be more than happy to have Bao come along, as well. Also, we both know that you and Bao are stronger than the rest of us. And both of you have shown you can take care of yourselves. Along with that, we all can find an excuse for you two being there, for those invited to those nights whom do not know what is fully going on.”

Melanie conceded, “That is a good point.” She then continued in a more joyous tone of voice, “And I have been meaning to find some more excuses for Bao to take off of her work, to allow us to spend more time together. And such an invitation would be a good excuse to take off on a nearly weekly schedule.”

Melanie thought, 'Though, the reality time dilation trick does help a lot. Or, I could just find someone to fill in for me at the hotel bar. It would be the first time I have done that, with the manager's blessing. But, I am not going tell you that Bao has a reality device, and we can do that. Because, you already have to much on your plate.'

Hernan happily replied, “That would be a good reason to do so.”

Melanie thought, 'Good. He is getting into a better mood.'

Melanie said, “I am glad you agree. Anyway, there is nothing Pedro could have done. He and Matthew have pretty much been reigned in by those girls, as their personal designated drivers. Though, Bao and I did help them when they needed it.”

Hernan thought, 'That explains whey Roberta, Revy, and Rock, acted so casual in talking about Pedro and Matthew.' He said, “I am glad you both were willing to help them.”

Melanie replied, “Thank you.”

Hernan thought, 'I wonder. It would have not been a bad event in Melvin's life. And it would not be asking her to divulge any secrets she has. So, it should be okay to ask.' He inquired, “By the way. Given the circumstances. I have to ask. What about the four hour fight between Roberta and Revy. How boring was that fight?”

Melanie looked ahead of her, as she answered, “The first hour was pretty good. We all got a good laugh when Rock tried to stop the fight, with Revy and Roberta telling him to shut the fuck up. Further into the next hour, they started fighting dirty. By the middle of the third hour, they started to tire. And by the four hour, it was a boring punch for punch, slug fest.”

Hernan commented, “I could see how that could play out. Did anyone video tape it?”

Melanie said, “Yea. Balalaika had that event video taped. But, I have no idea where she put the copy, or copies, she made. They are likely in her personal library, and wherever she keeps her backups at.”

Hernan replied, “Oh well. That is something to think about for a later date.”

Melanie stated, “Yea. And I won't worry too much about the girls. After the way things went down tonight, and the aftermath of that talk you clearly had with Roberta, Revy, and Rock, they will likely leave you alone.”

Hernan's mood dimmed, as he replied, in a slightly disappointed tone of voice, “No they won't. This is only the start of things. Not the ending.” He then muttered, under his breath, “Damn stories.”

Melanie overheard Hernan. She said, “Yea. Those stories were an interesting read.”

Hernan turned to look at Melanie, as he inquired, “You overheard me?”

Melanie stated, “Yea. I have enhanced hearing. As I said, I got the same vat process as the others. And the process has its perks.”

Hernan mentally realized, 'I was so caught of in my own thoughts, that I forgot about that. Still...' He requested, “If you don't mind. I would just like to sit here and think.”

Melanie replied, “Go ahead.”

Both adults then sat in silence, as Melanie drove her car towards Hernan's family home.

Meanwhile, Hernan turned to looked in front of them, at the dark streets ahead, with the streetlights providing most illumination, save for the outside lights of various buildings they passed by.

Hernan leaned back in his seat, while he began to recall his distant past.

(_)

Over two decades ago, in a rural area of Columbia, It was late afternoon, on a partly cloudy, hot, humid, day, as three members of a FARC intelligence unit were walking along a dirt road, on patrol. Along with having other weapons sheathed and holstered, among their clothing, they had their loaded AKS forty-seven type one automatic rifles, which were slung over their shoulders.

AKS Forty-Seven Type One rifles were a variant of the russian AK Forty-Seven weapon series. The rifle fired seven point six two by three nine ammunition. The weapon used a thirty round magazine. Which each man have spare magazines, in their ammo belts.

The AKS rifle had a selector fire switch that offered either full auto, or single fire, selections. And like the AK Forty-seven, the AKS Forty-Seven Type One had adjustable iron sights.

The AKS rifle also used a foldable stock, that folded under the barrel of the weapon. Though, to fold or unfold the stock, required removal of the ammo magazine.

All three men had the stocks of AKS rifles folded up.

The three men had been good friends for a number of years.

All three men were in their mid to late twenties, and they each were currently wearing green combat fatigues and black army boots.

They walked in side by side, with a much younger Hernan Pena, being in the middle of the group. Hernan had a small black pony tail that went to the bottom of his neck line. Also, he, and the other two men had five o'clock beard shadows on their faces.

At that moment, Hernan walked beside his two close friends, were finishing their patrol. As they made their way along the dirt road, beside the coca fields, they approached the nearby cartel base of operations. And all three men were complaining to each other over their disgust with the assignment their superior, high-ranking officers had given them.

For their leaders have gotten in bed with the drug cartels of South America.

And instead of rewarding them for their tireless efforts, and successes, their superiors had reassigned them to guard coca fields for those cartels. And their orders, which they found disgusting, was not only to shot any trespassers, but for them to also shot any of the slaves attempting to escape.

Fortunately, as of yet, they had not be put into a position where they would have had to choose between doing what they felt was right, and following orders that were clearly evil. And it was the moral conflicts, between their loyalty to the workers revolutionary cause, and their current orders, that they were discussing in create length, and detail.

As they continued to walk down the dirt road they were on, Hernan looked to his right side, over at the fenced in coca fields, and saw he saw the peasant workers that were forced to work in the fields.

Hernan turned his eyes back to his front, as he said, in spanish, with disgust in his voice, “We joined the revolution to help these people. Not enslave them.”

One of Hernan's friends, to Hernan's right, agreed, in spanish, “Yes. We did. But, what can we do?”

Hernan stated, “We quit, Sans.”

Hernan's other friend, to Hernan's left, pointed, in spanish, “They are not just going to let us just walk away. We try to leave, and they will kill us.”

Hernan stated, “Well, Isandro. In that case, we just need to make sure we have a good head start on them, and disappear beyond their reach, before they even realize we are gone...”

There was silence for a few seconds. Hernan then stated, with encouragement in his tone of voice, “Come on guys. They trained us on how to disappear from the authorities. Same principle. Only, this time, we disappear so well that even our superiors, those that taught us how, won't know where we went.”

To Hernan's right, Sans joked, “Still Hernan, if you left the revolution, what would you do? Be a butler?”

Hernan casually responded, “Nah. I think I would likely be a mechanic. I always liked working on cars and trucks. And I seem to be pretty good at it.”

To Hernan's left, Isandro stated, “Yes. You do have a talent with fixing vehicles. And that talent has saved our hides more times than I care to admit to.”

Hernan then saw they were approaching their base of operations. And he noticed there were a few jeeps, nearby, with several people standing around, in a semi-circle, by the main building of the base.

Hernan counted fifteen men in all. And from the way they were dressed, they were all cartel members. Most of them had pistols in their side holsters, or shoulder holsters. But, a few also had automatic rifles slung onto their shoulders.

Hernan also saw that the entire group had their backs turned to himself, and his two friends, as they approached the base.

Also, Hernan noted that there are no guards in sight, around the base. Hernan thought, 'Such sloppy work. But then, I guess they think they only need their patrols to take care of security. That is someday going to cost them'

Isandro asked, “What is going on over there?”

Sans inquired, “I don't know, Isandro. Hernan, do you think we should get involved?”

Hernan stated, “Yes. At this point, I don't fucking care, what they try to do to us. If they try to hurt us, it gives us the perfect excuse to kill as these scumbags, and get the hell out of here.”

Sans replied, “Good point.”

Isandro said, “Okay. Let's hustle.”

The three men then started jogging towards the group of men.

Less then a minute later, as the three FARC members got within thirty feet of the group, they noticed a break in the crowd, and they saw a girl that had her hands tied behind her back, with rope. The girl was kneeling on both her knees, looking up at the men on the large crowd.

Even from the distance they were at, Hernan could tell that the girl was crying.

The one of the men right in front of girl, backhanded the girl, hard in right side of her face, sending her down, to the ground, on her left side.

Hernan immediately went from jogging, to full running, with his two friends quickly him join him, in their haste.

As Hernan and his two friends reached the group. Isandro and Sans came to a stop, eight feet from the group, as Hernan slowed to a brisk walked, while making his way through the fifteen person crowd of cartel men.

By then, the girl was back on her knees, and the same man looked like he was getting ready to hit her again.

Fortunately, Hernan was quick enough, that when he came up to the cartel man, the man had just reached back with his right hand, to the upper left side of his chest, to strike again, with Hernan swiftly gripping man's right wrist with Hernan's own right hand.

The man immediately turned to his left to looked at Hernan.

Hernan demanded, in an authoritarian tone of voice, “What is going on here?”

The man yanked his right hand away. He turned to Hernan, as he barked, in spanish, “This is none of your concern, guard dog. Go back to your job.”

Hernan turned to look down at the kneeing girl. And he got a good look at her. She skinny and fair skinned. She had short blond hair, and brown eyes. Her clothing looked dirty, but intact, and she had on her shoes. She appeared to be between twelve to thirteen years old, at the most.

She looked at up Hernan, as she begged, in spanish, “Please. Help me.”

Hernan turned to the man whom he just spoke to, as he strongly questioned, “Who the hell is she? And why is she here?”

The man stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, “If you must know, she is the surviving member of the Flores family.”

Hernan thought, 'The Flores family? I don't see any other prisoners here. So, they have just this one girl. And the cartels would not go to this much trouble for just one girl. Or, a family with nothing to take. So, her family must have some importance to attract their attention... What a minute. There is only one Flores family I know of that might get their attention.'

Hernan asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you talking about the Flores family, whom are owners of large estate outside Carcasas, Venezuela?”

The man answered, “Yes. The owner did not want to sell their land, so they were killed them.” He turned to look at the girl, as he continued, “All, except for this little beauty. They dropped her off a few minutes ago. She is on her way to be sold, elsewhere. But, I don't think anyone would mind if we have some fun her, first.” He turned to Hernan, as he went onto say, “You can join us, in our fun, if you want.”

Hernan grimly thought, 'The Flores family were good people. They didn't deserve to be murdered by this scum.' He then turned to the girl, as he concluded his thoughts, 'She, does not deserve this.'

Hernan looked over at Sans and Isandro. He simply nodded once to them. They nodded once back to Hernan, in confirmation to his unspoken order.

Hernan then took a few steps back, away from the crowd, and to the right sides of Sans and Isandro.

A few seconds later, as Hernan came to a stop, with all three FARC members immediately drawing their AKS type one automatic rifles, and they cut down the fifteen cartel members, before the other men realized what was happening.

And all the of the FARC member were very careful not to hit the girl.

As the cartel men laid dead around the girl, Hernan slung his weapon over his right shoulder, as he walked over to stand behind of the girl.

Hernan pulled out his combat knife, as he ordered, “Do not move. I am cutting your ropes.”

A few seconds later, Hernan cut off the ropes binding the girl's wrists behind her back.

The girl immediately brought her wrists around, and rubbed them

Meanwhile, Hernan sheathed his combat knife, as he walked around to face her.

Hernan then offered her a hand up, with his right hand.

The girl took Hernan's hand. After she stood up, she look up at Hernan, in his face. She stated, in a very grateful tone of voice, “Thank you very much. They didn't rape me, yet. But, I realize they were going to.”

Hernan said, “Well, you will be safe with us. So, what is your name?”

The girl answered, “Maria Flores.”

Hernan responded, “Nice to meet you, Maria. I am Hernan Pena. And you don't have to worry, I won't let anyone else hurt you, ever again.” He turned to his two friends, as he stepped out of the way, to allow Maria to see them. He turned to his two friends, as he stated, “She is coming with us.”

Sans said, “No problem.”

Isandro replied, “The more, the merrier.”

Maria looked over at Isandro and Sans, as she said, “Thank you.”

Isandro looked at the girl, as he replied, “You're welcome.” He then looked at Hernan, as he commented, “Though, I suggest we leave this country as quickly as possible.”

Hernan stated, “Forget the country. We are leaving this continent.” He looked over at a nearby jeep, as he said, “I can hot-wire that jeep. It will just take a few minutes.”

Hernan then walked over to the jeep, with Maria, Sans, and Isandro, following right behind him.

Fortunately, the hood was down on the jeep, and he found the left side driver's side door unlocked.

As he opened the door, he unslung his rifle, and placed it in the bottom of the back seat.

Hernan then leaned down, under the steering wheel, to start to hot-wire the vehicle, as he thought, 'Now, we need to get out of here. Still, I regret not being able to help the workers here. But, we need to keep this a small group. And as we leave, we do not want to alert the other patrols and cartel men.'

A few minutes later, Hernan hot-wired the jeep. With the ignition turned on, he then got into the driver's seat, while Maria sat in the front passenger seat, to Hernan's right side.

Meanwhile, Isandro was behind Hernan, while Sans was behind Maria. Both men had their AKS rifles in hand, with fresh magazines in their weapons. Isandro pointed the barrel of his weapon to his left, out the left side of the vehicle. While Sans did the same with his weapon, by pointing the barrel out the right side of the vehicle.

Hernan put the jeep in gear, and drove them down one of the dirt roads that was by the base, and away from their old lives.

(_)

Back in the present, it was night time in De La Plata Podrido. Inside Melanie's red, four door car, Melanie was driving, as she turned down onto another street, towards Hernan's home, as Hernan sat back in the front passenger seat, to Melanie's right side.

A few seconds later, Hernan attention came back to his surrounding, as he noticed Melanie had stopped the car, by the side of a street.

Melanie put her car's transmission in park. She turned to Hernan. She said, in spanish, “Well, we are here.”

He looked out the window to his side, to see that Melanie had parked her car by family house, which was across a sidewalk and his front yard.

Hernan turned to Melanie, as he responded, in spanish, “Thank you for everything.”

Melanie offered, “And if you want to talk. I am more than open to listening.”

Hernan replied, “I just might take you up on that offer.” He thought, 'Though, the only two places I could talk to you are your place of work, at the Devil's Hotel, or your girlfriend's place of business, the Rats Nest. And both places, I would risk bumping into one of the girls. And except for Roberta, and our lunch appointment. I am not ready to deal with the rest of them yet, for an extended amount of time.'

'Also, I could not come to Bao's home to talk to you, because I still don't know her that well. And it would be imposing on the both you. And I don't want to risk your clearly good relationship with her.'

Hernan said, “Have a good night.”

Melanie responded, “You to, Hernan. And good luck with everything.”

Hernan replied, “Thank you.”

Hernan then got out of the car, and he shut the door behind him. As he walked to his house, on his concrete walkway, that led from the sidewalk to his front porch, behind him, Melanie drove her car down the street.

As Hernan walked up to the front door to his home, he noticed that the front porch light has been left on for him. He thought, 'That was nice of Maria and the children.'

'Still, after we rescued Maria, we eventually made it here. Sans and Isandro parted ways with Maria and I. Though, we do keep in touch regularly. And I soon started my autoshop business, while I helped raise Maria. And over time our relationship turned into something else. Though, we did nothing romantic until her twentieth birthday. When she felt she was ready. And I feel that it was worth the wait for both of us.'

When Hernan reached his front door, he pulled out his keys, and he unlocked the door. He then pulled his key from the lock, and pocketed his keys.

After Hernan entered home, he gently shut the door, so as to not disturb his possibly sleeping children. He locked both locks on door, and flipped the inside switch to turn off the outside porch light behind him.

As Hernan walked into his family living room, he noticed there was only one lamp light turned on. He looked around the room, to see that the TV was off, and Maria was sitting one of the cushioned reclining chairs in the room, reading a book. Maria's chair was in the upright position.

A second later, Maria looked up and she saw that her husband had returned home. She set the book she was reading on a nightstand by her chair. She then got up from her chair.

She walked towards her husband, until she was only a two feet away from him.

She looked into his face, as she said, in spanish, in a concerned, yet calm tone of voice, “I fed the kids, and they are asleep... Hernan, what happened back there?”

Hernan chose his words very carefully, as he looked down into his wife's gentle, brown eyes. He calmly requested, in spanish, “I need some time to think about how I am going to tell you all this. It is important. But, I am not sure how to state what it going, and confer the importance of the matters at hand. Though, there is not rush in doing so. But, I still need to figure out how to tell you.”

Maria replied, “I can wait, dear. And do not worry. We will get through this.”

Hernan took a step forward, as he gently hugged his wife. He kindly complimented, “Thank you, Maria. You are you the best wife, and mother, anyone could have.”

Maria returned Hernan's hug, as she responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “And you are a wonderful husband, and father, Hernan. Don't ever forget that.”

Hernan quietly said, “I wonder. Can we just stay like this for a little while?”

Maria replied, “Whatever you want, Hernan.”

The two spouses then enjoyed each others embrace for several minutes, before they let go of each other, with the both of them then retiring to their bedroom, for the night, to get some sleep.

(_)

Later that night, after everyone at the Rats Nest bar had been returned to either their home, or to the hotel suites, Revy, being Revy, had wanted some more rum. Which, she was out of in the suite she shared with Rock. Given that everyone had a general rule to not teleport and drink, let alone drink and drive, she had to walk to the bottle shop that was a block down the street, from the Devil's Hotel.

So, as all her friends, and family, including her long time lover, Rock, headed to their suites, to get some sleep, she headed outside. But, not before Rock said she would check on their adult children, in their suites, to make sure they made back to the hotel, safe and sound.

Also, Janet mentioned something about telling Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, of the night's events. Considering, they had been babysitting some of the much young toddlers and babies of their group's children, in the Devil's Hotel, the trio of lovers would not be hard to find.

As Revy exited back out of the hotel lobby entrance, she still had on her cutlasses, with her pistols reloaded. Revy was not that worried about going out so late at night. Her enhanced senses, including her nightvision, allowed her to see better in the dark than those that would be foolish enough to try to harm her.

Those people she did encounter, in getting to the bottle shop, inside the bottle shop, and back from the bottle shop, gave her no problems. Revy calmly bought a large bottle of quality rum, at the store's price, with some pesos she had. After she received change and a receipt, she headed back for the Devil's Hotel, with her bottle of rum in hand.

Fifteen minutes later, as Revy entered the lobby of the hotel, she saw that the room was nearly empty, except for the two clerks at the check in desk. She was holding the large bottle of rum she had bought, in her right hand, while she let her arms hang down by the sides of her waist.

While Revy continued walking through the lobby, she took a right, as she began walking towards the front elevator bay, that would lead to the suite she shared with Rock, several stories up the building.

As Revy started to enter the elevator bay, her back was turned, and she did not see was someone walked up from the hallway, between the lobby and the elevator bay, and towards her, from behind.

While Revy continued walking, she saw that the elevator bay was empty. She thought, 'Everyone is probably asleep by now. Including, Rock. And given what happened tonight. I don't blame them. Though, that is not a problem. I will just sit in one of the chairs, on our balcony, overlooking the sea, as I sip from a glass I have in our suite, with this bottle of rum placed on the balcony table. I will be quiet, and I should not disturb her.'

Then, the soreness from her body reminded her of the night's events, as she continued her thoughts, ' Damn. I am still sore from that pounding I got, from Hernan. But, I have had worse. And while I may never admit it to anyone, I think I got off lightly, after what happened.'

'One thing is for sure, Hernan is as dangerous as Roberta, before she got her upgrades.'

'I am just glad Melanie and Maria... I think that is what her name is. Were able to defuse the situation. And I think Hernan was the most shocked of all of us, about learning whose counterpart he was... And I have to admit, for a guy, he has a nice bode. Not that I am ever going to make a pass at him. I am very happy with Rock. And I know she feels the same way about me.'

'Besides. There is dating crazy. There is dating dangerous. And dating both crazy and dangerous. I am both. But, I don't get in relationships with both. Though, Rock has her moments. And I would hate to ruin what we have with each other.'

As Revy came to a stop, she then turned to her right, to the elevator panel on her right side. She used her left index finger to push in the up arrow button on the panel in front of her, between two of the elevator doors. With the two other elevator doors, set behind her.

While Revy waited for one of the elevators to come down to the ground floor, and open up for her, she thought, 'Now, to head upstairs, get a drink, and then get some sleep.'

Revy then heard a female voice, that she did not recognize, to her right, say, in a casual tone of voice, in well spoken english, “Hello there, Revy.”

Revy immediately turned to see a woman standing about twenty feet from her. The first thing Revy noticed about the woman was that she was unarmed.

Revy thought, 'At least, she clearly not here to fight.'

Revy then took a more closer look at the woman. Revy saw that the woman had tan skin, and long blond hair that went down to her shoulder blades. The woman appeared to be middle-aged, and physically heavy set. The woman wore black a pantsuit. And the demeanor of her appearance gave Revy that feeling that the woman was heading to a business meeting.

The women requested, “Mind if I speak with you?”

Revy replied, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, in english, “I am in a hurry, lady. So, make it quick. And fair warning. I am tired, I am sore, I am drunk, and I want to get a little more drunk, before I head to bed.” She then held up her bottle of rum, with her right hand. A second later, she lowered her bottle back down to her right side.

The woman pointed out, “Well, first honey, you are not drunk. You are walking to straight to be drunk. But, you look like you made a good go of it.”

Revy said, in a tired tone of voice, “It has been a long night for me. And I don't want to get into it. But, who are you?”

The woman stated, “Well Revy. Though, I am not really your enemy. You could say that I am with what you would call the opposition.”

Revy immediately looked at the woman, with a stern expressed, as she used her left hand to reach for her holstered pistol, under her right armpit. But, she left the pistol in her holster, as she inquired, in a harsh tone of voice, “And why should I not just use my cutlasses to kill you, right now?”

The woman said, in a calm tone of voice, “Because, I am being completely honest with you. I did not come here to fight. And I am her to make you an offer.”

Revy flatly asked, “What is your offer? And why would they since you to talk to me?” She mentally added, 'Whomever they are.'

The woman stated, “The reason I was picked was that I have experience in talking to less... Savory people... While getting what I want from them. Also, a few years ago, I learned that I have a talent for learning languages. And the offer is that we would like your help. Nothing too serious. And we are not asking you to betray your family and friends. The people we are after you likely have never even met before.”

Revy questioned, “And what do I get out of it?”

The woman smirked, “Well kiddo, you get the name and address of the bastard cop that raped you as a kid. We will even provide the proof, and the date, after he retired from police work. When he told everyone he was moving away from New York City. By then, there will be no one with him. So, you can deal with him, and make him disappear, without anyone coming to look for him. The perfect murder situation. We have all the information you would want... This is a chance for you to even the score, in exchange for a fair trade with us.”

Revy's eyes when wide as she thought, 'Could this be real?... Could I get that bastard back for what he did to me all those years ago?... But, what would be the real cost?...' Her eyes narrowed, as she continued her thoughts, 'Still, I might as well try my way, first...'

Revy questioned, “And why don't I just make you tell me?”

The woman responded, “Because, I have faced far worse than you, kiddo. And violence is unnecessary, in this situation. Besides, we came to you with this offer.”

Revy dropped her empty left hand back to her side, as she replied, in a defeated tone of voice, “Alright.” She mentally added, 'She has a point there.'

The woman did not show any response to Revy letting go of her pistol.

There was silence between the two of them for the next few seconds. The women then said, “We know this is a big decision. So, we will give you some time to think about it. Also, be aware there are not threats in this deal. If you same, no. We go our separate ways. And we likely will never meet, again.

Revy asked, “And what will happen to you, if you fail to get me to say, yes?”

The woman answered, “Nothing. Except I won't get pay for this job. I work for very reasonable management. It is why I stick around. Though, whatever you decide to do, we do ask you keep our offer to yourself, or the deal is off.”

Revy stated, “Okay. I will think about it.”

The woman replied, “Good.” She then used her right hand to reach into her front right pants pocket, and a moment later, she instantly disappeared.

Just then, one of the elevator doors, to Revy's left side, opened up. Revy thought, 'She probably has a reality device in her pocket. Also, I hate it when shit gets dumped on me before I head to sleep... Still, it might be worth helping these people. But, I don't know a damn thing about them. Nor, what they want from me? Nor, if they are honest? And if I agreed to help them, would it hurt my relationship with my family and friends?...'

'As that women said. I really need to think about this. And she is right. And I will have to do so, alone... Story of my life... Well, not really...'

Revy looked down at the bottle of rum, as she continued thinking, 'But, for right now, I really do need a few swallows of this rum, to help me relax, and get me in the mood to get some sleep.'

Revy looked up, as she turned to her left. She then entered the open elevator doors.

A few seconds later, after the elevator door closed, Revy pressed the interior panel button, to take her to the floor where her suite was. And she headed up to the suite that she shared with Rock, to have a few drinks on the balcony, and then get some sleep in the same, large bed she shared with Rock.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 04: “One Night In Caracas, Venezuela.” (Or, “The Key To Laguna Negra.”)

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Unknown. Location, Unknown. Somewhere in South America. Date, sometime in October, Nineteen Ninety-One. Time, the early morning, around eighty thirty AM, local time.

It was a warm, sunny morning, as Pedro and Matthew found themselves in other place and time. With Pedro holding his reality device, in his hands.

The two men took a look around to see they were standing on the winding street, that twisted and turned, along with them being surrounded by buildings, that varied greatly in painted colors. Though, most of the buildings either some shade of brown, or some shade of white. Each building was a couple of stories high. Power and other lines were strung from building to building, in bundles that could best get described as gordian knots.

There was no uniformity to the streets, buildings, nor electrical lines around the buildings, and over the streets.

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he asked, in english, “I know this is South America. You said that is where we were heading to. But, where on the continent are we?”

Pedro pocketed his reality device, as he turned to Matthew. He stated, in english, “We are suppose to be in Caracas, Venezuela. The City of Eternal Spring. But, I guess my aim was a little off and we are in the slums, surrounding the city.”

Matthew said, with concern in his tone of voice, “Just don't let it become a habit for you. And are we in danger in these slums?”

Pedro answered, “No more than back on my island. Just stick with me and your fine.”

Matthew replied, “Okay. So, what is the date?

Pedro stated, “The date is sometime in the early nineteen nineties, before the communists parties that later formed in few years, and took control of the nation. At this point, this is not a bad time to visit this city. Still, given it is warm year around, here. It can be hard to tell what season it is, right now.”

Matthew inquired, “And how long will it take us to get to Caracas proper.”

Pedro answered, “About an hour. Most of the slums are on hillsides. And from what I see on the street, we are on flat ground. So, we are not that deep into the slums.”

Matthew responded, “Okay. And just to let you know. I am getting a little tired. I am good for another three or four hours.”

Pedro said, “When we get to the city, I will find a decent hotel for us to get some rest in.”

Matthew questioned, “That works for me. So, which way do we go?”

Pedro look up, between the buildings. And while he was not able to see the sun itself, he was able to see in which direction the brightness of the sun was in the sky, and the way the shadows cast on the buildings.

Pedro looked back towards Matthew, as he stated, “Well, I am guessing that it is morning. Because that is the time I wanted us to come here. From the angle of the sun, right now. And that I can see some of the slums on the hills, through a break in the buildings behind us, down the street. We should go this way.”

Pedro turned, and started walking, in a direction, down the street. Matthew followed right behind him.

For the next ten minutes, they walked down the twisted street. The saw only a few people as they walked. All of whom left the two of them alone.

A few minutes later, they came to a clearing. They came to a stop, about ten feet into the clearing, when they saw someone in the distance.

The person was a tanned skin girl wearing casual shirt, pants, and shoes. While they could not see the girl's face. They could see the girl had tanned skin, and loose, long green hair that whipped around her, as she danced and did flips.

Matthew walked up to stand beside Pedro, to Pedro's right.

Matthew quietly suggested, “Let's got as they girl. To confirm where we are. And what the exact date is.”

Pedro softly replied, “Good idea. But, we need to do so, carefully. We will keep our distance, and stop three meters from her. Also, let me do the talking.”

Matthew thought, 'Considering I am still not that good at spanish, I really don't have a choice.' He said, “Okay.”

The two men then started walking towards the girl.

As they got closer, they saw that, in age, the girl was not even a teenager. At most she was ten or eleven. Maybe twelve, at the most.

When they both came within ten feet of the girl, they both halted their approach.

A few seconds later, the girl noticed the two men. She immediately stopped doing some cartwheels, with her landed on her feet, as she looked over at Pedro and Matthew.

As they got a look at the girl's face, both men saw the girl also had green eyes.

Pedro saw she was about to turn, and likely run away from them. He thought, 'I need to get her to stay, for a moment.'

Pedro stated said, in spanish, “Hello. We are just two travelers looking for directions. We do not mean you harm.”

The girl relaxed her demeanor, as she stated, in spanish, with slight sarcasm in her tone of voice, “Do I look like a travel agent agent, to you?”

Pedro said, “All we need are two questions answered.”

The girl flatly inquired, “Fine. What are they?”

Pedro asked, “We are in the slums of Caracas, Venezuela?”

The girl replied, “Yes.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he stated, in english, “We are where I thought we are.”

Matthew looked at Pedro, as he said, “Good. Now, ask her what the date is.”

Pedro replied, “Good idea.”

Both men looked at back at the girl, as Pedro inquired, in spanish, “What is the date, today?”

The girl answered, in spanish, “It is Saturday, October, nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one.”

Pedro replied, in spanish, “Thank you.” He thought, 'That is exactly seven months from the date we last left. I wonder the significance of nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one would be.... Out course. Nine, nine, nine, nine. Three nines. And also three ones. Still, I need to let Matthew know what date it is.'

Pedro then turn Matthew, as he said, in english, “It is October, nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one. A Saturday.”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he thought, 'So, we are seven months in the future, from the last date we were at. Though, we don't have a clear what reality we are in.' He turned to look at the girl, then back to Pedro. He continued his thoughts, 'Though, that is a conversation for later. Outside of the ears of others.'

Matthew commented, “Okay. So, we are seven months ahead of where we were. We know now when, where, and what place.”

Pedro said, “Exactly. And this is not a bad time to be in the city. The next coup is not for several months.”

Matthew asked, “What do you mean, another coup?”

Pedro answered, “During this time, coup occasionally happen in this part of the world. And well, the coup could have already happened, given that events here seen to happen sooner than the same events what I am from.”

Matthew said, “Yea. I have found that nothing is truly parallel in this crazy traveling. There are always a skew of dates and events.”

Pedro agreed, “That is entirely possible. Either way, as long as we are careful, we will be fine.”

Matthew replied, “That is nice to know.”

Meanwhile, the girl in front of them, silently listened to the two men, as she thought, 'While I am still learning english, I am not sure what these two are talking about. They mention dates, but in ways I am not sure. I think it best it I just humor them, until I can leave. And if they try anything, they are going to be in for a nasty surprise.'

Pedro then took a closer look at the girl's face, as he thought, “Could she be? That would mean that the last jump was only time travel.' He asked, in spanish, “Excuse me girl.
But, what is your name?”

The girl answered, “Fabiola.” She mentally added, 'I am not giving these men my family name.'

Matthew overheard the girl, as he turned to look at her. With her name, he looked at her, as he immediately recognized her. He thought, 'I don't need a translator to figure out what Pedro just asked. This is the Fabiola we know, when she was young girl. Though, we dare not mention we recognize her. Also, I guess we did not even leave the Black Lagoon anime reality. We just traveled a little further forward in time of this reality.'

Pedro thought, 'Yep. It is her. She is likely practicing, and copying, the capoeira moves that she saw someone else do in the slums performs. At least, that is how she stated she learned her capoerira moves, in Roberta's Blood Trail. And from what little we just saw, she already getting pretty good with those moved.'

'Also, this means we never left the Black Lagoon reality. And this Fabiola will grow up to be the women from this reality, whom we personally know. As such, this might be a good chance to help get us in her good graces.'

Pedro said, in spanish, “Thank you, Fabiola. And here is something for you help.”

Pedro used his right hand to reach into a pocket, and pulled out a rolled of U.S. twenty dollar bills. He looked down, as he used his left hand to pulled out five bills.

As he pocket the rest of the roll of twenty dollar bills, he thought, 'I would give Fabiola a gold coins. But, these are the slums. And gold would attract the wrong attention towards her. Instead, I will give her some cash, which I am sure she will be able to use with ease.'

Pedro held out his left hand, as he offered, “Here.”

Fabiola saw the cash, and she quickly took a few steps closer to Pedro and Matthew. She then all but snatched the money from Pedro's left hand. Next, she quickly took several steps back. She came to a stop, at where she had been standing.

Fabiola looked down at the money her in hands. She then looked back up at Pedro, while she pocketed the cash. She said, “Thank you.” She thought, 'A hundred dollars. My family will be so happy to see this money. And it was so easy to get. Still, I need to be wary of strangers. Though, these two clearly don't want to hurt me. They just want answers to their questions. Even though they could have ask anyone for those answers... I guess it was just my lucky day.'

Just then, towards Fabiola' left side, in the distance, Pedro, Matthew, and Fabiola, heard a male voice say, “Fabiola.”

All three of them turned to see an older boy, whom was about thirty feet away from them. The boy had tanned skin and the same shade of short green hair that Fabiola had. Those the boy's green hair was cut short, to his neckline. Also, the boy appear to be in his late teens.

The boy said, in spanish, “Fabiola, mom wants to see you.”

Fabiola answered, “Coming, Rico.”

Fabiola turned to the two men, as she said one of the few terms she knew in english, “Thank you.”

Fabiola turned back towards her older brother, as she ran to join her brother.

As the two siblings walked away, Matthew turned to Pedro, as he inquired, in english, “So, how did we end up here, at this time and place? While still in the Black Lagoon reality?”

Pedro looked at Matthew, as he admitted, in english, “Because I wasn't thinking very clearly when I used the device. I thought of Caracas, the date, and time of day, I wanted to go to. But, I only vaguely thought of being in a modern times. And I did not even think of the reality, so we just ended up time traveling a few months forward in the future of this reality we are in. I guess reality travel is harder than it looks. Or, read.”

Matthew commented, “No harm. No fowl. Just be more mindful, the next time we jump.”

Pedro replied, “I will.”

Matthew turned to look the way Fabiola and the older boy, when. With the two children already disappearing into the winding streets of the slums. He turned back to Pedro, as he commented, “By the way, that boy, that Fabiola went off with. She called him, Rico. And he does look like Rico from the series.”

Pedro raised his right eyebrow in interest, as he agreed, “Yes. He did.”

Matthew said, “So, Fabiola and Rico are sister and brother.”

Pedro agreed, “It makes sense. The hair color and spanish origins should have tipped us off. I mean, how many green haired people do you know with that skin complexion? Also, Fabiola did say she had siblings. Tex-Mex is clearly a fan of Venezuela. And the drug angle, with the Church of Violence, or Ripoff Church, works as well.”

Matthew asked, “What drug angle?”

Pedro stated, “The Ripoff Church. Rico could have acted as their liaison for Yolanda and Eda's suppliers in South America. Specifically, here in Venezuela, Columbia, and the surrounding nations.”

Matthew said, “I can go along with that.”

Pedro commented, “It gets better. Now, that I think of it. It is possible Tex-Mex originally planned to have the Black Lagoon series to be based in the Caribbean Sea, which centuries ago was notorious for piracy. Tex-Mex may have even grow up reading tales of piracy on the high seas of the Caribbean, and he wanted to tell a more modern tale of such piracy. But, the U.S. navy and coast guard, along with organizations from other nations, have clamped down on piracy there. So, Tex-Mex had to move the series location to Thailand, where modern piracy still happens in the area.”

“Working from that theory, it is likely the main city for the original Black Lagoon series was either Caracas Venezuela, or the capital of the Dominican Republic, Santo Domingo. I am heavily leaning towards Santo Domingo being the location originally intended for the series because the Columbia mafia would have to much of an advantage in Caracas.”

“I will get back to that in a minute.”

“The key to realizing this is not just the Black Lagoon characters that are from Caracas, but also, the three, of the four, members of the main cast of Black Lagoon. Dutch, Benny, and Revy. Of those three, we know for a fact that Revy and Benny are from the east coast of the U.S. Revy was from New York City. And Benny is reported to be from Orlando Florida. Now, if you take a ruler on a map from the Western Hemisphere, from Orlando Florida, U.S., to Caracas Venezuela, you hit the Dominican Republic between the two.”

“And there is more.”

“Revy is from New York City. Benny is from Florida. Now, Dutch is reported to have a military background of some sort, and he his not only the captain, he is also the main pilot and mechanic for the PT Boat, Lagoon.”

“On the east coast, between New York City, and Florida, there is one location that could fit Dutch's original origin's story, and where he got the PT Boat from, and how he would know how to pilot and work on the boat. That is Charleston, South Carolina.”

“The city of Charleston has a high population of black Americans living in poverty, which could lend to Dutch being slightly greedy. But, not too much. It is home to the military academy, the Citadel, which lends to Dutch's discipline, military skills, and leadership abilities. And the PT Boat could have come from the nearby Patriots Point Naval & Maritime Museum in Charleston, South Carolina. Also, Dutch may have been named after the Flying Dutchman.”

“And here is the really interesting part. From character and plot standpoints, both Rock and Benny are paradoxes. Rock gets most of the focus and dialogue, while Benny is ignored. But, on the boat, Benny performs a vital service as the electronics and communications expert. While Rock's job, at best, is as the clerk and deckhand on the boat. Though elsewhere, Rock is a skilled planner, and negotiator.”

“Benny and Rock's character backgrounds have too many similarities to ignore. Both are brilliant. Both have educated backgrounds. Both are non-fighting characters. Both have cleaner personalities than the rest of the cast put together, whom live in Roanapur.”

“When the Lagoon crew are shown driving in a car, it is either Benny or Rock that driving said car. The only difference between the two, besides their nationalities, and that Benny accepts the corruption of Roanapur, while Rock does not. This is even lampshaded in episode seventeen, when Benny stated both he and Rock were exceptions to the corruption of Roanapur rubbing off on them. And Dutch pointed out to Benny, how he was wrong.”

“The fact that Benny even wears a hawaiian shirt, while Rock refuses too wear such a shirt could be an injoke by the creator of the Black Lagoon series about all very situation.”

“I seriously think that, originally, Benny was likely planned to be the main audience segregate, with the series focusing on him. He may have even been planned to end up being Revy's romantic interest. Or, a love triangle between him and Dutch trying to gain Revy's attention. With the original Black Lagoon series being planned to be a three person main cast.”

“Rock was likely added later, as the main character, as a Japanese audience segregate, for Tex-Mex's Japanese customer base. And because of this, Rock took most of Benny's lines, plot, and character development. I wonder if the actor for Benny in the Black Lagoon R magazine, whom was reported to be so upset all the time, was upset because he realized this?... That might be very likely.”

Matthew had been paying close attention to Pedro, as he commented, “I guess that is possible. Please, continue.”

Pedro responded, “Thank you. Now, here is how I figure the origins of the original Black Lagoon would have played out. It starts with Revy having been imprisoned for killing people, including cops in New York City. And if the fifth episode of Roberta's Blood Trail, Codename Paradise Status MIA, is any indication of Revy's past. She had very good reasons to snap, and go on her killing spree.”

“Anyway, the scene has Revy breaking out of prison, in New York state, with her going on the run from the law.”

“Revy eventually makes her way down to Charleston, South Carolina. During the night she is in that city, she bumps into second year cadet, whom is known as Dutch. Dutch's past is one, whom in spite of poverty and other hardships, he made it into the Citadel program. I say second year, because first year cadets are required to walk with their knees locked. Not sure why myself. But, Revy would never ask for help from someone walking like that. So, it has to be second year, because any older, and Dutch would likely know better than to help Revy at this junction in their lives.”

“Also, being a second year cadet knocks Dutch's age down to around twenty. With Revy around eighteen. And Benny being nineteen. With all three adults being young and foolish enough to try and become pirates.”

“And this situation becomes the classic nice guy meets bad girl set up. Where Dutch meets Revy, she gets him into trouble with the law and they both have to escape. And in their escape, they steal a PT Boat from the Patriots Point Naval & Maritime Museum. They then flee down the coast in the PT Boat.”

“At some point, Dutch reveals that he was named after the Flying Dutchman. And he states that he feels he is lost, with nowhere to go. Revy says she can sympathize.”

“Eventually, they have to stop and get fuel and supplies. How they get the money for this is likely theft of some sort.”

“Given Revy's reckless nature, she would like to do it in a place where they could have some fun.”

“And there is a city that would fit for the plot, themes, and direction, in which they are going.”

“Given the latin american themes of Black Lagoon, and that it is along the east coast of the U.S., they two would likely stop in St. Augustine, Florida”

“St. Augustine also known as college party town, with the oldest known Spanish Fort still standing in the U.S. Revy would probably love a chance to party there. And Dutch would probably like to do so, as well.”

“While, they had to the city, to party, they bump into Benny. With Benny being on the run from both the Florida mafia and the U.S. government. I even know what he found out.”

Matthew asked, “What did Benny find out?”

Pedro said, “I will get to that in a minute. I have to first explain the situation.”

“When Revy and Dutch meet Benny, they hit it off well. And they find out that Benny is on the run, as well. With Revy and Dutch inviting him to come with them, on their stolen PT Boat. Benny accepts their offer.”

“Given Benny's electronics, hacking, and communications skills. He was likely also an amateur ham radio operator before he went on the run. And for plot purposed, lets throw in some engineering and mechanical skills. Benny is hired as crew, to keep the boat and electronics running.”

“Benny was likely originally going to be the communications officer and engineer. While Dutch was captain and pilot. And Revy was just the crazy muscle and deckhand. Also, Revy is not even known as Two-hands, yet. Because she has not yet learned how to dual wield two pistols at once.”

“I will get, later.”

“The three Lagoon members make escape Florida and their way to Santo Domingo, of the Dominican Republic. When they reach that location, they find themselves in the middle of a secret cold war for the drug trade of the region, being fought by various mafias. With some of these mafias being sponsored by various governments.”

“The three of them probably end up getting mixed in with the various mob politics, when they search for someone to make them fake paper documents, that would allow them to stay in the Dominican Republic.”

“Now, there is something you need to know about the island of Hispaniola, which is where the Dominican Republic is located.”

“The Hispaniola island is divided into two nations. On the east side is the Dominican Republic, which is a decent nation, with fairly honest government and people. On the west said, Haiti, a real shithole, with some of the most corrupt government officials you will find in the multiverse.”

“The two nations, their populations, and governments, do not like each other. They are literally like day and night. Now, while the mafias leadership is probably based in Santo Domingo, their criminal operations are likely based in Port-Au-Prince, which is the capital of Haiti.”

“Santo Domingo is on the southeast coast of the island. Port-Au-Prince is on the western coast of the island.”

“To give you an idea of how corrupt and dangerous Port-Au-Prince is. I would rather walk naked and unarmed down the streets of Roanapur at night, than set a single foot onto Port-Au-Prince during the day, while heavily armed.”

Matthew commented, “That is bad.”

Pedro responded, “No. It is worse. Anyway, with no other options to get the fake documents, and some more money to live on, the three Lagoon crew members get roped into becoming smugglers, and eventually pirates. With the three of them being the only ones they can trust to keep each other alive.”

“Now, onto the other characters. Of the mafia groups mentioned and shown in Black Lagoon, the Russian and Chinese are the heavy hitters. But, others were shown, as well. Including, the Mexican and Colombian cartels. Along with the Italian and Florida mafias. There is the Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia, or Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia. FARC for short. The group Roberta was a member of. Balalaika even mentioned that Roberta and others were trained in Cuba.”

“If you dropped the Triad and the Russian mafias, and you draw lines on map between the of mafia factions shown in the Black Lagoon series, you start crisscrossing the Dominic Republic real quick.”

“Let us start with a locals in the area, Roberta. Originally, Roberta and Balalaika were probably two halves of a composite character. Now, that is a scary thought. Though, I believe in personality differences, Balalaika patience and pragmatism would win out over Roberta open violence, and personal, hands on tactics. Though, she has Roberta's kinder side... I hope...”

“Also, taking this into account, Hotel Moscow was likely a replacement organization for the originally plan group. There is even a clue in the first episode. The front business operation Hotel Moscow operated was called, the Bougainvillea Trade Company.”

“While the word Bougainvillea sounds Russian. It is not. Bougainvillea is one of the names of a beautiful, thorny flower that is found only in South American and Caribbean Islands. Including, Venezuela and The Dominican Republic.”

“Why would Tex-Mex originally name a Russian mob front after a South American flower? He likely did not. The Bougainvillea name is likely a hold over from his original plans for the Black Lagoon series.”

“As I said. There is a lot of latin american themes hidden in the Black Lagoon series. You just have to look to find them.”

“The original framework was likely that this mafia would have been lead by Roberta. Roberta would likely be dressed in a similar western outfit as her counterpart wore in the Roberta Blood Trail arc, complete with bolo tie, sleeveless white blouse, black vest, and blue pants. Also, this Roberta would likely wear an olive colored military greatcoat, in a similar style with what Balalaika sometimes wears.”

“FARC is known to operate in Ecuador, Columbia, and Venezuela. And while the equator runs through Ecuador and Columbia, with the Venezuela directly north of the equator. There are parts of Venezuela and Columbia that can get very cold. The nations have mountainous areas.”

“There are even such mountains surrounding this city, of Caracas, all around us.”

“And there are actually glaciers in this part of the world. As such, this Roberta owning and wearing a greatcoat is not that far fetched.”

“Now, Roberta and her group's origins probably start in leaving the FARC organization, like Roberta from the Black Lagoon series. They were all former badass FARC members from intelligence units that were disgusted with the fact their superiors has relegated their jobs from rebels to guard dogs to coca fields for drug cartels. They go AWOL.

“Though, instead of ending up in Venezuela, they end up in Santo Domingo. And when they get there, they are looking to make a name for themselves as a new mafia group. With their group being known as, Hotel Caracas. In addition, this Roberta had an even rougher life as a FARC rebel, with scars covering her face and body, similar to Balalaika's scars.”

“Hotel Caracas and the Colombian mafia likely hate each others guts. This hatred is likely carried over into Black Lagoon, when is episode ten, Balalaika mentions that much of the Columbia mafia after the Lovelace family and Roberta were killed off screen by Hotel Moscow. This faction of Columbia mafia was likely based in Caracas, given that is the area the Lovelace family, Fabiola, and likely Roberta, are from.”

Matthew inquired, “While we know that Fabiola is not yet in the loop. Should we be concerned about Roberta and the Lovelace family.”

Pedro stated, “Given the date, Roberta may have not even met the Lovelace family yet. And FARC preferred to stay out of the major cities, and concentrate on the jungles and wilderness. Though, either way, I doubt we will be here, long enough, to have any trouble from them, while we are here.”

Matthew requested, “Okay. Please, continue.”

Pedro said, “With pleasure. Now, the next mafia group would likely being the Mexican Mafia. It would liking have been inspired by the badass criminals known as the Zetas. The Zetas hit the scene in nineteen ninety-nine, Black Lagoon was first published in April two thousand two. So, there is a time element that works with this.”

“Then, there are the old west genre cliches of mexican fighters being that the men dual wield their pistols and the women were knifenuts, and knife throwers. I think you know where I am going with this.”

“The leader of this organization would have been a mexican version of Chang. And his name would likely be hispanic. Such as, Chavez. Still, this Chang would dual wield his pistols, and be as equally as cool as his counterpart in the Black Lagoon series. And this Chang would have dressed in a similar fashion as he does now, just with a mexican flair.”

“In all likelihood, Chang's main enforcer would likely be a composite character of Shenhua and Sawyer. This is another scary thought.”

“Both Shenhua and Sawyer worked for Chang, in different roles. But, a composite character would have proper fighting skills and origins to make such a character work.”

“The overall body being the size and shape of Shenhua, but her looks are like Sawyer's looks and scars. Though, she probably still has her voice. Her personality would be closer to Shenhua, with a girlie-girl focus on her looks. But, her origins are Sawyer's origins. With her likely being from Texas, and her having a goth motif. But, unlike the eerie, slightly cute goth, the Sawyer we know is. This Sawyer is has sexy goth look. With her theme being the mexican death worship of Santa Muerte.”

“Maybe, this Sawyer would have been known as the Senora de Santa Muerte, or Lady of Saint Death. Her weapons would have not been a chainsaw. She would have used knife weapons similar to what Shenhua did, but with mexican themes.”

“Instead of using two kukri long knives, this Sawyer would likely use two nineteen twenties style mexican fighting knives, with ten and a half inch blades. And like Shenhua's kukri knives, Sawyer's fighting knives are attached to cords that let her throw them. Allow her to use them at range. Also, instead of Shenhua's kunai throwing knives, this Sawyer would be using mexican style throwing knives.”

“I have personally faced people that used these types of fighting knives and throwing knives. I can tell you that they are deadly weapons. Some of the people I faced over the year, that used such weapons, could give Shenhua run for her money. And the only reason I do not have a rogues gallery larger than Batman is I usually kill, or have imprisoned, most of the people that take a shot at me, my boys, or the people of my city.”

Matthew commented, “That is nice to know. Now, back to the story.”

Pedro responded, “Okay. I could see there could likely have been a romantic subplot where Chang takes an interest in Revy. And this is when Revy learns to use to shoot two pistols at once, becoming Two-hands. Though, when it becomes clear to Revy that Chang is the wrong kind of guy to date, Dutch and Benny to help her escape from Chang.”

“Also, maybe during their escape from Chang's base, the new Two-hands Revy fights this version of Sawyer, with Revy winning in the battle, but not killing, nor crippling Sawyer.”

“And Revy, Dutch, and Benny, escape with such style, that this Chang is so impressed, that he lets them go, with no reprisals. And he even later hires them for the occasional job.”

Matthew stated, “That would be just like our Chang. The man lives for style. And not just clothing. But also in once's attitude and actions.”

Pedro said, “I know. Now, the third mafia group is likely a composite if the Ripoff Church and the Florida Mob. There are two points that lend to this theory. But, we will get to that in a minute.”

“And I am guessing that that Florida Mob and the mob that Groovy Guy Russell was with, as they same mob. Which I believe their mob being called the Neveral Cartel. The only reason that the Florida Mob did not go after Benny, in Roanapur, was either they did not know that Benny was there. Or, there local leader, Lobos, whom know what would happen the likely reprisals, from Revy, Chang, and Balalaika, if they went after Benny, so he kept this quiet, and from his superiors.”

“Keep in mind Lobos, was the only one of the group that knew better than to fight the Lagoon group and the Ripoff Church. It was just that he was overruled by higher ranking members in his organization. Still, he got of that situation alive, while those around him, whom did not heed his warnings, did not.”

Matthew said, “It is always wise to heed warnings.”

Pedro stated, “I fully agree. That is why I am still alive.”

Matthew guessed, “Lee's warning to you, about the maids, that you occasionally mention?”

Pedro responded, “Exactly. Among other warnings. Now, back to this composite organization. Instead of have a religious theme, the Florida mob is just a straight forward mob, with an american western theme, as seen with Russell. Likely, the Florida mob would have been based on of Orlando, offering a whole assortment cast members for that organization.”

“The Florida mob would have been run by Yolanda, with her not being much different than her Black Lagoon version. The only difference is instead of being in a nun's uniform, she is in a dress suit, and maybe long coat. Or maybe something else. I could never figure out the Yolanda we personally know. But, this I am sure this Yolanda's personality and her eyepatch over her right eye are still there.”

“Now, the first point to the theory that the Florida mob and the Ripoff Church had a connection is Eda. As seen in the Boys and Girls omake...”

Pedro groaned, as he continued, “Dear lord, everyone we know seems come back to that omake, a lot... With a new piece of information each time. And this time, the information is found in the way Eda looked as a guy. As a guy, Eda almost looks exactly how Groovy Guy Russell looked like. In the Black Lagoon series, Eda killed her own gender counterpart, Russell... That is just a new level of twistedness.”

Matthew agreed, “No kidding.”

Pedro said, “Anyway, the Eda of the Florida mafia would likely be the Yolanda’s chief enforcer. And her dress would be a cowgirl outfit, and the outfit would be a feminine version of Russell's clothing.”

Matthew inquired, “But, what about the Florida Mob attacking the Ripoff Church in the Black Lagoon series? With those of the church returning fire?”

Pedro answered, “Simple. The locals of the Florida Mob, in Roanapur, were not in the loop, as to what was really going on. Even Russell and his boss Elvis, did not know. With Eda and Yolanda having to keep up appearances, because Revy and Rico were there.”

“This leads to my second theory on this. The second point to this theory has to do with Benny. In the Black Lagoon series, it is never stated what Benny learned from his hacking skills. Only that is greatly upset both the mob in Florida and the U.S. government.”

“It is possible that part of the Greenback Jane arc Black Lagoon was originally intended to be Benny's backstory. Giving details of the Florida mafia coming to look for him for what he found out about them, before he left Florida. Still, it is nice that Benny got a girlfriend out of that arc. He needed a break.”

Matthew said, “Yea. And I am glad they are still together.”

Pedro said, “So am I. But, back on topic. It is likely, the original set up would have been Benny got into trouble in Florida, for hacking computers, where he learned the Florida mafia was actually a front for the U.S. government. Similar to how in the Black Lagoon series, at least part of the Ripoff Church was a front of the U.S. government.”

“And like the Black Lagoon Benny, this Benny would know this, and he would have told Dutch and Revy. It would have also created a nice storyline for Benny, by getting him out of trouble with the Florida mafia, by the Lagoon crew doing a job for them. All the while, setting up a confrontation between Eda and Revy. Likely after Revy became known as Two-hands.”

“With Eda wanting to test her skills from the new Two-hands. Though, this battle could have ended in a draw, with neither seriously hurt.”

“But, during the battle Yolanda realizes what an asset Revy, Dutch, and Benny, would be. With Dutch and Benny cutting a deal with Yolanda, while Revy and Eda fight. With Yolanda offering Dutch, Benny, and Revy, a job, to get Benny out of trouble with Yolanda's origination.”

With the battle ending with a draw, between Eda and Revy, due to everyone else convincing them to stop fighting. But, the two women agree that their rivalry is not over.”

“And I am sure they Yolanda would have the pull, and honor, to keep her word about helping Benny.”

“Maybe this would be their first pirating job, that leads them to become pirates. It would fit the situation.”

“Now, the side characters. Let us start with Boris. Similar past as Boris in the Black Lagoon series. He is a Russian veteran of the Afghanistan war. Only, there is no Balalaika. He survives the war, retires with honor, and eventually moves to the Santo Domingo. Where he becomes the bartender and owner of the bar, the Yellowflag. Thus, he replaced Bao in this mix. And Bao would likely not fit in this version, because he was South Vietnam solider, and war refugee, whom was fleeing the fall of South Vietnam, and he made his way to Thailand.”

“Since we are switching things around, Garcia, whom is twelve, when he hits the scene. He would likely have a sad past. In this case, Garcia's father was killed, his property taken, with Garcia kidnapped, and he on his way to be sold into slavery by the Columbia mob. With the this Lagoon crew transporting him, just like the other Lagoon crew did for the Garcia in the Black Lagoon series.”

“Unfortunately, the maid that is coming to Garcia's rescue is not Roberta, but Fabiola. Whom is not much older than Garcia. And whom only knows capoeira dance fighting style, with no weapons training. With her becoming a maid, for the Lovelace household, as a charity case from Diego Lovelace. And Fabiola escaped the attack on the Lovelace household, and she used some favors she had, to tracked Garcia to where the Lagoon crew have him, with them heading to Santo Domingo.”

“But, Fabiola would have an ace. She knows that her former employer, the deceased Diego Lovelace, Garcia's father, was best friends with the father of Roberta, AKA Rosarita Cisneros, the leader of Hotel Caracas. And Roberta hates the Columbia cartels.”

“The Lagoon crew soon finds themselves caught in the crossfire of the Columbia mob and Hotel Caracas, with them barely coming out of it alive and unharmed.”

“This storyline ends with showing the kinder side of Roberta. Roberta takes Garcia and Fabiola into her care. To raise, teach, and take care of them. Roberta starts training Fabiola in firearms and better hand to hand tactics, while she has Garcia learn to defend himself, as well. With both Garcia and Fabiola going to private schools, while living at whatever large estate, or building, that the members of Hotel Caracas, including Roberta, live in.”

“Also, given what we just learned, it would likely be revealed that Fabiola has an older brother she has not seen in years. This would be revealed to be Rico, whom works for the Florida mafia, which when they find each other, they tragically realize they are on opposite sides of a mob war. But, both are fortunately still healthy and alive.”

“Also, some of the other side characters offer similar clues to their original possible origins. For example, Janet Bhai. While, Bhai, is Hindi for brother. With the name, Bhai originating from India. The name, Janet, originates from Haiti. The nation that shares the same island as the Dominican Republic.”

“Janet could have originally been meant to be a Haitian counterfeiter that fled from the Florida Mob in Santo Domingo, just like what the Black Lagoon Janet did in Roanapur.”

“Also, not to be insulting, but they could have kept her same basic look, with minor changes, and they could have still passed her off as Haitian.”

“Anyway, Janet could have run into the Black Lagoon crew, instead of the Ripoff Church. And she could have even been set up at a possible love triangle between her and Revy, for Benny's affection.”

“In the later manga chapters of Black Lagoon, is shows that Revy is jealous and possessive of those she romantically cares about. And given what we know from their counterparts, personally, I can safely say the manga is dead on when it comes to Revy's possessive nature, concerning her lover, Rock.”

“Then, there are those wacky nazis, and that sunken U-boat. They are completely out of place in the orient.”

“Though, there is that sunken U-boat that was found off the coast of Java, Indonesia, by some researchers. So, I guess that plot was not completely out of place.”

“But, to this day, there are politically connected nazi groups in South America. Also, I know for a fact, from Lee, that there are plenty of sunken U-boats off the southeastern coast of the United States. So, that entire storyline could have more believable, for lack of a better word, in being moved to place off the coast of the United States.”

“I learned this, a while back, when Lee and I got into a discussion on the subject. He... Err now she, had family on the U.S. coast where some of U-boats were sunk. She had some interesting stories. One such story was that among the bubbles floating up to the surface of a sunken U-boat, the coast guard found used theater ticket stubs from a local theater, in the city, on the nearby coast.”

“It seems that night before the U-boat was sunk, some of the Germans has snuck into the nearby town, went to watch a movie, then left, to return to their U-boat, only to be killed the following day by their submarine being sunk... It is a real crazy world, where I am from.”

Matthew replied, “I guess so.”

Pedro stated, “Now, onto the final, and most important part of the connections I have made with these theories. The title itself, Black Lagoon. The title might have originally been Red Lagoon, and thus named after a red colored lagoon in Canaima National Park in Venezuela.”

“But, I do not think this is the case. I think Black Lagoon was the original, intended title. And while I think the Black Lagoon was originally going to be based around Santo Domingo of the Dominican Republic, the final piece of the evidence of Black Lagoon being set in the Caribbean is found in the Venezuela. In the Sierra Nevada National Park of Venezuela there is a place known as the Laguna de Mucubaji. It is a glacial lake. It is also known as Laguna Negra. Which translates in english to?...”

Matthew, whom as been paying close attention, took a calculated guess, as he asked, “Black Lagoon?”

Pedro replied, “Yes. Black Lagoon. That is also likely where the PT Boat, the Lagoon, original got its name from. At the beginning of both the first episode of the anime, and the first chapter of the manga, Dutch refers to his ship as, Black Lagoon. Though, this could have just been a case of a title drop, by the creators of the series. Because, right after, all the cast, including Dutch, just refer to the PT Boat as, Lagoon.”

Matthew had been paying completely attention to Pedro's long winded explanation. And Matthew was impressed, as he complimented, “That is a brilliant deduction. Congratulations. You just proven yourself a bigger fan of the Black Lagoon series than, Lee.”

Pedro happily replied, “Thanks.”

Matthew commented, “You are real savvy badass.”

Pedro grinned, as he responded, “And I know it. I have to be both savvy and a badass, to do my job. After all, I am the police chief of a corrupt city. Or, I use to be. I had to figure most of this out with the only help coming from my own men. My mainland superiors don't give shit about us, nor our city.”

Matthew stated, in a sympathizing tone of voice, “I know the feeling. I will sometime tell you about Mars Dome and Earth Alliance politics. It can get pretty ugly. Even during the time I left.”

Pedro said, “From what I know of your reality. I am sure that is the case.”

Matthew commented, “Now, if you can get this far into understanding of that series and its characters, then we can out think them, figure out a plan to lose our pursuers, and get away.”

Pedro replied, “My thoughts exactly.”

Matthew looked around, as he suggested, “Well, let us get into the city itself before we attract the attention from the wrong type of people here.” He turned back to look at Pedro.

Pedro looked around. He then turned back to look at Matthew, as he stated, “I agree. Now, let us leave these slums, and look for a decent hotel to rest in.”

Matthew said, “Lead the way.”

Pedro replied, “With pleasure.”

Pedro still had his bearings, on where they were, in relation to where they wished to go. He turned, and he started walking in the direction that lead them into the city of Caracas, with Matthew following right behind him.

(_)

At that moment, elsewhere, in a large home, in the city of Caracas, in the third story, inside master bedroom, sunlight streamed in from a nearby draped window, and onto a man and woman were nude, as they were having sex, while laying over the sheets, in their large bed.

The man was hispanic, in his late thirties He was in good physical shape. He had short black hair, gray eyes, and tanned skin.

The woman was fair skinned, and she was in her twenties. And while she was slender, she had a very physically well toned body. She had blue eyes and long blond hair. She let her blond hair be loose, as it ran down her back, and nearly to her waistline.

The man was laying on his back, as the woman was sitting up, on top of his waist, as she rode him like a horse, cowgirl style.

But, as she noticed that he had stop doing anything, she stopped, as well, to find out what was the matter.

The woman looked down at the man's face, as she asked the man, in spanish, “So, what is the problem, Severo? You are usual more active than this. Is something on your mind?”

Severo looked up at the beautiful woman's face, as he said, “Just thinking, Alice. It is about my job in the cartel.”

Alice inquired, “Yes. And what do your superiors in the Manisarera Cartel want you to do this time?”

Severo answered, “Well, because I am the lieutenant for this area of Venezuela, they want me to meet with two potential buyers. Along with them requesting that I tie up a loose end for them.”

Alice cracked a grin, as she requested, with a bit of curiosity in her tone of voice, “Do tell?”

Severo said, “Certainly. Last night, I got a phone call from my superiors. And they dumped three jobs on me, at once today. Both groups looking to be a buyers, and they contacted us, around the same time.”

“On group is part of a russian mafia. The other buyers are a chinese mafia group. One of our contacts in the orient arranged the meeting with the second group. From what I understand, our contact stated the chinese are on the level. Which is fine. But, I don't know how to handle the russians. They get pissed off over the littlest of details.”

“And I know that these meetings are a test by my superiors. If I screw up either of these meetings, I will either never be seen again, or my corpse will be found with a Colombian necktie.”

“And to make matters worse, there have been reports of a very dangerous woman that left her guard post at one of the coca fields, in Colombia, without permission. Second hand reports state that she has been seen heading for this city. And from what I can gather, she could be in this city as early as today.”

"The good news is that she stands out a bit, due to her purple hair. So, she should not be that hard to find. And my superiors want her caught, and killed, to make an example out of her.”

“The problem is, I am not sure how to deal with all of this.”

Severo saw Alice's grin turned absolutely wicked, as she stated, “Oh Severo, all these problems are very easy to handle. Both the chinese and russians are easy to understand. Once you know how to deal with them. When you meet the chinese, just be polite. The chinese are all about structure, stability, and civility. But, when they are violent, they are quick and brutal. If you are polite and easy going, you should do fine.”

“Though, on the other hand, meeting with the russians can be tricky. But, they are not hard to understand. If they are rude to you, just let it slide. It means you are fine. It is when russians start being polite to you, or when they are angry, that you need to worry.”

“And as you handle these meetings, you can have your second in command, Velasco, and some of your men, go find the bitch that ran off, and make an example out of her.”

“And if you can pull all three of the missions off in one day, without a hitch. You will not only please your superiors, but you will be on track to becoming your own boss, your own capo, in the cartel, within a year.”

Severo cracked a grin in response to what Alice said. He then complimented, “Those are wise words, Alice. I am glad you are my girlfriend.”

Alice replied, “No problem.” Her grin turned more lecherous, as she suggested, “Now, let's have some more fun, before you have to go to work.”

Severo smile widened a little bit, as he said, “I like that idea.”

They then went back to having sex. As they did so, Alice's outward expression and actions showed pleasure, while her inward emotions were those of disgust.

Alice thought, with annoyance, 'The things I do for my country... Still, I have to inform my superiors of these russian and chinese developments. This could be good, or bad, depending on how those meetings work out... And how I can steer this entire situation to my advantage.'

Alice looked down at Severo's pleasurable grin, as she continued her thoughts, 'After this idiot leaves for work, I will leave on the excuse of going shopping. At least this guy gives me the money I want. I actually have a nice little nest egg, hidden away, that even my superiors don't know about. So, if they ever decide to try betray me, by cutting me loose, I can fall back on my own cash reserves.'

'I will make the phone call, at my usual place, with my superiors, to inform them of what is going on... If this works out, it might get me a promotion, and away from this drug lord pig.'

'Though, at least my superiors let me have an alias that fit me. Because, I do feel like Alice in a twisted wonderland.'

Alice and Severo continued their intimate actions for another half hour, before they then stopped, got cleaned up, and dressed. With Severo soon leaving for work, where he would schedule the appointments for his two groups of clients, for later that day, by phone. First the russian, then the chinese.

Fifteen minutes after Severo left, Alice also exited the building, for her own errand.

(_)

Meanwhile, around that time, on an inland road leading into the city of Caracas, a faded, and pitted, blue, two door, pickup truck came to a stop, by the sidewalk, on the right side of a nearly empty street. The driver left the engine running, and in gear.

As soon as the truck came to a stop, a woman jumped out the bed of the truck, and onto the sidewalk. The reason the woman did not ride inside the vehicle, was that she was on guard, and she wanted to be able to escape the truck, at a moment's notice.

The woman was of average height, and fair skinned. She was in good physical shape. She had blue eyes and long purple hair, that went down to her waist line, and was tied in a ponytail, at two points. One point was between her shoulder blades, and the other point was just below nearly to her waist.

The woman wore green combat fatigues, and a green military cap on her head. The military cap had a red trim band around the bottom of the hat. She had a pistol holstered in a holster, on the right side of her belt.

As the woman stood up straight, she walked towards the driver's side of the truck, which had the window down, while she used her left hand to reach into her left pants pocket, as she kept her right hand on the grip of her holstered pistol.

When the reached the driver's side of the truck, the driver in the truck looked over to her.

The woman used her left hand to pulled out a few Venezuelan Bolívar bank note bills, from her pocket. She handed the bills up to the open window, on the left passenger side of the truck.

The driver used his right hand, to reach across the empty passenger seat, and took the bills from the woman's left hand. The women then pulled her left hand from the open window.

Neither the woman, nor the driver said anything to each other, as the driver pocketed the cash. And the man then drover away, down the street, without saying a word.

The woman then took around, she saw that she did not go unnoticed, as few of the people on the sidewalks were looking at her.

The woman ignored the people looking at her, as she turned, and started walking down the sidewalk.

The woman continued walking, as she thought, 'I need to be mindful of my attire. I am going to attract attention. I need stick to the alleyways and back streets, as I begin my search.'

'Still, the last week has not been the most pleasant week of my life. A week ago, nearly to the day, I decided to quit my job as guard dog, at some cartel coca fields, in Columbia.'

'I joined the revolution to be a rebel for justice. I did not join up to be a guard dog.'

'And with one lead for help drying up, after the next, I have had to go further, and further, east. And this is my last lead.'

'But, Diego Lovelace was not at his estate. Though, the people I spoke too, in the area around his estate, said that he left earlier this morning, with his son, to go into town, to do some shopping.'

'So, I had to hitch a ride here, to come into town to look for them. Though, the driver only was willing to take me this far, if I paid him. And at least he knew better than to come on to me, or ask me any questions. But, it seems intelligence like he demonstrated, is a rare commodity these days.'

'With luck, I will find him, before the others find me. And at least, I hid my duffel bag near his home, so I don't have to carry it around, as I look for him, and his son... And they told me Diego's son's name was Garcia... I wonder what they are like?... I hope they are kind people...'

'Still, finding them should not be that much of a problem. Even in a city this size. That is why they call me, the Bloodhound of Florencia. Once I set my sights on someone, I don't stop until I find them. Though, in this case, when I find the Lovelace family, I wish nothing but the best for the Lovelace family, and for our eventual meeting to be peaceful.'

And I need to fine my deceased father's best friend, Diego Lovelace, in this town, and ask for his help. Though, to be honest, all I was going to ask him was for was some supplies, to survive in the mountains. From there, I will have to try to make a run through the wilderness, to the north, and to the ports, on the other side of the mountains. There, I will try to get on a ship, out of South American.'

'And I would have to take the mountains. And I sure there are those after me have men stationed along the Autopista Caracas La Guaira highway. So, I can not go west, around the mountains, to the ports. And the other way to the north coast, be road, is the highway, on the east coast of the country. Which is too far away. So, going through the northern mountains is the safest route.'

'Now, to find the Diego Lovelace, and get the supplies I need to survive my planned trek through the mountains.'

Rosarita Cisneros, AKA Roberta, AKA the Bloodhound of Florencia, then walked down the sidewalk, and further into the city of Caracas Venezuela, as she continued her search for Diego and Garcia Lovelace.

(_)

An hour later, on the south coast of the Caribbean Sea, at the Simon Bolívar International Airport, in Maiquetia, Venezuela, a small private, business jet had just landed, the plane was presently moving off the runway.

Simon Bolivar International Airport was roughly thirteen miles northwest of downtown Caracas, and the airport served as the main international airport for Caracas, Venezuela.

Right after the private jet came to a stop, the hatch, on the left front side of the plane, opened from the bottom, and lowered itself into steps, down onto the tarmac below.

Due to being by the coast of the Caribbean Sea, it was slightly windy on the tarmac of the airport.

Two chinese men in black business suits walked down the steps to the tarmac. One after another. The first want stood to the right of the end of the steps, while the other stood to the left of the steps. With both men facing away from the airplane, as they look around for any possible signs of danger.

Both men was armed, but, their firearms were hidden under their clothing, and they were bodyguards for the man that was to follow them outside.

At the same time, as the two bodyguards exited the jet, a black, four door, mid-level car drove up to the left side of the plane, and came to a stop forty feet from the plane's staircase. The right passenger side of the car was facing the jet.

A second later, as the car was in park, but the engine was still running, the front right passenger door open. A chinese man in a black business suit stepped out of the front passengers side of the car. This man was also armed, with a pistol hidden among his clothing.

The man then gently shut the car door behind him. Next, the man turned and walked across the tarmac, to stand about five feet front the bodyguards, and right in front of the left bodyguards, to the side of the steps.

It was then, that the man the bodyguards were there for, exit the plan. He stepped down the stairs, and onto the tarmac below.

The man was a middle-aged chinese man, in his early to mid forties, with short black hair. He wear a white button up shirt, a blue tie, black pants, black belt, and black shoes. He wore a black waistcoat over his shirt, and over the waist coat was a black formal long coat. There was a white sash being draped, under the coat collar to hang loose on the side of his chest. The man was harmed with two pistols, in belt holsters, behind his waist, under his long-coat. The man also had on sunglasses over his eyes.

When the chinese man stepped onto the tarmac, he paid his bodyguards little mind, as he continued walking towards the black, four door car.

The man that had come from the car walked beside him, and to his right.

The man whom had come from the airplane asked his assistant, whom was walking with him, in chinese, “Have the rest the men already arrived?”

The assistant answered, in chinese, “Yes, Mister Chang. They are already at the hotel we are using, in downtown Caracas.”

Chang questioned, “So, the reservations have been made without a problem?”

Chang's assistant answered, “Yes. We have reservations for the hotel were made without a problem. We are now staying at one of the nicest hotels in the city. You, of course, have the penthouse, presidential suite. The rest of us have lower level, single bed suites. And the men, and I, wish to thank you for the first class tickets, and for giving them each a room at the hotel.”

Chang commented, in a casual tone of voice, “Just because all of you cannot fit in my private plane does not mean any of you have to fly in coach. And the hotel suites are nothing worth mentioning.”

Chang mentally reflected, with amusement, 'Also, it is wise to keep you guys close to me. Still, Shenhua was a bit miffed that I wouldn't let her come with us. Though, she admitted she understood my reasoning for not bringing her. While I kept a few of my top level guys in charge of the day to day operations, while I am gone for few nights. Shenhua is there to make sure that if anybody, both internal, or external, tried to take advantage of my temporary absence, that she will deal with them, quickly, and quietly.'

Chang assistant complimented, “As always Mister Chang, your generosity seems to be without limits.”

Chang thought, 'And your loyalty seems to be without limit. Though, first class tickets, both ways, and rooms in a quality hotel, are small prices to pay for such continued loyalty...'

'Still, I wonder how long it will take to reach the city, and our men. I do not like have so few of my personal guarding me. And as soon as I get to the rest of my men, the better. Also, there is the matter of customs? Did our bribery work?'

Chang asked, “What about customs? How long will it take to reach my men?”

Chang's assistant stated, “We were able to bribe both this airport's supervising custom's officer, and the chief of security. So, you will not have to go through customs, and that will save us time.”

Chang replied, “That is good.” He mentally added, 'That avoids some problems. And it is always nice to work with competent subordinates.'

Chang's assistant mentioned, “Still, it will take us around hour and a half to reach the men.”

Chang mentally wondered, 'While we have to literally go around some mountains, to reach Caracas from the west. The last few times I have come here, it did not take that long to get to the city.'

Chang inquired, “What is the hold up?”

Chang's assistant replied, “Traffic congestion.”

Chang questioned, “National football game?”

Chang's assistant, “Yes. Actually, two games. The people in this region of the world do love to watch other people kick a ball around a field. And there are two major football games scheduled to start this afternoon.”

“One is in Estadio Olímpico de la UCV stadium, and the other is in Brígido Iriarte stadium. There are already of minor traffic jams forming on the Autopista Caracas La Guaira highway, coming into Caracas, and going into downtown. Between us and our destination. As people are trying to get to those games, before they start this afternoon.”

Chang shrugged, as he responded, “It can't be helped. Fortunately, our meeting is not until later this afternoon.” He thought, 'I spoke to him, on my plane's phone, a few minutes ago. And that was actually a pleasant conversation. He informed us where and when meet him. And he gave me good directions, which I have written down on a piece of paper, in a coat pocket. I get the feeling this Severo wants our business. Which is good.'

Chang's assistant asked, in a calm tone of voice, “Where would you like us to take you for lunch? If you let us know, we can call ahead on the brick, for reservations, to the restaurant of your choice.”

Chang thought, 'My men even have a car with cellphone service, on short notice. Nice.'

Chang answered, “We will decide something later. Though, I am not in the mood anything formal.”

Chang's assistant replied, “As you wish, sir.”

By then, they had come to the right passengers side of the black mid-level car, with tinted windows. Chang's assistant quickly walked ahead of Chang, and he opened back right passenger side door to the vehicle.

As Chang stepped into this car, on the back right passenger side of the vehicle, he thought, 'I hope this deal that Abrego set up for me comes through. Or, I will be very annoyed with him.'

When Chang's assistant saw that Chang was fully inside the car, and seated in the backseat, he gently shut the door. Chang's assistant then turned around walked to the front passenger door. Next, he opened the front passenger door, got into the front passenger seat, and he gently shut the front passenger door behind himself.

A few seconds later, the driver up the car put the car into drive gear, and he then drove his passengers towards an exit of airport, that had already been opened and cleared by the airport officials, for them to quietly enter and leave from.

As the black painted car exited airport, the driver headed for the Autopista Caracas La Guaira highway. With them leaving behind the two bodyguards to guard the jet.

Meanwhile, the pilot, and co-pilot, inside the jet took care of running instrument checks on the plane. Along with them making sure the jet was refueled in a timely manner. Just in case Chang has to leave the country ahead of schedule, and in a hurry.

(_)

Around noon, local time, in a lobby of nice, large, tall, hotel, with a present day, modern motif, in downtown Caracas, a former captain of the Soviet military, and her men, whom served with her in the Russian-Afghan war, were organized to move out, to their scheduled meeting.

They had just had finished lunch in a restaurant, that was located across the street from the hotel they were in. And they were now head over to their scheduled meeting.

Those of the captain’s men, whom were not there, were retrieving the cars they had rented. With those men driving the cars to the front of the hotel, to pick up the rest of them.

The captain, also known as, Balalaika, along with her men, had joined one of the russian mafias some months ago. And Balalaika had long since realized that she and her men still had to prove themselves a bit more, before her superiors would trust them with more lucrative opportunities.

Balalaika was a fair skinned woman, in her mid to late thirties.

Though, if someone had risked looking, they would have seen that Balalaika had a scars running down the right side of her face and chest, with the scars disappearing under her clothing.

Balalaika was of average high, with a slender, yet muscular build. She had blue eyes. She also had long blond hair that was tied off into a ponytail, and what went down to the small of her back, save some hair, on the bangs of her forehead, that was allowed to hand loose, and drop down between the sides of her face, and her ears.

Balalaika wore a matching red business dress and red high heels, that went will with her pink painted finger nails and blond hair. Her red dress was cut to show a wide v shape, which showed the top of her cleavage, and some of the scars on her chest.

Balalaika’s men were wearing casual wear, of various types, and combinations of shirts, pants, jackets, and either dress shoes, or military boots.

As Balalaika stood, with her back leaning against the end of the check in desk of the hotel, she looked out, into the lobby. Except for a few employee and customers coming and go, through the lobby, were her men. Her men were lounging around in the lobby. With them either sitting in the chairs and couches of the lobby, or standing next to each other, as they talked to each other, in russian.

Balalaika, and all of her men were armed with pistols, hidden amongst their clothing.

As Balalaika slowly looked around the room, while she waited for her ride, she casually thought, 'Well, at least the flight here, yesterday morning was not too bad. And this hotel is decent. Also, we found a creative way to get our weapons, and ammo, through customs. And the vehicles we rented in advance are in good shape. All in all, getting here was not that difficult... Now, comes the hard part.'

“Though, it was nice that this Severo contacted us, earlier this morning. And he was amendable on what time we would meet him. Still, he was adamant about where we would meet him. Though, he stated this was due to the location being an office setting, which was already set up for meetings. And I feel he is telling the truth. So, I agreed to meet him there.'

'Both myself, and his superior, would have his ass, if he tried anything with us.'

'Still, this will be the third mission we will have done for our boss, Pyotr, sense we joins his little organization. And we flawlessly accomplished our last two missions'.

'Though honestly, I would think our new boss, Pyotr, would have better things for us, than to send an elite fighting force, such as mine, on a simple errand... But, then again, we still have to prove ourselves to him. And as such, we will be as professional as we were in the military.'

'Though, I do find it annoying that Pyotr occasionally asks me to come up with both a name for my group, and a name for any future front business I organize. We do not need a special name. Our presence, and our actions should be enough...'

'Back to the mission at hand. This mission is simple enough. We are to meet with representatives of the Manisarera Cartel, lead by this Severo person, to discuss the purchase and future transport, of their products, into Russia, for Pyotr's group to sell there.'

'It is a simple enough transaction. But, experience has painfully taught me, that is usually is when everything starts to go wrong. So, I will have to be on my guard. And so will my men.'

'Besides which, this is only the first of many possible meetings, to workout the deal. We are here to get our foot in the door. With any other possible meetings being handled by the more diplomatic members of Pyotr's group.'

'I admit to myself that subtle negotiations have never my one of my strengths. I have always been more of a person of action.'

'And that might be why Pyotr sent us on this mission. The other two missions were more action oriented. And Pyotr needs to learn out how I handle myself, when I am out of my element. And this meeting is my test. And I won't fault him. If I was in his position, I would like do the same thing, in testing someone such as myself.'

'Still, it is tempting to wear my greatcoat here. But, with this warm humid weather, it is just not practical. And if I did wear it, I am concerned I might be making a little too forceful a presentation towards our potential business partners. I do not want to scare them, the moment they meet us. First impressions are important, after all.'

Balalaika then noticed a vase filled with purple flowers in full bloom, by the check in desk. The vase was set by a window on the check in desk, opposite from where Balalaika was. The vase near the front, windowed double-doors of the hotel.

Balalaika thought, 'That is a beautiful type of flower. I wonder what it is called? I will have to ask the clerk at the desk. Though, I have to keep in mind, that I need to use english. Because, I do not know much spanish, and this clerk more than likely does not know russian.'

Balalaika turned around, to face the check in desk. She looked over at the clerk on duty, whom was not busy.

A few seconds later, the clerk noticed Balalaika. He turned to Balalaika, as he calmly asked her, in english, “Is there something I can help with you, ma'am?”

Balalaika looked at the clerk, as she casually used her left index finger to point at the vase with the flowers. A second later, she dropped her left hand back to her side. She then inquired, with a touch of curiosity in her tone of voice, in english, “Yes. I was wondering what those flowers in that vase were called?”

The clerk turned to look at the flowers in the vase. He then looked back at Balalaika, as he answered, “The flowers are bougainvilleas. They grow wild around this region.”

Balalaika casually replied, “Such a lovely name for lovely flowers. Thank you.”

The clerk responded, “You are welcome. If you need anything, please let us know.”

Balalaika calmly said, “I certainly will.”

Due to Balalaika looking partly towards flowers in the vase, and towards the front windows of the lobby, she then saw the cars her group had rented, roll to a stop in front of the hotel.

Balalaika cracked a grin, as she thought, 'Good. They are finally here.'

Balalaika then turned toward her men, as she walked back over by them.

As Balalaika approached her men, she noted that they all quickly realized she was coming. Those of her men that were sitting down, quickly stood up, as all of her men immediately faced her, while standing at attention.

Balalaika soon came to a stop, ten feet from the closest of her men, whom she was facing. As she looked at her soldiers, she thought, with a bit of happiness, and appreciation, 'It is nice that my men always pay me the respect I deserve. And I try to do the same for them.'

Balalaika stated, in russian, “Comrades. It is time to move out.”

Balalaika then watched her men started filing out of the building, and into the cars outside. She soon joined them.

Meanwhile the clerk of hotel watched as the russians exit the hotel and into the cars outside. He thought, 'I do not know who they are. But, I have a feeling that I do not want to know, either. And I have to be careful, because we have them booked here till tomorrow... I think it is time for me to call in that favor my manager owes me, and take a few days off.'

The clerk then watched the all the russians got into the various cars. With the cars doors being closed. And the cars driving way from the hotel.

The clerk then want back to his usual duties.

(_)

Just after Balalaika and her men left their hotel, in downtown Caracas, around twenty miles north of them, was the port city of La Guaira.

La Guaira was one of the main ports for the nation of Venezuela.

The day was still sunny and warm. With a breeze coming off the Caribbean Sea.

At that very moment, on the coast of La Guaria, an old U.S. patrol torpedo boat, in fairly good condition, had just pulled up to one of the piers on the docks. The pier was set against the right side of the PT boat.

There were no torpedoes, nor other weapons visible, on the deck of the boat. Though, the torpedo holders, and launch tubes, on the deck of the boat, were still intact.

The flag the ship was flying at the mast of the boat was the American flag of the United States.

As the boat came to a stop, the engines on the boat went silent.

The first person whom came out of the out of the pilothouse was a slender man of average height. Whom appeared to be between his late teens to early twenties. The man had fair skin, and moderately long blond hair that was in a ponytail. He had green eyes that he wore glasses over.

The man wore a short sleeved, button up, hawaiian shirt. The shirt had an orange background, with large green leafs cover much of the orange background of the shirt.

The man also wore light brown pants, and white tennis shoes. He shirt was untucked, with the bottom of his shirt hiding the belt around his waist.

The blond man took a look around him. He saw there were a few other private boats, and small yachts nearby, on other piers. But, there were no other boats by the pier they were on, and he did not see anyone on the boats, piers, nor docks.

The man looked back towards the door to the pilothouse that he can come out of, as he stated, in english, “It look like we have this pier to ourselves.”

Another person walked out of deck, out of the door the man had used to exit the pilothouse.

The second person was a skinny, but athletic woman, whom was shorter than the blond man. She appeared to be in her late teens. She had tanned skin, yellow eyes, and long red hair that was pulled back in a ponytail, except for a some hair above her forehead. Including, two long strands of red hair, on her bangs, that went down the side of her face.

The woman wore a sleeveless black shirt, and blue jeans. Her shirt was untucked and went below her waistline. Under her shirt, while she had her jeans zipped up, she left the waist button on her jeans open. And her jeans were held up by a green army belt around her waist. She wore green boots that were not laces up. She wore not bra, nor socks. Though, she did wear black panties under her pants.

The woman wore he sleeveless black shirt untucked, to hide her semi-automatic pistol, that she had tucked under the back of her pants. With the grip of the pistol facing her right side, so should could pulled it out with her right hand.

The woman's pistol was an M Nine Beretta semi-automatic pistols. The magazine in the pistol could hold up to fifteen rounds of nine by nineteen millimeter parabellum caliber bullets.

And while there was not a bullet in the chamber of the weapon, the safety on the firearm was on, as an added precaution to prevent the gun from accidentally misfiring.

The woman came to a stop five feet from the man, as she turned to face him. She said, in english, “Good. Now, let's tie this thing off. You get the plank, I will get the ropes.”

The man joked, “It sounds like you want to walk someone off the plank. Like an old-fashioned pirate.”

The women flatly said, “Can it. I am not in the mood.”

The man thought, 'As if you are ever in the mood.' He then turned and walked towards the front of the deck. When he reached the front of the deck, he found a wood plank.

The man picked it up wooden plank and set it between the right side of the front of the boat, and the pier, which was only about two feet lower than the desk of the PT boat.

The man then walked on the plank, and onto the pier itself. He then turned towards the back of the PT boat, as he walked down the pier.

Meanwhile, the woman had walked to the back of the boat. She had retrieved the ropes.

She then walked to the right side of the back of the boat, to see that the man was standing on the pier.

She dropped one of the ropes. Next, she held one end of rope in her hands, as she tossed the other end of the rope to the man on the pier.

The man caught the part of rope that was tossed to him with ease. The man then tied the rope, in a knot, on the mooring on the pier, by him.

At the same time, the woman tied the other end of the rope to the mooring by her, on the boat.

When both adults were finished, they leaned up. The woman also picked up the loose rope that she had dropped. The woman walked down the right side of the PT boat, as the man walked parallel to her, from the pier.

When both of them reached the front end of the PT boat, the woman held on to one end of the rope, she had in hand, as she toss the other end to the attentive man. The man caught that end of the rope.

The man then started tying his end of the rope to the mooring on the pier, as the woman tied her end of the rope to the mooring by her, on the front end of the ship.

When they were finished, the woman stood up, and walked to the middle of the front of the deck, as the man walked up the plank, and onto the front deck of the ship.

The man came to a stop, about ten feet from the woman.

A few seconds later, a second man stepped out of the pilothouse. The man was a tall, dark skinned man with a moderately heavy, muscular build, whom was in very good physical shape. The man took such good care of himself, it was difficult to tell his age. As he looked to be around thirty. Though, he acted with the maturity of a man well into middle-age.

The man was bald, and he had a well groomed, black goatee that almost when completely around his mouth, except for right below his nose. There were also the small brass looped earrings in each of his ears. With the each set of three earrings lined up in a row.

The dark skinned man were a sleeveless greenish white shirt. Over his shirt was a short sleeved green army flack jacket over his shirt. He wore dark green pants, and green boots. Around his waist was a brown leather belt, with a silver belt buckle. In the center of the belt, the silver was formed into the shape of a skull of tiger.

The dark skinned man also wore green tinted sunglasses that enclosed around his eyes

After finishing talking to the port master on the radio, the dark skinned had spent that last few minutes locking all the hatches from the inside. So, they could leave the boat, with little worry of someone stealing it. And he now used his keys to lock the pilothouse door behind him.

The dark skinned man then turned, and walked across the deck, on the right side of the ship, as he headed towards the front of the ship.

As the dark skinned man approached the other two adults, the redheaded woman and the blond man turned to face him.

As the dark skinned man came to a stop around ten feet from the other two adults, the blond man joked, “Oh captain, my captain. The boat is tied to the dock. I hope the knots I made are to your satisfaction.”

The dark skinned let out a small chuckle. He then said, in english, “I trust you Benny. And as I said before, you can call me Dutch”

Benny replied, “Okay, Dutch.”

Dutch turned to looked at the redheaded woman, as he calmly asked, “Now, how are you doing, Revy?”

Revy looked away from Dutch, as she said, “Fine, Dutch. I am just a bit bored from being cooped up with you two for that last few days.”

Dutch looked down at Revy, as he calmly said, “I hope we were polite company.”

Revy looked up at Dutch, in his face, as she begrudgingly admitted, “You both were.”

Dutch happily stated, “Good. Now, we can stretch our legs on some land.”

Revy commented, “Yea. I am looking forward to it.”

Dutch replied, “Aren't we all.”

Benny asked, “So, what is our next move, Dutch?”

Dutch focused on Benny, as he stated, “I got some good news and some bad news. The good news is that I got off the radio with the port master here. And he is who I thought he would be. He is a good friend of mine that owes me a few favors. That is why I brought us here. He has agreed to quietly let us use this port for the night, free of charge. And we even skip the usual customs. Though, we have to be gone by tomorrow afternoon.”

Revy deadpanned, “Good. Cause none of us have our passports.”

Dutch ignored Revy's sarcasm, as he continued explaining the situation to them, “Yes. The bad news. We need to buy supplies. Some of everything, including food and fuel. It shouldn't take us an hour to get these items here. But, there are a couple of small items I need for the engine and electronics for this boat. And the port master says we will have to go the capital of this nation, Caracas, to get it.”

“It is over an hour and a half long trip into that city from here. But, the port master said the local taxis would take all three of us there, for a fair price. And the taxis in Caracas would bring us back here for a similar price.”

Revy complained, “It is going to suck that we will have to spent over an hour and a half in the car to get a few small items. And then another hour and a half, or so, to get back here.”

Benny turned to Revy, as he pointed out, “Take it from an electronics expert. It is the small items that usual cause the greatest aggravations.”

Dutch focused on Revy, as he stated, “Benny is right. I do not want to be in the middle of the Caribbean sea, and have our engine breakdown. Given our previous actions, it is not like we can call for help.”

Revy conceded, in a defeated tone of voice, “Alright.”

Dutch mentioned, “Besides, the port master also mentioned a bar he thought we would like, that is in Caracas. The bar is west part of the city, just east of where we will be coming into that town. It is located near the Rio Guaire river.”

Dutch and Benny saw Revy perk up, as she stated, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “That is more like.”

Dutch thought, 'I have found out, very quickly, that when dealing with Revy. It is best to save the best news for last.'

Benny looked over at Dutch, as he inquired, “So, do we have enough money for everything?”

Dutch turned to Benny, as he answered, “Yea. We are fine, for the moment. The only thing we are out of, that we cannot replace here, is bullets for my revolver. I ran out, after that incident, a week ago. And I do not know anyone, in this country, to buy bullets from. Fortunately, I have ammo for my shotgun. But, this is not the type of nation that a foreigner would want to openly tote their firearm into.”

Revy cracked a grin, as she stated, “Don't worry. I will protect both of you.”

Dutch turned to Revy, as he returned Revy's smile. He said, “You have my full faith and confidence.”

Revy replied, “Thanks.”

Benny looked over at Revy, as he mentally wondered, 'But, where she has her gun on her?”

Benny then risk a quick look at Revy's lower body, and from the angle he saw her, which was her left side, he saw that slight out line of a pistol being stuck down the back of her pants, with the grip sticking out of the top, to the right. So, Revy could grab her pistol with her right hand.

Benny look up at Revy's face, as he thought, 'And I doubt that pistol is in a holster. Though, past experiences with Revy have taught me when I need to stay quiet. But, part of me just has to say something about this.'

Benny cautiously he warned, “I hope you have the safety on that pistol. Shooting yourself on in the ass would not be fun.”

Revy looked over at Benny, as she snapped, “Relax, Benny. I always keep the chamber empty. Though, I know to leave the safety on, as well.”

Benny replied, “Good.” He then muttered under his breath, “I wish I just could call my parents to let them know I am alive and well.”

Dutch overheard Benny, as he thought, 'So, that joke is just to hide that he his homesick. I can understand that.'

Dutch stated, “Don't worry Benny. When we get into a more stable situation, we will find a way to contact your family. To let them know you are alive and well. In way that the government, nor the mob, cannot trace back to us.”

Benny looked over at Dutch, as he sgratefully aid, “Thanks, Dutch.”

Benny then noticed that Dutch was wearing a green flack jacket, over green shirt. Dutch had left the jacket open.

Benny complimented, “Nice flack jacket, Dutch.”

Dutch turned to Benny, as he commented, “Thank you. I found it in the boat.”

Benny asked, “Do you have another one inside the boat?”

Dutch responded, “Nope. Sorry. This was the only one I found on this tub.”

Benny joked, “That is alright. I will just use you as a shield. You are bigger than me, anyway.”

Revy overheard Benny, as she said, “Nice joke, Benny.”

Dutch complimented, “Good one, Benny.”

While no one laughed at Benny's joke, Benny could tell from their facial expressions that Dutch and Revy found his joke amusing.

Benny replied, “You're both welcome.”

Revy asked, “Hey guys. Given it is so hot here, in this part of the world. I am thinking about cutting my jeans into short-shorts. What do you think?”

Dutch commented, “Your choice. It is your life.”

Revy turned to Benny.

Benny noticed Revy looking at him, as he said, “Fine by me. You would look good either way.” Next, he pointed at the orange button up shirt, with green leafs, with her right hand, as he continued, “And you do have some sense of style. Take for example, the hawaiian shirt you got me. I like it.” Benny dropped his right hand back to his side.

Revy smiled at Benny, as she stated, “I told you it would look good on you.” She thought, 'And I love it when people say I am right.' She verbally continued, “I am also thinking of getting a midriff shirt of some type.”

Dutch cracked a grin, as he said, “We will support whatever you decide to wear, Revy.” He mentally added, 'And with your body, Revy. Everything looks good on you. And I am sure you look good when you have nothing on. But, given your temper. I am not going to say that to your face.'

Benny agreed, “Dutch is right about that.”

Revy smile widened slightly, as she replied, “Thanks. Now, let's get something to eat. Get the supplies we need here. And then, we will head to Carcasas. Because, I want to check out that bar.”

Revy then turned, walked to the right edge of the boat, and jump off the boat. Her landing on the pier was a little unsteadily, but she quickly found her footing, without falling on her butt. She then walked towards down the pier, towards land.

When Benny and Dutch saw that Revy was out of earshot, due to the slight sea breeze, Benny looked at Dutch, as he casually asked, “Dutch, how can someone be so crazy, yet have such a beautiful smile?”

Dutch looked over at Benny, as he answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, “One of the great mysteries in life, Benny-boy. Now, let's go catch up with her, before she gets herself into trouble.”

Benny compliment, “Good idea.”

Dutch and Benny then headed over to the plank. Dutch when down the plank first, then Benny. Once they were on the pier, they briskly walked down the pier, to catch up to Revy.

A few seconds later, Dutch and Benny reached Revy, and all three of them went into town to get something to eat. Next, they would get the supplies they need in La Guaira. Then, once that was done, they planned to find a taxi that would take them to Caracas.

(_)

As Dutch, Revy, and Benny, disembarked from their ship, just over a dozen miles south of La Guaira, on the western part of Caracas, Pedro and Matthew had just walked out of the slums an hour ago, with them finally now entering one of the southern parts of the city, where some hotels were located.

Pedro and Matthew walked side by side, along a sidewalk, with Pedro to Matthew’s right, and the buildings on the sidewalk they were on, to Matthew's left.

Both men had noticed that there were very few pedestrians on the sidewalk, with a moderate amount of vehicle traffic, coming both ways, down the two lane street. But, neither said anything about the matter.

In case of trouble possibly finding them, both men kept an eye out, around them.

While they continued walking at a casual pace, Pedro apologized, in english, “Sorry, it took so long to find a nearby opening from the slums, into the city.”

Matthew shrugged, as he said, in english, “It is not your fault. We are not familiar with this part of the city. And we had to ask directions. Though, I wish we could have just used a cab.”

Pedro mentioned, “I have had some dicey situations using taxis that just pulled up to me on the side of the street. I suggest we only use taxis that we call to come and get us.”

Matthew conceded, “You may have a point there. Now, you were are the one with the directions. So, where do we go from here?”

Pedro answered, “Well, if I am following the directions that guy I talked to last, correctly. On the next turn to the left, on this very sidewalk, we should find a hotel that will suit our needs.”

Matthew commented, “It is not like we can give our IDs, nor pay top dollar for a room. So, a five star hotel is out of the question. But, I am not going to sleeping in a roach motel.”

Pedro stated, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't worry. I have enough gold and cash on me, that we will find some place decent.

Just then, they turned left, onto the sidewalks of the street that was perpendicular to the street they were walking beside.

Pedro and Matthew turned a corner, and they came to a stop, as they saw a five story hotel, directly in front of them, a hundred yards away, when the street ended into a, T, intersection, on the other of the city block they were on.

The exterior of the hotel looked to be in good condition, with on minor touch up work on the paint.

Pedro said, “Well, it is not the Devil's Hotels. But, it look okay... At least on the outside.”

Matthew commented, “Do you realize that anyone else here that may have just had heard you say, would likely look at you funny?”

Pedro grinned, as he said, “Yea. I guess you're right.”

Matthew responded, “Yes. And I am glad that person that gave you directions was right, as well. Now, let's get over there, and get us a room.”

Pedro said, “Fine. But, let me do the talking.”

Matthew replied, “No problem.”

The two men then started back walking, side by side, towards the hotel.

(_)

Fifteen minutes later, Pedro and Matthew made it across the street, at a crosswalk, under a street light, and then into the five story hotel itself.

As both men walked across the city block, they noticed that they passed by a few restaurants that look like pretty good places to eat.

After they entered the lobby, Pedro and Matthew stood side by side, as they looked around. They saw that the lobby motif looked a little date. In that, while it was October, nineteen ninety-one, the lobby looked like it was last remodeled in the seventies.

But, the lobby was clean. And the furniture, carpet, and wall paneling, were in good condition.

Pedro cracked a grin, as looked at Matthew, to his left. He stated, “Admit it. This place may be a bit dated, but it does have some character to it.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he happily pointed out, “Dude. I am from two centuries in the future. Everything, in the here and now, is dated to me.”

Both men chuckled a little bit at Matthew's comment.

As they calmed down, Pedro looked over at the check in desk, and the male clerk behind it. The clerk was not busy. From behind the counter, the clerk was sitting in a chair, reading a magazine, which, from the text on the cover, was in spanish.

Pedro said, “Let's go check in.” He then started walk over to the check in desk.

Matthew followed Pedro.

A few seconds later, Pedro came to a stop a stop in front of the clerk, with Matthew coming to a stop, and standing a few feet behind Pedro, to Pedro left.

The clerk look up at the two men, as he eyes narrowed. He closed his magazine and sit in on the table.

Given the magazine was set with the cover facing upwards, Pedro saw that the magazine was about one of Venezuela's favorite sports. Football. And from the text on the cover, Pedro read that one of the articles was about a goalie.

The clerk asked, in spanish, “What can I do for you?”

Pedro at the clerk, in the clerk's eyes, as he stated, in spanish, “We are looking for a room. Is american cash alright, as payment?”

The clerk flatly answered, “Yes. Twenty five a night, for a room, for both of you, if you have IDs. A hundred a night if you don't...”

Pedro thought, 'And you likely pocket the difference.'

The clerk continued, “But, if you don't have IDs, you have to be gone by tomorrow afternoon.”

The clerk turned his head to look at Matthew, as he went onto say, “And while this nation does not have sodomy laws, sodomy is frowned upon here.” He then looked back at Pedro.

Pedro replied, “Relax. We are just friends, and we are looking for a room with two beds.”

The clerk flatly said, “Good. Now, payment up front.”

Pedro used his right hand to reached into a pocket, and he pulled out a roll of twenty dollar U.S. bills. He then looked down, as he counted out five of those bills. Then, with his left hand, put five bills onto the counter, as he looked at the clerk, while he put the rest of the money back into the pocket he had pull the roll of bills from.

The clerk looked down at the five twenty dollar bills, as he picked them up, and counted them. He then set the bills on a shelf, under the counter. Next, he swivel around in his chair, to a board with keys on hooks, with numbers and letters above each key.

The clerk then picked up one of the keys, in the middle of the board. Next, he turned his chair around, as he set the key on the counter, between him and Pedro.

As Pedro picked up the key and looked at it, the clerk stated, “The elevator is down the hall, across from the stairwell. Your room is, B ten. It is on the second floor, tenth door on your right. And if you are not gone by tomorrow afternoon, I am calling the police. Also, tomorrow, return the key to me, before you leave.”

Pedro closed the key around his right hand, as he looked at the clerk, He flatly replied, “Understood...” He thought, 'He maybe an ass, but he is likely being on the level with me. So, I might as well ask.' Pedro inquired, “By the way, is there a decent place to get a drink in this town.”

The clerk responded, “For you two. There is a place I know of that is pretty decent. I will even help you call a taxi. And I will recommend a few taxi companies that you will find in the phonebook. You can use the phone in your room to call them.”

The clerk then gave Pedro the name and directions to the bar, which was on the west end of the city, near the Río Guaire river. Along with this, the clerk listed a few reputable taxi companies that he knew of.

Pedro said, “Thank you.” he then turned around to face Matthew, as he stated, in english, “I got us a room for the night. It got directions. It is only the second story, so I suggest we use the stairwell.” He mentally added, 'I think it is best that I don't tell Matthew how rude the clerk was to me. All it will do is just put him in a bad mood.'

Matthew replied, “That is find with me.”

Pedro mentioned, “Also, I got directions to nice of a bar we might go to tonight. The clerk even mentioned a few taxi companies we could call to come get us.”

Matthew responded, “Good. But, we will do that after we get something to eat. Say, from one of the restaurants we passed by, right outside.”

Pedro replied, “That works for me.”

Matthew requested, “Then, lead the way, chief.”

Pedro turned and started walking towards the hallway that lead to the elevator and stairwell. With Matthew following right behind him.

As the clerk watched the two men leave the lobby, he turned back to his magazine, which was still sitting at the counter.

The clerk picked up his magazine. Open it up to where he had left off, and he went back to reading it.

(_)

A few minutes later, Pedro and Matthew found their room. Pedro used his key to open the door. He then opened door, and walked inside.

As Pedro walked inside, the light from the hallway allow him to see the light switch by the door, on suite side of the door. Pedro switched on the light, and looked around.

While Pedro continued walking into the room, the first think Pedro noticed was the heavy curtains, that were covering moderately sized windows on the other side of the room.

As Pedro came to a stop, he thought, 'It looks like those curtains are thick enough to block out the sunlight outside. That is good. Because we are going to need to get some sleep in a few minutes.'

Pedro then noticed two beds set against the wall, to his left. Across from the far bed, between the bet and curtains, was a small round table, with a couple of wooden chairs.

Beside the table, across from the beds, and set against the wall, was a chest of drawers.

There was no TV on top of the bureau, but there was a phone book for Caracas on top of the piece of furniture. And from the cover of the phone book, which was facing up, the phone book was in spanish.

Pedro thought, 'I am so glad I can speak and read a few languages. And spanish is my native language. But, I am very good with english, as well.'

Pedro then looked over at the nightstand, set against the wall, between the two beds. On the nightstand was a digital alarm clock, an electric lamp, and a rotatory phone.

Pedro thought, 'That phone is old fashioned, even this time. But, if it works, I am okay with it.'

Pedro then noticed at that door to his left, let to the bathroom of the suite, and that to his left was a small alcove in the room, with a straight metal rod anchors to two points on the alcove, at his chest left. With the metal rod being there for someone to hand their nice clothing on.

Pedro then noticed, as he thought, 'I don't see any wall safe in the room. But then, I don't plan on leaving anything here. So, that should not be a problem.'

Just then, Matthew walked inside the room, as he gently shut and locked the door behind him. He then walked pass Pedro, and into the bathroom. He turned on the light, and looked around.

Pedro then heard water running for a few seconds, before it shut off. He then heard the toilet flush.

Around twenty seconds later, Matthew then turned around, walked out of the bathroom. He came to a stop a few feet from Pedro.

Pedro turned to face Matthew, as he asked, “How is it?”

Matthew stated, “The good news is that the toilet, shower, and sink, are clean. The toilet works. We have hot water. Also, there are a few unopened toilet paper rolls stocked by the toilet. There are a few bars of unopened soap on the counter, by the sink. And there are some clean towels and hand towels we can use.”

Pedro agreed, “That is good news. I'll check the beds.”

Pedro then turned, and walked over, between the beds. He turned back the sheets to both beds, to find that the sheets were clean. He looked over at Matthew, whom he saw was looking back at him.

Pedro stated, “The sheets are clean, as well.”

Matthew said, “Good. At least the basics are here.”

Pedro replied, “Yes.”

Matthew asked, “So, is the water safe to drink here?”

Pedro shrugged, as he answered, “From what I understand, it is hit or miss in this nation. But, the city water here should be safe... Just don't drink a lot of it.”

Matthew suggested, “Okay. Also, I see a clock by the beds. Let's set it for eight o'clock PM. That should give us time to sleep. Then, we can get up, get something to eat, and likely be at that bar around nine.”

Pedro complimented, “Good plan.”

Matthew smiled, as he offered, “Thank you. And you can have the first shower.”

Pedro returned Matthew's smile, as he replied, “Thanks.” He mentally added, 'We may not have extra sets of clothing. But, we can at least wash the sweat off of our bodies. And after we wake up, we will get some deodorant, combs, razors, shaving cream, toothbrushes and toothpaste.'

Pedro then went to get cleaned up, as Matthew walked between the beds set the alarm clock for eight PM. Ten minutes later, when Pedro was finished getting cleaned up, it was Matthew's turned to take a shower.

After both of them were done getting cleaned up, the two men turned off the lights in the room, they then got some much needed rest in the beds of their suite. With the curtains blocking more of the sunlight in the room, allowing the room to be dark enough for them to get some sleep.

(_)

As Pedro and Matthew went to sleep, elsewhere, across town, Balalaika and her group where in their cars, as they made their way to their destination. Which was to meet with a Severo, a local cartel lieutenant, and his own men, to talk about possible drug routes into Russian.

Unfortunately, the last forty minutes, or so, after Balalaika and her men had all got into their cars and left the hotel, had been very boring for Balalaika.

Inside the car she was in, Balalaika was sitting in the back seat, on the right side of the vehicle. To her left was her second in command, Boris.

As they head for their meeting with the cartel representatives, the highway was not so bad. But now, as they drove into town, on city streets themselves, to the meeting location, they were going as a much slower pace.

And Balalaika was one whom did not care for delays. Though, Balalaika was also professional enough not to show any outward signs of impatience, nor take out her internal frustrations on her men, whom she knew were completely loyal to her.

As Balalaika watched out her window, to her right side, as they passed through a shopping district, she saw numbers of people pass by.

But, two people walking down the street caught Balalaika’s eye, as she passed by them. A father and son. The father had slightly tanned skin, dark hair, with a mustache, that had mostly grayed with age. The son had much lighter skin, and blond hair. And son appear to be ten years of age, at most.

Boris noticed Balalaika staring out of the car window, as he asked, in russian, “Captain? Is there something the matter?”

Balalaika looked forward, towards the front of their vehicle, as she casually answered, in russian, “No, sergeant. Just some people that caught my eye, for a moment.”

Boris decided to change the subject, as he said, “Well, we will be at our meeting place, in a few minutes.”

Balalaika inquired, “Good. So, we are ahead of schedule?”

Boris replied, “Yes. By just over ten minutes.”

Balalaika ordered, “Well then, Sergeant. While the traffic has not been working for us today, we are going to arrive at this meeting early. So, I would like you to give a small bonus to which of our men whom had plotted out this route, and drove us here.”

Boris said, “Yes, Captain. I will do so, later today.”

Balalaika then went back to look out the window to her right, as she road in her car, in the convey, that was heading down the road, towards their scheduled meeting.

(_)

Five minutes later, in downtown Caracas, there was a nondescript, three story building. Across the two lane street was a private, mostly empty, parking lot.

Both the building, and the parking lot were secretly owned by Manisarera cartel, by two separate shell corporations. One for the building. And one for the parking lot.

While the parking lot appeared open, everyone around knew not to use it, without permission, or else.

The building itself had air conditioning that was set at a conformable temperature inside.

In a moderately sized room, in the front part of the building, on the second floor of the building, Severo and his men were waiting for the russian mafia representatives to show up.

The room they were inside of was nicely furnished. It has carpet rugs, laid through the wooden paneling floor. Near the windows, at the front of the room, was a nice large rectangular rug. On top of the rug, in the center was a rectangular, low handing coffee table. See three feet from the two long sided edges of the table were identical, cushioned couches, on the rug. And set three feet from the two short sided edges of the table, were two cushioned chairs.

On a far wall, near the door, was a few pot of coffee made, that sat on the hot eye of the coffee make, where it was brewed. Nearby, on the table, there were cups, spoons, sweeteners and a small teacup of milk.

Along the table, there were also small plates and napkins, by some boxes there were assortments some american style donuts and churros, also known as spanish donuts.

Though, a few of Severo's men had already had some of these small snacks.

There was also a large analogue clock hanging on the wall, above the coffer maker.

In addition, there were both stairs and a nice elevator leading up to the room.

There were six men in the room, counter Severo.

Severo was wearing a white business suit, with white leather shoes. He had a pistol in a shoulder holster, under his left armpit. And most of the men there were dressed in business suits, and shoes, were of similar type as Severo, only they were different colors.

At the moment, Severo was looking out one of the front windows, down at the street below, so he could watch for the russians mafia representatives to arrive.

Severo turned to look at the clock on the wall. A second later, he turned back to look out the window he was standing beside.

As Severo kept looking out of the window, he thought, 'They should be here, any minute. Russians, from what I understand, value punctuality. And after I am done with the russians, I will have to later meet with the chinese.'

'Still, on the matter of the Bloodhound, I am happy that Velasco said he would be more than happy to take a few men to go looking for the Bloodhound. And he also agreed that to call us, when he found her. So, that when we faced her, we could do so prepared, in full force. Just in case she is as dangerous as her reputation states.'

'And speaking of weapons, I don't like leaving our big guns in storage, in the building. But, there is too much on the line to ruin things by presenting ourselves as thugs, for first impression in both these meetings.'

'Also, I know next to nothing about those I am going to meet. It seems this test, by my superiors, is much more thorough than I first realized.'

A few seconds later, Severo saw several cars, in a clear convoy, turn into a nearby, nearly empty parking lot.

Severo thought, 'Well, I expected a meeting, not an army.'

Just then, another man walked up beside Severo. The man was of average height, and physical build, with tanned skin. He had long brown hair, that was tied in a ponytail. He also had a brown goatee on his chin. And unlike the rest of the men there, he was wear light brown pant, black leather belt, black dress shoes, and a short sleeved pink, button up short. The shirt was untucked, and hid the small pistol, in the small holster, on the right side of his belt.

The man looked out the window, in the direction Severo was looking. He calmly asked, in spanish, “Is going to be a problem?”

Severo recognized the man's voice, as he thought, 'Gustavo. The go-between for the capo and myself. He is here to see how well I handle these meetings. He will be leaving back for Columbia, right after these two meetings are over.'

Severo answered, in spanish, “No. It shouldn't be. We will just limit the number of them that can come up here. This is civil meeting, that both sides want. So, it should not be that much of an issue.”

Gustavo stated, “That is how I would handle it.”

Severo continued looking out the window, as he inquired, “Can I rest assured that you will not intervene in this meeting?”

Gustavo said, “I am here to see how you handle yourself. I plan to just stand back, and watch. If there is a firefight, I will fight, but only as a means of escape.”

Severo stated, “That will be fine.”

By then, across the street, in the parking lot, the cars had also parked, and peopled are starting to get of their vehicles. Though, there were no weapons visible, among them.

Gustavo questioned, “Do think they are all armed?”

Severo flatly replied, “Absolutely.”

Gustavo inquired, “Can your men take them in a fight?”

Severo then noticed the body language of some of the men, as they got organized.

Severo stated, “From the way some of them are standing, I get the sense that some, if now all of them, have military training. Also, they out number us. So, no chance in hell.” He mentally added, 'Even with the other dozen armed men I have in this building, we wouldn't stand a chance.'

Gustavo suggested, “Then, we will just be on our best behavior.”

Severo agreed, “My thoughts exactly. And we will have to conduct this meeting in english. Do you know that language?”

Gustavo cracked a grin, as he rhetorically asked, “How do you think I got this job?”

Severo responded, “Point taken. Though, please keep in mind only a few of my men know english.”

Gustavo mentioned, “I will. I also know some russian and chinese. But, I do not want these russians to know that.”

Severo requested, “That is nice to know. If either of the groups we are meeting give the order to kill us in their native language, let us know. I would like to take a few of them down, before they kill us.”

Gustavo commented, “If you hear me start shooting, you know it is time to go for your gun.”

Severo said, “I guess that would work well enough.”

Severo then saw that the men were gathering around the left side of a specific car. Though, the men were keeping their distance.

Severo then saw a man open the right back door of the car in question. The man in question was brown haired, fair skinned man, with a medium physical built. The man then shut his door, and walked around the back of the car, to where he was in front of the back right passenger door. He then opened the right back passenger door.

Severo then saw a slender woman, with long blond hair that was tied in a ponytail, whom was wearing a red dress, step out of the car. As the woman stood up onto the pavement of the parking lot, he thought, 'From her body language, she has a firm demeanor. And from the body language of the men down there, towards her, she is clearly their leader.'

Severo stated, “From what I am seeing. The woman with blond hair, with these men, is likely their leader. Is that going to be a problem with you?”

Gustavo commented, “As long as she is professional, I could care less. How about, yourself?”

Severo said, “From they way she is standing, and the reactions I see from the other, I don't think her gender will be a problem.”

Severo then turned, and walked away from the window, passed Gustavo. He came to a stop, in the middle of the room, as he turned towards his men.

Meanwhile, Gustavo continued looking out the window, as he noticed that the blond woman in question had look up at him, and he got a clear looked at her face, but he quickly turned around, before she could see his.

Gustavo turned to Severo, as he stated, “By the way, she has scars on her face. She looks like someone had fried the right side of her face.”

Severo turned to Gustavo, as he firmly stated, “And you will not mention her scars to her, nor to her men. Is that understood?”

Gustavo replied, “As I said, I intend to just stand back, and watch.”

Severo replied, “Good.” He then turned to his men in the room, whom were not looking at him. Severo stated, “The same goes for the rest of you. And tell the others, as well. We will not have any problems with these meetings.”

“Also, send a few men downstairs to greet them. Be polite. Though, tell them that they can only six people, of their choosing, can come up.”

One of his men asked, in spanish, “Do you want them frisked, before they are allowed up here?”

Severo answered, “No. They out number us. If we try to disarm them, we are likely going to just provoke them, and likely die. Plus, it is our superiors, on both sides, that want this meeting. And as I said, I don't want to any problems. Also, have someone make sure all the toilet seats, in the restrooms of this building, are lowered. And that is an order.”

As his men carried out his orders, Severo thought, 'I am not going to screw this meeting up over the possibility of a woman needing to take a piss.'

Severo then double check, to make sure the room was ready for the meeting. And he found that the room was a prepared as it was going to be.

(_)

A few minutes later, Severo, four of his men, and Gustavo were standing further into the meeting room, as they were facing Balalaika, Boris, and four other russian men, whom were closer to the entrance.

Severo noted the russians were looking at them, with calm, neutral expressions on their faces, and cold stares from their eyes.

Severo thought, 'I best get this meeting started.' He looked over at Balalaika, as he calmly said, in english, “Hello. My name is Severo. To whom I am I addressing?”

Balalaika looked at Severo, as she thought, 'So, he already realizes I am in charge of my group. That shows a bit of intelligence on his part. And he is using english, because we do not know spanish, and he likely doesn't our native language. And since is he is being polite. I might as well do so, as well... For now...'

Balalaika answered, in english, “You may address me as, Balalaika.”

Severo requested, in a polite tone of voice, “Well, Balalaika, let us sit down and talk. Also, you and your men are more than welcome to use the snack bar, or any other amenities were have at our dispose, here.”

Balalaika calmly responded, “That will not be necessary. We came talk about business. And that is what we will do. Then, we will leave.”

Severo thought, 'She is being curt, though not polite. So, I am still fine.'

Balalaika turned and walked over to the right couch at the front of the room. Boris followed right behind her.

As soon as Balalaika started walking towards the front of the room, Severo did so as well.

A few seconds later, Balalaika was the first to set down, and she did so on the right couch. Severo then saw down across the coffee table, on the left couch.

Boris walked up to stand behind Balalaika, as he faced Severo.

Meanwhile Gustavo walked up to stand behind Severo, as he faced the Balalaika and Boris.

Severo then looked around. He noticed, as he thought, 'My men are keeping to the side of the room, I am at. While, the russians are standing on the side of the room Balalaika is on. Now, that I am going to complain. If we do have a fight, this will decrease the chance of friendly fire.'

Severo then turned his head back to look at Balalaika face. He saw that Balalaika was looking be at him.

Balalaika was the first to speak, and what she said took Severo by surprise, as she insulted the cartel members, “So, tell me. Do you south american pigs actually know how to handle your weapons?”

Severo looked over at his men, as he quickly ordered, in spanish, “Let it slide. I will handle this.” He saw his men relax a bit. He thought, 'She is baiting us. And I cannot allow any us to do something foolish. Now, to respond in a manner she will not expect.'

Severo turned back to Balalaika, as he responded, in english, in a calm tone of voice, “If this meeting turns out well, then that will be of little consequence to you.” He thought, 'Alice was not joking about russians trying to be insulting. I am glad she warned me. Balalaika is clearly trying to goad a reaction from me. And I am not going to give her that benefit.'

Balalaika chuckled a little. She then complimented, “Well said.”

Severo decided to keep the conversation moving, as he inquired, “So, what do you wish to discuss first, concerning our business?”

Balalaika asked, “How can we be assured that you products are pure?”

Severo thought, 'She is going directly for the heart of the matter. That is not bad.'

Severo answered, “We prefer to move pure product because it less volume for more value And once you have paid us, and received the product, we do not care how you cut it.”

Balalaika responded, “I can appreciate the logistics of that. By the way, why did you not use the name of your product?”

Severo thought, 'I wonder if this is her first meeting like this. If that is the case, her superiors might be testing her, as well. Either way, I need to explain the situation to her.'

Severo stated, “It is a legal move. I am did not have you, nor your men searched. And you are not going to search us. Still, this could be a string, with someone wearing a wire. If so, it is more difficult to prosecute, even in a situation like this, if some details are intentionally left out of the conversation.”

Balalaika replied, with mild astonishment, “Ah... I will have to remember that tactic.” She thought, 'You are more intelligent and savvy than I first believed you were.'

Gustavo thought, 'Smart move, Severo. You are sidestepping a lot of problems. I can see why the capo is looking more closely at this man. And I thought I was coming here for different reasons.'

Severo mentioned, “Still, there is the matter how shipping will be handled. Where you want us to drop off, and you pick up. We are flexible. As long as we are paid. But the further we have to move it from the point of production, to the point of delivery, the more expensive it will be.”

Balalaika responded, “Of course. Though, you clearly have more experience in this area.” She thought, 'I want to know your thoughts on this, before I comment.'

Severo thought, 'I can tell she is being honest in her request. So, here is my chance to make a good impression on her.'

Severo explained, “If you wish us to ship our product to you, we were thinking of going by ship. While air is quicker, it is becoming riskier. Ships are a tried and truth method. There are dozens of ways to hide our products on cargo ships, in vast quantities. While, airplanes have weight issues, and limited space. Now, what we figure, the easiest way to get our product to your shores is by way of meeting your representatives in Vladivostok. It is a straight shot, across the Pacific, from South America, to Russia.”

Balalaika commented, “That is not a bad plan. That is a well populated area, with a very busy port. But, we do not wish to cross Siberia. There is too much risk.” She mentally added, 'Also, our organization has little control in that area. But, I am not going to tell you that.'

Severo said, “Going through inland can be more difficult, and a lot more expensive. Especially, if the produce is transported across multiple borders.”

Balalaika inquired, “It is possible to get the product though the Black sea?” She thought, 'That way we can get this cocaine directly to our territories, with little trouble.'

Severo calmly answered, 'It depends on how much you trust bribed egyptians and turks, one way. And how much you trust bribed spaniards, moroccans, and turks, the other way. I would not recommend either way.”

“Also, going inland from southern asia, or the middle east, is a very bad idea. You will either have to go through the Golden Triangle, or the Golden Crescent. And as you know, competitors are not very tolerate in this business.”

Balalaika thought, 'I guess I spoke too soon. Though, there are other options.' She suggested, “Perhaps we should cut the difference. And we meet each other halfway.”

Severo responded, “We do have some contacts, at various points, on the coasts of indochina.” He mentally added, 'One of those contacts even arranged my next meeting with the chinese.' He continued, “We could make the hand off in that area.”

Balalaika said, “That could be a possibility. But, we need to look at our other options.”

Severo commented, “Well, ice-cutters are expensive, and raise a lot of red flags. Though, either way, we are not going through the arctic sea. And navigating the Baltic sea, the Gulf of Finland, and the fjords, has its own challenges.”

Balalaika begrudgingly thought, 'He's right. And he has a firm grasp of geography.' She said, “I can see that. And I guess we will leave the travel routes to our superiors. Now, the matter of cost itself. We prefer to avoid U.S. cash. The yankee imperialists have become to obsessive over tracking each bill they have.”

Severo stated, “While we are not against doing business in cash that is not from the U.S. Rubles are not exactly welcome in this type of business, at this time. They are hard to move, and redeem. Especially, with the recent collapse of your nation.”

Balalaika responded, “That is understandable. Though, what about Soviet gold chervonets and South Africa gold krugerrands?”

Severo cracked a grin, as he said, “Gold, my dear, never goes out of style. And depending on the quality of those coins, I don't think my superiors would have a problem with that.”

Balalaika gave Severo a small smile, in return. She replied, “Good.”

Severo questioned, “Shall we discuss the specifics of our deal? Such as how much in quantity will you need, per delivery? And how regular your deliveries will be. This is to give us an idea have how much of our production we will have to adjust to your regular orders.”

Balalaika calmly answered, “Unfortunately, no. This was just the first meeting. And we only wanted to know the basics of what you were offering. But, you clearly are open to having working with us. And you have demonstrated you have the knowledge to trade with us. Which was the whole point of this meeting.”

Severo replied, “Of course.” He thought, 'Those questions were a long shot, anyway.'

Balalaika thought, 'While I am here, I might as well ask.' She inquired, “By the way.
Is there a decent place to have a drink in this town? Somewhere I can take my men, in which we will not attract unwanted attention?”

Severo answered, “I know just the place. It is on the west end of the city, near the Río Guaire river.” He then gave them directions to the bar. Along with the bar's name.

When Severo has finished giving Balalaika directions to the bar, Balalaika said, “Thank you for the directions.” She then stood up, from the couch she had been sitting in.

Severo stood up a second later.

Balalaika commented, “We will be contacting our superiors. And they will be contacting yours.”

Severo replied, “That will be fine.”

Balalaika turned to her men, as she stated, in russian, “Gentlemen, this meeting has concluded on good terms. We shall now leave.”

Severo looked over at Gustavo.

Gustavo was looking at Severo, and he gave him a small smile, and a nod. Meaning everything was still alright.

Severo turned back to look at the russians, as thought, 'Good. She didn't just give the order to have us killed.'

Severo turned to look over at a cartel member standing near the door. When he saw the man look back at him, he gave him a simple nod. The cartel member understand, as he walked over to the door, opened it, and held it open for the russians.

Severo and the other cartel members then watched as the russians walk out of the room, with Balalaika being the third of the six person group, to walk through, into the hallway.

A few seconds after the russian left, the cartel member holding the door gently shut it, and turned to Severo.

Gustavo commented, “That went well.”

Severo turned to Gustavo, as he agreed, in spanish, “Yes. It did.” He then looked in front of himself, as he left out a deep breath. He thought, 'One meeting down. One meeting to go... Which should start in around...' He looked over at the clock, as he concluded his thought, 'An hour... Now, to check on things.'

Severo then walked to the window. He watched as the russians, including Balalaika, exit the building. With them soon rejoining the group in that stayed in the parking lot.

A minute later, Severo watched them all get into the cars. With them then driving off into the distance, in a convoy.

With one meeting now officially concluded, Severo then began to mental prepared for his next meeting.

(_)

An hour later, Daiyu, River, and Lee, appeared an empty alleyway, in downtown Caracas, Venezuela.

While all three of them looked around, River pocketed her reality device, as she casually said, “Well, here we are.”

Lee looked at River and Daiyu, as she asked, “Yea, River. But, where, and when, exactly is here, River? You didn't exactly tell us, when you got the hit on their location, on your tracking tablet. Nor, did you tell us later, when we decided to teleport after Pedro and Matthew.”

River turn to the other two women, as she answered, “I felt like you two need a surprised. And to answer your question, we are in an alleyway, in downtown Caracas, Venezuela. The exact date is October nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one. The time is sometime in the afternoon. Pedro and Matthew came in the morning, but they were in the slums. Though, it didn't take a genius they were heading for downtown. So, I bumped us here a few hours after them, to give them time to get to the city.”

Daiyu looked at her two lovers, as she commented, “That could be good, or bad, for us. If they already left, we will be searching the city for nothing.”

Lee disagreed, in a polite tone of voice, “No. They would not have left, yet. Pedro always heads somewhere for a reason. He won't just up and leave. He will stay for a day. At least to get some rest.”

River agreed, “True. Pedro always goes somewhere for a reason. And they could have just crashed at a hotel to get some rest.”

Daiyu pointed out, “If they went to a hotel, we won't find them on the street.”

River conceded, “True. But, even if we don't find them by tonight, we can just check my tracking device. And if they have left. We will leave. Or, we will wait for them to leave. Within a reasonable time frame. Besides, I have always wanted to check this city out on my own. Roberta, Fabiola, Garcia, all stated this was an interesting town to live in, and around.”

Daiyu confirmed, “Yes. They do occasionally say that.”

River commented, “And when we visit them, we never really left the Lovelace plantation for long. This will be a good chance to check this city out of our own leisure. Though, I find it odd we are still in the Black Lagoon reality we just came from. I wonder why, Pedro and Matthew did not leave your home reality, Daiyu?”

Daiyu responded, “I am not sure, myself. It could be accidental, or intentional.”

Lee theorized, “Well, we can guess that Pedro is the one with the reality device, and even though he read my stories, and knows all of us. He is still new at this. This was likely an accident. He could have forgot to think of the reality he wanted to go to. And instead he thought of the general place and time. That is why, with this jump, he only went a few months in the future of the same reality. And why they ended up in the slums of this city.”

Daiyu stated, “That is a very plausible theory. Though, there is something familiar about today’s' date, but I cannot put my finger on it.”

Lee commented, “Maybe because we jumped exactly seven months into the future, from March Nineteenth, to October Nineteenth.”

River complimented, “Good point.”

Daiyu shrugged, as she replied, “That could be it. It has just been so long, I am not sure, myself.”

River stretched her arms a bit. As she dropped her hands back to her sides, said. “Well, either way, I am glad we got some rest, and something to eat, before we jumped here.”

Lee agreed, “Yea. And that shower helped matters, a lot.”

Daiyu said, “I will agree with that.”

Lee inquired, “So, have either of you been to this city before, for a fair amount of time? It sounds like while you visit the Lovelace home, you haven't really seen much outside that estate.”

River answered, “That would be correct. And I am surprised you don't want to come with us to visit the Lovelace household, when they invite us over.”

Lee commented, “I would like to keep my distance from those three, for very obvious reasons.”

River giggled a little, and Daiyu cracked a grin at Lee's reaction.

As River calmed down, she replied, “That is understandable.”

Daiyu stated, “I have been to this city few times, during this time period. So, it is good that I am in my female form.”

River agreed, “Yes. We don't want someone to mistake you, for you past self. That could cause you past self some problems”

Daiyu replied, “Exactly. And we need to avoid bumping into the past selves of anyone we know. Especially, those of the Lovelace household.”

Lee commented, “That goes without saying. Though, if you have been here, in such a matter, you should have a good lay of the land.”

Daiyu stated, “My memory is a bit vague on this city, but I can get us around.”

Lee said, “Good. There are some sights I have read about, that are in this city, that I would like to see.”

Daiyu responded, “I would be more than happy to show you around. And all of us know spanish. So, talking to the locals will not be a problem.”

Lee replied, “Yes. River, here, is a good teacher.”

Daiyu agreed, “You are correct about that.”

River smiled at both of Daiyu and Lee, as she kindly said, “Thank you.”

Lee and Daiyu both returned River's smile, as they replied, almost in unison, “You're welcome.”

River commented, “Well, if we haven't found Pedro and Matthew by tonight, we could get a drink at a local bar. That is if, you know any bars here, Daiyu?”

Daiyu answered, “I remember going to a bar, here, that was quiet fun to go to. Though, I cannot exactly remember what was fun about it. But, I do remember how to get there.”

Lee said, “I am okay with that.”

River stated, “So am I.”

Lee asked, “Now Daiyu, which way to do we go, in our search for those two?”

Daiyu stated, “Since we cannot cover this town in one day. We will head for the west end of the town, because that is where the bar is. To be exact, the bar is by a river that snakes through the town.”

River said, “Okay. Lead the way.”

Daiyu grinned, as she replied, “With pleasure?”

Daiyu then looked both ways, down the alleyway, they were in. She saw that the street one way was busier than the other. And she started walking toward the busier street, and then she turned down a sidewalk, with River and Lee following right behind her.

(_)

Five minutes later, inside the second floor meeting room, in the building that Manisarera Cartel, Severo had a sense of deja fu, as he stood by the same front window, as he did before, while he looked out of the window, and towards the street below. He, his men, and Gustavo, were waiting for the chinese to finally show up.

As before, Gustavo walked up beside Severo, as he looked out of the window, as well, while he said, in spanish, “I did not expect the chinese to be running late. From experience, they are usually very punctual. Do you know anything about the chinese we are about to meet.”

Severo continued looking at the window, down at the street below, as he calmly answered, in spanish, “Well, our superiors did not tell me much about this chinese whom are coming. But, they stated the name of our go-between, in our cartel, whom originally started the ball rolling on this meeting.”

Gustavo asked, “Who is the contact?”

Severo answered, “A man named, Abergo.”

Gustavo continued looking out the window, as he stated, “Ah... Abergo. Then, I can guess we are about to meet a man know as Mister Chang. Along with some of his men.”

Severo inquired, “Who is this, Chang?”

Gustavo responded, “That is Mister Chang to those that are not his friends. And he is a chinese man. He the head of his section of a Triad based out of Hong Kong. He is the big fish in a small pond, in a fishing town known as Roanapur, in Thailand.”

Severo guessed, “A smuggling port for the Golden Triangle?”

Gustavo replied, “Yes.”

Severo thought, 'So, this Mister Chang has some experience under his belt. Unlike Balalaika, whom I could tell was not use to this type of meeting. But, she put on such a well done front, I knew better than to call her on it. I need to know more about this man.'

Severo inquired, “What does Mister Chang look like?”

Gustavo answered, “Mister Chang has black hair. He is in great shape. He is in his late thirties, early forties. And he likes to wear a formal business suit, including a long coat. Also, he prefers to wear sunglasses, over eyes, even inside.”

Severo replied, “Okay.' He thought, 'I won't mention the coat, or sunglasses. Now, to the next important question.' He asked, “How dangerous is Mister Chang and his men?”

Gustavo stated, “Very dangerous. But, Mister Chang is very friendly and polite. If we are civil, we should be fine.”

Severo recalled what Alice told him this morning, as he thought, 'So, Alice was right. But, Gustavo clearly knows a lot about the situation. How is that?' He looked over at Gustavo, as he questioned, “How do you know all this?”

Gustavo continued looking out the window, as he answered, “I know personally Abergo. I won't say we were friends, but we respect each other. And we occasionally talk to each other over the phone. He told me all this. Though, I am surprised that I was not informed that it was Abergo who was the go-between.”

Severo looked back out of the window, and towards the street, as he stated, “Maybe the capo doesn't know you both talk to each other.”

Gustavo conceded, “That is possible. And this is something I would like to keep on the quiet. Now, that I think about it.”

Severo inquired, “Why?”

Gustavo replied, “Simple. One time, Abergo, offered me a job, as his second in command. If our superiors knew that we talked to each other, they would likely prevent me from ever having that job.”

Severo asked, “So, are you going to take him up on his offer?

Gustavo responded, “I like to keep my options open. The only reason I would take the job would be if these meetings were somehow screwed up. Which I doubt is going to happen. Besides, I prefer to work closer to our homeland. But, at least the weather is pretty much the same there, as it is here.”

Severo agreed, “Yes. There is that.”

Gustavo stated, “But, if something really big did happen, that I could be partly blamed for, I would be on the first plane to Thailand, in heartbeat. Still, I am not sure about Abrego.”

Severo questioned, “Why is that?... What is he like?”

Gustavo said, “Abrego likes to think with his pants. And he has a reputation of being a bad influence on those he works for.”

Severo agreed, “That is bad.”

Just then, they saw several black, four door car, drive up the street below, and into the nearly empty parking lot.

Gustavo commented, “Looks like another army.”

Serevo replied, “Yes. Let's hope our luck holds.”

Over the next minute, Severo and Gustavo watched as men filed out of the car and got organized. The men were all wearing black business suits.

A minute later, Severo saw someone open the back door of one of the cars. And a man, wearing sunglasses, in a long coat, with a white scarf draped around the long coat, get out of the car.

Severo watched the body language of the men, in the parking lot, as he thought, 'That man, in the coat, is likely Chang.... Well, Mister Chang. And I have to admit that he and his men are snappy dressers.”

Gustavo commented, “That must be Mister Chang.”

Severo said, “Yes. And from the body language of the others. I don't think many of them are military.” He thought, 'Also, I will let Mister Chang introduce himself. I don't want him to know that I already know who he is.'

Gustavo responded, “That is good. Though, I know Chang use to be a cop, and he is dangerous with his pistols.”

Severo turned to Gustavo, as he asked, “Pistols? As in plural?”

Gustavo looked at Severo, as he answered, “Yes. Sorry, I didn't mention it early. But, Mister Chang like to use two pistols at once. And he is very good at it.”

Severo inquire, with a bit of disbelief in his tone of voice, “Like from a chinese mafia action movie?”

Gustavo answered, “Yes. From what Abergo told me. Yes. Exactly like that.”

Severo responded, with a bit of surprise in his tone of voice, “Damn. This day gets stranger by the minute.”

Severo fully turned away from the window, and towards the four other men in the room.

A second later, Gustavo did the same, as he looked at Severo's men.

Severo ordered, “Same plan as before. Send someone downstairs to politely tell them that only six of them can come up here. The rest can wait downstairs. And do not search them. Only this time, have some left the toilet seats.” He thought, 'If Mister Chang has to take a piss, will not have him wonder about us.'

None of his men laughed, nor did Gustavo, as one of Severo's men in the room when downstairs to carried out his orders.

(_)

Five minutes later, Severo, Gustavo, and two of Severo's men watched as the door to their room open.

Two of Severo's men walked out in front, and they came to a stop, further into the room, by the two other members of Severo's group. The two men in question then turned to face the door.

The next person to come their the open door was Chang. He was followed by five of his men. The last man in Chang's group closing the door behind him.

As Chang and his men came to a stop, and looked at the group of men in front of them, Chang stated, in english, “I am Mister Chang. Who is in charge?”

Severo thought, 'So, he is up front and direct. I like that.' He said, in english, “I am, Mister Chang. My name is Severo.”

Chang looked over at Severo, as he commented, “Well Severo, I apologize for being late, but traffic was difficult.”

Severo thought, 'It doesn't matter if he is telling the truth, or not. We need to keep the conversation moving.' He calmly said, “Of course. Things like that happen. Also, you and you men are welcome to the snack bar on the wall.”

Chang turned to his men, as he said, in chinese, “You may have some coffee and snacks from the table.” he looked back over to Severo as he said, in english, “Thank you. I am sure some of my men will enjoy a small snack. Or, at least some coffee.”

Severo responded, “Yes. Coffee can help a lot.” He then gestured towards the couches and chairs, as he said, “Now, let's sit down and talk.”

Chang replied, “Absolutely.”

Chang then started walking towards the couches, chairs and table, from one angle, as Severo approached the furniture from a different angle.

As they two men continued to walk towards the furniture, two of the five chinese men went over to the snack table, to get coffee and donuts.

A few second later, both men sat down in couches, across from each other, with the rectangular coffee table between them.

Severo then looked around, and he noticed a much more relax atmosphere in the room, than when the russians came. The room was not segregated between groups, like it was when the russians were there. Instead, the cartel men and the chinese men were scattered across the room. Though, everyone was paying attention to Chang, and himself.

Severo thought, 'This is good. This makes the situation more relaxing, and conductive towards doing business. Even Gustavo is not standing behind me. I hope this is a good omen.' He looked back at Chang, whom he saw as looking back at him, as he continued his thoughts, 'And I wonder...'

Severo calmly inquired, “So, where would you like to start? I have the feeling this not the first time you have had this type of meeting.”

Chang responded, “You would be correct. I am doing this as a favor, for several people. And as of right now, I am just testing the waters.”

Severo thought, 'Good. He has experience. That will help both of us.' He said, “That is a good. We will talk about transport of product. And type of payment. We will leave the volume of product, and exact delivery routes for later negotiators.”

Chang agreed, “That will be fine.”

Severo asked, “So, where do you wish to transport our products too?”

Chang stated, “Various places in, and around, southeast Asia. From China, to India, to Indonesia and Malaysia. We have contacts all over these region. And while heroin is lucrative. It is like everything else. No everyone buys the same type of product. So, those that don't want the heroin, we will offer cocaine powder, and rock cocaine.”

Severo thought, with a bit of annoyance, 'There no point in now in requesting him to mention our products by name. Though, from what Gustavo told me. Chang use to be a cop. But, I doubt this is a sting. Since this set up by, I believe the man's name is Abrego, one of our cartel members. And as such, this is a legitimate contact between our two organizations. And if this is a sting, Mister Chang will either be painfully killed by our superiors, or his superiors.'

'Now, either way, it is my job to keep this conversation moving to the point, where we agree our two organizations will have further talks on the matter.'

Severo said, “We can process it either way. Though, rock cocaine is a more expensive, because it require further refinement of the finished product. And, we don't cut our own products, because we don't want to be accused of cheating our customers. Though, once you have our product, you don't care what you do with the product, once payment and delivery has been done. Also, we like to ship the product pure and uncut, for volume to cost reasons.”

Chang thought, 'Yes. Smaller size, less weight.' He asked, “Of course. And what type of shipping do you prefer?”

Severo answered, “We prefer to ship by boat. It is easier. But, the further we go, the high the price. To save on money, we are willing to meet you halfway.” He mentally reflected, 'And if we get both these deals, in the way they want. We might be able to deliver to the chinese and russians, on the same boat, at two different points, in the south chinese sea. In which case, we will charge them the same standard fare, but we will pocket the difference in expenses.'

Chang said, “By boat is fine. Also, can even provide harbors, documents, and assurances that the local officials will interfere with our transactions.” He thought, 'That is why I control Roanapur in the first place.'

Severo thought, 'I second thought. If he is will to offer all that. We will have to cut him a discount.' He stated, “Our prices for transport will go way down for you, if you can provide all that.”

Chang mentally reflected, 'That is what I thought. Now, for payment options.' He offered, “That is good to hear. And when it comes to payment, we can offer, Hong Kong dollar,
Chinese Renminbi, Taiwanese Yuan, British Pounds, and even U.S. currency. It is all up to you.”

Severo cracked a grin, as he complimented, “I admire someone whom offers me options. Still, on the form of payment. I will have to take that up with my superiors.”

Chang replied, “Of course. I will have to do that same.”

Severo happily though, 'I think we can do business.'

Chang inquired, “I guess there is only one thing left to ask. Where can man, and his men, find a good place to get a drink in this town.” He thought, 'Those places I have already been too, are either to small for all my men. Or, were disappointments. So, I might as well ask a local this time, for a recommendation or two.'

Severo thought, 'I might as well send him to the same bar as Balalaika. It is the only bar in town that I know of, which does not care if a bunch of foreigners show up to get something to drink. And I doubt the two groups will cause much trouble. They clearly like to keep to themselves. In all likelihood, one group of them will take on side of the room, and the other group will take the other side.'

Severo said, “Well, I do know this place. It is on the west end of town, by the river.” He then gave Chang directions to the bar.

When Severo was finished tell him how to get to the bar, Chang replied, “Thank you. I look forward to continuing this conversation at a later date.”

Severo replied, “So do I.”

Chang then got up from his seat. He turned to his men, as said, in chinese, “Time to leave, men. And we have a place to party tonight.”

Severo noticed a couple of Chang's men chuckled a little, for a few seconds.

Severo then got up, from his seat, as well. He, his men, and Gustavo then watched as Chang and men men started walking towards the door. Those chinese men that were at the snack table, set down their cups and plates, as they headed for the door.

When the first chinese man reached the door, he opened the door, but he did not step through it, and into hallway.

Instead, the chinese man wait there, and Severo then watched as Chang was the first to exit the room.

As Severo noticed this, he thought, 'First one in. First one out. This Mister Chang clearly prefers to lead from the front in so many ways. I admire this. I think we will be able to do business with him. Very good business, indeed.'

A few seconds later, the cartel members watched as the last of the chinese men left, with the last one shutting the door behind him.

A few moments passed by, the Gustavo turned to Severo, as he stated, in spanish, “That was well done... Both those meetings were very well done. Now, if you can pull the hat trick, and take care of the Bloodhound, I think you will likely have a very bright future in our organization.”

Severo turned to Gustavo, as he said, in spanish, “I won't let you down.”

Gustavo calmly pointed out, “It is not me that you have to please, but our superiors. But, rest assured that you are on the path to doing so.” He then looked the room for a few seconds, before turning back to Severo, as he said, “Good day, gentlemen.”

Severo thought, 'Yea. It figured you would leave right after your job is done. And I hope I can pull this off, as well. But, I am not going to let you know that I have some self-doubts about the situation. The Bloodhound reputation states that she is very dangerous, and I am not stupid enough to think that taking her down is a sure thing. Even with all my men helping me do so.'

Severo then walked over one of the front windows, and he watched Chang and the rest of the chinese men leave his building, getting to their cars, and leave.

While Severo walked to the window, to watch Chang and his men leave, Gustavo had turned from Severo, and walked to the door leading to the hallway. Gustavo then opened it, walked through it, and close the door behind him. After which, he headed downstairs, and to his personal car, which was parked behind the building, in the opposite direction of the parking lot that the russians and chinese had just used.

This was in case he had to make a quick exit and getaway. Which, fortunately, he did not have to do.

After Gustavo got into his car, he planned to drive to meet with his superiors, whom were in another part of the nation of Venezuela. With him personally informing them of what had transpired at the meetings they had just had.

(_)

An hour later, on the west end of Caracas. On the sidewalk with several people coming and going. Beside a moderately busy one land street, Benny, Revy, and Dutch were walking beside each other.

While they were all clearly foreigners, the locals paid them no mind, except for walking around them.

As the three adults continued walking, Benny was close to the buildings, to his right, by about six feet. To Benny's left was Revy. To Revy's left was to Dutch. With the street being to Dutch's left. With Dutch being able a yard away from curb of the street, with the one lane traffic they were beside, coming from behind them.

The reason Revy was in the center of the group was not because Dutch and Benny were worried about her. They were worried about everyone else, and how a simple brush on the shoulder, by a passerby might set off Revy's hair-trigger temper.

Though, the afternoon had been very productive for them. After a very tasty lunch, in La Guaira, they retrieved the supplies they could from around the port area. Including fuel for the engines of the boat.

Once those supplies were back on their PT boat, and secure, inside the boat, which was locked, they quickly found a taxi driver that would take them to Caracas. They reached the west part of Caracas an hour and ten minutes later.

Once they paid the taxi driver for the fare, which was not as much as Dutch was expecting. And while the language barrier was a minor difficulty, with the three adults not knowing spanish, and their main language being english. They were able to find people to give them directions, in english, to a shop that Dutch needed to go to for parts for their boat.

Though, the three adults did have to spend about half an hour, walking around, until they found the shop in question, that sold the small parts that Dutch needed for the engines, and other part of the boat.

With those items paid for, and the items stored safely in the pockets of Dutch's flack jacket. And once that errand was done, the three of them decided to do some window shopping, before they got some supper, and when to the bar that Dutch's port master friend had recommended.

As they walked, and looked around, they carried on casual conversations, on the weather, and what items they see in the windows that caught there it.

Then, Dutch decided to change the subject to another point of interest. A point of interest in the PT boat they were using.

As they continued walking, Dutch asked, “So, what do you two think we should name our boat?” He thought, 'We have yet to have a name for our boat. And there is not a name on it. Plus, the only documents we could find in the boat, on its history had the boat listed the boat by its serial number, with no name. So, we might as well get this over with.'

Revy stated, with excitement in her tone of voice, “How about, the torpedo?... No... No... How about the rip roarer?... Or even, the cutlass?...”

Dutch thought, 'Oh. I should have known the can of worms that I was opening with that question. I need to let Revy down, lightly. Her making a scene here, would be bad for all three of us, especially since she is the only one of us that has a gun.'

Dutch delicately said, “While cutlass sounds nice, I don't care for the other two. Besides which, I am looking for name for the boat that is a little less aggressive.”

Revy shrugged, as she casually said, “Well, you asked.”

Dutch thought, with relief, 'Good. She took my comments in stride.'

Benny suggested, “How about we call our ship, Lagoon?”

Revy inquired, “Lagoon? Where did you get the idea for that name?”

Dutch requested, “Yes. I would like to hear your logic behind this name, as well?”

Benny explained, “After the book, the Blue Lagoon. None of us can go home again, so we might as well be searching for our own paradise.”

Revy let out a laugh. She then flatly stated, “If you are looking for paradise in this world, you're not going to find it. Also, I saw the movie. It was shit.”

Dutch rubbed his chin, and his goatee, with his right hand, as he said, “I don't know, Revy. I kind of like the name. It is a positive name. And the word, lagoon, makes me think of relaxing and fishing. And given our situation, we need to be as positive in our thinking as possible.” He then dropped his right hand back to his side.

Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Alright. I can live with it.”

Dutch replied, “Then, Lagoon, it is.”

Benny said, “Thanks, Dutch.”

Revy questioned, “So, where are we going to go to eat tonight? Cause I really don't want to just eat from a street vendor.”

Dutch suggested, “Well, since we are in latin america, let us go to an authentic latin restaurant, that has a casual atmosphere.”

Benny said, “I am okay with that, as long as the food is not too spicy.”

Revy stated, “I have a cast iron stomach. So, I can live with latin food. As long as I can have a beer with my meal.”

Dutch said, “I will see what I can do.”

Revy commented, with a bit of excitement, and eagerness, in her tone of voice, “Good. And then we will head to the bar?”

Dutch sighed, as he mentally reflect, 'Revy, sometimes you act like a child with a one track mind.' He stated, in a slightly deflated tone of voice, “Yes. We will then go to the bar.”

Revy happily replied, “Thanks Dutch.”

Dutch responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Don't mention it.”

Dutch thought, 'I would bet real money that girl comes from a long line of alcoholics. Maybe from both sides of her family. And with that red hair, and given the fact she said she is from New York City, it doesn't take a genius to realize she is part irish. It also explains her temper... Though, I am not going to say a word of this to her. It is just not worth pissing her off. Especially, since she has natural fighting skills, and she is willing to work for me.'

'Still, a chinese and a irish blend... Now, that is a strange mix... It sounds like a coffee recipe gone wrong.'

Dutch cracked a grin at his private joke, as he, Revy, and Benny, then continued walking down the sidewalk, as they continued their window shopping for a few hours. Then, they decided to get some supper. After which, they headed to the bar that was recommend to them.

(_)

Later that evening, right before dark, at their old fashioned hotel, Pedro and Matthew were awaken at eight PM, on the dot, by the alarm clock set on the nightstand, between their two beds.

As they got up, they found they were rested. They then got dressed and ready. After which, they went to a nearby convenience store. At the store, they bought combs, razors, shaving cream, deodorant, toothbrushes, and toothpaste.

Pedro and Matthew then returned to the hotel, and they quickly used those items to look a little better, and small a little better. This including them shaving the five o'clock shadows on their faces. With neither of them getting any nicks on their faces, nor shaving cream on their clothing.

When they were finished, Pedro was able to place all those items into the various pockets of his long coat.

Then, after a quick bite to eat at a restaurant near the hotel, they took a taxi, from a company that was recommended by the questionable hotel clerk, to the bar that the same clerk had told them about.

Pedro and Matthew reached the bar, on the west end of Caracas, it was dark, and just after Nine PM, local time.

Pedro then paid the taxi driver, and both men got out of opposite sides of the back of the taxi.

While both men walked a little close to the bar, the taxi drove away, down the street.

The to men came to a stop, side by side, with each other, as they look at the bar, with Matthew to Pedro's right side. The outside of the front of the bar had windows, and a double-door entrance. The exterior had large, paneled windows, and wooden paneling on the walls. All in all, it looked like an average bar.

Matthew said, “Well, here we are.”

Pedro stated, “Let's head inside.”

Matthew replied, “Yes. Let's do that.”

Both men then walked into the bar.

A few seconds later, after they enter the bar, they came to a stop. Pedro was standing to Matthew's left side, as they look around the room. And what they saw surprised them.

Matthew muttered, “You got to be kidding me.”

Pedro quietly said, “I don't believe this.”

It was all the two men could do, not gape at who they saw, as they continued looking around them.

While the bar itself was just wooden paneling, wooden floors, wood round tables, wooden chairs, wooden bar counter, with wooden stools in front of the counter. Though, the bottoms of the chairs and stools were cushions. Also, there was no music playing on the room.

It was whom they saw that surprised them.

Beside the bartender, behind the bar counter, whom they did not know, they recognized a few faces.

Across the room, in front of them, was the bar counter. To the right side of the bar counter, they saw three adults sitting down. But, even with their backs turned, Pedro and Matthew could easily tell whom the three adults were, by their clothing, skin tones, hair color and hair styles, or lack there of, gave them away.

The member to the right of the three person group was a slender woman with tanned skin. With her black untucked shirt, blue jeans, and her red hair in a ponytail, they both could tell that the woman was Revy.

To Revy's right was a slightly taller man with fair skin and a blond ponytail, which meant the man had to be Benny.

To Benny's right was a larger dark skinned man whom was bald. The man wear a green flack jacket and green pants. Which men that man was Dutch.

And that was not all.

While the path to the bar counter was clear, from the entrance was a straight line, with no tables or chairs between the two points in the room, there were several tables and chairs on both sides of the room. From the entrance to the bar counter, with the large rounded tables went four rows deep, and six rows long. With each table having six chairs to it.

And except for a couple of tables by the door, near Matthew and Pedro, all of them were full.

To the right side of the room was practically the entire membership of Hotel Moscow, including Balalaika and Boris. With Balalaika wearing her usual red dress. The only woman in the entire group was Balalaika. And for obvious reasons, the only two people that Pedro and Matthew recognized was Balalaika and Boris.

And on the left side of the room was Chang and his men, sitting at various tables. Chang in wearing his usual clothing, including his black long coat. And Chang was wearing sunglasses inside. Though, Hotel Moscow did outnumber Chang's men, but not by much.

All of those the people sitting down had something to drink in front of them. Some had bottles of beer, others where using glasses, so they could share larger bottles of alcoholic beverages.

Fortunately, Pedro and Matthew also noticed that no one else in the bar had paid them any attention, except for a couple of quick glances, from a few of Chang's men, and a few members of Hotel Moscow. But, Pedro and Matthew noticed that those men quickly when back to talking amongst themselves.

Matthew whispered, “Half away across the multiverse, in the past, on another continent, and we still end up in a bar with these people.”

Pedro quietly said, “I know. I believe we are learning a valuable lesson. That no matter How far we go, we are still going to wind up being stuck with these people.”

Matthew softly replied, “That is not very comforting.”

Pedro whispered, “I agree. We have to be real careful what we do right now. And what we say. If we are not careful, we could screw up existence itself.”

Matthew softly recommended, “We could just turn around and walk out of the bar.”

Pedro quietly replied, in a slight sarcastic tone of voice, “Like fate would let us do that.”

Matthew softly conceded, “Good point. Still, if we talk to each other, we need to avoid using our names here. We need some quick aliases.”

Pedro quietly suggested, “How about I go as the Mexican? And you are the Lawyer?” He thought, 'It would be extremely unwise to mention that I am a cop to this crowd.'

Matthew whispered, “That could work. Still, I think the aliases are too simplistic.”

Pedro softly commented, “It is not like we have time to come up with something better.”

Matthew quietly agreed, “True. So, we will do what you suggested.”

Pedro softly replied, “Good.”

Matthew quietly pointed out, “And we cannot call any of them by their names. That will raise way too many questions.”

Pedro softly said, “You are absolutely correct.”

Matthew whispered, “Also, is it just me, or does Revy's clothing seem a little more modest than what she wears back home? I mean she doesn't even have her shoulder holsters, and cutlasses.”

Pedro quickly commented, “I have a feeling most of these people haven't stepped into their own just yet.”

Matthew softly replied, “I agree. Fortunately, everyone is keeping to themselves.”

Pedro whispered, “Yes. And that is the only reason I have not yet turned around and run out the door.”

Matthew quietly teased, “What happened to your belief in fate?

Pedro softly replied, “I am willing to play fate's game, unless it is a suicide game.”

Matthew whispered, “Good point. So, which one is Melvin?”

Pedro softly answered, “I am not sure myself. But, while I suspect that Melvin was an alias, I know he dyed his hair blond, and as Melanie, she has brown hair. Also, if you look that way, only use your eyes.” He mentally added, 'And if we returned back home, I am sure to ask if Melanie has a picture of herself, as himself, when he was younger. To show me.'

Matthew quietly said, “Got you.” He then used his eyes looked over to his right, at the members of Hotel Moscow. After a couple of seconds, he found who he was looking for. He quietly commented, “Found him. Two tables down, six o'clock from Ms blond.”

Pedro understood Matthew's message, as used his eyes to first look at Balalaika, then quickly down two tables closer to the entrance. A second later, Pedro quickly recognized Melvin. While he was much younger, had a clean shaven face, and he had black hair, he shared the same basic facial features as old Melvin, and young Melanie. Like all of the men around him, he was wearing usually.

Pedro watched Melvin drink a swallow from his bottle of beer, as he talked to his friends at the table, in russian. Pedro could tell that Melvin was happy at the moment.

Pedro thought, 'Looks like I won't need that picture. And so Melvin, that was what you looked like when you were younger. You look good. Unfortunately, we will not meet before for a number of decades for you. But, it is good to see that even at this point in your life, you had happy moments to enjoy.'

Pedro and Matthew then used their eyes to look around some more, as Matthew quietly said, “You know. Speaking of fate. I get the feeling that fate is trying to tell us something, and we should thrown in the towel.”

Pedro softly commented, “Maybe. I mean, right now, this place is kinda of like the unholy last supper.”

Matthew quickly agreed, “You got that right. I am so happy you helped show me how to be genre savvy. That knowledge has helped keep me alive, so far.”

Pedro softly responded, “You're welcome. So, if we cannon leave, we have to walk further in. We cannot stand around, by the entrance, much longer, without attracting the wrong attention.”

Matthew whispered, “I agree. Let's head to the middle of bar counter. We don't want those at the counter to think we are avoiding them.”

Pedro quickly agreed, “Good idea.”

Matthew quietly suggested, “Also, while I think the fate... Multiverse... Whatever... Whomever, is telling us to give up. I think fate is also handing us a golden opportunity here. Save for the russians and Chang... This is clearly long before any of these guys became hardcore, super-badasses. Meaning we could get a little payback here.”

Matthew's lips slight curled, with wicked mischief, as he softly quietly continued, “So, for once, let us live a little dangerously. We have the advantage here. We know them, while they don't know us. I suggest a contest. The craziest thing one can do without revealing the truth winner gets free dinner from the loser.”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he thought, with mild excitement, 'Now, that is a contest. And if you cannot buy me dinner. I will just let you cook it for me.' He softly stated, “You're on.”

Pedro and Matthew then casually walked, side by side, towards the bar counter, with Matthew to Pedro's right.

A few seconds later, they reached the front of the bar counter. Both men avoided looking at those around them, as they looking in front of themselves, at the shelves of alcoholic bottles that lined the wall.

Pedro asked, in a normal tone of voice, “Do you want something to drink?”

Matthew responded, in a normal tone of voice, “I would like a bottle of dark rum, with three glasses.”

Pedro looked over at Revy, he then turned back to Matthew, as he said, “Good idea.” He quietly inquired, “Is this part of our bet?”

Matthew answered, “Yes.”

Pedro thought, 'I wonder what you have in mind?'

The bartenders came up to Pedro and Matthew, from across the bar counter. He looked at the two men, as he flatly asked, in english, “What do you want?”

Pedro looked over at the man across from him. He used his right hand to reach into a pocket that had a roll of twenty dollar U.S. bills. He then thumbed out two twenties and pulled the two bills out from his pocket. Next, he set the two twenty dollar bills onto the counter between them.

Pedro saw the bartender look down at the money, then back up at his face.

Pedro thought, 'Good. I have his undivided attention.' Pedro calmly stated, “We will take a bottle of quality dark rum, and three glasses. And keep the change.” He mentally added, 'Given everyone that is here. It is best to keep on the bartender's good side. I don't want him to make a scene in the middle of this powder keg. While, I guess. With this contest, both Matthew and I are playing with matches. But, at this point, I am sure neither he, nor I, care.'

The bartenders looked down at the money, as he pulled it off the table, and pocketed it. He looked back up at Pedro, as he said, “Thank you.”

As the man walked away to retrieve Matthew and Pedro's order, Pedro thought, 'The reason I am paying in cash is I don't want anyone here to know I have any gold. When it comes to mafia and pirates, of any age, most of them get gold fever very quickly, when they see that a person has some gold on them. And it would be dangerous for Matthew and myself, if anyone else here found out I was carrying some gold with me.'

A few seconds later, the bartender came back with three bottle of dark rum. He set it on the counter, between Matthew and Pedro. The bartender then pulled out three small clear glasses from under the counter.

The bartender look at the two men, as he said, “Enjoy.” He then turned to his right, as he walked away to ring up the sale.

Matthew picked up the dark rum bottle. He opened the bottle of rum, as he muttered, “Ah rum. My dark mistress of the Caribbean. How I missed your tender kisses.”

Pedro could not help but overhear what Matthew said. He turned to his friend, as he thought, 'Bet, or no bet. He clearly likes rum.' He said, “You usually just drink a beer. I didn't know you liked rum.”

Matthew looked down at the bar counter, toward their three glasses. He started to pour a little rum from the bottle, into one of the glasses, as he stated, “Well, years ago, during my drug fiend years, my alcoholic beverage of choice, when I wasn't doing the harder stuff, was dark rum. And while I haven't touched the other hard core stuff in years, I do occasionally have a glass of dark rum.”

Pedro commented, “Interesting. And you have never really did talk about your past.”

Matthew poured another glass with some rum, as he pointed out, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “No one likes to talk about the mistakes they have made, and the friends they have lost.”

Pedro responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “Well, you have a friend, right here.”

Matthew set the bottle of rum down. He then picked up one of the glasses, with rum in it, with his right hand. He turned to Pedro. He smiled, as he he kindly replied, “I know.”

Pedro looked down at the bar counter, as he used his right hand to pick up the other glass on the counter that had rum in it. He turned back to look at Matthew, as he held up his glass. He toasted, “To safe journeys.”

Mathew held up his glass, as he replied, “To safe journeys.”

Both of them then took a sip of their rum.

After they both lowers their glasses, and swallowed their rum, Pedro commented, “This rum is pretty good.”

Matthew agreed, “Yes. It is.”

They then heard a woman laughing to the right behind Matthew.

Pedro and Matthew turned towards the laughter. They saw that the person laughing at them was Revy.

Revy sat in her stool. As she head her body facing the counter, she had her head turned towards them. Her arms were crossed, and set on the table. As she sat in her stool, she was also leaning slightly towards the table. And there was an open bottle of beer on the counter, in front of her, on the bar counter.

They also noticed Benny and Dutch were looking at them, as well.

Matthew and Pedro set their glasses down, on the bar counter.

Pedro thought, 'While she looks a few years younger then she does when we met her, she is Revy. I see Benny and Dutch, as well. As men, and they look to be in a good mood. Also, I see Revy does not have her two cutlasses and shoulder holsters.'

Due to Revy leaning slightly down on the bar counter, Pedro then noticed the tail-tail of a pistol bulging on the back of her pants, under her untucked shirt. He continued his thought, 'But, she is armed. So, we best be nice to her. Though, that doesn't mean we cannot have some fun with her, Benny, and Dutch.'

Revy mockingly said, “Ah, a cowboy and a tight ass in a suit and tie, having such a tender moment. Who are you two suppose to be?”

Matthew thought, 'I will let Pedro start the conversation. Then, it will be my turn for some payback.''

Pedro thought, 'Now, to use our aliases.' He ignored Revy's insulting tone of voice, as he calmly stated, “I am the Mexican. This is the Lawyer.”

Benny commented, “There is joke somewhere in there.”

Matthew thought, 'My turn.' Matthew looked at Benny. He cracked a grin, as he said, “You have no earthly idea.”

Benny asked, “So, what do you two do?”

Matthew shook his head, to his right, and behind him, towards Pedro, as he faced the man with the blond hair in a ponytail. Matthew casually stated, “He handles the ass kicking. I handle the paperwork.”

Benny and Dutch chuckled a little at Matthew's comment, while Revy just smiled.

Matthew let his sight wonder over towards Revy's body.

Revy noticed Matthew leering at her. She dropped her grin, she asked, with a hint of malice in her tone of voice, “What are you looking at?”

Matthew casually replied, “Everything.”

Behind Revy, Pedro saw Benny and Dutch were quickly trying to stifle their laughter, so as to not risk Revy's wrath.

Pedro thought, 'Benny and Dutch are not, and have never been idiots. And this is nice way to start the ball rolling, Matthew.'

To everyone's surprise, Revy did not lose her temper. And instead, she cracked a grin, as she asked, in a mischievous tone of voice, “Do you like what you see?”

Matthew stated, “I wouldn't be looking, if I didn't like what I see. But, I don't have the time to do anything, but look.”

Revy said, “As long as you look and don't touch, I don't mind.”

Matthew replied, “Thanks.” He mentally added, 'Just as I had planned. Let's see how Pedro tops this.'

Revy said, “You're welcome.”

Pedro thought, 'So, you were playing to Revy's vanity. Nice. Now, it is my turn.'

Pedro then walked passed Matthew and Revy, and came to a stop by Benny and Dutch.

Pedro came to a stop, with Benny and Dutch between him and the counter. Benny and Dutch turned around, with their backs to the counter, as they face Pedro. With Pedro being about three feet from the two men.

Pedro looked at the two men, as he calmly inquired, “So, is that woman with you trained to use that weapon tucked in the back her her pants, under her shirt”

Dutch thought, 'This guy has a sharp eye. I have to watch what I say around him.' He commented, “I am giving her some pointers. Right now, her skills are just from raw talent. But, I see the potential.”

Benny commented, “Though, she is still pretty to look at.”

Pedro looked over at Revy, and Matthew, whom were continued their conversation. With Matthew seemly able to stay on Revy's good side.

Pedro thought, 'Matthew, your sharp tongue lawyer skills are coming in useful in keeping Revy calm.' He then looked Benny and Dutch, as he continued thought, 'Still, I need to know why they are here?'

Pedro asked, “Just from looking at her physique that she has a lot of potential to be a gunfighter. So, what brings you to South America?”

Dutch replied, “Just passing through, and while we try to figure our where our next destination will be.”

Pedro could not help but smirked, as he thought, 'Oh. So, they have no idea where they are going. This is to good an opportunity to pass up. And I doubt Matthew can top this. But, I cannot sale this in to much of a direct manner.'

Pedro smirk turned into a more normal grin, as he mentioned, “Well, there is the place I have heard about. It is this island. Some people call it a gangsters paradise. Where the law exists in name only. And many of the people there are foreigners.”

Benny said, “Sounds like a place from an action movie.”

Pedro thought, 'Nice guess. And you are very close to the truth, Benny.'

Dutch thought, 'We are criminals now. So, if there is a place where criminals can go for a job. Where the law does not come after us. And where there is a large population of foreigners than we can blend in with. We need to know about this place.” He asked, “So, what is the name of this place? And where exactly is this place located?”

Pedro thought, 'I trust Dutch not to screw this up. But, with Chang and his boys so near, I cannot just say Roanapur, nor Thailand, out loud, without risk of catching ten kinds of Hell from Chang, and his men. But first I need to confirm something.'

Pedro inquired, “First, how do you plan to get there?”

Dutch thought, 'Since he is giving directions. He needs to know how I am going to get there.' He answered, “By boat.”

Pedro thought, 'So, that confirms they came her by boat. And it was likely their PT boat. Now, to quietly give him directions.'

Pedro walked over and leaned his head towards Dutch's left ear.

Dutch did not react, as Pedro whispered into Dutch's left ear, “The place is a fishing village known as Roanapur, on the east coast of Thailand. And here is how to get there. You first need to go through the Panama Canal. Which should not be too difficult, considering you look like a man of many talents...'

Pedro then gave Dutch the rest of the directions to reach Roanapur.

Benny turned his head, to Dutch, as he thought, 'Why is he whispering into Dutch's ear?'

When Pedro finished, he leaned back up, as he took a few steps away from Dutch. He asked, “Did you get all that?”

Dutch look up at Pedro, as he answered, “Yea.”

Benny looked over at Pedro, as he questioned, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice “What is with all the secrecy?”

Pedro looked over at Benny, as he commented, “In this game, privacy is a premium commodity.”

Benny thought about what Pedro said for a few seconds. He then said, “Oh. You're right.”

Dutch turned to Benny, as he stated, “Don't worry. I will tell you later.”

Benny turned to Dutch, as he replied, “Okay.” He turned to look at Matthew and Revy, as he suggested, “I think it might be wise if we keep and eye on those two.”

Dutch looked over at Matthew and Revy, as Dutch said, “I agree.”

Pedro turned to Revy and Matthew, also, as he stated, “You're preaching to the choir.”

Meanwhile, Matthew and Revy's conversation took a strange turn.

Revy said, “I don't see how someone like you could find a woman.”

Matthew smirked, as he commented, “Oh. I know plenty of women.”

Matthew thought, 'Unfortunately, they are taken, crazy, or both. Though Pedro, I did notice you whispering into Dutch's ear. And I am sure it is part of our contest. Knowing you, you were probably given him directions to Roanapur. It is the only think you would risk whispering into Dutch's ear, that you would not want others in the room to hear. Such, as Chang. Though, now that I have your undivided attention. It is my turn to have some fun.'

Matthew went onto say, “Though, I won't be surprised if you ended up with someone like me.”

Revy let out a laugh. She then replied, “Dream on.”

Matthew suggest, “I would even wager money. Say two grand, U.S. cash, that within two decades you greater lover will be someone that prefers a suit and tie over a hawaiian shirt. Also, you will be with this person, willingly. And let us even sweeten the deal by saying... The guy is japanese.”

Pedro, Benny, and Dutch silently watched and listened.

Pedro thought, with astonishment, 'Now, this is what I call gutsy.'

Dutch thought, 'What the hell is going on here? Why would anyone make such an insane bet?'

Revy smirked, as she said, “You are on.” She thought, 'Since I get to pick the person I end up with. This will be a sucker's bet for you.'

Benny thought, 'Why do I have a feeling that is a sucker's bet, that Revy just fell for?...'

Matthew pulled out a small piece of paper and a pen, from an interior coat pocket. He said, “One minute. I need to write out the contact.”

Revy commented, “Take your time. I look forward to collecting in two decades. And you better be there.”

Matthew starting writing the contract, while making sure not to mention Revy, nor his name. He continued writing, as he said, “It might be longer than two decades, but I promise that I will meet you again about this bet.”

Revy replied, “That will be fine. As long as I get to collect.”

Matthew continued to writer, as he thought with amusement, 'Oh, I get to collect. And since you are rich, by then. I will expect you to pay up.'

Meanwhile, Dutch had been paying attention to what was going on. He thought, 'Well, if anything, this proves these guys are serious. And likely nuts, as well. But, it is an interesting bet. And that other guy gave us directions to an interesting place. Though, any way the bet goes, I doubt either will be able to collect from the other. I mean, Revy does not like losing. And this guy, seems to be acting as if he is expecting to collect on such an idiotic bet.'

(_)

At that moment, on the middle, of left side of the room, Chang sat in his table, with a few of his men. His back was facing the far left wall, and he was having a mixed drink of cola and Jack Daniels. He looked over at the bar counter, where he saw a group of five adults.

Revy was facing in Chang's general direction, giving him a view of her. He thought, 'The redhead is as hot as Shenhua. I wonder if she has the same temperament as Shenhua?...'

Chang then noticed Pedro and Matthew. With Pedro facing his general direction, while Matthew had his back partly turned from him.

Chang thought, 'I don't believe it. It is those two guys I met last March. I wondered what happened to them. They sure intelligent enough to get out of town real quick, after that shootout... So, what they are doing here? Oh well. No one got hurt during the incident. Also, it was that crazy woman that pulled the gun, and started shooting. Not them. Besides, I am too tired to deal with them tonight.'

'Still, Severo was right. This is a pretty good bar. And my men are happy. Though, I wonder what those russians, across the room, are here for. But, that is not worth asking them. I don't want start any trouble tonight.'

Chang then went back to sipping his drink.

(_)

A minute later, at the bar counter, Matthew finished writing out his quick contact. It was only a few brief paragraphs lone. Among other things, he including the date. Which was October nineteenth, nineteen ninety-one. Though, he did not sign his name on it. At his place for the signature, he signed it, The Lawyer.

Matthew handed Revy the pen, as he passed the paper over to her, on the counter.

Revy took the pen, and she signed her nickname, Revy, at the bottom.

Revy then handed Matthew back his pen.

Matthew gently took the pen and pocketed it, back where had his pen. Next, he made sure that Revy had signed the contact with her name. Which she did. After which, he folded contract, and pocket it.

Revy asked, “Don't we need a witness?”

Matthew looked over at Revy, as he replied, “This is an informal bet. So, no. It is not like it is legally binding. And we both know that if there is a disagreement, it will not be handled by the courts.”

Revy replied, “You got that right.”

Matthew then reached into another interior jacket pock, where he pulled out his smart phone, which was just a standard smart phone will all the functions. Along with the device being fully charged.

Pedro noticed the device, as he thought, with debrief, 'I don't believe he kept his smart phone. Though, it is likely from Chang, and therefore encrypted, with a built in firewall. And to be honest, I have my satellite cellphone, as well. And there is nothing I can do about it, now. Also, if either of our phones run out of juice, I am sure we can get adapters, somewhere, for them.'

'Still, I did upgrade my cellphones to a satellite phone, that should work anywhere on this planet. If the system is in place. So, there is that.'

Benny was the first to notice the smart phone, as he asked, “What is that?”

Matthew looked over at him, as he coyly answered, “You'll find out in a few years. But, this device takes pictures. And we will use it as a way to document this bet. As such, I would like pictures of all three of you, with me.”

Dutch said, “Count me out. I value my privacy.”

Revy commented, “I'm game.”

Benny replied, “So am I.”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he requested, “Now, my friend, will you do the honors?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he shrugged. He said, “Sure.”

Matthew handed Pedro the smart phone.

Meanwhile, Revy turned around, with her back to the counter, as Matthew moved a step closer to Revy right side, while Benny leaned closer to Revy left side.

Pedro took a few steps back, to get picture of Matthew, Revy, and Benny. Though, he was careful not to get Dutch in the photo shoot.

As Pedro held the smart phone in both his hands, long ways, he got the right angle to the three adults faces and upper bodies.

Pedro said, “Say cheese.”

All three adults smiled, as they said, in unison, “Cheese.”

Pedro then took a few photos, with no flash from the smart phone.

Pedro them walked back over to Matthew, as he thought, 'I figure as long as we don't take any other pictures, we are fine.'

A second later, Pedro came to a stop in front of Matthew, as Pedro handed Matthew his smart phone.

After Matthew took the smart phone, Pedro took a few steps, to Matthew's right, towards the middle of the bar counter. He then turned to his right, to face the four other adults at the bar counter.

As Matthew looked at his smart phone, Benny and Revy were looking at the device as well.

Benny requested, “Can I see the picture you took.”

Revy said, “I would like to see that, as well.”

Matthew replied, “Sure.” He quickly tabbed the screen to the first picture of them. He then held the pictured of them, in front of Revy and Benny, to see.

Benny commented, “That is pretty good quality. And it didn't even use a flash.”

Revy said, “I have to agreed.”

Matthew then put the smart phone back into the interior coat pocket that he had the device in beforehand.

Benny asked, “So, what is this?”

Revy commented, “It is not Polaroid camera. That is for damn sure.”

Matthew thought, 'I cannot tell them that it is an a computer cellphone. Or, more often called, a smart phone. Considering, cellphone technology right now is barely on itself feet. Compare to two decades in the future, for realities, like this one. But, I do have a much easier explanation.'

Matthew looked at Revy, and Benny, as he answered, “It is a digital camera. Among other things.”

Benny stated, “I have heard of those types of cameras. That must have cost a fortune?”

Matthew coyly responded, “Nah. It is cheap, where I bought it from.”

Benny questioned, “Is that Japan? I mean you did mention a japanese man in your bet, just now.”

Matthew conceded, “A logical guess. But, no.”

Dutch turned to Benny, as he reminded Benny, “Remember, when his friend said that privacy is a premium commodity. This is one of those moments.”

Benny turned to Dutch as he said, “Okay.” He turned back to Matthew, as he stated, “Sorry about that.”

Matthew replied, “No problem.”

Revy commented, “I don't care what that thing is. But, it is cool.”

Matthew replied, “I know.” He then looked over at the open bottle of beer, beside Revy, on the bar counter.

Matthew smirked, as he thought, “Now, for some more fun.” He turned back to face the bar counter, as he pour some of rum into the empty glass he had left. After he set the bottle down, he turned to Revy.

Matthew mentally wondered, 'Now, how did that line, she said, or in this case, will say, go... Ah, yes...' He commented, “That stuff will never get you drunk.”

Pedro thought, 'So, that is why you got the rum. Oh, that is just plain devious. You are even quoting, Revy, to her future self, from episode one of the anime. And she doesn't even realize that you are quoting her. Hell, you might have given her the quote, just now. And this situation has just turned into another time loop. And also, at this rate, I will even admit that I am going to lose this bet.'

Revy commented, “Do you have a problem with me drinking beer?”

Matthew replied, “No. I just believe you likely have better tastes, if someone took the time to broadened your horizons. Have you ever tried rum before?”

Revy replied, “No.”

Matthew turned and used his left hand to pick up the glass he had just pour. He turned back to face Revy, as he held the glass in front of her. He offered, “This is dark rum. And you seem like a woman that would like it. Here. Have a try. It is on me.”

Revy said, “Okay.” She took the glass from Matthew's left hand, with her right hand. She took a sip of rum, from the glass in her right hand.

The sip quickly turned into a swallow, with the rum swiftly disappearing from the glass, and down Revy's throat.

When Revy finished, she licked her lips, as she set the glass down by her bottle of beer.

Revy then looked over at Matthew, as she smiled warmly at Matthew. She commented, “I like it. Thanks.”

Matthew happily replied, “You're welcome.”

Dutch noticed this, as he thought, 'These guys are clearly very smooth. I don't know what game they are playing. But, I don't need Revy drunk, right now. I have seen her drunk. By her own acts. Getting her drunk will not get a person in bed with her. It will more likely get that person's ass kicked by her. So, it is time to slightly tug on her chain.' He suggested, “Let's get back to drinking, guys. That is why we came here. To unwind, and relax. But, be careful how much you drink. It is a long way to the boat.”

Benny said, “I agree.”

Revy looked over at the bottle of rum, then at her half empty bottle of beer. She replied, “Fine. I will.”

Revy. Benny, and Dutch, turned around to face the bar, as they nursed their drinks.

Meanwhile Pedro and Matthew had moved back, by the middle part of the bar counter, to the left of the three other other adults. The two men stood next to each other, with Matthew closer to the three adults, than Pedro. Also, the two men were presently facing forward, towards the entrance to the bar.

Just then, Matthew and Pedro noticed a woman with fair skin and long purple hair, in a ponytail, enter the bar, from the front entrance, and walk towards the bar counter. She was wearing green combat fatigues, and a green military cap. The two men also saw that the woman had a semi-automatic pistol holstered on the right side of her belt.

The two men only glanced at the woman briefly, before they both quickly recognized the woman, and they looking away, as they were concerned not to attract her attention. Though, they also noticed that they were the only ones in the bar that paid her any mind.

Neither man said anything, until the woman with purple hair came to a stop, on the far left side of the bar counter, opposite to Revy, Benny, and Dutch.

Pedro and Matthew then looked over at the woman, with only their eyes, for a couple of seconds. Matthew then took a few steps closer to Pedro, as he whispered, “Is that who I think it is?”

Pedro softly replied, “Yes. If I was to guess, I would say she just left the Colombian cartel, whom are after now her. With the cartel being here any minute... That is the way these things usually work out.”

Matthew quietly commented, “Yes. And we know this because we have been around these lunatics way too long. We are starting to think like them.”

Pedro questioned, “Possibly. Is the bet still on?”

Matthew replied, “Yes.”

Pedro said, “Good.” Pedro looked over at the bartender, near them, from across the counter. Pedro requested, “Bartender. A moment of your time. Please.”

The bartender turned to look at Pedro, as he walked up behind the counter, in front of the mexican.

And Pedro used his right hand to reach into the pocket, he had been pulled his money from.

(_)

Across the bar counter, on the opposite side as Dutch, Roberta had sat in a stool. She faced the back of the bar, as she collected her thoughts, 'All day... All day, I was looking for my deceased father's friend, Diego Lovelace. And I couldn't find him... And I call myself, Bloodhound...'

'Though, I had to be careful where I went. Sticking to many alleyways, and back streets, in my search, because my clothing and pistol would attract the wrong type of attention from... Everyone...'

'To make matters worse. Several people have been shadowing me since around noon. And they are good at it, but I am a lot better. They are likely cartels members sent to capture me. And then make an example out of me.'

'I really shouldn't be surprised they learned I am heading this way. I tend to stand out. I mean, how many women with long purple hair and blue eyes are there in the world?...'

'The worst part is I cannot risk confronting them. Because, I don't have a lot of ammo. And a gun battle would only attract the attention of the police and military. That would make things worse for myself. They are probably quite a few of them that would like nothing better to do than kill the Bloodhound, for a chance as a promotion, or reward.'

'On the bright side. They all know I am too dangerous to try to rape. So, they are just going to try to kill me.'

'Speaking of which. In a twisted way, I wonder what the amount of the bounty is, that the cartel put on my head?...'

'Still, I don't dare lead them to Diego's home. That would make for such a horrible first impression. I will lose them later tonight. For now, I figure ducking into this crowded bar will decrease the chance of them following me in here. And this bar seems shady enough to let me walk in without attracting to much attention. And from the lack of reactions from those around me, I believe I am correct...'

'I need a few minutes to sit down and think of what I am going to do next. Besides, I could really use a drink.'

A few seconds later, from across the bar counter, the bartender set two glasses, and a bottle of El Jimador Tequila in front of Roberta. The bartender then walked away from her.

Roberta thought, with amusement, 'Ask, and ye shall receive.'

Roberta then noticed a man approaching her, from her right.

A second later, Pedro came to a stop, beside Roberta, to her right.

Roberta turned to him, as she asked, in spanish, “Do I have you to thank for this drink?

Pedro gave Roberta a warm smile, as he said, in spanish, “Yes. I hope you like it. You look like you could use a drink.”

Roberta thought, 'This man is clearly crazy. Given, I am dressed in my fatigues, with a pistol strapped to my belt. And even I can even smell the sweet on myself. And he still approached me. But, then again. I do need a drink. And I like this brand. Also, he being polite... So, why not?... Though, I do have one question for him.'

Roberta inquired, “How do you know this was one of my favorite drinks?”

Pedro answered, “Lucky guess. I am a mexican. And Tequila is practically our national drink.”

Pedro thought, 'This is also the brand of Tequila you will drink during your Blood Trail arc. Though, I am surprised that this guy has El Jimador in stock. Considering, the brand was not introduced in my reality until nineteen ninety-four. And it is nineteen ninety-one, here.'

'I guess Lee was right. A number of items, fiction, and technology, come out here, at a sooner date, than in our home reality. And even if this brand is new, here, I am not surprised this place has it, because it was a big hit back home. And I should know, El Jimador is one of my favorite brands of Tequila, as well.'

Roberta picked up the bottle of Tequila, and she opened it. She then poured herself a glass of Tequila. After which, she set down the bottle, and picked the glass up with her right hand. Next, she then held the glass up to her lips, and swallowed the entire amount of liquid she had pour for herself in one gulp, without gagging.

She then set the glass down, back on the bar counter. She looked over at Pedro, as she said, “I needed that.”

Pedro kindly offered, “Have as much as you want.”

Pedro then picked up the bottle of Tequila, and refilled Roberta's glass. Next, he pour some Tequila in his glass.

Pedro set the bottle down, as Roberta said, “Thank you.”

Then, both Pedro and Roberta, picked up their glasses, and shared a drink together.

(_)

Near the middle the bar counter, Matthew watched as Pedro and Roberta pleasantly talked to each other, as they drank some of the Tequila that Pedro bought from the bartender.

Matthew thought, with a little bit of disbelief, 'It is hard believe what I am seeing. That Pedro is putting the moves on Roberta. Even I will admit that is insane. Though, she is too spice for me. I think Pedro is just crazy, and badass enough to try something with her. And I don't know how I am going to top this. Still, I am too close to ground zero for my tastes. I mean, Pedro and I are literally standing between Revy and Roberta. This will be a bad place to be, if this blows up in Pedro's face. So, I need to move.'

Matthew looked around the room. A second later, he saw an empty table, near the front entrance, on the left side of the bar, close to Chang's men.

Matthew thought, 'That will do.'

Matthew turned back around, and screwed the cap back onto top of the bottle of rum. Next, he collected his empty glass in his right hand, while he took the bottle of rum, by its handle, with his left hand. He then turned and casually walked towards the front part of the room.

As Matthew walked, he was careful not to glance at either the chinese, nor the russians. Though, Matthew could feel a few casual glances towards him, from both groups.

A few seconds later, Matthew reached the table by the door, on the left side of the room, near Chang's men. The round table had four chairs around it.

Matthew set up glass and bottle down on the table. He then sat in a chair, with his back facing the door, which allowed him to look at the bar counter, his friend, and the others sitting at the counter.

As Matthew got comfortable, he thought, 'As dangerous as it is to have one's back to the door. In this case, I prefer to keep a wary eye on both the chinese, russians, and those at the counter. Still, I doubt either of these two group will try anything against me, unless I give them a reason to do so.'

'And the reason I am sitting near the chinese, than the russians, is that the chinese are clearly more relaxed. And most of them are drinking beers, while the most russian are drinking vodka and other hard alcoholic drinks. Meaning, the chinese are likely more sober than the russians. Not that is makes either group any less dangerous.'

Matthew then pointed some rum in his glass. Set the bottle back on the table, near the edge, to his right side. And he began to sip his drink, as he kept an eye on what was happening at the bar counter.

(_)

A minute after Matthew sat down, with his back to the front doors, three women walked into the bar, from the front entrance.

It was Daiyu, River, and Lee.

While Matthew had his back turned to the three women, the three women immediately recognized Matthew.

As the three women walked around to face Matthew, to Matthew's right side, they saw that Matthew had pour himself another glass of rum, with him setting the bottle near the edge of the table, to his right side.

The three women sat down, in chairs, in front of Matthew, at the table he was at.

Matthew saw that it was River, Daiyu, and Lee. With River being to his left. Daiyu was right in front of him. And Lee was to his right.

To Daiyu, River, and Lee's surprise. Matthew did not act surprised towards seeing them. Instead, he remained aloft, to their sudden presence.

Instead, Matthew calmly set his glass back on the table.

Matthew's actions became even more confusing, as he smirked, while he casually said, “Hi girls.” He thought, 'I guess danger is a subjective term. Also, we are far enough away from the major players, of the past, that I can talk a little, without worry of any eavesdropping from them.'

Daiyu thought, 'Matthew is way to calm towards seeing us. Also, where is Pedro?' She asked, in english, “Where is Pedro?”

Matthew coyly replied, “He is busy at the moment.”

Daiyu responded, “Okay. We will get to him, in a minute. I want to know why are you so happy to see us?”

Matthew smirk turned into a wicked smile, as he said, “Because I know for sure there is not a god damn thing you are going to do to me, in here, right now. Take a hard look around at the people here.”

The three women did so and they visibly paled.

They turned back to look at Matthew, just in time to see his smile get even wider, as he looked at them.

Matthew casually stated, “Welcome to the unholy last supper.”

Lee commented, in english, “This isn't even in the series, and I can see this happening as an origins story.”

The situation finally jogged Daiyu's memory, as she said, “Oh. Now, I remember this date. And this night. For the most part. In about minute, we are going to be in a whole lot of trouble.”

River then sensed Pedro, and that he was talking to someone else that she also recognized.. She turned to her left, towards the left side of the bar counter to see that Pedro was having a pleasant conversation, along with a few drinks, with the Roberta of the past.

While continuing to look in the direction of the bar counter, River said, in english, “You think that is trouble. Take a look at the bar, and see who Pedro is putting the moves on.”

They saw that Pedro was making a pass at Roberta, and from the gentle smile Roberta was giving him, it was working.

Daiyu stated, “He must have a death wish.”

Lee turned back to Matthew, as she demand, in a normal tone of voice, “Okay. What the hell is going on?”

River and Daiyu looked over at Matthew, as well.

Matthew calmly answered, “Pedro and I, have a bet going on, as to who can do the craziest thing tonight.”

Daiyu hesitantly inquired, “Dare I ask what you have done so far?”

Matthew said, in a casual tone of voice, “Sure. As payback for the way you all have treated us, we have been going back and forth on this bet. Which is loser pays for a meal for the winner.”

River flatly questioned, “So, you are risking existence itself, by creating a paradox, over a stupid bet?

Matthew smiled, as he playfully replied, “It was bound to happen eventually.”

Lee commented, “He's right. It would have eventually happened.”

River turned to Lee, as she warned, in a low tone of voice, “You're not helping.”

Lee looked at River, as she apologized, with a bit of regret in her tone of voice, “Sorry.”

River replied, in a more calmer tone of voice, “That is much better.”

Lee and River then looked back at Matthew.

Matthew calmly said, “Look. In all seriousness. We are being careful. We are watching what we say, and we are using aliases.”

Lee repeated Daiyu's questioned, “So, what have you done, so far?”

Matthew softly answered, “Well, I believe that Pedro has quietly given Dutch directions to Roanapur. I have got Revy into a sucker bet, where she agreed to pay me if she will end up with a japanese man that prefers a suit and tie to a hawaiian t-shirt. I am going to collect on that two grand one day.”

River and Lee remained silent, as Daiyu giggled a little. Daiyu then said, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Good luck with that.” She thought, 'Though, I have to admit that bet is a creative form of revenge.'

Matthew stated, “As a lawyer, I have gotten money out of more dangerous people, than her. Anyway, I also introduced Revy to rum. I can only imagine the punishment I am now responsible for, towards her liver. And with that serum will keep that punishment going for the next couple of centuries, at least.”

The three women at the table giggled a little. As they calmed down, River said, “Even I will admit that is wicked mean. Please, continued.”

Matthew mischievously smiled, as he happily responded, “I know. Now, Pedro here is putting the moves on the maid. I got to give him credit, that takes guts, considering we are both agreed that the Colombians are about to show up, any minute.”

Daiyu said, “You are right about that. But, we still have a little time to talk.”

River asked, “So, what are your aliases?”

Matthew responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Pedro came up with the aliases, and he used them on Revy, Benny, and Dutch, at the bar. I am the lawyer. And Pedro is the mexican.”

The three women immediately recognized the aliases. Matthew noticed a bit of surprise showing on their faces.

Daiyu replied, “So, your two are the mexican and the lawyer?”

Matthew answered, “Of course. It is unwise to give our real names. And we are having a ball with the titles we are using.”

Daiyu replied, “That explains a lot. Still...” She turned to Lee, as she asked, “So, is this your fault?”

Lee answered, “No. But, if someone did have a hand in this, they did a good job on the set up.”

River stopped herself from smiling at Lee's comment.

Lee commented, “Also, we are likely caught in another temporal loop.”

Daiyu shrugged, as she responded, “Yes. And if we had not treated our two friends here so badly, they would not have jump realities, ended up here, and bring all the craziness to Roanapur, that cost me my first kingdom.”

Lee pointed out, “But, if that did not happen, it would have likely created a reality destroying paradox.”

Daiyu questioned, “So, I was fucked either way?”

Lee calmly replied, “Pretty much.”

River stated, “Actually, we all ended up better than we were at the time. And we all got to meet each other. With it working out for us, in the end. And besides, girls. Blame is not important. What is important is us figuring out how to leave here in one piece.”

Lee agreed, “You got that right.”

Daiyu complimented, “Good point.”

Lee turned to Matthew, as she inquired, “Now, as someone who has gone insane, and is enjoying every minute of their lack of sanity. I have to ask what is on the lips of my two lovers, here. Have you two lost your minds, to talk to us this way? And pull the stunts you have just done?”

Matthew chuckled a little. He then answered, “Maybe. You have all have been putting a lot of pressure on Pedro and I, for the last two years. To paraphrase a quote from a song line from an animated movie Pedro showed me once. We have been living on the edge so long. Where the winds of limbo roar.”

River looked at her two lovers, with a slightly confused look on her face.

Both Daiyu and Lee noticed the look on River's face.

Daiyu was the first to speak, as she explained, “The song is from the band, Blue Oyster Cult, the title is Psychic Wars. It was used in the original animated Heavy Metal movie.” She though, 'And it also means that Pedro taste in fiction continues to surprise me, in the quality of fiction he enjoys viewing, and likely reading. Pedro might even be a Moebius comic fan. And those are a set of insane realities I knew better than to try to go to. Nor, send people to.'

The three women then looked back at Matthew, as Lee said, “I will grant you that we should have treated you both better.”

Matthew flatly stated, “Yes. You should have.”

River responded, “Okay. We admit we were wrong.”

Matthew could see Daiyu and Lee both each nodding once, in agreement.

Daiyu commented, “I admit, I could have done things a big better for you, and Pedro.”

Lee said, “And I admit. I should has been more proactive in what was happening to you, and Pedro. But, my own personal life sort of got away from me.”

River looked over at Lee and Daiyu. She then turned back to face Matthew, as she stated, “See. We all are sorry for what has happened to the both of you. And we regret what happened.”

Matthew calmly responded, “That is better. Though, this does not mean we are going back with you. But, I will concede that you are making progress.”

River asked, “Good. So, what else have you been up to, since you came to South American, this morning?”

Matthew answered, “I am not surprised your tracker can record when we got here. But, to answer your question. Not much. Still, Pedro really does have strange tastes in fiction. And if it wasn't for the situation we find ourselves in, I would say he takes his fiction a little too seriously.”

Daiyu thought, 'That goes without saying. Still...' She inquired, “Such as?”

Matthew said, “Pedro has some wild theories on the origin of this reality. He might be a bigger fan of yours, than Lee here is.”

River and Lee remained silent, while Daiyu shrugged, as she said, “That is possible.”

Matthew mentioned, “By the way, this morning we ran into a couple of green haired children we all know. Lee, did you know that Fabiola and Rico are sister and brother? Or, should I say now, sister and sister?”

Lee answered, “A while ago, I learned about their blood relation during of the bikini parties we went to.” She thought, 'Around a year and a half for you, Matthew.'

Lee continued, “Due to Rico being with the drug cartel, and given the Lovelace's bad history with the cartels. When Fabiola found out what Rico had been up too. She had nothing to do with Rico. But, that was years ago, and Rico has since moved onto another jobs.”

“When Daiyu, and River here, along with the others found this out, long before even you, Pedro, and I, hit the scene. They have all been trying to get the two of them to talk to each other again. When I found out, there wasn't much a I could do.”

“Still, even from third hand sources, Roberta and Garcia are also trying to help. As you know, for those two, family is a very important concept. Which I agree with. And they two of them are now back on speaking terms, which is an improvement...”

Lee's eyes slightly widened, in surprise, as she stated, in an even tone of voice, so as to not alert those around them, “Wait a minute. The only way you would know Rico was now a woman would be if you read my stories. You don't go to the Last Resort to eat, and the people in our social circles prefer to not talk about the secrets of each other, to those they don't completely trust.”

Matthew complimented, “That is very perceptive of you. And yes, I have read your stories. Pedro showed them to me. And I must say you are quite the writer. I figuratively laughed my ass off reading them. I can see why the others wanted their revenge on you. Though, I am glad you came out of it in one piece.”

River asked, “While I am not surprised that Pedro told you about the stories. I do want to know how your were able to keep me from reading that knowledge from your mind?”

Matthew grinned, as he answered, “Because I have my own little secrets. My younger brother, Ian, is a telepath. A long time ago, he taught me how to shield my thoughts from telepathic scans. And he taught me how to tell if someone is inside my mind.”

“I originally became a lawyer to legally fight for the rights of telepaths. Even though our problems happened years after the telepath war. And that taxpayer funded cult, Psi Corps, was abolished. People, like my brother, still have problems with having respect their basic rights. Such as owning property, and getting a job. My brother was one of the first people I helped to legally get a job in the private sector. He runs a successful restaurant now. I even helped Mister Dresden with his job.”

Lee asked, “Why didn't you mention this, when we first met?”

Matthew stated, “Because, as you know. I value the privacy of my clients.”

Lee shrugged, in response.

Daiyu commented, “He has a point there.”

Matthew looked at River, as he frowned. He flatly stated, “River, you think your scary. While Psi Corps itself was disbanded, and most of the Psi Corp members that were still there, at the end of the telepath war, were either killed, or imprisoned. But, the children of the members were spared. And those children that were born into the Psi Corps were just as fanatical, and brainwashed, as those that raised them. And as they grew up, they formed telepathic cults, whose members took the time to learn how to use the law in their favor.”

“I had to legally battle these telepath cults, to save the lives and minds of several telepaths. And I did. But, there were casualties along the way. You see. When they go after someone, they like to force their enemies to make it look like a suicide. Or, in some cases, if their enemy has a family. A murder-suicide, with the enemy being force to kill their family, before being forced to commit suicide.”

“And it is hard to prove such crimes, when telepath scans are not admissible in court. And they don't allow any witnesses to survive to tell the tale.”

“The only reason they did get me was that over time, my mental shields slowly grew, as I was forced to use them, practically all the time, when I had my own legal practice.”

Daiyu thought, with concern, 'Dear god! Matthew went through all that. Matthew may not be a fighter, but in his own way, he is clearly as much as badass as any of us.'

River sadly said, “That must have been very hard for you.”

Matthew commented, in a sober tone of voice, “Yes. Those experiences were hard battles for me. But, it was those battles that are what got Garibaldi's attention. He admired my abilities, my ethics, and my determinations. And please no lawyer jokes over that one.”

River replied, “Won't dream of it.”

Lee commented, “After that. No way.”

Daiyu said, “Honestly. After learning all this. I have new found respect for you.”

Matthew responded, “Thank you. About Garibaldi. You told me that he got cursed, like you. To turn female. But, his curse was not locked. And that he got home. But, you never gave me any details. You never told me what curse. And he was a great boss to me. And you all owe me at least closure on this matter, by explaining to me what happened to him, in more detail.”

Lee was the first to speak, as she said, “You're right. And I guess I should be the one to tell you. Did Pedro ever show you the Ranma Half anime, or manga.”

Matthew looked over at Lee, as he replied, “He showed me both versions of that series. And they were interesting. So, Garibaldi has a water curse, and so do you. But, yours is locked?”

Lee commented, “Correct on both points.”

Matthew questioned, “So, the big question is. Was him getting cursed your fault?”

Lee answered, “No. That was completely not my fault. I did bring him to the middle of the cursed springs. But, we made it out of the springs, without getting curse. I even I warned him about the dangers of the springs before hand. I tried to stop him from jumping into that spring. I even followed him in to help save Garcia.”

Matthew answered, “So, that is how Garcia wind up cursed. You only hinted that in your stories.”

Lee deadpanned, “I know. And that came back to bite me in the ass.”

Matthew chuckled a little, in response to Lee's comment.

River asked, “Does Pedro know about Garibaldi's curse?”

Matthew turned to River, as he said, “Pedro and I don't keep secrets. Actually, when I gave him the few details on Lee and Garibaldi's changes, he guessed correctly that you both are under that water curse. And that is why he showed me the Ranma Half series, in the first place.”

Daiyu inquired, “Why would you tell him about this?”

Matthew look at Daiyu, as he stated, “No offense intended, but Pedro is the only hundred percent man I can talk too about this. The only one in the loop with me, that we can discuss these matters. If we talked to someone else, outside of this loop, you all would either have both of us killed, or worse. And given the level of insanity we have both been thrust into, we really both needed to find someone we can talk to, that we both trusted.”

Daiyu conceded, “I will give you that one.”

Matthew commented, “Also, it is no wonder we became fast friends. He even shared his collection with me, as we drank and talked.”

Daiyu inquired, “That is all well, and good. But, do you honestly think you two can survive out here?”

Matthew countered, “We have been doing good, so far. And we have seen and read many series. We have read Lee's stories. So, we know the score.”

Lee disagreed, “No, you don't. I use to think the same thing until they showed me other sides of themselves. Sides not in their series, nor did I write. For example, the Lagoon family have an S&M dungeon in their island mansion. I never wrote that.”

Matthew shrugged, as he commented, “That is not really that surprising. That group always seemed to like both pleasure and pain. Both from each other, and other people.”

Matthew continued, in a more softer tone of voice, “I mean, even before Rock showed up, Benny and Dutch both had to be latent masochists to put up with, and work with Revy, for years. Also, Rock had, his, or now her, moments. And Janet is a known nympho. So, with that group, an S&M dungeon was bound to happen.”

Lee remained silent, while Daiyu and River giggled a little at Matthew's comment.

As they calmed down, Daiyu pointed out, “Still, speaking of Rock, and myself. You are no, Rock. And Pedro is not me. You both need to call this quits, and come home, before you get hurt. And I am not talking about us harming you.”

Matthew smirked, as he agreed, “You're right. I am not Rock. I am worse. I am lawyer. And Pedro is better than you. Before you came along, he cleaned up his home town. He turned his city from a shithole into a decent place to live. You may be on your way to turning his city back into a shithole, but his accomplishments are still worth mentioning.”

“And our friendship is interesting, in of itself. A lawyer from a parallel, future reality becomes friends with cowboy cop from the past. It makes for good entertainment, as we sail across the high seas of reality. By the way, I love that term.”

Daiyu and Lee said, almost in unison, “Thank you.”

River turned Daiyu and Lee. She then looked over at Matthew, as she stated, “Matthew, I have talked to these two. We all agree. If you two come home now, and all will be forgiven.”

Matthew countered, “Pedro and I both agreed that we don't want to go back to the way it was before. If you are wondering, River, we both blame you three, here, the most, for wrecking our lives. We know about Sam. And as I said, Pedro spent a decade cleaning up his home town and you all went and wrecked his hard work. On the other hand, I was on the fast track to executive status with on intergalactic company. Now, both of us have had our dreams shattered by you. And the real reason you three are really after us is because we know too much.”

River began, in comforting tone of voice, “That is not true. We really do care about you two...”

But, before River could finished her response, a dozen men with assault rifles stormed into the room, from the front double-doors.

The men came to a stop just inside the double-doors. The men were carrying an assortment of automatic rifles, and semi-automatic pistols.

Everyone in the room turned to look at them. With those are the bar counter turning, and in the case of four of them, getting onto their feet, as they look at the men.

From their clothing, skin tones, weapons, and demeanor, everyone could these newcomers were cartel members. Though, no one was sure of which cartel the men belonged too.

In the front of the group of cartel members stood the leader of the group. The man was a middle-aged, heavy set man, with tanned skin, and short brown hair. He had a full, groomed beard. He was wearing brown pants, black leather belt, brown leather dress shoes, a blue button up, short sleeved shirt, with a brown suit coat over his shirt.

Unbeknownst, to those in the room, the leader was Velasco, Severo's second in command, in the Manisarera cartel, in Caracas.

Everyone inside the bar also noticed that the cartel members were all pointing their weapons at woman with long purple hair, tied into a ponytail, whom was wearing green combat fatigues, and military cap.

The weapon of choice that Velasco brought with him, which he held with both hands, as he pointed the firearm at the Bloodhound, was an IMBEL MD-Two automatic rifle. The IMBEL MD-Two rifle was based off FN FAL design that was created by the Belgian Fabrique Nationale company. The MD-Two fired a five point fifty-six by forty-five millimeter round. The ammo magazine for the rifle held thirty rounds. At the moment, there were twenty-nine rounds in the magazine and one round in the chamber of Velasco's automatic rifle.

As Velasco and his men continued to point their weapons at Roberta, Velasco flatly said, in spanish, “You are coming with us, Bloodhound.”

Roberta thought, 'Oh hell. Coming here was a mistake. Because, I am cornered... And I was just getting to know this nice mexican, beside me.'

Meanwhile, the bartender realized the danger he was in, and he immediately ran out the back door of the bar, which was by the left exit of the bar counter, against the back wall.
The door lead down the hallway, on the far right end of the wall, against the back wall of the hallway, with the hallway dead ending right there. The door to the exit swung to the right, against the back wall.

A second later, Velasco heard clicking noise to the left of Roberta, to his right. He looked over at the man beside Roberta, and he saw that the man in a brown long coat, was holding, with his right hand, an Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt semi-automatic pistol, with forty-five auto rounds. The pistol was cocked, and the man was pointing his weapon Velasco.

The man pointing his weapon at Velasco, stated, in a forceful tone of voice, in english, “Don't move. You're surrounded by armed bastards.”

Fortunately, Velasco knew english. Velasco arrogantly demanded, in english, “And who are you?”

Roberta and Revy looked at the man's face, with slight fear of his his feral, slight toothy, smile, as the man answered, in english “I am the Mexican.”

Pedro thought, with delight, 'I always wanted a good excuse to use that line from Life on Mars. And this situation is just perfect for that line by Gene Hunt. And Gene Hunt is the man. Now, show these kids how it's done.'

Suddenly, Velasco and his men heard several more clicking sounds, along with lots of laughter, from around the room.

Velasco looked around to his right he saw several russian men, and a blond woman with a scar running down the right side of her face, pointing their pistols at them, while they chuckled.

And to his left, he saw several chinese men, pointing their pistols at them. One of the men was holding a semi-automatic pistol in each of his hands.

On the left side of the room, Chang pointed his two custom, Beretta seventy-six pistols, towards the cartel members. The pistols has inlaid silver dragon pistol grips pistols at the new group, and the weapons fired twenty-two caliber subsonic hollowpoint rounds.

Chang kept his weapons trained on the cartel members, as he looked over at Pedro. Chang stated, in english, “That is a good line. I will have to remember it.”

Pedro did not take his eyes, nor his pistol off the cartel members, as he nodded once in acknowledgment that he heard Chang's statement. Pedro thought, 'Well, while you remember it, you did not seem to connect to me, when we met in your future, and my past. And if these scumbags think they are going to ruin my night, they got another thing coming. I have faced worse than them, and live.'

Chang then turned back to look at the cartel members, as he inquired, in english, “So, who are you? And why are you disturbing our relaxing, quiet party?”

Velasco turned to Chang, while keep his weapon trained on Roberta. He stated, in english, “We are with the Manisarera cartel.”

Chang asked, “Severo's group?”

Velasco stated, “Yes.” Velasco turned back to look at Roberta, and Pedro, with Pedro still pointing his pistol at him, as he continued, “And we only want the purple haired woman.”

(_)

Across the room, on the right side of the room, Balalaika was standing with her men, as she listened to the men talk in english. She understood every word they had said, as she used her right hand to point her Stechkin APS automatic pistol at the cartel member. Her Stechkin APS was set to semi-automatic single shot, and the weapon fired nine millimeter rounds. The Stechkin APS ammo magazine held a total of twenty rounds. With Balalaika’s pistol have nineteen rounds in the magazine, and one round in the chamber, with the hammer cocked back, ready to fire.

Balalaika thought, 'I will let this play out. Though, I am annoyed that the Severo would send so many men, to disturb such a pleasant evening for us. And it is clear that Severo met with both my group, and this chinese man's group, very recently. And I wonder why Severo would hold so many meetings, in such a short timespan? And why would Severo send so many armed men to handle one person?'

Balalaika looked over at Roberta, while she kept her weapon trained on the cartel members. She continued her thoughts, 'My instincts till me to watch this woman. And while I don't know spanish. I did recognize one word, that man called this woman. Bloodhound... This all bares further investigation. But, now is not the time for that.'

Balalaika looked back at the cartel members, as she mentally reflected, 'Also, I can tell that there are too many clashing egos for this to end peacefully. So, for right now, it would be best to let someone else make the next move. Because, the person that does is likely going to be the first person shot in this coming battle.'

'Though fortunately, my men are trained to be ready for battle, at a moments notice. And as such, we will come out as the victors to this egocentric folly.'

Balalaika turned to look at the chinese men, across the room, as she thought, 'Though, I am sure my men understand, as I do, that these chinese are not our enemies, at the moment. So, when the battle starts, we will all be fighting a common enemy.'

Balalaika turned back to look at the cartel members, as she concluded her thoughts, with a bit of grim determination in her mood, 'But, if these chinese get in our way, they will be crushed, like these cartel fools.'

(_)

Back at the table, by the front entrance, where Lee, Daiyu, River, and Matthew were sitting, near the entrance, to the left of the group of cartel members, Lee turned back to look at the other adults at her table. She asked, in a quiet tone of voice, so as to not alert the attention of the nearby cartel members, “Did Pedro just quote Gene Hunt, from the Life On Mars series?”

The other three adults at the table turned to look at Lee.

Daiyu softly answered, “Yes. He told me that was his favorite series... Next to mine...” She thought, 'And of course, it was him that girls were talking about, during their stay at the Black Sheep inn, inside Mars Dome One.'

River quietly stated, “I think Pedro and Matthew here just went badass on a dare.”

Matthew smiled, as he overheard River. He quietly said, “Looks like a mexican stand off. How poetic, considering it was started by a mexican. But, I cannot leave my client in a lurch like this. Daiyu, babe, do you know what my favorite part of your series is?”

Matthew then used his right forearm to slightly his bottle of rum closer to the edge of the table.

Daiyu soft replied, “I have a feeling it involves a standoff.” She thought, 'I will let the, babe, comment slide. This is not the time, nor place to address such meaningless insults. It is more important to find out what Matthew it getting at. The problem is that my series has several standoffs in it. So, I don't know which one he is talking about.'

Matthew quietly responded, “Oh yea. It was the one when Fabiola first came to Roanapur. When she entered the Yellowflag. I loved that fight. I find women that specialize in gymnastic styles of dance and combat to be my type. And it was so much fun in seeing how that fight started.”

Matthew continued used his right forearm to push the bottle ever so closer to the edge, right to the lip.

Lee was the first one at the table to notice what Matthew was doing. She looked at Matthew, in his face, as she asked, “What are you doing?”

Matthew smile turned into a wicked smirk, as he whispered, with excitement in his tone of voice, “Lighting the big bang, babe.”

Matthew used his right forearm to finally push the bottle off the table.

Matthew looked at the three women, as he continued smirking, while the bottle was falling to the floor. He quickly said, in a mocking tone, “Oops.” He then swiftly ducked under the table.

As the bottle hit the floor and shattered, one of the cartel members thought the glass breaking was a gun shot, and he shot towards the bar.

A split second later, the three women at the table with Matthew, dropped to under the table. They soon saw Matthew was gone, as he was crawling the left side of the bar counter, which was the entrance to behind the bar.

The shootout began, by the chinese and russians firing first, at the cartel members.

At the bar counter, instead of firing, Pedro swiftly used his right thumb to turn on the hammer safety to his pistol. He placed his right trigger finger against the trigger guard, as he fell back onto the bar table. He rolled to his left side, over the bar counter, and to the cover on the other side.

Roberta also turned, and jumped over the bar counter. With Benny and Dutch swiftly dragging Revy over the bar counter, with them.

(_)

At the front of the bar, Velasco, and several of the cartel members were the first to die, before they could take their first shots. While the other cartel members, shot wide, and did not hit anything, but the walls, due to the being shot themselves.

(_)

Near the middle of the room, Matthew crawled towards the left entrance to the back of bar counter, while he avoided the gunfire above him. As he crawled, he thought, 'I guess we will just have to call this bet a draw.'

(_)

A few seconds later, the russians and chinese finished shooting, with the cartel were laying on the floor, dead.

Both groups looked at each other. Though, while they had their guns still out, the two groups were not pointing their weapons at the other group, nor each other. And a few of them reloaded their weapons.

Chang pointed his pistols at a diagonal, downward angle, away from everyone, as he took a hard look at the russians, across the room. His attention was mostly focused on the blond woman among their group.

Chang thought, 'That was quick. And I can now talk to the blond woman, and maybe get some answers.'

'Because, I have a feeling she is the boss of her group. Given how casually dressed most of these russians are, and the only woman in their group is where a formal dress. I am guessing she is their leader.'

'And I have been occasionally watching her tonight, and I am sure she has done the same to me. Given both the way the russian men have acted towards her, and the way she has acted towards them. She is clearly not the trophy girlfriend of one the russian men. And while I do not know russian. The russian men all clearly seem to defer to her. That means she is there leader.'

'And except for the scar on her face and chest, she is not that bad looking. Though, I have been burned by foreign women before.'

Then, from both corners of Chang's eyes, Chang saw cartel members, carrying firearms, flood into the room, from both the front and back entrances.

Chang quickly took aim and fired as the front two of cartel members coming from the front foot, as he fired his pistols, killing two of the men at once.

The russians and the chinese also began firing at the cartel members coming into the room. Most of the cartel members died before they could return fire, due to the chinese and russians using the entrances to the room as choke points.

A few of russians and chinese even fired through the windows, at the cartel men that were foolish enough to try to break into the room that way.

Chang thought, 'Looks like I spoke to soon about this being over.'

Chang then noticed the blond looking him, as she made slowly made her way towards him.

Chang thought, 'She clearly wants to talk to me, as well. I think I will meet her half way. Though, she will likely be as vague about herself, as I will be to her.'

Chang then slowly made his way to the middle of the room, as he fired pistols at other cartel members, whom continued to pour out, from both the front and the back of the room.

(_)

Meanwhile, a few seconds ago, Balalaika fired her pistol again at another cartel member, as she slowly made her way to the finely dress chinese man, that was across the room.

Balalaika thought, 'Okay. I did not expect more cartel members to flood into the room, with weapons. This could be a problem. My men and I, are not prepared for a protracted battle.'

'Still, the chinese realize we are not their enemy. And my men and I are returning the favor.'

'Also, given all of the other men on that side of the room are just wearing black suit, while this man is wearing finer clothing, including a long coat and waistcoat. And he was the one among them that spoke. I am guessing he is their leader. Though, considering he is wearing sunglasses inside, I have my doubts, about his maturity. Still, I would like some answers as to how he knows Severo. I believe knowing this is the key to getting my men, and myself, out of this mess.'

'Though, it is fortunate these latin pigs don't know how to use the hardware they have.
While these chinese men clear do know how to use their weapons. With the man in the long coat being pretty good with those two pistols. Still, they are not at the level of my men, but they clearly appear competent in their shooting. And they have not shot at any of us.'

Balalaika then notice the chinese man, whom was using two pistols, had looked over her for a moment. Before he then took aim with his pistols to fire, as he slowly began to make his way towards her.

Balalaika continued her thoughts, 'Good he got my message. We will just have to meet in the middle and talk. But, I will be careful about what I say. And I am sure he will do that same.'

As Balalaika slowly made her way to the middle of the room, she fired her pistol at another cartel member, killing the man with one shot.

(_)

Around two minutes ago, outside the back of the bar, in the back parking lot, behind a row of various vehicles that belonged to his group, Severo stood next to some of his cartel men.

There was also a single, red, four door car, around twenty feet behind the men, with the left driver's side of the car facing the men.

There were street lights nearby, that gave plenty of illumination for them to see the back door, and each other.

Instead of leading from the front, Severo wisely choose to lead from the flank of the trap. Just in case things went wrong. And if need be, he could stop anyone from escaping out of the back of the building. Though, he had given that order, yet.

Severo thought, 'The Bloodhound is here. And when Velasco radioed me, I called in every man I have for this attack. Just in case. Most of them at located in front of the buildling, with the rest of my men are back here, with me.'

'And while the Bloodhound is a concern, so are the chinese and russians. I sent both the chinese and russians here, to keep them out of trouble.'

'Oh, the irony in that.'

'It is just tragic that the Bloodhound would have to pick this bar to duck into. And this poses a problem for me. Though, to be honest, the Bloodhound is more important than the meetings I had today. So, I will handle my orders in this manner. I will try to just take out the Bloodhound, with as little bloodshed as possible.'

'Valasco is even under orders to do just that.'

'With luck, and that will happen. We capture, or kill the Bloodhound, and leave with her.'

'As long as we don't drag out the situation, the chinese and russians will care less that we briefly interrupted their night. Especially, since I plan on informing them, afterward, that the Bloodhound is a very dangerous FARC terrorist that went rogue. They might even consider her a threat, once they know that. And they might thank me for taking her down.'

'And explaining when I met with both of them will not be a problem either. I will just say that it was a matter of me scheduling my time well. Chang and Balalaika might even appreciate that comment. The two of them strike me as the type that don't like people that waste time. Especially, their time.'

'But, if the chinese, russians, or both, get involved, I have to make sure there are no witnesses left alive in there. Which is the chinese, russians, and anyone else presently in the bar.'

'And after everyone in there is dead, I will make it look like the chinese and russians killed each other. With the Bloodhound getting caught in the crossfire. That way, I won't get blamed for screwing up those meetings.'

'The capo likely won't ask too many questions. And that way, I won't get the blame. And while I might not get a reward out of this. Gustavo will say I handle the meetings fine, which, by doing so, he will still put in a good word in for me. And I will likely be no worse off than I already am.'

'Also, getting my men to stay silent won't be a problem, because they are all loyal to me.'

'And if I do get promoted, I will make sure to reward Velasco's loyalty with the position I will leaving here. But, the Bloodhound, the russians, and the chinese, are all dangerious wildcards. I don't know what any of them are capable of. And this is another reason I had to call in everyone. The only person back at the villa, is Alice, along with few house servants.'

'Should the worst case scenario happen. I know this bar. There are only two ways out of this building. The front and back entrances. Both of which I have covered.'

'A few of my men will go into flush them out. As many as need. Nearly everyone inside eventually attempting escape out of the front, with my men at the front taking them out.'

'Meanwhile, I will be in the back of the building, with some of my men here with me. We will take care of any fools that try to come out of the building from this direction.'

'And should we got overrun, I will make my quick getaway, in a car I have parked behind me. It is within quick reach. The keys are already in the ignition. And the doors are unlocked.'

'Though, if I have to use this means of escape, this will likely mean going on the run from everyone. Including, my superiors. Still, it beats not breathing.'

Suddenly, Severo, and the other cartel members that were present, saw a man run out of the back door of building. The man saw them, and veered to his right, away from them, as he continued running.

The porch light, above the back door, and the street lights behind the cartel members, allowed the men to clearly see the man that had run out of the building.

One of his men asked, in spanish, “Should we let him go?”

Severo did not look at the man who as the question. Instead, he turned back to the back door, as he thought, 'Actually, I know that man. And I do vaguely recall someone I know telling me that he got a job at this bar. As such, I can alter my plans to use him.'

Severo stated, in spanish, “Yes. To make a proper example, someone must live to tell the tale. I know that man. And having a witness we can control will help us in my plans. So, we will catch up to him, later. I know he will not speak police. And we will talk to him, before he talks to others. So, that he will tell others know what we want them to hear.”

Severo thought, 'Now, back to the matter at hand. Velasco should wrap up in a minute. Besides, I know Velasco can be blunt, and a bit arrogant. Though, I doubt he can screw up this entire situation.'

A few seconds later, Severo heard gunfire. Severo looked towards the back of the building, as he thought, 'Ah Velasco, you should be done in no time.'

Severo then heard a more gunfire. A lot more gunfire than both his men, and the Bloodhound could have created.

Severo realized, as he thought, with worry, 'Ah hell, Velasco. You screwed up, and you pissed off both the russians and the chinese. But, don't worry, I will make sure you and my men that died with you, get a proper funeral.'

'Still, it is a good thing I plan ahead for such situations. I need to see if I can turn this around. I will have to send in most my men from both the front and the back.'

Severo turned to one of his subordinates, as he stated, “Order the men start making their way though both the front and back doors of the place. To flush them out. Since in small groups, at a time, from both entrances. As needed. I want you to kill everyone that is inside, or drive them them outside, for use to deal with. Especially, the Bloodhound. And I want no other witnesses. Also, have those in the front notify me if this battle starts to turn against us. Considering they can see through the windows, in front, to see what is happening inside.'

Severo mentally added, 'Just in case I need to make my quick escape.'

The man that Severo had talked too, pulled out his radio, and relayed Severo's orders.

(_)

At that moment, inside the bar, behind the bar counter, from left to right, was Roberta, Pedro, Benny, Revy and Dutch. All of them were sitting on the floor, as they used the counter as cover.

Fortunately, no bottles, on the shelves above them, had been shot. So, there was not broke glass by them, nor falling on them.

Dutch then noticed Revy get ready to stand back up.

Dutch ordered, “Sit down, Revy. This is not our fight. I am not going to let you get us involved in a local turf war.”

Revy turned to Dutch, as she whined, “How am I going to learn, if I cannot practice?”

Dutch countered, “You practice on targets that don't shoot back.”

Meanwhile, Benny was slightly unsettled by the gunfight going on nearby, as he said, “This is crazy. How the hell did we get into this situation?”

Pedro looked over at the Benny, as he smirked. He commented, “I ask myself that question, every day.” He turned to Roberta, as he asked her, in spanish, “Do you know english?” Pedro thought, 'I always wondered if you learned english before, or after, you came to work in the Lovelace household.'

Roberta answered, in fluent english, “Yes. And I am grateful to you, for your help. I was not sure how I was going to deal with that mess.”

Pedro responded, in english, “I am sure you would have figured out something. And you're welcome.”

Benny turned to Pedro, as he said, “You started this, Mexican. You got to help us.”

Revy, Dutch, and Roberta, joined in on looking at Pedro.

Pedro looked over at Benny, as he commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I don't got to do anything for you, blondie. But, I still might help you.”

Pedro then looked around the group of four adults, as he thought, 'I guess I am the experienced teacher in this situation.'

Pedro stated, “So, class is now in session for you four. The first rule is to remain calm. If you freak out, you will die.”

“The second rule you already understand. Get to cover as quickly as possible. In bar dives like this, always stick by the bar counter. You never know what may happen. And occasionally, bartenders have their bar counters armored for protection from gunfire.”

Pedro looked at the back of the bar counter, as he continued, “Though, I don't think this is case for this bar counter.”

Pedro then started looking around the group, again, as he went onto say, “Still, this cover is useful in many ways. Including, that fact I know of cases where the attackers used grenades to clear the building, right after they shot up the place.”

“The third rule is to never do this alone. Always have someone watching your back. Even if they are not fighting.”

Just then, Matthew crawl from the left side of the bar counter entrance, to sit by Roberta, behind the bar counters.

As the adults behind the counter turned to look at Matthew, Pedro stated, “Ah. My assistant has arrived.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he said, “Well, I got some bad news.”

Benny deadpanned, “Compared to this?”

Matthew let out a laugh. He looked over at Benny. He replied, “Yea.” He turned towards Pedro, as he stated, “The trio are here.”

Pedro cursed, “Damn.”

Dutch asked, “Who is this trio?”

Pedro turned to look at Dutch, as he answered, “They are not after any of you, so they are none of your concern. This just means we cannot go through the front door, to exit the building.”

Dutch inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you suggesting we crawl through that warzone to the front door?”

Pedro commented, “Not really. But, my lawyer and I have done that a few times.”

Dutch stared at Pedro for a second. He then flatly asked, “Do I want to know?”

Pedro replied, “No.”

Meanwhile, with Dutch distracted, Revy peeked her head above the bar counter, and what she saw amazed her.

In the center of the room, she saw two armed adults, back to back, firing at cartel members. One was a fair skinned woman, with long blond hair, in a red dress. She had a large scar running down the right side of her face. She held an automatic pistol in her right hand.

The other person was an asian man, with short black hair, in a black long coat. His coat had a white scarf draped from the back of the collar, to the sides of the coat. The chinese man was also wearing sunglasses. And the chinese man was using two semi-automatic pistols at once. One in each hand. And he seemed to be doing a fine job using both weapons at once.

Along with this, both adults seemed perfectly calm in the carnage surrounding them.

Suddenly, Revy felt someone pulled her back down, by the back of her shirt.

Revy turned around to see that Dutch was the one to pull her down.

Dutch looked at Revy, in her face, as he barked, “I told you to stay down. Now, get your head back down here, before it gets blown off.”

What happened next surprised Dutch. Instead of Revy mouthing off at him, she smiled at him, as she grew an excited look on her face. She said, in a near childish tone of glee, “Dutch, I want to learn how to shoot two pistols at once. I just saw someone doing it out there and it looked so cool.”

Dutch shook his head, as he stated, “Revy, this is not the time, nor place for that.” He thought, 'I will figure out what she saw, later.'

Pedro heard all this, as he thought, with amusement, 'Chances are Revy saw Chang use his two pistols at once... So, Chang was inspired to dual wield by Revy in book three, in Lee's stories. Now, it is revealed that Revy was inspired to dual wield by Chang... So, this is a closed, temporal loop... Cool...'

Pedro then looked to his other side, to see Roberta sitting back down. He continued his thoughts, 'And Roberta was also just looking over the bar counter. She probably saw Past Chang, as well. So, maybe her dual wielding style was inspired by Chang. I see she only had one pistol on her. And I recognize that model. All the flashes backs of Roberta in FARC, and even when she first met Diego Lovelace, showed she was only using one pistol at a time.'

'So, when Roberta just saw Chang, right now, she decided to train herself how to fire two pistol at once. And with her skills and experience, she became very good at dual wielding pistols... And that makes this crazy situation even more cooler.'

(_)

Next to Pedro, Roberta had just snuck a quick peek over the bar counter, to assess the situation, before ducking back down, to the safety of cover.

Roberta thought, 'They are right. We are not leaving through the front exit.' She looked over at the group of adults by her, as she continued her thoughts, 'For the moment, I think it might be best, if I just go with them. At the very least, being with them will decrease my chance of being shot.'

Roberta went onto think, with a bit of amusement, 'Although, the redhead here has a point. That two handed pistol style demonstrated by the chinese man, whom was standing next to the blond woman, is interesting. If I survive the next few hours, I might have to look into that style of shooting, later.'

(_)

On the bar floor, a ten feet from the other side of the bar counter, Balalaika and Chang stood back to back, as they fired and killed the cartel members, whom poured into the room from the various entrances.

The two leaders also noticed that both their forces were holding their own. And it became apparent that the cartel members were not very good shots. While both Chang and Balalaika’s men were.

Balalaika faced her men, on the right side of the room. While Chang faced his men, on the left side of the room.

Without looking at each other, the two adults casually chatted, as they shot at their enemies, while being careful not to shoot their allies.

Balalaika asked, in english, “So, how do you know, Severo?”

Chang responded, in english, “Likely the same way as you. I am guessing your group met with him today, also?”

Balalaika complimented, “Good guess.”

Chang commented, “So, who would send an army after one person? It is kinda overkill.”

Balalaika replied, “I agree.”

Balalaika thought, 'This Colombian Cartel disgusts me. To come in and start such an attack out in the open. They have no sense of propriety whatsoever. Especially, after we struck a peaceful deal with them, earlier today. Someday, I will destroy these fools, along with their superiors, and others in their operations, for their acts of stupidity, tonight.'

Chang thought, 'So, we both had a meeting with Severo today. And given my understanding of strong women. Especially, violent women, such as Shenhua. I am guessing she is already planning her revenge against both Severo, and his cartel he is with.'

'And I am more than happy to leave the revenge to her. I just want to get my men, and I, out of this mess in one piece... Though, I do want to know a little more about her. But, I will have to be vague about it.'

Chang asked, “So, where you from?”

Balalaika answered, “Moscow. You?”

Chang replied, “Hong Kong. It is nice to meet you.”

Balalaika responded, “Same here.”

Chang joked, “You know, it is a good thing that you have enough men to fill a hotel with. A Hotel Moscow. I am not sure my men alone could handle all these people.”

While shooting at a couple of cartel members, Balalaika mulled Chang's comment, in her mind. She said, in an amused tone of voice, “Hotel Moscow. I like it... Babe.” She thought, 'I will have to learn more about this gentleman behind me, when I have time. He has style. And I like that.'

Chang heard Balalaika, as he thought, 'So, she liked my joke. Nice. Though, given the circumstances, I will let the, babe, comment, slide.'

Balalaika and Chang then continued to fire on the cartel members.

(_)

Near the entrance, Daiyu was sitting under a table, with Lee and River. Even with the shooting, Daiyu's enhanced hearing allowed her to hear the conversation that Balalaika and her past, male self, were having.

Daiyu winced, as she overheard their more recent comments. She thought, 'If I had only known then, what I know now.'

River overheard Daiyu's thoughts, as she commented, “Could of, would of, should of. Don't worry about. Just learn from your mistakes.”

Daiyu turned to River, as she said, “Thanks, River.”

Next to the two women, Lee stated, “I cannot believe those two are the ones that started the whole ball rolling, for all of you. It is like a couple of small time arsonists getting a hold of a nuke, and knowingly setting it off where it would do the most damage.”

River said, “It doesn't matter now. Now, we just need to get out of here. I sense from the thoughts the next wave will not be here for another minute. With those outside all behind their vehicles, getting ready for their attack. If we crawl out now, turn right outside, and crawl along outside wall, under the window line, with us turning to the left side wall, we will be fine. Fortunately, the side walls have no windows. Though, we need to keep down, so we are no accidentally hit, from shots going their the wall.”

“We can then circle around, and see if we can save Pedro and Matthew from the back door.”

Lee said, “I am with you.”

Daiyu requested, “Lead the way.”

River stated, “Just follow me.”

River then started crawling on all fours, towards the front double-doors entrance, in which the front doors had been destroying.

Daiyu, and then Lee, crawled on all fours, right behind her, as they headed for the front exit.

(_)

Behind the bar counter, the six adults turned to see a group of armed cartel members, busting through the back entrance by the left side of the bar.

Only this time, the cartel members began to turn towards them, before the russians and chinese had a chance to kill the cartel members.

Without a second thought, Pedro used his thumb to turn off the hammer safety, as he fired a few placed shoots to their heads.

At the same time, Roberta, with her right hand, pulled out her own Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt semi-automatic pistol, using forty-five ACP rounds. With her ammo magazine holding seven rounds in total. She pulled back the slide, and she then fired a few round from from her pistol.

Meanwhile, Revy pulled out her M Nine pistol, with her right hand, from the back of her pants, under her black shirt. She then pulled back the slide on her pistol, loading a round into the chamber. Next, she quickly aim, as she flipped of the safety, and she unloaded her magazine into the last intruder that was still standing.

As the last cartel member fell to the ground, Revy had stopped firing. Matthew looked over at Revy. He saw, that from the fact the slide of her pistol was locked open, it meant that Revy's pistol was empty.

Matthew commented, “You has some serious impulse control problems.”

Dutch looked over at Matthew, as he deadpanned, “You don't know the half of it.”

Matthew and Pedro laughed for a few seconds at Dutch's comment, as Matthew thought, 'Actually, we probably do.'

As Pedro and Matthew calmed down, Pedro looked at Revy. He then turned to Dutch. He stated, “I have a feeling this is going to be a life long problem.”

Benny mental realized, 'These guys are laughing and joking, in the middle of a firefight... They are not afraid of the situation.' He commented, “You two are way too comfortable for this situation.”

Matthew chuckled a little. He then stated, “We have just been in this situation so many times that we have gotten use to it. I am sure you will get use it, as well.”

Benny replied, “I hope not.”

Matthew shrugged towards Benny in response. He then turned to Revy, as he asked, “By the way, is that an M Nine Beretta?”

Revy turned to Matthew, as she answered, “Yea. What of it?” Revy then used the slide lever to release the slide back in place. Next, she safety lever to decocked the empty pistol. After which, she tucked her pistol, in the back of her pants, under her untucked shirt, where it had been before.

Matthew responded, “Nothing much. It just answers a couple of questions my friend and I had on type of weapons, and how good they are.”

Pedro overheard Matthew and Revy's comments, as he thought, 'Like the in universe connection to why you, Revy, use a Beretta ninety-two FS. Still...' He complimented, “And it shows that my friend here has gained a good appreciation for weapons. And that you have good taste in weapons.”

Matthew and Revy said, almost in unison, “Thank you.”

Pedro replied, “You're welcome.”

Dutch turned to Revy, as he asked, “Revy, are you out of bullets?”

Revy looked at Dutch, as she said, “Yes. And we didn't have that many to start with.”

Dutch shrugged, as he replied, “True.” He thought, 'Though, you did not have to waste all your bullets on one guy. Though, if the battle has revved you up this much, maybe it is a good thing you are out of ammo.'

Dutch turned to look at Pedro, as he continued his thoughts, 'Still, this just means that we are going have to rely on others to get us out of here. And if that is the case, I want to first know where they are from?'

Dutch continued to look at Pedro, as he asked, “So Mexican, where are you guys from?”

Pedro looked at Dutch, as he thought, 'I can answer this, without truly answering this, while having some fun.'

Pedro explained, “The town we are from is in Mexico. The city is full of insanely violent, heavily-armed women. And they roped us into being their designated drivers, when they went out for drinks. That is how the lawyer and I first met, and became good friends. We are just two sane men in a sea of volatile, practically explosive, estrogen.”

Revy and Roberta were not sure how to react to Pedro's comment. Matthew just smiled. And Benny kept quiet.

Dutch held back a laugh, as he quipped, “I don't know whether to be turned on, or terrified by your comment. But, I can guess sanity is relative in such a situation.”

Matthew turned to Dutch, as he thought, 'I get what Pedro is doing. Now, it is my turn.' He continued for Pedro, “Quite right. Anyway, we were going on average two gunfights in a bar a month. Those are gunfights, not just bar fights. There were a lot more bar fights, than that.”

Matthew thought, 'Though, the gunfights were more like Revy just shooting off her pistols. Though, she was not shooting at anyone. And I am sure she is eventually going to get herself into trouble for doing that.'

'Also, the bar fights were went thing got too rowdy. Though, none of them tried to hurt us, unless we accidentally pissed them off. But, I don't want you guys to know that. I just want to pile on the bullshit. And I know just how to do it. By saying something, I always wanted to say this to Revy. But, I knew if I did, she would kill me.”

Matthew went onto say, in a casual tone of voice, “But hey, I did find something out that was interesting about one of the worst of them. She went by the name, Two-hands. I counted the days when Two-hands got really drunk. You might find that math a little interesting, because Two-hands almost got drunk the same time every month.”

Matthew looked around, and he saw Roberta giggling a little, Pedro had a calm expression on his face, Benny and Dutch had blank looks on their face, while Revy had rolled her eyes for a couple of seconds.

Matthew thought, with amusement, 'And the best part, Revy, is that I was talking about you. To your face. Without you ever realizing it.'

Meanwhile, Pedro was stifling a chuckle, as he thought, 'Nice one, Matthew. Even I didn't realize that. And most women just eat chocolates during that time of the month. I guess Revy here just needs something a little harder to consume. Still, I think I will add to this. Though, I cannot call her, Bloodhound, to her face. Fortunately, she has another title I can use.'

Pedro commented, “Speaking of crazy women. When I first met the maid, her student, and two-hands. The feral grin that the maid gave me, terrified me.'

Matthew took a quick look at Roberta, with just his eyes, before he looked back at Pedro.

Matthew thought, 'From the look on her face, she doesn't have a clue we are talking about her. Good. And I will avoid the Bloodhound title, as well. Considering you are using it, even now, Roberta.'

Matthew said, “Yea. Taken from personal experience, being freaked out by the maid, is a completely sane, rational response.”

Revy asked, “So, who is Two-hands?”

Roberta inquired, “Who is the maid?”

Pedro and Matthew both suppressed their laughter.

Pedro thought, 'I will let you handle this question, Matthew.'

Matthew looked over at Roberta, and then to Revy, as he cracked a grin. He commented, in a casual manner, “Don't worry. You'll both find out, some day.”

Dutch thought, 'As fun as this is. We need to get out of here.' He stated, “Okay. Enough fun. Let's get out of here, before one of these groups kills us. Since the Mexican and Lawyer have experience in these situations, let's follow their plan.”

Matthew commented, “I will let me friend do the planning.”

Pedro thought, 'It is good I experience in situations like that.' He turned to Matthew, as he stated, “Thanks...”

Pedro looked around the group, as he continued, “Okay everyone, here is the plan. We are going out the back. Keep low until we are in the hallway. Also, keep in mind, given these people are pouring in from the back as well, that they will likely have an ambush set up, right outside. So, we take this carefully, and we don't just run outside.”

Pedro turned to Roberta, as he went onto say, “You are going to lead them to the back door. Given these people were here for you, I trust that you can take point without any problems.”

Roberta looked at Pedro, as she replied, “You would be correct.”

Pedro said, “Good. I will be right behind you.” He then looked over at Revy, Benny, and Dutch, as he went onto say, “You three will be behind me. With my friend taking up the rear. Is that alright with everyone?”

Dutch said, “I am good with it.”

Benny commented, “As long as, I get out of this alive, I'm happy.”

Revy shrugged, as she casually said, “Whatever.”

Pedro turned to Roberta, as he stated, “Okay. Let's go.”

Roberta looked at Pedro, and she nodded once. She then turned around, towards the back door, as she held up her pistol, in her right hand. She then crouched down, as she slowly made her way to the door.

Pedro had his gun at the ready, as well. He pointed his pistol upwards, as he crouched down, as he made his way towards the door, behind Roberta.

Revy, then Dutch, then Benny, stayed low, as they followed right behind them.

As Matthew began to crawl behind Benny, he noticed two items under the counter. He pulled picked up the two items, and looked at them. He thought, 'Pedro will like these.'

Matthew then turned to see the others had left him behind. Matthew thought, 'I better hurry, and catch up. I know Pedro won't leave me behind. But, the others will.'

Matthew kept down, as he slowly made his way to the door. As he reached the hallway, he though, 'Which way did they go?'

Matthew looked to his left, then to his right. To his right, he saw, halfway down the hall, a dead cartel member laying on the floor. And near the end of the hallway, he saw Revy, Dutch, and Benny standing. Pedro was also standing further down the hallway, with his back to the interior wall. And Matthew also saw the door to the outside was open, with Roberta pocking her head out, every few seconds, as she used her pistol to shoot as someone, or something, outside of the bar.

Matthew stayed down, as he quickly make his way over to other adults. When he reached Revy, Benny, and Dutch, he stood up fully, as he walked over to Pedro.

Matthew asked, “So, how bad is it?”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he answered, “As I thought. They set up an ambush outside. There are at least sixteen armed men shooting at us, about nine meters away, behind some a blockade of vehicles.”

Roberta ducked back into the room, as she turned to face Pedro and Matthew. She stated, “Actually, there are twelve men left. I got four of them.”

Matthew and Pedro turned to Roberta, as Pedro replied, “Good.”

Roberta commented, “But, I am out of ammo.”

Pedro noticed that the slide to Roberta's pistol was locked in the open position. He replied, “No problem. I will take it from here.”

Roberts said, “Okay.” She released the slide lever of the pistol, allowed the slide to return to its position. Next, she pointed her pistol way from everyone, as she dry fire it. After which, she holstered her pistol in to the holster on the right side of her waist.

Roberta then backed away from the door. When she was clear of the door, she turned, and walked behind Pedro and Matthew.

Pedro looked down at his pistol, as he put the hammer safety back on, while he placed his trigger finger on the trigger guard, and pointed his weapon at the ground. He then used he left hand to pull out the nearly empty magazine.

Pedro looked at the magazine, as he thought, 'There are at least twelve men out there. There might be more behind their vehicle, when Roberta and I took a quick peek. I have only two bullets in this magazine, and one in the chamber. I am going to need a fresh magazine to do this right. Though, this should not be to much of a problem. I have faced worse.'

Pedro put away the nearly empty ammo magazine, and he pulled out a fully loaded magazine of ammo. Next, he kept his pistol pointed away from anyone, as he then inserted the full magazine of ammo into the pistol. He kept his weapon pointed at the ground, as turned off the hammer safety to the pistol, with his right thumb. Though, he kept his trigger finger resting against the trigger guard.

Pedro looked over at the other adults, as he said, “Okay. I guess this is going to require a more personal approach. I will just rush out there, and deal with them myself.”

Dutch, Benny, and even Revy and Roberta, gave Pedro looks of disbelief.

Roberta sorrowfully thought, 'And I was just getting to know this man.”

Benny flatly stated, “You're mad!”

Dutch mentally reflect, 'And I thought Revy was crazy.'

Revy scoffed, “Nice knowing you.”

Pedro commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Relax. I have done this before. Most of the time, I don't even get hurt.”

But, Pedro's only made the situation even more eerie for everyone, but Matthew, and himself.

Benny thought, 'It is clear that being around crazy women has driven this man insane. That does not bode well for Dutch and I, considering we live and work around Revy.'

Just as Pedro was able to turn around, and head for the door, Matthew, whom was still standing beside him, said, “Stop!”

Benny sighed in relief, as he stated, “Finally. A voice of reason.”

Matthew commented, “As your lawyer, I suggest, before you do this, that you take a hit from this little brown bottle.” He held up another fresh bottle of El Jimador Tequila in one hand. He continued, “And then use this.” He held up a metal baseball bat in the other hand.

Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “And I thought you weren't going to share any?”

Matthew returned Pedro's smile, as he replied, “You know me better than that.”

Benny stated in disbelief, “The lawyer is as crazy as he is.”

Dutch asked, “That first comment sounds like a movie quote? Isn't it? I just cannot place the line.”

Pedro and Matthew looked over at Dutch. Pedro said, “Yep.”

Matthew stated, “Yes. It is. And a quote to a great movie, at that.” He then put the baseball bat under his left arm, locked to his left size, as he used both hands to open the bottle. Next, with the cap in his left hand, he handed the bottle to Pedro, with his right hand.

Pedro held his pistol in his right hand, as he used his left hand to grab the bottle. He toasted, “Mister Gonzo, to audacity.” He then took a swallow from the bottle, without gagging.

Pedro handed the bottle back to Matthew.

Matthew held up the bottle, as he replied, “Mister Duke, to audacity.” He then took a swallow of it, without gagging. Next, he put the cap back on the bottle, and held the bottle in his left hand. He used his right hand to pull the baseball bat from under his left arm. After which, he used his right hand to offer the baseball to Pedro.

Pedro took the bat in his left hand, by its handle. With him dropping the metal baseball bat to his side. He stated, “Thanks. That hit the spot.”

Matthew said, “You're welcome.”

Matthew bent down, as he gently set the bottle onto the floor, beside himself. He then stood back up.

Benny remarked, “Wait a minute. That line is from the book, Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas. It is a book. Not a movie.”

Pedro and Matthew looked at Benny, as both their smiles widened slightly. They then turned back to face either other.

Matthew stated, “Go kick their asses.”

Pedro held up the bat and his gun, as he replied, “Will do.”

Pedro then rushed out of the back door, as he first his first shot, killing one of the cartel members, behind the row vehicles, instantly.

Pedro ran in a curved, crescent, half circle, to his right, as he shot and killed any of the cartel members that didn't duck quick enough.

With each step Pedro took his smile got wider, as his eyes became more crazied.

As Pedro came within five feet of the row the vehicles, he ran out of ammo. He looked in front of himself, while he continued moving, as he gently toss the pistol, to his right side, onto the pavement, where he could easily find it, and in a way that pistol would not be damaged.

Though, with those eight rounds, Pedro saw he has instantly killed six of the men, and fatally injured a seventh.

After dropping his pistol to the ground, he grabbed his metal bat with both hands, just as he reached the vehicles.

Pedro then stepped onto the front, left side of a front bumper of a car in front of him, and he used the bumper to vault himself over the car. While in the air, he turned his body counterclockwise, to where he landed behind the men, on his feet, while facing the men, on the other side of the row of vehicles, from the people he was helping.

Pedro swiftly tore into the men, by using his metal bat in melee combat.

Pedro knew he was too close to the cartel members for them to get a clear shot without hitting one of their own, and he used that to his advantage.

And each blow the Pedro made with his metal bat, a cartel member were either instantly crippled, or out right killed from a death blow. He even left go of the bat with his left hand. And as he used the bat to hit some of the cartel members with his right hand, he used his left hand to slam some of the cartel member heads through a nearby car windows, with the glass from the windows severing various arteries and veins along their necks.

As Pedro did all this, he maintained his feral grin and insane look to his eyes.

(_)

At the moment, outside of the bar, on the left back corner of the building, near the back, Daiyu, River, and Lee kept low, and to the shadows, as they watched the carnage that Pedro was creating.

The back of the building was flush. And with the street lights, and the porch light, the three women could clearly see what was going on.

Daiyu said, “Sometimes I forgot how dangerous Pedro can be when not having to deal with super-human badasses.”

Lee suggested, “I think it is best if we lay off on them for a while.”

Daiyu replied, “We will talk to them after this. But otherwise, we will do as you suggest.”

River then noticed something else, as she said, “Look at the back door. It seems both Matthew and Pedro are having way too much fun tonight.”

Daiyu and Lee turned to look at what River had commented on. And whom they saw surprised them.

(_)

At the back door, the other five adults peeked their heads out for the door to watch.

Matthew watched his friend with pride.

Revy, Roberta, Dutch, and Benny watched with disbelief.

The five adults talked, as they continued two watch the one-sided fight.

Roberta commented, “The first lesson I was taught as a revolutionary was never intentionally run into the line of fire without someone first offering cover-fire.”

Revy said, “He's crazy.”

Roberta agreed, “Apparently so.”

Matthew stated, “You guys got to admit that the intimidation factor goes way up with a smile like that.”

Dutch saw Pedro's grin, as he agreed, “You got that right.”

Revy noticed the feral grin on Pedro's face, as she asked, “Where did he learn to smile like that?”

Matthew answered, “From the women that we have been forced to deal with back home. Some of them can shatter a metal knife blade into pieces, with their teeth, while wearing a smile like that.”

Roberta commented, “Unbelievable.”

It took all of Matthew's will power to burst out laughing at the irony, that Roberta of all people, would make a comment like that. Considering her future self was the one that did that.

As Matthew forced down his desire for laughter, he said, “The most interesting part is that my client doesn't even hold a candle some of the women we know back home. Especially, Two-hands, and the Maid.”

Dutch commented, “That is the second time you have mentioned those two.”

Matthew commented, “They are worth mentioning several times. They're that good.”

Dutch shrugged, as he replied, “I'll bet.”

Benny asked, “He is kicking all kinds of ass, and you say those women in your home town are worse?”

Matthew answered, “Yes.”

Benny inquired, “This place you two are from? Is it Hell?”

Matthew smirked, as he responded, “Nope. But, I am pretty sure the devil does own a hotel there. It is kinda obvious. Though, the nightly rates there are nice. The employees are polite. And the karaoke nights at the hotel bar can get pretty insane.” He mentally added, 'Though, I am staying at the casino, across town. But, I am not going to tell you four, that.'

Dutch commented, “You clearly are living interesting lives.”

Matthew let out a laugh. He then said, “You don't know the half of it.”

Dutch thought, 'Touche.'

The five adults then continued watching the battle in front of them.

(_)

By that time, in the back parking lot of the bar, on the other side of the row of vehicles, the last surviving, but badly beaten cartel member, whom their leader, Severo, was laying, with his back against a car, as he looked up at the crazy man with the metal bat.

Severo quickly stated, in spanish, “Wait! I am the leader of the local group of the Manisarera cartel. We can cut a deal.”

Pedro thought, 'So, this is the reason Balalaika hates the Manisarera Cartel. This finally answers that question. Still, as leader of this group, this man is responsible for this mess, and he needs to pay.'

Pedro still showed the crazed look in his eyes, and the feral grin on his lips. He said, in a sadistic tone of voice, in spanish, “Given the number of your men that I have seen killed inside, and those I killed outside, it is a safe bet that, as of right now, the Manisarera Cartel no longer exists in Caracas. And a king cannot exist without a kingdom. Thus, the only thing you can offer me is the satisfaction of killing you. Because the only other thing I loath more than wasting lives, is incompetence, such as what your, and your subordinates, have shown.”

Severo thought, with sorrow, 'All my men are dead... Oh no... At least I need to know who my executioner is.' Severo pleaded, “At least tell me who you are? What are you?”

Pedro continued to grin his slash grin, as he said, in english, in a sadistic tone of voice, “I am the creature from the Laguna Negra.”

Pedro then used his metal bat to beat Severo to death with repeated blows to Severo's head.

When Severo was dead, Pedro use Severo's clothing to wipe the blood off of his metal bat.

Pedro then held his bat in his left hand, as he walked between a two feet gap, between two to of the cars. Next, he head over to where his pistol laid. When he reached his pistol, he came to a stop. He bent down, with his knees, as he used he right hand to pistol up his pistol by its grip.

As he stood up straight, he looked at his pistol, with the slide automatically left open.

Pedro thought, 'Well, it doesn't look damaged. Nor, dirty. Nor, even seriously scratched. I will clean it, later. Fortunately, I have the cleaning tools and items in my coat. Also, I am happy that I didn't get hurt in this fight. Though, it is clear these guys never before met a heavy hitter of my skill level.' He then used the right thumb to release the slide lever, with the slide going back in place, as the empty gun's hammer was cocked back.

Pedro pointed the weapon at the ground. And he dry fired it. Next, he holstered his pistol.

Pedro then turned to look towards the back entrance of the building.

He saw all five of the adults were now standing outside.

Roberta stood in front, with Revy to her right. Behind Revy was Benny, and to Benny's left was Dutch. To Dutch's left stood Matthew.

With Roberta and Revy standing in front of them.

Pedro thought, 'Now, to have some more fun, and likely win my bet with Matthew.'

Pedro casually started walking toward, as he used placed his metal bat behind his neck, as he held both end of the bat with his hands. With his left hand holding of the handle of metal bat.

Pedro could see the fear coming from the facial expressions of Revy, Roberta, Benny and Dutch. And this fear was not because Pedro was covered in both. Actually, due to his experience, he knew how to give a massive beatings to people, with baseball bats, without getting himself from dirty from both.

As such, there only a few drops of blood on Pedro's clothing, and his metal bat.

The reason the four adults were scared of Pedro was that he was still maintaining his slasher grin, and wild, crazed look in his eyes.

Along with this, Pedro appeared to be unharmed.

There was an eerie, unpleasant silence, as Pedro approached the other adults.

Pedro came to a stop, a few feet in front of Revy and Roberta, as he looked down a them, with his feral grin, while they looked up at him, with looks of fear showing in their eyes and facial expressions.

Pedro also noticed, behind the two women, looks of fear from Benny. And a bit of fear showing on Dutch's face. Though, Matthew maintained a sense of calmness.

Pedro thought, 'I guess their sanity hasn't full cracked yet. And once someone shows a person what is possible, they usually learn how to do it themselves. And I guess this is now just one giant temporal loop for all of us.'

Meanwhile, Matthew watched Pedro, as he maintained a mask of calmness, as he saw that Revy, Dutch, Benny, and Roberta, were clearly scared of Pedro, at the moment.

Matthew thought, with amusement, 'Pedro, I never thought I would enjoy watching you give someone the third degree, crazy type stare. But, with these four, it is worth enjoying.'

(_)

From the corner of the building, Daiyu, Lee, and River, watched Pedro scared the crap out of Roberta, Revy, Benny, and Dutch.

Daiyu commented, “I didn't realize that Pedro was this crazy.”

Lee asked, “Is he scaring Roberta and Revy?”

River answered, “Yes. And he loving every second of it.”

(_)

By the back door, Dutch reigned in his fear, as he thought, 'Okay. This guy can be scary, but so can Revy. Especially, during that time of the month for her. And being trapped with Revy, on a boat, with her, during that time, is like being on bomb disposal detail. One wrong move and something blows up in your face. And you pray she is not armed at that moment...'

'Still, I need to loosen the tension, before someone snaps, and somebody does something stupid.'

Dutch said, “I am glad you survived. Amen. Hallelujah.”

Pedro dropped his insane expression, as he let out a laugh, which eased the tension for everyone there.

Pedro looked over at Dutch, as he stated, “And peanut butter.”

Matthew snickered at Pedro's comment, for a few seconds.

Dutch thought, 'I may have to remember that one.'

Pedro left go of his bat with his right hand. He then used his left hand to toss the bat away from him. After which, he dropped his hands to his side. And he used his right hand to pull something out from one of his coat pockets.

Pedro looked over at Roberta, as he said, “Here.” He tossed her a spare ammo magazine.

Roberta caught the ammo magazine. She looked at it, and she quickly realized that it was both full of ammo, and that it would work with her Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt semi-automatic pistol. She pulled out her pistol, and she replaced her empty ammo magazine with the full magazine that had seven round in it.

Next, she holstered her weapon, and she placed her empty ammo magazine into an empty slot on her four slotted ammo pouch, on the left side of her belt.

Roberta looked over at Pedro, as she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Thanks.” She then took a few steps closer to Pedro, as she used her arms to pull him down, so she could give him a kiss on his lips, as she hugged him.

Pedro returned Roberta's kiss, as he embraced her.

(_)

At the left back corner of the building, in the shadows, Daiyu, River and Lee's jaws dropped at what they saw.

Daiyu asked, “River, would she have done it with him?”

River flatly answer, “If she had the time. Yes.”

Lee commented, “You got to admit, Pedro is not that bad of a catch.”

River and Daiyu looked at Lee.

Lee stated, “I have seen both sides of him. He is a badass and polite. You cannot go wrong with that combination. I know, with you two.”

River replied, “Thank you.”

Daiyu commented, “I appreciate that.”

Then, all three women turned back to look at the scene taking place, nearby.

(_)

At the back door, Roberta broke her kiss and her embrace with Pedro. And Pedro did the same for her, allowing for Roberta to take a few steps back, while Pedro leaned up straight.

Roberta said, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thanks again, for the help.”

Pedro gave Roberta a warm smile, as he replied, “Any time.”

Dutch looked a the group, as he commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Not to ruin the mood. But, the cops are going to show up soon. We all got to get out of here, while we still can.”

The other five adults turned to look at Dutch. And Dutch looked over at Roberta. Dutch offered, “Would you like to come with us? You seem be good in a fight.”

Roberta responded, in a calm tone of voice, “No. There is likely a price on my head. And I do not want want to drag you into my problems. I have a friend of the family here that I wish to look for help, first. For some supplies. I will then flee the country, by myself. In my own way. Of my own choosing.”

Dutch nodded once towards Roberta. He then replied, in a polite tone of voice, “I completely understand. And good luck to you.”

Roberta commented, “Same to you.”

Benny turned to Pedro, as he sarcastically said, “Thanks. I might have nightmares about this night for years to come.”

Pedro turned to Benny, as he responded, “Nah. And if you go through this enough times, you might even get use to it.”

Dutch overheard Benny and Pedro. He chuckled a little. He then said, “Now that is a scary thought.”

Revy stated, “Good luck you guys. Thanks to you, I now know the type of gunfighter I wish to be.”

Matthew joked, “I doubt it is too much to hope that you will be an honest gunfighter.”

Matthew and the five adults smiled in response to his comment.

Pedro said, “I hope you all have a safe journey, and a great life.”

Roberta turned to Pedro, as she warmly responded, “You too, Mexican.” She thought, 'Looks I will have to get a ride back to the Lovelace estate, tonight. But, I should be able to get there before dawn. I might even be able to get a few hours sleep, outside their home, before I knock on Senor Lovelace's front door, in the morning.'

Revy snorted, as she said, “Yea. I guess, you to.”

Benny replied, “See you later.”

Dutch stated, “Have a safe journey, yourselves.” He thought, 'Now, we need to find a taxi before the police get here, and start to cordon off the roads.'

Pedro turned to Dutch, as he said, “Thanks.”

Matthew looked over at Revy, as he stated, “See you all in a few decades, red”

Revy turned to Matthew, as she responded, “I will be waiting to collect on that bet then, lawyer.”

Matthew smirked, as he replied, “I hope you have the money then, to pay me.” He thought, 'I know you will.'

Revy returned Matthew's smirk, as she said, “We'll see.”

The lagoon members then head towards to the right side of the building. While Roberta went directly left, in a parallel direction with the river, behind the bar.

Pedro and Matthew watched as the four other adults disappeared into the darkness.

After the two men lost sight of them, Matthew turned to Pedro, as he asked, “So, would you have done with the Bloodhound, if you had the time?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew with a lecherous grin on his face. He honestly answered, “Oh, hell yes. She is still somewhat sane at this point in her life.”

Matthew shrugged, as he said, “True. Now let's get out of here.” He then started walking towards the left side of the building.

Pedro complimented, “Good idea.” He then caught up to Matthew, with him walking beside Matthew, to Matthew right side.

As they continued walking, Pedro inquired, “So, who do you think won our bet?” He mentally added, 'Matthew is honest enough to not immediately claim victory, unless he has a good reason too.'

Matthew complimented, “Well, you did hit a home run with that baseball bat, in your battle, just now.”

Pedro replied, “Thank you.”

Matthew pointed out, “Though, if those inside the bar had learned you were a police chief, you might not gotten out of that bar alive.”

Pedro stated, “Nah. I would just remind them that this is not my jurisdiction. And that I had no interest in causing any trouble.”

Matthew responded, “But, you caused the most trouble of the night.”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he replied, “I know. That is the fun part.”

Both men laughed for a few seconds, at Pedro's comment.

As they calmed down, Pedro asked, “So, who do you honestly think won the bet.”

Matthew said, “I would have to say it was a draw. I dropped the bottle to get everyone to start firing. Though, you got everyone to pull out their guns.”

Pedro agreed, “I can go along with that.”

Suddenly, to their left side, they heard a River say, “Hi guys. How was the fight?”

Pedro and Matthew came to a stop, as they turned left to face Daiyu, River, and Lee.

Pedro continued to stand to Matthew’s right side, as the two men looked a three women that were after them, whom were approaching this.

Though, the three women also noticed the two men were very calm.

Daiyu thought, 'They certainly are calm. But, after tonight. I can understand that.' She said, “You two have cause quite a ruckus tonight.”

Daiyu then came to a stop, ten feet from the two men, with River and Lee then stopping right beside her.

Pedro replied, “Uh huh.”

Daiyu asked, “Is that all you have to say for yourselves?”

Pedro calmly retorted, “What do you expect me to say?”

River turned to Daiyu, as she kindly requested, “Relax. It is clear they have had a busy night.”

Daiyu turned to River. She shrugged, as she said, 'I believe that is the case.' Daiyu and River then turned back to look at Pedro, and Matthew.

Lee looked at Pedro and Matthew, as she asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “Are you two okay?”

Pedro happily answered, “Great. Couldn't be better.”

Matthew said, in a casual tone of voice, “I am fine.”

Lee commented, “Good. Pedro, River read both your mind, and Roberta's mind. I don't believe you were going to sleep with her.”

Pedro shrugged, as he said, “I am starting to see the appeal of that crazy women have.”

River said, “Thank you.”

Pedro looked over at River, as he said, “You're welcome.”

River smiled at Pedro, as she mentioned, “By the way, if Roberta had the time, she was planning on sleeping with you.”

Pedro returned River's smile, as he said, “Cool.”

Lee stated, “Be that as it may. Given what you just tried, you are quite the hypocrite to have made fun of Rock and Garcia, in their relationships with crazy women.”

Pedro turned to Lee, as he pointed out, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Hey. I remember that conversation. And, at the time, you agreed with me. Besides, you are one to talk. Given who you are in bed with. No offense, River, and Chang.”

River said, “None taken.”

Daiyu commented, “I have heard worse.”

Pedro went onto say, “Hell, you are now a crazy woman, yourself.”

Lee smirked, as she replied, “And proud of it.”

Daiyu and River smiled at Lee's comment. While Matthew remained silent.

Pedro just rolled his eyes for a second, before he looked back at the three women in front of him and Matthew.

Pedro thought, 'Now, to get out of here.' He commented, “Well, sorry we cannot stay and chat, but we are in kind of a rush.”

Pedro then pulled out their reality device from a coat pocket, with his right hand.

Matthew said, “See you later.” He turned to his friend, as he requested, “Thrill me, Pedro.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he replied, “With pleasure, Matthew.”

Pedro vaguely thought about where he wanted to take them next, as put his left arm gently on his friend's right shoulder, while he used his right hand to pressed the red button on their reality device. Thus, making them both jump to a different reality, as they disappeared from the three women in the blink of an eye.

The three women continued looking forward, as Lee stated, “Those two guys are going to be a lot harder to control, from now on.”

Daiyu said, “And we have only ourselves to blame.”

River suggested, “Well, either way. There is not rush in heading after them. Since we are here, in Caracas, we might as well spend a few days here, and enjoy ourselves. And by doing so, we will give Pedro and Matthew a fair, head start.” She thought, 'I will get a target lock on their next destination, in a few minutes.'

Lee said, “I won't mind spending some time here. It gives me an excuse to brush up on my spanish.”

Daiyu responded, “I am okay with staying for a while.”

River stated, “So, let's get something to eat. And then we will find a nice hotel to stay at. I hear this city has a lot of nice restaurants, and hotels.”

Daiyu said, “I am more than happy for you to pick wherever you want to go.”

Lee commented, “Since fixing my body, I have been open to trying new and tasty foods.”

River smiled, as she requested, “Then, follow me. I remember Garcia mentioning a wonderful place to eat, near here, that is open all night. And the place has been open since Garcia was a young child. So, I know it exists at this point in time.”

River then started walking to their right, along the river. With her two lovers following her through the parking lot, and soon down a sidewalk, to where she wanted to take them to eat. And then, they planned to find a place to get some rest at.

(_)

As Daiyu, Lee, and River, left the area, to get something to eat, in the building, inside the bar room itself, the battle was over, and things had calmed down. Though, everyone still had their firearms in hand.

At this point, all the cartel members were dead, save for one or two that wisely never entered the bar, and fled into the dark streets of the night.

Surprisingly, the tables, chairs, and bar counter, were mostly in one piece. While the walls were swiss cheesed. With the doors, the shelves on the walls, the bottles on the shelves, and the windows in the room, were destroyed.

And Chang and Balalaika with their groups.

On the left side of the room, Chang looked around, as he sarcastically muttered, in english, “Well that was fun, and stimulating.” He then turned to his men, as he asked, in chinese, “Has anyone been hurt? Or killed?”

One his men turned to Chang, as he replied, in chinese, “A few of our men have some bullet grazings. But, nothing serious. And none of us have been seriously harmed, nor killed.”

Chang let out a sigh of relief. He then said, “Good.”

Meanwhile, on the right side of the room, Balalaika looked over at Boris, whom was ten feet away from her. She calmly inquired, in russian, “Sergeant. What are the casualties?”

Boris turned to face Balalaika. He stated, in russian, “None, Captain. These cartel members clearly how no knowledge of how to properly use their weapons.”

Balalaika lips curled into a wicked grin, as she responded, “Then, that is fortunate for us.”

Boris looked over at the chinese men, across the room. He looked back at Balalaika, as he questioned, “So, what are your orders, concerning the chinese men?”

Balalaika looked over at the chinese men. She thought, 'They are clearly no in the mood to fight us.' She turned back to look at Boris, as she answered, “Nothing for the moment. Still...” Balalaika looked back over at Chang, as she stated, in english, “I believe it is time to leave, Mister Hong Kong.”

Across the room, Chang realized Balalaika was talking to him. He turned around to look at Balalaika, as he said, in english, “I agree Ms Moscow. And I hope you, and your men have a pleasant night.”

Balalaika suggested, “You as well. Though, it might be best if you and your men leave first. Then, we will follow after you... I do believe that neither of our groups want to be here, when the local authorities finally decide to show up.”

Chang thought, 'She is making a good point. They are not going to shoot us in the back after this battle. So, I will accept this act of good faith.' He replied, “Alright.” He turned to his men, as he stated, in chinese, “Gentlemen. We are heading out, back to the hotel.”

The chinese men then filed out of the room, through the front entrance, with Chang leading in front, as they headed for the cars they had rented, which were parked in a nearby parking lot.

Across the room, as Balalaika watched the chinese men leave the room, for the outside, broken windows, Boris walked over to Balalaika, as he whispered, in russian “Do you wish for them to be taken care of, as they leave?”

Balalaika continued to watch chinese men leave, as she softly replied, in russian, “No. Tonight, they have earn their right to live for another day... Though, tomorrow is another day, and an entirely different matter.”

By then, Balalaika watched as the last of the chinese men had left. She then waited one minute. Next, she turned to her men, as she ordered, in russian, “Time to move out, and head back to the hotel.”

The russians then began filing out of the room, through the front entrance, with Balalaika being in the middle of the group.

The russians then headed for the cars they had rented, which were parked in a seperate parking lot from the chinese, which was near to the parking lot that the Chang's men had used to park their cars at.

Both mafia groups had reached their vehicles, and were well on their way to their respective hotels, which were two different hotels, in different parts of the city of Caracas. With the police finally showing up twenty minutes later.

The only tasks left for the police were to begin collecting the bullet casings and corpses.

(_)

The morning after the gun battle between cartel members, against the russians, chinese, and others.

It was early morning. The temperature was still cool from the night air, but not cold, on a sunny day, just after sunrise, outside of Caracas, at the Lovelace plantation.

The estate was classic two-story rectangular, spanish style plantation home, on a plantation farm. The building had a rectangular courtyard, open to the outside, in the center of the building. Covered balconies lined long sides of where the second story met the outdoor courtyard. An alcove line the first story, around the courtyard. In front of the alcove, around the courtyard, except for the breaks that served as entrances to the courtyard, the area was lined with bushes and trees. With the bushes becoming so big that they need to be pruned back down to a much more modest size.

When facing the home, from the front, there was a small pool, on the back left corner of the courtyard. To the left of the pool was a path that lead into through the alcove, and down an open hallway, to the back yard of the plantation home. Though, the back entry way was actually to the left side, when facing the front of the building. The hallway had arches and pillars, which were styled and painted in the same manner as the arches and pillars on the first floor of the courtyard. All of this was to support the second story above the hallway.

There were four arches on the ceiling of the hallway. With three sets of pillars, space evenly, like the rest of the pillars.

One set of pillars was set against the courtyard side of the building. Another set of pillars was in the middle. And the last set of pillars was set on the outer side of the building.

The walkway of the hallway stretched from the inside, to the end of the outer wall, where it narrowed to where only the middle two archways faced the walkway. The walkway at this point was made of rectangular cement blocks, set evenly, with the long ways of the blocks facing the walls of the building.

The cement block walkway continued through the backyard, until it reached the double-door linked rod iron gates, of the rod iron fence. The gate doors had curve tops that met together, to form a crescent shape at the top of the gate. The sides of the gates were attached with long, concrete pillars. With the rod iron fence being attached to the other side of the concrete pillars. The top ends of the rod iron fencing had spears where the iron rods ended.

When facing the gates, in the back, right corner of the iron fence, was a wooden, tool shed, that face across the grassy yard, including the walkway that divided the yard.

The backyard itself was an extension of the gardens of the courtyard. With, among other things, bushes lining both sides of the walkways. Then, to concrete potted plants were set up on concrete blocks, that faced across from each other. Beyond the potted plants, there were a row of three small, narrow trees, which lined both sides of the walkway, to the gates.

When facing the tool shed, there was a small, rectangular garden of bushes to the right of the tool shed. The garden was walled at the bottom, with concrete crown molding, and set a few inches above the rest of the backyard.

And these were not the only concrete and metal fixtures in the gardens of the outside of the Lovelace home. In the courtyard, there was a concrete fountain. There was a table, with chairs around in, that had a tree nearby, that offer shade from the sat around the table, in the chairs.

And though there were metal bars on the outside of the windows, even the metal bars were ornate.

There was not one thing on the exterior of the building that was mundane, nor low class. The only two exceptions to this was that the exterior need some touch up work on the paint, and some vines were growing up the wall.

Presently, someone had walked up to the front of the double-door entrance to the estate, and that person began knocking on the door, for a few seconds.

A minute later, from inside the building, Diego Lovelace walked to his front double-doors of his home, to find out whomever was knocking on it.

Diego was man of average high, with a fair physical build. He was in his late forties, if not his early fifties. With his dark hair and mustache nearly completely grayed due to his age. Though, his hair and mustache were well groomed.

Diego wore a pink, long sleeved turtle neck shirt, light brown pants, brown leather belt, and dress shoes.

When Diego reached the double-doors, he unlocked and opened the door, to his right, to see who it was.

In front of Diego, he saw a women in her mid-twenties, wearing green combat fatigues, and a green military cap on her head. She had blue eyes, and long purple hair, that was tied in a ponytail. Also, she has a duffel bag slung over the back of her left shoulder. And she had a firearm holstered in a side holster, on the right side of her waist.

But, it was the women's face that caught Diego's attention. There was a sense of desperation, for help, in the woman's expression and eyes, that prevented him from ignoring her, and just shutting the door.

The woman said, in spanish, in a kind, but hurried tone of voice, “Hello Senor Lovelace. I apologize for disturbing you as such at early hour. But, I need your help. My name is, Rosarita Cisneros. My father was Hernan Cisneros.”

Roberta thought, 'I am glad I was able to find someone to take me back here, last night. With a few hours to spare for rest, before I had to get up and talk to Senor Lovelace. That way, I will be able to get what I need, and immediately leave.'

Diego raised an eyebrow, as he thought, 'This woman is the daughter of my best friend, Hernan... Now, that I think about it, he did have a daughter. But, it has been several years since I have seen either of them.'

Diego asked, “How is Hernan?”

Roberta softly answered, “He died, years ago.”

Diego quietly said, “Oh...” He thought, 'That is sad to hear.'

Roberta thought, 'Now, to explain further...' She continued, in the same desperate tone of voice, as she had used before, “A long time ago, my father told me that if ever I needed any help, and I had no one to turn too, that I should come here, to seek you out for help.”

Diego calmly responded, in spanish, “Well, Rosarita. Hernan and I were best friends. Though, we drifted apart over the years. Still, remained friends. And I do see the family resemblance between the two of you. You are beautiful, as he is handsome. Also, I remember you father bringing you here, when you were very young, when he came to visit us. “

Roberta commented, “I vaguely remember those visits, as well. Though, I prefer to be called, Roberta. And I do not mean to impose. All I need are some supplies, and I will be gone with the hour.”

Diego thought, 'So, what supplies does she want from me? And to do what? From her clothing and pistol, I can guess that she has had a most unpleasant life. And she has likely done some unpleasant things to other people.' He calmly inquired, “And what supplies do you need?”

Roberta answered, “Food, a few cans of sterno, a few other supplies, and some hiking tools that I need replacing. Then, I will be on my way.” She mentally added, 'I might be pushing my luck if asked for bullets for my pistol.'

Diego questioned, “What do you need those items for?”

Roberta said, “So, I can make my way through the mountains.” She thought, 'It would be unwise to tell anyone that I am heading the harbors, north of here, that are over the mountains.'

Diego thought, 'She just wants a few items, and then she plans to leave. But, I cannot just help Hernan's daughter, then turn around and allow her to leave so quickly... No matter what she has done.'

Diego kindly offered, “How about we talk about this, inside, in my study?”

Roberta replied, “That will be fine.”

Roberta then thought, 'But, before I enter your home. I am going to have to tell you the truth about myself.'

Roberta then looked down, at her feet, as she said, with sorrow in her tone of voice, “But, before I enter your home. I have to be honest with you. As you have likely guessed from my attire, I have not lead an honorable life. I have come to realize that now. I have done many horrible things, that lead me to have a violent reputation. You see, I am also known as the Bloodhound of Florencia. And if you wish for me to leave, immediately, I will understand, and I will comply to your wishes.”

There was silence between the two adults, as Diego thought, with trepidation, 'My best friend's daughter is the Bloodhound of Florencia. And she is clearly in desperate need of help. And she is turned to me for that help...'

Diego then tempered his concerns, as continued his thoughts, with more pragmatism, 'I honestly hope that her father's death did not steer her down this dark path. Still, if she is willing to be this honest, and upfront. She will not present an immediate danger to myself, nor my son. Actually, she might even be able to help us, in her own ways. With her own skills. Though, I will have to be delicate in how I handle her.'

Diego said, in a calm, warm tone of voice, “Roberta, you are still welcome in my home. Please, come in. We have much to discuss.”

Roberta looked up into Diego’s eyes, and Diego saw hope in Roberta's eyes, as Roberta said, with thankfulness in her tone of voice, “Thank you, Senor Lovelace.”

Diego replied, “Diego, is fine.”

Roberta replied, “Then, thank you, Senor Diego.”

Diego smiled, as he thought, 'I will say this much. Hernan at least taught Roberta her manners.' He requested, “Okay. Now, please come inside.”

Diego fully opened the door, to his right, and he held it open, as Roberta walked inside, while she carried her duffel bag.

When Roberta was clear of the doorway, Diego gently shut and locked the door behind him.

Diego turned to Roberta, as he kindly said, “You can leave your duffel bag here.”

Roberta turned to Diego, as she calmly responded, “I would prefer to keep it with me, for right now.”

Diego replied, “If that is what you wish. My study is this way, up the stairs.”

Diego then casually walked passed Roberta, and deeper into his home, with Roberta calmly following behind him.

(_)

A few minutes later, Diego lead Roberta to his second story office, near the front of his home.

The brown, wooden double-doors to Diego's office were open, with Diego walking inside first.

Roberta followed a few step behind Diego. But, as Diego continued walking into his office, Roberta came to stop, as she stood, and she looked around the room.

While velvet curtains in the window, on the wall to her right, was closed, the light coming in front around the windows allowed to still see the room fairly well, in a bit dark.

The floor itself had black and white tiles, in a checker configuration. Though, the tiles were cut in a way that they were diagonal to the walls of the room.

Over the tiles was large red, rectangular rug, with gold borders, that covered most of the room.

The walls were painted blue, with brown wooden trim around running along the bottom of the wall.

There were pictures that were hung on the various walls of the room.

On the wall wall behind her, and in front of her, there were electric lamps make to look like gaslight lamps. The lamps were turned off.

To her right, in front of the window was a desk set near the window, in the middle of that side of the room. The desk faced towards her, with a chair between the desk and the window.

To the left of the desk, on far corner of the wall was a book case that faced towards the desk. Roberta saw several type of books, and book tiles, along the bindings of the books on the shelves of the case.

On the other side of the desk, in the corner, was a five feet tall, leafy, green bamboo palm, that was set in a potted plant container.

To Roberta left, a meter from her, set in the middle of the room, was a set of furniture. There was a small wooden rectangular table. Behind the table, was a cushioned, wooden bench, with green cloth covering the cushions. The bench had arm rests that were also cushioned, with green cloth covering the cushions.

Between Roberta and the bench, there were also two wooden cushioned chairs set across from each other, from the table. The chairs were armless, but the were made of the same style as the bench, with green cloth covering the cushions of the seats.

Roberta then turned her attention back to Diego. She saw the man walk over to the right side of his desk.

Diego came to a stop, as he turned around to face Roberta. He offered, “Please, sit down, and make yourself comfortable.”

Roberta calmly replied, “I would prefer to stand, for right now.”

Diego mentally realized, 'She is more desperate than I realized. She is ready to bolt at any second. I need to handle her much more carefully than I realized.'

'I am glad I decided to let Garcia sleep in this morning. Our little shopping trip in the city tired him out. Which was good. And now, I can handle this, without him being here. Which is for the best.'

'Now, to handle the matter at hand. Since this is my best friend's daughter. I cannot turn her away. No matter what Roberta has done Hernan would never forgive me.'

Diego said, “First, Roberta. Take a deep breath. You are in my home. And you are now safe.”

Roberta responded, “Experience has taught me that, safe, is a relative term for people such as myself.”

Suddenly, both of them heard knocking from the front doors.

Roberta thought, with sadness and disappointment, 'I hate being right.'

Roberta watched Diego walked over to the window, and opened the red velvet curtains, as she continued her thoughts, 'If I am right. This study is right over the front entryway of the building. So, he should be able to see who is out there, from this vantage point. That being said, I need to keep my distance, so as to not allow anyone from the outside to see me.'

Roberta saw that the window itself was a paned glass, with wooden panel. There were ornate bars, running up and down, outside of the window.

Roberta back around the bench to her right, as Diego looked down to see who it was.

Diego saw several men standing beside his front door. The men were wearing either police uniforms, and military fatigues. And though they were armed, only a few of them had their firearms in hand. The men were armed with either semi-automatic pistols, automatic rifles, or both.

A little further out, from his home, he saw police cars and military trucks parked on his concrete driveway.

As Diego continued to look down at them, he thought, 'I am not surprised they showed up. Though, I did not expect them to be here so soon. Still, this should be of little consequence. I am more concerned with keeping Roberta calm, than be able to turn these people away.'

'Also, even though she was tired from yesterday, Garcia should be waking up, within the hour. If this knocking has not already awaken him.'

'Though, I do look forward to introducing my son to Roberta. But, that is later. I need to concentrate on the here and now.'

Roberta asked, “Who is it?”

Diego turned to Roberta, as he smiled. He kindly said, in a calm tone of voice, “Not to worry. I will take care of it. Though, it is the police and military. I hazard to guess. But, I believe they are here, looking for you.”

“Though, rest at ease, as a member of one of the thirteen prominent families of South America, I have some political pull with not only the government, but the local military and police, as well...”

“I will simply have to remind them of whose plantation this is, and I will use my political pull ask them to leave.”

“And what use is political pull, if one does not use it to help their friends?...”

Roberta was mildly surprised at how kind Diego was in delivering his news. She said, “Thank you.” She thought, 'The bar fight last night must have attracted their attention. And someone nearby must have recognized me. But, Diego seems very confident that he can handle this. Before my father died,, my father said I could trust him. And Diego would even welcomed me into his home, right after I told him who I was. So, I will trust him, and I will hope that my trust is well placed.'

Diego calmly responded, “Just stay here, and do not go near the window. This should not take long.”

Roberta watched as Diego then calmly walked passed her, and out of the room. He left the doors to the office open, as he head for the front double-doors, downstairs.

After Diego was out of sight, she couched down, behind the right side of the bench, with her facing the wall the double-doors to the room were located. She pulled out her semi-automatic pistol. Next, she pulled back the slide of the pistol, to chamber a round, while cocking back the hammer of the weapon. After which, she held her gun with both her hands, with her right trigger finger resting against the trigger guard of the firearm. The end of the barrel of the weapon was pointed at a downward, diagonal angle, away from them.

Roberta kept her eyes on the doorway, as she thought, 'This is about as good an ambush point as I can create in this situation. Now, I just hope I don't have to fight my way out of here.'

The next few minutes for Roberta were slightly stressful for her. A minute after Diego left, the knocking on the front doors stopped.

A few minutes later, Roberta then heard a single set of foot steps approach the room she was in.

When Roberta saw that it was Diego, and that he was alone, she breathed a sigh of relief.

Diego closed the wooden doors to his office, behind him. He then turned around, as he made his way further into his study.

Roberta found it interesting that Diego did not even bat an eye in her position, as he turned to his right, with him casually walking to the window, behind his desk.

Diego came to a stop by the window, he looked down to see the police and soldiers getting into their vehicles.

A few seconds later, while Diego continue to watch what was going on outside his home, as the vehicles started to drive away, he calmly stated, “You can come out now, Rosarita. They are leaving, now.” He thought, 'It is best to use her real name, this time, to stress the importance of the situation.'

Diego then closed the right side of red velvet curtains on the window.

While still couching behind the bench, with her gun drawn, Roberta thought, 'Senor Diego is using my real name, as a sign of respect. And I should return that respect, by leaving as soon as possible, to prevent my problems from further risking him harm.'

Roberta carefully used her right thumb to decock the hammer of her pistol, while she used her right trigger finger to successfully release the hammer, without the weapon going off, as she said, in a regretful tone, “Sorry about the trouble. I'll leave as soon as the sun goes down.”

Roberta thought, 'The police and military will probably stake out this estate. So, leaving after dark is my only option, which will keep Diego from getting into trouble with them.'

While Diego closed the left side of the red velvet curtains, he had a warm smile on his face, as he responded, “Don't be in such a rush.” With the curtained closed, he turned to look at Roberta, as he continued, “My best friend's daughter has clearly traveled a long hard road. And it would dishonor my family name if I did not show her some hospitality.”

Diego then started calmly walking towards Roberta, around the right side of his desk, while he maintained his warm smile.

Roberta noticed that smile, and Diego's smile helped to relax a bit.

Diego continued walking towards her, as he calmly offered, “We should sit for a while, and talk. Maybe even discuss your future. Sound good?”

Diego came to a stop in front of the set of furniture, as he looked down at Roberta, whom was still crouching behind the bench.

Roberta turned her head to look up at Diego's face.

Diego went onto say, “I think running for you life, through the mountains, can wait. In my opinion.” He then shrugged both his shoulders, closed his eyes, while he smiled, and lightly laughed, for a few seconds.

As Diego stopped laughing, he kept a warm smile on his lips, while he opened his eyes, and looked down at Roberta.

In response, Roberta visibly relaxed. She stood up, as she allowed her left hand to let go of her pistol, leaving only her right hand holding the grip of the pistol. Next, she holster her pistol, in her side holster.

Roberta turned to face Diego, as she thought, 'Diego has a point. I am not anywhere, anytime soon. And he did get those after me, to leave. So, I am safe for the moment. As such, I might as well take Diego up on his offer.' She stated, “Yes. You make a good point. Running through the mountains can wait.”

Diego responded, “Good. My young son should be waking up, anytime now. I look forward to introducing you to him.”

Roberta asked, in a calm tone of voice, “You have a son?” She sadly thought, 'Oh yes. Now, I remember. That is what those I spoke to yesterday morning, had told me. In my haste, I had forgotten. And just by coming here, by my actions, I could have brought harm, or death, to another child.'

Diego answered, in a warm, kind tone of voice, “Yes. His name is Garcia.” He continued, in a slightly sad tone of voice, “Unfortunately, my wife, his mother, passed away, a few years ago...” He then went onto say, in a more positive tone of voice, “But, that is in the past. We should focus on the here and now. And I believe it might be best if we just introduce you to Garcia, as simply, Roberta. When we see him, in a little while.”

Roberta pointed out, “I agree. Though, children can be quite curious.”

Diego said, “I can assure Garcia knows his manners. And he will not ask you about your past, unless you give him reason to do so.”

Roberta sincerely replied, “Then, I will strive to be on my best behavior.”

Diego mentioned, “That is good to hear. We also have a white fur Volpino Italino named, Lazlo. Though, he is quite friendly. So, he should not be a problem.”

Roberta pointed out, “I do have not problems with animals.”

Diego happily stated, “Wonderful. Now, before we introduce you to my son, we need to get you a fresh change of clothing.” He mentally added, 'Something less threatening, nor imposing. And I have just the clothing in mind.'

Diego suggested, “I believe that a former maid whom use to be in our employ was around your size. And we do have a few sets of her work clothing still in one of the closets in the servant quarters. Also, there is a washroom, with a nice titled shower, by servants quarters. With all the amenities already there. If you feel the need to wash up, first. Take your time. There is no rush. And you can leave your belongings in the servants quarters. I promise you that no one will disturb them.”

Diego thought, 'Because no one else is here, beside, you, Garcia, Lazlo, and myself. Still...' He verbally continued, “That is if you don't mind wearing a maid's uniform?”

Diego mentally reflected, in a calm, pragmatic manner, 'If I am right, you are not the type to just sit idle, Rosarita. Or, as of now, Roberta. All I need to do is present the tools before you, say the proper words, and you should do the rest.'

Roberta calmly answered, “I am not one to complain about what is given to me.”

Roberta thought, 'I will get a shower, before I put on some clean clothes. I will even leave my hair loose, because it will make me look less imposing.'

'Though, the heat outside might not allow that workable. In which case, I will have to put it back in a ponytail. But, I will see if that is the case. Later, I might even put my hair in two pigtails. I believe I would look cute, with my hair like that. And with none of my comrades around, I can get away with doing that, without being teased.'

'I also believe I might get some glasses, eventually. Even with my long purple hair. Between the pigtails, glasses, and maids uniform, it would make a decent disguise, compared to the revolutionary look I have now.'

Diego thought, 'Good.' He said, “Well then, right this way.”

Diego then turned to his left, and walked to the closed doors to his study. He opened the doors, and walked into the hallway, with Roberta following right behind him, as they headed to retrieve Roberta a few set of clothing... Maid's clothing...

And the rest is history...

(_)

An hour later, in Caracas, at a modest level hotel, Alice was in a suite she had rented, for that past several months, under another alias, so as to no alert Severo, nor the cartel he had been with. The reason Alice rented out this hotel was they allow long distance phone calls, without asking questions. As long as Alice paid the long distance fees, afterward.

While Alice wore a yellow sun dress that match her long blond hair, she was not wearing yellow slippers. Instead, she was wearing some white socks and white tennis shoes, because she was concerned she might have to do a lot of running, at any moment.

Presently, Alice was on the phone with her superiors. It was a long distance phone call, with Alice holding the receiver in her right hand, up against her right ear, as she and her contact were discussing what had happened, and what she should do next. Given her assignment had just abruptly ended.

Alice stated, into the phone, in english, “It was not my fault that my assignment gutted his own organization...”

“How was I suppose to know my assignment was going to pick a fight with the russians, and the chinese, he had met with, earlier that day?...”

“Yes. I saw the local news on the event. They have been talking about it all night. That is why I am not in his home, and I am calling you from here, right now. I got out of there the moment I heard about what went down...”

“I am aware there have been no arrests...”

“Yes. I know this is only going to make the press talk about it even more...”

“We both know this assignment is over...”

“Glad you agree. Where am I going next?...”

“A fishing village, in Thailand? As what?...”

“A nun at a church?!...”

As Alice's contact firmly spoke to her, over the phone, Alice forced herself to reign in her emotion.

As soon as Alice's contact finished speaking, Alice stated, in a firm, even tone of voice, “Yes sir. I will do it. And I will also brush up on my bible verses. Is the King James Bible version okay?..”

“Good. Okay. So, what is my new codename? Who is the name of my contact there? And what is the general description of my contact, whom I will be meeting with..?

“Okay. I will be out of this county, and meeting my new contact, by the day after tomorrow. I will let you inform you, after I meet with my contact...”

“Thank you.”

Alice slammed the phone down, back on its hook, as she finally allowed herself to get angry over the situation she found herself in. She thought, with anger, 'They are making me the scapegoat out of this whole fiasco. And there is not a damn thing I can do about it.'

'But, my contact sounds interesting. While she is not with the agency, my superiors still vouch for her. They say she has worked with their organization since the very beginning. And she is very good at what she does. They said she is an old woman, whom is disguised as a nun. She has a eyepatch over her right eye, and she answers to the name of Yolanda.'

'I wonder what her personality is like? Meeting her could offer an interesting insight, of what I would have to expect for myself, if I lived to be her age.'

'And if I am going to have to wear a habit all the time, and I am going to add some style to it. Such as wear some sunglasses. My new assignment may make me cover up everything else, but my face. But, in that case, I will just have to show some style on my face, with some cool sunglasses.'

'Also, I am not going to be celibate, like my superiors requested I do, during this assigned. I love to live my life to the extreme. I enjoy skimpy clothing, action, sex, and everything else that is fun in life. The only things I am careful about is not getting pregnant, nor getting an STD.'

'But, I am not going to stop living, just for an assignment. Especially, one that could be viewed as somewhere where I can be forgotten by my superiors. Though, that could offer opportunity, for me to make some money on the side. I will have to think about that.'

'But, I am not going to put this Yolanda, in an awkward position, either. That would be bad for both us.'

'And once I have my contact's daily routine down, I can skip out on her, occasionally, in my civvies, and have some fun in town.'

'Still, I will also feel out this Yolanda, and slowly see if I can trust her. If I can, I believe she might be very useful to me. At the very least, as the voice of experience. And we both might be able to make some money, on the side, from the situation we find ourselves in.'

Alice looked over at her suite, on the bed, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, to get out of here.'

Alice walked over to her suitcase, on the single bed in the room. She picked it up with her right hand, by the handle. She then turned around, as she walked over to the door of her suite, that lead to a hotel hallway. She opened the door, and walked into the hallway.

Alice shut the door behind her. She then started walking down the hallway, towards the elevator, that would take her to the lobby.

Alice walked down the hallway, as she thought, with mild interest, 'I also wonder if I can get use to my new codename? Alice, wasn't bad. But, this new one concerns me. It just don't sound right to me. I mean, what is the first thing a person thinks, when they meet a woman, who goes by the name of, Eda?...'

(_)

A few minutes later, in another part of Caracas, inside another hotel, in the privacy of her suite, Balalaika had slept well the previous night. She had already awoke hours ago, with her getting up, ready, and dressed, to face the day, military precession.

Balalaika had already summon room service to bring her breakfast to her room. With breakfast already being delivered. With the bellhop being polite to her.

She found the breakfast to be adequate. After which she called the staff, by phone, to pick up the cart. The bellhop soon returned to retrieve breakfast cart, with Balalaika giving the bellhop a respectable, financial tip for being polite to her.

Presently, right after the bellhop left, Balalaika stood up, on the carpeted floor, as she dialed a long distance number on her hotel phone. Which was allowed by the hotel. With the long distance contact fees being added to her bill, when she and her subordinates, checked out.

Now, Balalaika was talking on the phone with her superior in the russian mafia, Pyotr, which she, and her men, now belonged too.

Balalaika left out parts of her story from Pyotr. Such, as the chinese men being there, and her letting them go. But otherwise, she was perfectly straightforward and honest with Pyotr.

Balalaika held the phone receiver with her left hand, against her left ear, as she firmly stated, in russian, “I make no excuses for my part in this. They threatened us, and we responded in kind. Along with this, I have no causalities to report on our side. So, I am pleased with the outcome.”

On the other end of the line, Pyotr, calmly responded, in russian, “You misunderstand. We are not upset with you. I was just on the phone with the capo of those you dealt with last night. In truth, he was not happy with his subordinates. Which you took care of.”

“He was starting to suspect there was a leak coming for that part of his organization. Unfortunately, he had no way to deal with it, without purging that part of his organization, and risking an internal rebellion. Now, with you and the others cleaning up the capo's mess, his hands are clean, and he does not have to worry about the leak.”

Balalaika thought, 'So Pyotr, you already heard about the bar fight, before I call you. You called the capo of the Manisarera cartel, concerning the matter. Then, after you were finished with that call, you waited for me to call you about this matter. To see what I would tell you on this matter. Next, you subtly hint that you knew what had happened before I call you.'

'I now realize how you reached your position in this organization.'

'Still, this does concern me. You had to get the information from someone? And I am concerned with how much do you know? I doubt there is a leak among my men. They are to loyal, and to closed knit.'

'Though, the police here could have already done ballistics from the shell casings during the fight. There would be many shells from rounds of Soviet ammo, on the floor of that bar. And that would raise someone's attention. With you quickly putting two and two together, that it was us, at the bar.'

'But, either way, I am now boxed in a trap that you had me set for myself. After telling you everything else, while neglecting to mention the chinese men. If you do know the truth, then I am in a no win situation.'

'If I back down and admit to that I willfully withheld information from you, I would lose face to both you, and your organization. Which would ruin not only my future, with you organization, but the futures of my men.'

'But, if I don't say anything, then I am guilty of a lie by omission towards you.'

'Either way I lose. Though, in such a case, it is best to not to say anything, and I will just have to hope that you didn't learn that Mister Hong Kong, and his men were at the bar, last night, as well. With me letting them go. And myself hoping that this omission does not bite me in the ass, later.'

'Still, I need to confirm one item on this matter. Though, from your words, Pyotr, I believe you already know the answer.'

Balalaika inquired, “So, there will be no reprisals?”

Pyotr flatly said, “None.”

Balalaika thought, 'So, there well be no reprisals, Pyotr. Just as I expected, after listening to what you just said, about your talk with the capo. You probably called the capo to smooth things over with him. To prevent a costly mob war between us, over the stupidity of the capo's own subordinates.'

'Though, in my eyes, that does not let the capo, nor his Manisarera cartel, off the hook for last night. But, I do admire you efforts and success, Pyotr.'

Pyotr calmly offered, “And given the performance of you, and your men, we would like you to oversee our operations in a part of Thailand. Your main functions there will be will dealing with our Indochina connections. Making movement of products through the area. Though, we will allow you to also pursue private operations in the area. As long as you send us the proper percentage from your profits of those ventures.”

“If you can handle yourself there, as well as you did yesterday, I feel you have a bright future with our organization.”

Balalaika though, 'Well, this is fortuitous.' She asked, “What city will we be assigned to?”

Pyotr answered, “A little fishing village, on the east coast of Thailand. The city is known as, Roanapur. Though, do not let looks deceive you. This city is quite dangerous. Even for you, and your men. During your stay, you will soon find that city to be as dangerous as some of the locations, during your time in the middle-east.”

Balalaika cracked a smile, as she replied, “I like the place, already. What will I be facing when we reach there?”

Pyotr stated, “While local law enforcement there can be easily bought, there are other organizations from around the world. Much like our own. That send proxies groups, such are you and your men, to that city try to take control of the trade routes there.”

Balalaika said, “Give my men a week, and we will be the only ones left standing.”

Pyotr countered, “Unfortunately, such tactics will not work in this situation. As much as I am sure we both detest this, there are political matters to take into account of. If things get out of hand there, we will draw attention from the major powers.”

Balalaika bit back the sarcastically remark she desired to give new her boss, Pyotr.

Pyotr continued, “Though, as long as such actions are kept out of the eyes of the public, a respectable amount of violence will be overlooked in that city. But, to take control of the city. You will need to do employ slow, meticulous methods. Unless you are provoked, open warfare will not be tolerated by your group.”

Balalaika questioned, “So, it will be a cold war with the other organizations?”

Pyotr replied, “Yes. Those are the tactics you will have to employ.”

Balalaika stated, “I am well versed in such tactics.”

Pyotr flatly said, “Which is why I giving you this assignment.”

Balalaika caught the singular word, in Pyotr's comment. She thought, 'So, I. Not, we. And you are the one who is personally behind giving this assignment to myself, and my men. Though, I need to know more about this assignment.'

Balalaika asked, “Besides these organizations. Is there anyone of note, in that city, that I should be made aware of?”

Pyotr answered, “Yes. There is local competing organization, that has sent a group from Hong Kong, to Roanapur. The leader of this group, in Roanapur, is named, Chang.”

Balalaika requested, “What can you tell me about this, Chang?”

Pyotr answered, “While Chang likes to present a casual and social front, in day to day affairs. Underneath the civility, he is as ruthless as you are. Chang prefers to fight using two semi-automatic pistols at once. Like in the modern kung-fu actions movies.”

“Along with him being very skilled with his pistols, he is also skilled in hand to hand combat. There are also rumors that there is a woman in his group that is very skilled with long knifes, and throwing knives. Though, we do not have much information on this woman.”

“It seems Chang likes to keep his secrets. And his men are almost as loyal to him, as you men are to you. So, learning about him and his group, has lead to some... Difficulties...”

“As such, he will have surprises for you, when you do finally confront his group.”

“Another facet of Chang's personality is that it has been reported that in battle, he even enjoys making jokes while fighting. My sources even tell me that Chang was in Caracas, yesterday. You might have already met him, without realizing it.”

Balalaika thought, with amusement, 'Really?... Could he be?... Maybe...' She then realized, as she continued her thoughts, 'And you know I met with the chinese in the bar last night. And instead of calling me on it, you are rewarding me for what I did yesterday.'

'By allowed Chang and his men go last night. I made a good first impression with him. Which will only benefit myself and my men, in our new assignment, which will be in opposition to Chang.'

'But, I cannot let you know that I realize this.'

Balalaika said, “I look forward to meeting this, Chang. How long will it take for our travel arrangements to be made? And a place for us to stay?”

Pyotr responded, “Not long. Though, you may find our headquarters in Roanapur to be a little odd. We have been using a cargo ship, moored in the harbor, for our base of operations.”

“The ship's name is the, Maria Zeleska. The cargo ship has been refurbished to be a mobile command center. Those that you will be replacing stated they found the ship to fit their needs... At least, until Chang dealt with them one night. We had one survivor, whom told us what happened.”

Balalaika inquired, “Are there are any repairs that will need to be made, when we arrive? And has the ship been swept for electronic bugs?”

Pyotr answered, “The ship is intact. And it already has been swept for bugs. I sincerely hope you have better luck than the previous group we sent to that city.”

Balalaika firmly stated, “I assure you, what happened to your previous group, will not happen again, on my watch.” She mentally added, 'I will have to find a more permanent base in the city. Somewhere that can be more secured. Though, that ship could be useful, if my men, and I, needed to travel.'

'Also, it was Chang that dealt with this. This is another reason you are giving ups this assignment. Not only do we have the training and abilities to protect ourselves from Chang. But, Chang has seen us in action, and thus he will think twice about coming after us, in a similar manner.'

Pyotr said, “I look forwards to seeing you prove yourself correct. By the way, have you finally chosen a name for your group?”

Balalaika cracked a grin, as she thought, with amusement, 'Why not?...' She answered, “Yes. Hotel Moscow.”

Pyotr inquired, “I like it. And do you have a name for your front company.

A thought occurred to Balalaika, as she mentally reflected, 'I might as well, considering I find the flower to be beautiful, and I like the name.' She stated, “I believe so. The Bougainvillea Trade Company.”

Pyotr responded, “That sounds nice. You will be contacted later today, at this hotel, after your traveling arrangements have been made. My associates, and I, are looking forward seeing what you can do. Good luck.”

The other end of the line then went dead. A second later, Balalaika lowed the receiver back on the hook.

Balalaika then stood in place, as she reflected on the conversation she just had, the previous nights actions, and what she now had to look forward to, in the near future.

A few seconds later, Balalaika lips curled into a wicked grin, as she began maniacally laughing, for several seconds. She was laughing, due to her realizing that she had found someone with the skills to grant her a proper death, or a worthy challenge. Depending on her mood.

Balalaika continued to laugh, as she wickedly smile, while she recalled some english lyrics to the song, Light My Fire, by an old band, The Doors, that she had listened to, a few days ago.

Balalaika stopped laughing long enough, to softly say, in english, “Come on baby. Light my fire. Try to set the night on fire. Yeah.”

Balalaika then began laughing again, for several seconds. Until finally she calmed enough to where she could begin preparations for moving herself, and her men, to their new home, in Roanapur, Thailand.

While, she waited for superiors in the russian mafia, she was with, to leave a message at the front desk, to simply call her back. Which was code, for they had their travel arrangements ready, and they need Balalaika to call them back, so she could be informed of the details.

(_)

At the same moment as Balalaika and Pyotr had ended their phone call, in Maiquetia, on the tarmac of the Simon Bolívar International Airport, Chang was walking up the steps to his private jet.

Chang two bodyguards, whom accompanied him in his private jet, had turned to face his back, while they stood on the tarmac.

Meanwhile Chang's pilot and co-pilot, were doing the final checks, to make sure they were ready to leave. This included checking instruments, and the amount of fuel they had. Which was a full tank. In addition, they had just finished confirming clearance, from the control tower, on when they could take off for Don Mueang International Airport, in Bangkok, Thailand.

Though, in truth, the jet would be heading to Roanapur, Thailand. With the proper Thailand officials already notified and bribed to look the other way, dealing with the detour, Chang's jet would be making, once the jet entered Thai airspace.

While Roanapur did not have an official airport, right outside the Roanapur, hidden in the jungle, on land that Chang's organization controlled, Chang had made a small, hidden runway, and hanger, for his private jet.

And it took a few hours, by car, to go from Bangkok to Roanapur. Which Chang felt was to risky, from a security standpoint. So, he arranged to make his own small look concrete landing strip, with lights on the landing strip, and hanger beside where the jet landed.

Though, for everyone whom knew about Chang little airport, they found it surprising to learn that Chang did not use it form smuggling.

For Chang only used that landing strip solely for traveling, and in case he needed to make a quick escape out of Thailand.

Actually, Chang allowed the local officials to also use his small landing strip, in exchange for not saying anything about it.

Though, the officials had to charter than own private planes, and there was not a hanger for their planes. So, they had to land the planed, refuel from an on site fuel truck, that Chang kept there. And then leave.

Presently, just as Chang was about to take his last step, into his jet, he stopped moving, and he just stood there, without saying a word.

A few seconds later, one of Chang's bodyguards, behind him asked, in chinese, with concern in his voice, “What is it, sir?”

Chang turned to face his two men, as he calmly said, “I feel as if someone just walked over my grave... But, it does not matter. We have places to go, and people to meet.”

Chang thought, 'At least none of my men were killed. Though, a few were lightly wounded, but they should soon recover. And those first class tickets back to Thailand will help with their morale.'

'Though, onto another matter. When I get back to town, I will be sure to let Abrego know that his offer turned sour. But, I will let him, and his organization live. It would be too boring, if I killed off all my competition.'

'Besides, Abrego knows to respect me. And I am just finally starting break that south american asshole in. And I don't want to have to deal with another asshole that does not know when to show me the respect I deserve. Also, to be fair, there was no way he could have known his colleagues would have so wildly drop the ball on this. Or, bottle in this case. Too bad I was not paying attention to who dropped that bottle.'

'Though, that is a mystery for another time.'

'Still, that russian blond woman was interesting to meet.'

'Anyway, I do not like leaving my city unattended, for too long. And I feel that I need to return there immediately. It feels like a storm is coming on the horizon. One that I should get ready for.'

Chang turned back towards the his jet. He then entered his jet, with his two bodyguards following him, into the airplane.

A few seconds later, the door to the jet was raised, and the airplane was soon sealed.

Ten minutes afterward, Chang's jet received clearance that it was their turn to take off. And the jet was soon in the air, and onto its journey back to Roanapur.

(_)

Later that sunny morning, hours after Dutch, Benny, and Revy had cast-off from the docks of La Guaira, in their PT Boat, the newly named, Lagoon.

Presently, their PT boat was heading west, at a casual rate for the engines of the boat, in Caribbean Sea, safe in international waters.

Fortunately, the night before, after they left the bar, in Caracas, they soon found a taxi to take them back to where their boat was moored, in La Guaira. When they reached the docks, Dutch paid the driver, and they all headed to the Lagoon.

At that point, even Dutch admitted they were to tired to head out. So, they got some sleep on the Lagoon.

At the crack of dawn, Dutch woke up, and he then woke up Benny, and Revy. They then got the Lagoon ready to leave. After they had finished their check lists on the boat, they had some breakfast. And then they left the docks, without any problems.

As they made their way further out to sea, the weather was warm and sunny, with a light breeze. And the sea was mostly calm. Perfect sailing weather for a boat, such as the Lagoon.

The voyage had been pleasant, except for one problem. Revy would not stop talking about the chinese man she saw in the bar that used two pistols at once. She went on and on and on, about the matter.

And she was working on both Dutch and Benny's last nerve.

Presently, all three adults were in the pilothouse of the Lagoon. Revy and Benny were standing, as Dutch as in the pilot's seat of the boat, which was the left seat, behind the control panel, at the front of the pilothouse.

Revy stated, in an excited tone of voice, “I cannot believe what I saw. Sure, I have seen using two pistols at once, in the movies before. But, to see first hand. To know someone can do that successfully in real life, and that it was awesome, is something else entirely. I have got to learn how to do that!”

Dutch thought, with annoyance, 'If she continues talking about this for another hour. I might try to throw her off the boat, which would be a bad idea for both of us. I do not even know if she has her gun with her. Or, if she has already reloaded her weapon. And she's has too much potential to allow this to ruin our business relationship. And the somewhat tenuous friendship the three of us have going.'

'Though, our trust for each other is slowing growing the day. But, I believe it is best I do something before one of us gets upset over this.'

Dutch turned around in his chair, to face Revy. Revy and Benny noticed this, as they turned to look at him.

Benny thought, with relief, 'Finally, Dutch is going to put his foot down on this matter.'

Dutch said, in a calm tone of voice, “Revy. I promise we will look into finding you someone to teach you how to do that when we reach our next destination. But, please... Put a lid on this, until then.”

There was an awkward silence between the three adults, as Benny and Dutch were wondering if Revy was going to lose her temper.

Instead, Revy shrugged, as she smiled. She happily said, “Okay...”

Benny thought, 'This is not the way I expect you to handle this, Dutch. But, it worked.'

Revy continued, “I am going outside to get some fresh air.” She then walked out of the room, and towards a hatch that would take her to take her outside.

A few seconds later, after Benny and Dutch heard a hatch open, and then close, both men let out a sigh of relief.

Benny commented, “That went well... You never know with her.”

Dutch agreed, “You can say that again, Benny-boy. That woman puts the temperament in temperamental women.” He then turned back to face the front of the ship.

Benny walked around to sit in the co-pilot's seat, as he turn his head to look at Dutch. He commented, “Dutch, I have been thinking about those two guys we met last night. They seem very... Off... Yet, they acted like the knew us, very well.”

Dutch turned his head to look at Benny, as he replied, “You are not the only one that thought that. Those jokes of theirs seemed be about us, in some ways.”

Benny stated, “I know this is going to sound strange. And a little crazy. But, I think those two are time travelers. And they know us from far in our future.”

Dutch admitted, “That thought occurred to me, as well. Let us say, if you met someone in the past, you admired, before they hit it big, how would you act around them, without giving yourself away?”

Benny answered, “I would make a few jokes, do a little small talk, and have few drinks, with the person from the past. Just have a good time with them...” Benny then realized, as he continued, “Which is what they did with us.”

Dutch stated, “Exactly. But, can you tell me why you think that?”

Benny explained, “First, those comments they about the book, Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas. I vaguely remember reading on the internet about movie studios talking of making that book into a movie. And it would make for an interesting movie.”

“Though, the way those two acted, it was like they were quoting a movie, not a book. But, it is the lawyer's bet with Revy that makes me really think they are time travelers. He bet her that she would not end up with a business man from Japan within twenty years. This is a two grand bet, with a contract and a picture. Only a person from the future, with knowledge of the future, would make such a specific bet with someone from the past.”

Dutch commented, “And since even now, we realize Revy doesn't have the best memory in the world, she will likely forget about the bet, before she even meets this person from Japan.”

Benny responded, “Exactly. Then, there is that camera device he used to take the picture was a little device get pulled from his pocket. It was something straight out of James Bond. But, the lawyer made it sound like it a common item, that was sold in the future.”

Dutch stated, “Following that logic, let us look at some of their jokes. They mention two names from the future. Two-hands and the Maid.”

Benny asked, “Who do you think they can be?”

Dutch raised an eyebrow, as he pointed out, “Who else do you think? Given Revy won't shut up about learning to shoot with two pistol at once, I think it is safe to say that Revy will become Two-hands. And that purple hair woman will likely become the maid.”

Benny scoffed at the idea, as he replied, “Come on Dutch, that lawyer made it sound like those two women were some of the most dangerous women on the planet.”

Dutch stated, “That cartel sent an army after that one woman. And while I don't know much spanish, I do know that the cartel leader called her, Bloodhound. And I have a feeling we might see her again, someday. That is one reason why I offered to take her with us. I would rather have her as a friend, than an enemy.”

“And when it comes to Revy, the mexican stated she had a lot of potential in being a gunfighter. He did not state that she looked to have potential. But, that she had potential. And we had just met him. How would he know that about her? Yet, he sounded like he knew for a fact that Revy could be a lot better than she already is.”

Benny said, in a worried tone of voice, “I can see your point. And given Revy's personality, that next meeting with the purple haired woman will likely be violent. With them getting into a fight. And if they are even half as badass as the lawyer hinted at...”

Dutch finished for Benny, “Yea... Ground zero, man... That is another reason I asked that woman to come with us. Because I would prefer Revy and her to be friends.” He mentally added, 'And with them both working for me, would just be icing on the cake. Though, there are other points that I need to mention to you, Benny-boy.'

Dutch commented, “And it gets stranger. After the gunfight started, the mexican treated us a teacher would treat his students. He even stated, that class was in session for us.”

“I think he wanted to show us, especially Revy and the Bloodhound, how badass a lone individual can be. Even Ms Bloodhound seemed hesitant to rush out and attack those men on her own. Yet, the mexican showed us how it is done. And that a person could come out of a fight like that unscathed.”

Benny said, “And the lawyer said that in the city they are from, that the women were way more dangerous than the mexican was.”

Dutch responded, “I know. And it gets better. How did the mexican know that everyone in the bar was armed? I have a feeling we. That in our future, we are going to be seeing a number of the people we saw in that bar.”

Benny commented, “Well, if nothing else, it will be interesting. Still, it is kinda eerie to meet someone from the future that knows more about what is going to happen to me, than I do.”

Dutch smiled, as he replied, “Look on the bright side. The way they acted, when we do meet them, in the future, we are all clearly still alive, and well.”

Benny returned Dutch's smile, as he agreed, “True.”

Dutch mentioned, “And we will find out if we are right, or not, some time in the future, if Revy becomes this Two-hands, and does meet someone like the lawyer, that happens to be from Japan. Also, if this Bloodhound becomes known as, the Maid. If so, I look forward to finding out how all this plays out, and who this Mister Japanese is. Still, it might be best to keep this between us. I don't want to complicate things with, Revy, nor anyone else.”

Dutch thought, 'Revy is too temperamental to lay information this heavy on her.'

Benny replied, “I completely agree with you.”

Dutch thought, 'That is what I like about you, Benny-boy. You accept how a given situation should be handled.'

Benny asked, “So, where we are heading? The mexican mentioned a place he considered to be a gangsters paradise. But, he only whispered the information in your ear. Though, I wonder if this is the city that the lawyer was talking about?”

Dutch answered, “I honestly don't know about the second question. But, I can answer the first question. We are heading to the so-called gangsters paradise. The place is on the east coast of Thailand. We are going through the Panama Canal. I have a few contacts there, so it should not be to difficult to cross.”

Benny thought, 'Dutch, you are a man of many mysteries, and talents. But, I am not going to look a gift horse in the mouth. Besides, you have been nice to me. So, I am not going to ask you any questions you might not want to answer.'

Dutch went onto say, “When we reach the other side of the canal, we will refuel, and resupply. And we will take on some more spare fuel containers, with fuel in them? Along with more supplies. It is going to be a long trip across the Pacific Ocean, to the other side of Indochina.”

Dutch thought, 'And I need to make sure that Revy gets any personal supplies, she needs, before we make our trek across the Pacific. Otherwise, this trip could become a nightmare for all of us.'

Benny inquired, “So, what is the town we are heading to called?”

Dutch stated, “We are going to a fishing village called, Roanapur. The mexican gave me directions. Earlier this morning, I already plotted out our course. Depending on the weather, and any other problems. It should take us a few weeks, to a month, to reach that village.”

“And if the mexican is from our future, he would have no reason not to give the right advice on how to get to Roanapur.”

Benny thought, 'I wonder... The question needs to be asked.' He asked, “While we may end up fine. It sounds like those two men were steering us towards danger. Are you sure it is a good idea to go there?”

Dutch responded, “I say that if the winds of fate want us there, we go there.” Dutch then smirked, as he looked in front of them, out of the windows, and into the sea, towards the west. He added, with a bit of enthusiasm in his tone of voice, “And when we get there, let us see what kind of trouble we can get into.”

(_)

At that moment, it was late at night, in Tokyo, Japan. Inside a small apartment, on the third story of a building, japanese man, with short black hair, whom was wearing casual clothing, was talking on the phone.

The phone was a wireless phone, with the man holding the receiver, with his right hand, by his right ear.

The man inquired, into the phone, in japanese, “So, I got the job?...”

“Great. Glad to hear it. And thanks. I will be there tomorrow morning, on time, and dressed in a suit and tie...”

“Good night to you to.”

The japanese man then hung up his phone.

The man walked to a chair, that faced a small TV, on a small TV stand.

He sat down in the chair, as he thought, 'I hope this job, at Asahi Industries, works out. And at least I now have my foot in the door. I will only get about six hours of sleep tonight, but it will be worth waiting for that call, if this job pans out. And I will just set my alarm clock to wait me at the proper time.'

'But, before I get some sleep. I would like to see what is on the news.'

With his right hand, the man then picked up the remote, on the right armchair of the chair. He turned on TV, and set the channel to a news station. The program on the station was in the middle of news story, about a large gunfight at a bar in Caracas, Venezuela, from the day before.

Rokuro Okajima smiled, as he happily thought, 'I am glad I am not mixed up with that bunch of violent lunatics.'

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 05: “Off the Beaten Path.” (Or, “Gumming Up The Works.”)

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Realty, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, a few days after the fight between Revy and Hernan. Place, De La Plata Podrido, Mexican. Inside the restaurant and bar of the Devil's Hotel and Resort. Time, early afternoon, on a sunny, cool day.

Inside the Devil's Hotel a restaurant, it was just after lunch rush, and the room had cleared out, save for three adults.

Two of those adults were Revy and Rock, whom had come into the restaurant, to have a late lunch.

Revy and Rock, were wearing their usual clothing. And Revy had completely recovered from her fight with Hernan. Though, Revy currently did not have her cutlasses on.

Their family and friends were elsewhere, in the city, either running errands, or having fun. Or, in some cases, taking care of their younger children.

The other person in the room was the bartender, Melanie, whom was behind the bar counter. Melanie was dressed in her usual clothing, when included pants, shirt, and shoes.

Unfortunately, after they finished lunch, at their usual table by the karaoke stage, Revy had gotten up, without explanation to Rock, and she had walked over to sit on a stool, at the bar counter.

When Revy reached the bar counter, and sat down, she had Melanie bring her a cold bottle of beer. After Revy had her fresh beer, she opened it, and she slowly sipped, as she just stared into the wall of shelved bottles, across the bar, in front of her.

From experience, Rock knew that something important was on Revy's mind, that Revy did not feel like not sharing with anyone.

This was the reason Revy was drinking beer. Because she wanted to drink something with alcohol that she could keep drinking for a while, without risk of the amount of alcohol she was taking in, would not effect her train of thought, nor judgment. And with her super-soldier serum enhanced body, she could drink beers all day and still remain sober.

Presently, Rock was still sitting at their usual table, by the stage. Though, Rock sat in a chair, which allowed her to have back to the far wall, across from the bar counter. This allowed her to quietly watch Revy.

While Rock silently watched her lover, she thought, with concern, 'Ever since that fight with Hernan, you have been very quiet. But, given we met with Hernan, and you were okay with him, I do not think this is about that fight. Nor, about Hernan. Something else clearly happened later that night, before you came to our room, to sleep.'

'I would ask you, but I know that would be the quickest way to upset you. Still, I am sure you will tell me in time. When you are ready.'

Just then, to her left, Rock noticed Lotton walk into the room.

Rock saw that Lotton was wearing her casual clothing, including her shirt, pants, long coat, and boots. She then saw Lotton come to a stop, and look around.

When Lotton looked at Rock, she started walking towards where Rock was sitting.

As Rock saw Lotton approach her, she thought, 'I wonder what she wants. She is usually when Shenhua, Sawyer, and their kids. So, this must be something important.'

A few seconds later, when Lotton reached the table that Rock was sitting at, she came to a stop, as she looked over at Rock, in Rock's face, as Rock looked at her face.

Rock asked, in english, “Hello Lotton. What can I do for you?”

Lotton answered, in english, “Actually, I was hoping to speak with Revy, but I see she is in one of her moods.”

Rock conceded, “Yes. I think it would be best not to approach her, right now. So, how is the rest of your family today?”

Lotton responded, “Fine. Sawyer and Shenhua are with our children, while I take care of this errand.”

Rock questioned, “And that would be?”

Lotton answered, “While I have no problems taking doing a basic disassembling, cleaning, and reassembling of my two Mausers. It has reached the point that my pistols need to have some thorough maintenance work on them. But, even I will admit they are antiques, and they required a skilled gunsmith to do a full field-strip, work on, and put together. Since I cannot find Chang, I was hoping to talk to Revy. To see if she has any advice on who I can go to for repair work?”

Rock suggested, “Fair enough. Still, even I know those are some of the more complicated pistols to work on. While don't you take this as a sign to trade up on your pistols, with newer models?”

Lotton responded, “My pistols have a lot of sentimental value to me.”

Rock thought, 'I think it is best not to ask you why that is.'

Lotton continued, “Besides, these are some of the few pistols that come with select-fire. I can use them as automatics, or as single-shot. Thought, I prefer single-shot.”

Rock complimented, “Nice. I can now see why you are keeping them.”

Lee happily replied, “Thank you.”

At the bar counter, due to her own enhanced hearing, Melanie could not help be overhear the conversation between Rock and Lotton.

Melanie looked over at Rock and Lotton, as she thought, 'I might as well help, or they are likely to get into trouble. And while those two are some of the nicest of the group. With this crew, when there is trouble, the bodies tend to pile up very high, very quickly.' She looked over at Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Besides, Revy's mood is bringing me down. We can all tell something is wrong. But, she is such a private person that the only person she might open up to is, Rock. And Revy is clearly not going to do that any time soon.'

Melanie then turned to her right, and walked towards the cash register, near the entrance to the room, where the closest exit to the bar counter was. As soon as she exited, she did a u-turn, passed Revy, while she headed for Lotton and Rock.

As Melanie approached, she saw both women turn to look at her.

A few seconds later, Melanie came to a stop beside Lotton, while she face both Lotton and Rock.

Rock asked, “Is there something you need, Melanie?”

Melanie stated, in a sincere tone of voice, “First, I want you to know that I did not mean to overhear you. But, with our enhanced senses, I could not help it.”

Rock casually replied, “It is okay. We have all been there, done that.”

Lotton commented, “Yea. With hearing like ours, one cannot help it. Especially, when Sawyer and Shenhua, have some girl talk with Revy. Even thought I am now woman, and a mother, there are still some things I do not want to know about the female anatomy. Such as how to safely hide very sharp objects in very sensitive places.”

Nearby, all three women heard, Revy softly snicker, from across the room, for a few seconds.

All three women looked in Revy's direction, for a few seconds, as Lotton said, “Case in point.”

A few seconds later, Rock turned back to Melanie, as she asked, “Okay. So, you overheard Lotton's problems. I take it that you can help us?”

Melanie and Lotton turned back to look at Rock, as Melanie answered, “Yes.” Melanie looked over at Lotton, as she continued, “I know a man in town that is an expect gunsmith. He even use to work on guns in Roanapur.”

Rock inquired, with mild shock, “There is a person here, from Roanapur, that we don't know about?”

Melanie shrugged, as she playfully said, “Actually, he is original from Nevada of another reality. But, he spent a lot of time in Roanapur. And he has been here for around as long as I have. Pedro uses him a lot, and when I met him, I recognize him for Roanapur. But, he did not recognize me, even before the gender change. I just didn't really say anything about it, until now. Though, now that I think about it, I believe Lee also recognized him, when I introduced him to Lee, before Lee got her own gender changed.”

Lotton questioned, “And why would Lee know him?”

Melanie coyly replied, “Because, he is a very recognizable man.”

Rock flatly asked, “Okay. Who is there man?”

Melanie answered, “Believe it or not. He is Burt Gummer. The survivalist from the Tremors movie and TV series.”

Lotton blurted out, “The same Burt that we went after? But, whom escaped into the multiverse, after he beat us, so badly, in such embarrassing ways, that Chang called off the hunt for him?”

Melanie replied, “Yes. The very same, Burt.”

Rock thought, 'This town just keeps showing us one surprise after another... At least we aren't to bored here. And everyone knows not to mess with us. But, I do need to know something about, Burt?' She commented, “That is interesting. Does he know about Lee's stories?”

Melanie stated, “The stories. No. But, considering the way he was able to convince the families there to let him work in the city, I am pretty sure he saw the Black Lagoon anime series. Or, at least read the manga. Before he came to Roanapur.”

Lotton flatly said, “Of course. If you were traveling the multiverse. And you have skills with weapons, including being a gunsmith. Where would you go to make a trade our of your skills? You would go to a city where the criminals use a lot of guns, without questions. And Burt did it by impressing Balalaika and Chang, with his gunsmithing skills, in the pistols he sent to them as gifts.”

Melanie commented, “I remember Balalaika showing us, of Hotel Moscow, the pistol that Burt sent her. It was a work of art, that was extremely easy to use and very accurate. Burt is an artist with his weapons.”

Rock mentioned, “Interesting. Revy told me that story, long before I read Lee's stories. And he became the exclusive gunsmith for both Hotel Moscow and Chang's Triad. Save for a few other customers that Balalaika and Chang signed off on, such as Revy.”

Lotton muttered, “Damn. Talk about making a buck off your enemies.”

Melanie said, “I know. And he did a good job of it. Also, his shooting skills impressed even, Balalaika.”

Rock inquired, “How good with a gun is he? Really?”

Melanie answered, “Burt is good with a pistol. But, he has a marksmen level skill with a rifle. Especially, high-powered rifles. He is one of the few people that could arguably out-shoot Revy, Balalaika, and Roberta, with a rifle, at long distances. Even the super-soldier serum enhancements. And while Burt has gotten a little older, from the few times that I was with Pedro, Hernan, and Bert, at the deserted stretch of beach, that they used as a gun range. Burt's skills have no dulled one bit.”

Lotton commented, “Remind me not to get on his bad side.”

Melanie stated, in a casual tone of voice, “Not to worry. He is a nice guy, If a bit rough around the edges. Also, he is very strict on gun safety. If you show that you respect gun safety in the way you handle your weapons, you will be fine.”

Lotton replied, “I will keep that in mind.”

Melanie offered, “Listen, Burt's gunshop should be open, right now. And as soon as I can find someone to take over for me, I will drive you there in my car.”

Rock said, “Thanks.”

Melanie responded, “Though, he does not know me as Melanie. So, we need to be on our best behavior, so he doesn't accidentally shoot us.”

Rock shrugged, as she casually replied, “Of course.”

Melanie then turned towards the door to the kitchen. She then walked through the bar room, and she entered the kitchen to find someone to take over for her, while she went to help Lotton when her errand.

Rock turned to Lotton, as she softly said, “Let's go talk to Revy.”

Lotton turned to Rock, as she quietly replied, “Okay.”

Rock and Lotton got up from their chairs, and walked over to face Revy. They came to a stop a few feet from Revy, by Revy's left side.

Rock turned to her redheaded lover, as she invited, “Revy, I know you are not in a good mood, right now. But, you always talked about how you liked to visit Burt, when you could. Because he is more into guns than you are. So, would you like to come with us?”

Revy turned to face Rock, as she casually declined, “Nah. I would just prefer to stay here. But, say hi to Burt for me.”

Rock said, “I will.” She then continued, in a more serious, through comforting tone of voice, “Also, if you want to talk, I will be here, waiting for you.

Revy give Rock a weak smile, as she calmly said, “I know. It is just I have some things that came up, all of a sudden, that I need to sort through on my own.”

Rock replied, “I understand.”

Revy then turned back to face the bar counter, as Rock and Lotton returned, to sit down, at the table Rock and Lotton had been at, while they waiting for Melanie to return.

(_)

Ten minutes later, Melanie found someone that could take over for her bartender job for an hour, and whom would not get on Revy's nerves.

With that taken care of, Melanie, Lotton, and Rock, left the bar, and they were making their way through the lobby, as they headed for the parking lot, and Melanie's car, when they saw Akira walking in their direction.

Unlike most times, Akira was not with her family. And given the cool weather outside, Akira was dressed in a casual shoes, shirt, pants, belt, and a jacket.

Also, Melanie noticed that the hotel lobby was about half full, with various guests.

While the three women continued walking towards Akira, Melanie noticed, as she thought, 'I can tell from the way Akira is moving, and the way that jacket hugs her upper torso, that she is wearing to shoulder holsters, with her revolvers. Speaking of which, she doesn't look busy, and I know her revolvers did come from Burt. I think she would enjoy going to visit him.'

When the three women came when ten feet of Akira, Akira finally noticed them.

As Akira turned her head to look at them, Melanie inquired, “Hi Akira. Are you busy?”

Akira, Melanie, Rock, and Lotton, came to a stop a few feet from each other, as Akira answered, “Not really.”

Lotton asked, “Where is the rest of your family?”

Akira stated, “They headed for Chang's casino, to use the indoor employee pool. But, I didn't feel like going swimming. So, I am here, by myself.”

Lotton commented, “That happens. And it is nice that Chang let's us use the employee facilities at his casino.”

Akira agreed, “Yes. It is. So, where is your family?”

Lotton answered, “Raising our young children.”

Akira smiled, as she said, “I remember that. It was real fun.”

Lotton returned Akira's smile, as she replied, “Yes. It is.”

Melanie offered, “Akira, I was wondering. Since you are not busy. Would you like to come with us?”

Akira inquired, “Where are you going?”

Melanie stated, “Believe it, or not. We are going to pay a visit to the man that made your revolver.”

Akira blurted out, “He's here, in town?”

Melanie replied, “Yes.”

Akira asked, “How?”

Melanie said, “We will tell you in the car.” She thought, 'This is not information that should be stated around strangers.'

Akira questioned, “Cool. So, how are we getting there?

Melanie responded, “We are taking my car. It is parked out front.”

Akira replied, “Okay.”

Melanie then started walking back towards the entrance, with the other three women following her.

Rock had been silent during the conversation Melanie and Lotton had with Akira.

Rock walked beside Akira and Lotton, while behind Melanie, as she thought, 'Why did Melanie invite Akira?'

Rock then walked up to be by Melanie's right side, as they walked.

Rock whispered into Melanie's right ear, “Not that I am complaining. But, why did you invite, Akira?”

Melanie looked in front of her, as she softly replied, “I believe that Burt will be happy to see some of his work return to his presence.”

Rock then remembered, as she thought, 'Oh. That's right. Burt made Akira's pistols, in the first place. And she likely had her pistols on her.' She replied, “Oh... Good point.”

Melanie giggled as she pulled open left door, of the double-doors that lead into the entryway, between the lobby and the outside.

The other three women handed off the door, and kept it open, as they filed into the entryway.

A few seconds later, they had reached the parking lot. And a minute later, they reached Melanie's car, which had not been repaired.

As the four women reached the car, Melanie used her clicker to remotely unlock the door.

Akira then noticed something, as she commented, “Hey. This car looks like the car that Hernan and Revy damaged a few of nights ago.”

Melanie responded, “That is because it is.”

Lotton commented, “It does not look damaged.”

Melanie stated, “That is because Hernan repaired it yesterday. He even did a rush order on the windshield. So, he could replace it for me. With all of his repairs and replacements being free of charge.”

Rock said, “That is nice of him.”

Melanie replied, “Barring what you saw of him that night. He is a nice man.”

Rock commented, “I realized that, when we talked to him.”

Melanie asked, “By the way, how did that conversation good.”

Rock said, “Quite well. I tell you in the care.”

Melanie replied, “Thanks.”

Lotton inquired, “So, does he know you are you?”

Melanie answered, “Yes. We had that conversation in this very car, as I told him home. He is okay with the situation concerning me.”

Lotton replied, “That is good.”

Melanie calmly requested, “I know. Now, get in. So, we can go see Burt.”

All four women then got inside and buckled in their seats.

Inside the car, Melanie was in the left side driver's seat. Lotton was beside Melanie, to her right. Rock was behind Lotton. And Akira was behind Melanie.

With everyone seated, Melanie used her car key to start the ignition of her car's engine.

Less than a minute later, they were out of the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and on the road.

While Melanie drove them Burt's gunshop, Lotton explained to Akira was they were doing. And Akira was okay with it.

(_)

Ten minutes later, they reached Burt's shop, which was inside of the town.

Melanie parked her car on the opposite side of the two-lane street, from where Burt's shop was located.

Melanie put her car in park, turned off the ignition, pulled out her keys, and unbuckled herself, from her seat. She then said, “We are here.”

A minute later, all four women had exited the car, with Melanie and the other women locking and shutting the doors behind them.

As all four women stood around, Akira asked, “So, where is Burt's place?”

Melanie answered, “That building across directly across the street from us.”

Melanie then pointed at a nondescript, three story building in front of them, across the street. There was a single door on that side of the building, but no windows on the first floor. Though, there were windows on the second and third floors.

While the other three women looked over at the building, Melanie stated, “That is Burt's gun shop. Actually, the first story is the gun shop. The second story is where his metal working, and gunsmithing. Along with a workout room. And the top story is his home.”

“By the way, the walls, floors, and ceilings, are made of concrete and steel. To help keep people from breaking in, and with fires. Also, there is a water sprinkler system, as well, for fires.”

“Also, the stairway leads the roof, with the room being flat, with proper rain drainage, with a three foot high, concrete and steel parapet surrounding it. Burt stated, that if he wanted to have the high ground, if he needed it.”

Lotton complimented, “Nice setup.”

Melanie replied, “I agree.”

Rock inquired, “Are they going to be any problems getting in?”

Melanie said, “No. You have to have key to unlock the door. Which he only gives to his customers. Which, I was one of, when I was Melvin.”

Lotton turned to Melanie, as she reminded the brown haired woman, “But, from what you said, you haven't reintroduce yourself to Burt, yet. So, he has no idea that you and Melvin are the same person.”

Melanie looked over at Lotton, as she said, “Yes. I realize that. And that is a real easy way to get shot, in this situation.”

Lotton rhetorically deadpanned, “You think?”

Akira and Rock turned to Melanie, as Akira asked, “Why didn't you just tell your friends that you changed. We have been here for a few years. Anyone with a brain, and a little knowledge, could probably piece together what is going on here.”

Melanie looked over at Akira, as she responded, in annoyed tone of voice, “Hey. It is not that easy. I cannot just go to people I know and say. Hi, I use to be Melvin, an elderly man. Now, I am Melanie, a twenty-something babe of a woman.”

Akira shrugged, as she casually said, “Why not? It worked for my parents. Actually, my parents also took the news well. They like Natsuru and Ranma. And they love their grand-kids.”

Lotton commented, “So, did mine. And surprisingly, my parents hit it off well with Sawyer and Shenhua.”

The three women turned then to look at Rock.

Rock flatly questioned, “What?”

Akira requested, “Rock, you might as well tell, Melanie.”

Lotton stated, “Yea. It was not that bad.”

Melanie could guess what this was about. She inquired, “What happened with you and your parents, Rock?”

Rock answered, in a slightly depressed tone of voice, “It wasn't bad. But, I would rather not talk about it.”

Melanie questioned, “So, they had a problem with your change?”

Rock replied, in a more normal tone of voice, “No. They had problem with Revy. But, we are still on civil terms.”

Akira teased, “Who doesn't?”

No one laughed at Akira's comment.

Lotton said, “Well, don't feel bad, Rock. You are still talking, and that means there is hope.”

Rock replied, in a grateful tone of voice, “Thanks.”

Melanie looked over at Lotton, as she requested, “You all will have to tell me about all that sometime.”

Lotton turned to Melanie, as she said, “Sure. I am more than happy too. Just let me know when? And where?”

Akira commented, “I don't mind.”

Rock said, “We will do it over some beer.”

Melanie replied, “I'll look forward to it.” She then turned to look at all three of the women, as she stated, “Okay. Since we don't want to get shot. No sudden, aggressive movements. And let me do the talking.”

Melanie the turned towards the building across the street. She then check both ways down the street, to see that the street was clear. Next, she walked across the street, with the other three women following right behind her.

When the reached the front door of the building, Melanie pulled out her key ring, from a pants pocket, and she used the key for the door, to unlock it. She opened the door, which swing inward. She then walked inside, while she put away her keys, back into the pants pocket the keys came from.

Rock second inside, then Lotton, and finally Akira, whom gently closed the door behind her.

As Akira let the door gently close, she turned to look at the door, as she saw that the interior side of it was made so that it would automatically lock when it was closed, but the knob on the inside could be turned, to open it, even when it was locked from the outside. Also, there was a spring at the top of the door allowed the door to close on it's own.

When Akira look back inside the room, she came to a stop, when she saw the other three women standing nearby.

The ceiling lights were soft yellow incandescent lights, instead of the usual florescent white lights. And the ceiling lights provided plenty of lighting for the room.

Akira look around the room, and she saw it was a large retail room, filled with various types of firearm. From pistols to rifles to large machine guns. Also, there were various boxes of ammo and ammo cans, various ammo magazines of several sizes, other gun related items. There are also some other items, including various knives, swords, and a few other melee weapons.

These items were found through the room. From the retail shelves on the floor, to hanging on the walls, to glass display cases, that served as counters around the left side, and back of the gunshop.

Given the room was very clean, the retail shelves on the floor were well spaced out, and all the merchandise was very organization. The room did not fell cluttered and closed in, Instead, the room had a very professional atmosphere that impressed Akira.

And while the room was quite large, a person could easily tell, from the side of the building outside, that the room did not even cover half the total area of the space for that floor level.

Akira thought, 'This place is larger, and it has a wider array of weapons, than Burt's shop in Roanapur. I wonder what connections Burt has here to get this sort of hardware? It goes without saying that Pedro likely helped him. But, I wonder who else?'

It was then that Akira saw where her three friends where looking. She turned in the direction they were looking to see saw a man calmly standing across a counter that had a glass display case in it, with pistols set inside, for show.

Akira thought, 'Yea. That is Burt Gummer. And he looks great for his age. Also, he was quite, as he came in. The others only heard him due to their enhanced hearing. Still, that is not bad for the old badass.'

The years had been kind to Burt. For a man in his late fifties, to early sixties, he was still very physically fit.

Burt wore a green, long sleeved button up shirt. A light brown pants, with brown leather belt, and brown boots. Also, he had a white baseball cap on his head.

Burt silently looked at them.

The four women then all noticed his hands were below the counter.

Melanie thought, 'Burt might pull a gun on us, if we don't explain ourselves soon.'

Melanie said, in a calm tone of voice, “Hello Mister Gummer. We have come here looking for you expertise in gunsmithing. Would it be possible for you to help us?”

Burt responded, “Well, that depends. I first need to know where you got a key to my door. The only people I have given keys are either married, or no better than to give their key to just a pretty face.”

Melanie agreed, “You are correct”

Burt pointed out, “And the only two people I know of that I cannot account for in the last few years, with one of my keys, is Paciano, whom, last I heard, joined the priesthood. And Melvin, who was kidnapped a few years ago.”

Melanie stated, “I used Melvin's key.”

Burt responded, “Well, that figures. I have never had much luck with people named Melvin. So, if you have his key, you can tell me what happened to him?”

Melanie sighed. She then answered, “Long story short, I am Melvin. I got my gender changed, and my youth restored.”

Burt took a closer look at Melanie, for a few seconds. He then said, “Melvin?... I can see the resemblance.”

Melanie replied, “I go by Melanie, now.”

Burt stated, “Oh, so you are that Melanie. I heard someone named Melanie took over at main bartender at the Devil's Hotel. But, in truth, you got your old job back at the Devil's Hotel, as the bartender, under you new identity, and name.”

Melanie responded, “Yes. The manager of the hotel was very understanding.”

Burt commented, “I bet that was an interesting conversation.”

Melanie said, “It was.”

Burt stated, “Still, that all makes sense... In a somewhat twisted sort of way.”

Melanie inquired, “I find it interesting that you seem to be taking this very well. And you seem to believe me off the bat. Why is that?”

Burt looked over at Akira, as he answered, “The answer is to your question, Melvin... I am sorry. Melanie. Is your blond friend, Akira.”

Melanie replied, “Either name is fine.”

Burt responded, “Thank you. Anyway, I remember the craziness that Akira caused on Roanapur.”

Akira smiled, as she thought, 'He does remember me.'

Burt continued, “And after everything I have seen, traveling the existence of the multiverse. I can believe just about anything.”

Lotton complimented, “That is a good outlook to take.”

Burt offered, “Thanks, little lady... Well come on over her, Melanie, Akira, and introduce me to your friends.”

The four women then walked across the room, to where Burt was standing.

Several seconds later, when they reached the display case of pistols, when was the counter, from which Burt was across from them, they came to a stop, side by side with each other.

Rock was on the outer left, then to her right was Akira. To Akira's right was Lotton. And to Lotton's right was Melanie.

Right after they came to a stop, Rock spoke up, “Revy sends her regards, Burt.”

Burt said, “That's nice. I guess that little redheaded spitfire is here in town?”

Rock replied, “Yes.”

Burt inquired, “Still... Not, to be rude... But, who are you?”

Rock responded, “Oh... I am Rock. Yes. The same Rock as in Roanapur. I went through the same process at Melanie. As did the white haired, young woman that is with us. You likely know her as Lotton.”

Burt questioned, “Shenhua's friend?”

Lotton said, “The very same.”

Burt flatly stated, “I don't want to know.”

Melanie thought, 'For right now, I think it is best we don't tell Burt about the stories.'

Burt continued, “By the way, Akira, are you still happy with the pistols I sold you?”

Akira happily answered, “I am sure am.”

Burt offered, “If you need any work, on your pistols. Let me know. I will do so at a fair price.”

Akira replied, “I am sure you will. And if I need your help. I will you know.”

Melanie thought, 'I guess I was right to bringing Akira along. Her presence seems to have perked Burt right up.'

Rock thought, 'I guess Melanie was correct in bringing Akira. I am glad I trusted her on this matter.'

Burt inquired, “So, ladies... You're here. Now, what do you want me to work on? It must be a real challenge, considering you are coming to me.”

Melanie commented, “You could say that.”

Lotton then remember, as she thought, 'Melanie said that Burt respects gun safety. And from his movie and TV series, I believe she is correct. And it wouldn't hurt to do as Melanie suggested.'

Lotton requested, “Give me a minute to safely pull out everything.”

Melanie noticed Burt raised an eyebrow when Lotton used the word, safely.

Lotton them pulled out one of her pistols, hidden underneath her long coat. She kept the pistol pointed away from everyone, as she removed the twenty round ammo magazine. She then gently set the ammo magazine down on top of the glass display case. Next, she cocked the hammer, and she then pulled back the bolt of the gun, as she showed Burt that the chamber of the pistol was empty. After which, she allow the pistol's bolt to gently slide back in place, and she then safely decocked the hammer. Finally, she gently set the pistol, on the top of the display case, by the ammo magazine she had set there. With the end of the pistol barrel pointed away from everyone.

Lotton then did the same thing, with her other pistol, while making she she kept the pistol, in her hands, aimed away from everyone.

When Lotton finished both sets of ammo magazines and pistols, she looked up at Burt's face, to see that Burt had a little of respect on his face, towards her.

Burt continued to look at Lotton, as he grinned, while he complimented, “I do admire someone that practices proper gun safety.”

Melanie smiled at Burt's comment.

Lotton replied, “Thank you.” She thought, 'I will have to thank Melanie later for the tip on that gun safety advice.'

Burt looked down a Lotton's pistols. He then looked back up at women, as he inquired, “I take it that these are reasons you came to me?”

Lotton answered, “Yes.”

Burt looked down at the pistols, again, as he stated, “Ah... The Mauser M seven twelve Schnellfeuer… Not the easiest name to pronounce. Anyway, the weapon has select fire, for either single-shot, or full auto. With it firing seven point sixty-three millimeter bullets.” He looked up at Lotton, as he complimented, “And nice touch using the twenty round, detachable magazines.”

Lotton smiled at Burt, as she replied, “Thank you.”

Burt commented, “And you have two of them. You don't fire use these like Revy does?”

Lotton admitted, “I am not as good as her. But, I practice.”

Burt inquired, “Don't we all. Now, what do you want me to do with these pistols? Are they damaged in some way?”

Lotton answered, “No, they are not damage. They both function. I just need them taken apart completely, in a full strip down, cleaned, and properly resembled, to working order. And these types of weapons which require specialized skills and tools to field-strip, and put back together, again, in proper working order.”

Burt agreed, “Yes. They do talent and tools to properly work on.”

Lotton responded, “I was hoping you would have the tools and skills to completely take them apart, clean them, and put them back together, in working order.”

Burt stated, “I can do that. It will take a few days to do that. But, I am not busy this week. Though, if there are any broken parts that need to be replaced, it will take more time and cost more for repairs.”

Lotton replied, “I understand.”

Burt asked, “And now, what about payment? I cannot afford to do these jobs for free.”

Lotton questioned, “Would a small, eight ounce, gold bar be acceptable payment to you?”

Burt thought, 'An eight ounce gold bar at current market rate is a very good price for job like this, in this anti-gun, corrupt nation.”

Burt stated, “I am more of a silver man myself. But, gold will be fine. And you can pay on delivery.”

Lotton replied, “That will be fine.”

Burt said, “Good. When your pistols are ready, I will call Melanie, at the bar she works at. I have the number, and she brought you here. So, that shouldn't be a problem. Though, it will likely be a few days to repair. If it takes long, I will call Melanie to inform you have any problems.”

Lotton commented, “I can go along with that.”

Melanie complimented, “That is a good idea. And I give Lotton your message in a timely manner.”

Lotton stated, “I will looked forward to your call at the bar.” She turned to Melanie, as she said, “I trust you, Melanie. So, we should be good.”

Melanie turned to Lotton. Melanie smiled at the young white haired woman, in response to Lotton's compliment.

Burt questioned, “Okay. So, is there anything else you wish to discuss with me?”

Melanie and Lotton turned back to look at Burt, as Lotton thought, 'This would be a perfect time to find out a few things that Lee did not cover in his stories.'

Lotton answered, “Actually, I do have a few questions for you.”

Burt casually replied, “Ask away.”

Lotton said, “First, I have to say, that in some circles, you are a very popular guy.”

Burt commented, “Well, that is interesting.”

Lotton responded, “Yes. It is. Anyway, since it is likely that it is going to come out that you are here. We need to come clean with you on a few things.”

Burt guessed, “You were the ones that came after me, in Nevada?”

Lotton commented, “You already figured it out?”

Burt said, “Yes. During my time in Roanapur, recognized some of the members of Hotel Moscow, whom followed me into the mountains of Nevada. From their fatigues, weapons, and the fact they were all speaking in russian. It was not hard to guess who they were. And given you guys only do things for very serious reasons, I let the situation slide.”

Burt turned to Melanie, as he continued, “I just never confronted Melanie about it, because I saw no point in doing so.”

Melanie said, “I appreciate that.”

Burt replied, “No problem.”

Burt thought, 'Besides, for those of you in Roanapur, that was your future. And if I had tried to confront any of you, on the matter, it likely would have caused problems for all of us.'

Lotton complimented, “That is a very mature approach to take on the matter.” She thought, 'Though, if you learned the full truth, you would likely not be so mature, and calm on, the matter. So, it is best to be kind to you know. So, when you learn the truth, you will not be hostile towards us.'

Burt responded, “Thank you. Also, when I jumped one of them, in Nevada, and stole his traveling device. It was a... Unique learning experience.”

Melanie raised an eyebrow, as she recalled something. She asked, “This person you jumped. Did this happen in a small canyon?”

Burt replied, “Yes.”

Melanie flatly stated, with mild surprise in her tone of voice, “That was me.”

Rock, Akira, and Lotton, turn to their right to look at Melanie, with interest and amusement, in their facial expressions.

Melanie thought, with embarrassment, 'And I didn't realize it, until now. Though, I admit I skimmed the confrontation between John and Lotton, in Book Two. I can only take some much hamminess and cheese at one time. And I know I am not going to hear the end of this for a while. I just set myself up for some teasing from this. But, at least Revy, Chang, or worse, Balalaika, isn't here to make a smartass remark at my expense.'

Burt let out a laugh, which caused all four women to turn their attention back towards him.

Burt said, with mild amusement in his tone of voice, “Don't that beat all. Well Melanie, sorry about that. But, at the time, you were playing for keeps.”

Melanie calmly responded, “I understand. I hope there are no hard feelings between us?”

Burt said, “I have none towards you, over that.”

Melanie commented, “Good. And thank you.”

Burt inquired, “You're welcome. Still. Now, that is out in the open. I have to ask. Are you all still after me?”

Melanie replied, “No.”

Burt stated, “Good. That is all I need to know on that subject.”

Meanwhile, Lotton quietly listened to the conversation. She thought, 'Burt, you clearly knows when it is best not to pry.'

Burt questioned, “So, I take it the others are here, as well?”

Melanie casually replied, “Pretty much.”

Burt then realized something, as he stated, “Wait minute... You have been here for several years. Though, you other girls here have only been here for a couple of years.”

Melanie said, “Yes.” She mentally wondered, 'What is he getting at?'

Burt asked, “The woman at the Rats Nest. That is Bao? Isn't she?”

Melanie thought, with amusement, 'I should have known you would figure that out.' She compliment, “Good eye. And she is my girlfriend.”

Burt commented, “I hope you two are happy.”

Melanie warmly replied, “We are.”

Akira mentioned, “As fun as this conversation is. I find it interesting that you are not too concerned about the gender bending.”

Burt stated, “I tend not to point out a problem, unless it will effect me. Doing so is also a good way to not get shot.”

Akira agreed, “You are right. That is a good approach to take.”

Burt commented, “Well, considering you came after me in Nevada, I take you guys knew who I was, beforehand.” He continued, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Why am I not surprised?”

Rock pointed out, “And it is clear that you have seen the Black Lagoon series.”

Burt shrugged, as he responded, “Well. I like women. I like guns. And I like action... As long as it is not happening to me. Except for being animated, I found it to be pretty good series. And before you ask. I came to Roanapur a little over a year before you did, Rock. And I had a great time there. A lot of excitement. But, like all good things. There came a time to leave. And when Chang start building that monstrous tower, I saw the writing on the wall, and I realized it was time to leave.”

Rock replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'Burt clearly has a good head on his shoulders to know when it is time to leave. Though, some of us clearly do not.'

Akira asked, “What happened next, after you left Roanapur?”

Burt answered, “I wondered around for a little while, until I came here, around the same time that Melanie here did. And when we ran into each other. We recognized each other. And it was nice to have someone to talk to about such matters.”

Melanie replied, “I fully agree.”

Burt commented, “Now that I know it is you. I will be coming by your bar more often to talk.”

Melanie smiled, as she said, “I look forward to it.”

Rock thought, 'This interesting. So, Burt and Melanie not only knew each other, during their time Roanapur, but they talked with each other, on the matter.'

'Also, From the information I got from Bao, several months ago, when we had drinks alone at her bar. She told me she showed up in this city around the same time as Melanie. So, Bao, Melanie, and Burt all came to this town around the same time. That is more than coincidence. But, I have nothing else to go on. So, there is no point in looking further into the matter. Besides, my life is crazy enough, as is.'

Burt inquired, “So, how do you know me, when you came after me? I know I made the news a few times in my home reality. But, not enough to sent an army after me.”

Akira thought, 'I guess nobody told him. And he didn't find out on his own. Not even from Melanie.'

Akira turned Melanie, as she asked, “Why didn't you tell him, Melanie?”

Melanie instantly realized what Akira was asking her about. She turned to Akira, as she stated, “I really didn't want to further complicate matters.” She turned to Burt, as she said, “Sorry, Burt.”

Burt calmly requested, “Okay. Just tell me now.”

Akira stated, “Well, you see, when it comes to fiction, it works both ways. We know you from a movie and TV series, called Tremors.” She mentally added, 'We will leave out Lee's stories, for right now.'

Burt responded, with intrigue in his tone of voice, “Interesting. How was that series?” He thought, 'I will have to check out this Tremors series, later.'

Akira said, “Movies one and two were good. Three was okay. Four was so-so. And the TV series just didn't mesh very well.”

Burt replied, “Okay.” He mentally added, 'I will still need to check them out. Fortunately, I have high speed internet access to this place, and a nice computer, as well.'

Akira requested, “By the way, now that this information is out in the open. I have to say that a number of my friends, including myself, are fans of yours. Not crazy, tear your clothes off fans, but just regular fans.”

Burt commented, “I have met my fans before. You are some of the nicest ones I know of.”

Akira smiled at Burt, as she responded, “Thank you. Anyways, if it is okay with you. I am sure we would like some pictures of us with you, and some autographs from you.”

Burt said, “We will see what we can do. And if I do, I will do so for free.”

Akira replied, “Thanks.”

Lotton commented, “Yea. That would be nice.”

Rock said, “I would like a few picture and autographs, as well. And I am sure Revy would, as well.”

Burt replied, “No problem.”

Melanie stated, “Well, I have been Burt's friend to long to be that kind of fan... No offense Burt.”

Burt replied, “None taken.”

Melanie stated, “Well, we better get going. I told my temporary replacement at the bar, I would only be gone an hour. And since Revy is there, having drinks...”

Burt spoke up, “You don't need to say anything more. Just get back there before someone gets hurt.”

Melanie requested, “Thanks. And don't be a stranger.” She mentally added, 'Though, Revy has gotten better over the years. And after her fight with Hernan, she is likely not going to do something stupid, like she use to, for at least a month. Plus, she decided to not be armed this afternoon, as she got something to drink. So, I believe she meant was she said, to Hernan, about not drinking, while armed.'

Burt said, “I won't. I will come by the bar, in a few days, for lunch, and we will talk.”

Melanie replied, “I look forward to it.”

Lotton commented, “Thanks for looking at my pistols.”

Burt said, “I admire a challenge.”

Akira stated, “It was fun meeting you, again.”

Burt replied, “Same here.”

Rock said, “Stay safe.”

Burt responded, “You as well, Rock. And have a wonderful day, girls.”

Akira smiled at Burt, as she said, “We will.”

The four women then turned around, and the walked back to the front door to the shop.

The Rock reached the door first, and she opened it for the other three women.

Burt watched Rock be the last women out of the door. The spring on the top of the door made the door shut on its own, and the locking mechanism then automatically locked the door to the outside, while keeping the knob on the inside unlocked.

Left alone to his thoughts, Burt mentally wondered, with mild amusement, 'I think my business, and my life, is about to become a lot more exciting... In a good way... ' He cracked a wicked grin, as he continued his thoughts, 'And what is life with some excite.'

Two days later, Burt finished his work on Lotton's pistols. He even did a field-strip, cleaning, and reassembling of Lotton's ammo magazines. Along with him testing the pistols and magazines, with ammo he had in his shop. With a basic cleaning afterward. The pistols and magazines worked fine.

It was noon that day, by the time he called Melanie to inform Lotton that her pistols were ready.

An hour later, Lotton returned, using Melanie key, which she had borrows. She then paid for the repairs and maintenance on her pistols, with an eight ounce bar of gold. She then took her pistols, her ammo magazines, and the bullets which she had left in her ammo magazines, which were in a clear, plastic bag. Lotton then left. Later that afternoon, when Lotton tested her pistols, she found that both pistol works like new. And later that night, she informed her family and friends that Burt did good job on her pistols.

And this news by Lotton brought Burt some more business to his gunshop. With Melanie gladly acting as a go-between.

(_)

On the afternoon of the day that Lotton met Burt, to repair her pistols, around two thirty PM, at the Last Resort Diner, the last of the lunch crowd had just exits. And like most weekdays, during that time of day, there were no more customers in the restaurant.

Presently, it was a Rico's turn to be cook for the day, at the diner.

For those that did not know her, they would see a pretty, slender, hispanic woman, with short green hair, and tanned skin, whom appeared to be in her mid-twenties.

And those that did not know her, would not realize that she, like her friends and family, had a much longer, and more interesting tale to tell. But, that was for another time.

Presently, Rico was wearing a white cooking outfit, as she stood behind between the counter, and the over. With her facing the stove, as she did some minor cleaning.

At the moment, out the four other employees in the diner, the manager, knowh at Ed Lowe, was in her office, doing some budgetary work. The office was located to the left back side of the diner, when facing the restaurant, with a door in the dining room leading direction to the office. Also, the men's and women's restrooms where near the office door.

Ed was a skinny woman, with tanned skin and short red hair. She appeared to be in her later twenties, but she was much older. She wore a waitress' uniform.

In Ed's office, helping her, was her long time spouse, Lori Lowe. She was a pretty slender, fair skin woman, with long black hair that hung loosely, down to her shoulder blades. She appeared to be in her mid-twenties, but she was far older. She also were a waitress' uniform.

The two other employees of the Last Resort Diner, were in the storage room, which was located to the back right side of the diner, when facing the restaurant.

Those two employees were the adult children of Ed and Lori. Their names were Lewis Lowe and Stan Lowe. The two brothers were the same age, and they could pass as fraternal twin brothers.

Except for some facial differences, it was hard to tell each of them from the other.

Both brothers were in their early twenties. They had tanned skin, and short black hair. They were tall, and had muscular bodies. And both men wore a waiter's uniform.

Back in the front of the diner, Rico stood in from the stove, as she read a piece of paper with to go order, she had just received by phone, she thought, 'It is nice of the Lowe family to let me stay in their home, and gave me this job. So, I can be around the excitement in this town. Still, the apartment I rented a month ago seems to be very nice. And it is fairly cheap rent, and is close to be beach. So, I can both afford on the salary, without digging into my savings. And I can walk to be beach and swim, when spring time finally arrives.

'And what an interesting two years it has been. It seem between Revy's group, Chang's group, and Balalaika’s Hotel Moscow, there is always something interesting happening. Though, none of it has been bad, towards us.'

'And more closer to home, I am now on speaking terms with one of my younger sisters, Fabiola. With luck, and her help, I might be able to show my face to the rest of my family. Though, it has been a number of years. And while my family is still alive, I need to do something soon. They are not getting any younger, like Fabiola and I, are.'

'But, that is a matter for tomorrow. Now, I need to see about this order.'

Just then, Rico heard the fronts doors open behind her.

Rico put down her tools, on the wooden plank in front of the stove. She turned around, and she saw two young woman standing in front of the counter, looking at her.

Rico noticed that the two women looked of japanese descent. And they appeared to be in their late teens to early twenties. Both were pretty, and had athletic physically builds. One had short black hair, and the other woman had short brown hair.

Both women were wearing casual clothing, which was, among other things, a plain long sleeved shirt, pants, and tennis shoes.

The two women stood behind each other, with the black haired woman being to the brown haired woman's right side.

Rico thought, 'I think it is best I speak in english.' She asked, in english, “How many I have help you?”

The woman with black hair, answered, in flawless english, “We are here for the waitress and cooking jobs, which your business advertised about.”

Rico looked to her right to see the help wanted sign set against the window. The sign was in both english and spanish. She turned back to look at the two women, as she stated, “Ah yes. The manager is here. And I will go get her, right now.”

Rico thought, '

The brown haired woman calmly said, in flawless english, “That will be fine.”

Rico turned around, and headed for the manager's office, as she thought, 'Ed and Lori have been advertising for some more help, in a few local ad magazines and the store from here.'

'Even with me helping the Lowe family. And them using those time dilation tricks. Which they have decided to not do as often. Because they Lewis and Stan did not want to in a situation where they were aging twice as fast as those here. I agree with them, that they should lay off of that trick, and they needed to hire more help.'

'So, with more help, all of us can get some more time off, without using dilation tricks. But, due to the reputation that our friends have gotten, none of the locals have taken up on the job offers. Though, these two women are clearly not local. Still, they are looking for a job, and that is the important part.'

By then, Rico reached the manager's office door. She then opened it and walked inside.

Rico saw that Ed was sitting in her chair, behind her desk, with Lori, sitting in a chair, beside her, to Ed's left side, behind the desk.

Both women stopped what they were doing, as they looked up at Rico.

Ed calmly asked, “What is, Rico?”

Rico answered, “There are two young women in the dining room, whom are interested in jobs at the diner.”

Ed replied, “Nice.”

Lori said, “We will have to go out, and greet them.”

Both Ed and Lori then got up from their seats and they walked around the desk, to the doorway, where Rico was standing at.

A few seconds later, Rico walked out of the door, with Ed and Lori following right behind her.

As the three women came to a stop, behind the counter, Rico standing by the stove.

Meanwhile, Ed and Lori standing closer to the counter, while not blocking Rico's view. Ed stood to Lori's right side.

Ed, Rico, and Lori, all looked at the two other women, as Ed stated, in english, “I am Ed Lowe, the manager and co-owner the Last Resort Diner. To my left is Lori. The other owner of this restaurant.”

Lori looked at the women, as she said, in english, “Nice to meet you. And the person you just met is, Rico.”

Rico just nodded once towards the two younger women.

Ed inquired, “So, I hear you are both looking for a job?”

The black haired woman and the brown haired woman looked at each other. They then looked back at Ed, as the black haired woman said, “Yes. We are both looking for a job. We saw the help wanted sign, and we realized you hope you have space for two new employees.”

Ed responded, “Yes. We do. Though, it depends. We are looking for people that are welling to wait on tables, cook, restock supplies. Along with cleaning both dishes, and the restaurant itself. Depending on what is needed. While remaining polite. And the hours will shift from time to time. But, we are negotiable about such issues.”

The brown haired woman stated, “That is alright. We understand these are entry level jobs.”

Ed asked, “Okay. Can you speak spanish? This is Mexico, after all.”

The black haired woman answered, “Yes. Along with japanese, and english. We speak, write, and write, a number of languages. Our parents taught us well.”

Ed inquired, “So, what are your qualifications?”

The brown haired woman said, “While we will need some on the job training. We are willing to learn. Also, strange things don't bother us. And we are willing to do what we are told, within reason, for a reasonable amount money, on a weekly salary.”

Ed commented, “It sounds like you are the type of employees we want.”

Lori asked, “What are you names?”

The black haired woman stated, “My name is, Irene.”

The brown haired woman said, “My name is, Leona.”

Lori inquired, “Do either of you have a family name?”

Leona answered, “Not really. It is kind of complicated. And though we don't look related, we are sisters.”

Lori replied, “I guess that really don't matter. Many of the people I know personally, only go by one name.” She thought, 'Still, it is odd. But, it is clear I am not going to get the answers I want.'

Meanwhile, Ed took a closer look at Irene and Leona, as she thought, 'Nice try, lover, but I think these two are not going to give us those answers. Still, they do look familiar. And there are other ways of asking questions for answers we want.'

Ed calmly asked, “Where are you both from?”

Irene coyly answered, “We would prefer not to talk about such matters.”

Ed mentally reflected, 'They are clearly not going to give us any answers. But, like almost everyone else that comes to this city, they have their own secrets. Including us. So, we'll hire them, and see how this played out.'

Ed stated, “Well, either way, you're both hired.”

Irene replied, “Thank you.”

Leona said, “We appreciate that.”

Just then, Stan and Lewis walked out of the storage room, from the right side of the diner, as they made their way towards the counter, while each of them carried a box.

The five women turned to look at the two men.

The two brothers continued walking, until they reached the counter, and gently set the boxes down.

The brother then noticed the two young women they did not know, standing across the counter from them. Along, with Rico, and both their parents, looking at them, as well.

The brother then walked a little closer to the other adults.

Stan came to a stop, across from his parents, on the right, back side of the counter, when facing the front of the restaurant.

Lewis came up to stand beside Stan, to Stan's left side.

Ed commented, with a bit of amusement in her tone of voice, “This is Stan and Lewis Lowe. Stan, Lewis, meet our new employees, Irene, and Leona.”

Stan looked at the two young women, as he hesitantly said, “Oh... Hello...”

Stan thought, 'I am so happy I do not call mom and dad, by those titles, at work. Or, this could become really complicated. Still, it is good that all of us discussed the issue a few years ago. And we decided that at work, we would all call each by our first names. So, we could keep things simple. And as to the Lowe family name. We just say we are related, and leave it at that.'

Lewis focus on looking at Irene, as he kindly stated, “Nice to meet you.” He mentally added, 'She's hot. And she seems so relaxed. The other woman seems a little more tense.'

Irene noticed Lewis looked at her, as she said, with interest in her evident in her eyes,
as she said, “It is nice to meet you, as well.”

Leona noticed her sister and Lewis looking at each other, as she casually replied, “Same here.”

Irene continued to look at Lewis, as she asked, “So, you two are brothers?”

Lewis and Stan answered, almost in unison, “Yes.”

Irene giggled a little, as she smiled at Lewis. She then said, “That is so nice.”

Lewis returned Irene's smile, as he happily asked, “So, what are you interests, Irene?”

Irene answered, “I prefer physical activities. How about, yourself. What hobbies do you like, Lewis?”

Lewis stated, “I prefer more intellectual pursuits. But, I do like to keep in shape.”

Irene complimented, “With a muscular body like that. It is apparent.”

Lewis offered, “Thank you. And I am open to any hobbies that you may like.”

Irene happily stated, “We will talk later.”

Lewis replied, in a slightly joyous tone of voice, “That will be fine.”

While the others watched this very clear display of affection between Irene and Lewis, Ed thought, 'They are clearly interested in each other. This is a good thing for myself. As long as he is careful, and doesn't get her pregnant.'

Lori mentally reflected, 'I am happy to see that Lewis has finally meet a girl whom he can get along with, at a romantic level. Irene is clearly seem smart, nice, and pretty. Everything Lewis would want in a woman. And it was a nice move on his part to say he is open to her hobbies. That will earn him points with her. And we will let this develop on its own, so there is less chance of it going off the rails.'

Stan thought, 'I am so happy that Lewis finally found a girl he likes.'

Rico mentally reflected, 'Ah, young love. I am so happy for those two... And I have clearly become such a romantic, in the last few years.'

Ed thought, 'We need to get this conversation moving forward, before we have some customers come in.' She looked back over at Irene and Leona, as she inquired, “Do you two have a place to stay?”

Irene and Leona turned to face Ed, as Irene answered, “We are staying at hotel, in the middle of town.”

Ed stated, “Those hotels are not that bad. Though, I will make some phone calls. And I will see if I can find a cheap, but decent, apartment that you both can rent.”

Irene replied, “We appreciate your help.”

Lori offered, “If we find something, we could give you an advance on your first paychecks, for the apartment?”

Leona said, “That is very generous of you. But, we have enough money to live on for the next few months. So, that will not be a problem.”

Ed commented, “That is good to know.”

Leona asked, “So, when can we start work?”

Ed stated, “We will get you some uniforms, and train you this afternoon. And see how you do for the evening shift. Which is from five to ten, or eleven PM. Depending on how busy we are at the end of the evening shift.”

Leona inquired, “What are your business hours?”

Ed responded, “Well, over the years, we have played with our business hours. But, for right now. We are open almost every day, from seven AM to ten or eleven PM. Though, we are closed Wednesdays. So, is starting work today, okay with you? I will understand if you have prior arrangements today. With you starting work tomorrow.”

Leona and Irene looked at each other, as Leona asked, “Is this okay?”

Irene said, “Yes. I guess so.”

Leona and Irene then looked over at Ed, as Irene commented, “We look forward being trained, and working for you, today.”

Ed happily said, “I am glad to have you both on board.” She turned to her sons, as she requested, “Lewis, Stan, could you two help Rico in front, as Lori and I take these two into the storage room. So, we can start training Irene and Leona, here?”

Lewis said, “Sure.” He thought, 'I look forward to getting to know Irene and Leona. Especially, Irene.'

Stan replied, “I don't mind.” He thought, 'I didn't have any real plans for today, anyway.
And with these two working here. All of us will be able to have more time off, to have some fun. Still, I think I might do a favor for my brother, since he is hitting it off so well, with Irene.'

Stan turned to Lewis, as he offered, “Lewis, I will do the dishes, while you check to make sure the sweet and unsweet tea brewing in the containers are still fresh.”

Lewis looked over at his brother, as he replied, “Okay, Stan.”

The two brothers then went to take car of their tasks, as Rico turned back to the stove.

Lori turned to Irene and Leona, as she stated, “Girls, please head to the storage room. Which is where Stan and Lewis came out from. We will join you in a minute.”

Irene and Leona did not reply, as the two sisters turned, and headed for the entrance to the storage room. With Leona walking right behind Irene.

Meanwhile, Ed and Lori casually walk behind the two sisters, with Ed being to Lori's left side.

The two spouses were walking together, as at intentionally much more slower pace than the two sisters were.

Ed and Lori soon saw Irene and Leona pass through the door to the storage room.

While they kept slowly walking, beside each other, Ed leaned over to Lori's left ear. She whispered, “I think Irene and Leona are daughters of the Knight Sabers. With Irene being Linna's daughter. And Leona being Leon's daughter.”

Lori leaned to her left, close to Ed's right ear, as she softly replied, “With their names, and Leona commenting that strange things don't bother them. I was suspecting something like that. Linna had a friend that died, whom was named Irene. And Leon also did like his... I guess now, her name. So, she would name her daughter after herself. And Leona is a nice name.”

Ed quietly commented, “Exactly. And Lee did mention she and the others had a run in with the Knight Sabers in Mars Dome One, in the Babylon Five reality. It would make sense that news of this city would likely filter around that family. And a couple of them may have wanted to check their place out. But, why do you think they are here?”

Lori whispered, “For probably the same reason all young adults come to a new city. For a fresh start. While they are still probably still on good terms with their family. They are just heading somewhere else that is new to them. And if they were spies, they would not use their real names. And they would apply for jobs at the Devil's Hotel, or at Chang's casino. No. They are just moving away from home. And trying to do something different.”

“Well will just give them the benefit of the doubt, and keep an eye on them. Anything more would be unreasonable.”

Ed softly said, “I agree. And keeping an eye on them is good idea. But, we will not be imposing on them.”

Lori quietly replied, “Of course not. It is best to keep an eye on them, from a distance. We don't want to run them off. Or, ruin their trust in us.”

Ed softly complimented, in a happy tone of voice, “That is what I like about you, honey. You have always had a firm grasp of understanding human nature.”

Lori quietly responded, “Thank you, dear. Besides, Lewis and Irene seem to like each other. I have so been hoping he would finally find someone that likes him. And they are both taking a liking to each other. So, we don't want to ruin the potential of such a relationship.”

Ed softly said, “I know. I don't care if Lewis prefers men, or women. As long as he finds someone whom he care about, and whom cares about him. And with his family abilities, he has some flexibility in that department. And I feel the same way with Stan.”

Lori quietly stated, “I fully agree with you. Now, let's go show the two sisters, how to do this job.”

Ed softly replied, “With pleasure.”

By that point, the two spouses had reached the entryway of the door. They leaned their heads back up straight, as Lori slowed down, to allow Ed to walked up to the door. She opened it, and went in first.

Lori followed right behind Ed, with her gently shut the door behind them.

Nearby, at the stove, with her enhancement hearing, Rico overheard what Ed and Lori said. While she finished cleaning the stove, and the counters by the stove, she cracked a grin, as she happily thought, 'It looks like things are going to keep getting more interesting here.'

(_)

On the evening of the day that Lotton met Burt, to repair her pistols, and when Ed and Lori hired Irene and Leona for the Last Resort Diner, Hernan had gone to a middle class, workingman's bar, with his two good, long time friends, Sans and Isandro.

The bar they went too was located near the middle of the city of Plata Podrido. The bar was call Coliandro's. The bar was run by a nice, older Italian man, with a shady past. Though, given the secrets of the city. No one cared about such secrets, as long as the people in question behaved themselves, while on the island.

All three men were sitting at the bar counter. Hernan was in the middle, with Sans to his right, and Isandro to his left. All three of them were each having a bottle of moderately priced beer.

And Sans and Isandro could tell that something serious was on Hernan's mind.

Meanwhile, Hernan was in deep thought, as he contemplated the situation between his family and the Lovelace household. He thought, 'Okay. I can see some of the similarities, between Roberta and I. But, there are not that many.'

'Besides the gender differences, Roberta can be so... Repressed... Well, not right now, but she use too... That repression was likely one of the reasons she went off the deep end, after Diego was murdered. That, intense misplaced guilt, and extreme lack of sleep.'

'On the other hand, I try to be open about everything, except for my past... Though, now that I think about it. I could probably be as bad as she is. Or, at least close to it. And that scares the hell out me.'

'Though, we both like tequila. And am just drinking a beer, because I don't want to get anywhere drunk, for the sake of my family. Because I have to be a role model for my family... Just like she use to try to present being a role model for Garcia, when he was a child. And we both prefer to be polite. And we can dish out the ass-kicking like no tomorrow.'

'Then, there is Maria. She is intelligent, kind, and polite. Just like I would guess that Garcia is. And Maria only prefers to be a housewife because she like raising our three children, and I am able to make enough for the five of us to live comfortably on.'

'I am sure that Maria has could take care of herself, and our kids, if she needed to. Fortunately, she does not. Because I am here.'

'Damn it... I guess there are some similarities for both Maria, and I, towards Garcia and Roberta...'

'And I still have to figure out how to explain to my wife that we are gender swapped counterpart individuals to two characters, from another reality, that are works of fiction in our reality. But, are very real, with Roberta current live in our very town, in our very reality...'

'I sounds like a lunatic, just thinking about it...'

'Also, I have no idea how these revelations will effect our kids. Once they find out.'

'I have seen the various series. I have read those insane stories. I know the insanity I just accidentally drew the attention of. And I just concerned about the welfare of my family. I know I could survive it. But, I am worried about those I love.'

'Though, on the bright side, I don't have to worry about someone trying to come after my family and I, in an attempt to hurt Roberta. Because anyone whom knows Roberta's reputation and abilities, would not knowingly cross that woman. And I am no slouch either, in the revenge department.'

Sans then broke Hernan's train of thought, by asking, in spanish, “So Hernan, what is on your mind?”

Isandro commented, in spanish, “It must be something important.”

Hernan admitted, in spanish, “Actually, several things are on my mind, right now.”

Hernan thought, 'I better change the subject. Because, I really don't feel like talking about this.' He questioned, “So, how is married life treating the both of you?”

Sans answered, “Emily is doing fine.”

Isandro said, “Grace is very happy. Now, how about you and Maria?”

Hernan thought, 'I have never lied to my two friends here. And I will not start now.' He stated, “We hit a rough patch.”

Isandro asked, “What happened?”

Hernan said, “Just someone from our past showed up.”

Isandro inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “The cartel hasn't returned to town?”

Hernan quickly said, “No.”

Isandro mentioned, “Good. Speaking of which. I was pissed off at you, for a little while, because you didn't tell us what happened, until after it was all over.”

Sans said, “Yea. We are a team... Or, at least we were.”

Hernan stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Listen guys. I just didn't want to involve you two. They learned about me. You two are still off their radar.”

Isandro said, “Fine. So, who is this person that showed up?”

Hernan coyly responded, “I guess you could say the person is relative. I would rather not get into it, tonight.” He thought, 'And I don't want to drag you into my mess.'

San offer, “Okay. Though, keep in mind. We are here when you are ready to talk to us.”

Isandro said, “We are more than happy to hear about anything you have to say.”

Hernan said, in a slightly happily tone of voice, “I know.”

Isandro asked, “Say. You haven't see Pedro around, Hernan?”

Sans mentioned, “Yea. When we could make it to his movies nights, they were fun.”

Hernan thought, 'I cannot tell them that Pedro, and his friend, Matthew, got fed up with every thing that was happening to them. That they somehow got a small, hand held device, that lets them travel the multiverse. And they are no longer in this reality... I need to keep this simple, but sweet.'

Hernan said, “I heard he left town.”

Sans mentioned, “That is what the guys at the police station said.”

Isandro replied, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “Oh well. If he shows back up. We will have some more fun with him.”

Hernan honestly commented, “That is something I am hoping for myself.”

Hernan, Isandro, and Sans, then continued talking, and have fun being in each others company.

And while Hernan kept his secrets, he and his two friends had a good time that evening.

An hour later, the three of them said their goodbyes to each other, for the night. And they paid their bill, left a tip, headed out of the bar, and to the parking lot, were their cars were parked. Once they were in their cars, they each headed back to their homes, where their spouses, and for Hernan, his kids, were waiting for them. And since each of them only had two beers, over the course of two hours, all three of them were fine to drive home, that evening.

(_)

Reality, unknown. Date, unknown. Place, unknown, but a place with an Earth light atmosphere. Time, some time at night.

As Pedro and Matthew stood side by side, with Pedro to Matthew's right side, the next thing Pedro and Matthew knew, they were in a small, twenty by twenty, feet square clearing, that was surrounded by stacks of metal cargo crates. Each crates varied in sizes, from small, to large. But, all the crates were stacked together, at least fifteen to twenty feet high.

Though, there paths from the clearing, between the crates. These paths were three feet wide. And there was bright light coming from over the crates, that provided enough ambient light to see with. With the light coming from a single direction, to their left.

The temperature was comfortable. Not to warm, not to cool.

Pedro put away his reality device, into a pocket, as he looked up, above the crates. Even with the lighting, which was coming from a single direction, Pedro saw a clear sky and stars above Matthew and himself.

Pedro noticed, as he thought, 'Wherever we are, it is night. And from the feel on the bottom of my shoes we are on either pavement, or concrete. I get the feeling we are in the middle of supply depot. But, it is too dark to see the labeling on the crates. And I am not going to try to break into one of these crates. So, I don't know what type of depot this is.'

Pedro then strained his hearing, but he heard nothing, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, either this place is closed for the night. Or, the high walls of these crates are blocking out any sounds of machinery in the distances.'

'Given those lights, over the crates, are clearly artificial, and coming from a specific direction, I think someone here is still at work. Though, I am not going to complain, because they provide enough light for us to see with... Still, my instincts are telling me to be on guard.'

While Pedro and Matthew continued to look around, Matthew said, “Where are we?”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he stated, “I don't know. I wasn't really thinking that clearly when I teleported us.”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he deadpanned, “And you preach don't drink and drive. What about don't drinking and teleporting?”

Pedro retorted, in a sheepish manner, “Ah... Live and learn...” He then continued, in a more calm tone of voice, “But, I am still fairly sober. I was just in such a good mood that I wasn't clearly thinking.”

Matthew replied, “Okay. Though, this is getting to be a bad habit on your part.”

Pedro admitted, “I know. And that being said. I don't want to be unarmed here.” He then knelt down on the group.

Matthew looked down to watch what Pedro was doing.

Pedro immediately pulled out his semi-automatic pistol, and he set it on the ground. He then pulled out full ammo magazine from his shoulder holster, under where his pistol went, below his left armpit.

There were two slots under his pistol holder, on his holster, where spare ammo magazines for his pistols went. One was empty due to him giving Roberta one of his spare ammo magazines.

Pedro picked up his pistol, changed out the empty ammo magazine with the fully loaded one, with the empty ammo magazine set on the group. Next, set his pistol back onto the ground, by the empty ammo magazine.

Pedro pulled out a box of ammo, from a pocket. He opened it and pulled out seven forty-five caliber rounds. After which, he closed the box, and put the box back in the pocket it had been in. Pedro loaded the empty ammo magazine, with the seven bullets he had pulled out from the ammo box.

Pedro picked up the spare, loaded ammo magazine, and he placed it in a slot, in his shoulder holster, under where his pistol went.

Pedro thought, 'Now that I think about it. If this turns ugly, I could use some help.' He looked up at Matthew, as he continued his thought, 'And Matthew might be able to help.'

Pedro then noticed that Matthew was looking down at him.

Pedro thought, 'Good. Now, to make my offer.' He pulled up the bottom of his right pants legging to show his revolver in its ankle holster. He offered, “Do you want my Chief's Special? I think you might need it.”

Matthew responded, “In this situation. I am glad you taught me how to use a gun. So yea. I could use a pistol, right now.”

Pedro commented, “And it was fun teaching you. You are a good student.”

Matthew replied, “Thank you.”

Pedro pulled out his chief's special, a five round, snubnosed revolver, that used thirty-eight special caliber bullets.

Pedro looked up at Matthew, as handed it Matthew. Pedro inquired, “Would you like a speedloader, or two, as well?”

Matthew took the revolver. The hammer of the five round revolver was not cocked, but the trigger was double-action, so it could still be fired by pulling back the trigger. As such, Matthew took no chances. He held it in his right hand, by the grip, with his right trigger finger on the trigger guard, while he pointed the end of the barrel of the pistols away form them.

Matthew looked back down at Pedro, as he said, “Nah. If it gets that bad, we will just teleport out of here.”

Pedro complemented, “Good idea.” He then rolled down his pants leg. He picked up his semi-automatic pistol with his right hand. He then stood up straight. Next, he pointed his pistol away from both of them, while he placed his right trigger finger on the trigger guard. After which, he pulled back the slide, and release it, with the hammer cocking back, and round going into the chamber the pistol.

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he stated, “Okay. Let's see what this place is all about.”

Matthew looked up, above the crates, as he commented, “Well, all the lighting it coming from the direction to our left. So, I suggest we quietly head that way.”

Pedro looked up at well. He then looked down at Matthew, as Matthew look at him.

Pedro said, “I will take point. You follow behind me. We will take this slowly and carefully. So, try to be as quiet as possible.”

Matthew casually replied, “I wouldn't have it any other way.”

Pedro took point, as they slowly made their way between the crates, while they followed the light above them. With Matthew quietly following a few feet behind Pedro.

The two men slowly made their way through the paths between the crates, while keeping their pistols pointed upward, with their trigger fingers resting against the trigger guards of their weapons.

Though, to follow the light, they had to make a few turns, at various clearings.

About ten minutes later, they found break in the crates, that lead to the open tarmac beyond the crates, with the light coming from that direction.

The break was created by several large crate creating a topless out alcove, with a stack of small crate, three feet high, six feet side, and six feet deep, between the large crates, but set so that there were three feet while paths on both side of the small stack of crates, between the large stacked crates, to the outside.

Pedro was still standing in the shaded path, beside the large crates, near the small crates, which were to his right.

Pedro turned Matthew, whom was standing right behind him.

Pedro quietly said, “Get behind the crates, and crotch down. We will should have a good view of what is going on.”

Matthew just nodded once towards Pedro, in acknowledgment.

Pedro thought, with delight, 'It is always nice to deal with someone who knows when to stay quiet.'

Pedro then turned back to the break, as he quickly walked over to the other side of the crates. He then quickly crouched down behind the crates, as he looked over, out into the field.

Matthew did the same, as he crouched down to Pedro's right side, while he also looked out into the field.

Both men had their heads held just high enough over the small stack of crates, to see out into the field. With Matthew being to Pedro's right side.

The lighting they saw allowed them to clearly see the field of concrete in front of them.

In the far distance, of a few kilometers, to both their right and left, they saw walls of stacked crates that went as far as they could see.

But, what they saw in front of them that took them by surprise.

In front of them, about two kilometers away, was the entrance to a large, aerial style hanger.

The hanger was the size and shape of a very large, old blimp hanger, that could have held several large passenger blimps.

The hanger had two very large entrances, with a curved, half cylinder shape, that rang down the sides walls, from the top, in a crescent shaped curve.

Fortunately, the light came from several dozen flood lights installed in, around, and on top of the hanger.

This allowed Pedro and Matthew to see the white, Imperial Star Destroyer, with its landing gear down, sitting on the concrete, hanger floor. The large, while ship completely fit inside the hanger, with room to spare. The front point of the wedge of the white Star Destroyer was facing out of the entrance, towards them.

Also, they could see industrial machines at work, both in and around the hanger. Such as forklifts and industrial cranes, which were in use moving various crates.

The two men continued to look at the hanger in front of them, as Pedro commented, “Okay. That is one big hanger.”

Matthew said, “And that is an Imperial Star Destroyer.”

Pedro flatly asked, “I know...” He then continued in a more concerned tone of voice, “What the hell did we just stumble into?”

Matthew then noticed something else, as he responded, “I don't know. Though, take a closer look at who... Or, should I say what? Is manning. And what they are doing. It was you whom showed me those OVAs, so are those?

Pedro looked more closely as well, as he stated, with worry in his tone of voice, “Yea... They are boomers.”

The two men saw several hundreds boomers, during various tasks. Most of the boomers were either combat boomers, or battle boomers. With the combat boomers outnumbering the battle boomers, by ten combat boomers for everyone one battle boomers.

Though, the closest boomers were about two hundred meters from them.

Among the various tacks the two man saw the blue humanoid combat boomers during. They saw the combat boomers the cabs of forklifts and the industries cranes, as they used their vehicles to move the crates around.

In the distance, Pedro and Matthew even saw the boomers using forklifts to move crates up and down ramps, and into the various cargo holds of the belly of the Star Destroyer.

On some ramps, the two men saw boomers moving crates out of the Star Destroyer. On other ramps, the two men saw boomers loading crates into the Star Destroyer.

Meanwhile, the larger, brown battle boomers, with their weapon lances on their right arms, were standing at varying intervals, of distance, in and around the large hanger.

Pedro and Matthew continued looked over the crates, at the boomers, as Pedro stated, “I think the only ones here, besides us, are the boomers.”

Matthew commented, with slight terror in his tone of voice, “Well, this is the first time I have seen boomers in person.”

Pedro responded, in a concerned tone of voice, “Same here. And even at this distance, they are scary.”

Matthew mentioned, “Well, at least, the closest boomers are two hundred meters away, and they have their backs turned from us.”

Pedro stated, “That is still too close to me.”

Matthew inquired, “I can agree with that. Now, since you're the fanboy here. What types of boomers are we looking at?”

Pedro answered, “The blue, human sized boomers are combat boomers. Right now, they jobs seem to be used as laborers. And the larger, brown boomers are battle boomers, whom seemed to be assigned to guard duty. But, don't kid yourself. Those things are walking terminators.”

“Both those types of boomers have built in arsenals of various types of weaponry. With each of those blue combat boomers being able to take out a squad of soldiers, from back home. And those brown battle boomers are basically walking tanks.”

“Also, both those types boomers have hover jets on the back of their backs, and for the combat boomers, their legs, that allow them to hover along the ground at high speeds. And though, while their hover jets are not designed to let them fly high into the air, they can do assisted jumps, with those hover jets, that allow them traverse high terrain very quickly.”

Matthew questioned, “I will keep that in mind. So, who could be doing this? Could it be Chang from the past?”

Pedro stated, “No. During Book Two, Chang preferred to keep all his boomers at his tower, Roanapur. Or, her tower, at the time.”

Matthew commented, “Well, somebody organization all this. And this is one hell of an operation, which would likely impress both Garibaldi and Chang.”

Pedro said, “I know. And I don't have a clue as to who put this together.”

A thought then occurred to Pedro, as he mentally reflected, 'But, given the direct light, I think we can see what is on these crates.'

Pedro then looked around at the crates. The lighting from the flood lights allow him to see the text on the sides of the crates. And what Pedro saw both surprised and worried him.

While Pedro did not know most of the languages on several of the crates. He recognized many of the symbols. And he saw crates with language symbols from Star Wars Imperials, Farscape Peacekeepers, Babylon Five Earthforce in english text, Star Trek Klingon, Star Trek Romulan, crates with the Genom brand and japanese text on them. Along with several other symbols, on various crates, he recognized from other various fiction realities he had knew of.

Then, the text on one of the large crates in front of him, caught his eye. The large crate was from Babylon Five Earthforce crate. The english text stated, '52mm Plasma Pulse Cannon Assembly'.

Pedro thought, with concern, 'If I remember my B Five canon correctly, those are the large, fifty-two millimeter plasma pulse cannon that are placed on Earthforce Omega Class Destroyer... Oh hell... Each of those cannons pack a hell of a sustained punch that even the deflector shields of that Star Destroyer, in front of us, would notice.'

Pedro eyes widened, as he realized, with worried, 'We are in in a multiversal weapons depot. Just by being here, we are in some serious trouble.'

Pedro turned to look back at the boomers, back in the field, as he said, “Judging from what is said, on the Earthforce crates, and other languages. I think these crates are full of weapons and weapon components from across the multiverse. And not just hand held weapons. The large Earthforce crate to our right, is the assembly for a plasma pulse cannon for an Omega Class Earthforce. This is some serious ordnance.”

Matthew looked at the Earthforce create to their right. He then turned back to look at the boomers in the distance, as he commented, “Well, we have surely stumbled into something big. Do you think this could be their main base?”

Pedro stated, “If it was, they could still raise a whole lot of hell. But, I don't think so. I think that star destroyer, parked in there, is used as a supply transport to somewhere else. With the hanger being camouflage for the Star Destroyer.

Matthew said, “And with reality traveling technology, they can just teleport Star Destroy somewhere else in the multiverse. Even in space. To add to that. With the hyperdrive engines on that ship, someone can teleport it to another reality, in space, and then use the hyperdrive engines to head to another location in that reality. Thus, making the ship even more difficult to track.”

Pedro commented, “Yea. And it can come and go from here. In and out. With no one else being the wiser.”

Matthew inquired, “Should we return to your island, and tell the others? Because, this is very important. This is too big for the two of t us to handle.”

Pedro flatly stated, “No, on both counts. If we return to the island, they may follow us there. And from what I see here. Which is probably just a minor supply depot for whomever is behind this. There is a literally army of boomers. A star destroyer. And likely enough weapons and ordnance in these crates to frag a planet, a few times over.”

“I do not think Chang and the others could handle this kind of heat. And I am certainly not going to risk my homeworld, let alone, my home town, by immediately returning from here, to there. If we did so, we run the risk them tracking us to my home reality.”

Matthew inquired, “So, do you plan to keep running?”

Pedro answered, “No. I do eventually plan to return to my home. What I meant is that we will only return to my home reality, after a few dozen reality jumps. And only after I am sure we are not being track by those in charge of this.”

Matthew asked, “Okay. And why don't you want to tell the others?”

Pedro responded, “Because, unlike you and I. Chang and the others like to stick their noses into things they shouldn't. Especially, Revy, River, and Annie. And as I said before, I don't think they can handle a frontal assault of this magnitude.”

“On the other hand, the two of us know better. Since we have no way of knowing who is behind this. And given how big this operation clearly is. We are going to leave in a minute. And we with luck we will just put this behind us. And we won't mention it to the others.”

Matthew said, “I can see your points. And I can agree to those points.”

Pedro replied, “Good.”

Just then, both men saw a brown battle boomer, that was two hundred meters away from in front of them, turn in their direction.

The battle boomer saw them, as it pointed its right lance weapon, with its gatling gun, and bazooka house in the lace weapon, at them. The battle boomer then used its left hand to grip its right lance weapon, to steady it, as the boomer's back hover jets roared to life.

The boomer then started hovering towards Pedro and Matthew, at high speed.

Pedro said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh hell. We have been spotted.”

As the boomer approached them, Matthew stated, “Our pistols are shit against that thing.”

Pedro swiftly replied, “I know.”

Pedro immediately flipped the hammer safety on with his right thumb. Next, he holstered his weapon, in the shoulder holster under his left armpit.

Matthew requested, with desperation in his tone of voice, “Get us out of here.” He then moved a closer to Pedro.

Pedro hastily said, “Working on it.” He then pulled out his reality device. Next, he turned to Matthew, to see that his friend was couching right beside him, to his right side.

While Pedro didn't so much as think of a specific time and place to go to. What he did think, as he press the red button on the reality device in his right hand, was for them to head to someplace festive, happy, and safe.

The two men then instantly disappeared just before the boomer reached their position.

(_)

Reality, unknown. Date, unknown. Place, a spacestation floating in an unknown location in space. Time, unknown.

The gravity on the spacestation was Earth standard. And the atmosphere in the spacestation was mostly dry air, with the same proportions of oxygen, carbon dioxide, and argon, as on Earth. With the air pressure being equal to sea level on Earth.

Inside a secret, though large, spacestation, was the office of the politically appointed manager of the station.

Seated in a large, cushioned, office chair, behind the desk, was a fair skinned man with short blond hair. He had a moderately heavy physical built that was muscular, but this was hidden due to the green business suit he wore. The man also wore sunglasses.

The desk itself appear to be a large oak desk, darkly stained, with shelves on the back sides of it. The top of the desk, by the chair, had a monitor that was a touch screen.

There were no chaired in front of the desk.

The only light in the room came a small electric lamp, on the lower right corner of the desk, to the man sitting behind the desk. The lamp used a that single soft yellow, incandescent bulb.

Due to this only source of light, except for the desk itself, the rest of the vary large, open room was shrouded in darkness. With the high walls, distance to the side walls giving those by the desk a feeling of being alone in the darkness.

The wall behind the main was a solid, clear window, that allow the man to look out at the vastness of the starry night sky.

But, the man had precautions taken when installing that window. There were also two force fields on the window. One on the outside, and one on the inside, with both always left on. And should a crack in the window appear, or either of the force fields failed, emergency blast doors, from the outside, would immediately close the window, thus keeping the room pressurized from space.

The man in the green suit then heard as three sets of footsteps approached him, from the entrance to his office that was several feet away, in the darkness.

As the three people came into the light, the man took a look at them, as they came to a stop, while standing in front of his desk.

To the man's left, was a slender woman, with a youthful appearance. She had dark skin, and short white hair, that was cut at the neck like. The woman wore a purple and white federation police officer's uniform. Included in the uniform was a purple and white poncho, that was draped around the woman's neck and shoulder.

To the man right, in the middle of the group was a middle-aged man in fair physical shape. The man had fair skin, and short red hair. The man wore a while, short white coat, that was button up, along with light blue pants, and shoes.

And to the right of the group was a cybertronian that looked like a clone of Arcee, except this cybertronian had yellow colored armor, with red highlights.

The man in the white lab coat turn to the white haired woman, as he commented, in a playful tone of voice, in english, “So Nechla. How are your the people skills coming along?”

Nechla Geeze looked over at man with red hair, as she sarcastically asked, in english, “Have any experiments gotten loose lately, Anton?”

The man behind the desk, barked, in english, “Enough!”

The three people standing turned their attention back to the man at the desk.

Nechla questioned, “So Gomez, I see you summoned us here. But, I don't see the Xanatos family anywhere?”

Gomez said, “I will not disturb the Xanatos family, unless it is important. This is not that important.”

Nechla did not show any outward expression, to the veiled insult, but she grimly thought, with disgust, 'But, we are not so important, as those savage humans...' She forced herself to remain inwardly calm down, as she mentally reminded herself, 'Still, I just have to remember that I only have to wait a little while longer, and I will be ready to put my plan into action.'

The cybertronian calmly asked, in in english, “Why have you summon us, Gomez?”

Gomez thought, 'Finally, a mature question.' He answered, “The reason you all here, Jhiaxus, is that I wish to inform you of this.”

Gomez punched a button on his touch screen, with his right hand, as he thought,
thought, 'There is no point in having a command structure, if the command structure is kept out of the loop.'

Suddenly, a colored, holographic, detailed, two dimensional picture, facing the three people that was standing, started to play. The hologram was located on the left top corner of the desk, from Gomez.

The hologram was also at one twelfth scale, to what was actually recorded.

The people watched the video play, with was clearly recorded from the GUI screen that was a boomer's eyes, as the boomer turned around, seeing the two men, looking at the boomer, while couching behind a low pile of crates. The boomer then charged at the men. And finally the two men suddenly disappearing.

The video was sit on a loop, so when it ended, it just restarted at the beginning of the recording.

As the video play, Gomez stated, “Local time. This morning, one of our battle boomers, at a remote supply depot, in another reality, took this footage.”

Gomez then pressed a button on his touch screen, that paused the video, when the boomer got a close up of the faces of the two men.

Gomez calmly said, “It is clear that we have a couple of trespassers on our property. Though, I want your opinions on this, before I take action. Given all three of you have an eye for detail, I want to know what you each think of what those two men were doing there? And why?

Nechla stated, “These two are obviously spies.”

Doctor Anton Sevarius commented,”I doubt that.”

Jhiaxus replied, “I agree with, Anton.”

Nechla said, in annoyed tone of voice, “You always do.”

Jhiaxus ignored Nechla insulting tone of voice, as she commented, “The reason I agree with Anton, is that if you look at their expressions, you can clearly see surprised expressions on the faces of those two humans. Also, they do not have any powerful weapons, nor sensor equipment, on them. Finally, they are wearing civilian clothing. They are clearly not a spy team sent for reconnaissance. They are likely two fools that accidentally ended up there, realized they were in over their head, and disappeared by jumping realities.”

Nechla asked, “Are we sure they are reality travelers?”

Gomez said, “Yes. We picked up a signature of a reality jump.”

Nechla questioned, “Then, why don't we just follow them, and capture at their destination point.”

Gomez stated, “We already know when, where, and what reality they went to. And if sent a squad of boomers to follow them to their next destination, it would only lead to more trouble for all of us. For right now, there are only two people that have a clue about us. I do not want to arouse the suspicions of others.”

Anton spoke up, in a slightly hammy tone of voice, “Then, what do you have in mind, oh green suited one?”

Gomez coyly replied, “Something more subtle.”

Anton guessed, “A one man operation?”

Gomez said, “Something like that.”

Jhiaxus asked, in a casual tone of voice, “Not that I really care, one way, or another. But, what do you plan on doing about those two men?”

Gomez calmly answered, “Find them. And find out why they were there. Beyond that, depends on their answers. And if they are honest in their answers.”

Jhiaxus complimented, “Wise as ever, Gomez.”

Gomez calmly replied, “Thank you. And you all are dismissed.”

The three people that were standing, turned around, and walked into the darkness, towards the doors automatic sliding doors they had used to enter the room from.

A few seconds later, Gomez heard the office door close behind, signally his three subordinates had lead the room.

Gomez thought, with concern, 'I am beginning to think that Nechla is becoming slightly, mentally unstable. Though, losing her high ranking positioning in the federation government, due to Lee's stories. And being force to work with those she views as primitive savages, has got to grate on her ego. I think in a few days, I will order her to take some psychological counseling. She is too valuable to just let go. So, I will try to salvage the situation with her.'

'Though now, I have to deal with the matter at hand.'

Gomez swiveled his chair to his left, towards some of the shadows in his office. He stated, “You can come out, now.”

Gomez then watched as a man in black power armor, that looked like a cross between a Knight Saber hardsuit, and Ironman powersuit, walked out of the shadows, towards him.

The helmet and face plate looked more like an Ironman style. While the contours of body of the armor was more reminiscent of the Knight Saber hardsuits. Though, from the masculine build of the armor shape, this powersuit was clearly build, and was piloted, by a man, and not a woman.

The black armored man's face plate was closed over his face, and his armor was completely sealed from the outside. Save for the filters and vents needed to breath, and do various other things. Though, the suit could be vacuum sealed at a moments notice, with the person inside being able to breath the regulated air for a number of days. With his other life support systems keeping him alive for that long. Until he reached an friend atmospheric environment.

The black armored man came to a stop ten feet from Gomez. With him being just close enough to the lamp on the table, for the light to fully show on his face plate and the front of his armor.

The combination of the black armor reflecting against the light, and the dark shadows behind the armored person, allowed the black armored person to give off an eerie vibe.

Gomez calmly asked, “Did you pay attention to the meeting?”

In a deep synthesized voice, that was modulated by the speakers in the helmet of the armor, the black armored man flatly answered, in english, “Yes.”

Gomez ordered, “I want you to go after the two men on the holographic screen. I have already uploaded the data to your armor, of where, when, and what reality they are going too. That will be a good start. But, I realize, given where they went too, you might not be able to immediately capture them. So, take you time. Capture them when the opportunity presents itself. And when you catch them, bring them back here, for questioning.”

The power armored man responded, in his modulated voice, “Whatever you want, sir.”

Gomez stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Keep in mind, I want them back alive, and in a state they can answer our questions. Your suit has the technology to track them, and retrieve them. I want this done quietly. If it looks like it will cause too much trouble to catch them in one reality. Wait until they jump to another reality, where they are more alone, for your opportunity to catch them.”

The man in the armor stated, “Yes sir.”

Gomez reminded the man, “Do not forget all I have done for you.”

The man replied, “I never do, sir.”

Gomez said, “Good. Because I am putting a lot of trust in you, by giving you this mission. I do not want you to cause a massacre, in you pursuit of them.

The man responded, “I have always prefer intimidation over outright violence.”

Gomez said, “Which is why I am giving you this mission. Though, I will contact my other agents, in case they run across them.”

The man stated, “Of course. That would be a wise course of action to take.”

Gomez inquired, “When do you believe you will be ready to leave?”

The man answered, “Right now, sir. After you mentioned you had transferred the data to my armor, I pulled up the information, and started procedures to follow them. I have just gotten a lock on the coordinates you gave me.”

Gomez thought, while be mildly impressed, 'I do enjoy competent help, that are ready to do the job, when the request is presented.'

The man went onto say, “And I agree, given the destination point they went. Retrieving them there could be difficult.”

Gomez replied, “Use your best judgment.”

The armored man stated, “I will do so, sir. Though, given your parallel time regulations, I do not know when I will return. Also, I may end up chasing them into our past. Though, I will be careful.”

Gomez stated, “As I said. Take the time you need. And use your best judgment. But, if you find them in a situation could compromise our organization by you getting involved, back off, and capture them later.”

The man replied, “Understood, sir.”

Gomez said, “Good. Now go.”

Gomez then watched as the black armored man suddenly disappear.

Gomez then turned to face his desk, as he press another on his touch screen, which turned off the holograms of Pedro, and Matthew.

Gomez then turned pressed other key to turn off his lamp light.

Next, as he was now bathed in darkness, as he turned around, to stare at the window, and the stars outside.

Gomez leaned back in his chair, as he looked at the night sky. He mentally reflected, 'Sometimes my subordinates need to be reminded a few times. Such as the orders they were given. And that man is one such subordinate. Still, so far he had done a good job on his missions. So, I will give him the benefit of the doubt. And if I lose him, it will only be a small loss.'

'Now, I have much to think about, on other matters.'

'I have a few things that I need to think about, and work on, before I move forward on my plans. And I have a feeling that I may have to move up my time table on my plans.'

'If the enticement plan does not work, I will have to move onto plan B.'

'I probably should can contact the love birds, in their castle nest, and tell them to have their family start to prepare for their part in my plans, if the current part of our plan falls through.'

'Though, I don't think they will mind. For them, plan B, will be a lot of fun, with little risk.'

'But, the most important part of my plans are that I do not want us to be caught flatfooted. And this whole situation, with those two trespassers, has Murphy's Law rewritten all over it...'

'Still, I need to think over all of this, in my head, before I do anything. I have a few agents, still out of other missions, that I might want to include in this current plan, or plan B. So, I may have to wait a little while, before I continue forward with my plans.'

'Though, even with those minor inconveniences, I have found that patience truly is a virtue.'

Gomez then spend some time musing over his future schemes, in the darkness of his office.

(_)

Reality, an alternate Earth. Date, some time in the future. Place, somewhere in North America. Time, evening, just after dark.

The next thing Pedro and Matthew knew, they were in a dark, empty alleyway, with only a the light coming from nearby windows, providing illumination.

As the stood up, they looked over at each other, they also noticed that the temperature was cool, but not cold. And that it was night time.

Matthew commented, “That was close.”

Pedro pocketed his reality device, as he replied, with relief in his tone of voice, “I know.”

Matthew asked, “So, where are we?”

Pedro answered, “I didn't have a lot of time to think. So, I thought of going somewhere festive, happy, and safe.”

Matthew said, “Sometimes keeping it simple is best is the best approach.”

Matthew then held out Pedro Chief's Special, with his right hand, while keeping the barrel of the gun pointed away from either of them, while he kept his trigger finger on the trigger guard.

Matthew offered, “Here is your gun back.”

Pedro gently, and carefully took his gun, as he replied, “Thanks.”

Pedro leaned down, pulled up his right pants legging, holster the pistol in the holster on the outer side of his right black boot, he rolled down his right pants legging, and stood back up straight.

Pedro looked back at Matthew, with Matthew continued to look at him.

It was then that Pedro and Matthew began to notice up beat jazz music being played in the air, along with the sounds of celebration coming from the end of the alleyway that had lots of light.

Matthew commented, “I don't know about you. But, that music sounds very festival and happy.”

Pedro replied, “I agree.”

When they turned to look at that end of the alleyway, the saw party goers walking, or standing around, as they talking.

Matthew commented, “There is clearly a large party going on, nearby.”

Pedro suggested, “Then, let's join in.”

Matthew said, “I couldn't agree more.”

Both men then walked out of the alleyway, and onto a street. They came to a stop, at the exit of the alleyway, as they looking around, at the large street scene in front of them.

They saw that the buildings on both sides of the street were of an older fashion. Most of the buildings were two, or three stories tall. With some of the buildings being four, or even five stories tall. Most of the buildings had balconies and porches. In addition, there were lights strung up on the buildings. And the music was coming from speakers from the buildings around the street.

Also, there were party goers everywhere. Men and women. Human and various aliens. On the streets, on the balconies, on the porches. And while the buildings were old-fashioned, the party goers were wearing modern clothing. Though, a number of the people were in various types of costumes.

Pedro then realized where and when they were. He stated, “I am not sure on the exact date, and reality. But, I know went and where we are. We are in New Orleans, in the French Quarter, during Mardi Gras. And this party is held at the end of February to the beginning of March. Depending on when the dates for Ash Wednesday and Easter falls on a given year.”

Matthew and Pedro continued to look around, at the party in front of them, as Matthew complimented, “Nice pick for a destination.”

Pedro replied, “Thanks.”

Matthew stated, “I prefer to the cool, dry air of spring time, as it just begins, than the hot, humid air of summer time.”

Pedro commented, “I can appreciate that. Though, I am more of an autumn person, myself.”

Matthew rhetorically replied, “Who isn't?”

Pedro let out a small chuckle at Matthew's comment.

Pedro chuckle made Matthew crack a grin.

Matthew then noticed a group of three people, across the street, to his right, whom had weapons in holsters, on the right sides of their belts. And Matthew recognized who the people were.

Matthew commented, “I am not sure how to tell you. But, I think we are in a Star Trek reality... Though, that might now be a bad thing... Look to your right to see what I am talking about.”

Pedro looked in the direction that Matthew indicated. He saw a three person group. Two human men, and one vulcan woman, in Star Fleet security uniforms, with a phaser pistol holster the right side of each of Star Fleet members belts.

Pedro thought, 'Interesting. And those phasers are likely set to stun. Though, I don't want to test that.' He turned to Matthew, as he complimented, “Good eyes.”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he replied, “Thanks.”

Pedro commented, “From their uniforms and weapons, I would guess this is the Next Generation era.”

Matthew responded, “Actually, I would say this is after the Dominion War. After the DS9 series. Given that Star Fleet preferred not to have an open security presence on the streets, until Dominion War, and after. And I say it is after that war because people would not be partying this openly during the security measures used on Earth during that war.”

Pedro said, “That is a good point.”

Matthew commented, “And you know. Speaking of the DS9 series. I found it annoying, that given the DS9 series occasionally featured scenes dealing with New Orleans. That they did not show New Orleans during Mardi Gras. To show us how Federation people truly partied.”

Pedro stated, “I agree. It was annoying. Though, at least know, we have that answer in front of us.”

Matthew said, “I know. And I am looking forward to enjoying myself here.”

Pedro replied, “So am I.”

A thought then occurred to Pedro, as he mentally reflected, 'This might even been the same reality that Bob use to hang around at, in Book Three of Lee's stories. Considering he, or now she, started visiting DS9, after the Deep Space Nine series ended, which was also the end of the Dominion War.'

'And the Star Fleet security presence is a lesson on how wars can cause the loss of civilian liberties and rights. Though, the Federation has always been a soft police state. With no civilian weaponry allowed. Strict travel controls between worlds. And the phasing out of currency.'

'And while the Federation is technically a democracy. That can be easily controlled, by arranging who runs for the elections, and who counts the ballots. Which, given all the technology here, is likely electronic. So, rigging an election here could be as easy as a few keystrokes, on a computer.'

'The only reason they government is not so strict and openly tyrannical here, is they have access to more energy than they need. Replicators are abundant and can create food, tools, machine parts, etc. As needed. At a moments notice. And their advanced medicine keeps almost everyone healthy.'

'As long as everyone is happy and healthy, with a full stomach, and entertainment to keep the occupied. They don't care how they are ruled.'

'But, that also means, we have to be more careful. Though, as long as we are careful, we can still have some fun, while we stay here. Still, we cannot stay here long.'

Pedro said, “I have been thinking. Even with security here, if we don't make a scene, we should be fine. Though, I doubt we can stay here for long.”

Matthew replied, “I agree. We can have fun. But, we are going to have to leave in a few hours. Before someone gets wise about us.”

Matthew thought, 'Pedro, I am sure you realize how heavily regulated the Federation is. So, that is why you say we cannot stay long. And that is why I agree with you.'

Pedro stated, “Yes. We will find lodgings in our next jump. Besides, I always want to see why the locals call this Earth, at this time, paradise?”

Matthew commented, “Every Trekkie wants to find that out.”

Pedro responded, “Well, we now have the opportunity to do just that.”

Matthew agreed, “Yes. We do. Let's go see what's out here.”

Pedro chuckled a little, as he thought, 'I see you are quoting Picard's line, at the end the Encounter at Farpoint episode. You may be a bigger fan of Star Trek, than me, Matthew.' As he calmed down, he replied, “Yes. Let's find out.”

The two men then casually walked side by side, with Matthew to Pedro's right side, as they made their way into the crowded streets of the French Quarter, on New Orleans, in on the Federation planet of Earth.

(_)

At the moment, nearby, down the street from Pedro and Matthew, but heading their way, were two people walking down the street, with people around them celebrating Mardi Gras.

Despite appearances, the two people were Garcia Lovelace and Michael Garibaldi. But, to those that looked at them, they would see two very different people. That being Garcia was currently in her cursed female teenager. And Garibaldi was in her cursed six year old girl form.

Both of them were in their female forms. For Garcia is was because she did not want to risk cold water being slashed on her, during the party. While, Garibaldi did not have any clothing for her much older, larger, male form.

Though, Garcia was in her male clothing, which fit her in her female form. She had on a yellow turtleneck shirt, under an open, blue denim jacket. She also had on blue jeans, with men's boxer shorts under her pants, a brown leather belt, and black socks, over her black boots.

Garibaldi wore the clothing the Jusenkyo Guide had given her, for her smaller, younger, female form, while in the Jusenkyo Guide's home.

Garibaldi had on a simple yellow short sleeved t-shirt, and black cloth pants, with a drawstring at the waistline. And small black slippers that fit her feet.

Two of them had departed the Ranma Half reality, several hours ago, for this very reality, time, and place. With them leaving the amazon village, after they betrayed Lee to the amazons and took her reality device from her.

The two girls had already had a nice lunch where they planned. Then, the found a hotel that would allow them to have a room, with no questions asked. After spending an hour in that room, to get cleaned up, and rest a little. They, they headed out, to enjoy the party in the city. With both of them have a good time, together, as friends.

Presently, two girls were enjoying the festival as best they could. As they walked side by side with each other, with Garibaldi being to Garcia's right side.

As Jazz music played from speakers on the buildings, and the two girls walked through the crowds, while the two were mindful not to get separate from one another.

Garcia then noticed Garibaldi was smiling more than the situation warrants. She then realized, in thought, 'Oh yea. It is probably that.'

Garcia commented, in english, “I am glad you are happy with at least one part of this gender change curse.”

Garibaldi continued to smile, as she looked around her. She commented, in english, “I just found out, less than an hour ago. In the privacy of our suite's bathroom here, that when I change gender, I keep my full head of hair. And it is the same shade of brown, I use to have, before my hair turned white. And best of all, my hair is the same length in both forms. So, I can have control on how I wish to style my hair.”

Garcia replied, “Yes. I have to agree, that is very good for you.”

Garcia thought, 'We would be happy that the clerk we rented the room from to pity on us, and allowed us to have a room for the night, without IDs. Without him alerting the authorities. And with me paying him with one of my gold coins, while lying to him, by telling him, we are sisters and will be meeting our parents, next day.'

'I did not know if the clerk bought our story, or not. But, I am sure my gold coin bought his silence, for us.'

'And while the gold of my gold coins in my pocket are not worth anything here. My gold coins have historical value. With that clerk at the hotel we are staying at, recognizing that value.'

'At least the two bedroom suite was nice. And we both got a nice hot shower. With use being able to confirm we change back to men, with hot water. But, not too hot.'

'Though, we had to use cold water to return to our girl forms. Given, in this situation, we are likely going to get hit with cold water, and change into a girl, in full view of the public, and any cameras that are around. And even I know, that being accused of being a shapeshifter, at this point in time, on this Earth, would be a very bad idea.'

'Besides, Garibaldi did not having clothing for his male form.'

Just then, Garibaldi stated, “And meeting you as been good. We have only know each other for a few hours. But, I can already tell we are on our way to becoming great friends.”

Garcia said, “I agree. Thank you.”

Garibaldi went onto say, “You're welcome. And at least, for all this mess Lee has gotten us into. I have to thank Lee for giving my full head of hair back.”

Garcia said, “I will keep that in mind.”

Garibaldi commented, “And in our next, where we go someplace that gold is valuable. We will get some clothing for both our forms.”

Garcia stated, “I fully agree. And I don't mind spending my gold on such items, for the both of us.”

Garibaldi said, “Thank you.”

Garcia replied, “You're welcome.”

While they continued walking, Garcia began to look around, as she commented, “You know, this place is pretty fun.”

Garibaldi agreed, “Yes. It is. I just wish I had clothing for my male form. Then, we could have some real fun.”

Garcia teased, “So, you can have a drink?”

Garibaldi responded, in a slightly serious tone of voice, “Actually, I am a recovering alcoholic.” She thought, 'By a few decades. Still... Speaking of alcohol. Most of those around us are likely so drunk, or caught up in the partying, that they don't care about two girls talking about strange things. Of course, this is a Star Trek reality. And as such, it is hard to gauge what the locals consider strange.'

Garcia said, in a sober tone of voice, “Oh right. Sorry. That slipped mind my.” She thought, 'How embarrassing... To forget that about Garibaldi.'

Garibaldi shrugged, as she casually replied, “It is okay. Still, some dancing would be nice.”

Garcia inquired, “I didn't know you knew how to dance?”

Garibaldi responded, in a playful tone of voice, “What? You think my charm was only with my witty comments.”

Garcia let out a small laugh. She then said, “No.”

Garibaldi questioned, with a bit of curiosity in her tone of voice, “Not that I would care to dance with you. Because I am either way too young, or way too old, for you, in either of my forms. But, do you know how to dance?”

Garcia answered, in a slightly quiet tone of voice, “Yes. My mother taught me, when I was very young... Before she died...”

Garibaldi thought, with slightly annoyance towards herself, 'Now, I am the one that is forgetful. Still, I know what I need to say. Thought, it would be best not to also remind her of her father's death, as well.'

Garibaldi stated, in a calm, thought comforting tone of voice, “Well, look on the bright side. We both have seen enough to believe. And I know from first hand experience, that there is life after death. So hopefully, in a very long time, you will see her again.”

Garcia though, 'And my father, as well.' Garcia quietly said, “Yes. I hope so.”

Garibaldi thought, 'Now to put her in a better mood.' She said, in a slightly excited tone of voice, “Cheer up. We are here to have fun. That is why we decided to stay for the evening. Sure the gumbo we had at Sisko's, was good for lunch. And supper was pretty good. But, those were only the appetizer to the fun we can have tonight.”

Garcia responded, in a slightly happier tone of voice, “You're right.” She then joked, in a clearly happy tone of voice, “And girls just want to have fun.”

Garibaldi giggled, as she got the music reference. She then playfully warned, “Don't go there kid. It only leads to trouble. I know. I have a teenage daughter of my own.”

Garcia let out a laugh. She then replied, “That is why it's so funny.”

Garibaldi thought, 'At least she is happy again. Now, to have some fun.' Garibaldi asked, in a casual tone of voice, “I wonder if they still allow women to flash their boobs for beads, at this party?”

Garcia asked, with mild surprise in her tone of voice, “That actually happens?”

Garibaldi casually replied, “Oh yea. I have been to a few of the parties, myself. When I was young. And I saw those events, first hand, in the New Orleans, of my home reality.”

Garcia said, in a slightly worried tone of voice, “Still, I don't want to get arrested for staring at a woman's breasts.”

Garibaldi pointed out, in a casual tone of voice, “I doubt they are going to arrest a little girl, and a teenage girl, for looking at woman's breasts. So, as long as we avoid hot water, we should be fine.”

Garibaldi thought, 'Though, it would be bad if someone here thought were were changelings, like Odo's people. That would cause problems. Still, technically, we are very basic shapeshifters, that change gender, and age for me, depending on if we are splashed with hot, or cold water.'

Garcia teased, “You know, you are a very dirty old man.”

Garibaldi playfully retorted, “Well, right now, I am a dirty young girl.”

Garcia pointed out, “Still, you're married.”

Garibaldi gave Garcia a leering grin, which looked eerily cute on her little girl face, as she happily replied, “That doesn't mean I can't look. As long as I don't touch.”

Garcia could not help bit giggle a little at the Garibaldi's face, and Garibaldi's comment, for a few seconds.

Garibaldi dropped her grin, as she thought, 'Now to talk about something more serious.' She said, in a slightly serious tone of voice, “Now, as I said earlier today, at lunch. We have no IDs. So, we need to be careful not to attract attention. While we lucked out at the hotel. We don't want to end up captured by Star Fleet, or local authorities.” She mentally reflected, 'Especially, since I appear to be a child to them. And you are a teenager in both gender forms.'

Garcia immediately stopped giggling, as she understood what Garibaldi said. Garcia flatly replied, “I know. I know.” She then continued in a more playful tone of voice, “But, we can still have some fun.”

Garibaldi agreed, “True.”

Garcia thought, 'Though, now that you mention IDs. It might not be wise to stay her for the night. We will be sitting ducks in our sleep.'

Garcia suggested, “Also, I am having second thoughts about staying at the hotel we rented for the night. So, when we are ready to get some sleep, we will head to another reality, to find decent lodgings that don't care if we are young, and have no IDs.”

Garibaldi complimented, “Good idea. Too many things can go wrong, if we stay here too long.”

Garcia inquired, “I am glad you agree. So, what would you like to do, now?”

Garibaldi happily mused, “Hmm... I have a few thoughts on the matter.”

Garcia and Garibaldi continued their conversation, as they walked through the crowds of people, on the street.

(_)

At the moment, in an empty alleyway, on the same side of the French Quarter, as where the alleyway Pedro and Matthew had teleported into, but not the same alleyway, Roberta and Fabiola suddenly appeared.

Both women were in their maid outfits. With each of their outfits holding a small arsenal of weapons.

The two women had just come from the chinese amazon village in the Ranma Half reality, with them tracking Lee's reality device to the reality, time, and place, they were currently in.

The alleyway itself was mildly illuminated from the bright lights coming from the nearby buildings. This allowed the two women to clearly see each other, and around themselves.

Fabiola was the one holding the reality device in her right hand, and the tracking tablet in her left hand. She looked at her tracking tablet for a few seconds, to check to see if their prey had left. Which was not the case. She then turned to look her friend, and teacher, Roberta, whom was clearly not in a good mood.

Fabiola put the devices in her hands, into her her dress, as she thought, 'Roberta, you are clearly not happy. And now is probably the best time to do so. But first, there is some information, I need to inform her of, that should help get the reaction I want from'

Fabiola calmly said, in spanish, “We are in a Star Trek reality. If our tracker is correct, this is the same reality, as the one that Bob use to go too. During the same time period. A few years after the Dominion war. We are on Earth, in the North American city of New Orleans. The local time is nine thirty PM.”

Roberta turned to look at her student, Fabiola, as she commented, in a low tone of voice, in spanish, “Good job.”

Fabiola thought, 'I will give her credit, that she is trying to stay civil with me. Now, I hope she can listen to reason.' She stated, “Now, before we continued, we need to talk about something important, that pertains to you.”

Roberta growled, “What?”

Fabiola stated, “That. I didn't want to say anything, in front of the others, on Mars, nor Lagoon Island. And I am proud that you have kept you anger in check. Especially when you were talking to Cologne, a few minutes ago. Also, I will admit that being a bitch, for a while, can be fun. But, you have got to tone it down some, while we are here. We do not want to cause trouble here. Like we did on Mars, in the B Five reality.”

Roberta replied, in a cold tone of voice, that could chill the air around them, “Why?”

Fabiola looked Roberta in her eyes, and she continued to do so. Which given the feral look in Roberta's eyes, was not an easy task. Though, Fabiola was still able to find the courage to hold her ground, as she said, in a firm tone of voice, “Because if we start trouble here, the local authorities can instantly transport us both into holding cells. And these holding cells have forcefields, and walls, that can hold even you. And as they transport us, they can disable, and possibly even remove, our equipment. Including our weapons, and reality device. Which will leave us stranded and imprisoned in a foreign reality.”

Fabiola could see the ferocity leave Roberta's eyes, as the purple haired woman understood what Fabiola was saying, and thus, Roberta forced herself to calm down.

Fabiola thought, with relief, 'Good. She is listening to reason. I do not know what I would have done if she went the other way.'

Roberta admitted, in a calmer tone of voice, “You're right, Fabiola. We do need to go about this more discreetly, while we are here. In this reality. So, when did Lee and Garibaldi arrive here?”

Fabiola answered, “They arrived around noon, local time. So, they have about half a days headstart. But, I don't have a teleport signal of them leaving. So, they are still hear. Also, I loath reminding you. But, we are under orders, not to harm, nor kill, Garibaldi, unless necessary.”

Roberta flatly commented, “I could care less about that old man. One way, or another.”

Fabiola responded, “Me too. But still, it would be best if we bring him back unharmed. And we also need to bring Lee back alive. Unless you want to hear Revy throw another one of her temper tantrums.”

Roberta cracked a grin, as she commented, in an amused tone of voice,”It has been a while since I have seen Two-hands do one of those. Though, I see your point. We will bring Lee back, alive. I can do alive. Unbroken, I am not sure. But, alive, I can do.”

Fabiola replied, “That is all I ask, from you.”

Fabiola turned towards the alleyway entrance to the party going on in the French Quarter. She stated, “Still, if the music, and the commotion, are any indications, we are in New Orleans, during a massive party.”

Roberta stated, “Given the cool weather, it is likely late winter, and we are in the middle Mardi Gras.”

Fabiola looked over at Roberta, as she said, in a slightly more excited tone of voice, “That is even better. And if we are a little more subtle than we usually are, we can use the party as cover. So, when we find Lee and Garibaldi, we can snatch them up without anyone else being the wiser.”

Roberta complimented, “That is what I like about you, Fabiola. Even in stressful situations, you have a clear head.”

Fabiola responded, “Thank you. Now, let's take a deep breath, and then head out into the crowd, and look for, Lee, and Garibaldi.”

Roberta looked over at the entrance that lead to the French Quarter, as she commented, “Still, finding Lee and Garibaldi should not be too difficult. They will likely be the only two tightass men, in suits, whom are not inebriated.”

Fabiola giggled a little, at Roberta's comment. She then agreed, “Exactly.”

Roberta looked back over at Fabiola, as she cracked a feral grin. She said, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “Now, let us not waste anymore time. And let us renew our hunt.”

Fabiola shared Roberta's feral grin, as she happily replied, “I fully agree.”

Both women then turned towards the exit of the alleyway, that lead to French Quarter, and the throngs of people partying in that part of the city of New Orleans.

While they began walking towards the party, Fabiola to Roberta's right, as both women looked forward to finally finding, capturing, and punishing, their prey.

(_)

At the moment, in an empty, but well lit, alleyway, across the French Quarter, from the alleyway that Roberta and Fabiola were exiting, River, Daiyu, and Lee suddenly appeared.

The three women were looking at each other, in a group, as the had teleported into the Star Trek reality.

Fortunately, their arrival went unnoticed.

River was holding her reality device, in her right hand, while Daiyu and Lee were empty handed.

Lee was the first of the group to speak. She asked, in english, “So where, when, and what reality, are we, River?” She thought, 'Given you didn't want to tell us, until we got here.'

River pocketed her reality device, as she answered, in english, “To be honest, this is not the first reality that Pedro and Matthew came to, after leaving your home reality, Daiyu.”

Daiyu questioned, in english, “When, where, and what reality, was the first place they went too?”

River said, “They went to a remote planet in the Star Wars reality, that Annie is from. Around a few decades after Annie was originally kidnapped from that reality. But, they were only there for around fifteen minutes. I believe that they accidentally jumped there, ran into trouble, and immediately jumped to this reality. And since my tracking device was able to scan both jumps, while were are in Caracas, I decided to sidestep some potential problems, and come directly here, instead.”

Daiyu complimented, “That was very wise of you to take us here, instead of there. And this is the kind of intelligent thinking that I have come to expect from you. Good job, River.”

River replied, “Thank you.”

Daiyu commented, “You're welcome. That is the risk of reality travel. One must think clearly on what reality, when, and where, they want to go, when he, or she, uses their reality device. Or, that person runs the risk of ending up in a reality, place, and time, he, or she, doesn't really want to be at.”

Lee said, “That is true. In Book Three, I hinted that Bob had that problem a few times, when he was search the multiverse for a cure for Boris' cancer.”

Daiyu commented, “Yes. And along those lines, I must say that Boris looks hot as a woman.”

Lee responded, “Don't me. Thank Tex-Mex, for making Boris turn out to be a pretty boy as a teenage, in the Viva Youth omake. I just used that idea, and added a gender bent, adult twist, to B. Hell, I think the pretty boy joke for Boris was put in by Tex-Mex, before he forget to put Boris in the gender bending, Boys and Girls omake.”

Lee thought, 'And while I won't verbally admit it. And River, I know you will keep this to yourself. But, I gave Boris cancer as both an excuse to show how much his new friends cared for him, and as an excuse to have him under go the vat process, to cure the cancer, and be turned into a woman, whom then went by the letter, B.'

Lee then saw River nod once in agreement to Lee's thoughts on what she would, and wouldn't, do. And that she would keep Lee's secret.

Lee thought, 'Thanks, River.'

Daiyu stated, “I can see the logic in you doing so. And I don't mind what you did to me. In giving me gender bending abilities. Even I will admit that being a woman, sometimes, has its perks.”

Lee shrugged, as she casually said, “I know. And your actions in bed have proven that time and again. You as well, River.”

Daiyu and River could not help but smile at Lee's complimented.

River complimented, “Good one, Lee.”

Lee inquired, “Thank you, River. So, where are we, now?

River answered, “We are in the same Star Trek reality that you wrote about, Lee?”

Lee questioned, with slight curiosity in her tone of voice, “The Star Trek reality where Bob use to go to?

River responded, “Yes. To be specific, we are a few months after Bob stopped regularly going to Quarks, on DS9.”

Lee commented, “I wonder how that whole gender bending water curse plague panned out on Ferenginar?”

Daiyu pointed out, “It might be best we don't try to find out. They might realize you are responsible. In which case, they would likely put the largest in the multiverse, on your head.”

Lee winced, as she quickly said, “Oh. That is a good point. And I agree that we shouldn't look into it, for those very reasons. But, still I wonder?”

Daiyu stated, “Wonder all you like. As long as we don't look into that event. Nor mention it, while here. We should be fine.” She turned to River, as she inquired, “This is clearly not DS9. So, where are we?”

River looked over at Daiyu, as she answered, “Actually, we are on Earth. In New Orleans, right by the French Quarter.” She then grinned mischievously, at her two lovers, as she continued, in an excited tone of voice, “During Mardi Gras.”

Lee returned River's smile, as she said, “Nice.”

Daiyu cracked a grin, as she complimented, “Well, whether by accident, or intention, I will give Pedro credit. He knows when and where to go for a party.”

River mentioned, “Yes, but the tracking tablet, back in Caracas, stated they just go here a few minutes ago.”

Daiyu smiled widened slightly, as she commented, “All the better. And while we are here, we can have some fun. Maybe even stay here a while. As soon as we get Pedro and Matthew to hand over their reality device, they won't run from us. And I am sure they won't be against spending a few days here, during this party season.”

River complimented, “I like the way you think, Daiyu.”

Lee thought, about their situation for a few seconds. She then dropped her grin, as she said, in a more sober tone of voice, “Actually, that might not be such a good idea. The Federation and Star Fleet are real strict on IDs for lodgings. And we do not want the local authorities to know we exist.”

Daiyu looked over at Lee, as she replied, “Unfortunately, I have to agree with you, Lee.”

River said, “Lee does have a point. And we had plenty of fun in Caracas.”

Daiyu looked over at River, as she responded, “True. And we can always come back here, later. Such as go home, get some sleep, and come back later.”

River complimented, “That is a good idea.”

Daiyu smiled at River. And River returned Daiyu's smile.

Lee commented, “Still, this doesn't stop us from having a little fun while we are looking for Pedro and Matthew. Maybe even have few drinks, after we find them.”

River and Daiyu turned to Lee, as Daiyu said, “You're right. So, let's head out there.” She then turned towards the exit of the alleyway, where they saw people and lighting, along with them hearing some jazz music playing in the background. She continued. “And it doesn't take genius to know which way Pedro and Matthew likely went.”

River stated, “Yes. Those two would know that it is best to blend into a crowd. So, let's go.”

River then turned towards the alleyway entrance to the French Quarter, as she began walking.

Lee and Daiyu joined her. With Lee walking to River's left said, and Daiyu to her right said.

A few seconds later, as the three women walked out of the alleyway, passed the sidewalks, side by side, as they walked onto the crowded street.

As the three women began to make their through the crowd. Suddenly, to their right, two much younger girls appeared from between the groups of people.

The two girls walked right in front of Daiyu, River, and Lee.

Fortunately, the three women were able stopped just in time to prevent running into them.

And the two younger girls came to a stop, a few feet away from the three women, as the two of girls looked at the three women.

At the same time, the three women looked down to see a blond haired, fair skinned, girl in her mid-teens, and a six year old girl with fair skin and brown hair.

The teenage girl said, in english, “Sorry about that.”

River took one look at the two girls, as she read their minds, and her jaw when slack in suprise. Though, she was able to compose herself, a second later.

Meanwhile, Lee recognized the two girls, as well. A wicked smile curled up on her lips. Though, she was less angry, and more amused by the situation she found herself in.

Daiyu also noticed the blond teenage girl, as she thought, 'I have seen this teenage girl, somewhere before. But, I just cannot place her.'

Daiyu sighed, as she looked down at the two younger girls. She calmly said, “Next time. Just watch where you are going.”

The six year old girl replied, in english, “We will.”

Lee looked at the two younger girls, as she said, in a playful tone of voice, “Well, look who we bumped into?”

Daiyu continued to looked at the two younger girls, as she asked, “Who?”

Lee continued to wickedly smirk, as she responded, “If I remember correctly... It has been a while... But, these two are in their cursed, female forms. The blond teenager is Garcia Lovelace. And the brown haired six year old is Michael Garibaldi.”

Daiyu's eyes when slightly wide for a seconds. She then made her eyes return to normal, a she turned to River, whom nodded once in confirmation with what Lee had just said.

Daiyu turned back to look at the two younger girls, as she thought, 'It is Garcia. But, she is so young, in her female form, I just didn't recognize he. Besides, whenever I saw Garcia in her female form, was at those Lagoon bikini parties, when she was flanked by Roberta and Fabiola, and I wisely paid much closer attention to those two women, with her, than of Garcia.'

Garibaldi looked over at Lee, as she asked, “How do you know us?” She thought, 'She looks familiar, but I just cannot place her.'

River suddenly realized a few issues with their situation, as she thought, 'These two are from our past. Also, Garibaldi does not like telepaths. Especially, telepaths that are reading his... Her mind. We will have to be gentle in how we deal with them.'

River warned, “Be careful what you both say to Garcia and Garibaldi. Always keep in mind that they are from our past.”

Lee dropped her grin, as she looked at River. She flatly said, “Fine.” She then turned back to look at the two younger girls.

Lee stated, “To answer you questioned. It is me, Lee. I am all grown up. And for me, it has been number of decades after you had me captured by the Amazons. But, I am guessing, that for you, I was earlier today. Considering you talked about going here, for lunch, to get some gumbo, at Sisko's, in New Orleans, in this reality, during Mardi Gras.”

Garcia and Garibaldi suddenly showed slight shock on on their faces, as they visibly squirmed a little.

Garibaldi thought, 'I expected a little pay back from Lee, someday. But. not this soon. And I don't think being in the physical form of a little girl is going to help me much.'

Garcia thought, 'After everything she has done, she knows that if she even touches me, with intent to harm me. Lee knows that Roberta and Fabiola will kill her. If she is lucky.'

A few seconds later, as they forced themselves to calm down, Garcia admitted, “You would be correct. It has only been less half a day since we dumped you there, with the amazons.”

Lee casually asked, “So, how was the gumbo, at Sisko's?”

Garibaldi replied, “Pretty good.”

Garcia said, “I enjoyed it.”

Lee happily responded, “Nice. I may have to try some there, when I have the chance.”

Garibaldi mentioned, “The shrimp creole and fried stuffed oysters was also good.”

Daiyu looked over at Garcia and Garibaldi. Then, to Lee. And she turned to Garcia and Garibaldi, as she said, in a concerned tone of voice, “Be that as it may. We hope you don't plan to cause trouble, because we don't want Star Fleet to know we exist.”

Garibaldi responded, “We fully agree.”

Garcia commented, “Yes. That would cause to many questions to be asked.”

Daiyu thought, 'It is good they both realize that causing trouble will be counterproductive to the situation.' She replied, “Good.”

Garibaldi thought, 'We are out numbered, and outgunned. So, we might as well be nice.' She complimented, By the way, Lee, you look great.”

Lee asked, “I feel great, too. Were you aware that the amazon were planning to teach me how to fight?”

Garibaldi thought, with worry, 'Ah oh. This just got worse for us.' She answered, “No. We did not. Though, I hope there are no hard feelings between us and you.”

Lee responded, “You both are lucky that things worked out for me, or I would be pissed with both of you. But, as of right now. I am okay with you both, at the moment.”

Garibaldi replied, “Good.”

Garcia said, “Glad to hear it.” She thought, 'Though, given the maids are after you. We know that you are not going to touch me. And my extension, my friend, Garibaldi.'

Daiyu continued to look at the two younger girls, as she thought, 'Since you are from such a distant past, Garcia. And If you don't recognize me as Chang. Which is good, because from your point of view, and time period. You would consider me scum. With you blaming both Lee and I, caused most of you problems. Which, sadly, you would be correct about. But, if I mention who I am, it could wreck this wonderful meeting we are having. Which may turned out well for all of us.'

'As such, I will not say anything on the matter of my identity. So, as to prevent the risk of a paradox, and problems right now. And I doubt even Garibaldi recognizes me. So, there are not problems there... Though, I do plan to have some fun with you both.'

Daiyu rhetorically asked, “So, these are the two the took down the mighty, Lee?... Not bad.”

Daiyu thought, 'Though, given who you two are, I am not surprised. Garibaldi, you are as much as badass as I am. And I have known for years. Since the time Roberta came to Roanapur, for a second time. That you, Garcia have all the makings of a badass. You, as a he, stood up to Roberta, at the Bloodhound's worst, and you got her to calm down, even after you were shot by her. You then recovered, as you helped her recover. That is no small feat. And I respect you for that.'

'Also Garcia, you just need a few more years of experience under you belt, to be a full fledged badass. Which you have, in our present. And even without the maids, everyone thinks twice about messing with you. Because, given what the Roberta and Fabiola have likely taught you, in all that time, none of use are really sure what you are capable of. And we all know better than to try and find out.'

Meanwhile, Garcia could not help, but crack a grin, at Daiyu's comment. She looked at Daiyu, as she mischievously said, “And she never saw it coming.”

Lee grumbled, “I had other more important things on my mind at the time.”

Garibaldi inquired, “So, did you ever sort out your mess with those after you?”

Garcia commented, in a slightly insulting tone of voice, “Since she is still breathing, I would guess the answer is a, yes.”

River thought, 'Normally, I would act towards someone insulting one of my lovers. But, from Garcia and Garibaldi's point of views, they just got cursed to turn into a girl, today. And concerning Garcia, she knows Lee is at fault for her being curse. So, as long as Garcia and Garibaldi keep their insults tactful, I will let their comments slide.'

Lee coyly replied, “We came to an understanding. I would explain further, but you two our from our past, and we don't want to create a paradox.”

Garibaldi said, “I fully understand.”

Garcia stated, “When I reached your point in time, I am sure Roberta and Fabiola will tell me all about what happened...” Her voice became sadder, as she continued, “That is... If I make it home.”

Lee recalled what Roberta has told her a number of years ago. She said, “Besides what I wrote about you, Garcia. Which unfortunately. Or fortunately. Was not much. From what I understand. You both make it back home. But, I do not know how.”

Garibaldi commented, “I will take that as a comfort to know.”

Garcia responded, “I figured if I was lost out here, that Roberta and Fabiola would never stop searching.” She thought, 'I did leave a letter with my other... More normal maids, to be given to Fabiola, or Roberta. If either of them had returned to the my plantation. So, they would know I did go after them.'

River heard Garcia's thoughts, which were in spanish, though she completely understood Garcia's thoughts.

River thought, 'That was very clever of you, Garcia.' She commented, “And given those two. They would have never stopped, until they found you. Fortunately, I know for a fact that you were, or will be, waiting for them, at your home, when they return.”

Garcia turned to River, as she asked, “That is fortunate to know. And you are?”

River answered, “Do not you recognized me? Fabiola told me that you were a fan of the series I was in... Oh. That is right. I started occasionally dyeing my hair red. But, my natural hair color is brown.”

Garcia took a close looked at River. She then recognized River, as she bluntly stated, in surprise, and worry, “Oh no. You're River Tam.”

Garibaldi recognized the name, as she realized who Garcia was talking about. She thought, with worry, 'River, from the Firefly series... Oh no. No. No. No. This is bad. A violent, lunatic, telepath. My worst nightmare come to life.'

River quickly stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Calm down. Though, I look young. It has been alive for number of decades since that series, and the movie, happened to me. I have since been able to claw my way back to near permanent sanity.”

River thought, 'Of course, if I told you that the main two reasons for the return to my sanity, after my mental breakthrough over learning what happened on Miranda. Was that I started dating Chang, and I had lessons on controlling my telepathy from Annie. Whom use to be Darth Vader. You with think I was still insane. And I admit that on paper, such comments would sound insane.'

Garcia asked, “How sane are we talking about?”

River stated, “Well, I am talking you in a calm, lucid manner. And I am not on any medications. That is a vast improvement to how I use to be.”

Garibaldi commented, “She has us there.”

Lee mentioned, “Also, she is the voice of reason for our group.”

Garibaldi deadpanned, “That is not a comforting thought.”

River requested, in a calm tone of voice, “Just give me a chance. Actually, give us a chance. We are talking in a civil manner. That is a good sign for all of us. Also, Garibaldi, I know you don't like telepathic scans. And my abilities are purely passive. I cannot actually enter your mind. I cannot make anyone do anything with my telepathy. I can only sense surface thoughts. As long as you are not thinking about something, or you have cleared you mind, I cannot sense your thoughts. Even, basic mental shielding can block my ability.”

There was silence among the group, for a few seconds, as Garibaldi thought on what River has just said. Garibaldi then said, “Okay. I will give you the benefit of the doubt. For now.”

River replied, “Thank you.”

Garibaldi thought, 'I know you are reading my mind, River. And since you are being polite, we will see what happens.'

River gave Garibaldi a smile, to let Garibaldi know that she read Garibaldi thoughts, on Garibaldi comment.

Garcia asked, “So Lee, did you ever find a cure for our curse?”

Garibaldi commented, “Yea. You informing us, will save us a whole lot of time and effort.”

Lee, River, and Daiyu, facial expressions also became neutral, as Lee stated, “I was never really looked into the cure part of the water curse. I was more from the angle of curing my own cancer. And it worked.”

Lee thought, 'Though, I guess the gender bending virus that I got from River, could be viewed as a more controllable form. Bob's DNA even allowed the water curse form of the virus to change triggers to sneezing. But, that is to risky to do. And I don't want to give either of you false hope.'

Garcia flatly replied, in a disappointed tone of voice, “That figures.”

Garcia then noticed the expression on Lee, Daiyu, and River. Garcia asked the three older women, “What are you not telling us?”

Daiyu answered, in a sober tone of voice, “Not to upset you, nor cause a paradox. As River pointed out, we are from the future, Garica. And we know you from the future. And you do not get cured.”

Garcia looked down, as she said, in a sad tone of voice, “Well, at at least that saves us time. Just not in the way we hoped...” She looked up at the three women, as she asked, “So, tell me how Roberta and Fabiola handle learning about my curse?”

Lee answered, “As you know. They are pissed with me about you being cursed. But, they both still care about you, no matter what form you have on the outside.”

Garcia looked up at the three women, as she replied, in a slightly less sad tone of voice, “Okay. I can live with that.”

Daiyu mentioned, “Also, when Roberta and Fabiola do return to you. Roberta will have had the body parts she lost, replaced. She will be able to walk and move like normal.”

Garcia admitted, “That does make me feel better.”

Daiyu mentally replied, 'I thought as much.'

River commented, “And besides. Once you have some clothing for your male forms. You can switch back to men. And as long as you keep an eye out for possible cold water problems. You will be fine.”

Garibaldi pointed out, “I am not sure. I mean, in the series. Ranma got hit with water all the time.”

Lee flatly stated, “Let's be honest. Outside of fighting, and learning martial arts, Ranma is not the most observant person in the multiverse.

Garibaldi let out a laugh. She then said, “You are right about that.”

Garcia agreed, “Yes. I guess you have a point there.”

Lee commented, “As River said. Just be mindful of your surroundings, you should be fine. The only difference is you are just going to have to wear something also covers you chest, along with your bottom, when you go swimming in cool water.”

Lee mentally reflected 'Besides monthly, or for you two, irregular, menstrual periods. But, I am not mentioning that because I still plan for you two finding out that, on your own, as my little revenge against you for betraying me to the amazons. I may have turned out well, in the end. And I will let a lot of what you both did to me, slide. But, that still doesn't make up for your betrayal, in the first place.'

Garcia replied, “That does not sound so bad.”

Garibaldi asked, “Yes. I can see that... So, what about me? Do I make it back home?”

Daiyu answered, “I don't know. After Lee's issues with the others were settled, Garcia, of our present, your future, mentioned some things about you making it home. But, she never got into the details.”

Lee said, “Actually, Garcia, your future self made the comment, in passing. Given the situation, at the time, I did not ask for details.”

Garcia replied, “Well, it is just one more event that we will learn in the fullness of time.”

Garibaldi grumbled, “That sucks. But, not as much as it sucks to be a girl.”

River looked down at Garibaldi, as she frowned. She flatly asked, “And what is wrong with being a girl?”

Garibaldi realized what she had say out loud. She responded, “Okay. I admit it. I suck my foot in my mouth.”

River relaxed her expression, as she replied, “At least you are being, honest. And being a girl is not as bad as you may think.”

Garibaldi reminded River, “While I admit to sticking my foot in my mouth, with my previous comment. Keep in mind, I have a daughter that I watched go through puberty. I know how bad this can get.”

River thought, 'Damn. She has a point there.' She hesitantly replied, “Okay... You may know how bad this can get. But, it is not the end of the world.”

Garibaldi agreed, “No. It isn't. And just because you say we won't be cured, doesn't mean we cannot try.”

Garcia looked over at Garibaldi, as she said, in a slightly happier tone of voice,”Hey. You are right, Garibaldi.” She then looked at River, Lee, and Daiyu, as she stated, “We still have to try to find a cure. Just for the very sake of our sanity.”

Lee thought, 'We are not going to be able to talk them out of this.' She said, “Look. I know you both have seen the Ranma Half series. And you have likely read the manga. So, keep in mind how many times Ranma trying to find a cure for her curse. Only to have all that effort wasted.”

Garibaldi commented, “While Ranma is a gender bender. I thought Ranma was mainly a guy, upstairs?”

Lee replied, “Right now, in her mind, she is a she, in our present.”

Garcia asked, “You sound like you know, Ranma?”

Lee answered, “Yes. We are friends. And she can still change genders. She just prefers to live as a woman. Also, you will eventually meet her, Garcia.”

Garcia responded, “Well, I look forward to that. Since Ranma is an interesting character. Or, should I say, person.”

Lee stated, “Person. Always say, person. And yes. Ranma, and her family, are fun, and interesting, people to be around. And as someone that has lived in crazy situations that are on par with Ranma's life. It is not fun. And looking for a cure might put you in such situations.”

River commented, “She is right about that.”

Garcia thought, 'I have a feeling that I don't want to know the details.' She flatly replied,
“We will keep that in mind.”

Lee said, “Anyway, you don't want to waste your lives looking for a cure you will never fine.”

Garibaldi stated, “We will look for a few months. And if we cannot find anything, we will call it a day. Does that sound reasonable?”

Lee commented, “That sounds very reasonable.”

Garibaldi replied, “Good.”

Lee warned, “Also, try to avoid relationships. Gender bending, even if you are not the gender bender, tends to attract crazy people...”

River coughed a little.

Lee turned to River. She then looked back at Garibaldi and Garcia, as she continued, “And formerly crazy people, like honey to a bear.”

Garibaldi, Garcia, and Daiyu, giggled a little, for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.

Meanwhile, River remained tactfully quiet.

As they calmed down, Garibaldi thought, 'I am married. And Garcia has one... Maybe two, crazy, violent, though caring, girlfriends. We do not need any more romantic attachments.' She said, “You may have a point there. We will be careful.”

Lee replied, “I know you will.”

Garcia commented, “I have been open about my feelings for Roberta. And I don't think there is anyone in the multiverse that can be crazier than her.”

River stated, “I will admit that she is crazier than me, at my worst.”

Daiyu said, in River's defense, “Well, to be honest. You were more of a wallflower, on your off days.”

River shrugged, as she agreed, “True. And I found it better to go that way, than the violent way.”

Lee commented, “We are all happy about that. Though, I can think of one, or two, people that are crazier than Roberta.” Lee then joked, as she continued, “But, none of them would look as good in a bikini, as she does.” She thought, 'I should know. I have seen her in one, during the bikini parties. And I have seen her nude before, in person.'

All five of them laughed, for a few seconds, at Lee's joke.

As they calmed down, Garcia said, “Well, that proves you did settle things with the others. Because, if you did not. Otherwise, you would not have lived to see her in a bikini.”

Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'Actually, I first saw her in a bikini in that Black Lagoon magazine by Tex-Mex. But, I did see Roberta in a bikini at Lagoon Island. And I also saw you and Fabiola in bikini, as well. Also, from the way you talk, you must have seen Roberta in a bikini. Which doesn't surprise me. You're estate has a pool in it. And with Venezuela being warm all year around. I am sure you and Roberta went for a swim, a few times in it. Though, I know better than to ask about such matters.'

Lee said, “Yes. And she wears it well.”

Garcia happily agreed, “Yes. She does.”

The five women of them then went onto to talk to each other, on various matters.

(_)

As the five girls continued their conversation, Pedro and Matthew were casually walking towards the group's location, from up the street.

While they walked, they both kept looking around them, as Matthew asked, “So, what do you want to do first?”

Pedro answered, “Find a nice R&B jazz club to listen to some authentic New Orleans jazz and blues. Culturally, this city is known for two things. Their food. And their music. And I want to enjoy plenty of both while we are here.”

Matthew cracked a grin, as he complimented, “Sounds like a plan, my good friend.”

Then, in the distance, there was a break in the crowds of people between the two groups, as Matthew saw Lee, River, Daiyu, Garcia, and a young brown haired, fair skin girl.

Matthew stated, in a casual, though slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Well, if that don't beat all. Take a looked in the break in the crowd, thirty meters, up the street, slightly to our right, near the alleyway entrance, between two buildings.”

Pedro did so, and he spotted the five girls. With him immediately recognizing four of the girls.

Pedro stated, “Damned it. They are fast.”

Matthew commented, “And I doubt they even bothers to headed to that depot place. They were likely able to track us there, then here, while in Caracas.”

Pedro responded, “You are probably right. And let us try not to think about it. I don't want River to pick up our thoughts on the matter.”

Matthew replied, “Agreed. And we don't want to cause more problems, by tempting River's curiosity.”

Pedro said, “Exactly. And I am beginning to think that those three are using the excuse to chase us, as a way to have a vacation away from everyone. I mean, they have had plenty of chances to catch us. And while I am not sure about, Lee. I know that either River, or Chang, could take us down, by their self.”

Matthew replied, in a serious, and concerned, tone of voice, “Dear lord. That actually makes sense.”

Pedro suggested, “Yea. So, let us go see what is going on with them?”

Matthew stated, in an offhanded manner, “We might as well. We are walking in their direction, anyway. And they won't dare try something out in the open.”

Pedro said, “That is my line of thinking, as well.”

Matthew inquired, “An other matter. Does Garcia look a little young to you? Even as a woman?”

Pedro answered, “Yes. For our present. So, that means she, and likely the little girl, are from our past. As such, we will have to be cautious not to cause a paradox.”

Matthew commented, “We will just be careful what we say, while we talk to them.”

Pedro said, “I think we will be fine doing that. Also, call Chang, Daiyu. Because, we are not sure how far into the past Garcia is from.” He thought, 'Though I have a feeling that little girl will likely be the most surprising of them all.'

Matthew replied, “I will keep in that mind.”

Pedro commented, “Though, with this coming up, it sucks that we did not even have a chance to get another drink, yet.”

Matthew said, “After the drinks you had with the Bloodhound, I think you have enough for tonight.”

Pedro stated, “Hey. I am still sober.”

Matthew replied, “I know. And that is exactly how you need to be.”

Pedro realized, as he thought, 'You has a point. Getting drunk here, would be a bad idea.' He said, “Fair enough.”

The two men then continued heading in the direction they were going, which would take them directly to the five girls, whom were standing together, on the street.

(_)

As Pedro and Matthew approached the five person group, Garibaldi was the first to noticed Matthew and Pedro walk up to them.

Garibaldi inquired, “Matthew?”

The other four people in the group turned to look at Matthew and Pedro.

As Pedro and Matthew walked over to them, Matthew heard the girl call him, by his name.

Matthew overheard Garibaldi, as he mentally wondered, 'I wonder how that little girl knows my name?'

A few seconds later, Pedro and Matthew came to a stop in front of the other five people.

River was the first to speak, as she stated, “Well... After Caracas, I am surprised you would walk up to us.”

Pedro said, “Well, we saw the five of you here. And we wanted to see what was going on. And our curiosity got the better of us.”

River shrugged, as she casually said, “That happens to the best of us.”

Garcia asked, “What happened in Caracas?”

Pedro answered, “My friend and I went into a bar, for a few drinks, and... Well, it went downhill from there.”

Garcia hesitantly said, “I... See...” She thought, 'I believe it is best not to ask any more questions, on that event.'

Matthew turned to look down at Garibaldi, as he inquired, “So, little girl, how do you know my name?”

Garibaldi looked Matthew in his face, as she stated, in an authoritarian tone for voice, “Do not give me that, little girl, bit, McCormick. It is me, Garibaldi. Your boss.”

Matthew looked a little closer at Garibaldi's face, and the others could see from his facial expression, that he wanted to laugh, but he was so far willing himself not to do so.

Moments later, Matthew was still trying to prevent himself from laughing, as he apologized, “I am sorry, sir. I am trying very hard not to laugh. But, you look so damn cute.”

Garibaldi thought, 'I can see on his face that it is a losing battle.' She said, “You have my permission to laugh.”

Matthew then burst out laughing, for several seconds.

The others remained silent, as Matthew laughed.

As Matthew calmed down, he said, “Thank you. I needed that.”

Garibaldi replied, “No problem.”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he asked, “I don't get it. You didn't have this reaction to other gender benders?”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he answered, “You don't understand. As an old man, Garibaldi here, could give someone a stare that would make paint peel off the walls. To see my boss, or former boss, relegated to this little girl form is too much for me to handle.”

Garibaldi shrugged, as she commented, “I admit. I can see your point of view. So, you say I am your former boss. What happened?”

Matthew looked down at Garibaldi, as he answered, “Well, you left me in a bind. You disappeared. A good portion of the headquarters was destroyed. After the police station was wrecked. With an insane chase between those two locations, that was filmed by a news copter. And I was the only one still around that could be connected to all of it.”

“So, before I could get arrested, and wrongly blamed for that mess, I had my bags already packed, and I was on my way to the spaceport, to get off world, when Chang's employees caught me, took me to another reality, to be Chang's personal lawyer.”

Garibaldi muttered, “That must have been rough for you.”

Matthew look over at Daiyu, then back to Garibaldi, as he commented, “It was not that bad. And the pay and benefits have been nice. But, the others there just pushed myself, and my friend here, too far, and we decided to leave.”

Garibaldi commented, in a supportive tone of voice, “Hey. I know the feeling. It happens.”

Daiyu looked over at Garibaldi, as she spoke up, “We are in the process of fixing the problems that caused them to leave in the first place. That is why we are using the kid gloves approach to bringing them back.”

Pedro thought, 'Well, that confirms that.'

Garcia thought, “So, these women work for Chang.'

River hid her smile, from the thoughts she read from both Pedro and Garcia.

Garibaldi looked up at Daiyu, as she said, “Well, Matthew here is one hell of a lawyer.”

Matthew cracked a grin as Garibaldi compliment. He said, “Thank you, Mister Garibaldi. And I am not going to say, Ms. You are not a Ms. No matter your firm. You are a mister in my eyes.”

Garibaldi returned Matthew's smile, as she replied, “I appreciate that.”

Daiyu noticed this, as she thought, 'That is the type of respect that take year to garner. And I respect that.' She commented, “I am just beginning to realize that.” She turned to Matthew, as she continued, “Though, he seems to be modest about his skills and past.”

Garibaldi took Daiyu's comment as a compliment, as she said, “What can I say? I taught him well.” She then looked over at Matthew, whom was still looking down at her. Garibaldi continued, “And Matthew, when I get back, I will sort everything out with the police, so you can returned, as well.”

Matthew replied, “I am sure you will. And thanks.”

Unlike Garibaldi's previous smile towards Matthew, she gave Matthew smile that was unintentionally a very girlishly cute smile.

Matthew successfully held back a chuckle, at the look of Garibaldi's smile.

(_)

At that moment, across the street from five girls, and the two men, Roberta and Fabiola where walking through the crowds, when they noticed group, a mere thirty-five feet from them.

The two women came to a stop, as they continued looking at the group composed of mostly people they recognized. Though, the did not know why the members of the group were together, in the first place.

Fabiola stood to Roberta left, as Roberta commented, in spanish, “Well, isn't this a surprise.”

Fabiola agreed, in spanish, “Yes. I see Garcia, Chang as a woman, River, Chief Del Soto, Lee's lawyer, along with a little girl, and a black haired woman, I don't know.”

Roberta responded, “And it appears, from the way they are acting towards each other, there are three groups talking to each other. There is Garcia and the young girl. Chang, River, and the black haired woman. And Chief Del Soto and Lee's lawyer.”

Fabiola commented, “And Garcia appears so young.”

Roberta stated, “It is a safe estimation that this is Garcia of the past. And he never really told us what happened to him, when he first traveled the multiverse, and became cursed. All we really know for sure is that he became cursed right after his first jump from our reality, to Ranma's home reality.”

Fabiola said, “He likely never told us because we are about to meet his past self.”

Roberta finished for her student, and friend, “As such, he would not want to create a paradox by telling our past selves about this.”

Fabiola responded, “And he kept it this secret for our protection.”

Roberta replied, “Exactly.”

Fabiola wondered out loud, “How long do you think Garcia has been cursed?”

Roberta stated, “From the look of her age, the face we just came from Jusenkyo. Given we know that Garcia was cursed at Jusenkyo. And the date between reality jumps, with Rock's stolen reality device, when compared to local time. I would guess he has only been cursed very recent. Likely less then a day.”

Fabiola commented, “So, the young master just got cursed. And this is the next place he came to. I would love to hug him and tell him it will be alright.”

Roberta responded, “So would I. But, doing so in front of our enemies, at this juncture, would be unwise. Also, keep in mind Garcia has a strong spirit. He will persevere.”

Fabiola inquired, “I hope so. But, how did Garcia jump realities, to get here?”

Roberta commented, “I believe that the little girl is likely the key to that answer.”

Fabiola asked, “With Garcia cursed in his previous jump, the little girl could be cursed as well. Could she be Lee in a cursed form?”

Roberta answered, “I doubt it. Garibaldi was with Lee. Now, there is only one person with Garcia. And Rock's reality device was used to get here. It is possible that is little girl is Garibaldi. And Garibaldi is too clever to be tricked by Lee. Garibaldi could have the girl curse, due to him diving in to help Garcia.”

Fabiola agreed, “That makes sense.”

Roberta theorized, “Both the young master, and Garibaldi, are very clever. At least as clever as Lee. It is possible Garibaldi told Garcia who Lee was, and they betrayed Lee, and took his reality device.”

Fabiola commented, “Then, we must have passed, Lee. But, when?”

Roberta commented, “It is very likely that Lee is in the amazon village. And the old woman lied to us. She has Lee.”

Fabiola asked, “Do you want to head back there? Because, I really don't want to fight Cologne and her amazons.”

Roberta responded, “Neither do I. But, before we even contemplate going back, we need more information on both the situation in front of us, and the situation we just left behind. Information to both is right in front of us.”

Fabiola agreed, “Yes. We do need more information.”

Roberta stated, with a bit of forcefulness in her tone of voice, “We will go over there. Those that know us, know better than to cross us. Those that don't know us, will be informed by their friends not go cross us. And we will get the answers we seek.”

Roberta and Fabiola then started walking towards the group of seven people, at a slightly hastened pace.

(_)

Thirty-five feet from Roberta and Fabiola, down the street, among the seven person group, Garibaldi commented, “Oh, the stories I could tell you about Matthew.”

Lee commented, “Matthew, you never did tell me about that time you and your friend did a wicked burn on Babylon Five.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he stated, “What is she talking about? You never told me that you have been to Babylon Five. Let alone raised some hell there.”

Garibaldi said, “He told me that tale once. It is absolutely hilarious. And it is one of the reasons I hired him. Of course, after Elizabeth found out I hired him, she didn't speak to me for nearly a year, after that.”

Garcia looked down at Garibaldi, as she requested, “Will you tell me about it, later?”

Garibaldi looked up at Garcia, as she replied, “Sure.”

Garibaldi and Garcia then looked back at Matthew.

Daiyu commented, “Now, this does sound juicy.”

River said, “From what I am getting from Matthew’s mind. It is juicy. And very funny.”

Pedro requested, in a polite tone of voice, “Please, explain.”

Matthew realized all six of the others in the group were looking at him. He sighed, as he answered, in a matter of face tone of voice, “Well, there was this other Matthew. An evil Matthew. And I killed him.”

The other six members of the group got the joke, as they all laughed, including Matthew, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Pedro inquired, “I should have never showed you the movie, Twister. Still, why didn't you tell me?”

Matthew responded, “Well, as a friend, I like you, a lot, Pedro. But, your a cop. And I didn't want to admit that my friend and I, in over the course of a few days, committed over two hundred non-violent felonies. Countless misdemeanor crimes, ranging from intoxication to general jackassery. And one count of forgetting to leave the tip at a restaurant.”

Pedro stated, “As I said before, it is not my jurisdiction. Besides, from what Garibaldi says, the tale would be worth hearing.”

Matthew offered, “I will tell you about it, later, over drinks.”

Pedro replied, “That works for me.” He then turned to Garibaldi, as he commented, “I see why you hired him. People this lucky, and skilled, need to be kept close.”

Garibaldi said, “My thoughts exactly.”

Just then, the from corner of Matthew's left eye, he spot two women, he recognized, approaching them.

Matthew commented, “Well, as fun as it is to talk about my past. You guys need to take a look to my left.”

The group then turned to Matthew’s left, and they were just in time to see Roberta and Fabiola walk up to them, through the crowds of people on the street.

As Roberta and Fabiola approached the seven member group, what happened next caught them by surprise.

Matthew was the first react to them. He turn towards them, as he lightly waved with her right hand. He casually said, “Hi Roberta, and Fabiola.”

The other six members of the group turned to look at them. Garcia and Garibaldi had neutral expressions on their faces. Daiyu, River, and Pedro looked concern. And Lee had her poker face on.

As the two maids came to a stop in front of the group, River immediately read their surface thoughts. She warned, “Careful. These two are from the past, when they were still after, Lee.”

Matthew looked over at River, and then back to the maid. He hesitantly said, “Oh... This is one of those past, present, and future meetings, situations.”

Lee thought, 'So, this is what Roberta, Fabiola, and Garcia, were being so coy about, at the island, in the S&M dungeon. And this just means we are stuck in another time loop.'

Beside Lee, River softly said, “That is quite likely.”

Lee heard what River said, but she did not react to it, given how close they were to Roberta and Fabiola.

Meanwhile, Pedro continued looking at the maids, as he deadpanned, “No kidding.” He thought, 'This can be very bad, or very good. Considering how we play it. Still, we need to be very, very careful.'

Roberta and Fabiola came to a stop, seven feet from the other seven people. The two women turned to Matthew, as Roberta thought, 'From what I overheard, it sounds like will catch, Lee, in our future. But first, we need to know why Lee's lawyer is acting so casually towards us.'

Roberta inquired, in english, “You know us?”

Matthew answered, “Yes. Pedro and I are from the future. So, are the three other adults here. And we do know you both, fairly well.”

Fabiola asked, in english, “How do you know us?”

Matthew continued looking at the maids, as he thought, 'I best not look over at Lee. With them then connecting the dots. Causing us a whole lot of problems.'

Matthew stated, “After you sort this mess out with Lee. I never asked for the details. Nor, do I want to know the details. Anyway, eventually, back on the mexican island my friend here is from...”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, and then back to the maids. He continued, “You and the others decide to make Pedro and I, your designated drivers, when you went drinking. And none of you gave us much choice in the matter.”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, and then back to the maids, as he took over the conversation. He said, “We would love to tell you more, but we don't want to risk a paradox.”

Fabiola ordered, “Prove you know us.”

Matthew said, “Fine Roberta, except for you, I have never seen someone chug that much Tequila at one time, and live. Let alone be able to walk straight, afterward. You take binge drinking to a whole new level.” He thought, 'Though, you rarely do that. And I think you do it to remind Revy she is not the only serious drinker in the group.'

Fabiola let out a laugh. She then turned to Roberta, as she stated, “Yes. He knows you.” She then turned back to look at the others.

Roberta looked over at Fabiola, then back to Matthew and Pedro, as she firmly requested, “And do you know Fabiola?”

Pedro commented, “Let us just say. On the few times we have seen her drunk. Fabiola here likes to stretch her body in very provocative positions.”

Roberta cracked a wicked grin. She calmly stated, “Fine. Since you will prove useful to us, in our future. We will spare you, for now.”

Matthew and Pedro both let out a sigh of relief.

Roberta turned to Daiyu and River, as she asked, “Now, what are you doing here, Chang, River?”

Daiyu mentally grumbled, 'Thanks, Roberta, for spilling the beans on me, in front of past Garcia. If this turns into a fight, I am holding you responsible.'

River thought, 'I agree, Chang. But, it is best to keep this conversation moving forward, and hope Garcia and Garibaldi overlook Roberta's comment.' She looked at Roberta, as she shrugged towards Pedro and Matthew. She stated, “We are trying to get the two fools to return to Pedro home reality, with us.”

Roberta replied, “Fair enough.”

Garcia looked over at Daiyu, and she immediately saw the resemblance. She turned back to looked at the maids, as she inquired, “She is Chang? As in our Chang?” She thought, 'So, Chang ended up as a girl, as well. Now, that is poetic justice.'

River thought, 'I guess Garcia did put the piece together.'

Fabiola answered, “Yes. A lot has happened. We have settled our differences with Chang. If you take look at Roberta, you will understand why. Remember she looked like before Chang made his offer.” Fabiola then turned her head towards Roberta.

Garcia took a closer look at Roberta, with Roberta looking back at her.

Roberta had a slightly calm expression on her face, towards Garcia.

Garcia then realized what Fabiola was talking about. She thought, 'So, they are right. Roberta will return home in much better shape than when she left.' She stated, with joy in her tone of voice, “Roberta, you look like you did, before you were hurt by the Grey Foxes.”

Roberta calmly explained, “Actually, the body parts I lost were replaced with cybernetic parts. But, they work just as well. Though, when my past self will be reunited with you, the cybernetics I will have, will look a little more... Mechanical. I believe you didn't mind. And, as you can see, I did later have upgrades to the appearance of my artificial parts.”

Garcia said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Roberta, I don't care what you look like on the outside. As long as you, and Fabiola, return to me in a good health.”

Roberta gave Garcia a slightly warm smile, as she calmly responded, “And I feel the same way about you. I do not care what you look like on the outside. At long as you are still you, on the inside.”

Garcia returned Roberta's smile, as she replied, “Thank you, Roberta.”

The others in the group stayed silent for a few seconds, so as to not ruin the mood. Daiyu then thought, 'I might as well make the most of the situation.' She spoke up, “As Fabiola pointed out, I did keep my bargain, on that point. And Lee gets part of the credit.”

The others in the group turned looked over at Daiyu, as Fabiola flatly asked, “Where is, Lee?”

Daiyu said, “We will tell you in a minute.” She looked at Garcia and Garibaldi, as she continued, “We do not want to create a scene out here. And risk alerting the authorities to our presence.”

Garibaldi and Garcia realized that Daiyu was talking to them.

Garibaldi thought, 'She is right. If we tell these maids that Lee is right beside them. It would be like pulling the pin from a grenade, then setting it right beside oneself. The maids would likely start a fight. With River and Chang jumping in to defend, Lee. With Garcia and I, caught in the middle. And we would create one hell of a mess. With Star Fleet security showing up to stun us, and transport us into security cells. And that would only create a larger mess for all of us.'

Garcia thought, 'I hate to admit it. But, Chang is correct. We cannot let my friends know that Lee is standing near them. We do not want Star Fleet to know about us. And that just means we will have to wait a few minutes. Until we find someplace private.'

River heard Garcia's thoughts, as she thought, 'Good idea, Garcia.'

Roberta calmly said, “I can appreciate you sentiments.”

River turned towards the alleyway they were near. She then turned back to the maids, as she suggested, “How about we all walked into the alleyway. So, we can have some more privacy.”

Daiyu complimented, “Good idea, River.”

Lee commented, “Yes. That is a marvelous suggestions.”

Roberta stated, “That would work well towards our goals.”

Fabiola nodded once, as she agreed, “Yes. That will be fine.”

Roberta turned to Garcia, as she asked, “What are you thoughts on this, young master?”

Garcia looked up at Roberta, as she replied, “I am fine with it.” Garcia turned to Garibaldi, as she inquired, “How about you?”

Garibaldi turned to Garcia, as she said, “I am good with this plan.”

Garcia and Garibaldi turned to look at Roberta.

Roberta looked over to Pedro and Matthew, as she asked, “And what of you two?”

Matthew said, “We are willing to go with the flow. As long as we are not caught in the middle of any possible battle.”

Pedro shrugged towards Matthew, as he commented, “What my friend said.”

Roberta stated, “That is fine with us.”

Daiyu said, “Roberta, and Fabiola, will go first. Then, the rest of us. With River and I pull up the rear. When we get into the alleyway, we will group up into our subgroups.”

Roberta stated, “I can live with that.”

The others in the group knew better than to argue with Roberta and Daiyu.

The nine person group started walking towards the alleyway with Roberta and Fabiola walking passed the others, and being the first to enter the well illuminated alleyway.

Garcia, Garibaldi, Pedro, and Matthew followed behind the two maids.

Lee was about to join them, when Daiyu used her left hand to gently grasped Lee's right wrist.

Lee turned around to look at Daiyu. Daiyu let got of Lee's right wrist, as she said, in a firm tone of voice, “Stay close. And if things start to look bad, get beside us.”

Lee replied, “Absolutely.”

River, Daiyu, and Lee then turned towards the others, as they followed them into the alleyway.

(_)

On the other side of the street, on top of a flat roof of a three story building, a man in black power armored stood in the shadows, as he watched the nine person group walk into the alleyway, across from him.

Behind his faceplate, the man was laughing to himself, as he thought, 'I will have to give these two men credit. They certainly know how to walk into trouble... They are brash, arrogant. And from what my suit's sonic sensors are telling me of their conversation, they have bit of a mouth. They kind of remind me of myself, in my younger days.'

'Still, I certainly am not going to go after these two right now, and risk crossing the maids. Especially, when the maids are in uniform and armed.'

'Powerarmor, or not. I know they have taken down far worse than me, with less. And should I ever confront the maids, it will be on my terms. When they are both unarmed and out of uniform.'

'As for the two fools I am after. I will just track them when they jump, and catch them in the next reality they go to.'

'For right now, there party going on right below me. And I always liked parties. I will just say I am in costume. That usual works. And I can have some fun for a while, until I leave.'

'Also, this suit is shielded from telepathic and empathic scans. So, there is no chance of the odd alien down there psychically reading me. So, I am safe that way.'

'And what Gomez doesn't know, won't hurt him.'

The man in black powerarmor turned back towards the shadows, as he headed for the alleyway below. He then safely jumped down to the ground floor. After he landed, he casually walked towards the crowds, and deeper into the party, to have some fun. While, at the same time, he used his armor's sensors to avoid both the group of nine, and the security personnel stationed around the area.

(_)

Across the street, in the alleyway, the group of nine had all entered the alleyway, which was empty except for them. And there was enough lighting come from the nearby street and buildings, that all nine of the people could see clearly, in the alleyway.

Given Fabiola and Roberta were the first of the group to walk into the alleyway, they came to a stop, further in the alleyway, than the others. They made it nearly to the other exit of the alleyway, when they turned around, to look at the others.

They stood side by side, with Roberta to Fabiola's left.

To Roberta and Fabiola's left, further up the alleyway, Pedro and Matthew stood against the wall on the side of the alleyway, with Matthew the one closest to them.

On the other side of the alleyway, Garcia and Garibaldi stood against the building on that side of the alleyway. Garcia was the closest, of the two, to the maids.

And on the other end of the alleyway stood Daiyu, River, and Lee. The three women faced the others, with Daiyu in the middle. Lee was to Daiyu's left side, and River was to Daiyu's right side.

Daiyu said, “Now that we are all here. I might as well tell you where Lee is.”

Roberta flatly stated, “That would be a wise course of action.”

Daiyu then used both her hands two swiftly Beretta Seventy-Six pistols from her holsters, behind her waist, under her shirt. Both of her pistols already had a bullet in each of their chambers. And the safeties to the pistols were off.

Daiyu pointed the pistols in her right hand at the center of Fabiola chest, and she pointed the pistol in her left hand at the center of Roberta's chest.

Daiyu casually said, “I apologize for the double-cross. But, River and I have come to care for Lee. And well, Lee is right here beside me, to my left. And we are not going to let you two hurt her.”

Meanwhile Lee placed her face in the palm of her right hand, as she gently shook her head.

Roberta bitterly thought, 'Why am I not surprised?'

River complimented, “Because you are one of the sharpest women we know.”

Roberta flatly replied, “You are not helping the situation, River.”

Pedro thought, 'Chang and River versus Roberta and Fabiola. Somehow I just know this was going to happen. I don't want to be in the city, let along between them, when this fight goes down.'

River stated, “Relax, Pedro. We haven't started fighting, yet. And we may not.”

Pedro chose to remain silent, so as to not draw any more attention to himself.

Fabiola commented, “River has a point. We are only interested in Lee, and not the rest of you.”

Lee then looked up at Daiyu, as she dropped her right hand back to her side. She flatly stated, “Daiyu. Your gun fighting skills are top notch, and full of style. But, all those twenty-two caliber bullets are going to do is pissed off the maids.”

As Roberta and Fabiola heard Lee's comment, they laughed, for a few seconds, while Daiyu continued to point her pistols at them.

As they calmed down, Roberta then said, “Chang, you should listen to Lee. She is trying to save your life.”

Everyone remained silent for a few seconds, as Daiyu thought about what her next actions should be.

Then, Daiyu shrugged, as she commented, “You're both right.” She placed her pistols back into their holsters that were behind her waist, and under her shirt.

Roberta stated, “Good... And Lee, don't think that just because you are a woman now, that we are going to go easy on you.”

Lee turned to the maids, as she calmly said, “I fully understand that.”

Just then, Garcia walked between Lee and the maids, with Garcia facing Roberta and Fabiola. Fabiola.

Lee requested, “Garcia, please stand out of the way. I know you want a piece of my ass. Hell, everyone does. But, none of us want you injured.” She turned to Garibaldi, as she continued, “The same goes for you, Garibaldi.” She then looked back to Garcia, as she went onto say, “I want you two to go join the two men by the wall. I will vouch that those two men are good people. They will not harm you. And they will help you, if you need it.”

Roberta looked over at Garibaldi. She then turned to look Pedro and Matthew.

Pedro looked Roberta in her eyes. He simply nodded towards her, to confirm what Lee had said.

Garibaldi noticed all this, as she thought, 'Lee might have a point there.'

Roberta thought, 'I guess Chief Del Soto is a better person than I thought. And I glad I spared his life.' She looked back to Lee and Garcia, as she commented, “I believe you, Lee. Young master, please, move out of the way.”

Garcia looked at Lee, and then at Roberta, as she said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Alright.”

Garcia then walked over to Pedro and Matthew, with Garibaldi doing a quick sprint across the alleyway, to where Pedro, Matthew and Garcia were.

Lee requested, in a calm, polite tone of voice, “Before you two tear into me. I ask that you please hear me out.”

Fabiola warned, “This better not be a case of you still trying to get out of our revenge on you.”

Lee responded, “Quite the contrary. As River and Matthew stated. What we have here is a temporal situation. Garcia is from the distant past. You two, and Garibaldi, are from the more recent past. And Daiyu, River, myself, and those two men, are from your future, which is our present.”

Roberta commented, “That is what I have come to believe, as well.”

Pedro thought, 'Looks like I was right.'

Lee said, “Well, in my past, your future, you all have your revenge on me. Except for Garibaldi.”

Garibaldi flatly stated, “I could careless about revenge, right now. Besides, seeing you in this situation is enough satisfaction for me.”

Lee continued to look at the maids, as she calmly said, “That is what I thought you would say, Garibaldi. And when it did come to revenge, you two, and the Garcia of your time, make me your bitch for a single night, at that special room the Lagoon family have in their basement.”

Roberta raised an eyebrow, as she thought, 'Could she be talking about that S&M room at the Lagoon family's mansion? Still, I don't want the young master to be aware of such smut, at such a tender age, as he is, right now... There is time enough for that, later... So, I will keep my questions simple.'

Roberta questioned, with interest in her tone of voice, “Really?”

River read Roberta's thoughts. She then thought with admiration for both Lee and Roberta, 'I will give credit to Roberta. She knows how to ask question, without giving any details of what she knows.'

'And Lee... Damn. I see the years have not dulled Lee's skills at manipulation. But then, now that I think about it, she never had any problems getting any of our children to do what she wanted. So, maybe she has been using and sharpening her skills without any of the rest of us realizing it... Though, either way, I need to help her.'

River stated, “Yes. I was there. All three of you put her through the ringer.”

Roberta stated, “So, I will have my revenge on you.”

Lee answered, “Yes.”

Fabiola leaned over and whispered into Roberta's right ear, as she whispered, “Is she talking about Revy's S&M dungeon?”

Roberta quietly replied, “I believe so.”

Fabiola then leaned back up straight, as both her and Roberta continued to look over at Lee.

Fabiola pointed out, “Still, this could be a trick. So, why should we believe you, Lee?”

Lee stated, “Because I have never lied about such matters. And I just convinced Garcia here to step out of the line of fire, between you and myself. I am being as straight forward, as possible, with you both.”

Garcia said, with candor in her tone of voice, “Lee, is correct. From what Garibaldi has told me. While, Lee is deceiving, she clearly does not directly lie to people, save to protect herself. Also, I have had my measure of revenge against her. And it sounds like we have more revenge to look forward to, against her, in the future.”

Roberta thought, with concerned, 'I have to know' She asked, “What revenge?”

Garcia answered, “While Garibaldi and I share the same spring of drowned girl curse. As you see, Garibaldi's cursed form is a young girl. While, as far as I can tell, I am same age in both forms. It seems when teenage boys are cursed, they stay the same age in both forms. But, when older men, and I guess women, are cursed, their bodies take the forms of young girls. I guess that is why it is call spring of drowned girl, and not spring of drowned woman.”

Roberta calmly inquired, in only a hint of annoyance in her tone of voice, “Young master. While, I appreciate your explanation, is there a point, when concerning, Lee?”

Garcia stated, “Yes. There is. The same thing that happened to Garibaldi, happened to Lee. I was there when they fished me out of the spring of drown girl, and preventing me from drowning.”

Fabiola pointed out, “But, Lee is the one responsible for you falling into that spring, and getting cursed, in the first place.”

Garcia conceded, “That is true. And I consider it a fair trade on that point, that she saved my life, with Garibaldi's help.”

Roberta commented, “Fine. We will keep that in mind. Now, tell us of you revenge.”

Garcia said, “At the time, Lee was in the body of a young girl, as well. We made it to the amazon village, and while Lee was.... Distracted, we convinced the amazons to capture her. After she was tied up, we took her reality traveling device, and left. Given Lee is now an adult, I believe she spent a lot of time with the amazons.”

Roberta stated, “We already figured out that part. Though, we did not realize that Lee obviously spent so much time with the chinese amazons.”

Lee thought, 'While we all personally know Ranma. And they read my stories. They talk like have a fair good amount of knowledge of the Ranma Half series, itself. I wonder...' She inquired, “Roberta, Fabiola, you have seen the Ranma Half series anime, and read the Ranma Half manga?”

Roberta answered, “Yes.”

Fabiola commented, “It was... Interesting.”

Garcia thought, 'I have not shown them the series, yet. But, this just proves that I will, as a way to inform them of this situation, without them realizing it. A minor temporal loop.'

Lee stated, “Well, even though I ended up a member of that tribe of chinese amazons, I don't believe in that kiss of marriage, nor kiss of death. So, even though I willy to admit defeat to you, you don't need to kill me on that account.”

River turned to Lee, as she mentioned, “Well, there was that time with, Revy.”

Lee turned to River, as she said, “I was brainwashed at the time. And don't you dare deny the fact that you have on occasion considered taking a shot at Revy, as well.”

River shrugged, as she casually admitted, “Yea. I have.”

Lee and River then turned back to face the maids.

Roberta conceded, “I will admit that Revy can be... Trying, at times.”

Fabiola commented, “Yes. We agree with you, on that.”

Daiyu calmly said, “You're preaching to the choir.”

Roberta stated, “Since we do not have to worry about such foolish vendettas, that does make things easier on us, concerning you, Lee. But, not by much. You still have to make up for forcing the young master to face going through the monthly indignities that all women must face.”

River thought, 'That is what you think.'

Lee thought, 'Just great. I was hope for that to be a surprise for Garica and Garibaldi, later. But, I guess not.'

Pedro thought, 'So, that is why Roberta and Fabiola are so pissed off. And I am not touching this one with a ten foot pole.'

Garibaldi thought, 'Well, that confirms that. At least I don't worry about it for a few years... Though, Garcia, on the other hand...'

Garcia looked at Roberta and Fabiola. And to everyone's surprise, she just shrugged, as she casually said, “I realized that was a possibility.” She turned to Lee, as she inquired, “I take if it I switch back and forth, that it will lengthen the time between periods?”

Lee looked at Garcia, as she answered, “Yes. Though, speaking from years of experience. Going through that is not the end of the world. Compared to some of the experiences you have been through already, this will be more than a reoccurring annoyance, than anything else.”

Garcia responded, “I thought as much. And you were locked as a girl, when we left you. So, you have probably dealt with this for several years.”

Lee replied, “Yes.” She thought, 'I will leave out that with the gender bending virus, I no longer have to worry about such matters.'

Garcia asked, in an even tone of voice, “So, concerning this problem, how long until I have to worry about my first time?”

Lee answered, “From what I understand, a few months”

Fabiola commented, “Lee is correct about that. And you do not experience your first time until after we all returned to the Lovelace Plantation.”

Lee and Garcia looked back towards the maids.

There were a few seconds of awkward silence, with no one sure how to follow up Fabiola's comment.

Then, to everyone's mild surprised, Garcia happily said, “That means. Before I have to deal with such issues. I, and both of you, from my time, will be returning home in a few months. This is actually good news. And this will help my relationship with both of you. I will then understand what you both go through. And if you two can handle such problems every month, than so can I.”

Roberta and Fabiola looked over at Garcia, as they were both mildly put off guard by the way Garcia had responded to the matters she talked about.

Roberta hesitantly thought, 'This was not how I expect Garcia to response to such matters. Though, this does explain why she was unusually calm during her first period.'

Roberta complimented, in a warm, positive tone of voice, “Young master, your maturity continues to surprise me. I admit that I did not look at the matter that way.”

Fabiola thought, 'So Garcia, this is why you were so calm about having your period, for the first time. You had some of the usual physical problems, and you were a bit moody, but you were not as troublesome as Roberta and I expected you would be, during your first time.'

Garcia said, “I have come to realize that one much look on the better parts of life to remain sane.”

Roberta agreed, “Very true.”

Fabiola said, “I agree.”

Daiyu complimented, “That is a good philosophy to have.”

Garcia commented, “Also, Lee is has been locked as a girl since the day we have left her with the amazons. She is now an adult, with at least a decade and a half of life as a girl. Of which, she likely spent at least a decade, where she had to deal with this issue every month. So, she had gone through the same problems as the rest of us. And it is clear we will have eventually have further revenge on her.”

Lee thought, 'While they will eventually find out on their own, that I have the gender bending virus. As long as they don't know now, I should be find. Because by the time they found out, they would have had their revenge on me. With most, if not all, of their desire for revenge, being sated, by that time. And River, Chang, Pedro, and Matthew, know better than to say anything further on the matter.'

River thought, 'I believe you are correct, Lee.'

Pedro thought, 'Matthew and I are not going to mention that Lee can now change back and forth. Still, that is nothing compared to the fact that I am so happy that Garcia is taking the high road on this matter.'

Garcia continued, “And though, she does clearly survive and recover from that revenge, we probably were able to put our desire for revenge behind us during that night, and afterward. So, I suggest you both call off you hunt. And instead spend this time reflecting on how you wish to conduct you revenge on Lee, for that upcoming night... That is what I plan to do.”

Pedro thought, 'I guess I spoke too soon. Still, this might turn out for the best for us.'

Though, Roberta's thoughts were contrary to Pedro's thoughts, as Roberta mentally reflected, 'So, young master, you already realized what Lee was hinting at, about our future revenge against her. And even with that being the case, you are still taking the high road with her. I admire you for that.'

Matthew thought, 'I hope Garcia convinced Roberta and Fabiola to stand down, because, if they should decide to act, even if we are not the intended targets, we are going to be in real trouble.'

There was silence for a few seconds. Then, Roberta turned to her right, towards Fabiola's direction, as she asked, “What are your thoughts on this, Fabiola?”

Fabiola looked over at Roberta, as she admitted, “Garcia does make a good case. We will have revenge. It just won't be today. Also, it is clear that Chang and River care for Lee. And fighting them will only cause of trouble, with the others.”

Roberta pointed out, “Yes. And it was already clear River cared for Lee before we left Plata Podrido.”

Fabiola responded, “True. And Revy made a good point, then. We do not want to make River, Chang, and their friends our enemies. Especially, since it sounds like we will have our revenge in the near future. All we have to do, is show a little patience, and let Lee go, for now.”

Roberta sighed, as she said, “Fine. We will call off this hunt.”

Roberta and Fabiola turned to look at Lee, as Roberta coldly stated, “What Garcia has stated, does change matters. You have the young master to thank for mercy. Not us. We will be patient. We can wait a little while longer for revenge.”

Lee wisely chose to remain silent.

Roberta turned to Garcia, as she thought, 'Now, onto a more important matter, that should have been addressed sooner.'

Roberta said, “For now, we are more concerned with the young master. Who is from our past.” She continued, in a warmer tone of voice, “So, how have you been, young master?”

Garcia answered, “All things considered. I am doing fine.”

Roberta calmly replied, with a hint of kindness in her tone of voice, “I am pleased to hear that.”

Fabiola agreed, “So am I.” She then continued, in a slightly sadder tone of voice, “Though, I do feel sorry that you will have to keep the secrets you learned today from us, for many years.”

Garcia responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “Not to worry. I can keep a secret. And since I know we will all turn out okay, it will not be that heavy a burden to bare.”

Fabiola replied, in a somewhat more hopeful tone of voice, “I hope you are correct.”

Roberta said, “Still, we will have to talk to your future self, when we return to the plantation.”

Garcia stated, “That is a discussion that I will be looking forward to having with the two of you, in the years to come. Though, I do hope you will not be too upset that I will have to keep these secrets from you, for so long.”

Roberta responded, in a kind tone of voice, “We could never be truly upset with you.”

Fabiola agreed, “No. We would not.”

Garcia said, “Then, it will be a wonderful discussion.”

Fabiola stated, “Yes. Full of many things.” She looked over at Lee, then back to Garcia, as she continued, in a mischievous tone of voice, “Including, plans for revenge.”

Garcia grinned wickedly, as she agreed, “That too.”

Garcia, Roberta, and Fabiola, then giggled a little, for a few seconds.

As they calmed down, Roberta thought, 'Now, to deal with one last issue with this hunt.'

Roberta looked around at the others, as she firmly stated, “I suggest you all leave, before we change our minds.”

Daiyu said, “Don't worry, we were just going too.” She thought, 'We will catch Pedro and Matthew, later. For, we will head back to that wonderful hotel in Caracas. I am so happy River and Lee let me handle the check in. Because, I rented us our very nice suite for a week, and we only stayed six out of the seven days. And I never checked us out of there. And we have day left on our reservations. I had one of the keys to the suite. And we can always run the place out for a few more days, after that. We will just head back there a few hours after we left.'

River looked over at Daiyu, as she complimented, “That was very intelligent of you.”

Daiyu turned towards River, as she responded, “Thank you. Care if I do the honors.”

River realized what Daiyu as requesting, as she replied, “Go ahead.”

Lee looked over at River and Daiyu, as she asked, “So, where are we going?”

Daiyu looked over at Lee, as she answered, “Back to that nice hotel in Caracas, that we all liked.”

Lee replied, “That is fine with me.”

Lee and River then took a few steps closer to Daiyu, as Daiyu pulled out her own reality device, from one of her pants pockets.

Daiyu then thought of where, when, and what reality, she wanted to go to, as she pressed the red button on her device. And in an instant, all three women disappeared into the multiverse, in the blink of an eye.

Pedro overheard the three lovers. And with River gone, he allowed himself to think, 'So, I was right. They are using this as an excuse to go on vacation.'

Fabiola turned to Matthew and Pedro, as she inquired, “And you two?”

Pedro turned to Fabiola, as he requested, “We would like a minute to speak with Garibaldi and Garcia?”

Fabiola turned to Roberta, as she said, “Those two have been straightforward with us. I do not think it will hurt for them to talk with the young master and her friend, for a few minutes.”

Roberta turned to look at Fabiola, then back to Pedro, as she stated, “Fine. But, be quick. We will see the master and his charge leave, after you leave. Then, we will leave.”

Pedro said, “Thank you.” He thought, 'You are using the term, his. Though, I guess you view Garcia as male, no matter what Garcia's outer form is. And I will not fault you for that. Now, to deal with the matter at hand.'

Pedro and Matthew then turned to and looked down at Garibaldi and Garcia, whom were right beside them, as the two younger girls looked up at them.

Pedro said, “It is nice to meeting you both. I wish it was under better circumstances.”

Garibaldi responded, “Yes. I agree”

Garcia said, “I, as well. But, I do not believe we have been properly introduced?”

Pedro thought, 'She already knows enough to crucify Lee already, in the past. So, I guess it won't hurt.'

Pedro stated, “I am from the same reality as Lee. I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto, from Mexico, on the gulf northwestern coastline, in the early twenty-first century. You can call me, Pedro, Mister Lovelace.” He thought, 'I will use male pronouns, to help keep in the maids good graces. Considering, I am sure they are overhearing this various conversation.'

Garcia commented, in a polite tone of voice, “Garcia is fine. And thank you for calling me, by a masculine title, even given this form.”

Pedro replied, “Garcia, you are welcome.”

Garcia inquired, “How did you end up with Matthew, traveling the multiverse?”

Pedro answered, “It was my island city that all your... Friends decided to move too.”

Garcia stated, “That explains everything.”

Pedro let out a small chuckle. He then said, “I know. And it was Lee that lead them to my home town, in the first place.”

Garcia commented, “Given what Garibaldi has told me about Lee, that does not surprise me in the least.”

Garibaldi turned to Matthew, as she inquired, “So, how are you doing, Matthew?”

Matthew cracked a grin, as casually he responded, “I am doing fine, boss. Besides the obvious, how are you?”

Garibaldi shrugged, as she said, “I could be worse. If I had known that Lee would drag us both into this level of trouble, I would have never sent you to find and help him.”

Matthew commented, “It's okay. And just to let you know. The guy with me is on the level. You would like him. He is cut from the same cloth as you are.”

Garibaldi turned to look at Pedro. She then looked back at Matthew, as she replied, “I am sure.”

Pedro said, “Thank you, Matthew.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he replied, “You're welcome, Pedro.” He then looked back down at Garibaldi, as he asked, “So, it sounds like you have only been at this for a day?”

Garibaldi answered, “Yes. We have only been cursed for less than a day. For me, it has been around a day since I last saw you on Mars.” She then gave a childish yawn. She turned to Garcia, as she requested, “We really need to find some place to rest.”

Garcia turned to Garibaldi, as she responded, “I agree. The day is starting to catch up with me, as well. But, like we talked about, we will find a place to stay on our next reality jump.”

Garibaldi replied, “Agreed.”

The two girls then looked back up at the much taller men, as Garibaldi questioned, in a casual tone of voice, “So, how about yourself? How long has it been since you left Mars.”

Matthew sighed, as he said, “A lot longer.”

Garibaldi thought, 'I think it is best that I don't ask him exactly how long. I know I am not going to like the answer. Because, from what it sounds like, with our conversation with Chang and River, it has been a long time. Though, it cannot be that long. He does not look that much older since I last saw him. Besides, I have my own problems, to deal with, for the moment.'

Garibaldi commented, “Well, I am sorry to hear that.”

Matthew replied, “Well, as I said before. It has not been that bad. And I am not that worried on the matter.'

(_)

Nearby, with her enhanced hearing, Roberta overheard conversation happening among the four person group.

Roberta thought, with admiration, 'The manners these two men are displaying towards the young master and Garibaldi are impeccable. So, I will give them their time together... For now.'

(_)

At that moment, among the four person group, Garcia look from Matthew to Garibaldi, as she inquired, “What exactly is the story behind you two, when it comes to Lee? Matthew, Garibaldi didn't mention you, until just now? And how are you connect to Chang and River?”

Garibaldi and Matthew looked at each other, as Matthew requested, “Can I tell her?”

Garibaldi replied, “Sure. Go ahead.”

Garibaldi and Matthew turned to look at Garcia, as Matthew stated, “Before I was kidnapped, and made to work for my current employer. Chang. Which is not that bad a job. I worked for Garibaldi here. Which was an even better job. Anyway, I was the lawyer sent by Garibaldi here, to go to a police station, to legally represent, Lee. And then your two friends over there attack the police station, and I ended up riding shotgun, down the highway, with Lee driving, while Roberta chased us.”

Garcia replied, “I will admit, I have been in such a chase. And it can be stressful.”

Matthew flatly said, “To say the least. Anyway, we made it to Edgars Industries Headquarters, which forced Roberta to called off the chase, for a time. I then immediately demanded a vacation. So, I could get off world.”

Garibaldi commented, “A vacation I did give him.”

Matthew went onto say, “Yes. Mister Garibaldi was nice enough to grant my request for a vacation. I then get a company car, and headed back to my apartment to pack. The next thing I know, a few hours later, Edgars HQ is under attack, and my boss here goes missing. Then, on my way to my car, to head to the spaceport, I get picked up by two of Chang's subordinates, and the rest is history.”

Garcia thought, 'That answers my questions.' She said, “I am glad you came out of it in one piece.”

Matthew flatly stated, “So am I.” He looked at Garibaldi, as he continued, “And I have a feeling that you will return home someday. And I may someday return, as well.”

Garibaldi looked up at Matthew, as she responded, “I hope so. But first, Garcia and I have to find a cure to this curse. Even though, Lee and the others said we would fail. We still have to try. So, I have to ask, what are your thoughts on this?”

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he said, “Pedro, you know a lot more about this, than I. So, I am leaving the explanation to you.” He then turned back to look at the two girls.

Pedro heard Matthew request, as he continued look at Garcia and Garibaldi. Pedro weighed his options, as he thought, 'I am not surprised you would, Matthew. And that is a good question, Garibaldi. Still, I can think of some solutions. But then, those solutions might create a paradox. Though, I have an idea that might be amendable to both preventing a paradox, and be beneficial to Garibaldi and Garcia, here.'

Pedro stated, “That is easier said than done. But, you might concern making this curse work for you.”

Garibaldi inquired, “How so?”

Pedro suggested, “Well, you could find a way to use the youth of your girl form, to transfer some of that youth to your older male body. In that your female form will be a young adult. I would say that around twenty, is a good number. While your male form will be in your thirties to forties.”

Garibaldi thought about what Pedro said for a few seconds. She then grinned, ear to ear, as she happily complimented, “That is a very good idea.”

Garibaldi though, 'In that case, when I return home, I could be with my family even longer. And it wouldn't be so bad to be in this female form, if it wasn't so young. If I was an adult in both forms. With my male form no longer an old man. It would spice up love life with my wife, no matter what form I was in. But, will Garcia be okay for me to looking for someone to do just that?”

Garibaldi turned to Garcia, as she asked, “Garcia, I think I will go that route, instead. If it is okay with you?”

Garcia looked over at Garibaldi, as she responded, “That is fine... Actually, I think that is a good idea. That way you would be able to live longer, and make the most out of both your forms.”

Pedro thought, 'I think will refrain from mentioning the rejuvenation therapy that Ed, Fabiola, and your future self used, Garcia. Because, that therapy has risks. Lee told me that Jet had a bad reaction to it. Which forced Jet to undergo the vat process to save his life, which turned him into a woman. Though, it is nice to have options for myself, in the future, which do not require gender bending.'

'Still, Matthew and I need to help push this idea for Garibaldi and Garcia.'

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he asked, “What are you thoughts on this?”

Matthew noticed Pedro had directed his question towards him. He turned to Pedro, as he replied, “Your idea has merit.” He turned to look at Garibaldi, as he continued, “And a good employer is a rare thing. I would prefer that Garibaldi return to his, or her, position, for a few more years. Maybe even longer.”

Garibaldi and Garcia turned to look up at the two men, as Garibaldi happily replied, “Thanks for you vote of confidence.”

Matthew complimented, “It is well earned.”

Garibaldi gave Matthew a warm smile in response.

Garcia asked, “I do have one question that I believe you two can answer, that I believe the others will not. Lee said that she know knows Ranma, and that Ranma is now a her. And it is clear that Lee and Chang are living as women, as well. So, I have to know, are we going to start to want to live as women?”

Garibaldi stated, “Yea. That thought occurred to me, as well. We want to know the answer to this question. It would definitely put a crimp in my marriage, if that is the case.”

Pedro noticed Matthew look at him, as well.

Pedro thought, with mild resignation, 'Yea, Matthew. I know you want me to answer this question. And talk about dropping a grenade in one's lap.'

Pedro answered, “While the answer is complicated. Fortunately, everything I know for you two, is the answer is, no. Garibaldi, you have spent literally a lifetime as a man. Unless you didn't like being a man, which I doubt is the case. Then, you are going to be a man, upstairs, for the rest of your life. And Garcia, everything your two friends...”

Pedro looked over at the maids, and then back to Garcia and Garibaldi, as he continued, “Have mentioned in passing about you, they have said that you are still living as a man, well into your adulthood.”

Garibaldi let out a breath, as she said, “That is a relief.”

Garcia asked, with relief evident in her tone of voice, “I agree. Though, what about Ranma, Chang, and Lee?”

Pedro said, “While I have met Ranma. I do not know her that well. I am not really sure why she lives as a woman. To be honest, I blame her father, Genma, for his twisted teachings towards Ranma as a child. That woman are soft and give into the temptations that life offers. While a man should know only a life of hardship.”

“And while all four of us know that is total bullshit. At the time, Ranma did not.”

“Now, throw in the girl curse, and a few years for Ranma to realize that women are not that much different than men, upstairs. And it would not much for Ranma to decide between hardship as man, or a pleasant life as a woman, that he would start choosing to live as a she.”

Garibaldi stated, “I can see that. And you clearly built a profile of Ranma on the fly.”

Pedro responded, “My job as Police Chief was similar to your job as Chief of Security on Babylon Five. In both jobs, we were paid to build profiles on people, to avoid trouble for our cities.”

Garibaldi shrugged, as she replied, “True. And Chang and Lee?”

Pedro stated, “While Chang was a women when you met her just now. Back in my home town, Chang is usually a man. And he acts like a man. Most of the time.”

Matthew commented, “Pedro is correct about that. At the casino where I work, and Chang is the owner and boss. Chang is almost always a man. Unless Chang is doing something intimate with River and Lee.”

Garibaldi replied, “Oh...”

Garcia commented, “I did not need to know that.”

Matthew said, “We agree.”

Pedro stated “That being said. Chang is likely a woman right now to avoid accidentally running into her past self, and being recognized by him, or someone else from the past.”

Garibaldi agreed, “That would make since. And Lee?”

Pedro went onto say, “Well Lee... I am not so sure. After knowing Lee for a few years, I can say that I have my suspicions, but I do not wish to share such opinions with others.” He thought, 'I suspect Lee is a male-to-female transsexual. But, I am not going to state that out loud in front of people that are planning to have revenge on her... She still is a friend of mine.'

Garibaldi replied, “I understand you position.”

Garcia thanked Pedro and Matthew, “Thank you for your answers on this matter, gentlemen.”

Pedro said, “You're welcome, Garcia, Garibaldi.”

Matthew replied, “Any time, Garibaldi, Garcia.”

Pedro thought, 'Now, to get to a topic I have been wanting to talk to you about. But, I don't want to be to forward about this.' He calmly stated, “Now, not to ruin the mood. But, even though you both are in the bodies of young girls, it is nice to meet you both. I am a big fan of the both of you.”

Garibaldi commented, “Except for Lee, and Garcia here. I have yet to meet any of my fans. At least those who know who I really am.”

Pedro thought, 'Perhaps, you should count yourself lucky on that. Still, I wonder?...' He inquired, “So, do both of you plan to see your series?”

Garcia answered, “Yes.”

Garibaldi answered, “Yes. We plan too.”

Garcia commented, “Given we have both seen the other series, and mine is short, we will start with mine.”

Pedro cautioned, “Be careful. Some of it will not be pleasant for you to watch. The tail in end of the series deals with Roberta's returned to Roanapur. With you and Fabiola following her. And the aftermath.”

Garcia replied, “Thank you for the warning. Lee said something similar to me.”

Garibaldi commented, “Yes. We warned me, as well.”

Pedro stated, “I don't doubt that. It doesn't take a genius to figure out that while Lee is as messed up as everyone else in this mess. She does not want to see harm come to others.”

Garcia said, in a sober tone of voice, “I am beginning to realize that.”

Pedro mentioned, “Also Garibaldi. About your series, Babylon Five. The end of season three, and the first half of season four deals with that whole Bester mess, over him brainwashing you to betray your friends. And when you watch season five, everyone agrees that season five was a mess. And that is when you are shown to fall off the wagon for a while.”

Garibaldi stated, “I will keep that in mind.”

Pedro stated, “Also, you need to check out the Black Lagoon omakes. Animated shorts. The subtitled anime versions are much better than the manga versions. Though, from what I understand...” He thought, 'From what I read of Lee's stories.' He continued, “There are english dubs of those omakes. I believe using the same north american cast as the series, itself, uses. And I prefer that cast to the original japanese dub cast.”

Garcia asked, “Interesting. Though, why did you want us to watch those animated shorts?”

Pedro stated, “Besides the omakes being extremely funny. Such as, from a purely platonic way, Roberta looks cute in a school girl uniform. Almost as cute as Eda in a cheerleader uniform.”

Suddenly, in the distance, Roberta burst out laughing, for a few seconds.

Pedro thought, 'That confirms she has been eavesdropping on us. Not that I blame her, given she and Fabiola are concern for the welfare of Garcia here.'

As Roberta started to calm down, in the distance, Pedro stated, “Believe it or not, Lee did not coming up with her gender bending ideas for you and your friends. She got them from watching the Boys and Girls omake, by you creator, whose alias is, Tex-Mex. Yes. Like the food.”

Pedro then mentally realized, 'Now, that I think about it. A number of the series that are in Lee's stories have an undercurrent, and recurring jokes about food. Half the trouble Ranma had in her series dealt with food in someway.'

'Tex-Mex is a type food. Pretty good food. And as it is a cultural hybrid of Mexican and U.S. dish. Which is kind of what Black Lagoon is. A hybrid of many different actions genres and concepts. Then, there was a running gag that Revy liked the china bowl soup at the Kao Han restaurant, in Roanapur.'

'And there is the whole Swedish meatball running gag in the Babylon Five series. Where most of the major alien races has their own version of Swedish meatballs, by various names. Made from various ingredients. Though, each dish tastes just like Swedish meatballs.'

'Given that the Vorlons had a hand in the development of those races, in that reality. Maybe the Vorlons just liked that dish. Or, they did it as a joke. Or, it could just be a joke by JMS, or someone on the B Five creator staff.'

'Though, these are mysteries for another time. That I really don't have time to get into right now. As, this is not the proper place and time to do so.'

Garcia said, in slightly shocked, “Huh?... You're kidding?” He thought, 'And my creator took an alias, after a type of food. That is just embarrassing.'

Pedro responded, “No. I'm not. Though, just be happy that unlike you female counterpart. That as a girl. Lee did not give you long, curly golden locks, tied back in a big red bow. Along with a cute, frilly light violet colored dress, and red pendent necklace around your neck.”

Garcia hesitantly said, “Perhaps I have misjudged, Lee.” She thought, 'I have no interest in wearing such a dress. Even in jest. Nor, growing out my hair. Let along putting it in curls.'

Pedro replied, “Don't feel bad. We all have.”

Garcia asked, “Given that revelation. I have to know. Is my creator insane? If so, it would explain a lot.”

Pedro answered, “I don't know for sure, but all of us sometimes wonder that. And if you visit my reality, you need to check out Lee's stories on the web. They are titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse. While I don't know about Tex-Mex. I can confirm that Lee is insane.”

Garcia said, “I am not surprised. Garibaldi, here, mentioned Lee's stories. And from what he has told me, these stores are very twisted. And from what little I know of Lee. I could tell that she is mentally unbalanced.”

Pedro thought, 'To say the least. Though, about Lee's stories.' Pedro commented, “Yes. Those stories are likely more twisted, than Garibaldi hinted at.” He mentally reflected, 'And very funny. But, I am not going to say that, in front of you two, and the maids.'

Garcia inquired, “So, you said your home reality and time the same as Lee?”

Pedro said, “Yes. I am from an island city in Mexico called, De La Plata Podrido.”

Garcia questioned, “Of the Rotten Silver?”

Pedro answered, “Yes.

Garcia asked, “And where is Lee from?”

Pedro replied, “I am not sure myself. Though, I do know that Lee is from somewhere in the southeastern United States.”

Garibaldi flatly said, “Lee is a redneck.”

Pedro agreed, “I would say that, as well. But, she does know her manners.”

Garibaldi replied, “I will give you that one.”

Garcia commented, “Well, since we need to check out all this. I think we should held to your reality, Pedro.”

Garibaldi said, “I am okay with that.”

Pedro commented, “You're more than welcome too.”

Garibaldi said, “Well, I guess we will get going.”

Pedro stated, “Same here. But, before we part. I want to say to you, Garibaldi, that you're an inspiration to me. You went through the ringer, and you came out smelling like a rose.”

Garibaldi replied, “Thanks.” She then extended her small right hand towards Pedro.

Pedro used his right hand to firmly shake Garibaldi smaller hand.

As they shook hands, Pedro mentally noted, 'Her hand is small. But, the grip is firm.'

Garibaldi thought, 'He is a firm grip. But, it feels like he is slightly varying his grip, because he does not want risk harming my small hand. I can appreciate that.'

A few seconds later, they broke the handshake. Pedro said, “Maybe, if we see each other again. Someday, we can come to visit you both. When you are both male and adults. We will have a few drinks, with you being the designated driver, Garibaldi.”

Garibaldi smiled, as she happily stated, “That sounds like fun.”

Garcia said, “Maybe, we will. Well, good luck Pedro and Matthew.”

Matthew replied, “You too, Garcia, and Garibaldi. And we will likely see each other again. If not, it was nice seeing you again, boss.”

Garibaldi replied, “Same here, Matthew.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he said, “Let's heard out, first.”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he replied, “That works for me.”

Matthew and Pedro then turned and walked away from both Garibaldi and Garcia, and towards the center of the alleyway.

As they walked, they kept their distance from Roberta and Fabiola, while they looked at the maids. With the maids looking back at them.

The two men came to a stop, as they turned around to looked at Garcia and Garibaldi, whom were also look at them.

Matthew asked, “So, where to next?”

Pedro casually said, “I could use a cup of coffee”

Matthew calmly suggested, “Well, we have the entire multiverse, to choose from, to get a cup of coffee. So, let us do this with some style. Have you ever had a cup of coffee from a real New York City diner, in the evening, after dark?”

Pedro answered, “No. I have not. How about you?”

Matthew commented, “Nope. But, it sounds like a good idea.”

Pedro let out a laugh, as he pulled out his reality device, from a pocket. Pedro cracked a grin, as he agreed, “Yes. It does.”

Pedro then thought of going to a modern, New York City diner, in the evening, after dark, as he pressed the red button on the device.

Both men then disappeared, as they immediately jumped to another reality.

(_)

After the four other girls watched the two men disappear, Garibaldi turned to Garcia, as she said, “I have a feeling that our lives are going to even become more exciting from now on.”

Garcia looked over at her friend, as she said, “I agree. And for us, that is saying something.”

Garibaldi pulled out her reality device, from one of her pants pockets, as she asked, “So, were do you want to go?”

Garcia suggested, “Let's check out Pedro and Lee's home reality. Pedro's home city might be a good start. But, let's head there before everyone we know settled in that city. Maybe a few months after Lee first arrived there.”

Garibaldi replied, “Sounds nice. From the way Matthew treats his friend, Pedro, I am sure Pedro has a good handle on his city. I am starting to respect that man. Though, we will have to avoid the others.”

Garcia commented, “That should not be too hard. As far as everyone is concerned. We are not suppose to be there. They don't know you have a girl form. And I will key and eye out, so they don't spot me.”

Garibaldi stated, “That should work. And Lee did mention that we will meet him, in the past. And I looking forward to see him there. In the situation, Lee mentioned.” She thought, 'I believe it is best I don't mention to the maids that Lee said I will get to beat up his past self, as a little girl. While they will get a laugh out of it. It might give them ideas. And they already have plenty of ideas on dealing with Lee.'

Garcia replied, “I agree.” She thought, 'And though I will stop the fight. I will enjoy watching it for a few seconds. Though, I will have to make it look like I am sincere in stopping the fight. But, that will not be a problem. Now, onto another matter.'

Garcia said, “I can also translate for you. And given that we will be in Mexico. I can get us a room at a decent hotel, in the city. Along with some food, clothing, and a computer. We will also make sure that the hotel has access to the internet, so we can read Lee's crazy stories.”

Garibaldi responded, “That all sounds good. Though, just make sure it is a small hotel. If we get the nice hotel, we will likely bump your friends. Whom will probably be staying at a nicer hotel.”

Suddenly, Roberta stated, “Avoid the Devil's Hotel, on the north end of the island, and the other large hotel on the south end of the island. They are on opposite ends of the islands. I suggest one of the smaller hotels on the island, in the middle of the city. Also, avoid the Rats Next bar, and the food truck by the beach. Lee and Lee's friends like to go to the Rats Nest. And Eda and Yolanda ran that food truck as a way to try to trap Lee.”

Roberta thought, 'I cannot stop them from going. But, at least I can warn them. And I won't mention Lee's friend Sam, is River. Because, they might react negatively, and blow River's cover in front of Lee. Thus creating a paradox. At least, with the way things have played out. We will have our revenge. We just have to wait a little while longer.'

Garcia looked over at Roberta and Fabiola, as she smiled at them. She said, “Thank you, Roberta. I look forward to seeing you, and Fabiola, in the future.”

The two maids warmly smiled towards Garcia, as Fabiola responded, “We feel the same way, young master.”

Roberta maintained her smile, as she said, “Yes. We do.”

Garcia replied, “I will see you both, later.”

Garcia turned to Garibaldi, as requested, in an excited tone of voice, “Please, get out of here. I cannot wait for the future to get here, so I can be reunited with my friends.”

Garibaldi let out a laugh. She then said, in a casual tone of voice, “Ah. The impetuousness of youth. How I have forgotten that.”

Garibaldi then thought Pedro and Lee's home reality. Being on a sidewalk, in the middle of the city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, around noon. A few months after Lee first came to that city.

Garibaldi held that thought, as she pushed the red button on her reality device, with Garcia and herself, immediately disappearing, by jumping to another reality.

After Roberta and Fabiola watched Garcia and Garibaldi leave, they turned to look at each other.

Fabiola asked, in spanish, “So, what do we go now? It is not exactly like we can still go after Lee. She is in that amazon village, now. And I am not going to fight them, to get Lee. They are too dangerous. Besides, we learned from that future Lee, that we will have our revenge on her. And we know where to find her in her future. So, if she is lying, we can go after her.”

Roberta calmly stated, in spanish, “I realize that, as well. Perhaps, we should return to Lagoon Island, and keep quiet about this, until we speak with the young master. Until, we have our revenge.”

A thought then occurred to Fabiola, as she happily suggested, “While I agree on keeping quiet, about this, except for the young master. I just had an idea. We still need to blow off some steam. How about we do a little traveling first.”

“We can make a vacation trip out of the hunt we are now having. And we can use this time to think of what we are going to tell the others. Because, we clearly cannot tell them we met Lee from the future, and she is now with Chang and River. We might accidentally start a war between Revy's group and Chang's group. And it would possibly cause a paradox.”

Roberta responded, “You are likely correct. For the sake of our friends, we do need to come up with a cover story. Or, we just need not tell them anything at all.” She warmly smiled, as she continued, in a calmer, more relaxed tone of voice, “But, I do like your idea of taking a break, and going on vacation, before we return. It would be fun, and would take our minds off our troubles.”

“And given that it is clear that Garcia already realized what was going on, long before we left to hunt Lee. And that we will have our revenge on Lee, in the future. Our quest for vengeance is a moot point.”

Roberta then dropped her grin, as she asked, in a slightly confused tone of voice, “Though, what I don't understand about giving up on this hunt, is why don't I feel empty about the situation?”

Fabiola pointed out, “Because, Garcia is okay with the situation we are in. He knows what we have done, before we did it. So, we don't have to explain our situation to him, when we return. Because we have nothing to hide. Thus, our relationship with him is intact.”

“And now that I think about. As a girl, when Garcia had her first period. The two of us were more frantic about the situation, than she was.”

Roberta said, “True. She was unusually calm. And after tonight. I understand why. Because, she already knew to expect it.”

Fabiola replied, “Exactly.”

Roberta calmly requested, with more certainty in her tone of voice, “Though, let us not think about such matters, right now. Now Fabiola, where do you want to go?”

Fabiola smiled, as she responded, in a relaxed, happy, tone of voice, “How about we just stay here for a few hours? Enjoy the party, as we decide where to go to next.”

Roberta complimented, “That sounds like a good idea.”

Roberta and Fabiola then casually started walking, side by side. They soon exited the alleyway, and into the crowds of people, as the two women began to have a good time at Mardi Gras. While they left their worries behind them.

To be continued.

Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 6: “The Mexican, The Lawyer, And The Mechanic.”

Volume 1: “The Heroes.”

Chapter 06: “Shades of Crazy.”

By Paul Cousins.

Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's home reality. Date, a week after Revy fought Hernan. Place, the Devil's Hotel, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Time, late morning, close to noon.

Inside the suite that Revy and Rock shared, Revy sat clothed, and alone, at the foot of her bed she shared with her lover, with her green boots, she had on, touching the carpeted floor.

She sat in the dark. The only light coming from the outline of the curtains to the window of her suite, which lead to the balcony.

She was suppose to already head down to the hotel restaurant, to meet with Rock, their family, and friends, for some lunch.

Instead, she was still in her room, sitting in the dark, as she thought over the offer a woman she met a week ago, had given to her.

Revy in such deep thought, she did not feel like having a cigarette, nor drink. Considering, she felt those items might distract her from her train of thought.

The mysterious woman had to give Revy the name, location, and proper time, of where the police officer would be, whom had falsely arrested her as a child, and raped her in a jail cell, while she was handcuffed.

But, Revy was a much more intelligent woman then most people gave her credit for. She knew that the price for the offer might be too high for her.

The offer had strings attached to it. That in exchange for the information she wanted, she would have to help the woman's organization. And Revy knew if things went bad, offering such aid might destroy her family and everything else she had built in her life, since her life had been shattered as a child.

So, it came down to Revy having to choose between her past and her future.

While Revy reflected on the decision, she was becoming annoyed with herself, as she thought, 'Shit! I really just need to decide. It has been a week, and that woman will likely show up soon, and she will want an answer. At least she had not shown back up. So, I have a little time left.'

'But, I cannot decide. That bastard needs to pay. But, if I do help them, it could get back to my family and friends, and that would risk wrecking everything I have built since then.'

'Pedro said, I would might some day have to make this choice. And it looks like he was right. And I cannot talk to anyone about this, or the deal is off.'

'I hate it when I have to make important life decisions on my own...'

'Fuck it! This all comes down to what I consider most important in my life. My past, and revenge. Or my future, and my family. I just need to decide what is important, and let the cards land where they may...'

She then thought over her options and weighed her choices.

Around half a minute later, she finally decided, as she thought, 'I will tell her that. I will give her my answer. Because, I never really had any no choice at all.'

'Now, to get some lunch, with my family, and friends. Especially, Rock, and our children.'

Revy got up from her bed, and heading for the door to her suite, that lead into the hallway. She opened the door, walked through the doorway, and into the hallway. She then closed the door, as she turned, and headed to the front elevator bay. The elevators there would take to the ground floor, where the restaurant was located, and she could join her family and friends for lunch.

(_)

An hour later, across town at Hernan's autoshop, Hernan Pena was in his coveralls, gloves, boots, and sunglasses.

Front of the automotive shop, garage bays were open, but the bay on the far end, to the right, was empty. With the car being in the left automotive bay. And the office of the building was attached to the left of the automotive bay the car was in.

In Hernan was in his two bay automotive garage, he working on a car, in the left bay.

While it was lunch time, Hernan had decided to continue working on a car, until he felt like eating something.

The front of the car was facing the outside of the automotive bay, with the front hood up, and to allow Hernan to work on the engine of the car.

Hernan was leaning over the front of the car, so he could install a new belt on the engine.

Hernan did not have any music playing in his autoship, because he had a lot on his mind, as he installed the new belt onto the engine.

Hernan mentally grumbled, 'It has been a week since I have had my life turned upside down, and I still haven't figured out how to to Maria and our kids the truth. That Maria and I are gender swapped counter part of Garcia and Roberta, of the Black Lagoon fiction series.'

'Though, my time with Roberta has been good. We seem to get alone well, as friends, and I guess, siblings. Considering we are reality counterparts to each other. We have had a few lunches, a few dinners, and some conversations here, about how we should handle this situation.'

'This would not be so difficult if the explanation was not so insane.'

'And while Maria has only see parts of the Black Lagoon anime series. Though, none that dealt with Roberta. And our children, fortunately, have not seen any of that series. Because, they are too young. Maria said she did not care for that series. And I can understand why. It is just not her cup of tea.'

'I admit, I was a fan, until I found out my connection to that series. I believe that the phrase. There but for the grace of God, go I. Would apply to my connection to Roberta.'

'Given the randomness of the multiverse, with a simple role of the dice, I could have ended up being Roberta, and she could have ended up being me. The same goes for Maria and Garcia. And that has kept me up, and awake, a few nights, in the last week.'

'And while Roberta, and a few of the other girls, have been nice enough to talk to me, on how I should handle this, none of us have come up with a plan. Though, Roberta said she was going to travel back to her home reality, and visit Garcia. To see what he would have to say on the subject.'

'But, even if we come up with a plan, those are not the most serious problems I am going to have to tell Maria. I would also have to eventually explain Lee's stories to Maria. Though, I am not going to tell our kids about those twisted stories, until they are much older. Those stories might give them ideas I don't want to them to have, until they are mature enough to understand the ramifications of those ideas.'

'Still, no matter what I do. Roberta will have to be a part of what happens. And we will have to make the best possible first impressions, and introductions for Roberta, to my family. Fortunately, I know Roberta can do nice. And she can act like a lady. Just upsetting her is a very bad idea.'

Hernan then was able to finally get belt fully onto the engine.

As Hernan was checking to make sure the belt fit snugly, a person walked up from behind him.

The person casually said, in a female voice, in spanish, “You are leaving yourself completely open to attack.”

Hernan recognized the voice. He smiled, as he finished putting on the belt. He leaned up, out from under the hood. As he stood up straight, he closed the hood of the car.

Hernan then turned around to see Roberta standing ten feet away from him.

Roberta was wearing casual clothing, which consisted of, among other items, brown cowgirl boots, blue jeans, and a white blouse.

Hernan greeted Roberta, in spanish, “Hello Roberta.”

Roberta inquired, “Hello Hernan. I guess you still haven't figured out how to tell you family the truth about all that has happened?”

Hernan casually responded, “Pretty obvious? Isn't it?”

Roberta said, “Yes. And I came by to tell you that I spoke to Garcia on the matter.”

Hernan asked, “So, what did Garcia have to say?”

Roberta answered, “We came up with a plan.”

Hernan requested, “I am more than open to hearing your plan.”

Roberta stated, “The plan is simple. In a few days, it will be Saturday. That morning, after you family has gotten up, and eaten breakfast, I will come by. And together, we will explain things to your wife, and your children. Then, to help with your claims, we will convince them to take a quick vacation.”

“All of you will get packed, and I will take you and your family to visit Garcia in his plantation for a few days. And with time dilation mechanics, all of you return here a few hours, later, local time. So, this little trip will not disrupt their daily schedules.”

Hernan was quiet for a few seconds, as he thought over Roberta and Garcia's plan. He then said, “This is not a bad plan. But, I am not sure that would be the proper course of action. That would be a lot to take in for my family, in a short amount.”

Roberta commented, “Sometimes when a person wants to go swimming, that person has to first dive in the deep end.”

Hernan pointed out, “But, that person first needs to know how to swim.”

Roberta said, “That is why I will be with you, as we explain these matters to your family.”

Hernan commented, “Well, they are your family, as well.”

Roberta corrected herself, as she stated, “Our family. And thank you.”

Hernan said, “You're welcome. And if we are going to do this, I won't pack, beforehand. To make it seem visiting Garcia is more of a suggestion on short notice, by you.”

Roberta replied, “That would be wise.”

Hernan inquired, “Also, is Garcia okay with us visiting him on short notice?”

Roberta answered, “Garcia said he was more than open to having our entire family coming to meet him, and spend a few days in his, and my, home. Which is a very nice plantation house. Garcia even commented that he is actually looking forward to you and your family's visit. And I promise, I will be on my best behavior, during my time with our family.”

Hernan said, in a kind tone of voice, “I am not worried about that. And now that I think about it. We will do it your way.”

Roberta smiled at Hernan, as she responded, in a slightly happy tone of voice, “I am so happy that we with agree on this.”

Hernan returned Roberta's smile, as he calmly asked, “Of course. Now, onto another matter, I wish to ask you about. Out of pure curiosity. Given you know people at the casino on the island. I was wondering. What are odds at in the casino, on us fighting?”

Roberta coyly inquired, “How did you know I checked?”

Hernan casually replied, “When is comes to such matters, I believe I know how you think. Because that is what I would do, in your position.”

Roberta happily responded, “Well, you clearly do know how I think. Because I did check. The odds are that there is forty percent chance we have a fight in the next thirty days. And I am favored to win, two to one.”

Hernan said, “While I won't argue the odds of you beating me. Given your enhancements. Though, they clearly don't know us.”

Roberta stated, “No. They do not. We wouldn't fight each other. We would fight everyone else, but our loved ones. But, not each other.”

Hernan commented, “You are correct. Woe be it to the fool that pisses both of us off.”

Roberta gave Hernan a wicked grin, as she replied, “I know.”

Hernan inquired, “So, where is Fabiola? I have been looking forward to meeting her. So far, I have not asked about her, out of politeness. But, it has been a week since I met all of you. And I am beginning to grow a little concerned. Also, I wonder what she will have to say about this situation?”

Roberta answered, “I do not mind you asking about her. Unfortunately, Fabiola is on an extended errand for Annie, in the multiverse.”

Hernan raised any eyebrow, as he inquired, “For Vader?”

Roberta sighed, as she responded, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “Please, don't call Annie, Vader, Darth, or any other name that reminds her of her past.”

Hernan flatly said, “Okay I won't.”

Roberta mentioned, “Annie has become a very nice woman.”

Hernan pointed out, “That is not speaking too highly, given some of the women we know.”

Roberta stated, “I will give you that one. Though, it is not what you think. Fabiola has gone looking for one of Annie's friends.”

Hernan guessed, “She went after Matthew and Pedro?”

Roberta answered, “Yes.”

Hernan complimented, “That makes sense. She would be my second choice in tracking someone. Next to you.”

Roberta responded, “Thank you for the vote of confidence toward Fabiola, and myself. Also, I am sure Fabiola will like meeting you and your family. She does adore children.”

Hernan replied, “That is good to hear.”

Roberta offered, “I haven't had lunch, yet. Would you like to get a bite to eat?”

Hernan answered, “Sure. I wouldn't mind coming with you. So, we can talk, while we eat. I just need a few minutes to lock of here.”

Roberta happily suggested, “Good. We will take my car.”

Hernan said, “That will be fine.”

Hernan then began closed his up autoshop.

A few minutes later, they were both in Roberta's car, which had been parked across the street from Hernan's shop.

Roberta then drove them to a nearby restaurant, so they could get something to eat, while they talked on various topics, including on how they should break the news to the rest of the Pena family.

(_)

Reality, unknown. Date, unknown, sometime around the turn of the second millennium AD. Place, New York City, New York, United States Time, night time, right after midnight.

The next thing Pedro and Matthew know, after the jumped reality, from New Orleans, during Mardi Gras, in the Star Trek reality, They were on a well lit, deserted sidewalk, of a three lane street. With the light coming from both the nearby buildings, and the streetlights.

As Pedro and Matthew look around, the two men saw it was nighttime, with a cloudy overcast. Also, they noticed they were surrounded by very tall buildings, and that there was no one the other side of the street. With only a few vehicles passing by, on both sides of the street. With not vehicles parked on the street.

In addition, they noticed that the temperature was cool, but not cold, as a slight wind blew through the streets, between the buildings, like the streets were canyons to mountains.

Matthew and Pedro turned to each other, as Pedro put away his reality device, into a pocket.

Pedro said, “I regret not being able to spent some time at Mardi Gras, with you. That looked like a fun party.”

Matthew responded, “I know. But, the heat was too hot to stay there. We had both the maids and trio there. We could not stay.”

Pedro questioned, “Oh. I agree. And did you hear what Chang said in the end?”

Matthew stated, “Yea. You were right. They are using this as an excuse to go on vacation.”

Pedro said, “Yes. And that means I have no problems with using this as our vacation, as well.”

Matthew commented, “I can go along with that. Though, I wondering something about the maids.”

Pedro stated, in a halfhearted mannered, “That can be a dangerous subject to talk about.”

Matthew responded, “I know. But, we are realities away from them. And they are not interested in us. Roberta outright said she and Fabiola were fine with us. If we don't get in their way. So, as long as we don't gossip about them, with others, we should be fine.”

Pedro asked, “Well, when you put it that way. You make a good point. So, what is on your mind about them?”

Matthew began, “Well, we know that Fabiola wears those shorts under her maid's uniform...”

Pedro spoke up, “They are called, boyshorts. Don't ask. I don't know why a type of women's underwear is named, boyshorts, either.”

Matthew commented, “It is probably one of those mysteries that is best left unknown.”

Pedro inquired, “I agree. Now, you were saying?”

Matthew asked, “I was wondering what undergarments that Roberta might be wearing under her maids uniform?”

Pedro was silent for a few seconds, as he thought about Matthew question. He then commented, “Knowing Roberta's extreme passive-aggressive personality. She likely wears some type of black lace lingerie underneath her maids uniform. Both panties and bra. Such undergarments are both very aggressive clothing, in its own way. While being very revealing, making one be more modest towards their self.”

Matthew replied, “I can see that. And with her figure, and the size of her breasts, she would look great in such clothing.”

Pedro said, “I know. She would look great. But, that is not a view worth dying for.”

Matthew questioned, “Correct. It is not worth dying over. Though, it is wrong to fantasized about a crazy woman that has tried to kill you? Because, I have had such thoughts about a few of the women we know. Including, Roberta and Fabiola. And thinking of Roberta possibly wearing black lace lingerie underneath her clothing does not help matters.”

Pedro responded, “I know. And it is definitely not healthy. But, given those are the types of women we have been forced into associating with, day in, day out. It is a natural reaction for us heterosexual men to have errant fantasies about such women. Just don't let such fantasies effect your judgment, and you should be fine.”

Matthew said, “Oh, I agree. And I won't. So, what type of bra do you think Fabiola wears?”

Pedro admitted, “I have no clue. She is so sane, that she could wear just about any type of bra. Though, given how practical she is. She likely wears some form of sport bra, when she is doing activities.”

Matthew said, “I can see that. Though, it has occurred to me. There have got to be places in the multiverse that both of us would like to go, just to say we have been there.”

Pedro commented, “You know how some people have a little black book of former lovers.”

Matthew replied, “Yea.” He thought, with mild curiosity, 'I wonder where this is going?'

Pedro stated, “When I was a kid, I made a little black book about all the places I would like to go, that I could only read about in a book, or saw on TV.”

Matthew teased, “You were a fanboy long before Lee showed up.”

Pedro casually admitted, “Me and my younger brother, both were.”

Matthew inquired, “So, how thick was the book?”

Pedro answered, “Let's just say it was thick and heavy enough to use as a doorstop.”

Matthew questioned, “So, where is the book?”

Pedro responded, “Unfortunately, I haven't seen it in years. The last I saw it was when I packed it up in a box, and placed it in a closest, in my home. I just didn't feel like digging it out before we left.”

Matthew inquired, “Oh well. But, you do remember the destinations?”

Pedro replied, “Yes. But, I made that list when I was a kid.”

Matthew responded, “Well, I am sure there were a few places on that list that we would like to go, even as adults. We are traveling from one imagined reality, to the next. We might as well make the most of it.”

Pedro thought about what his friend said for a few seconds. He then shrugged, as he said, “Yes. You're right.”

Matthew commented, “Now, that we have that matter settled. I would like to know exactly where, when, and what reality, we are at?” He looked around for a few seconds, before he turned back to look at Pedro.

When Pedro saw Matthew turn back towards him, he said, “Well, when I used the device, I thought of coming to a modern New York City... Well, modern for me. At night, near a diner.”

Matthew stated, “That is find. So, we are at least in New York, at night. As I suggested. That is good. “

Pedro mentioned, “And I am armed. So, there is nothing to worry about.”

Matthew said, “Yes. I am comforted by that thought. And given I do not see anyone around, I would guess it is at least after midnight.”

Pedro thought, 'I was thinking of coming in the evening after dark. But, I guess we might be here after midnight. Taking into account time zones, it is always evening, after dark, somewhere. And New Orleans is an hour behind New York City. And I really wasn't thinking about which time zone, as to the general time we were going to. Still, there is no way to tell, without looking at a clock.'

Pedro continued his thoughts, with mild amusement, 'Still, I find this deserted street to be humorous.'

Pedro commented, in an amused tone of voice, “So, the city that never sleeps, actually does?”

Matthew suggested, “Well, it seems most of them do. Still, we need to know the date. Maybe we should just take a page from the Back To the Future movies and find a discard newspaper.”

Pedro agreed, “That is not a bad idea.” Pedro looked around, and he saw a full trash bin about ten feet from them, down the sidewalk, by the street. And there was a newspaper neatly folded on top of the garage.

Pedro start walking towards the trash bin, as he said, “There.”

Matthew followed him, and he soon realized where his friend was heading.

A few seconds later, when they reached the trash bin, they came to a stop.

Pedro picked up the newspaper, which he saw the top half of the front page was showing. As he did so, he noticed that there was only paper directly under the newspaper.

Pedro thought, 'Good. There is no food on it. So, this newspaper is not that dirty. Now, to find out the date.'

Pedro turned around to face Matthew, as he looked at the top byline of the newspaper.

Pedro continued to look at the newspaper, as he stated, “The date says, Tuesday, October thirteenth, two thousand nine.”

Matthew commented, “Well, since it is likely after midnight, it likely means it is Wednesday the fourteenth. Unless, it is a few days after the date of on the paper.”

Pedro continued looked at the newspaper, as he stated, “Given this was on top of the garbage, I doubt that this newspaper more than a day old.”

Matthew responded, “Okay, we have the date. So, we now need to know the reality. No offense. But, given your lack of direction at reality traveling, we could easily be in your reality, with it being a few years in your past.”

Pedro replied, “None taken.” He thought, 'Matthew does have a point here. Still, I get the feeling he doesn't want to be the one in the driver's seat of this little adventures.'

Pedro then look up from the newspaper around. He noticed, in the distant skyline, as he saw to large identical towering buildings. He look over at Matthew, as he stated, “No. The twin towers are still standing.”

Matthew asked, “The what?”

Pedro answered, “The world trade center towers.”

Matthew commented, “So? They are standing in my time, as well.”

Pedro replied, “But, they aren't in my reality.”

Matthew inquired, “What happened?”

Pedro said, “Terrorism. I will tell you later.” He then looked back at the newspaper in his hands. He then flip it to the bottom of the front page, and he eyes slightly widened, as he stated, “Oh hell. I know where we are.”

Matthew inquired, “Where?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he handed Matthew the newspaper.

Matthew then took the newspaper from Pedro's hands, and he began to look at it.

Pedro said, “Read the very bottom of the front page.'

Matthew flip the paper over to read the bottom article on it. He began reading out loud, “Xanatos family donates money to revitalize Central Park... Xanantos?!”

Pedro commented, “Yes. This is the Gargoyles reality. And over a decade since the series ended.”

Matthew looked up at Pedro, as he questioned, “Isn't this one of the few realities that, from Lee's stories. And comments made by the girls. That both Lee and Chang don't want to have anything to do with?

Pedro answered, in a concerned, serious tone of voice, “Yes. And with good reason. I showed you my unedited, english episodes, from my copies of that series.”

Matthew replied, “Yes. You did. That was a pretty good series.”

Pedro stated, “And when it comes to dangerously savvy, badass villains. This place has some of the cream of the crop. More so, than any other series. Including, the Black Lagoon series.”

Matthew let out a deep breath. He then calmly said, “I see your point. But, we are here, already. So, we don't need to leave, just yet. Still, we will have to be careful while we are here.”

Matthew looked back at the newspaper, as he continued reading the article out loud, “David and Fox, along with their teenage son, Alexander, attended a ceremony yesterday, at Belvedere Castle, in Central Park, to celebrate on the start of the revitalize project, for the park. Last May, the Xanatos family, whom are one of the most wealthiest and influential members of New York, offered to match the funds to the city of New York's budget for the project. With the budget being ten million dollars, the Xanatos family grateful donated another ten million to match those funds. The plan to start the revitalization of Central Park will begin either next March, or April. Depending on the weather.”

Matthew looked up from the paper, and towards Pedro, as he commented, “Knowing them. This donations has got to be a ploy, for a grander scheme they are hatching.”

Pedro shrugged, as he said, “Maybe. Maybe not. It probably doesn't really matter. They could have done it just as a tax write off.

Matthew complimented, “That is a good point.”

Matthew then looked back the newspaper, and he noticed a small picture by the article. The picture showed the Xanatos family, with others, at an outdoor ceremony.

Matthew said, “Huh?”

Pedro asked, “What?”

Matthew looked over at Pedro, as he said, “Call me crazy. But, take a closer look at the picture by the article. Specifically, the shorter man in the suit, standing besides the Xanatos family, right behind them, to their left side.” He then handed the newspaper back to Pedro.

Pedro took the newspaper and he quickly looked at the picture, as Matthew commented, “I think Owen went back to being Puck all the time.”

In the picture, Pedro saw that the man standing behind, and to the left side, of the three member Xanatos family, was not Owen Burnett in a business suit, but Puck in a business suit. With Puck's long ears, and loose, long white hair, down his back, being very noticeable in the picture.

Pedro looked up at Matthew, as he said, “So, Puck decided to stop hiding in plain sight, as Owen Burnett. Not bad. Given he knows that everyone, except the Xanatos, the Gargoyles, and his kin, would think he is just an odd looking human man.”

Matthew responded, “Yes. And Puck is just crazy enough to go as himself, in public. But, I thought Oberon's spell prevented him from being Puck, unless it was during teaching, or defending, Alex Xanatos.”

Pedro then recalled what Matthew was talking about. He commented, “That is a good point. Maybe he found a way to break the spell...” He continued in a more concerned tone of voice, “Or, someone else did.” He then tossed the newspaper back onto of the trash bin from which he had pulled it from.

As Pedro looked back at Matthew, Pedro said, “Either way. This just means this place is more dangerous, than we thought. And that is not counting Alex, whom is likely now a teenager, who is well verse in his eduction, martial combat, and magical skills.”

Matthew asked, “That is a good point. So, should we stay here? Or, leave?”

Pedro answered, “Like you said. We should stay. We just have to be careful. You wanted a New York cup of coffee. So, we will do that. Then, we will leave. And since, when we jumped realities, and I also thought of a diner that serves coffee, at this time of night, such a diner should close by.

Matthew replied, “Thanks, Pedro.”

Pedro said, “No problem. Though, not to find the diner.”

They looked around, and Matthew the saw the diner at the corner of the block they were on. With the diner being about fifty feet from them.

Matthew looked back at Pedro, as he said, “I found the diner. It is about fifteen meters from us, on the corner. And I am glad it is on the side of the street. So, we don't have to jaywalk across the street.”

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he replied, “Good point.”

Matthew then turned back around, to take a closer look a the diner, while Pedro did the same thing. They saw the tell tale signs of the diner through the windows of the building, that wrapped around the corner. With the tables being seen on the inside, due to all the lighting.

Matthew continued looking at the diner, as he commented, “From all that lighting inside, I would say the place is open.”

Pedro replied, “I agree. Let us get our cup of coffee and go.”

Matthew complimented, “I couldn't have said that better, myself.”

The two men then walked towards the diner.

Around a minute later, they made it to the front double-doors of the diner.

As they entered the diner, they looked around, and they saw that except for the waitress, the diner was empty. And that the cooking area, and likely cook, was behind a wall, and was separate from the serving area, by a door, behind the counter.

Pedro then noticed the counter in front of them, with stools lining it, was empty. He suggested, “Let's just set at the counter.”

Matthew saw the counter was empty as well. He agreed, “Good idea.”

The two men then walked directly in front of them, to the counter. And they then sat in stools, beside each other, while facing the back wall of the diner. Matthew was to Pedro's right side.

Pedro then saw the analog clock placed above the wall in front of them, with a space between the counter and that wall.

Pedro saw that hands of the clock stated was twelve fifteen.

Pedro said, “You were right. It is passed midnight.”

Matthew looked up at the clock in front of him. As he saw the time, he calmly said, “Yea. I guess I was right.”

Pedro thought, 'Still. This does concern me. Another thought occurred to me. I was thinking right after dark. But, in Lee's stories. These reality devices sometimes worked by sending the person, or people, where, when, and what reality, they needed to be. Like, during the Avalon Tour, which took place in this very reality. If that is the case, then we could be in real trouble.'

Pedro turned to Matthew, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, there is no point in alarming Matthew right now. We came here for a cup of coffee, so we could relax. And thinking about such topics would not make either of us relax.'

A few seconds later, the waitress walked up to stand across the counter from them. The waitress was the middle-aged woman, with a decent figure. She had short brown hair, and dark skin. She also wore a nice waitress uniform.

The woman calmly asked, in english, “So, what will you boys be having?”

Pedro answered, “Coffee. Black.”

Matthew replied, “The same.”

The waitress then turned and walked away, so she could fill their orders.

A few moments later, another man, in a gray long coat, walked into the diner, and he sat a few chairs down from them, at the counter, to Pedro's left side.

From the corner of his left eye, Pedro saw the waitress notice him. She turned around, and stop by the man. The waitress asked, “Finally, off you shift for the night?”

From across the counter, man looked at the woman, as he casually answered, english, “Yea, Loraine.”

Loraine inquired, “So, where is your partner?”

The man said, “She is visiting some friends. She might even be on a date with her long time, steady boyfriend.”

Loraine commented, “I am surprised that is still working out for her.”

The man coyly responded, “Well, it makes her happy. And it makes him happy. So, I have no problems. Still, it makes life interesting.”

Loraine questioned, “Yes. At least it is never boring here. So, what can I get you?”

The man answered, “Let me think about it for a minute. And I will let you know.”

In response, Loraine turned away from Pedro, as she started back to walking to fill Pedro and Matthew's order.

Matthew turned to Pedro, as he asked, “So, what do we do next?”

Pedro looked over at Matthew, as he answered, “I am not sure. What would you like to do?”

Matthew responded, “Have some fun?”

Pedro let out a laugh. He happily replied, “That I can arrange.”

Pedro then noticed Loraine had retrieved what she needed, and she was now returning back to Matthew, and himself. He saw that Loraine holding two empty coffee cups in her left hand, while she was holding a hot pot of coffee, by the grip of the pot, with her right hand.

As Loraine reach them, Pedro heard the doors behind him, open and close.

Loraine then turned face Matthew and Pedro. And instead of setting down the cups, and pouring coffee into the cups, she just stared between and passed the two men, whom were sitting across the counter, from her.

Pedro then saw Loraine’s face turn into a mask of fear, as she dropped the cups and coffee pot.

Loraine had already turned and ran for the back of the diner, through the kitchen door, as Pedro heard the cups and coffee pot shattered on the floor, behind the counter.

Pedro thought, 'Though, this is not good. Clearly someone is behind us.' He then saw Matthew look at him, as he continued his thought, 'And Matthew realizes this, as well.'

Matthew asked, “Shall we see what is going on?”

Pedro looked at Matthew, as he shrugged. He replied, “We might, as well.”

Pedro and Matthew got up from their seats, and stood up, as they looked behind them.

They saw a man in black powerarmor standing five feet away from them.

Pedro and Matthew continued look at the powerarmor.

Pedro and Matthew immediately recognized the helmet style of the powerarmor, as Pedro commented, “So, this guy is wearing an Ironman looking powerarmor.”

Matthew complimented, “It just means this guy has some style. Though, from the body, it looks like some Knight Saber armor is thrown into the body contours.”

Pedro looked more closely at the body of the powerarmor. He saw what Matthew was walking about, as he commented, “I agree. Good eye.”

Pedro thought, 'And this is probably hiding enough weapons in his suit to start a war. We have to be careful around him.'

Matthew replied, “Thanks.”

The man in powerarmor, spoke through his helmet electronic modulated speakers, to mask the man's voice, “Thank you for the compliment.”

Pedro thought, 'Still, being nice to him, might help our situation.' He said, “You're welcome.” He turned to Matthew, as he said, “Still, I certainly hope us not getting coffee is going to turn into a running gag, like in the movie Hudson Hawk.”

Matthew casually replied, “Of course not. We are not that funny.”

Pedro let out a laugh. He agreed, “You're right. Still, that was an underrated movie.”

Matthew responded, “I have to agree. I enjoyed watching it with you. And at least, we are not going to have to pay for the coffee.

Pedro replied, “You're right. No service. No payment. And that is not even mentioning the tip.”

For the next few seconds, the powerarmored man laughed at their comments, through his helmet's electronic modulated speakers.

Pedro and Matthew looked back at the powerarmored man, as Matthew commented, “At least the guy has a sense of humor.”

Pedro nodded once in agreement, as he replied, “True. We have that going for us.”

Matthew asked, “Do think your pistols can help us?”

Pedro deadpanned, “You're kidding? Right?”

Matthew replied, “It didn't hurt to ask.”

By then, the powerarmored man has calmed down enough to stop laughing.

Matthew asked, “So, do you think he is after us?”

Pedro sarcastically questioned, “Who else would he be here for?”

The man to Pedro's right side, whom was sitting at the counter, casually replied, “Well, there is me.”

Matthew, Pedro, and the powerarmored man looked over at the man, whom was now standing, while facing the them.

When Matthew and Pedro looked at the man, they did a double-take.

The man had fair skin, and short red head, which was combed back. He looked to be in his late thirties, to early forties. And he was in great physical shape. He was dressed in black pants, black leather belt, black dress shoes, and dress a white button up shirt, with a green tie around the collar of his shirt. Over his shirt and tie was a black waistcoat. Over his waistcoat and pants was a gray long coat.

And though the voice was different, yet similar to what they knew of him, standing before them was NYPD Detective Matt Bluestone. And while it has been over a decade since he shown in the Gargoyles series, the years had been kind.

Pedro thought, 'Of all the diners in the city, why did he have to walk into this diner... That line would fit right into a noir detective novel. Still, this might be good for us. He does have experience with this sort of thing. If nothing else, he could provide a distraction.'

Pedro shrugged, as he said, “Well yes, you.”

The black ironman turned back to face Pedro and Matthew, as he stated, in an electronic modulated voice, “Now that the pleasantries are over. Whether you like it, or not. Dead, or alive. Your asses are mine.”

Pedro and Matthew turned to look at the powerarmored man, as Matthew asked, “Is he quoting?...”

Pedro answered, “More like paraphrasing. But, yes. It is Robocop. And I going to have to remember that quote... Though, this is not good.”

Matthew commented, “You know there is only one way around this problem.”

Pedro understood the subtext of Matthew's statement, as he replied, “I understand.”

A second later, to the surprise of the powerarmored man, Pedro and Matthew then bolted around around him, with Pedro passing by his right, while Matthew passed by his left.

With both men quickly opening the double-doors to the exit, and running outside, to the powerarmored man's left side.

Matt watched all this, along seeing through the outside windows, with the two men turned to Matt's right, running passed him, down the sidewalk.

Matt thought, 'I don't know what is going on. But, I am going to find out. And those two men are the key.'

Matt then rushed passed the powerarmored man, and outside, as he chased after Pedro and Matthew.

The man in powerarmor was caught off guard by this turn of events. He turned to face the double-doors to the exit, as he thought, with embarrassment, 'I don't believe it. They just ran passed me. If this gets back to Gomez and the others, I will never live it down... And I didn't even bother to ask them for their names.'

The powerarmored man followed the other three men through the doors of the diner, and out, onto the sidewalk.

(_)

Meanwhile, outside, Matthew and Pedro, kept running down the sidewalk, away from the dinner.

As they ran, Matthew asked, “What was that all about? And who is that guy in powerarmor?”

Pedro replied, “I don't know. But, let's get out of here.”

Pedro came to a stop. And a second later, so did Matthew.

Matthew already knew what Pedro was going to do, as he walked closer to Pedro, with him coming to a stop, right beside Pedro's front side.

Meanwhile, Pedro pulled out his reality device, from a pocket.

In the distance, about forty feet away, Matt was rushing towards them, as he loudly ordered, “Hey! Stop you two! I want to know what the hell is going on!”

But, Pedro and Matthew were too shaken by making a powerarmored individual to notice Matt yelling at them.

The two men stood a couple of feet apart, as they looked at each other.

Matthew asked, “So, where are we going?”

Pedro immediately thought of a place, as he stated, “I have a place in mind that person with powerarmor will think twice about.”

Matthew questioned, “It isn't one of the Marvel Comics realities? Or, for that matter, any superhero comicbook reality?”

Pedro coyly said, “No... And it is a more dangerous reality. But, for us, that reality should be safer. And it will be during the daytime. So, we should be fine.”

Matthew thought, 'We don't have time to argue.' He replied, “I don't care just get out of here.”

(_)

At that moment, about seventy feet away, the man in black powerarmor had walked out of the diner, and slowly approached Pedro and Matthew.

The powerarmored man saw what was happening, as he thought, 'They are about to reality jump. If I try to use my fly system to bum-rush them, I could serious harm, or kill them. So, I will catch them in the next reality they go to. Or, the reality after that. There is no rush. Besides, they made me laugh. That earns them points with me. And I think I will enjoy playing with them, for a while.'

(_)

Meanwhile, Matt was about ten feet away from Pedro and Matthew.

Matt ran towards the two men, as he thought, 'I don't know why these two guys stopped. But, I am going to take them down. And then I will get some questions. Also, it seems that powerarmored guy is in no rush. So, I can make that work for me. But, first things first.'

When Matt reached the two men, he tackled them, just before Pedro pushed the red button on the reality button.

The next thing Matthew and Pedro knew, they suddenly found themselves on the ground, with someone on top of them, Matthew yelled, “What the hell?!”

Pedro looked up at the man who was on top of them, and he immediately recognized Matt Bluestone. He thought, 'Oh hell. Matt jumped with us, right before we teleported. With him unintentionally hitching a ride with us. And I am not taking him back there. Still...'

Pedro said, “If you get off of us, and let us stand up, we will talk to you.”

Matt flatly replied, “Fine.”

Matt got off of the two men. And all three of them stood up, with Matthew and Pedro facing Matt, as Matt faced them.

As Pedro and Matthew faced Matt, Pedro was to Matthew's left side. And Pedro put his reality device in the pocket he had pulled it from.

It was then that Matthew got a good look at who had tackled them. He stated, with amusement in his tone of voice, “Boy, did you make a mistake coming at us like that.”

Matt questioned, “What do you mean?”

Matthew suggested, “Look around you.”

Matt took a look around and he realized he was no longer on the sidewalk, at night. But, that he was in moderately large, well lit, moderate dirty, hallway, that was twenty feet across and ten feet high.

Matt did not know the depth of the hallway, because he was standing in front of the end of the hallway, which dead-ended in a large, translucent window. Though, he did not notice anyone, beside the two men with him, within his field of view.

Matt then looked out the window, and what he saw surprised him to his core.

Matt quietly stated, in slight shock at what he saw, he quietly stated, “No way.”

Matt then walked between Pedro and Matthew, as he approached the large window, to get a closer look outside.

Pedro and Matthew did not stop Matt, as he passed by them. And they turned to look at what had caught Matt's attention.

Outside the window, they saw that it was daytime. With sunlight parting through a cityscape, in the distance, around them.

But, this was not a modern cityscape or Pedro and Matt's era. Nor, even the cityscape of Matthew's era. The buildings they saw were super-large skyscrapers, which rose above the cloud lines below them. With the towers reaching even miles higher above the clouds, with the three men have no way to tell how tall the buildings were under the cloud line.

And from where they were standing, they could see they are about half way up in the super-large skyscraper, from the cloud line to the top of the building.

But, that was not all. Between the super-large skyscraper they were in, and the other equally large and tall buildings where several different traffic lanes of hover vehicles.

Each lane was four rows wide, with hover vehicles going in one direction. The direction of the hover vehicles of each hover lane above that lane of traffic, that was used as a point of reference, went ninety degrees clockwise. While, the direction of traffic of each hover lane below they lane that used as a point of reference went ninety degrees counterclockwise.

This gave where traffic, when above or below the other lanes. the illusion of being several crisscrossed spirals, that when up, to nearly the top of the buildings, to all the way down to near where the cloud line was.

Pedro cracked a grin, as he look out at the view. He happily thought, 'I have wanted to come here, since I saw the first movie of the prequel. And this view does not disappoint.'

Matthew continued looking out the window, as he asked, “Do you remember that conversation we had on traveling to places that would be fun to go to?”

Pedro commented, “Yes.”

Matthew said, “Thank you.”

Pedro replied, “You're welcome.” Pedro looked at Matt, and a thought occurred to him. He mentally reflected, 'It is possible we were sent to that time, in after midnight, in the Gargoyle's reality, to pick up Matt. With fate arranging for him to come with us. If that is the case. I will do my best to explain things to him. And walk him into our group. Though, I will keep these thoughts to myself. No one likes to be fates errand boy. And neither do I.'

Meanwhile, Matt was still in slight shock at what he was seeing. He thought, 'Okay. Pull yourself together, Matt. After everything, you, Elisa, Goliath, and the others have been through, you knew that this might happen to you some day. That you might get accidentally sent to some other place, or time. And it looks like I am either on an alien world, or in the distant future.'

Matt turned back around to look at Pedro and Matthew, as he continued his thoughts, 'Either way, I know who brought you here. And they can likely can get you back home, just as quickly. But, first I need to know where, or when, here is.'

Matt asked, in a slightly unnerved tone of voice, “Where are we? Or, when are we?”

Pedro and Matthew turned their attention from the window, back to Matt.

Pedro thought, 'At least he is intelligent enough to ask both the when, and where, questions. And there is no point in hiding the obvious.' He calmly answered, “Welcome to city planet of Coruscant, of the Star Wars reality.”

Matthew then realized something, as he continued to look at Matt, and outside the window behind Matt. He thought, with concern, 'Oh. I was so caught up in the moment, that I did not realize what Pedro meant. Now, I understand, Pedro. This is one of the few places where someone with powerarmor would not immediately come. Because the locals are use to people with powearmor. And some of them can take down those with poweramor. Especially, force users.'

Meanwhile, Matt forced himself to focus, as he calmly asked, “Star Wars? As in the movies?”

Pedro replied, “Yes. We have just traveled across realities, in an instant.”

Matt flatly responded, “Okay. I know about the Phoenix Gate, and that instant time travel is possible. But, jumping to a fiction reality is a stretch, even for someone with my life experiences.”

Pedro stated, “I am sure that is the case. But, since you have accidentally hitched a ride with us, there is much you need to know.”

Matthew said, “Yes. My friend is correct. Welcome to the multiverse. Do not worry. The shock of being in a fictional reality will wear off in a few hours. It did for all of us. But, if you want to having a good freakout. That is completely natural for the situation. None of us will hold any such actions against you.”

Matt calmly replied, “I'll pass.” He looked around, as he inquired, with a bit of curiosity, “So, we are in the Star Wars reality?”

Pedro stated, “Yep. That we are. And I do know who you are. And let's just say, given what you have been through, this is a step up from your usual week. And that is saying something.”

Matt stopped looking around, as he realized, in thought, 'Okay. This is interesting. And he The black haired man claims to know who I am. But, the important thing is, I need to get back home.' Matt turned to look at Pedro and Matthew, as he demanded, “Okay. This has been fun and interesting. But, please take me back home, now.”

Pedro said, “No. I am not going to knowingly set foot in the Gargoyles reality, again.”

Matt replied, “The what?...” He thought, 'Oh, my home reality. I will find out why they call my reality that, in a minute. Right now, I need to know why they won't take me home.' He inquired, “Why not?”

Pedro answered, “Multiple reasons. Beside, that man in black power armor. We can start with David and Fox Xanatos, Oberon and Titania, Demona, Thailog, Sevarius. And that is the short list. That is not even counting the secret organizations, and wildcards of your home reality.”

Matt thought, 'Okay. Those are good reasons. Though, I have a bad feeling that how he knows those reasons, and why he called my reality, the Gargoyles reality, are tied together. And I have to find out why.'

Matt inquired, “Those are good reasons. Though, why do you called my home reality, the Gargoyles reality? For that matter, where did you learn the names of those people?”

Matthew said, “You might want to sit down for this next part.”

Matt stated, “Between my partner and I. We have seen it all. I can handle what you have to say.”

Pedro responded, “No. Detective Matt Bluestone of the NYPD. You think you have seen it all. But, you have not even scratched the surface of what is out here, in the multiverse.”

Matt thought, 'Well, that confirms that these two men do know who I am. And I am further away from home than I thought. This is not good. Still, I have to know.'

Matt flatly respected, “Just tell me.”

Pedro said, “Okay, Mister Bluestone...”

Matt spoke up, “Given the circumstances. Matt, is fine.”

Pedro stated, “Okay, Matt. The reason I know about you and the others, is that you are from a fictional series titled, Gargoyles. It is a cartoon in my reality. A very good cartoon at that.”

Matt was quiet for a few seconds, as he thought, with skepticism, 'A cartoon?... This guy claims that that my reality is a cartoon. Okay. Given all the weird, I can go with my reality being a work of fiction... But, a cartoon... After everything my partner, our friends, and I, have been through...'

Matt said, “But... Okay, I can see my reality as a work of fiction. But, not as a cartoon. My reality can be pretty dark.”

Pedro said, “I know. The Gargoyles series was considered groundbreaking in many respects.”

Matt requested, “Can you prove this?”

Pedro stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Now, I want you know, I do not mean this as insulting, in any way, to your friends. But, this is one of the few things the Gargoyles series covered, that I doubt very few people know about.”

“As I said, the series was groundbreaking. It is one, of a very few series to show a main character getting shot, by a gun, no less. Though, it was the only one I can think of that showed the red blood afterward, with the surgery, and the touch and go, near death situation that a shooting can bring.”

“What I am talking about is the shooting of Detective Elisa Maza. Your partner. Or, former partner.”

Matt spoke up, “I am still her partner. And she is doing fine.”

Pedro went onto say, “Okay. Your partner. And that is nice. Anyway, that is the incident that lead to Captain Maria Chavez assigning you as Elisa's new partner.”

“As you can guess. The title of the episode is called, Deadly Force.”

“What most people in your reality don't know is that Elisa' shooting was not a mob hit. It was an accidental shooting, by Broadway. Whom should have not been holding a gun, until he learned about how to use a gun, properly.”

“And good case of why learning gun safety is an idea. Also, after that, Elisa started keeping her gun in a safe, when she got home, from work.”

Matt thought, 'There are only four people on Earth that know that. Elisa, Broadway, and Goliath. Broadway one time mentioned that event to me, when we get into a discussion on gun safety. And I agreed to keep that secret. None of us would tell anyone that secret, except for someone we trusted. And the fact this man, this stranger clearly knows the details. Do lead support that what he is saying is true. That my reality is a cartoon, titled Gargoyle.'

'And he is right on other points too. Broadway should have not been holding that gun, because he did not know how to use a gun, nor gun safety. And in the aftermath of that shooting, I was assigned as Elisa's partner. And since then, Elisa keeps her gun in a safe, when she comes home.'

'Though, if this is the case, there is one thing I need to do, before I search on a way to get home.'

Matt said, “Okay. I believe you. I would like to see this Gargoyles series.”

Pedro replied, “All in good time.” He thought, 'I am glad he took the news well.'

Matt inquired, “Fine. Still, if you know all that, do you happen to know who was in the powerarmor? And why he was there?”

Matthew shook his head, as Pedro answered, “No. We do not. Nor, are we sure why he was there. Nor, who he was after.” He thought, 'Though, he might be looking for us, over our accidentally stumbling into that weapons depot. Boomers record what they see and hear. And our break in was probably sent to the people that control the boomers. Though, I am not going to say anything until I am sure. And after Matthew and I get to know Matt a little better.'

Matt asked, “Okay. I believe you. So, who are you?”

Matthew stated, “Matthew McCormick. Matthew, is fine. I am a lawyer, of the late twenty-third century. But, I have spent some time on my friends reality, and time, in his home town. And I can safely say, that except for the aliens, the space travel, and the off world colonies, where I am from it is not that much different than your reality and time.”

Matt thought, 'I just have to ask.' He questioned, “Really, Matthew? And where are you from?”

Matthew calmly said, “The Babylon Five reality. To be exact, before I met Pedro, I was living in Mars Dome One, and I was working as a lawyer for Edgar Industries.”

Matt raised an eyebrow, as he thought, 'I wonder if he was working there, after the series ended. Under a very specific man. And the time line would point to him working for that man.'

Matt casually asked, with interest in his tone of voice, “Under CEO Michael Garibaldi?”

Matthew thought, 'He has seen the series. Cool.' He responded, “Yep. I directly worked for the old man, himself. He even personally hired me for my job.”

Matt thought, 'There is no reason he would make up such a lie. And to be personally hired by Garibaldi, says a lot of good things about his character.' He inquired, “Nice. So, what is Garibaldi like?”

Matthew flatly replied, “Mister Garibaldi is a badass, all the way.” He then kept himself from chuckling, as he mentally added, 'Except as a little girl. But, I am not going to mention that, to you, just yet. I will keep that to myself, for now.'

Matt responded, “I will keep that in mind.” He turned to Pedro, as he inquired, “And you? What fictional reality are you from?”

Pedro said, “None that I know of. But, given everything I have seen, and been through, at this point, I do wonder, from time to time, if my reality is a work of fiction. Anyway, I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto, of the eastern coast, island city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. From the early twenty-first century. Pedro, is fine.”

Matt questioned, “A mexican cop?” He thought, 'He could be trouble.'

Pedro answered, “Yes. And I loath bribery.” He thought, with mild disgust, more towards his own people than Matt, 'I hate the reputation that mexican cops are corrupt. And are greedy, to the point of welcoming bribes.'

Matt thought, 'Okay. If that is the case. I might be able to trust him.' He responded, “That is nice. So, how did you two end up here?”

Matthew and Pedro looked at each other. Then, they looked back at Matt, as they deadpanned, in unison, “Long story.”

Matt requested, “I bet. And we have nothing better to do, so why don't you tell me?”

Pedro replied, “Okay. But, to make things easier, we have a few questions for you. The first question is, have you seen the Black Lagoon series?”

Matt answered, “Yes. I have seen the anime, and read the manga. Not a bad action series, about modern day pirates and smugglers.”

Matthew asked, “And the omakes?”

Matt commented, “I would like to know what that the guy was on, when he made those.”

Matthew said, “I will take that as a, yes.”

Pedro stated, “Well Matt. You knowing all that makes my explanations a lot simpler.” He thought, 'I almost might as well use the opportunity to find out what Gargoyle's timeline Matt is from, when the timeline branched at the end of Season Two, after the Hunter's Moon trilogy. Is he a part of the much railed against, Goliath Chronicles? Or, he is from the short, but interesting continuation comic timeline? Or, is he from an alternate timeline?... Oh, I know how to find out.'

Pedro stated, “The next question is. Due to your reality having multiple timelines. I need to know which timeline you are from. And the easiest way to ask that I need to know if Thailog, and the other clones, are still around?”

Matt replied, “Timelines? As in plural?”

Pedro responded, “Yes. And this is a simple question that allows me to have an answer to the timelines issue, without asking you to divulge to much private information you have.”

Matt thought, 'So, there are things that they don't know about us.' He said, “That is understandable. And yes, the clones are still around. Also, except for Thailog, the other clones turned out be decent people. But, when it comes to Thailog, he has been thorn in our sides for a long time.”

Matthew politely requested, “Please, explain?”

Matt responded, “Okay. A few years back, when Thailog took control of a number of very politically powerful secret organizations, for a couple of months. But, my friends and I were able to stop him, without to much trouble.”

Pedro mentally reflect, 'You are not going to tell me exactly which organizations because you likely work for some of them. But, your loyalty to them is more a matter of convenience, where as you are genuinely loyal to you partner and friends.'

'Also, this means that you are from the comic timeline, which is very good. Though, this also means the Time Dancer plot happened to Brooklyn. And even though Brooklyn lost his left eye, he got a wife and kids. So, it worked out for him.'

Pedro stated, “Fine. That answers my questions. To answer your question. And to make a long story short. The characters in the Black Lagoon series, and the characters of a few other series, got their hands on reality traveling technology. And it got messy for a while there.”

Matt thought, 'Given those characters, I bet calling it messy is an understatement.'

Pedro continued, “And when all was said and done, many of them ended up moving to my home reality. To be specific, my home town.”

Matt casually said, “That explains why you are out here.” He thought, 'I would want to live in the same town as a number of them, either.'

Pedro responded, “Yes. And you will have to tell us that story about Thailog, over some beers, some time.”

Matt replied, “Sure.” He tone of voice then turned sarcastic, as he asked, “Still, since I will need to be returned home some time, aren't you going ask me about the date of where I came from?”

Pedro said, “No need. We saw the date on a discarded newspaper. When we left you reality, it was October thirteenth... Well, fourteenth, two thousand nine. Which is a few years in the past, compared to the time I left my home reality.”

Matt thought, 'Yep. Pedro is a cop. And he is a few years in the future, compared to the present time I left, in my reality. Matthew is a few centuries in the future. Still, there is an issue I need to ask them about.'

Matt inquired, “Yes. That is the date. Now, I know you personally refuse to take me home. But, when I find someone to take me home, is there going to be any problems getting me back home, within a reasonable amount of time, since I left. My partner and her friends had a similar experience, and they gone for a number of months.”

Matthew thought, 'I would probably not be able to keep my job, if I was gone for that long.'

Pedro stated, “I know all about the Avalon mystery tour that Elisa, Goliath, Angela, and Bronx, went on.” He mentally reflected, 'Good storyline. But, when those episodes first aired, those that aired the series decided to repeat it, they repeated in the middle of the journey, so for the viewers, that journey felt like it was longer than it actually was in the series.'

'Which is kind of ironic.'

Meanwhile, Matt thought, 'I have to keep in mind that these men probably know some private information about myself and my friends. But, clearly not everything. I just have to find out what they know. And seeing the Gargoyle's series itself would be a good start in answering my questions. Though, it is best that I keep in their good side, for now. And in the meantime, I can find a few answers to questions I have about my friends.'

Matt requested, “I guess you would. Elisa told me some stuff that happened to her, and the others. But, she didn't tell me everything. You wouldn't happen to be willing to fill in the gaps for me.”

Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “Sure. I would be more than happy to. Do you remember when you first met, Elisa? And how she ticked off a list of mythic creatures, and other beings, she did not believe in?

Matt replied, “Yes.”

Pedro casually stated, “On that journey, she met them all, and then some.”

Matt let out a laughed. He then said, “And she knew about the gargoyles, beforehand. Talk about tempting fate.”

Pedro responded, “Exactly. And while I cannot guarantee you will be back five minutes after you left. I think a few weeks to a month is workable. Though, it is possible it might be a little longer.”

Matt said, “I can live with that.” He thought, 'As long as it is shorter than three months. I can probably talk my way into keeping my job.'

Meanwhile, Matthew looked around them, and he noticed a few aliens, looking in their direction. The aliens sitting against a wall, beside each other, several meters away from Matthew, Pedro, and Matt.

Matthew turned back to Matt and Pedro, as he stated, “Guys. I believe we are attracting unwanted attention. I think it is best we continue this conversation somewhere, more private.”

Pedro and Matt turned to look at Matthew, as Pedro complimented, “Good idea.”

Matt said, “I agree. By the way, it sounds like you know the Black Lagoon characters?”

Pedro thought, 'He better not be asking for what I think he is going to ask.' He said, “Yes. We know them. But, we prefer to avoid them.”

Matt replied, “That is understandable.”

Matthew inquired, “Still, why do you ask?”

Pedro thought, with annoyance, 'You really should not have taken that bait, Matthew.'

Matt answered, “There are a few of them I wanted to meet in person.”

Pedro mentally grumbled, 'Yea. He was going to asking what I expected him to ask.'

Matt continued, “Specifically, I wanted to meet, Chang. I found he had good taste in clothing. And he was really good at kicking ass.”

A thought then occurred to Pedro, as he took a closer look at Matt's clothing.

Pedro thought, with mild wonderment, 'Change the colors of the clothing. Replace the dress shoes with loafers, and add the white scarf, and sunglasses, and Matt is wearing the same clothing as Chang, in his male form. And Chang was once a cop, as well.'

'As a character, Matt could have partly inspired the creation of Chang. And it is possible. The Gargoyles series predates the original Black Lagoon manga series by nearly a decade.'

'Though, I am not going to say a word about this to anyone. Doing so will make Matt want to meet Chang more. And if Chang finds out, he might want to get to know Matt more. Which would increase the chance of one of the major league badasses of Matt's home reality, getting a hold of reality traveling technology. That would be very bad... Though, I am sure the Xanatos family would like use it just to make money and have fun. The others would likely do far worse.'

'The one thing that Lee did right, as twisted and evil as it was. That in Book Two of her stories, she showed how dangerous genre savvy badasses, with reality traveling technology, could be.'

'And there is no point in telling Matthew, because he might worry. The rest just don't need to know, because some of them might talk. Though, it is best to humor him. And if the situation does happen. And he meets Chang. I will not stop the meeting. But, I might try to attend, to steer the meeting in a direction that does not lead to more trouble.'

Pedro diplomatically said, “If the opportunity presents itself, we will see what we can do.”

Matt replied, “That is all I ask.”

Matthew commented, “Since we know most of the cast. It needs to be said that there are others in that cast that you might not want to meet.”

Matt questioned, “Such as Revy and Roberta?”

Matthew casually stated, “Well, Revy is a given. But, Roberta is nice enough, as long as you don't piss her off.”

Matt replied, “I will take your word for that.”

Matthew complimented, “Wise move.”

Just then, the three men heard someone say gibberish to Pedro's left side.

Matthew, Pedro, and Matt, turned in the direction of the sounds, to see two alien, humanoid, men, in casual clothing, standing five feet away from them. With the two alien having snuck up on the three humans, while they were talking.

Each of the aliens were holding a blaster pistol, that was pointed at them.

All the three human men chose to remain still.

The alien to Pedro's left side of spoke in alien language that none of the three human men understood.

As Matthew, Pedro, and Matt, continued looking at the two alien men, Matthew stated, “I guess we waited too long to leave.”

Matt commented, “Sometimes that happens.”

Pedro said, “Guys, let me do the talking.”

At Pedro's request, Matthew and Matt suddenly when quiet.

Pedro calmly said, “I apologize. But, we only understand galactic basic.” He thought, 'Which is practically the same as human english. One of the things that Star Trek has over Star Wars, is the Federation has universal translators embedded throughout their buildings, and ships. In contrast, those here only have translator droids. And while one can know a number of language, everyone needs translator droid to understand them all, unless one is force sensitive. But, that is basically cheating.'

The alien to Pedro's right asked, in galactic basic, “What are you doing in our territory?”

Pedro thought, with annoyance, 'Great. We come half way across the multiverse, and we run into gang members. Aliens, yes. But, still gang members. Some things are the same, no matter where one goes.'

Matt thought, 'Great. I just left New York City, and I find myself on an alien world that makes New York City look like a one streetlight town. And now I getting mugged. There is a certain irony to this situation.'

Matthew thought, 'Okay. Coming here may have gotten the powerarmored guy off our back. Though, I am not sure. He could still be tracking us. But, I still really need to talk to Pedro about his choices in travel destinations.'

The alien, on Pedro's left side, again spoke in an alien language, that the three human men did not understand.

Pedro calmly requested, “Pardon me. But, what did he just say?”

The alien to their right flatly stated, “That you all dress strangely. Strange enough to bring to the boss. Your weapons. Now. Slowly.”

Pedro look over at Matt, as he said, “Give them your weapon.”

Matt continued to look at the two aliens, as he thought, 'They have the drop on us. And I am sure they will fire, if we do not do as they say. So, I might, as well.'

Matt nodded once, in response.

Pedro thought, 'I will keep my hold out. Though, I cannot reach for it, quick enough to take down these two. But, if we are heading anywhere, it will be by an elevator. And in such a tight space, we can jump them then, with little risk to ourselves. Also, this has a round in the chamber, with the hammer cock. Though, the hammer safety is on. So, we should be okay. But, I better warn him, to prevent any accidents.'

Pedro used his right hand to slowly reach into his coat. He pulled out his semi-automatic pistol. He then held out his pistol, with his right hand holding the grip below the trigger guard.

Pedro pointed his pistol in a downward direction, as he warned, “Careful. It is loaded, with one in the chamber. Pleaes, do not mass with the safety, nor trigger.”

The alien, to Pedro’s right, commented, in galactic basic, “I was not planning too.” The alien then took a step close to the human men. He used his free hand, which was his left hand, to gently take the pistol from Pedro.

Matthew saw this. He thought, 'Smart move on not giving them your hold out, Pedro. And since you gave them a weapon, I doubt they will check you.'

The alien to their right looked at the pistol in his left hand, while the other alien kept his eyes, and weapon, trained on the three humans.

The alien carefully holding Pedro's pistol, looked at it, as he commented, “I have never seen a weapon like this before... Yes. The boss will want meet you.”

The alien then stuffed the pistol on the right side of his belt, between his belt and pants, right in front of the side holster for his blaster. He then looked up, at he ordered, “Now, the rest of you?”

Pedro stated, “Only the redhead and I are armed. The brown haired man is not armed.”

The alien to their right look at Matthew for a few seconds. He then commented, “Yea. You don't look like a fighter.”

Matthew did not response.

The alien to their right then turned to Matt, as he ordered, “Your weapon. Now.”

Matt slowly reached into his coat, and he pulled out his semi-automatic pistol.

When Pedro saw the pistol, he immediately recognized model, as he thought, 'That is a Smith & Wesson model five nine four six, semi-automatic pistol. The pistol seems to have been blued to have a black coated finish. The pistol fires nine millimeter rounds. And its ammo magazine can hold up to fourteen rounds. I remember seeing in the Gargoyles series, that Matt used a semi-revolver. But, the animation never gave enough detail to see which pistol models he and Elisa used in the Gargoyles series. And this makes sense, given the NYPD does allow the use of that model five nine four six used for their active duty personnel.'

'Though, the one thing I don't like about that weapon is there is no safety lever on the pistol. The decocking level was removed from this model of pistol. Unlike the original model it was based on. Which is the Smith & Wesson model five nine zero six. Even though my Sistema is an older pistol, it still has a hammer safety on it.'

'And it is very possible that Elisa used the same type of blued black, Smith & Wesson model five nine four six, semi-automatic pistol as Matt uses. Both Matt and Elisa's semi-automatic pistols looked the same, in the Gargoyles series. And that lack of a safety feature was possibly a major contributing factor to Elisa accidentally getting shot, early in the Gargoyles series.'

'If we end up running with Matt for a while. I may have try to talk him into starting to use a gun that has at least some basic safety features. Though, that is for later. We need to get out of this mess.'

Matt then handed his pistol to the alien.

The alien then put the pistol in the left side of his belt, between the belt and his pants.

The alien to their right then took a step back to stand beside his alien friend.

The alien to the right then motioned the barrel of his blaster to his right, towards a set of elevators that were by the wall.

The alien to their right, ordered, “Head to the lifts. Single file We are taking a little trip.”

Pedro walked first, with Matthew behind him, and Matt pulling up the rear.

The two aliens walked side by side, right behind the human men.

When they came within ten feet of the elevators, the door to the closest elevator opened up

Pedro thought, 'Nice trick. Though, I doubt the doors are set to open for just anyone.'

The alien speaking basic ordered, “All of you to the right side of the elevator.”

The three humans walked into the elevator, they then filed into the right side of the small room.

When the came to a stop, the three men turned around to face the left side of the elevator.

The two aliens kept their blaster pistols trained on the three men, and they slowly entered the elevator, and back away to the left wall of the elevator bay. As the two aliens came to a stop, as they stood side by side.

The three humans and the two aliens look at each other, as a second later, the elevator doors closed.

The occupants of the elevator then felt elevator begin to move.

Matthew calmly inquired, “Where are we going?”

The alien that spoke basic answered, “To a lower level. Also, be aware that this room has hidden cameras, and microphones, that are tied to the same security room that is controlling this lift. Trying anything against us would be a bad idea on your part. A number of the levels this lift can go to are not very pleasant places to visit.”

Pedro thought, 'Well, that kills the plan on rushing them.'

Matt asked, “How long until we reach your destination?”

The alien answered, “The level we are heading to is not to far down. A few minutes. And while we are pointing blasters at you, you don't want to meet some of the horrors on the lower sections of the planet. So please, behave.”

Matt replied, “We will take your word on that.”

Everyone in the elevator remained silent for around the five minutes, until they all felt the elevator come to a stop.

The doors to the elevator then opened.

The alien whom spoke basic said, “The organization we are with controls this section. Be aware. We have cameras, and men, everywhere. If you try anything, a sniper can kill from a distance.”

Pedro thought, 'That is not a bad set up. And this is clearly not just a gang. They guys are with an organized crime group. Who? I do not know. Likely either the Hutts, or member of the Black Sun. I am not sure which. And I have played the Dark Forces game series enough to know these type of snipers are no joke. They can hit just about anything they want to, at a distance. And even Jedi have problems deflecting, and avoiding, their shots.'

The alien continued, “Now, since we control this area, we like to maintain a certain amount of decorum. We are going to holster our weapons, and you are going to follow me to meet our boss. My friend will be following behind you three.”

“It is clear you are not from this planet. And you are new here. If that was not the case, then you would not have entered our territory. So, if you try something, we both know there is no escape for you. But, on the other hand, if you play your cards right, our boss might take a liking to you. And you might walk away with a few extra credits in your pockets.”

“Do you understand?”

Matthew commented, with a bit of intrigue in his tone of voice, “You make an interesting proposition.”

Matt requested, in a casual tone of voice, “I would like to meet this boss of yours”

Pedro thought, 'Once we get moving, I could try to use my reality device, and escape with Matthew and Matt. But, I want my Sistema back, first. So, I might as well go along with them.'

Pedro shrugged, as he said, “I have no better places to go to, nor be at.”

The alien cracked a grin, as he responded, “Good. Now, a word of advise. Do not make eye contact with those we pass by. We control this area, but there are a few crazies out there that might try something, if they are provoked.”

Pedro replied, “Thank you for the warning.”

Both of the alien men holstered their blaster pistols. Then, the alien that was speaking to them walked first out of the elevator.

Pedro followed behind the alien. With Matthew being Pedro. And Matt behind Matthew.

The other alien then followed behind the three humans.

A few seconds after the second alien exited the elevator, the doors to the elevator closed.

As Pedro, and the others, followed the lead alien, Pedro noticed that the hallway they were not in was much smaller than the hallway they were in beforehand. And this hallway was much dirtier, and lacked windows. But fortunately, there was lit ceiling lights along the hallway. Though, a few of the lights were out. And he did not see anyone else around them.

After about a minute walking down the hallways, and turning a few corners, they came to the outside of the building, which was an alcove with guardrails.

The ambient illumination was just enough to see around, but not much else.

The alien man then turned right, as they continued walking, with Pedro and the others following behind.

From over the guardrail, to their left, all of them saw that they were heading for a large, open air bridge, that span the distance between the large skyscraper they were on, with the skyscraper beside them.

The bridge was roughly twenty feet across and fifty feet across.

The entrance to the bridge was only about forty feet away from them.

A minute later, as they reached the bridge, and started walking across it, they got a chance to look up into the sky. They saw that they were so far down, below the cloud line, that the buildings and clouds above them, blocked out direct sunlight, and created more of a perpetual twilight, than actual daytime.

The men then turned back to look in front of them.

As they made their way to the other end of the bridge, they saw the alcove of the building they were entering, on the other side of the bridge, was much larger and more open than the alcove from the building they had come from.

Inside the alcove was a sort of market place with, street vendors. A few of the vendors sold various types of food.

For illumination, there was mostly neon style likely in and around the market place, that gave it an eerie, multicolored look, but the lighting did provide plenty of illumination.

As they got closer to the market place, the smell of the food was not that appetizing to Pedro, Matthew, and Matt.

Pedro thought, 'I should have known that alien food was not going to smell that good. I guess that is why no one that I know of, from other realities, ever bring over some alien food to eat. Still, I need to focus on the here and now. This location is like walking down the market place in the movie, Blade Runner. With this place likely just as dangerous, or more so. I am sure that Matthew and Matt also realize this. And this means we will have to be mindful of our surroundings, or we could wind up being killed.'

At the front of the group, the alien man lead them down one of the paths, between vendor shops. And the three humans so found that this path let to even more vendors.

As the men continued to walk, they passed by wide ranged of people, from the raggedy homeless humans and aliens. To well dressed individuals that gave off a presence of being fairly dangerously.

Pedro, Matthew, and Matt were careful to heed the alien's advise, and they not look to closely at the people they passed by.

When they reached the end of the path, they saw the path dead ended into another path that went to ways perpendicular to the path they were on. The alien that was leading them, turn to right, as he continued walking down the next path.

Pedro and the others following him.

Then, after a few more turns, the alien came to a stop in front of an entrance to some sort of shop.

As they came to a stop, three human turned to look at the entrance to the shop. They saw that the entrance itself was an open, curved archway.

There was neon tube lighting around the sides and top of the archway, with a sign in an alien language on the top of the archway, in pink neon tube lights.

As the three human men looked at the sign, Matt casually asked, “Does anyone know what that sign says?”

Matthew answered, “I do. It is in galactic basic. Some style lettering and wording as English. Only the symbols are different. It says, Ziro's Fall. And that is Ziro. Z. I. R. O. Not, zero, as in the number, zero.” He mentally added, 'Though, Ziro's name is likely a play on the number, zero, given how much of a loser he was. The only real skill he had over most other hutts was that he spoke basic. And he could not even turn that to his advantage.'

Matt and Pedro looked at Matthew.

Matthew noticed their stares, as he shrugged. He said, “They had a language course on this place in college. And I needed the extra couple of credits to graduate.”

Pedro rhetorically teased, “And who is the fanboy now?”

Matthew let out a laugh.

Matt inquired, “Who is Ziro?

Pedro though, 'Given we are right beside a could of alien gangsters, we have to keep this vague.'

Pedro answered, “A hutt that died turned the Clone Wars.” He mentally added, 'And this tracked with this being Annie's reality. Cad Bane was from the Clone Wars series. And he was in Lee's stories. And I hope we don't run into him. Because he is nearly on par with Roberta, in the badass department.'

Matt replied, “Oh...”

Matthew pointed out, “This also means that there is a very good chance that the Empire is presently in power.”

Matt deadpanned, in a slightly whinny tone of voice, “Just great. If Vader shows up, I am telling him everything. I'm just along for the ride. To be honest, he cannot be any worse than some of the psychos I have faced in my life. And you know I am telling the truth.”

Pedro turned to Matt, as sighed. He responded, “Yes. You are. But, I wouldn't worry about Vader.”

Pedro thought, 'Since we have been running along the same realities and timelines as in Lee's stories, it is a safe bet that this Star Wars reality is the alternate reality that Annie was kidnapped, between the prequel and original movie trilogies. That is both good and bad.'

'Depending on the situation. The good is that Lee would be correct, in that Palpatine will never find an enforcer equal to Vader. While a few would be more powerful. None could have the proper balance of commanding presence and fear as Vader, while still willing to serve someone else.'

'But, on the flip side, that means Palpatine's rule is more shaky, and weak leadership leads to more ruthless environments for everyone.'

The alien gangster, whom spoke basic, calmly said to them, “Please, stay quiet. You will have plenty of talking to do, after we go inside.”

The three human men turned to the alien, as they went silent.

The alien that has spoken to them then turned, walking inside in the archway entrance.

Pedro, Matthew, Matt, and the other alien with them, followed the first alien into the building.

They entered a lobby with two large alien bouncers standing in front of them, to the side of an open door that lead deeper into the building.

The alien in front stop in front of the guards. He then said something in an alien language.

The alien turned around, to face the three human men, as he said, in basic, “Come.” After which, he continued pass the door, that the two large aliens were guarding.

Pedro, Matthew, Matt, and the alien behind them, followed.

The men saw that the doorway lead into a short hallway, which exited into a large room.

As Pedro looked around the room, he quickly realized, in thought, 'This is a nightclub.'

Matthew and Matt also had similar revelations. Though, all three men kept their thoughts to themselves.

As they continued to follow the alien man into the room, they saw there was square dance floor in the center of the room, with tables and chairs set around the dance floor. Also, there were other doors along the walls, that lead other parts of the nightclub. And there were large blue curtains, that hid an alcove on the other side of the dance floor.

The alien man then lead them onto the dance floor.

As Pedro continued to look around, he noticed, the lighting on the dance floor was will lit, but the lighting at the tables around the dance floor were dark. And the music playing in the background was a soft melody. And that there are only a few customers at the tables, and no one was on the dance floor.

Pedro thought, 'Well, it is daytime outside. So, we must have come on an off hour.'

Pedro then became aware of the armed guards, standing against the walls of the room. The guards were various types of humanoid aliens. Most were men, though a few were women. They were wearing what passed for casual clothing for their species.

Pedro thought, 'They have quite a few guards here. But, that is fully justified, if their criminal boss is here. I have my hold out pistol. But, with only five bullets. Our odds are not good. It is best to see if we can talk our way out of this problem.'

When the reached the center of the dance floor, the alien gangster in front of them, turned around. He the said, “Stop.”

Pedro walked to the left, as Matthew came up behind him, and Matt came to a stop to Matthew's right side. With all three human men standing side by side.

The alien then turned back around, and headed to the left side of the wall in front of Pedro, Matthew, and Matt, by the right corner of the blue curtains.

The other alien man that had been with them, walked around them, to their left, with the alien coming to a stop on the left corner of the blue curtains.

Both men turned around to face Pedro, Matthew, and Matt.

Something then occurred to Pedro, as he tapped his right foot onto the floor beneath him. He felt that the floor was solid.

Pedro happily thought, 'Good. No trapdoor beneath us, that leads to a rancor pit.'

Suddenly, in front of them, they heard a robotic voice say, in basic, “I present to you. Jiro the Hutt.”

The curtains them paired open from the sides to reveal a large hutt alien lying on a bed of cushions, on his left side, while facing them.

There was droid standing a few feet to the right of the large head of the hutt. The droid looked similar to translator droid C3-PO. Only this droid was painted black.

Pedro thought, with mild annoyance, 'Great. We are going to have to deal with a hutt. A member of a species that are basically, giant, arrogance, lazy, slugs, with arms.'

'There are only a handful of hutts I would actually respect, because they do something. Most hutts prefer other people to do the work, including slavery. While they reap all the profits, and other rewards.'

'Along with this, only few of hutts, actually believe in being physically healthy. The rest believe that becoming fat and physically weak is a sign of success.'

'And the worst part about hutts is that they are hermaphrodites. They don't need to mate with others to have children. But, that doesn't stop them from doing so. And if one hutt survives, their species will survive.'

'Take all that into account. I would rather talk to a Ferengi, of a Star Trek reality. At least, most of them work for a living. Even the Grand Nagus was known to personally work on business matters across the Alpha Quadrant.'

'And as corrupt as they are, the Ferengi live by codes that are their laws. As twisted as the Rules of Acquisition were. Until Grand Nagus Rom got a hold of them. Though, they still abide by that set of rules.'

'On the other hand, the hutts prefer to play fast and loose with the sets of rules they live by. And that is one of the main reasons I cannot stand them. Because more of them have no honor.'

The hutt spoke, in huttese, as his droid translated for him, “I am Jiro the Hutt. I have already been informed of your presence. And this is my territory, on Coruscant.”

Pedro thought, 'It seems that droid is translating Jiro. Word for word. That is good. I don't like pontification from translators.'

Pedro chose his words carefully, as he said, “We did not mean to intrude.”

Jiro spoke, as the droid translated, “Of course not. Still, why are did you scuff my dance floor? I heard you tapping on my floor. Having that floor polished every morning is not cheap.”

Pedro quickly responded, “I apologize. I was just making sure there was not a trap door beneath us.”

Matthew thought, 'Yea. I wondered about that too.'

Matt thought, 'Pedro clearly seems to know what he is doing. So, I will let him do the talking.'

Jiro chuckled a little. He then said, with the droid translating, “Ah. So, you have heard of Jabba?”

Pedro calmly replied, “Where we come from, everyone had heard of Jabba the Hutt.”

Jiro inquired, as his droid translated, “Interesting. So, who are you?”

Pedro coyly replied, “We are travelers.”

Jiro retorted, with his droid translating, “But, from where? The nearest spaceport is a hundred kilometers from here. Yet, no one saw you enter the level that you were found on. And your dress, and mannerisms, are very odd.”

Pedro thought, 'Oh hell. Why not? You cannot give such a loaded question, in this situation. In this reality. To this type of person. Without the answer being...'

Pedro answered, with a straight face, “We are from a galaxy far, far away.”

It took all of Matthew and Matt's self control to not show any outward signs of their desire to laugh at Pedro's comment.

Jiro replied, as his droid translated, “So, you claim to be from beyond the galactic rim?”

Pedro said, “I know it is a tall claim.”

Jiro agreed, as the droid translated for him, “That it is.”

Pedro thought, 'I need to ask this question, while I still have the chance.' He asked, “Please, pardon me. But, I do have one question, for you. A small one. What is the galactic date?”

Jiro answered, with his droid translating, “Because you asked politely, I will answer you. Though, I have a feeling that if I told you the exact date, it would mean little to you. Because, the calenders kept getting changed. First, when Emperor Palpatine took power. And now, with the change over to next person that took charge. Though, to answer your question. From that galactic standard calender, it has been two years since the reign of Grand Admiral Thrawn began.”

Pedro replied, “Thank you. That answers my question.” He though, 'Yes. The has to be Annie's home reality. And it is good thing that Palpatine is out of power. But, I wonder what happened to get him kicked out? Maybe Annie came back to do the job, and then left again. That would be just like me. If I see her again, I might ask her. Not that I am complaining. When is comes to leadership, Thrawn, while pragmatic, is one of the best leaders in all of the Star Wars timelines.'

'Still, this is not the time and place to ask anymore questions.'

The alien whom had taken Pedro and Matt's pistols spoke up turned towards Jiro, as he spoke in basic, “We took these off of them.”

The alien then pulled one of the pistols from his belt. He held it up from everyone to see, and he then gently set it on the cushion in front of Jiro's torso and head. And he then pulled out the other pistol, held it up, and then set it down beside the first pistol.

(_)

In the left back side of the nightclub, in the shadows of the room, a man in cyan colored armor and helmet, was sitting in a chair, at a table, with his back to the wall. As each of the two semi-automatic pistols were held up, he immediately recognized what type of weapons they were. And he also recalled where the weapons came from.

And while the man was there for a possible job, this turn of events peaked his interest.

But, the man did not immediately react, as he listened in on the conversation, while he took a close look at the three strangely dress men standing in the center of the dance floor.

(_)

By the dance floor, Jiro looked at his subordinate, as he stated, while his droid translated, “Thank you.”

The alien gangster nodded once towards Jiro. He then turned around and when back to where he was standing, by the right corner of the blue curtains. When the alien man came to a stop, he turned around to face the three human men that were standing in the middle of the dance floor.

Jiro looked down at the pistols, as he commented, while he droid translated, “These are strange weapons. I have never before seen anything like them.”

Pedro cautioned, “They are what you would call slug throwers. And they are loaded. Do not press the triggers on them. They will go off.”

Jiro looked over at Pedro, as he responded, while his droid translated, “I appreciate your concern. Now, you say you are travelers. You are dressed in strange clothing, and you carry strange weapons. Could you be traveling by teleportation technology?”

While Matt, Matthew, and Pedro knew not to openly react to the question, Matthew thought, 'Oh hell.'

Meanwhile, Matt thought, 'This is not good.'

And Pedro thought, 'We have to play this very carefully, or we are all dead. Or worse.'

Jiro continued, as his droid translated, “There have been rumors, for years now, of those that come and go in the blink of an eye. Those that stay to the shadows. First, there were rumors of large blue droids, and brown droids.”

Pedro thought, 'The boomers Chang sent, years ago. This is Annie's home reality.'

Jiro stated, as his droid continued translating, “Then, there are rumors of others, that come and go as they please. With no evidence of how they came visit various worlds, nor how they left. These people are like ghosts, with no records. No traces that they ever existed at all.”

Pedro thought, 'So, there have been other travelers that have come here. And not just the boomers, nor Rock's group. And there were enough of them to start rumors. That is both interesting, and concerning. The only thing worse than the hutts getting their hands on reality tech, would be the Empire getting their hand on reality traveling technology. Especially, if a Sith was involved. We all dodged a bullet when Lee decided to reform Vader, when she used them. Or, we would all be in a whole lot more trouble.'

Jiro went onto say, with his droid translating, “But, all of these rumored individuals have the same things in common. Except for the droids, all of these travelers appear to be human. Or, at least near human. All of these people seem to know a lot, but so little, at the same time. They do not come in ships. They seem to only speak galactic basic, or some languages that even translator droids do not know of.”

Pedro mentally wondered, 'Like spanish, or chinese, or even japanese.'

Jiro continued, as his droid translated, “But, most of them cannot read galactic basic. Those that do, cannot do so very well. And it seems known of them to not know any local languages, besides galactic basic. Many dress strangely, act strangely, and use strange weapons. Such as yours... It is like they read about our cultures from somewhere. But, they have no personal experience with the cultures here.”

Pedro thought, with slightly worry and concern, 'You are closer on the truth than you realize.'

Jiro commented, as his droid translated, own of them to not know any local languages, besides galactic basic. Many dress If the rumors are true. Then, they must all come from somewhere. Maybe not even of this galaxy. Like you claim to be. Maybe not even of this time. Or, this very reality.”

own of them to not know any local languages, besides galactic basic. Many dress And even if it is only a case of teleportation across distances... Well, hyperdrive technology has its limitations. And there has always been rumors of teleportation technology existing. But, only for the select few. Mostly in the hands of alien species that are hidden, and do not wish to communicate with the rest of the galaxy.”

“All this being said, it does not really need to be stated what such technology can do for an entrepreneur, such as myself. Nor, does it need to be said how valuable this technology would be to anyone that is interested in its use.”

Pedro mentally grumbled, 'Of all the hutts we might have run into, why did we end up talking to an intelligent hutt?.. Jiro at least has an idea of how valuable instant, safe, teleportation technology across space would be. Even without the time and reality traveling attached to it. But, he does not realize how much trouble that technology could be for him. He could easily get in over his head...'

'And I know Jiro is playing with us. He is trying to get information from us, without being violent. He wants us to tip our hand in what we know. And then he will strike... And that is a typical tactic for a hutt... And I know a way to counter it... I need to dodge his questioning, without appearing to do so... Hold on, he mentioned Thrawn was in charge now.'

Pedro agreed, “You make several good assumptions. But, there is one person you did not take into account of. Thrawn. Whom we also know about. Thrawn is one of the most brilliant and clever individuals in this galaxy. If he is in charge, then it is safe to say that he has already put in place an intelligence organization that would have made Palpatine, or the Old Republic, envious.”

“As such, this place is to public to discuss such matters.”

Jiro raised eyebrow, as he complimented, while his droid translated, “An astute observation. Also, it is interesting how you mention the former emperor as, Palatine, and not, Emperor Palatine.”

Pedro realized his error, as he thought, 'Oh hell. I made a mistake. And he instantly caught onto it. Though, I might as well go with my error.'

Pedro stated, “He is not my emperor.”

Jiro chuckled a little. He then said, as his droid translated, “A good reply. It has been a while since I had a discussion with someone as sharp as you.”

Pedro replied, “Thank you.”

Jiro commented, as his droid continued translating, “Do not thank me just yet. I plan for us to have a much longer discussion, in private...”

Jiro suddenly trailed off, as he saw whom was walking towards him, from the left, back side of the room.

As the person passed to Pedro's left side, and across the front of the three men, as he headed towards Jiro.

Matt could not believe who he was seeing. He quietly asked, “Is that?...”

Matthew softly answered, “Yes.”

In front of the three human men was the armored, badass bounty hunter, Boba Fett.

Boba Fett was in his full armor and helmet, including the cyan color helmet, and his cyan colored armor plating over white cloth armor. With yellow shoulder pads. There was also a utility belt around his waist that had several pouches, both large and small. Along with this there was the blaster pistol holster on his holster located on the outer right side of his right thigh armor. And, he had on his jet pack, which was strapped to his back.

When Fett reached Jiro's head, he whisper something to the hutt.

Jiro replied something in huttese that the droid did not translated. Jiro then looked around the room, as he stated something else in huttese, that the droid did translate.

Pedro noticed that the second comment by Jiro made some of the guards do a double-take towards their boss.

Pedro thought, 'I don't know what was just said. But, I have a feeling that it was a good thing, for us.'

Boba Fett then carefully picked up the two semi-automatic pistols in front of Jiro. And with a pistol in each hand, he turned around, and he walked over to the three human men standing in the middle of the dance floor.

Due to Pedro doing most of the talking, Fett first walked over to Pedro.

When Fett reached Pedro, he stood in front of the black haired man, as he held up the pistols in his hand.

Pedro gently took his Sistema. from Fett's right hand. As he check to make sure the hammer safety on. Which it was. He then holstered his pistol. Next, he looked at Boba Fett, as he said, “Thank you. The other pistol belongs to the redhead.”

Fett walked over to Matt, and held Matt's pistol in front of him.

Matt took the pistol. As he holstered his pistol, he said, “Thank you.”

Fett turned to face all three men, as he calmly ordered, through the speaker of his blue helmet, “Follow me.”

Fett then walked around Matt, to Matt's right, as the bounty hunter heading for the exit of the nightclub.

Neither Pedro, Matthew, Matt, questioned this turn of events. As they follow a few steps behind Fett, as they all heading for the exit of the building.

A minute later, they exited the nightclub, and into the rundown market place.

Fett then turned to his left, as he continued walking through the market place, with Pedro, Matthew, and Matt, following behind him.

The three human men followed Fett for another minute, until they reached a nearby set of elevators.

Fett then walked to a panel between two sets of elevator doors, and he punched the button to summon one of the elevators to come get them.

A minute later, the four men were inside one of the elevators that Fett had lead them to. After they had entered the elevator, Fett set the elevator to move up, to a higher level of the tower they were in.

As the four men stood in the elevator, none of them spoke. For Pedro, Matthew, and Matt, they were not sure what to say to their unexpected savior.

For Fett, he was too professional to speak, unless he had to.

Around eight minutes later, the elevator came to a stop, and the men got you.

As they exited the elevator, the men saw they were in a large, open area, that is a market place. Only this market place was far more upscale, than the rundown market place they had just left. There was plenty of illumination, from the ceiling lights, for them to see with. Everything was clean, and the shops look professional. Also, this market place was much more open, with a floor space that span a hundred yards in all directions, before the floor met any main walls. And the walls reaching up, to over a hundred feet, before the walls met the ceiling.

In the distance, by about a fifty yards, they see a large holoscreen. The holoscreen was fifty feet high, with a cylindrical, a ten feet wide diameter base. Along with this, the holoscreen projected three dimensional holograms, with backgrounds. From the angle, the holograms were angled to be view from a sitting area, that was near the elevators.

The holoscreens showed new stories, that were stated in basic, and the volume was just loud enough to hear, but low enough to tune out.

And they were no alone. The men saw that there were several humans and aliens in the distance. But, all of them appeared to be nicely dressed. Ranging in looks, genders, ages, and species. A few the people that saw, that walked together, appeared to be members of the same families.

All of these people were going about their daily business, while paying little, or no attention to Pedro, Matthew, Matt, nor Boba Fett.

A few seconds later, Fett came to a stop, near the middle of the open area, with the three men also coming to a stop behind him, with Pedro, Matthew, and Matt, forming a semicircle that faced Boba.

All four men noticed there was no one within earshot of them.

Fett turned around to face the three men. He then stated, in galactic basic, “This is is one of the nicer areas of this tower, that security ignores. Now, my question is. What are you three men, from Earth, doing here?”

This brought the three other men's attention fully back to Fett, as they faced the legendary bounty hunter.

Matt asked, “How you do you know about Earth?...”

Pedro cuts Matt off, by saying, “It is a long story.”

Matthew rolls his eyes on the comment, for a few seconds, before looking at the other three men by him.

Fett commented, through his helmet's speakers, “Yes. I know about Earth. I have even been to an Earth. And your slug throwers and clothing were the tip-off that you were from Earth.”

Pedro said, “Yes. We are from Earth. And thank you for getting us out of there. Still, what did you say to Jiro?”

Fett answered, “I pointed out to Jiro that if you three were such travelers. That the only reason you would be in his territory would be that you were running from someone. Is that correct?”

Pedro admitted, “Yes.”

Fett responded, “I thought as such. And we do not need such trouble here. It would be bad for business. Anyway, I told Jiro that he did not need that amount of heat. And for a hutt, Jiro is intelligent enough to know when to walk away from a bad opportunity.”

Pedro complimented, “We already knew you are a bounty hunter without pier. So, it is no surprised that your deductive skills are top notch, as well.”

Fett responded, “Of course. I find it interesting that you were able to walk into that nightclub with that holdout weapon on your right ankle.”

Matt thought, 'Pedro had a holdout weapon? Though, it is likely a pistol. But, he had it all this time? I admit that is ballsy.'

Pedro replied, “Most people are not as sharp as you.”

Boba happily chuckled a little, through his speakers, at Pedro's comment.

Matt thought, 'I wonder. Fett has been known to pull such stunts before.' He asked, “You are not going to turn us over to the Imperials for a reward?”

A few seconds later, as Fett stopped chuckling, he responded, “No. Doing so would raise too many questions about myself, which I would prefer to remain a mystery, to the locals. That is one of the reasons why I convinced Jiro to let you go. And it would be easier for all of us, if you just left this reality. Immediately.”

Matthew stated, “We get the hint. We will be gone from this reality at the end of this conversation.”

Fett replied, “Good.”

Pedro though, 'Now, is a good time for questions.' He inquired, “So, Thrawn commands the Empire, now?”

Fett answered, “Yes. Vader came back and put a competent man in charge of the galaxy. I am fine with that. And so are many others.”

Matt thought, 'So, Vader put Thrawn in charge. Why? And along with Fett admitting to reality traveling. It sounds like Vader has reality traveled, as well. The mysteries surrounding the two men I am with just continue to grow in number. Though, I will get to the bottom of this. But, I will do so, later. At a more opportune moment. When we are not in trouble... Which might be a while with these two.'

Meanwhile, Pedro thought, “So, this adds support to my theory that Annie returned here, and overthrew Palpatine. And she helped to put Thrawn in charge. If we ever do return to my home town, I might ask Annie for the background details. Because, from her point of view, she probably already did it, due to her dislike of leaving things unfinished. Still, we need to wrap this conversation up, as quickly as possible. So, we can get out of here, before we attract any more unwanted attention.'

Pedro stated, “I know about Thrawn. And I am not surprised that his rule has been so widely accepted. And that answers all my questions.”

Fett said, “Good.”

Matthew then looked over at the holoscreen in the distance. What he saw nearly made his jaw drop in shock. He continuing to look at holoscreen, as he all but shouted, “Oh hell no. Guys. Take a look at the vidscreen right now.”

Pedro, Matt, and Fett looked at the holoscreen in the distance. And Pedro realized what had just startled Matthew.

The holoscreen was silent, as it showed Grand Admiral Thrawn, walking down some white steps, in the outside daylight. Thrawn was wearing his a white Imperial uniform, with white shirt, white pants, black dress shoes, white gloves, yellow tasseled shoulder pads, and metal insignias of his rank, attached to his shirt, on the front, upper, left side of his shirt.

And walking to Thrawn's left side, a step behind him, was a young, human woman. The woman appear to in her mid-twenties. She had fair, almost albino skinned, and she had short, white hair.

Though, only her face and her head were uncovered, the rest of her body was in a very recognizable black armored suit, that looked like a cross between a bondage suit, a biker suit, and body armor.

Following right behind the woman white haired woman was a young girl with fair skin and long white hair that went down to her shoulder blades, and hand loosely behind her back. The young girl wore a modest, white dress and white, flat soled slippers.

As the four men continued to look a the holoscreen, Fett commented, in a casual tone of voice, “Ah. I see you noticed Admiral Thrawn, his consort, and the consort's daughter. And I believe that is a recording, and not a live broadcast.”

Pedro heard what Fett has said, as he thought, with concern, 'Consort... Oh, this is bad on so many levels. But, I need more information, and Fett has answers. Still, it is best to keep from naming names. Unless it is necessary. And I am sure Fett realizes this.'

Pedro asked, “So, those two adults are in a romantic relationship?”

Fett answered, “Yes. I make it a policy to know who the major players are. And who their relationships are. It helps avoid problems in my line of work.”

Pedro replied, “I can understand that.” He mentally added, 'Still, I need more information. And it is best to start with what I don't know.'

Pedro requested, “I know about the two adults. Please, tell me about the consort’s daughter.”

Fett looked at the holoscreen, as he stated, “I do not know much about her. Though, I do know her name is, Rylani.”

Matthew continued looking at the holoscreen, as he questioned, “I don't get it. Why would she named, Rylani?”

Pedro looked a the holoscreen, as he answered, “That was the first name of her biological mother.”

Matthew responded, “Oh... That makes so much sense now. Without question, she always loved her mother. Even though she never met her.”

Pedro replied, “Sadly, yes. That is the case.”

Pedro turned to Fett, as he inquired, “So, is Rylani, Thrawn's daughter, as well?”

Fett noticed Pedro look at him. Fett turned to the mexican cop. He answered, “No. All my sources state that Rylani is the consort's clone.”

Matthew looked over at Fett, as he commented, “Well, she would be narcissistic enough to clone herself. And no offense, but you are proof of what cloning done right, from good genetic stock, can produce quality people.”

Fett said, “I appreciate that.”

Matthew said, “You're welcome. Still, why don't we just jump off the cliff, right now? It will be a lot less painful, that what will likely come from those two getting together.”

Pedro responded, “You might be right. Though, there is nothing we can do about the situation. If we tell the girls, and doing so might spark a major, multiversal war. And we don't want that.”

Matthew agreed, “True.”

Pedro commented, “I can understand the relationship. Though, both of them would see the other as an equal in leadership and intelligence. And knowing those two, Thrawn likely knows the woman's secret identity, and he doesn't care.”

Matt looked over at Pedro and Matthew, as he question, with slight annoyance in his tone of voice, “What am I missing here? I know who Thrawn is. I read the Timothy Zahn, Heir To The Empire trilogy. And I am sure this is an alternate universe. For the obvious fact that Thrawn is alive and in charge. Still, who is the white haired woman?”

Pedro turned to Matt, as he thought, 'I might as well tell him. It will help him convince him to trust me. And if I don't, he will pester me about it, all day. But, I need to know, how much he knows, before I can answer his question.'

Pedro inquired, “Have you scene the Farscape series?”

Matt answered, “Sure. In my line of work, I need inspiration for crazy ideas, to get out of some of the hairy situations I have been in.”

Pedro explained, “Yea. I have been in the same situation. The crew of Moya is really good inspiration for such necessities. Anyway, that white haired woman is a gender bent Scorpius, whom was changed in a young healthy Sebacean woman. It took place post mini-series finale. She is now in charge of the Peacekeepers. For, at least, over a decade. Though, in all fairness, by all the accounts I know of, she has done a wonderful job of ruling the Peacekeepers.”

Matt flatly replied, “Oh crap.” He thought, 'If this is an example of the daily insanity these two have had to deal with, I can understand why they traveling the multiverse, and clearly running away from their problems. And that is saying something, given what I have been through.'

Pedro mentioned, “And it gets worse. Scorpius has been secretly developing a multiversal hyperspace gate technology, based on human designs from the Cowboy Bebop hyperspace gate system. And, last I read, the prototype works, without risk of a gate explosion across the multiverse.”

Matt stated, “And with the Empire's resources, they could start conquering the multiverse.”

Matthew asked, “Any good news about this situation?” He thought, 'Somebody had to ask question.'

Pedro answered, “Yes. Both are very skilled leaders that lean towards diplomacy first. They only shoot if they have to. Both are badass strategists of the first order. Neither will act until they are ready. Their deal may fall through. Their relationship may fizzle. But, given their personalities, I doubt if that happens, they will start a war with each other. They would see no need to. So, we can always hope for the best. Because, there is not a damn thing we can do about this situation.”

Pedro turned to Fett, as he asked, “I don't now how much you know. So, did you get all that?”

Fett responded, “Don't worry. I will keep an eye on the situation. If things get out of hand, I will be contacting Rock.”

Pedro said, “I am glad that you have a way to contact Rock.”

Fett commented, “Rock likes to keep tabs on those that worked for her. I admire her for her thoroughness. It is unfortunate that I do not have a reality device myself. She only left me with a device I can use to contact her with.”

Pedro offered, “Well, you could come with us?”

Though his helmet's speakers, Boba Fett began to laugh for a few seconds.

As Fett calmed down, he commented, in a humorous tone of voice, “You couldn't afford me.”

Pedro shrugged, as he conceded, “You're probably right.”

Fett requested, “But, if you see Rock, tell her that Boba Fett sends his regards.”

Pedro thought, 'Huh?.. Oh...' He inquired, “Sharp as ever.”

Fett replied, in a casual tone of voice, “Thank you.”

Pedro thought, 'It would be best if I replied in a polite, tactful manner.'

Pedro said, “Well, we are kind of heading away from Rock, and her friends. But, if I see Rock, I will tell her that you said, hi.”

Fett responded, “I fully understand. And enjoy your journey, gentlemen.”

Fett turned and walked away from them. The bounty hunter casually made his way further into the market place.

Matt looked over at Pedro and Matthew, as he asked, “What does he mean, Rock? The only Rock I know of is from the Black Lagoon series.”

Matthew stated, “Same Rock.”

Matt inquired, “Oh. Okay then. How does he know Rock? And why did it sound like both he, and your friend here, think Rock is a woman?”

Pedro pulled out his reality device, from a pocket, as he commented, “A story for another time. Now, stand closer to me, so I can take us to some place else.”

Matt and Matthew did so, as Matthew asked, “So, where are you planning to take us, next?”

Pedro said, “I am thinking of a nice, place tropical, during daytime, on a nice day.”

Matthew stated, “As long as it is not, Roanapur.”

Pedro pointed out, in a casual tone of voice, “Come on. Our visit there wasn't that bad.”

Matthew conceded, “True. But, I don't want to push our luck.”

Pedro said, “Point taken.”

Matt questioned, “You have already been to Roanapur?”

Pedro stated, “Yes.”

Matt requested, “Well, since you two clearly seem to know how to get into trouble. And since we have the entire multiverse to travel around, why don't we look for some help?”

Pedro happily responded, “Good idea. We will talk about it, after we jump.”

Pedro then thought of a nice tropical place, during daytime, on a nice day, that was not Roanapur, Thailand, as he pressed the red button on his reality device, and all three men then jumped to another reality.

(_)

Reality, Pedro and Lee's reality. Time, Nighttime, after the day that Revy made her decision on the offer present to her, and when Roberta met Hernan at Hernan's autoshop. Place, The front elevator bay of the Devil's Hotel, De La Plata Podrido. Time, twelve two AM.

Revy entered the front elevator bay of the Devil's Hotel, alone, after leaving the hotel restaurant. The reason she had left was because everyone else had already left for their suites. And Melanie finally called it a night, and began to close the bar at midnight. When only she and Revy were the only ones there.

So, Revy paid her bill, left a tip, and began to head to her room she shared with Rock, several floors up, in the hotel.

At the moment, Melanie was cleaning up.

Due to Revy deciding drink, while keeping her promise to Hernan, she had chosen to not be armed, while being at the hotel restaurant and bar. Though, Revy was still mostly sober.

Just as Revy was reach the panel of between two of the elevator doors, and she about about to punch the button to summon the elevators, she heard a female voice casually say behind her, “Well, hello there, kiddo.”

Revy immediately recognized the voice. She turned around to see blond, heavy set woman, with tan skin as before. The woman was even wearing the same type of black pantsuit as before.

Revy commented, “That is the second time you have snuck up on me.” She mentally added, 'Which given my enhanced sense, is not easy. And I don't have my cutlasses on me. So, I could be in trouble.'

The woman said, “It is a gift. And I see you are unarmed now. Though, don't worry. I have no harmful intentions, no matter what your answer is.”

Revy replied, with a bit of sarcasm in her tone of voice, “That is nice to know.”

The woman inquired, “Now, you have had plenty of time to think. So, have you decided on your decision?”

Revy stated, “Well, after much thought... More thought than I put in most things. I am going to have to decline your offer. My family and friends come first.”

The woman shrugged, as she complimented, in a casual tone of voice, “Oh well. It didn't hurt to try. And that is a good view to have. I respect you for that decision. Also, we all knew it was going to be a tough sell, anyway. So, have a good life, Revy.”

Revy asked, “Who are you, really? And what was your price?”

The woman coyly answered, “I am just a woman that go lost down a very big hole, and I found a much better playground to live in. And the reason I stay with the group I am with is that they let me play with almost all their cool toys.”

The woman cracked a grin, as she continued, “See you around, cowgirl... Oh... And if you see Aeryn, or John... I guess it is, Violin, now. Tell them that Furlow says, hi.”

Furlow then used her right hand to reach into her front right pants pocket, and she used the reality device she had hidden in her pocket, to immediately disappear, by jumping to another reality.

Revy then turned around, and punched the button on the panel to send for an elevator.

Revy felt better about herself, as she thought, 'Well, that went better than I expected. And I don't have to worry about any trouble from her. I get the feeling the Furlow was being honest in saying that she, and her organization will leave me alone. If not, it is just a good excuse to go kick some ass.'

A few seconds later, the sets of elevator doors to Revy's right opened near Revy. And Revy smiled at the thoughts of violence, as she walked into the open elevator.

A few seconds later, the elevator doors closed behind her. With Revy selecting the floor she wished to go to.

After a ride up elevator, and a walk down a hallway, she soon reached the suite that she shared with Rock.

She used her hotel key to unlock the door. And she gently opened the door, removed her key, and pocketed it. She then walked inside, as she carefully closed the door behind her, so as to not disturb, Rock. As she made her way through the nearly dark room, she saw through the ambient light of room that Rock was already asleep on the large bed they shared together.

Revy then quickly stripped down to her panties, and she crawled into bed, beside Rock. And she was soon fast asleep, as well, next to her long time lover.

To be continued.